PIPESIM

Version 2012.4

User Guide
PIPESIM User Guide

Trademarks & Service Marks

Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used to identify the
products and services described herein are either trademarks, trade names or service marks of
Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the property of their respective owners. These marks may
not be copied, imitated or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and other design
elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress of Schlumberger, and may not be
copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. Other company, product, and service names are the properties of their respective
owners.

PIPESIM® is a mark of Schlumberger.

An asterisk (*) is used throughout this document to designate a mark of Schlumberger.

Security Notice

The software described herein is configured to operate with at least the minimum specifications set
out by Schlumberger. You are advised that such minimum specifications are merely
recommendations and not intended to be limiting to configurations that may be used to operate the
software. Similarly, you are advised that the software should be operated in a secure environment
whether such software is operated across a network, on a single system and/or on a plurality of
systems. It is up to you to configure and maintain your networks and/or system(s) in a secure
manner. If you have further questions as to recommendations regarding recommended
specifications or security, please feel free to contact your local Schlumberger representative.
PIPESIM User Guide

Table of Contents
1 User Guide ................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Company profile .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Getting Started .................................................................................................................... 1
Applications ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 Reporting ........................................................................................................................... 22
1.1.4 Extensibility ....................................................................................................................... 22
1.1.5 PIPESIM Hot Keys ............................................................................................................ 22
File Hot Keys ................................................................................................................. 22
Simulation Hot Keys ...................................................................................................... 23
Windows Hot Keys ........................................................................................................ 23
Tools Hot Keys .............................................................................................................. 23
Editing or General Hot Keys .......................................................................................... 23
1.1.6 Main Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 24
1.1.7 Toolbox ............................................................................................................................. 24
Single branch Toolbox ................................................................................................... 25
Network Toolbox ............................................................................................................ 27
1.1.8 Wizard Feature .................................................................................................................. 28
Steps ............................................................................................................................. 28
1.1.9 Find ................................................................................................................................... 29
Finding an object in a network model ............................................................................ 29
1.1.10 PIPESIM Differences from other Simulators ..................................................................... 29
1.1.11 PIPESIM versions ............................................................................................................. 30
PIPESIM Suite (Build26) to PIPESIM Conversion ......................................................... 30
1.2 Building Models ........................................................................................................................... 33
1.2.1 Steps in building a model .................................................................................................. 33
Basic overview ............................................................................................................... 33
Creating a new model .................................................................................................... 33
Adding objects to a model and connecting them ........................................................... 33
Adding data to an object ................................................................................................ 34
Minimum data ................................................................................................................ 34
Duplicating an object ..................................................................................................... 34
Disconnecting objects .................................................................................................... 34
Saving the model ........................................................................................................... 34

i
PIPESIM User Guide

1.2.2 Network Models ................................................................................................................ 35

Creating a network model .............................................................................................. 35
Network Operations ....................................................................................................... 35
Source ........................................................................................................................... 35
Sink ................................................................................................................................ 36
Branch ........................................................................................................................... 37
Network Separator ......................................................................................................... 38
Production Well ............................................................................................................. 38
Injection Well ................................................................................................................. 39
Well Curves ................................................................................................................... 40
Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................... 41
Network Constraints ...................................................................................................... 42
Network Estimates ......................................................................................................... 42
Optimizing PIPESIM Network Simulation Performance ................................................ 43
1.2.3 Single Branch Models ....................................................................................................... 50
Well Performance Analysis Overview ............................................................................ 50
Pipeline tools ................................................................................................................. 89
Source, Sink and Boundary Conditions ....................................................................... 116
1.3 Flow Correlations ...................................................................................................................... 118
1.3.1 Selecting a flow correlation ............................................................................................. 118
Source ......................................................................................................................... 118
Correlation ................................................................................................................... 119
Options Control ............................................................................................................ 119
1.3.2 Defining User Flow Correlations ..................................................................................... 119
Tuning flow correlations ............................................................................................... 119
Data matching ............................................................................................................. 119
Flow Correlation comparison ....................................................................................... 120
Suggested correlations ................................................................................................ 120
1.3.3 Flow Regime Number and Flow Pattern ......................................................................... 121
1.3.4 Configuration File for user specified flow correlations ..................................................... 123
1.4 Fluid modeling ........................................................................................................................... 125
1.4.1 Creating or Editing Fluid Models ..................................................................................... 125
1.4.2 Modeling systems ........................................................................................................... 126
Water Systems ............................................................................................................ 126
Gas Condensate Systems ........................................................................................... 127
Dry Gas Systems ......................................................................................................... 127
1.4.3 Managing Multiple Fluid Models ....................................................................................... 0
Precedence of Fluids when Multiple Fluids Defined .................................................... 130
Local Fluid Data ........................................................................................................... 131
1.4.4 Ensuring consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model ............... 132

ii
PIPESIM User Guide

1.4.5 Black Oil Fluid Modeling .................................................................................................. 132

Introduction .................................................................................................................. 132
Black Oil Data Sets ...................................................................................................... 133
Black Oil Options ......................................................................................................... 134
Calibrate a Fluid to match lab data .............................................................................. 134
Bubble point calibration data ....................................................................................... 135
Gas Phase Contaminants ............................................................................................ 138
Black Oil Thermal Data ................................................................................................ 138
1.4.6 Compositional Fluid Modeling ......................................................................................... 139
Compositional Template .............................................................................................. 139
Specifying the Composition ......................................................................................... 147
Compositional using MFL file ...................................................................................... 152
Multiflash in the Compositional Fluid mode (native) vs. Multiflash MFL files ............... 125
PVT Files ..................................................................................................................... 156
Solids Modeling ........................................................................................................... 160
Compositional Flashing ............................................................................................... 163
Stock tank Conditions .................................................................................................. 165
Steam .......................................................................................................................... 165
1.4.7 Converting Black Oil Models into Compositional Models using Multiflash for PIPESIM* 167
1.5 Options ....................................................................................................................................... 169
1.5.1 Common Options ............................................................................................................ 169
Project Data ................................................................................................................. 169
Units ............................................................................................................................ 169
Heat Transfer Options ................................................................................................. 170
Engine Options ............................................................................................................ 171
Output Options ............................................................................................................ 172
Erosion and Corrosion Options ................................................................................... 175
Engine Preferences ..................................................................................................... 177
Parallelized Network Solver ......................................................................................... 177
1.5.2 Network Options .............................................................................................................. 179
Network Iterations ........................................................................................................ 179
Fluid Models ................................................................................................................ 180
1.5.3 View Options ................................................................................................................... 181
View Properties tab ..................................................................................................... 182
Objects tab .................................................................................................................. 182
General Tab ................................................................................................................. 183
Viewing a large model ................................................................................................. 183
Viewing flowline data ................................................................................................... 184
1.6 Database ..................................................................................................................................... 184

iii
PIPESIM User Guide

1.6.1 New ESP/Pump/Compressor Curve ............................................................................... 184

ESP ............................................................................................................................. 184
Generic Pump .............................................................................................................. 184
Compressor/Expander ................................................................................................. 185
New Reciprocating Compressor Curve ....................................................................... 185
User Curves ................................................................................................................. 186
Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP) Selection .......................................................... 187
1.6.2 New PCP Curve .............................................................................................................. 189
Creating a New Curve ................................................................................................. 190
Selecting a PCP from the Catalog ............................................................................... 190
Standard PCP Curves ................................................................................................. 190
Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Selection .................................................................. 191
1.6.3 Gas Lift Valve List ........................................................................................................... 192
1.6.4 Flow Control Valves ........................................................................................................ 193
How to add an FCV to a completion ............................................................................ 193
1.7 Operations .................................................................................................................................. 194
1.7.1 Common Operations ....................................................................................................... 194
Check model ................................................................................................................ 194
Run Model ................................................................................................................... 194
Abort Run .................................................................................................................... 195
Terminate Run ............................................................................................................. 195
1.7.2 Single Branch .................................................................................................................. 195
System Analysis .......................................................................................................... 195
Pressure/Temperature profile ...................................................................................... 196
Flow correlation comparison ........................................................................................ 197
Data matching ............................................................................................................. 197
Nodal Analysis ............................................................................................................. 199
Horizontal length .......................................................................................................... 201
Reservoir tables ........................................................................................................... 201
Well Performance Curves ............................................................................................ 203
Gas Lift rate vs Casing head pressure ........................................................................ 203
Artificial Lift System Performance curves .................................................................... 204
Wax Deposition ........................................................................................................... 205
Sensitivity variables ..................................................................................................... 210
User variable ............................................................................................................... 211
1.7.3 Network Operations ........................................................................................................ 211
Restart Model .............................................................................................................. 211
Well Optimization ......................................................................................................... 212
1.8 Artificial Lift analysis ................................................................................................................. 212
1.8.1 How to create artificial lift performance curves ............................................................... 213

iv
PIPESIM User Guide

1.8.2 General Gas Lift .............................................................................................................. 213

Gas Lift Operations - Deepest Injection Point ............................................................. 214
Gas Lift Operations - Bracketing ................................................................................. 215
Gas Lift Operations - Lift Gas Response Curves ........................................................ 216
Gas Lift Design ............................................................................................................ 217
Gas Lift Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 229
Gas Lift Theoretical background .................................................................................. 231
Gas lift instability .......................................................................................................... 231
Annular Gas Pressure Design Method ........................................................................ 233
1.8.3 Electrical submersible pumps (ESP) ............................................................................... 234
General ........................................................................................................................ 234
ESP system components: motor ................................................................................. 234
ESP system components: pumps ................................................................................ 235
1.8.4 Rod Pump Module .......................................................................................................... 238
About the Rod Pump Module ...................................................................................... 238
Getting Started ............................................................................................................ 239
RP Operation Menu ..................................................................................................... 239
Components and Options ............................................................................................ 246
Rod Pump Design ....................................................................................................... 247
Selection of Design Methods ....................................................................................... 248
Rod Pump Diagnostics ................................................................................................ 249
Operations ................................................................................................................... 249
Rod Pump Database Configuration ............................................................................. 249
Open Project ................................................................................................................ 249
Basis Input Data in PIPESIM ....................................................................................... 249
RP Application from PIPESIM Drop-down Menu ......................................................... 249
Optimization Design .................................................................................................... 250
Operation Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 251
Database ..................................................................................................................... 251
1.9 Reports ....................................................................................................................................... 252
1.9.1 Plotting ............................................................................................................................ 252
Single branch plots ...................................................................................................... 252
Network plots ............................................................................................................... 252
PsPlot .......................................................................................................................... 252
1.9.2 Report Tool Details ......................................................................................................... 113
1.9.3 Network Report Tool ....................................................................................................... 258
Exporting to Excel ........................................................................................................ 260
1.10 Expert Mode ............................................................................................................................... 260
1.10.1 Expert Mode .................................................................................................................... 260
Calculation engine ....................................................................................................... 261
Network models ........................................................................................................... 261
Single branch models .................................................................................................. 261
1.10.2 How to work in Expert mode ........................................................................................... 261
1.10.3 Batch mode ..................................................................................................................... 261
How to batch run a number of models, using Expert Mode ......................................... 262

v
PIPESIM User Guide

1.10.4 Run Multiple Models ........................................................................................................ 262

1.10.5 Expert Data Entry ............................................................................................................ 262

2 Tutorials ................................................................................................................... 264

2.1 Condensate Pipeline Tutorial ................................................................................................... 265
2.1.1 Flow Assurance Considerations for Subsea Tieback Design ......................................... 266
Task 1: Developing a Compositional PVT Model ........................................................ 266
Task 2: Constructing the Model ................................................................................... 268
Task 3: Sizing the Subsea Tieback ............................................................................. 270
2.1.2 Hydrates .......................................................................................................................... 271
Task 4: Selecting Tieback Insulation Thickness .......................................................... 273
Task 5: Determining the Methanol Requirement ......................................................... 273
2.1.3 Severe Riser Slugging .................................................................................................... 274
Task 6: Screening for Severe Riser Slugging .............................................................. 276
2.1.4 Slug Catcher Sizing ......................................................................................................... 276
Task 7: Sizing a Slug Catcher ..................................................................................... 281
2.2 Oil Well Performance Analysis Tutorial ..................................................................................... 43
2.2.1 NODAL Analysis ............................................................................................................... 43
Task 1: Building the Well Model .................................................................................. 283
Task 2: Performing NODAL Analysis ............................................................................ 50
Task 3: Performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile ................................................... 287
2.2.2 Fluid Calibration .............................................................................................................. 288
Task 4: Calibrating PVT Data ...................................................................................... 290
2.2.3 Pressure/Temperature Matching ..................................................................................... 293
Task 5: Evaluating Gas Lift Performance .................................................................... 294
Task 6: Working with Multiple Completions ................................................................. 295
2.2.4 Flow Control Valve .......................................................................................................... 298
Task 7: Modeling a Flow Control Valve ....................................................................... 300
2.3 Gas Well Performance Analysis Tutorial ................................................................................. 300
2.3.1 Compositional Fluid Modeling ......................................................................................... 301
Task 1: Creating a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well .................................... 305
2.3.2 Gas Well Deliverability .................................................................................................... 308
2.3.3 Task 2: Calculating Gas Well Deliverability ..................................................................... 308
Task 3: Calibrating the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data ................................ 311
2.3.4 Erosion Prediction ........................................................................................................... 312
Task 4: Selecting a Tubing Size .................................................................................. 313
2.3.5 Choke Modeling .............................................................................................................. 315
Task 5: Modeling a Flowline and Choke ...................................................................... 316
Task 6: Predicting Future Production Rates ................................................................ 318
2.3.6 Liquid Loading ................................................................................................................. 318
Task 7: Determining a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading .............................. 320
2.4 Looped Gas Gathering Network Case Study .......................................................................... 320
2.4.1 Model a Gathering Network ............................................................................................ 320
2.4.2 Task 1: Building a Model of a Network ............................................................................ 321

vi
PIPESIM User Guide

2.4.3 Task 2: Performing a Network Simulation ....................................................................... 327

2.5 Field Data Matching Tutorial ..................................................................................................... 330
2.5.1 Measured Data ................................................................................................................ 331
2.5.2 Model Setup .................................................................................................................... 332
2.5.3 Task 1. IPR matching ...................................................................................................... 332
2.5.4 Task 2. Optimizing Flow Correlation & Heat Transfer Coefficient ................................... 332
Load Measured Data ................................................................................................... 333
Setup Optimizer Options ............................................................................................. 333
Select flow correlation parameters and U factor .......................................................... 334
2.5.5 Task 3. Validate Match .................................................................................................... 334
2.5.6 Task 4. Determine Choke Settings ................................................................................. 335
2.6 Liquid Loading Analysis Tutorial ............................................................................................. 335
2.6.1 Task 1. Set up the Liquid Loading Model ........................................................................ 336
2.6.2 Task 2. Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM ....................................................... 336
2.6.3 Task 3. Analyze Well for Liquid Loading ......................................................................... 336
2.6.4 Task 4. Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading ....................................... 337
2.7 Ramey Heat Transfer Model Tutorial ....................................................................................... 337
2.7.1 Task 1. Define Variable Wellbore Configuration ............................................................. 338
2.7.2 Task 2. Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Common Properties ............................................. 338
2.7.3 Task 3. Set up Variable Heat Transfer Data for the Wellbore ......................................... 339
2.8 Pipe Inline Heating ..................................................................................................................... 342
2.8.1 Tutorial Data .................................................................................................................... 342
2.8.2 Task 1: Build a Representative PIPESIM Model ............................................................. 343
2.8.3 Task 2: Screen for Hydrate Formation ............................................................................ 347
2.8.4 Task 3: Prevent Hydrate Formation through Inline Heating ............................................ 350
2.8.5 Task 4: Sensitize ILH Keywords ..................................................................................... 353

3 Support and Contact Information .......................................................................... 357

3.1 Support ....................................................................................................................................... 357
3.1.1 SIS web support .............................................................................................................. 357
3.1.2 On-site support ................................................................................................................ 357
3.1.3 SIS Education ................................................................................................................. 357

4 Technical Description ............................................................................................. 358

4.1 Flow Models ............................................................................................................................... 358
4.1.1 Flow regimes ................................................................................................................... 358
Flow regimes classification for vertical two phase flow ............................................... 358
Flow regimes classification for horizontal two phase flow ........................................... 359

vii
PIPESIM User Guide

4.1.2 Horizontal multiphase flow correlations ........................................................................... 360

Baker Jardine (BJA) correlation ................................................................................... 360
Beggs and Brill original ................................................................................................ 360
Beggs and Brill revised ................................................................................................ 361
Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan ........................................................................................ 361
Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan (Eaton Holdup) ............................................................... 361
Eaton-Oliemans ........................................................................................................... 361
Hughmark-Dukler ........................................................................................................ 361
LEDA ........................................................................................................................... 362
Minami and Brill ........................................................................................................... 362
Mukherjee and Brill ...................................................................................................... 363
NOSLIP correlation ...................................................................................................... 363
OLGAS 2-phase / OLGAS 2000 3-phase .................................................................... 363
Oliemans ..................................................................................................................... 364
TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase) ......................................... 364
Xiao ............................................................................................................................. 364
Xiao (film modified) ...................................................................................................... 365
4.1.3 Vertical multiphase flow correlations ............................................................................... 365
Ansari .......................................................................................................................... 365
Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi .......................................................................................... 365
Beggs and Brill original ................................................................................................ 366
Beggs and Brill revised ................................................................................................ 366
Duns and Ros .............................................................................................................. 366
Gomez ......................................................................................................................... 367
Gomez enhanced ........................................................................................................ 367
Govier and Aziz ........................................................................................................... 367
Gray ............................................................................................................................. 367
Gray modified .............................................................................................................. 368
Gregory ........................................................................................................................ 368
Hagedorn and Brown ................................................................................................... 369
Mukherjee and Brill ...................................................................................................... 369
NOSLIP correlation ...................................................................................................... 369
OLGAS 2-phase/OLGAS 3-phase ............................................................................... 369
LEDA 2-phase/3-phase ............................................................................................... 370
Orkiszewski ................................................................................................................. 370
TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase) ......................................... 364
4.1.4 Suggested correlations ................................................................................................... 371
4.1.5 Friction and holdup factors .............................................................................................. 373
4.1.6 Single phase flow correlations ........................................................................................ 373
Moody (default for liquid or gas) .................................................................................. 374
AGA (for gas) ............................................................................................................... 375
Cullender and Smith (for gas) ...................................................................................... 376
Other friction pressure drops for gas ........................................................................... 377
Hazen-Williams (for liquid water) ................................................................................. 377
4.1.7 Swap angle ..................................................................................................................... 378

viii
PIPESIM User Guide

4.1.8 deWaard (1995) corrosion model .................................................................................... 378

4.1.9 Cunliffe's method for ramp up surge ............................................................................... 381
4.1.10 Liquid by sphere (Sphere Generated Liquid Volume, SGLV) ......................................... 382
4.1.11 Liquid loading .................................................................................................................. 384
Critical unloading velocity ............................................................................................ 384
Critical gas rate ............................................................................................................ 386
4.2 Completion (IPR) Models .......................................................................................................... 386
4.2.1 Inflow performance relationships for vertical completions ............................................... 386
Productivity index (PI) .................................................................................................. 387
Vogel's equation .......................................................................................................... 388
Fetkovich's equation .................................................................................................... 389
Jones' equation ........................................................................................................... 390
Forchheimer equation .................................................................................................. 390
Back pressure equation ............................................................................................... 391
Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Equation ........................................................ 392
Transient IPR ............................................................................................................... 397
Data File ...................................................................................................................... 403
Bubble Point Correction ............................................................................................... 403
Vertical Well Skin Factor ............................................................................................. 405
4.2.2 Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions ....................................... 417
Theory ......................................................................................................................... 417
Pressure drop .............................................................................................................. 417
Inflow production profiles ............................................................................................. 421
Steady-state productivity ............................................................................................. 422
Pseudo-steady state productivity ................................................................................. 425
Solution gas-drive IPR ................................................................................................. 428
Horizontal gas wells ..................................................................................................... 428
Distributed productivity index method .......................................................................... 431
4.2.3 Oil / water relative permeability tables ............................................................................ 431
Keywords ..................................................................................................................... 432
4.2.4 Coning ............................................................................................................................. 432
4.3 Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 433
4.3.1 Chokes, Valves and Fittings ............................................................................................ 433
Choke .......................................................................................................................... 433
Choke subcritical flow correlations .............................................................................. 436
Choke critical pressure ratio ........................................................................................ 439
Choke critical flow correlations .................................................................................... 440
Flow control valves mechanistic theory ....................................................................... 441
Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 442
4.3.2 Compressors, Pumps, and Expanders ........................................................................... 445
Centrifugal pumps and compressors ........................................................................... 445
Reciprocating compressor operation ........................................................................... 448
Electrical submersible pumps (ESP) ........................................................................... 234
Progressive cavity pump (PCP) ................................................................................... 452
Expanders ................................................................................................................... 455

ix
PIPESIM User Guide

4.3.3 Multiphase boosting technology ...................................................................................... 457

Guide to multiphase booster efficiencies ..................................................................... 472
4.4 Heat Transfer Models ................................................................................................................ 473
4.4.1 Energy equation for steady-state flow ............................................................................. 473
4.4.2 Overall heat transfer coefficient ...................................................................................... 474
4.4.3 Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient .......................................................................... 477
Inside forced convection .............................................................................................. 479
Inside natural/free convection ...................................................................................... 485
4.4.4 Conductive heat transfer coefficients .............................................................................. 487
4.4.5 Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients ............................................. 489
4.4.6 Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface .............................. 491
Fully buried ground heat transfer coefficient ............................................................... 491
Partially buried ground heat transfer coefficient .......................................................... 492
4.4.7 Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock ..................................... 495
Ramey model .............................................................................................................. 495
4.5 Fluid Models ............................................................................................................................... 496
4.5.1 Black oil fluid modeling .................................................................................................... 497
Black oil correlations .................................................................................................... 498
Solution gas-oil ratio .................................................................................................... 500
Oil formation volume factor .......................................................................................... 505
Oil viscosity .................................................................................................................. 507
Gas compressibility ..................................................................................................... 515
Gas viscosity ............................................................................................................... 518
Surface tension ............................................................................................................ 518
Black oil enthalpy ......................................................................................................... 519
Black oil mixing ............................................................................................................ 521
4.5.2 Compositional fluid modeling .......................................................................................... 139
Cubic equations of state .............................................................................................. 528
Non-cubic equations of state ....................................................................................... 532
Components for cubic equations of state .................................................................... 537
Components for non-cubic equations of state ............................................................. 542
Viscosity models for compositional fluids .................................................................... 507
Solid Precipitation ........................................................................................................ 544
4.5.3 Fluid property table files .................................................................................................. 547
Internal fluid property tables ........................................................................................ 548
4.5.4 Liquid mixture properties ................................................................................................. 548
Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions ...................................................................... 548
Liquid-gas surface tension ........................................................................................... 553
4.5.5 PIPESIM-DBR Wax Deposition Models .......................................................................... 554
Single phase (oil) Wax Deposition Model .................................................................... 554
Two Phase (Gas/Oil) Wax Deposition Model .............................................................. 554
Nomenclature .............................................................................................................. 555
4.6 Solvers ........................................................................................................................................ 556

x
PIPESIM User Guide

4.6.1 Tolerance Equations ....................................................................................................... 556

4.7 Typical and Default Data ........................................................................................................... 556
4.7.1 Limits ............................................................................................................................... 556
General ........................................................................................................................ 556
Pipeline and facilities ................................................................................................... 556
Well Performance ........................................................................................................ 556
Network ....................................................................................................................... 557
4.7.2 Tubing and pipeline tables .............................................................................................. 557
Tubing/casing tables .................................................................................................... 557
Pipeline tables ............................................................................................................. 562
4.7.3 Typical values ................................................................................................................. 566
Fluid properties ............................................................................................................ 566
Roughness .................................................................................................................. 567
Thermal Conductivities ................................................................................................ 567
Permeability ................................................................................................................. 569
Drainage radius ........................................................................................................... 569
Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 569
4.8 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 571
4.8.1 Roman Letters ................................................................................................................. 571
4.8.2 Greek Letters .................................................................................................................. 574
4.8.3 Subscripts ....................................................................................................................... 575
4.9 Conversion factors .................................................................................................................... 576
4.9.1 Length ............................................................................................................................. 576
4.9.2 Volume ............................................................................................................................ 576
4.9.3 Mass ................................................................................................................................ 576
4.9.4 Time ................................................................................................................................ 576
4.9.5 Gravity ............................................................................................................................. 576
4.9.6 Pressure .......................................................................................................................... 577
4.9.7 Energy ............................................................................................................................. 577
4.9.8 Power .............................................................................................................................. 577
4.9.9 Dynamic viscosity ............................................................................................................ 577
4.9.10 Permeability .................................................................................................................... 577
4.10 References ................................................................................................................................. 577

5 Keyword index ........................................................................................................ 590

5.1 Keyword list ............................................................................................................................... 590
5.1.1 A ...................................................................................................................................... 590
5.1.2 B ...................................................................................................................................... 590
5.1.3 C ...................................................................................................................................... 591
5.1.4 D E .................................................................................................................................. 591
5.1.5 F ...................................................................................................................................... 591
5.1.6 G ..................................................................................................................................... 592
5.1.7 H ...................................................................................................................................... 592
5.1.8 I ....................................................................................................................................... 592
5.1.9 J ...................................................................................................................................... 592

xi
PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.10 K ...................................................................................................................................... 592

5.1.11 L ...................................................................................................................................... 592
5.1.12 M ..................................................................................................................................... 593
5.1.13 N ...................................................................................................................................... 593
5.1.14 O ..................................................................................................................................... 593
5.1.15 P ...................................................................................................................................... 593
5.1.16 Q R .................................................................................................................................. 593
5.1.17 S ...................................................................................................................................... 594
5.1.18 T ...................................................................................................................................... 594
5.1.19 U ...................................................................................................................................... 594
5.1.20 V ...................................................................................................................................... 594
5.1.21 W ..................................................................................................................................... 594
5.1.22 XYZ ................................................................................................................................. 595
5.2 Input files and input data conventions .................................................................................... 595
5.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 595
5.2.2 Statements ...................................................................................................................... 595
5.2.3 Delimiters ........................................................................................................................ 595
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 596
5.2.4 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 596
Example ....................................................................................................................... 597
5.2.5 Numeric data ................................................................................................................... 597
Example ....................................................................................................................... 597
5.2.6 Units description .............................................................................................................. 597
5.2.7 Character input ................................................................................................................ 598
Example ....................................................................................................................... 598
5.2.8 Comment statements and blank lines ............................................................................. 598
Example ....................................................................................................................... 598
5.2.9 Multiple value data sets ................................................................................................... 598
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 599
5.2.10 Input files ......................................................................................................................... 600
General ........................................................................................................................ 600
The main input ('.PSM' or '.PST') file ........................................................................... 600
Included files and the INCLUDE statement ................................................................. 600
AUTOEXEC.PSM ........................................................................................................ 601
modelname.U2P or branchname.U2P ......................................................................... 601
5.3 General data ............................................................................................................................... 601
5.3.1 Change parameters within the system profile ................................................................. 602
Example ....................................................................................................................... 602
Multiple cases .............................................................................................................. 602
5.3.2 HEADER - Job Accounting Header (Required) ............................................................... 602
Example ....................................................................................................................... 603
5.3.3 JOB - Job Title (Optional) ................................................................................................ 603
5.3.4 CASE - Case Title (Optional) .......................................................................................... 603
5.3.5 UNITS - Input and Output Units (Optional) ..................................................................... 603
Example ....................................................................................................................... 604

xii
PIPESIM User Guide

5.3.6 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional) ..................................................... 604

5.3.7 RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data ........................................................................................... 614
5.3.8 ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) ...................................................................................... 616
5.3.9 INLET System Inlet Data ................................................................................................. 618
5.3.10 PRINT Output Printing Options (Optional) ...................................................................... 619
Per-case output page options ...................................................................................... 619
Attributes ..................................................................................................................... 622
Point report subcodes .................................................................................................. 623
One-off output pages ................................................................................................... 625
5.3.11 PLOT Output Plotting Options (Optional) ........................................................................ 626
5.3.12 NOPRINT Output Print Suppression Options (Optional) ................................................. 629
5.3.13 BEGIN , END - Block delimiters ...................................................................................... 629
Example ....................................................................................................................... 630
5.3.14 PUSH - Remote Action Editing (optional) ....................................................................... 631
5.3.15 PLOTFILEDATA .............................................................................................................. 632
5.3.16 EXECUTE - deferred execution of a statement .............................................................. 632
5.3.17 USERDLL - Equipment ................................................................................................... 633
5.4 FLOW CORRELATION DATA .................................................................................................... 633
5.4.1 CORROSION .................................................................................................................. 634
5.4.2 EROSION Erosion Rate and Velocity (Optional) ............................................................ 634
5.4.3 SLUG Slug Calculation Options (Optional) ..................................................................... 635
Slug catcher size ......................................................................................................... 636
5.4.4 VCORR Vertical Flow Correlation Options ...................................................................... 636
Summary of valid vertical flow correlation combinations ............................................. 637
Vertical flow correlations - abbreviations ..................................................................... 638
5.4.5 HCORR Horizontal Flow Correlation Options ................................................................. 640
Summary of valid horizontal flow correlation combinations ......................................... 641
Horizontal flow correlations - abbreviations ................................................................. 638
5.4.6 SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (Optional) ............................................................. 643
5.4.7 USERDLL - Flow Correlations ........................................................................................ 645
5.5 Well performance modeling ...................................................................................................... 645
5.5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 646
5.5.2 COMPLETION Completion Profile Delimiter ................................................................... 647
Supercode ................................................................................................................... 647
5.5.3 FCV : Flow control valve ................................................................................................. 648
Example 1 .................................................................................................................... 649
5.5.4 WELLPI Well Productivity Index (Optional) ..................................................................... 650
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 650
5.5.5 WPCURVE (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 651
5.5.6 VOGEL Vogel Equation (Optional) .................................................................................. 651
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 651
5.5.7 FETKOVICH Fetkovich Equation (Optional) ................................................................... 651
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 651
5.5.8 JONES Jones Equation (Optional) .................................................................................. 652
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 652

xiii
PIPESIM User Guide

5.5.9 IFPPSSE : Data for the Pseudo Steady State Equation (Optional) ................................ 652
5.5.10 WCOPTION Well Completion Data (Optional) ................................................................ 654
5.5.11 IPRCRV or IFPCRV: Inflow Performance Curve ............................................................. 658
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 659
5.5.12 IFPTAB Inflow Performance Tabulation (Optional) ......................................................... 660
Values .......................................................................................................................... 660
Example ....................................................................................................................... 661
5.5.13 CONETAB Coning Relationship Tabulation (Optional) ................................................... 661
Example ....................................................................................................................... 662
5.5.14 BACKPRES Back Pressure Equation (BPE) (Optional) .................................................. 662
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 662
5.5.15 HORWELL Horizontal Well Inflow Performance ............................................................. 662
5.5.16 LAYER Reservoir Layer Properties ................................................................................. 664
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 666
5.5.17 RESERVOIR ................................................................................................................... 666
5.5.18 PERMCRV: Curves of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional) .................... 666
Example ....................................................................................................................... 667
5.5.19 PERMTAB: Tabulation of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional) ............... 667
Example ....................................................................................................................... 668
5.5.20 HVOGEL (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 668
5.5.21 FORCHHEIMER (Optional) ............................................................................................. 668
5.5.22 FRACTURE: Data for Hydraulic Fracture ....................................................................... 668
5.5.23 TRANSIENT: Data for the Transient Inflow equation (Optional) ..................................... 669
5.6 SYSTEM DATA ........................................................................................................................... 670
5.6.1 CHOKE (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 671
5.6.2 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves .................... 676
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 677
5.6.3 COMPRESSOR Compressor (Optional) ......................................................................... 677
5.6.4 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump ................................................................................... 678
5.6.5 EQUIPMENT Generic Equipment ................................................................................... 433
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 681
5.6.6 EXPANDER Expander (Optional) ................................................................................... 682
5.6.7 FITTING : Valves and Fittings ......................................................................................... 683
EXAMPLES ................................................................................................................. 684
5.6.8 FMPUMP (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 684
5.6.9 FRAMO 2009 (Optional) ................................................................................................. 684
EXAMPLE .................................................................................................................... 685
5.6.10 HEATER Heater/Cooler (Optional) ................................................................................. 685
5.6.11 GASLIFT: Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells ...................................................... 686
Main-code: GASLIFT ................................................................................................... 686
5.6.12 INJPORT Gas Lift Injection Valve ................................................................................... 689
5.6.13 INJGAS: Injection Gas (Optional) and INJFLUID: Fluid Injection ................................... 691
5.6.14 MPBOOSTER (Optional) ................................................................................................ 694
5.6.15 MPUMP Multiphase Pump (Optional) ............................................................................. 695
5.6.16 NODE System Profile Data (Required) ........................................................................... 696

xiv
PIPESIM User Guide

5.6.17 PIPE: Pipe or Tubing cross-section dimensions (Required) ........................................... 698

5.6.18 PUMP Pump (Optional) ................................................................................................... 700
5.6.19 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves .................... 676
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 677
5.6.20 REINJECTOR (Optional) ................................................................................................ 703
5.6.21 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump ................................................................................... 678
5.6.22 SEPARATOR Separator (Optional) ................................................................................ 705
5.6.23 WELLHEAD Wellhead Profile Delimiter .......................................................................... 706
5.7 HEAT TRANSFER DATA ........................................................................................................... 706
5.7.1 Notes on Heat Transfer Output Printing .......................................................................... 706
5.7.2 HEAT Heat balance options (optional) ............................................................................ 706
Heat transfer mode ...................................................................................................... 709
5.7.3 COAT Pipe coat and annular space medium data (optional) .......................................... 709
Example ....................................................................................................................... 710
5.7.4 TCOAT Pipe coat thickness data (optional) .................................................................... 710
5.7.5 KCOAT Pipe coat thermal conductivity data (optional) ................................................... 711
Files ............................................................................................................................. 712
Example ....................................................................................................................... 712
5.7.6 FLUID Fluid thermal conductivity data (optional) ............................................................ 714
5.7.7 CONFIG: Pipe Heat transfer configuration data (optional) .............................................. 714
5.7.8 Pipeline burial depth examples ....................................................................................... 716
5.8 Fluid models ............................................................................................................................... 717
5.8.1 BLACK OIL DATA ........................................................................................................... 717
BLACKOIL: Black Oil Fluid definitions ......................................................................... 717
PROP Fluid Property Data (Optional) .......................................................................... 719
LVIS: Liquid Viscosity Data (Optional) ......................................................................... 720
CPFLUID: Fluid Heat Capacity Data (Optional) .......................................................... 725
TPRINT Black Oil Table Printing (Optional) ................................................................ 726
CALIBRATE: Black Oil Property Calibration (Optional) ............................................... 726
CONTAMINANTS Gas phase contaminants data (optional) ....................................... 728
RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data ....................................................................................... 614
COMPOSITIONAL DATA ............................................................................................ 730
AQUEOUS: Aqueous component specification ........................................................... 730
CEMULSION Compositional liquid emulsion data (optional) ....................................... 730
COMPOSITION: Compositional fluid specification ...................................................... 733
LIBRARY: Library component specification ................................................................. 737
MODEL: Model properties specification ...................................................................... 737
PETROFRAC: Petroleum fraction specification .......................................................... 738
TPRINT Tabular data print options (optional) .............................................................. 739
5.8.2 MFL files .......................................................................................................................... 739
PROCOPTIONS: Master MFL file for mixing (optional but recommended) ................. 740
5.9 PIPESIM OPERATIONS OPTIONS ............................................................................................ 740
5.9.1 NAPLOT: Nodal analysis ................................................................................................ 740
5.9.2 NAPOINT system analysis point ..................................................................................... 744

xv
PIPESIM User Guide

5.9.3 MULTICASE introduction and summary ......................................................................... 745

General rules for use with MULTICASE ...................................................................... 745
5.9.4 Explicit subcodes ............................................................................................................ 746
5.9.5 General purpose subcodes ............................................................................................. 748
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 749
5.9.6 Combine MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE ................................................................ 750
5.9.7 Multiple case and PS-PLOT ............................................................................................ 751
5.9.8 Reservoir simulator tabular data interface ...................................................................... 752
5.9.9 ASSIGN change profile data by assignment ................................................................... 753
Example ....................................................................................................................... 754
5.9.10 OPTIMIZE ....................................................................................................................... 754
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 755
5.9.11 Wax deposition and time stepping modeling options ...................................................... 205
Time subcodes ............................................................................................................ 756
Termination subcodes ................................................................................................. 757
Wax subcodes ............................................................................................................. 758
BP, DBRS or DBRM method subcodes ....................................................................... 758
Shell subcodes ............................................................................................................ 760
5.10 PIPESIM-Net keywords .............................................................................................................. 761
5.10.1 SETUP ............................................................................................................................ 762
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 762
5.10.2 BRANCH ......................................................................................................................... 764
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 764
5.10.3 SOURCE ......................................................................................................................... 766
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 766
5.10.4 SINK ................................................................................................................................ 769
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 769
5.10.5 JUNCTION ...................................................................................................................... 770
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 770
5.10.6 NSEPARATOR ............................................................................................................... 771
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 771
5.11 Keyword index ........................................................................................................................... 590

xvi
PIPESIM User Guide

5.11.1 Keyword list ..................................................................................................................... 590

A .................................................................................................................................. 590
B .................................................................................................................................. 590
C .................................................................................................................................. 591
D E ............................................................................................................................... 591
F .................................................................................................................................. 591
G .................................................................................................................................. 592
H .................................................................................................................................. 592
I .................................................................................................................................... 592
J ................................................................................................................................... 592
K .................................................................................................................................. 592
L ................................................................................................................................... 592
M .................................................................................................................................. 593
N .................................................................................................................................. 593
O .................................................................................................................................. 593
P .................................................................................................................................. 593
Q R .............................................................................................................................. 593
S .................................................................................................................................. 594
T .................................................................................................................................. 594
U .................................................................................................................................. 594
V .................................................................................................................................. 594
W ................................................................................................................................. 594
XYZ .............................................................................................................................. 595

6 Open Link ................................................................................................................ 777

7 Third party applications ......................................................................................... 778
Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 779

xvii
PIPESIM User Guide

xviii
PIPESIM User Guide

1
User Guide
1.1 Introduction
PIPESIM was originally developed by a company called Baker Jardine. Baker Jardine was formed
in 1985 to provide software and consultanting services to the oil and gas industry. In April 2001,
Baker Jardine was acquired by Schlumberger.
Schlumberger has invested in the redevelopment of the industry's leading Production Engineering
software to ensure that it cansolve challenging multiphase flow problems. PIPESIM couples a
leading-edge Graphical User Interface (GUI) with a field-proven computation engine.

1.1.1 Company profile

Schlumberger has wide experience in the design and optimization of oil and gas production
systems particularly in the transportation of live hydrocarbon fluids, a vital element in the
production and processing of hydrocarbons. The development of efficient gathering and
transportation systems requires a combination of detailed theoretical knowledge and practical
experience of the complex behavior of multiphase hydrocarbon mixtures.
Schlumberger is at the leading edge of software development for the oil and gas industry with the
software products such as PIPESIM, OFM, and ECLIPSE. These tools have been successfully
applied to numerous systems for the modelling and data management of new and existing oil and
gas production and distribution systems for most major oil companies.
PIPESIM is a steady-state, multiphase flow simulator used for the design and diagnostic analysis
of oil and gas production systems. PIPESIM software tools models multiphase flow from the
reservoir to the separator.
Schlumberger is actively involved in research and development of new of multiphase fluid flow
technologies, and has managed a diverse range of joint industry projects in this field.

1.1.2 Getting Started

Training courses on the use of PIPESIM can be arranged. Please contact your local Schlumberger
Support office or visit www.pipesim.com.
New users are encouraged to read the following sections in the user guide/help system:

User Guide
1
PIPESIM User Guide

• Case Studies (p.264) (either Oil Well Design (p.43) or Condensate Pipeline (p.265)) for
details on how to build models.
• Using the model wizard (p.28) to build a model.

Applications
PIPESIM offers a wide ranging capability for modeling entire production systems from the reservoir
to the processing facility. Typical applications include:

Well Performance analysis

• Well design
• Well optimization
• Well inflow performance modeling
• Gas Lift design and performance modeling
• ESP design and performance modeling
• PCP performance modeling
• Horizontal well modeling
• Injection well design
• Reservoir VFP table generation
• Detailed sensitivity analysis
• Automated model matching

Pipeline and Facilities

• Point by point generation of pressure and temperature profiles
• Prediction of solids formation (hydrates, wax, asphaltene, scale)
• Slug catcher design (hydrodynamic slugs, pigging, ramp-up)
• Equipment selection (pumps, compressors, multiphase boosters)
• Pipeline design
• Comparing measured data with calculated data

Network analysis module

• Unique network solution algorithm to model wells in large networks
• Rigorous thermal modeling of all network components
• Multiple looped pipeline/flowline capability
• Debottlenecking studies
• Comprehensive pipeline equipment models
• Gathering and distribution networks
• Gas lift optimization

User Guide
2
PIPESIM User Guide

Technical Description of Features

Depending on the type of application, users may select from an extensive set of features to model
a wide variety of production systems and fluids. The following tables provide a technical summary
of these features. Additional details are available throughout the online help system.

Feature Description
Black Oil • Latest industry standard fluid property correlations that cover all types of
(p.497) petroleum fluids from extra heavy oil to light oil and condensate. It can also
be used for simplified gas, utility fluids, and so on.
• Multi-level calibration from simple bubble point matching to advance fluid
calibration matching multiple sets of lab data measurements.
• Wide range of viscosity correlations that includes options for user-specified
dead oil and emulsion viscosities.
• Wide range of emulsion correlations covering tight to light emulsion types.
Also, users can specify emulsion tables, and specify or calculate the
inversion point.
• Ability to plot fluid properties at lab or reservoirs conditions.
• Specify gas contaminants used for compressibility factor adjustment and
corrosion calculations.
• Specify thermal data for all phases of a black oil fluid for accurate thermal
modeling and some of the standard methods for fluid enthalpy calculation
for accurate energy balance prediction.
• Comprehensive Fluid Mixing rules.
Compositional • Choices of Schlumberger developed and third party flash packages,
(p.139) including:
• Eclipse 300
• Multiflash
• DBR
• GERG 2008
• Refprop V8
• These packages come with their own standard library of components and
binary interaction parameters. Most of these packages allow users to
define and calculate properties of pseudo components for accurate
modeling of fluid properties in the absence of detailed fluid
characterization.
• Has a wide range of equation of states and transport properties
correlations that are based on selected flash packages:
• Flash Packages : 2-3-Peng-Robinson (standard and corrected), SRK
(standard and corrected), Association (CPA), BWRS, GERG-2008,

User Guide
3
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
NIST default, and so on. Correction for volume shift and Accentric
factors as applicable.
• Binary Interaction Parameters : OilGas1, OilGas2, OilGas3, OilGas4,
user specified
• Viscosity Models : Pederson, LBC, Aasberg-Petersen, NIST default
• Emulsion Methods : Woelflin, Volume ratio, continuous phase, none
• Surface Tension : Macleod-Sugden, NIST default
• Generate Phase Envelopes, including quality lines and formation curves
for hydrates, waxes and asphaltenes.
• Has Quick Flash calculations to examine fluid properties at specified P-T
Flash/Separation conditions.
• Ability to perform phase ratio matching for water, Oil and Gas based on
field measurement. This feature is useful for quick updates of fluid
composition based on actual measurement of phases at the field
separator.
• Salinity analysis based on Ion, Salt Components and TDS (Multiflash).

Note: Listed features vary depending on selected flash package. Refer to

the PIPESIM application for available options against a given flash
package.

PVT Files A number of third-party applications are capable of generating PVT files that
(p.160) can be used by PIPESIM. These applications include:
• PVTSim
• ScaleChem
• DBRSolids
• GUTS
Steam (p.165) PIPESIM allows steam modeling and interprets the properties of fluid based
on ASTM97 Steam Tables. Steam models can be used for producers and
injectors in both single branch and network modules of PIPESIM.
Table 1.1: Fluid Property Modeling

Feature Description
Single Phase • Moody
Flow Correlation • AGA (with tuning option for drag factor)
(p.373)
• Panhandle A (with tuning option for flow efficiency)
• Panhandle B (with tuning option for flow efficiency)
• Hazen – Williams (with tuning option for C factor)

User Guide
4
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Weymouth (with tuning option for flow efficiency)
• Cullender – Smith
Vertical Standard
Multiphase Flow • Beggs & Brill (Original & Revised)
Correlation
(Standard) • Duns & Ros
(p.365) • Govier, Aziz
• Govier, Aziz & Fogarasi
• Gray (Original & Modified)
• Hagedorn & Brown (Original/Revised - with/without Duns & Ros map)
• Mukherjee & Brill
• Orkiszewski
• No-Slip
OLGA
• Olga-S 2000 Version 6.2.7 (Oct 2010) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3.2 (Feb 2009) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3 (Feb 2008) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.0 (Jun 2006) – 2/3 Phase
TULSA Unified Mechanistic Model
• TUFFP Unified 3-Phase v 2011.1 (with default/override emulsion viscosity)
• TUFFP Unified 2-Phase v 2011.1
LedaFlow Point Model
• LedaFlow Point Model v1.0.231.1 (Jun 2011) – 2/3 Phase
Horizontal Standard
Multiphase Flow • Beggs & Brill (Original & Revised – with/without Taitel Dukler map)
Correlation
(Standard) • Baker Jardine Revised
(p.360) • Dukler, AGA & Flanagan (with/without Eaton Holdup)
• Lockhart & Martinelli (with/without Taitel Dukler map)
• Mukherjee & Brill
• Oliemans
• Xiao
• Dukler
• No-Slip
OLGA

User Guide
5
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Olga-S 2000 Version 6.2.7 (Oct 2010) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3.2 (Feb 2009) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3 (Feb 2008) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.0 (Jun 2006) – 2/3 Phase
TULSA Unified Mechanistic Model
• TUFFP Unified 3-Phase v 2011.1 (with default/override emulsion viscosity)
• TUFFP Unified 2-Phase v 2011.1
LedaFlow Point Model
• LedaFlow Point Model v1.0.231.1 (Jun 2011) – 2/3 Phase
Calibration PIPESIM includes a feature that can adjust the holdup-factor, friction-factor,
(p.134) and U-value multiplier automatically to match measured pressures and
temperatures. Additionally, the flow correlation comparison operation can
quickly sensitize on flow correlations to aid in selecting the most appropriate
model.
Flow Regime PIPESIM produces high-resolution flow regime maps at any point in the
Maps (p.121) system that is selected.
Extensibility PIPESIM includes code templates that can assist users in compiling their
(p.119) own 2-phase or 3-phase flow correlation plug-in dll.
Table 1.2: Flow Correlation Options

Feature Description
Wellbore Heat • User Specified Heat Transfer Coefficient
Transfer (p.98) • Calculated Heat Transfer Coefficient using Ramey’s Model (takes into
account thermal properties of various layers – rock, cement, completion
fluid, casing, tubing, etc)
Flowline & Riser • User Specified Heat Transfer Coefficient
Heat Transfer • Calculated Heat Transfer Coefficient taking into account pipe and ground
(p.474) thermal properties and properties of multiple layers of pipe coatings
(optional) choosing. PIPESIM rigorously calculates conductive and
convective (free and forced) heat transfer for pipes that are fully buried,
partially buried and fully exposed to air or water.
Inside Fluid Film Available methods are:
Heat Transfer • Kreith Model
Coefficient
(p.477) • Kaminsky Model (flow regime dependent)
User has the option to consider/ignore Fluid Film Heat Transfer coefficient.
Energy Balance PIPESIM has comprehensive energy balance calculation taking into account
(p.170) potential energy, kinetic energy, and internal energy to effectively calculate
heat loss/gain in the system and heat transfer with the outside environment.

User Guide
6
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Detailed Thermodynamics are considered such as Joule-Thomson heating/
cooling and frictional heating.
Flow Assurance PIPESIM provides several other calculations to aid accurate flow assurance
Related (p.139) studies:
• Calculation and reporting of Hydrate sub-cooling Δ T.
• Calculation and reporting of Asphaltene sub-cooling Δ T.
• Calculation and reporting of wax sub-cooling Δ T.
Table 1.3: Heat Transfer Calculations

Feature Description
Wellbore PIPESIM allows simple and detailed modes for defining a wellbore for single
Modeling and multilayer producers and injectors. Options include:
(p.50) • 2-dimensional deviation surveys
• Simple/detailed geothermal data for heat transfer calculations
• Tubular, annular or mixed flow (using equivalent hydraulic diameter
concept)
• Downhole equipment, including chokes, sub-surface safety valve,
separators, chemical injectors
• Artificial Lift equipment, including gas lift valves, ESP’s, PCP’s and Rod
Pumps
• Coil Tubing/velocity string modeling
Skin Several standard completions options are supported in PIPESIM:
Calculations • Open hole Completion and associated skin calculations due to
(p.66)
• Damaged zone, Partial penetration
• Open hole Gravel Pack Completion and associated skin calculations due to
• Damaged zone, Partial penetration, Gravel Pack
• Perforated Completion and associated skin calculations due to
• Damaged zone, Compacted Zone, Partial penetration and Perforation
(perforation skin calculation use methods like McLeod and Karakas/
Tariq; taking into account perforation geometry, density and phase
angle)
• Gravel Pack and Perforated Completion and associated skin calculations
due to
• Damaged zone, Compacted Zone, Partial penetration, Gravel Pack and
Perforation
• Frac-Pack Completion and associated skin calculations due to

User Guide
7
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Partial Penetration and Frac-Pack Skin (accounting for fracture half
length, fracture width, proppant permeability, frac face damage, fracture
choke damage, and so on)
Most of the parameters responsible for skin contribution are available for
sensitivity and uncertainty analysis.
Skin calculations available in PIPESIM across horizontal completions account
for effects of the damaged zone, gravel pack, compacted zone and
perforations.
For both horizontal and vertical completions, the user has the option to
override skin calculations by supplying a user defined skin component that
may be available from well test data.
Inflow Vertical Completions:
Performance • Well PI - Gas
Modeling
(p.386) • Well PI – Liquid (with/without taking into account Vogel correction and
correction for water phase)
• Vogel – (Liquid only)
• Fetkovitch – (Liquid only)
• Jones – Gas & Liquid
• Backpressure – (Gas only)
• Forchheimer (Gas only)
All of the above equations allow calculation of dependent parameters based on
user supplied well test data (if available).
• Pseudo Steady State – Gas (variation – Pressure squared/Pseudo Pressure
and with/without transient calculation)
• Pseudo Steady State – Liquid (with/without Vogel correction and with/
without transient calculation)
• Hydraulic Fracture Model – Gas (with/without transient calculation)
• Hydraulic Fracture Model – Liquid (with/without transient calculation and/or
Vogel correction)
Horizontal Completion (Single Point PI Models):
• Steady State Joshi Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR calculation
• Pseudo Steady State Babu & Odeh Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR
calculations
Horizontal Completion (Distributed PI Models): Distributed PI models take
into account detailed profile of tubular in the horizontal completion interval:
• Steady State Joshi Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR calculation

User Guide
8
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Pseudo Steady State Babu & Odeh Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR
calculations
• Simple distributed PI Model
Intelligent This feature allows users to control flow from a particular layer to reduce
Completions backpressure on other potential contributing layers. This has been
(p.193) implemented by introducing downhole flow control valve linked to the
completed layer. Example applications include:
• Shut-off/control of high watercut layers
• Shut-off/control of gassy layers
• Control water and gas coning
• Regulate flow from various layers
• Enhance overall production for well by managing system back-pressure
• Control corrosion problems that could be due to fluid contribution from a
specific layer
• Inject into target zones
Well specific Refer to PIPESIM Operation features section.
Operations
Table 1.4: Well Modeling

Feature Description
Flowlines PIPESIM allows simple and detailed modes for defining flowlines and risers.
(p.93) and Options include:
Risers (p.110) • Ability to define pipe undulations to account for uneven ground (flowlines)
• Model a Riser and Downcomers
• Specify data required from simple to detailed heat transfer calculation (For
more information, refer to the heat transfer section.)
• Specify measured pressure and temperature (if available). This information
is used for model tuning. (For more information, refer to data matching
operation under the ‘Flow Correlation’ section.)
• Simplified schematic is available to indicate flowline/riser geometry.
Sources & Define points of fluid entry into and exiting the system instead of production/
Sinks (p.116) injection wells.
Network sources may be specified with PQ curves to represent wellhead
responses.
Chokes PIPESIM allows users to model choke/flow restriction both at surface or
(p.433) downhole/wellbore. Options include:
(Surface/ • User specified or calculated choke bean size.
downhole)

User Guide
9
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• User specified or calculated critical pressure ratio across choke.
• Various correlations for calculation of pressure losses:
• Subcritical Correlation: Mechanistic, API 14B, Ashford
• Critical Correlation: Mechanistic, Gilbert, Ros, Achong, Baxendell,
Ashford, Poetbeck, Omana, Pilehvari, User Specified Correlation
• Advanced options are available to tune performance of choke by specifying
flow coefficients for liquid and gas phases, discharge coefficient, Cp/Cv, Gas
Expansion factor, etc.
Pumps (p.115) • Control pump performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so on, or
combination of these
• Calculate pump parameters – DP, Power, and so on — for single or multiple
sets of operating conditions
• Simple thermodynamic model or user specified curves
• Most pump performance parameters — head, DP, power, number of stages
(if applicable), speed (if applicable), efficiency, and so on are available as
sensitivity variables for design or uncertainty analysis
• Viscosity correction (Turzo method)
Multiphase • Generic Multiphase booster (treated as pump and compressor in parallel)
Booster • Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (ability to specify vendor booster
(p.100) performance data)
• Framo Multiple Boosters:
• Model catalog
• Tuning factors
• Models Series vs. Parallel and recirculation behavior
• Generates detailed performance maps
• Control booster performance by applying operational limits in various
combinations.
• Calculate booster parameters for single or multiple sets of operating
conditions.
• Most of the booster performance parameters (depending on selected type
and model) — head, DP, power, speed, efficiency, head parameter, flowrate
parameter, and so on are available as sensitivity variables for design or
uncertainty analysis.
Compressor • Model both centrifugal and reciprocating compressors/expanders.
(p.89) and • Control compressor performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so
Expander on, or combination of these.
(p.92)

User Guide
10
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Calculate pump parameters – DP, Power, and so on for single or multiple
sets of operating conditions.
• Ability to model various thermodynamic routes – Adiabatic, Polytropic or
Mollier.
• Reciprocating compressors allows multiple stages with the option to add
inter-cooler temperature condition. User can model compressor
performance for a series of discharge pressure settings.
• Users can add Vendor pump performance curves to the PIPESIM database.
• Most of the compressor performance parameters — head, DP, power,
number of stages (if applicable), speed (if applicable), efficiency, and so on
are available as sensitivity variables for design or uncertainty analysis.
Generic Generic equipment allows user the option to model any type of object that is not
Equipment available in PIPESIM equipment library. Some of the key features are:
(p.89) • Model equipment with several combination of inputs to offer following types
(or combination) of equipment settings:
• Fixed discharge temperature device
• Heater/cooler
• Pressure booster or reducer devices
• Device with fixed duty
• Several combinations of these.
• Generic equipment in PIPESIM supports various thermodynamic routes –
Isothermal, Isenthalpic, and Isentropic.
• Control compressor performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so
on, or combination of these.
Separator PIPESIM has several options for modeling separators, including:
Inline and • Inline separators (separated streams get discarded) of various types —
Network (Inline Liquid, Gas or Water with user specified separation efficiency.
for both
surface & • Inline separators can be used both at surface or downhole (downhole
downhole) separators are also available at the upstream of various artificial lift
(p.114) equipments.)
• Network separators allows tracking of both product and separated streams.
• Separation relies on rigorous PIPESIM engine flash calculations performed
for all types of fluid definitions based on in-situ P, T conditions.
• PIPESIM allows separators configured in series/parallel arrangements to
model conditions to model multistage separation trains.
• PIPESIM network separators adjust for pressure continuity across
separators to allow boundary condition matching for each outlet stream.

User Guide
11
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Heat Generic equipment allows user the option to model any type of object that is not
Exchangers available in PIPESIM equipment library. Some of the key features are:
(p.96) • Model heat exchangers with several combination of inputs to offer following
types (or combination) of equipment settings:
• Fixed discharge temperature, temperature differential or duty.
• Fixed discharge pressure or pressure drop.
• All the above parameters are available as sensitivity variables.
• Wide range of reports are available at inlet and outlet conditions.
Fluid Injection PIPESIM allows modeling of fluid injectors both at the surface and in the
(Surface/ wellbore. Fluid injection can be used to inject chemicals or other fluids to handle
downhole) flow assurance issues. Key features include:
(p.87) • Ability to inject any type of petroleum fluid (Black Oil, compositional, MFL file
(generated from Multiflash Standalone.)
• Injected fluid is seamlessly mixed with the main fluid to predict mixture
properties.
Adders/ Adders and/or multipliers are used as a tool to simulate performance of a
Multipliers flowing production/injection system to account for many scenarios. Some
examples are:
• Designing a pipeline system accounting for expected wells in future.
• Simulating turndown scenarios in surface networks.
• Designing parallel pipelines.
• Many other similar scenarios.
Report Tool Report tools are widely used to generate detailed report at any point in the
(p.113) flowing system.
• Available reports include:
• Flow map (to generate high resolution flow regime map)
• Phase split (compositional fluids)
• Fluid properties (stock tank condition)
• Fluid properties (flowing condition)
• Cumulative values
• Multiphase flow parameters
• Slugging Values
• Sphere generated liquid volumes
• Heat Transfer input values
• Heat Transfer output values
• Compositional detail (in-situ condition)

User Guide
12
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Phase envelope
• These reports have several uses. Some are:
• As FEED for designing any equipment to be installed at any point in the
system.
• Detailed performance analysis across any surface equipment.
• Analyzing performance of production system on phase envelope to
understand possible flow assurance issues.
Engine This is an advanced tool that allows expert PIPESIM users to perform
Keyword Tool advanced modeling tasks beyond the range of functionalities exposed in the
(p.92) PIPESIM user interface. There are many tasks that can be performed using
engine keyword tool. Some of the high level applications are:
• Perform advanced settings such as changing flow correlations, heat transfer
methods and other calculation options in the middle of a flowing system.
• Use keyword tools to build special equipment or combination of equipment
not supported by the PIPESIM User Interface.
• Add special equipment such as inline heaters, coolers, pressure boosters,
and so on.
• Configure special reports at any point in the system.
Table 1.5: Surface Equipment

Feature Description
Gas Lift PIPESIM uses advanced methods to perform design and diagnostics for a gas
Systems lifted wells. There are many other associated operations also available in
(p.213) PIPESIM to analyze performance of a gas lifted well. Some of the key features
include:
Gas Lift Valve Database
• Extensive database of gas lift valves of several types/series and sizes from
various manufacturers.
• Bompet
• Daniel
• Hughes
• Macco
• Schlumberger (Camco)
• Schlumberger (Merla)
• Weatherford
Users can easily add new valves to the database.
Gas Lift Design

User Guide
13
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Several design methods available (IPO-Surface Close, IPO-pt-Min-Max &
PPO)
• Valve sizing and mandrel spacing calculations for optimum design
• Valve sizing for existing mandrel spacings
• Design can be based on pressure boundary conditions or at a fixed target
production rate
• Design takes into account detailed hydraulic calculations inside the tubing
as well as frictional pressure loss for injected gas through the annulus.
• User configurable design bias/safety factors to control design (conservative
vs. worst case scenario)
• User control over choice of valve manufacturer, size, series
• Redesign option available with change in spacing, change in one or more
valves, change in design temperature profile, and so on
• Design results and plots include:
• Recommended valve information – model, spacing, size, and so on
• Recommended test rack opening pressure for all valves
• Valve throughput calculations
• Pressure and temperature profiles in the tubing and annulus section as
well as values across each valve.
• A well formatted report including input data (design control, design
parameters, design bias, fluid data, and so on), design calculation and
spacing plot.
Gas Lift Diagnostics
• Gas lift diagnostics take into account injection gas conditions and operating
boundary conditions to provide operational status of each valve (open/
closed/throttling.)
• Graphical diagnostic results provide production and injection profiles and the
status of valves.
• Tabulated performance data sheet reporting operating status of each valve.
Other Analysis
• Deepest Injection Point Operation : Calculated deepest injection point and
associated production rate for given fluid and operating conditions
• Gas Lift Bracketing Operation : Calculated deepest injection point and
associated production rate for minimum and maximum sets of conditions
(typically current and future performance.)
• Lift Gas Response : Analyzes performance of a well under gas lift for
various conditions such as changing fluid data, injection and operating
conditions and/or varying injection depths.

User Guide
14
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Gas Lifted Wells in PIPESIM are also exposed to all PIPESIM standard
single branch and network operations and gas lift optimization.
Electrical PIPESIM uses advanced methodology to perform ESP Design and associated
Submersible operations. Key features include:
Pumps (ESP’s) ESP Database
(p.234)
• Extensive database of Electrical Submersible Pump performance curves
covering a wide range of production rates. Pumps curves are available from
the following manufacturers:
• Centrilift
• ODI
• Ramco-Alnas
• Schlumberger-REDA
• Trico
• Wood Group
• Users can easily add performance curves from any manufacturer and use it
for design and simulation purposes.
• Database also includes motors of various series and power ratings and
cables of various sizes (AWG) and current ratings.
ESP Selection & Design Calculations
• PIPESIM recommends series of pumps in the order of decreasing efficiency
based on target production rates and size constraints.
• ESP Design calculates the required number of stages (talking into account
losses between stages), as well as performance data for pumps at design
condition including head, differential pressure, intake gas volume fraction,
power required, and so on.
• Effects of downhole separation, head factor tuning and viscosity corrections
are considered in the design and staging calculations.
• Design results and plots Includes:
• Standard performance curve with operating condition annotated.
• Multispeed pump performance curves at operating conditions indicating
gas volume fraction at pump intake.
• A formatted report that includes input design data, pump performance
data, motor and cable performance data.
ESP Well Simulation
• All PIPESIM standard operations can be used to model ESP wells (such as
PT profile, nodal analysis, system analysis, network simulation.)

User Guide
15
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• ESP parameters (speed, number of stages and power) are available as
sensitivity variables.
Rod Pump PIPESIM uses a third party Rod Pump module for the design and diagnostics.
Module (p.238) For standard simulation operations (such as, PT profile, nodal analysis, system
analysis, network simulation) a rod pump may be modeled.
Rod Pump Equipment Database (3rd Party)
• Extensive database of pumping units (including various geometric
configurations and ratings) from leading vendors, including:
• International Vendors - American Conventional, Ampscot, Baker
Torqmaster, LUFKIN – Conventional, LUFKIN – Mark II, Ramco-Alnas
• Chinese vendors - ER JI, DA AN, BAO JI, LAN TONG, SI JI, TONG
HUA, LAN SHI, FU SHUN, SAN JI, XU ZHOU, XIN JIANG
• Motor vendor:
• International Vendors – Sargent, General Electric, Reliance, Robbins &
Meyers, Westinghouse, Baldor,
• Chinese vendors - ER JI, DA AN, BAO JI, LAN TONG, SI JI, TONG
HUA, LAN SHI, FU SHUN, SAN JI, XU ZHOU, XIN JIANG
• Extensive database of Steel and Fiberglass Rods of various grades from
API, Axelson, Continental Emmsco, COROD, Metalmecanica UHS, Norris,
Trico, Upco, Weatherford XD, etc.
Rod Pump Design Module (3rd Party)
• Derives basic reservoir, wellbore and fluid data from base PIPESIM model.
• Clockwise & counterclockwise crank rotations.
• Rod String selection may be calculated or user specified. Supports tapered
rod design and sinker bars.
• Design basis may be defined by pump intake pressure, fluid level, target
production rate or fixed pumping parameter.
• Support for downhole gas separation.
• Design results include:
• PLOTS: Pressure profile of wellbore, rod loading analysis/stress plot,
pump efficiency plot.
• REPORT: Formatted report showing design parameters, hydraulic
condition across pump, motor sizing, polished rod loading, rod string
stress analysis, pump efficiency analysis, and so on.
Rod Pump Diagnostics (3rd Party)
• PIPESIM supports various dynocard file formats.

User Guide
16
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Result include calculated dynocards (surface, rod sections and pump),
torque curve, load balance analysis, rod string stress loading analysis, pump
conditions, and so on.
Rod Pump Simulation
• PIPESIM allows simulation of rod pumps as downhole equipment with
required data, including support for downhole separator (optional) and the
ability to recombine annulus gas at the wellhead.)
• Rod pumping wells can be simulated for all types of standard PIPESIM
operations including network simulation (wells must be flow rate specified.)
Progressive PIPESIM uses industry standard methods to simulate progressive cavity
Cavity Pump pumps. Key features include:
(PCP) (p.452) PCP Pump Database
• PCP’s performance curves for various sizes and nominal rates are available
from the following manufacturers:
• PCM
• Weatherford
• Users can easily add performance curves from any manufacturer.
PCP Well Simulation
• PIPESIM supports PCP’s with both top and bottom drive configurations.
• Options to adjust head factor, viscosity corrections and gas separation.
Table 1.6: Artificial Lift Design and Simulation

Feature Description
Single Single-branch operations pertain to analysis performed on a model configuration
Branch that has typically a single source fluid and single delivery point. These sources
Operations can be completed reservoir layers (in a well) or a generic source representing a
(p.50) surface inlet stream. There are special scenarios where multiple sources are
allowed but the flow path must have no branching. These include:
• Multilayer wells
• Fluid/chemical injection at any point in the branch
• Lift Gas injection (tubing or riser base)
Key single-branch operations include:
• Pressure Temperature Profile: Reports many detailed variables (such as,
flow, pressure distribution, fluid properties, thermal properties, multiphase flow
characteristics and flow assurance parameters) over the length of flow path.
• Solves for the unknown boundary condition – pressure or flowrate.
• Equipment operating conditions if both pressures and flowrate are
provided.

User Guide
17
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Sensitivity analysis for model objects, fluid properties, boundary conditions.
• Profile plots with hundreds of potential result variables available.
• Used for well performance analysis, well design, pipeline design, flow
assurance, and many other analysis.
• Nodal Analysis: Standard well performance analysis operation that can also
be applied to a simple pipeline system. Applications include well & completion
design, artificial lift selection and design, equipment sizing, system
debottlenecking, flow assurance analysis and many other applications.
• Inflow & outflow sensitivities
• Nodal Plot – with several plot control options
• System Analysis: One of the most versatile analysis tools in PIPESIM allows
users to analyze performance of production and/or injection systems (well,
pipeline, etc). It has advanced sensitivity options that enables varying multiple
parameters through either permutations or on a case-by-case basis
• Flow Correlation Comparison: Aids in selection of suitable flow correlation
by comparing several correlation against measured data.
• Data Matching: Advanced tool that uses optimization techniques to select and
match best suited flow correlations and adjust friction, holdup and heat transfer
factors to match field pressure and temperature data.
• Optimum Horizontal Well Length: Specific operation to optimize horizontal
well design.
• Reservoir Tables: Generates vertical lift performance curves for both
production and injection wells allowing sensitivities for flowrates, fluid
properties, oulet pressure and artificial lift quantities. Results are generated in
specific formats for several reservoir simulators:
• Eclipse
• Pores
• VIP
• Comp4
• MoRes
• Well Performance Curves: Specific well performance analysis operation to
generate PQ curve for the well for multiple sensitivities.
• Artificial Lift Performance Curves: Specific well performance analysis
operation to generate PQ curves for artificially lifted wells for multiple
sensitivities.
• Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure: Specific operation for gas lifted
wells to determine the required casing head pressure to achieve a target
production rate.

User Guide
18
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Wax Deposition: Predicts thickness and volume of wax deposition over time.
This operation requires specific wax properties files based on selected
deposition models.
Network PIPESIM has a very advanced network solver that can solve any type of network
Simulation including large and complex networks having thousands of well and branches
and may include multiple loops and crossovers.
Key features
• Solves for unspecified boundary conditions (pressure and/or flowrate).
• Handles multiple rate constraints.
Well PIPESIM offers very powerful network optimization capabilities to maximize
Optimizer production from a network of wells (self flowing, wells with choke, wells on gas lift/
ESP) under various types of constraints. This optimizer has been successfully
used to optimize large network containing thousands of wells.
Key features of the Well Optimizer
• Optimization for maximum oil or Liquid production using:
• Optimum lift gas distribution (for gas lifted wells)
• Optimum ESP power/speed settings (for ESP wells)
• Optimum choke setting (for wells under choke control)
• Selected wells ON/OFF (to reduce system back pressure)
• Any combinations of the above
• Several state-of-the-art algorithms are available:
• Newton-Raphson
• Genetic algorithm
• SDR Lexico
• SDR MINLP
• Comprehensive constraint handling capabilities:
• General: Well stability, Min/Max flowrates (liquid, water), well drawdown
limits, control for gas coning, bubble point pressure margin
• Flow assurance: erosion control, CO2/H2S limits
• Operational constraints: Available lift gas, available ESP power, facility
capacity limits, and so on
• Gas Lifted Wells: Lift gas limits (min/max), casing head pressure, dual
string wells
• ESP Wells: ESP Power limit (min/max)
• Wells on Choke: Min/max choke setting
• Any combinations of the above

User Guide
19
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Other associated features include network validation, group constraints
application (high watercut wells, sour gas producers, and so on)
• Several types of results and plots are available including and overall solution
plot, comparison tables (to compare results from multiple scenarios), results
overlay on a network diagram (bubble map, and so on.)
Table 1.7: PIPESIM General Simulation/Optimization Modules

Feature Description
Liquid Loading • Liquid loading analysis is available primarily to determine the minimum
(p.384) stable flow rate for vertical gas wells.
• User can tune predicted calculation by applying a correction factor.
• Analyze a well or network for locations susceptible to liquid loading.
Hydrates • Uses the Multiflash compositional package to generate hydrate formation
(p.545) curves on the phase envelope.
• Users can create a production profile superimposed on a phase envelope to
predict occurrence and location of Hydrate formation.
• Report hydrate formation temperatures and/or hydrate sub-cooling delta-
temperature to determine occurrence and location of hydrate formation in a
single well or large networks.
• Analyze effects of hydrate inhibitor and determine the required treatment
quantity to prevent hydrate formation.
Asphaltenes • Uses the Multiflash compositional package to generate Asphaltene
(p.544) formation curves on the phase envelope.
• Users can create a production profile superimposed on a phase envelope to
predict occurrence and location of Asphaltene formation.
• Report Asphaltene formation temperatures and/or Asphaltene sub-cooling
delta-temperature to determine occurrence and location of Asphaltene in a
single well or large network.
Waxes (p.547) There are several modules in PIPESIM for wax precipitation and deposition
analysis:
• Multiflash thermodynamic prediction module:
• Generates a wax formation curve on the phase envelope.
• Superimpose a production profile on top of the phase envelope to predict
occurrence and location of wax.
• Report critical wax formation temperatures and/or sub-cooling delta-
temperature to determine occurrence and location of wax in a single well
or large network.
• DBR Wax deposition module:

User Guide
20
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• DBR-Solids package provides detailed characterization of fluid for wax
properties.
• PIPESIM wax deposition module uses wax properties file generated by
DBR-Solids to perform detailed thermodynamic calculation to predict
occurrence and quantity of wax deposition.
• Reported parameters include wax volume in pipeline (at different time
steps), wax deposition rate in pipeline, wax thickness along pipe profile
(at different time steps), wax thermal properties (thickness, conductivity,
heat transfer coefficient, and so on.)
Emulsion • Available Emulsion Models include:
Modeling • Use Continuous Phase Viscosity
(p.144)
• Volume-weighted mixture viscosity
• Woelflin loose, medium and tight models
• Brinkman
• Vand (Vand coefficients, Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients or user specified
coefficients)
• Richardson (with tuning for K factor)
• Leviton & Leigton
• User specified Emulsion Table
• Inversion watercut may be user specified or calculated using the Brauner-
Ullman equation
Corrosion • DeWaard Corrosion Model for predicting CO2 corrosion.
Modeling • Tuning options for efficiency
(p.175)
• User may override pH calculation or derive from ScaleChem PVT files
• Effect of corrosion inhibitors (MEG, DEG) are accounted for
• Available results include corrosion rate, pH, glycol inhibition factor, and
many other variables
Erosion • Erosion models available include:
Modeling • API 14E
(p.160)
• Salama Model (for sand-laden fluids)
• Tuning options for efficiency
• Available results include erosional velocity limit, erosional velocity ratio,
erosion rate and many other variables.
Slug and • Slug length correlations
Pigging • Slug growth calculations
Analysis
• Probabilistic slug length distribution

User Guide
21
PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Severe riser slugging indicator
• Pig generated slug volume calculation
Scaling • Ability to use ScaleChem generated PVT file for predicting occurrence, type
Analysis location and severity of scale formation
(p.162)
Table 1.8: PIPESIM Flow Assurance Capabilities

1.1.3 Reporting
• Flexible plotting functionality with hundreds of potential variables to select from
• Configuration of multiple y-axis
• Detailed spot reports including phase splits and flow regime maps
• Interactive network simulation result viewer
• Summary and Detailed output report
• Specially formatted reports for nodal analysis and gas lift design

1.1.4 Extensibility
PIPESIM includes a rich and fully documented API called Openlink that enables integration with
various other software products, including:

Avocet IAM Schlumberger product used to integrate PIPESIM to reservoir, process and
economics models.
Avocet Schlumberger production operations platform used to integrate PIPESIM to high-
frequency production data.

1.1.5 PIPESIM Hot Keys

Hot keys are short cuts for menu options.

File Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Create New Single Branch Model CTRL+W

Create New Network model CTRL+N
Open model CTRL+O
Open engine file for text edit CTRL+T
Save model CTRL+S
Close PIPESIM ALT+F4
Export to Engine file CTRL+E

User Guide
22
PIPESIM User Guide

Purge Engine Files CTRL+Y

Open Single Branch Wizard CTRL+ALT+W

Simulation Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Run model CTRL+G

Restart Model (applicable only for PIPESIM Net models) CTRL+R

Windows Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

New Model Window for Selection CTRL+ALT+N

Close Active Window CTRL+F4
Go to Next Window CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB
Go to Previous Window CTRL+SHIFT+F6 or CTRL+SHIFT+ TAB

Tools Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Print CTRL+P
Access Help F1

Editing or General Hot Keys

The following hot keys are available:

Access Pull-down menus ALT or F10

Cut CTRL+X
Copy CTRL+C
Paste CTRL+V
Delete Del
Select All CTRL+A
Find CTRL+F
Sticky key mode SHIFT
Zoom in SHIFT+Z
Zoom out SHIFT+X
Zoom Full View SHIFT+F
Restore View SHIFT+R

User Guide
23
PIPESIM User Guide

1.1.6 Main Toolbar

The main toolbar (like all toolbars in PIPESIM) is a docking toolbar. That is, it can be re-positioned
on the screen.

From left to right, the icons are:

1. New model (p.28)
2. Single Branch Wizard (p.28)
3. Open an existing model,
4. Save active model (p.34)
5. Save as (p.34)
6. Save all open models (p.34)
7. Find (p.183)
8. Boundary Conditions (p.116)
9. Cut
10.Copy
11.Paste
12.Run Model (p.194)
13.Restart (p.211)
14.Abort Run (p.195)
15.View summary file
16.View Output file
17.View System plot
18.View profile plot
19.View flow regime map
20.Report Tool (p.258)
21.Export engine files (for FPT)
22.Help
See also: Well Performance (p.50), Pipeline tools (p.89) and Network (p.35)

1.1.7 Toolbox
All tools can be accessed using the Tools menu.
See also Hot Keys (p.22), Main toolbar (p.24), Wells (p.50), Pipeline tools (p.89), Network
(p.35) components, Case studies (p.43), and How to add objects (p.33)

User Guide
24
PIPESIM User Guide

Single branch Toolbox

Button Function
Returns the mouse pointer to its original function. If you place an object,
such as a node, in the work area, further clicks will continue to place
Select objects of that type until the select arrow button is pressed.
Adds a text box to the model. Any number of text boxes can be added
to the model. The size and color of the text and the background can be
Text changed.
Allows two connection objects to be connected together where no
equipment is located between them. In the network module, boundary
Node (p.116) nodes are used to identify the "ends".
Final node in a single branch model where the branch connects to the
network..
Boundary Node (p.116)
The generic source object is a means by which you can specify explicit
upstream boundary conditions of pressure and temperature in a given
Source (p.116) model.
The vertical completion component models flow from the reservoir to
the bottom hole using an Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR). A
Vertical Completion multilayer reservoir model (p.51) can be defined by several layers
(p.57) (completions) which, can, if required, be separated by a section of
tubing.
A horizontal completion with multiple sources along the horizontal
wellbore. This takes into account reservoir drawdown and wellbore
Horizontal Completion pressure drop.
(p.51)
The basic pump model uses centrifugal pump equations to determine
the relationship between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet
Pump (p.115) pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, hydraulic power and
efficiency.
A device that boots the pressure of an oil-gas mixture.

Multiphase Booster
(p.100)
Placing a separator in the model removes up to 100% of the gas, water
or liquid (oil plus water) phase.
Separator (p.114)
Either centrifugal or reciprocating compressors can be modeled.

Compressor (p.89)

User Guide
25
PIPESIM User Guide

Button Function
The basic expander model uses centrifugal expander equations to
determine the relationship between inlet pressure and temperature,
Expander (p.92) outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and efficiency.
A heat exchanger in the model allows a fluid temperature change to be
modelled.
Heat Exchanger
(p.96)
A choke is a device that restricts the flow rate.

Choke (p.433)
Placing an injection point in the model allows a side stream to be
injected without creating a new pressure boundary conditon.
Injection Point (p.99)
Simulates a generic unit operation in which the pressure and/or
temperature of the stream are modified.
Equipment (p.433)
A rate change device in the model that can increase or decrease the
fluid flowrate at that point in the system
Adder/Multiplier (p.110)
Placing a report tool in the model gives additional reporting of the
conditions at that point in the model.
Report (p.113)
Placing an Engine Keyword Tool (EKT) in the model allows access to
the PIPESIM Input Language
Engine Keyword Tool
(p.92)
Defines where the system is to be broken in two for the Nodal Analysis
operation
Nodal analysis Point
(p.86)
Allow two objects to be connected by a "zero-length" flowline. This is
normally used to connect two items of equipment together where there
Connector is no significant pressure or temperature change between them.
Placing a flowline in the model allows the modeling of horizontal or
near-horizontal flow (up or downhill).
Flowline (p.93)
Placing the tubing object in the model allows the modeling of vertical or
near-vertical flow (production or injection) in a well bore.
Tubing (p.74)

User Guide
26
PIPESIM User Guide

Button Function
Placing a riser in the model allows the modelling of vertically or near-
vertical flow (up, down or inclined).
Riser (p.110)

Network Toolbox

Button Function
Allows the user to select, drag and drop any object in the working window

Select arrow
Allows a text box to be added to the model.

Text
A junction is a location in the model where two, or more, branches meet.
The fluid from the incoming branches are then mixed at the junction. The
Junction junction itself has no associated pressure drop.
A branch is an object that connects two junctions or a well sources/sink to
a junction. A branch may contain many equipment objects.
Branch (p.37)
A point in the network where a stream removed from a separator can be
directed to an injection well or sink.
Network Separator
(p.38)
A source is a point where the fluid enters the network. A network model
can have any number of sources.
Source (p.35)
A sink is a point in the network where the fluid leaves the system. Normally
used to represent a surface outflow point as opposed to an injection well.
Sink (p.36)
A production well is a well where the fluid enters the network.

Production well
(p.38)
A injection well is a well where the fluid exits the network.

Injection well
(p.39)
Allows parts of network to be "collapsed" in to a sub-network of the main
model. This could be used to divide a large model into a number of smaller
Folder sections. Place a folder on the model window and double-click to enter. A
sub-network can then be built in the folder. Double-click on any "white"

User Guide
27
PIPESIM User Guide

Button Function
background in a folder to take you up a level. Links can be made into the
folder by connecting a node to the folder via a branch. The "dangling" end
of the branch within the folder must then be connected.

1.1.8 Wizard Feature

The wizard can be used to create the following new models:
• Production well
• Injection well
• Surface and Facilities Model

Steps
To open the wizard, click the Single Branch Wizard button on the Main Toolbar (p.24). The wizard
involves the following steps:
1. Supply general project information.
2. Select the model type required.
3. Select the operation type and, if it's Nodal Analysis, the Nodal Analysis point.
4. (Optional) specify the model file name and directory.
5. Select the units (p.169) to use.
6. Select the fluid model type, one of the following:
• Black Oil
• Compositional
• PVT File
7. Select the following flow correlations (also friction and holdup factors, and swap angle):
• Vertical flow
• Horizontal flow
• Single phase
8. Identify the model source, one of the following:
• vertical completion
• generic source
• horizontal completion
9. Identify Pipes and Equipment objects to include in the model, by using one of the following
methods:
• Double-click on the object type to add it to the model.
• Highlight the object then use the Add Pipe>> or Add Equip>> button.

User Guide
28
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: Objects MUST be added in the correct order (from source to sink), for example, tubing,
flowline, riser, choke, compressor, and so on.

10.(For an injection model only) Identify the model sink.

11.The required objects are connected in the model window. If the model window appears to be
blank, scroll down to locate the model.
12.Click Finish to close the wizard.

Note: Do not forget to save the model.

1.1.9 Find
Use the Find tool to find quickly any object (well, source, flowline, and so on) in a PIPESIM model.

Finding an object in a network model

To find an object, do the following:
1. Launch the Find tool from the main toolbar (p.24) or by using Edit » Find.
2. The Find dialog lists object types (branch, well, source, sink, junction).
3. Do one of the following:
• enter the object name in the text box and click Find. The appropriate part of the tree
structure opens to show it selected.
• select the object type in the tree and then select the actual object, by name.
4. The chosen object is highlighted in the model and the screen display updated.
5. The Edit button can be used to modify the data.

1.1.10 PIPESIM Differences from other Simulators

It is important to understand how PIPESIM works in order to assess its performance in comparison
with other network simulators, which may or may not appear to be faster. PIPESIM differs from
other simulators in the following ways:
• PIPESIM is a multiphase flow simulator. Other simulators with apparent faster performance
may be single-phase simulators, which cannot capture important multiphase effects.
• PIPESIM can model general networks including loops and crossovers. Other simulators may be
limited to solving gathering networks only (multiple sources, 1 sink).
• PIPESIM does not require (good) initial estimates at each source and sink, which may be a
requirement for other simulators.
• PIPESIM does not require (good) internal node estimates, which may be a requirement for
other simulators.
• The tolerance in PIPESIM may be defined differently from other simulators.
• PIPESIM performs a rigorous heat balance, which may not be the case for other simulators.

User Guide
29
PIPESIM User Guide

• Other simulators may have to define the fluid composition for each branch in the model at the
start of the simulation, before the flow rates are known! This is not a PIPESIM requirement.
• PIPESIM rigorously checks for network inconsistencies, for example elevation mismatches,
prior to the simulation, which is a step other simulators may skip.
• Other simulators may need to have non-return valves placed in lines to indicate the direction of
flow. This is not a PIPESIM requirement.
• PIPESIM has a strong and rigorous fluid Compositional PVT characterization supported by the
Multiflash package, which is also embedded in OLGA, allowing better alignment and transition
from steady-state to transient workflows.
• PIPESIM includes more PVT correlations for heavy oil characterization.
• PIPESIM includes a comprehensive list of flow correlations; single-phase, multiphase, empirical
and state-of-the-art mechanistic flow correlations such as the OLGA-S correlations.
• PIPESIM has more engineering tools for flow assurance analysis (hydrates, asphaltenes, wax).
• PIPESIM data matching is more rigorous as the (U value and pressure hydraulics) are
simultaneously tuned to give a more accurate thermo-hydraulic representation of the system
being modeled.

1.1.11 PIPESIM versions

Only one version of PIPESIM can be installed on a machine at a time. To install a new version, first
uninstall any existing version. PIPESIM models are forward compatible. For example, a model
created using PIPESIM 2009.1 can be read and used with PIPESIM 2011.1. However, models are
not back-compatible. Once it has been saved with a version of PIPESIM it can not then be read by
older versions. Versions of PIPESIM prior to 2001 may need to be converted (p.30) before they
can be used.

PIPESIM Suite (Build26) to PIPESIM Conversion

The converter has been tested with PIPESIM Suite Build 26, release in 1999. Previous versions
may not convert correctly.
The following Build 26 files can be converted:
• PIPESIM: *.PSW
• PIPESIM-Net: *.NET and *.PSW
The following do not need conversion. They can be loaded directly in PIPESIM:
• Compositional: *.PVT. These do not need to be converted. Load the PVT file directly into
PIPESIM using the Setup » Compositional.... » Import menu option.
• Plotting: *.PLT and *.PLC. PLOT (PLT, PLC) files do not need to be converted. Load the plot file
directly into the PsPlot tool.

What is not converted

PIPESIM models cannot be converted to PIPESIM Suite models.
The following options from Build 26 input files are not converted:

User Guide
30
PIPESIM User Guide

• The Black box object does not exist in PIPESIM. It is converted into a heat exchanger.
• Gas Lift Design
• Horizontal completion data
• PIPESIM operations
• Upstream inheritance is not supported. Therefore any models that use this feature will have
data (normally flowline ID) missing.

Pre-conversion preparation
Before conversion, do the following:
• Back up your data.
• Load the PIPESIM Suite model into Build 26 and run the model with Build 26 to verify that the
results are correct.

Note: The converter does not prompt for file save; any existing previous conversion is overwritten.

Converting a model
Do the following:
1. Select File » Import Build26.
2. Open the required Build 26 model (*.psw or *.net). The file is converted and written to the same
directory as the build 26 input, along with a log file.
3. For a large PIPESIM-Net model, if an Out of Memory error appears, use the conversion utility
instead.

Using the conversion utility

Use this external method of file conversion if there's an Out of Memory error (due to a large file), or
if a number of models are to be converted and used in PIPESIM at a later date. Do the following:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs » Schlumberger » PIPESIM » Utilities »
B26 to P2K Converter.
2. This opens the Network File Converter dialog. In its Options menu, choose whether to
overwrite existing files. This must be off (don't overwrite) if the file is being converted because
of a an out of memory error.
3. From the converter's File menu, choose the Build 26 file (*.psw or *.net) to convert
4. If an Out of Memory message appears, click Cancel and rerun the conversion. With the option
not to overwrite, the converter starts from where it last stopped. Otherwise it restarts
completely..
5. When the model has been successfully converted, all the *.bps files in the directory can be
deleted.

Post-conversion QC
After conversion:

User Guide
31
PIPESIM User Guide

• The log file *.lgg for PIPESWIM, or *.p2k for PIPESIM-Network, is in the same directory as the
PIPESIM model.
• The new model is saved to the same directory as the Build 26 model. The file extension for a
PIPESIM single branch model is .bps., and .bpn for a PIPESIM Network model. All input data is
now saved in one file.
• The PIPESIM file might be large. All flowlines are converted as if they were defined in PIPESIM
as detailed profiles, that is the node data is imported. This is done so that no important data is
lost. This can be reversed in PIPESIM by using Setup » Flowline Properties » Simple
profile. All detailed profiles are then ignored.
• Check the default units. The converter saves the model in Engineering units.
• Run the new model in PIPESIM and verify that the results are the same as those produced by
the PIPESIM Suite. There may be small differences due to changes in the calculation engine.
• If you have any problems with the file conversion, please send a copy of the file(s) to PIPESIM
support.
• Check the default units. The converter will save the model in Engineering units.
• Run the new model in PIPESIM
• Verify that the results are the same as those produced by the PIPESIM Suite. There may be
small differences due to changes in the calculation engine. If you are unsure about any results,
please contact PIPESIM support.
• If you have any problems with thefile conversion, please send a copy of the file(s) to PIPESIM
support

Troubleshooting
If the results from PIPESIM Suite and PIPESIM are not the same, please try the following before
contacting the PIPESIM support.
1. Units settings -Save (a copy) of the PIPESIM Suite model with the following settings:
a. Set the units to standard Eng or SI, that is not customized. Use Setup » units » Eng.
b. Set the option to write file with default units, using Preferences » Options » General »
Write file with default units.
c. All units can be restored later in PIPESIM.
d. Repeat the conversion.
2. Language -Save (a copy) the PIPESIM Suite model with the following settings
a. Set the language to English by using Setup » Preferences » Language » English or
Setup » Preferencias » Idioma » English.
b. Repeat the conversion.
3. Contact PIPESIM support with a copy of your input file(s). Do not forget that for PIPESIM-Net
models both the *.net and *.psw files are needed.

User Guide
32
PIPESIM User Guide

1.2 Building Models

1.2.1 Steps in building a model
This topic outlines the basic steps involved in building models.

Basic overview
The steps in building a PIPESIM model are slightly different for each module, but all involve the
following basic steps:
1. Select units.
2. Set fluid data and (optionally) calibrate it.
3. Define components of the model.
4. Add well components (completion, tubing).
5. Add pipeline components.
6. Add field equipment.
7. Set heat transfer options.
8. Select flow correlations.
9. Save the model.
10.Perform an operation.
11.Analyze the graphical and tabular results.
12.Use the schematic.

Creating a new model

To create a new model, select File » New and then select from the following:
• pipeline and facilities model
• well performance model (production and injection wells)
• network model (more than one well or source)
Alternatively, use the wizard (p.28).
A model is made up of "node" and "connection" type objects.
Before an operation (p.194) can be performed on the model it must be saved. Single branch
models have the file extension .bps and network models, .bpn.

Adding objects to a model and connecting them

The objects in the toolbox (p.24) are defined as either node or link objects, as follows:
• node objects — for example, source, sink, junction/node, completion, equipment, Nodal
analysis point, report tool, and so on. Add node objects to the model first. Select a node object
in the toolbar then click to place it in the model window. To add a number of the same type of

User Guide
33
PIPESIM User Guide

node object, press the SHIFT key to turn the selector into a "sticky" mode where the same
object is added to the model window whenever the mouse button is pressed.
• link (connection) objects — for example, tubing, flowline, riser, connection, and so on. Link type
objects are used to connect two node type objects. The node objects must have already been
added. Select the link object from the toolbox. Hover the mouse over a node object, then press
and hold done the (left) mouse button and "drag" the resulting link to another node object.

Adding data to an object

After adding the object to the model, double-click it to open its data entry screen. All the data in an
object is self-contained and does not affect, or rely, on data from any other object.

Minimum data
Missing data is reported at the following levels:

• Dialog
• Object
• Folder
All dialogs that have data entry fields display a red box around any mandatory data. This shows
the minimum data required. The red box disappears when the data is entered.
In the model objects and folders that have data missing are displayed with a red box around them.
Missing data includes data in dialog fields with a red box, the fluid model, and boundary conditions.
Again, once the necessary data has been entered, the red box disappears.
Data range checks are made on some data entry fields.

Duplicating an object
The Edit » Copy and Edit » Paste (or Ctrl+c, Ctrl+v) commands can be used to copy an object
and all its associated data. The only data that is changed in the copy is the identifier of the object.
This option works in both single branch and network mode. It also works on multiple selections, so
you can duplicate more than one object at a time.

Disconnecting objects
To disconnect objects, do the following:
1. Select the link (connection) object. End markers (small squares) appear at each end of the
object.
2. Select the end marker (small square). The pointer changes into an arrow.
3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down while dragging the link to its new node object.

Saving the model

The PIPESIM models are stored in binary data files with the following extensions:
• .bps - single branch model

User Guide
34
PIPESIM User Guide

• .bpn - network model. A network model is stored in a single input file. It is not necessary to
store each network model in a separate directory. However, it is important to note that each
individual branch has its own output files. Thus, using separate directories ensures that the
output files are not overwritten. Using separate directories may be useful in the following cases:
• If results from models having the same well/branch names are to be compared.
• If models having the same well/branch names are to be run simultaneously.

1.2.2 Network Models

Network models contain multiple single branch models, linked at junctions. They can be used to
model parts of, or complete, production or injection systems, from the reservoir to the final delivery
point(s).

Creating a network model

To build a network model, perform the following basic steps:
1. Select a units (p.169) set.
2. Develop the network model. The basic building blocks — sources, sinks, branches and
junctions — can be found in the Network Toolbox (p.27). Branches can be built up of equipment
items, using the Single branch Toolbox (p.25). Prebuilt single branch models of wells and
flowlines can also be used.
3. Set the fluid properties (p.125) .
4. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.497).
5. Set the boundary conditions (p.41).
6. Save the model (p.34).

Network Operations
Operations for network models differ from those available for single branch models. They are:
• Run Model (p.194)
• Restart Model (p.211)
• Gas Lift Optimisation
• Linking to reservoir models

Source
A source is a point where fluid enters the network. A network model can have any number of
sources. A production well (p.38) can be used instead of a source.
Right-click on a source to display the following menu:

Data Access the Source Properties (p.36) and Fluid Model (p.180) tabs

Fluid Model Access the Fluid Model tab

User Guide
35
PIPESIM User Guide

Active If active is selected, the source is included in the model at run time, otherwise
it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of switching off
parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for the branch containing this source.

Cut / Copy / Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and deleted.
Paste / Delete

Move to Top / For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to the
Move to Back top or bottom.

Source Properties tab

Double-click a source to open the Source Properties tab, where you can set the following
parameters:

Temperature Fluid Temperature at the inlet

Pressure/Flowrate Specify the boundary condition in terms of a fixed pressure and/or flowrate.
Boundary The flowrate type can be selected. The flowrate can be entered in either
Condition stock tank or flowing conditions by using the "@" button.

PQ Curve Specify the boundary conditions in terms of a Pressure versus Flowrate

(PQ) curve (there must be at least 2 data points and a maximum of 30)

Type Flow type for the PQ Curve flowrate data.

Sink
A sink is a point in the network where the fluid leaves the system. It is normally used to represent a
surface outflow point as opposed to an injection well. A network model can have any number of
sinks (p.116). An injection well (p.39) can be used instead of a sink.
Right-click on a sink to display the following menu:

Data Access the Sink Properties (p.37) tab

Active If active is selected, the sink is included in the model at run time, otherwise it
is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of switching off parts
of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for the branch containing this sink.

Cut / Copy / Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and deleted.
Paste / Delete

Move to Top / For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to the
Move to Back top or bottom.

User Guide
36
PIPESIM User Guide

Sink Properties tab

Double-click a sink to open the Sink Properties tab, where you can set the following parameters:

Pressure Outlet pressure

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be entered
in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Branch
A branch is an object that connects two junctions or a source/sink to a junction. The branch can
contain flowlines and equipment. Production wells (p.38) and injection wells (p.39) are special
types of branches that combine a branch with a source (p.35) or sink (p.36).
Right-click on a branch to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Branch Properties (p.37), Limits (p.42) and Flow
Correlations (p.118) tabs.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab.

Import Single Branch Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be imported.
Model The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the branch is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of
switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Switch Flowline Changes the assumed direction of flow for this branch.
Geometry

Plot Results Plots the results for this branch.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
Delete deleted.

Move to Top / Move to For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to
Back the top or bottom.

Branch Properties tab

Double-click a branch to open the Branch Properties tab, where you can set the following
parameters:

Block Determines whether the branch is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse
acts as a non-return valve.

Estimates Estimates of the Pressure and/or flowrate for the branch (optional).

User Guide
37
PIPESIM User Guide

Network Separator
A point in the network where a stream removed from a separator can be directed to a sink or
injection well. Sometimes this is also known as a re-injector.
The network separator (reinjection node) acts in a similar manner to a junction. It links to the
following branches.

Note: The branch MUST not be connected directly to a sink/source/well. Place a node before the
sink/source/well and add a dummy branch. In addition, if there is a single branch connecting the
branch to a sink/source/well, that branch CANNOT be constrained.

Incoming / feed stream branch

The branch upstream of the network separator, that is before separation takes place.
Outgoing main stream branch
The branch where the main fluid, that is the remaining fluid after separation, goes.
Outgoing separated stream branch
The branch where the separated fluid goes.
The following must be defined:
• The incoming feed stream and the separated stream branches.
• Type of separator (liquid, gas, or water) and its efficiency.

Note: There will be a pressure discontinuity between the separator and the separated branch inlet.
This represents the pump, compressor, or choke required to adjust the stream's pressure to that
necessary to balance the remainder of the network.

See also: How to add objects (p.33), Separator Details (p.114)

Production Well
A production well is a well where the fluid enters the network. A network model can have any
number of production wells. A well can also be modelled using a well head performance curve
(p.40). This aids in the solution time of the network.
A production well is a combination of a completion, tubing, and surface and downhole equipment.
Right-click on a production well to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Production Well Properties (p.39), Limits (p.42),
Fluid Model (p.180), Flow Correlations (p.118) and Estimates (p.42)
tabs.

Fluid Model Gives access to the Fluid Model tab.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab

User Guide
38
PIPESIM User Guide

Import Single Branch Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be imported.
Model The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the well is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of
switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for this well.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
Delete deleted.

Move to Top / Move For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to
to Back the top or bottom.

Production Well Properties tab

Right-click on a production well and select Data to open the Properties tab, where you can set the
following pressure and flow boundary condition parameters:

Block Determines whether the well is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse acts
as a non-return valve and will stop the well from becoming an injection well. If the
solution algorithm determined that a production well, with block reverse set, was an
injector then it will be shut-in.

Pressure Inlet pressure, normally the static reservoir pressure.

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be
entered in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Well Curves Models the well using a well head performance curve (p.40).

Injection Well
An injection well is a well where the fluid leaves the network. A network model can have any
number of injection wells.
An injection well is a combination of a completion, tubing, and surface and downhole equipment.
Right-click on an injection well to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Injection Well Properties (p.40), Limits (p.42),
Flow Correlations (p.118) Estimates (p.42) tabs.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab.

Import Single Branch Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be imported.
Model The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the source is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of
switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

User Guide
39
PIPESIM User Guide

Plot Results Plot the results for this well.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
Delete deleted.

Move to Top / Move For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to
to Back the top or bottom.

Injection Well Properties tab

Right-click on an injection well and select Data to open the Properties tab, where you can set the
following pressure and flow boundary condition parameters:

Block Determines whether the well is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse acts as
a non-return valve and will stop the well from becoming a producer. If the solution
algorithm determined that an injection, with block reverse set, was a producer then it
will be shut-in

Pressure Outlet pressure, normally the static reservoir pressure.

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be entered
in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Well Curves
A production well in a network model can be modeled using a well performance curve of flowrate
versus [outlet] well head pressure - Well performance curves (p.203). These well performance
curve(s) are stored in ASCII files and can be created using a PIPESIM operation (p.194) or any
another suitable Nodal analysis package.
This option has been introduced for the following reasons:
• To reduce the time required to solve large networks. A significant amount of time is spent
computing well bore pressure losses.
• To ensure that the well operates in its stable region.
• To interface with 3rd party applications so that they can create these well curves, that is Shell's
WePs module.
• To ease debugging when wells do not flow and the network solution does not converge . In this
case the individual well curves can be examined to insure that the well will flow at the required
pressure.
To simulate a well, right-click on it and select Data. On the Properties tab, select the Well Curves
check box. Each production well can be simulated by one of the following options:
Create (during network run) only when necessary
The time stamp of the last created performance curve is checked. The curve is
regenerated automatically, if necessary. Once the file has been created, it can be viewed
using the Plot button.
Create on every network run
The performance curve is always regenerated. This is time consuming.

User Guide
40
PIPESIM User Guide

Online
Model the well online (the default). The well's details must be included in the PIPESIM
Network model.
Offline from a well performance curve file
The curve is generated by the simulator automatically, as it is needed. The well's details
must be included in the PIPESIM Network model.
With the curve(s) being pre-generated, the well's details need not be included in the
PIPESIM Network model. The data file may contain a number of well head curves over a
range of values, for example, reservoir pressure, watercut, and so on, so that it need only
be recreated if the operating conditions are outside the specified ranges. Before the
network can be solved, the exact value to use during the simulation must be defined.
Data Entry
If use Well Curves is selected.

Use File
Use a specific performance curve file for this well. A single file can be used by a number of wells.
The file can contain data over a range of values or a single point. Once you specify the file, the
options are as follows:
Sensitivities
Interrogates the performance curve file to determine what range of values it was created
over. A specific value for each variable must then be defined. Extrapolation is not allowed.
Plot Interpolated Curve
Plots the resulting interpolated curve that will be used during the simulation.
Plot
Plots all curves in the file.

Boundary Conditions
The network engine solves the mass, momentum and energy conservation equations for the fluid
pressures, flow rates and temperatures, in a network. Users must specify acceptable boundary
conditions. To view and/or modify boundary conditions, select Setup » Boundary Conditions....
This also displays the number of boundary conditions that are required and the number that have
been set.

Hydraulic boundary conditions (pressure and flow)

The requirements are as follows:
• The number of boundary conditions required for a model is known as the model's Degrees of
Freedom. This is equal to the total number of boundary nodes. That is, number of wells
(production and injection) + number of sources + number of sinks.
• A boundary condition specifies the pressure (P) or flowrate (Q). For sources, a pressure-
flowrate curve (C) can be specified.
• At least one pressure boundary condition must be specified.

User Guide
41
PIPESIM User Guide

• Normally there should be one boundary condition (P, Q or C) for each boundary node.
However, you can specify two boundary conditions, pressure and flow rate (PQ) at some
sources or production wells, and specify no boundary conditions at some sinks, as long as the
total number of boundary conditions equals the Degrees of Freedom.

Note: Use this flexibility with care as it may produce networks that cannot be solved.

Temperature boundary conditions

Users must specify the fluid temperature at all sources and the reservoir temperature for all
production wells. The fluid temperatures at all sinks and injection wells are always calculated.
Energy will be transferred from the fluid to the environment by heat loss, so ambient temperatures
and heat loss properties must be specified for each branch in a network.

Input fluids
The Fluid model (p.180) must be specified for each production well and each source.

Network Constraints
To set network constraints, select Setup » Flowrate Limits....
You have two options:
• Set flowrate limits for each branch in a network model. The flowrate limits apply both to forward
and reverse flows. So a flow limit of 20 STB/d will limit the flow to 20 STB/d independently of
whether the flow is backward or forward.
• Set flowrate limits for an individual network branch (network connector - flowline). Right-click on
the branch and select data, then click on the Limits tab.
The following flowrate limits can be set:
• Mass (p.614)
• Liquid (p.614)
• Water
• Oil
• Gas (p.614)

Network Estimates
Each time the network is solved, an initial estimate of the unknown boundary condition (inlet
pressure, outlet pressure or flowrate) in each branch is required.
Internal default estimates are provided as follows:
• Production/injection well static pressure = 5,000 psia
• Source/sink/node pressure = 1,000 psia
• Flowrate = 10 lb/s
However, it is possible to speed up network convergence by providing good estimates of the
unknown boundary condition in each branch. User estimates can be supplied locally and globally,

User Guide
42
PIPESIM User Guide

and four hierarchy options are available to specify which estimates should be used. To do this,
select Setup » Estimates. The following parameters are available:
Do not use any estimates
The internal default values, shown above, are used. This is sufficient in most cases.
(Default)
Use local if present else use global
If local estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the global values (if set),
otherwise use the internal defaults.
Use local everywhere
If local estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the internal defaults.
Use global everywhere
If global estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the internal defaults.
Set the local estimates by using the Pressure and Flowrate fields.
To aid convergence and speed of solution, the results from a previous converged solution can be
used as initial estimates. To do this, use the restart (p.211) feature. This overrides all settings
here, including the internal defaults.

Optimizing PIPESIM Network Simulation Performance

In general, Performance is a trade-off between speed and accuracy. When dealing with models
that are taking too long to run, there are several approaches that can be taken to improve the
network speed. Improving the speed may compromise the accuracy and you may need to reverse
some of the changes outlined in the approaches below to restore the appropriate level of accuracy,
once you have fine-tuned the model.

Approaches for Improving Network speed

• Approach 1: Change the PIPESIM execution and reporting settings
• Approach 2: Make high and low-level changes to the PIPESIM model

Note: After using the approaches above to improve the network speed and fine-tune the model, it
is important that you carefully reverse some/all of the changes, in order to regain accuracy.

Approach 1: Change the PIPESIM execution and reporting settings

The options outlined below do not modify the model but attempt to reduce the engine workload to
improve speed. You may need to do some trial-and-error to determine which one, or combination
of options below, is best for speeding up your model.

Option Details
Increase the PIPESIM 2012 (and newer) introduced a parallelized network solver where you
no. of allocated can run network simulations with multiple processors to increase the speed.
processors How do I do this?

User Guide
43
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Details
Go to Setup » Preferences » Engine. Increase the Number of processes for
Network engine. For more information, see Parallelized Network Solver (p.177)
License You may experience delays in running simulations if a network license server is
checkout at being used due to communication latency. By checking out available licenses at
startup startup, network latency is eliminated allowing faster performance when running
simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid models.
How do I do this?
Go to Setup » Preferences » Engine, then under License checkout, select
At startup (faster).
Add -v1 switch Adding the -v1 switch to the engine will minimize the simulation output written to
the PIPESIM engine console window.

Note: This is already the default setting for PIPESIM versions starting from 1.30.

How do I do this?
Go to Setup > Engine Preferences. Click the Advanced tab and type "-v1" in
the fields for the Single Branch and/or Network Engine Command Line
Parameters.
Use a Restart Using a restart file initializes the simulation by using the results from the
file previous simulation as estimates for the unknown variables. This is most
effective when you are running many similar scenarios with only small
variations. If minor changes (such as flow rates, pipe dimensions, and etc.)
have been made to a network, use the Restart function. However, if structural
changes (such as new pipes, wells deleted, inactive branches reactivated and
etc.) have occurred, run the model from scratch, or use the -r Restart option.
How do I do this?
Refer to the topic: Restart Model (p.211) for the steps to do this and the
limitations.Before using the restart function, make a backup of the restart file
(*p00.rst) in the model folder. If the model fails to solve, the saved restart file
can be used to make another attempt.
Minimize Minimizing the PIPESIM-Net console window after the engine starts will allow
engine console the computer to optimize updates to the window.
window How do I do this?
Once the simulation starts running, click Minimize on the top right of the engine
console window.
Run the model How do I do this?
locally Save the model to the local PC rather than to a Network drive. This will
eliminate any potential network delays. Also use a local PIPESIM license file,
rather than a network license, if possible.

User Guide
44
PIPESIM User Guide

Approach 2: Make high and low-level changes to the PIPESIM model

The following options will increase the simulation speed, but may sacrifice accuracy in doing so.
Use these options to fine-tune the model, but reverse them to get more accuracy, once this is
done. You may need to do some trial-and-error to determine which one, or combination of options
below, is best for speeding up your model. The high level changes are easy to reverse, the low
level changes might require a bit more work to reverse.

Option Level of Details

Change
Increase the High and PIPESIM solves the network using an iterative approach. It stops the
Tolerance Low calculation when the iterative error is less than a given tolerance.
Thus, the specified tolerance has a direct impact on the number of
iterations and the time taken to achieve an acceptable result. The
default tolerance is 1%. Increasing the tolerance will increase the
speed but will compromise the accuracy.

Note: The results with tolerance greater than 2% are not

recommended.

How do I do this?
For a network model, go to Setup > Iterations and enter a higher
tolerance value.
Specify flow Low Specifying flow rates as the boundary conditions at inlet nodes
rate as the inlet usually result in faster performance.
boundary How do I do this?
conditions
For a network model, go to Setup > Boundary Conditions. Delete
the pressure boundary conditions and enter flow rate boundary
conditions instead, but ensure that at least 1 pressure is specified to
satisfy the criteria required for the network to solve.
Change the High and The Moody friction factor is calculated as part of the multiphase
calculation Low pressure drop calculations (vertical and horizontal) when the single
method for the phase flow correlation option is set to Moody or Cullender-Smith. For
Moody friction more information, see Single Phase Flow Correlations. (p.373)
factor to There are three (3) options for the Moody fiction factor calculation. In
Approximate increasing order of accuracy, they are: Approximate/Moody (refer to
the Moody paper (p.577)), Explicit/Sonnad (refer to the Sonnad and
Goudar paper) (p.577), and Implicit/Iterative (Colebrook-White
equation or Moody chart). The default option is Explicit. Changing the
calculation method to Approximate will increase the speed but
decrease the accuracy.
How do I do this?
Go to Setup > Engine options and enter the following lines of
PIPESIM keywords (For a network model, enter the keywords in the
field; BOTTOM of the engine network file).

User Guide
45
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Level of Details

Change
OVERRIDE
SPHASE MOODYCALC = APPROXIMATE
Decrease the High and PIPESIM divides pipes into shorter segment lengths to do the
number of Low pressure drop calculations. The greater the pipe segmentation, the
segments per better the accuracy, but the slower the performance. The default
pipe length number of segments per pipe length in PIPESIM is 4. Decreasing this
number to 3, for example, will speed up the simulation. Decreasing it
to 2 will further speed up the simulation, but the answers may
become more unstable. Furthermore, if when using the user-
specified number of segments, PIPESIM encounters discontinuities,
it will override the specification and this will ultimately slow down the
simulation.
How do I do this?
Go to Setup > Engine options.
For the single branch model, enter a value less than the default value
of 4, in the Segments per pipe length field.
For the network model, click the Option Control tab and follow the
previous step.
Deactivate the High PIPESIM calculates fluid properties at the average pressure and
option to temperature for each segment. The average values for these
include extra properties may not be representative for the beginning and end of
one foot the segment (i.e. the nodes), particularly if the segment is long and
segments there are significant changes in pressure and temperature across it.
PIPESIM resolves this by adding short 1 foot segments at both ends
of each segment, by default. This will ensure accurate values at the
start and end of each node are reported, but it also slows down the
engine. If you are not interested in the exact values at the beginning
and end of each node, or are performing some fine tuning, you may
deactivate this option to speed up the simulation.
How do I do this?
For the network model, go to Setup > Engine Options. Click the
Option Control tab and deselect the box beside Additional short
segments either side of each node.
Alternatively, you may enter the keywords below in the field;
BOTTOM of the engine network file.
OVERRIDE
OPTION EOFS =OFF
Model wells in High and PIPESIM supports the ability to model production wells in a network,
offline mode Low in offline mode. This basically means the wells are modeled using
using well well performance curves for example, curves of flow rate versus
wellhead pressure generated as ASCII files by running multiple

User Guide
46
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Level of Details

Change
performance sensitivities in PIPESIM or any suitable Nodal Analysis package.
curves Choosing to model wells in offline mode in network models
significantly speeds up the simulation, especially if the networks are
large, because the time required to compute wellbore pressure
losses is eliminated. Additionally, a smooth curve ensures the well
operates in the stable region.
How do I do this?
1. For the network model, go to Setup > Boundary Conditions.
Check the PQ Curve box for each well that you want to use a well
performance curve for.
2. Right-click each well in the Network diagram and select Data. You
will observe that the Well Curves box is checked. This is the result
of Step 1. Choose the most appropriate of the 3 options for
generating the well curves. Refer to the topic, Well Curves (p.40)
for more details on each option.

Note: If the 3rd option to use files for the well performance curves
is chosen, the files can be generated by double-clicking on the
well to go to the single-branch mode and going to Operations >
Well performance curves to run the operation.

Refer to the topic:

Well performance curves (p.203) for more details.
Alternatively, if you are more comfortable with PIPESIM keywords,
you may enter the keywords below under Setup > Engine
Options at the bottom of the engine network file.
OVERRIDE
SETUP WOFLMODE= xxxxx
Where xxxx is the keyword for your preferred well curve option.
There are 3 of them: OFF, CREATE? and CREATE. Refer to the
main code SETUP (p.762) and the subcode WOFLMODE for
details on each option.
Changing the High In the Compositional fluid mode, flashing the fluid is computationally
Flashing expensive. An option for speeding up the network is selecting a
Settings faster, but less accurate, flashing option. PIPESIM has 3 flashing
options. In order of increasing accuracy but decreasing network
speed, they are:
• Always Interpolate (fastest): This option uses interpolation
between physical properties determined by in a predefined grid of
temperature and pressure points.

User Guide
47
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Level of Details

Change
• Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation
elsewhere: This is a compromise between speed and accuracy,
which assumes that properties will change more rapidly when
close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever
the grid points comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the
same phases. For example, if all 4 points in the rectangle have
some oil, some gas, and no water, then we assume the rectangle
lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase
envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two or
three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew
point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
• Always Rigorous Flash (slowest): Interpolation never occurs.
Properties are obtained by flashing at the required pressure and
temperature. This is the slowest but the most accurate method.
Refer to the PPMETHOD subcode in the Options Calculations
procedure (p.604) for more details.
How do I do this?
Double-click on each well can change the flash settings under Setup
> Flashing.
Switch to a Low Generally, black oil fluid models run faster than compositional fluid
Black Oil fluid models. However, Compositional fluid models are more accurate
model particularly when dealing with gas condensates and volatile oils. If
your model does not undergo a lot of compositional or phase
changes and/or the difference in results between running the
simulation in black oil vs. compositional mode is minimal, then it
would be reasonable to run the model in black oil mode to speed up
the simulation.
How do I do this?
If you have a compositional fluid model, change it to Black Oil by
selecting Setup > Black Oil. Enter the required values.
Changing Flow Low Changing flow correlations is another way of speeding up
Correlations simulations, but this option should be used with great caution. Flow
correlations should be chosen based on their ability to reproduce/
match the flowing pressures holdups, etc. observed in the field.
However, if different correlations yield similar (accurate) results but
varying simulation speeds, then it would be reasonable to choose the
flow correlation that yields the fastest simulation speed. The native
bja package is the fastest. 3rd party flow correlations, specifically the
3-phase mechanistic flow correlations, will typically be the slowest,
but most accurate.
How do I do this?
Change the flow correlations under Setup > Flow Correlations.

User Guide
48
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Level of Details

Change
Avoid loops in Low Loops in the network require PIPESIM to do extra checks to ensure
the network overall consistency (for example, elevation difference). Avoid loops
topology where possible to speed up the performance.
Provide High By default, the PIPESIM engines use internally set default estimates
reasonable for the boundary conditions. Under normal circumstances, the default
initial boundary user estimates are satisfactory. However, if the model has
condition particularly extreme flow rates and or pressures, these should be
estimates entered in the User estimates dialog box. Changing these to better
match the conditions of the system improves the convergence and
consequently, the speed.
How do I do this?
Go to Setup > Estimates. Select the behavior and enter the
estimates. Refer to the topic Network Estimates (p.42) for details.
Follow these High and • Try to split the model into smaller networks, which can be solved
general tips Low independently, before linking them all together. (This helps in
troubleshooting the model.)
• When first building the model, leave out equipment such as
compressors and separators, then incorporate them one at a time.
(Again, this helps troubleshooting.)
• When using a compressor or pump, define it initially with a Delta P
rather than with a power or user curve. It can be changed as
required later. Also, avoid defining a compressor with discharge
pressure, as this can have the effect of over-constraining a
system.
• Try to avoid unnecessary nodes in a network, as this increases
the computing time required to solve it.
• Avoid dangling or redundant branches.
• If the sinks are flow rate specified, and are consistently being
reported at atmospheric pressure upon simulation (see messages
in engine window), try changing the boundary condition to an
outlet pressure to see what flow rate can be achieved.
• When first attempting to solve a large network, increase the
convergence tolerance to 5% and check the validity of the results.
The tolerance can later be reduced and the model restarted.
• If a branch appears to be behaving strangely, or is ill-conditioned,
split it into smaller segments. This aids troubleshooting and
improves continuity along the branch.
• If the program crashes part way through an iteration with "file
open" or "macopen" errors, this is due to the processor running
out of memory. Simply restart the model; the program will start

User Guide
49
PIPESIM User Guide

Option Level of Details

Change
from where it left off. Use the PIPESIM toolbar Restart button in
this case.
• Try to avoid having long flowlines and risers in the same branch.

Reversing the changes made to PIPESIM models to optimize their simulation performance
After using the approaches above to optimize the network performance and fine-tune the PIPESIM
model, it is important that you carefully reverse some/all of the above changes in order to regain
accuracy. A subset of some (not all) of the changes that may need to be reversed are outlined
below:
• Tolerance: Restore the default tolerance of 1%. Generally, increasing the tolerance above the
default value of 1% will increase network speed but decrease accuracy. Decreasing the
tolerance to 0.1% or lower will significantly increase the simulation time.
• Moody friction factor: Change the Moody friction factor calculation method back to the default,
EXPLICIT or the most accurate method, IMPLICIT. Do this by replacing the keyword
APPROXIMATE, which was recommended in the previous section to speed up the
performance, with EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT (Refer to the previous section for Help with entering
the keywords correctly).
• Boundary conditions: Enter appropriate boundary conditions that are fit for purpose.
• Extra one foot segments: Reactivate the option to add extra one foot segments under Engine
options or by deleting the keywords recommended in the previous section (Refer to the
previous section for details).
• Wells offline: Switch wells from offline mode, where they are modeled using well performance
curves, back on, so the detailed wellbore pressure loss calculations can be done. Do this by
unchecking the option to use PQ curves in the Boundary conditions (Refer to the previous
section for details).
• Flashing settings: If working with a Compositional fluid, select a more accurate flashing
option; Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere or Always
Rigorous Flash. Refer to the previous section for details.
• Flow correlations: Select the flow correlations that most closely reproduce the rates,
pressures, holdups, etc. recorded in the field.
• Loops: Enter accurate and representative topology for the loops in the network.

1.2.3 Single Branch Models

Well Performance Analysis Overview
Well Performance analysis involves modeling a production or injection well, including any artificial
lift.

Well Performance Specific Operations

The following operations are available:

User Guide
50
PIPESIM User Guide

• Nodal Analysis (p.199)

• Reservoir tables (p.201)
• Optimum horizontal well length (p.52)
• Artificial Lift Performance (p.212)
• Pressure Temperature Profile (p.196)
• Gas lift rate vs casing head pressure (p.203)
• Flow correlation comparison (p.197)
• Systems Analysis (p.195)

Well Performance
Perform the following basic steps to build a well model (single or multiple completion):
1. Select the units (p.169) set to use.
2. Specify the well's completion type, one of the following:
• Vertical (p.57)
• Multiple (p.51)
• Horizontal (p.51)
3. Add the necessary components to the model (tubing, choke, and so on) and define the
necessary data.
4. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.497) or compositional (p.139)).
5. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.497).
6. Define suitable vertical correlations (p.636) and Horizontal correlations (p.640).
7. Save the model (p.34)

Multilayer Reservoir IPR

A Multilayer reservoir model can be defined by several layers (completions). These can, if required,
be separated by sections of tubing.
In a multilayer model, each layer can have the following:
• A different IPR method.
• Different fluid model properties. That is, each layer can have a different watercut, GOR, or a
different composition, and so on.
• Different fluid types for each layer. Oil and gas layers can be mixed.

Note: As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

More details (p.72)

Horizontal Well Completion

This refers to a horizontal completion with multiple sources along the horizontal wellbore, taking
into account reservoir drawdown and wellbore pressure drop. The horizontal well performance

User Guide
51
PIPESIM User Guide

models included in PIPESIM allow the user to accurately predict hydraulic wellbore performance in
a horizontal completion. As such, they are an integral part of the reservoir-to-surface analysis.
A horizontal well model can be used in all Operations modes. However, you may be especially
interested in investigating the productivity of a horizontal completion using the Optimum Horizontal
Completion Length (p.52) option.
Reservoir inflow and wellbore pressure drop equations are solved to calculate the changing
production rate along the well length. More details (p.417)

Distributed PI mode
In Distributed PI mode the inflow performance is expressed as a Productivity Index (PI) per unit
length which can be assigned explicitly (Distributive PI) or calculated using the following:
• Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Steady-State (gas reservoirs)
• Pseudo-Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo-Steady-State (gas reservoirs) productivity equations.
In this mode the pressure drop along the horizontal completion is computed.
These equations take account of the effect of the vertical/horizontal permeability ratio, completion
skin, and reservoir thickness.

Single point PI mode

In Single Point PI mode inflow is assumed to be at the heel of the well only (no pressure drop
along the horizontal completion is computed). The following IPRs are available:
• Pseudo Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo Steady-State (gas reservoirs)
• Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Steady-State (gas reservoirs)

Horizontal completion length

Using the Optimum Horizontal Completion analysis option, PIPESIM accurately predicts the
hydraulic wellbore performance in the completion. This is an integral part of PIPESIM's reservoir-
to-surface analysis.
The technique subdivides the horizontal completion into vertical cross-sections and treats flow
independently from other cross-sections. This multiple source concept leads to a pressure gradient
from the blind-end (Toe) to the producing-end (Heel) which, if neglected, results in over-predicting
deliverability. The reduced drawdown at the Toe results in the production leveling-off as a function
of well length and it can be shown that drilling beyond an optimum length would yield no significant
additional production. Several IPRs are available. These are solved with the wellbore pressure
drop equations to yield the changing production rate along the well length.

Note: To use the Optimum Horizontal Completion option, you must include a horizontal well
completion in the system model.

User Guide
52
PIPESIM User Guide

How to determine the optimal horizontal completion length

Follow these basic steps to determine the optimal horizontal completion length:
1. Build the well performance model (p.51), include the horizontal completion.
2. Select the Horizontal completion length operation.
3. Enter the required data.
4. Run (p.194) the operation.
5. Save the model (p.34).

Horizontal Completion data entry

To access this area, double-click a horizontal completion.

Properties Tab
Use this tab to set up the Reservoir data and IPR model.

Reservoir data
The reservoir boundary conditions must be specified:
Static Pressure:
The static reservoir pressure
Temperature
The reservoir temperature

IPR Model
Select Distributed or Single Point model and select the model type, one of the following:
Distributed PI (Finite Conductivity)
The complete length of the horizontal section is modeled. See Well bore... (p.93)
Single Point PI (Infinite Conductivity)
The input data is used to compute an equivalent straight line PI value and this is then used
as single point inflow.
Model type is the type of IPR model to use for calculation. Each option requires a different set of
parameters, as described below.

SS Oil (Joshi) and SS Gas (Joshi)

Reservoir Size
Rextn
External boundary radius of the drainage area
Thickness
Reservoir thickness

User Guide
53
PIPESIM User Guide

Well Location
Eccen
Well bore eccentricity. This is the offset of the well from the center of the pay zone.

Reservoir Properties
Kx
Permeability in the x-direction, that is Kh
Ky
Permeability in the y-direction, that is parallel to the well
Kz
Permeability in the z-direction, that is Kv

Well Properties
Length
Length of the horizontal well (completion). Assuming that the horizontal completion is
exactly horizontal. A profile for the horizontal section can be entered using the Well bore...
button. The length must not be greater than the reservoir diameter (that is twice the
reservoir extension radius Rextn).
Rw
Sandface radius, that is. pipe+annulus+cement
Skin
Mechanical skin factor. Can be entered or computed. To compute the skin, select the
Calculate Skin check box. This activates the Options (p.56) button. If the value is
computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value.

Single Point PI only

The following data are required for single point PI only:
Fluid properties
At reservoir conditions (the first two parameters are alternatives):
OFVF
Oil Formation Volume Factor (oil well)
Gas Z
gas compressibility factor (gas well)
Viscosity
fluid viscosity
Calculate PI
Compute the single point PI values from the data supplied.

Distributed PI only
Well bore... (p.93)

User Guide
54
PIPESIM User Guide

PSS Oil (Babu and Odeh) and PSS gas (Babu and Odeh)

Reservoir Size

Note: this is referenced only in PSS gas.

X dim
drainage width perpendicular to the well
Y dim
drainage width parallel to the well
Thickness
reservoir thickness

Well Location (based on the well midpoint)

Note: this is referenced only in PSS gas.

X well
x coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.
Y well
y coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.
Z well
z coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.

Reservoir Properties
Kx
Permeability in the x-direction, that is Kh
Ky
Permeability in the y-direction, that is parallel to the well

User Guide
55
PIPESIM User Guide

Kz
Permeability in the z-direction, that is Kv

Well Properties
Length
length of the horizontal well (completion). (This assumes that the horizontal completion is
exactly horizontal.) A profile for the horizontal section can be entered using the
Well bore... (p.93)
button.
Rw
Sandface radius. That is, pipe+annulus+cement
Skin
Mechanical skin factor. Can be entered or computed. To compute the skin, select the
Calculate Skin check box . This activates the Options (p.56). If the value is computed,
sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value.

Single Point PI only

The following data are required when you specify Single Point PI as the IPR model:
Fluid properties
enter these for reservoir conditions
OFVF
Oil Formation Volume Factor (oil well)
Gas Z
gas compressibility factor (gas well)
Viscosity
fluid viscosity
Calculate PI
Click this button to compute the single point PI values from the data supplied.

Distributed PI only
The following data are required when you specify Distributed PI as the IPR model and select
Distributed PI as the model type:
Distributed PI
Enter a straight line PI value for liquid or gas.
Well bore... (p.93)
Click the button to set the properties.

Horizontal Completion Well Properties Options

This dialog opens when you select the Calculate skin check box on the Properties tab and click
the Options button.

User Guide
56
PIPESIM User Guide

Damaged Zone
Diameter
Diameter of the damaged zone around the well bore. The default is the well bore radius,
that is the damaged zone does not exist
Permeability
Permeability of the damaged zone around the well bore. The default is the formation
permeability.

Gravel Pack
Permeability
Permeability of the gravel pack. The default is estimated according to the sieve size.
Tunnel
Length of the tunnel. This is usually the sum of the thickness of cement, casing and
annulus. The default =0

Compacted zone
Diameter
Diameter of the compacted zone (or crushed zone) around the perforation. The default is
the diameter of the perforation (that is, the compacted zone does not exist).
Permeability
Permeability of the compacted zone (or crushed zone) around the perforation. The default
is the permeability of the damaged zone.

Perforation
Diameter
Diameter of the perforation into the formation. The default = 0.5 inches, 12.7 mm
Length
Length of the perforation into the formation. The default = infinity (which results in a zero
skin due to perforation)
Shot Density
Shot density. The default = 4 shots/ft ,13.12 shots/m

Calculate Skin
Calculate
Click the Calculate button to compute the skin from the data supplied. This overwrites any
value already set.

Vertical Well Completion

The vertical completion component models flow from the reservoir to the bottom hole using an
inflow performance relationship. More details (p.386).
The following data must be entered:

User Guide
57
PIPESIM User Guide

Reservoir Data
• Static Pressure
• Temperature

Note: The pressure may be a calculated variable, provided that the other two boundary conditions,
flowrate and outlet pressure, are entered.

IPR Model
Inflow Performance Relationship (p.386)
Relationship between completion drawdown and flowrate.
Flow Control Valve (FCV)
The default is a completion without FCV. To use an FCV, select the check box and click
FCV Properties to configure it.

Local fluid properties

Local Fluid properties that pertain to this completion.

Note: Vertical completions can be "stacked" to form a multiple completion well and (optional)
tubing can be placed between the completions. Thus each completion can have its own fluid
properties.

PI Data

Data required
The following parameters are required for a PI (p.387) IPR.
PI coefficient
A function of bottom hole flowing pressure (Pwf) , Static reservoir pressure (Pws) and
Flowrate (Q).
Vogel Below bubble point correction
Use this in cases of undersaturated reservoirs where wellbore pressure may be above or
below the bubble point. Note: The "Well PI with Vogel correction below the bubble point"
completion model is only intended for use when the reservoir pressure is above the bubble
point. If the static reservoir pressure is below the bubble point, then you should use a
different completion model, for example Vogel (p.388) or Fetkovich (p.389) which are
intended for saturated fluids.
Calculate/Graph button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.63) data.

Vogel's Equation Data

The Vogel equation (p.388) was developed to model saturated oil wells.

User Guide
58
PIPESIM User Guide

Data required
If you select Vogel's Equation as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:
Abs. Open Flow Potential
The maximum liquid flowrate that the well could deliver if the bottom hole pressure was 0.
In the Absolute Open Flow Potential section, enter the following data that will be used to
calculate the AOFP:
PI Coefficient
The value is usually around 0.8 (the default).
Q
The actual flowrate of the well from a well test.
Pwf
Flowing bottom hole pressure
Pws
Static Reservoir pressure
Calculate AOFP
use the above data to compete the AOFP. This overwrites any values already entered for
the AOFP.

Fetkovich's Equation Data

Fetkovich's equation (p.389) is a development of the Vogel equation to take account of high
velocity effects.

Data required
If you select Fetkovich's Equation as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab,
the following parameters are displayed:
Open Flow Potential
The well's maximum flowrate.
n exponent:

Calculate/Graph button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.63) data.

Jones' Equation Data

Data required
If you select Jones' equation (p.390) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties
tab, the following parameters are displayed:
Fluid type; Liquid or Gas:
Changes the units of the A and B coefficients

User Guide
59
PIPESIM User Guide

A (turb)
turbulent coefficient, must be => 0
B (lam)
laminar coefficient, must be => 0
Calculate/Graph... button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.63) data.

Jones 4-point test

To run a Jones 4-point test, do the following:
1. Select Jones IPR
2. Click Calculate » Graph....
3. Select multipoint (p.63)
4. Enter the static reservoir pressure.
5. Enter the reservoir temperature.
6. Enter up to 4 test rates and associated test pressures.
7. Press the Plot IPR or Plot fit button and the coefficients A and B will be computed.
8. Select OK

Backpressure Data
Rawlins and Schellhardt developed the Backpressure equation in 1935.

Data required
If you select Backpressure equation (p.391) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion
Properties tab, the following parameters are displayed:
C
Constant (intercept at log flow rate = 1.0)
n
Inverse Slope. For pure laminar flow n=1 and 0.5 for completely turbulent flow. n is limited
to 0.5<n<1
Calculate/Graph button
Click this to compute the required parameters C and n from multi-rate test (p.63) data. At
least three data sets must be supplied.

4-point test
To run a Back Pressure 4-point test, do the following:
1. On the Vertical Completion Properties tab, select Backpressure IPR.
2. Select Calculate » Graph..
3. Select multipoint (p.63).
4. Enter the static reservoir pressure.

User Guide
60
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Enter the reservoir temperature.

6. Enter up to 4 test rates and associated test pressures.
7. Click Plot IPR or Plot fit. The coefficients C and n will be computed.
8. Click OK.

Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Data

The Pseudo steady-state equation (p.392) assumes that the fluid is single phase, that laminar flow
exists, and that the fluid is (essentially) incompressible. The equation is based on single phase
flow, therefore you are prompted to select the basis for the equation; either Liquid or Gas.
A Vogel correction is available for liquid flow below the bubble point. For gas systems, you can
choose to use gas pseudo pressure or a pressure squared approximate (only reliable for low
pressure systems).

Data required
If you select Pseudo Steady-State as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab,
the following parameters are displayed:

Basis of IPR calculation

Specify whether the calculations are to be performed on a Liquid or Gas basis. Your selection
changes the following parameter choices.
Use Vogel below bubble point
Apply the equation for calculating the productivity above the bubble point and the Vogel
relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Liquid as the IPR Basis.

Use pseudo pressure method

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Gas as the IPR Basis.

Reservoir Thickness
Average formation thickness.

Wellbore Diameter
Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement. The default is 6 inches.

Permeability
This is the average formation permeability. Typical values (p.569).

Reservoir Size/Shape
Take into account the effect of the shape of the reservoir (and the position of the well relative to
boundaries), by way of a shape factor. The default is a circular reservoir shape (shape factor
31.62).

User Guide
61
PIPESIM User Guide

Drainage Radius
Radius of external boundary of drainage area. Default 2,000 feet. Typical values (p.569).
Shape factor
Identify the physical location of a well in relationship to the reservoir boundaries. Default
31.62 circular reservoir, see figure below.
Reservoir Area
Area of the reservoir. Typical values (p.569).

Skin
Skin value has two components, a Mechanical (constant) term and a rate dependent term. (For
example, if the rate is 20 mmscf/d, the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/
mmscf/d, the total skin would be 5). Both mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be
entered or calculated (from completion description).

Mechanical Skin
Enter Skin
Dimensionless constant skin factor
Calculate skin
Model the completion in detail and thus compute the skin factor using completion options
(p.66). If the skin is computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value,
but sensitivities can be performed on any completion description parameter (for example
shots per foot, perforation depth, and so on).

Rate Dependent Skin

Enter Skin
Dimensionless Rate dependent skin factor
Calculate
Calculate the rate dependent skin terms for all the components specified in the completion
options (p.66) description.

Forchheimer Equation Data

Data required
If you select Forchheimer's equation (p.390) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion
Properties tab, the following parameters are displayed:
F (turb)
Turbulent coefficient, this must be => 0
A (lam)
Laminar coefficient, this must be => 0
Calculate/Graph button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.63) data.

User Guide
62
PIPESIM User Guide

Multi-rate
In addition to the standard IPR equations, test data can be utilized so that the inflow can be
matched to actual measured data. A minimum of three data points is required. Two types of multi-
rate test are available:
Multipoint (default)
A 'flow-after-flow' test sequence. Static pressure is taken as a constant throughout the test
period. The flowrate (Q) and corresponding flowing bottom hole pressure (Pwf) are
required. These are entered into the spreadsheet.
Isochronal
This type of test is normally performed in reservoirs with low permeability where the time
taken to reach stabilized flow conditions is unacceptably long (such as low permeability
sands). Isochronal testing is performed by periods of flowing followed by shutting-in of a
well (normally with increasing rate). The wellbore flowing pressure is recorded during each
flow period at a specific time (for example if the time is 4 hours, then the test is referred to
as a 4-hour isochronal test). Due to the long stabilization time normally associated with the
isochronal test, reservoir conditions need not return to the original static pressure. Hence a
different static reservoir pressure is recorded. The flowrate (Q), flowing bottom hole
pressure (Pwf) and static reservoir pressure (Pws) are required. These are entered into
the spreadsheet.
Once the test data has been entered it can be plotted using either;
Plot IPR
plots the actual IPR to be used, with the test data superimposed.
Plot Fit
plots the log log fit, with the test data superimposed.
The IPR constants (for example PI, A and B, C and n, and so on) will be computed and displayed
in the Fitted constants section.
Select the Chart » Print option to print or export the plot.

Hydraulic fracture reservoir properties

This topic describes the reservoir data to enter when you use the hydraulic fracture equation for
vertical completions.

Note: The Fractured Well IPR type uses a digitized, constant rate, finite-conductivity, closed
square, fractured well type-curve to calculate the effect of a vertically drilled well that has been
hydraulically fractured. This is the same method used in the Schlumberger FracCADE software.

• The well is assumed to be in the center of a square reservoir with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
• The type curves used in the calculation are taken from Reservoir Stimulation 2nd Edition by
Econimides and Nolte, Chapter 8 by Hai-Zui Meng and SPE paper 16435 and are best suited
for tight gas wells. Type curves are generated using single-phase, two-dimensional finite
difference simulators for ranges of system properties (permeability, porosity, fluid viscosity, total
system compressibility) and the characteristic length of the system, fracture half-length. These

User Guide
63
PIPESIM User Guide

are then used to compute Dimensionless time (valid range: 10e-5 - 10e3), Dimensionless
wellbore pressure, and Dimensionless fracture conductivity (valid range 0.1 - 500).

Property Description
Reservoir pressure Static reservoir pressure
Reservoir Reservoir temperature
temperature
IPR basis Basis for IPR calculation (liquid or gas)
Use Vogel below (Available for liquid-based IPR only) Uses a type-curve equation for
bubble point calculating the productivity above the bubble point, and the Vogel
relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point. If the
watercut exceeds 60%, using Vogel's equation is not recommended.
Reservoir thickness Average formation thickness.
Reservoir Average formation permeability. For a gas well, this is gas permeability. For
permeability an oil well, this is total liquid permeability.
Reservoir radius Radius of external boundary of drainage area. The default value is 2,000
feet.
Borehole diameter Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement.
The default value is 6 inches.
Fracture half length The length of the fracture extending out in one direction from the wellbore,
which is half of the total fracture length.
Fracture The effective permeability to the primary fluid of the fracture proppant under
permeability reservoir conditions.
Fracture width Average width of the fractures in a hydraulically fractured reservoir.
Use transient model Select the Transient model check box to model a well when the well has
not reached pseudo-steady-state conditions. When selected, the following
properties appear:
Time
Time well has been producing
Porosity
Pore volume/bulk volume
Compressibility
Total compressibility of the reservoir

Transient IPR Data

Data required
If you select Transient (p.397) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:

User Guide
64
PIPESIM User Guide

Basis of IPR calculation

Specify whether the calculation are to be performed on a Liquid or Gas basis. Your selection
changes the following parameter choices.
Use Vogel below bubble point
Apply a type-curve equation for calculating the productivity above the bubble point and the
Vogel relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point. The Vogel correction
is not recommended if the water cut exceeds 60%.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Liquid as the IPR Basis.

Use pseudo pressure method

Using (Pres2 - Pbhp2) for the delta P term in the pseudo steady state equation for Gas is
correct only for low pressures (< ~ 2,000 psia).
A more accurate way is to use (MPres - MPbhp) instead where MP is the pseudo pressure
(which itself is a function of pressure, Z factor and viscosity). This is more valid over the
entire range of pressures.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Gas as the IPR Basis.

Permeability and other Parameters

To plot the IPR, click Plot IPR. Enter the following parameters:
Reservoir Permeability
Average formation permeability. The default is infinity. Typical values (p.566).
Reservoir Thickness
Average formation thickness. The default is infinity.
Wellbore Diameter
The default is 6 inches.
Drainage Radius
Radius of external boundary of drainage area. The default is 2,000 feet. Typical values
(p.569)
Time
Duration of the drawdown period in hours.
Porosity
Average porosity of the reservoir rock.
Total Compressibility
Saturation weighted compressibility of the entire reservoir-liquid system
(ct = coSo + cwSw + cf )

User Guide
65
PIPESIM User Guide

Skin parameters
Skin value has two components, a Mechanical (constant) term and a rate dependent term (for
example if the rate is 20 mmscf/d and the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/
mmscf/d, then the total skin would be 5). Both mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be
entered or calculated (from completion description).

Mechanical Skin.
Choose from the following:
Enter Skin
Dimensionless constant skin factor.
Calculate
Model the completion in detail and thus compute the skin factor using completion options
(p.66). If the skin is computed then sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin
value, but sensitivities can be performed on any completion description parameter (for
example shots per foot, perforation depth and so on).

Rate Dependent Skin.

Choose from the following:
Enter Skin
Dimensionless Rate dependent skin factor.
Calculate
Calculate the rate dependent skin terms for all the components specified in the completion
options (p.66) description.

Completion Options
Both the Pseudo Steady State (p.61) and the Transient (p.397) IPRs use a skin factor to
determine the flow into the well. PIPESIM allows you to enter a skin factor, or to calculate it using
Completion Options. To use Completion Options, first select one or both of the Calculate radio
buttons in the Mechanical Skin and Rate Dependent Skin boxes.

Skin factor
The skin factor is calculated by summing contributions from five different components:
Damaged Zone Skin
models the effect of reduced (or improved) permeability in a zone around the well. The
diameter and permeability of the damaged zone must be supplied, otherwise they will
default to the well bore diameter and the formation permeability, and the damaged zone
skin will be zero.
Partial Penetration / Deviation Skin
models geometric effects, such as partial penetration of the reservoir layer and deviation of
the well from vertical. If the open interval is equal to the reservoir thickness and the well is
vertical (0 degrees deviation) then the partial penetration / deviation skin will be zero.

User Guide
66
PIPESIM User Guide

Gravel Pack Skin

models the effect of a gravel pack in the well bore, between a screen and the reservoir.
Also, the pressure drop contribution from the gravel pack is calculated and reported in the
output and system plot files.
Perforation Skin
models the effects of perforations. A compacted zone around the perforations is included.
Frac Pack Skin
models a well that has been fractured.
The Skin factor can be either negative (enhanced inflow) or positive (reduced inflow).

Completion models
In Completion Options you can select one of five completion models. Skin components
appropriate to each completion model are calculated, as detailed in Vertical Well mechanical skin
factor calculation (p.405). You can choose to turn off any component of the skin.

Completion Damaged Partial Gravel Perforation Frac

model Zone Skin Penetraion / Pack Skin Pack
Deviation Skin Skin
Skin
Open Hole Assumes the well is not Yes Yes
lined or cemented
Open Hole Assumes the well bore is Yes Yes Yes
Gravel Pack Open Hole, with the
addition of a gravel pack
Perforated Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes
or cemented, and
perforated
Gravel Packed Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes Yes
and Perforated or cemented, and
perforated, with the
addition of a gravel pack
Frac Pack Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes Yes
or cemented, perforated
and has been fractured.
The data entered in the Completion Options dialog is passed to the engines to calculate the IPR
during simulation. An approximate value of the skin used during the simulation can be determined
by clicking on the Calculate Skin button. This value may not be exact, since some of the skin
calculations may depend on fluid properties which are only calculated during the simulation.

User Guide
67
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.1. Open Hole Completion

User Guide
68
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.2. Open Hole Gravel Pack Completion

User Guide
69
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.3. Perforated Completion

User Guide
70
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.4. Gravel Packed and Perforated Completion

User Guide
71
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.5. Frac Pack Completion

Multilayer Reservoir IPR

A multilayer reservoir model is easy to construct. If the fluids from multiple layers are NOT
commingled, the individual layers can be treated as two separate wells and modeled in the
Network model connected at the wellhead. Otherwise the Well Performance module can be used
to model the commingled flow.

User Guide
72
PIPESIM User Guide

Any number of reservoir intervals (layers) can be added to the model. The layers can be either
stacked on top of each other (that is with common flowing bottom hole pressure) or separated by a
length of conduit (such as tubing or casing) if required.

Note: As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

Layers
A completion icon represents each layer:

Therefore, if required, each layer can have a different Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) and
also a different fluid model.
Tubing strings or connectors may be used to separate layers. This ensures the layers are
positioned at different elevations. If a tubing string is used, elevational and frictional pressure drops
are calculated between the layers, and each layer has a different production pressure (PWF).

User Guide
73
PIPESIM User Guide

Care should be taken when defining the dimensions of the tubing between the layers. Each tubing
object will have to be defined independently. It is only important to ensure that the relative distance
from top to bottom of each icon (that is between each completion) is correct. Therefore, for
example, each tubing icon can be assumed to start from a depth reference of zero. Alternatively
the TVDs and MDs at the tubing/layer junctions can be made to match, so each deeper tubing
object would be made to start at the deepest point of the adjoining shallower tubing.
Make sure also that the correct ambient temperature(s) for each tubing is specified.
By default PIPESIM allows back flow (that is reverse flow) into (or, in an injection well, out of) any
layer. To block back flow in any layer, the appropriate keyword can be set (LAYER INJECT = NO
(p.664)) by placing an EKT (p.92) upstream of the completion in question.

Tubing Tool
Placing a tubing object in the model allows modeling of vertical or deviated flow (production or
injection) in a well bore. Heat transfer (p.98) can be modeled by either entering or computing an

User Guide
74
PIPESIM User Guide

overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) or using the Ramey Model (p.79). The tubing object is a
connection (p.33) object, so must be placed between two node (p.33) objects.
Normally only one tubing object is required for a well model. The exception is when multiple
completions are modeled.
The tubing can be defined as either of the following types of model:
• simple (p.75) model — simplified interface
• detailed (p.77) model
Data entered under the simple model can be converted to a detailed model using the Convert to
detailed model button at any time.
Use the detailed profile model if any of the following situations apply:
• The well is highly deviated
• It has more than four changes in tubing size
• A geothermal gradient is known
• The overall heat transfer coefficient is not the same as the default (0.2 Btu/hr/ft2), or needs to
vary through the depth of the tubing
• More than one piece of downhole equipment needs to be modeled. That is, there are multiple
gas lift injection points.

Note: If different data is entered in both the simple and detailed models, PIPESIM uses the data in
the Preferred Tubing model that was selected when the Tubing Tool dialog was closed.

See also: Coiled Tubing/Velocity String (p.85)

Simple Profile Model

The tubing (p.74) object, once added to the model (p.33), requires the following information:

User Guide
75
PIPESIM User Guide

Perforations
This data determines the extent of the tubing modeled. That is, the MD/TVD is taken as the fluid
inflow point. Enter the following parameters:
MD (Measured depth)
total length of the tubing to the perforations. This will always be equal to, or greater than,
the TVD
TVD
true vertical depth
Reservoir Temperature
fluid temperature

User Guide
76
PIPESIM User Guide

Tubing sections

Note: Up to four tubing items can be defined. If more are required, use the detailed model (p.77)
profile.

Enter the following parameters for each section:

From MD
start MD for this tubing's section. This is computed automatically from the initial MD or
from the last set tubing depth, that is the "to MD column".
To MD
end MD for this tubing's section. This MUST always be entered.
ID
inner diameter of the tubing section.

Convert to Detailed model

The data entered into the simple model can be exported to the detailed (p.77) model using the
Convert to detailed model button.

Note: Any data already entered under the detailed model is overwritten.

Summary table
Summary table (p.80)

Detailed profile model

To configure a tubing (p.74) object, once added to the model (p.33), double-click the tubing, select
Detailed Model, and use the following tabs.

Deviation Survey Tab

Set two of the MD, TVD and angle for at least two data points. Compute the third using the
Calculate button. (Default = compute angle). The wellbore profile can be copied from any other
spreadsheet application. If the well profile is straight, the deviation survey can be omitted.

Geothermal Survey Tab

Enter ambient temperatures at various depths (the depths can be either based on MD or TVD). If
the Input U value radio button is selected, also enter the overall heat transfer coefficient values
(U-values) at the various depths. The minimum data you must enter is at the well head and bottom
hole. If you want the U-values to be calculated, select the Calculate U Value radio button; the U
Value column is greyed-out so that you cannot enter any values. Click Heat Transfer Properties
to enter the Tubing Heat Transfer Properties (p.79) for the heat transfer calculation.

User Guide
77
PIPESIM User Guide

Tubing Configurations Tab

Up to 200 changes of tubing configuration can be modeled. The data entered here determine the
extent of the tubing modeled. That is, the bottom of the last tubing section is taken as the fluid
inflow point.
The parameters are as follows:
Bottom MD
Measured Depth of the bottom of the tubing.
ID
tubing inside diameter, See also tubing tables (p.557)
Wall Thickness
tubing thickness, default 0.5 inches 12.7 mm. See also tubing tables (p.557)
Roughness
absolute pipe roughness, default 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm. See also Roughness tables
(p.567)
Casing ID
casing ID is only required if the flow type is set to "Annular" or "Tubing+Annulus" flow or
the Alhanati (p.231) instability check is to be made. See also Casing tables (p.557).
Flow Type
flow path up the tubing. Select one of the following options:
• Tubing (default)
• Annulus or
• Tubing+Annulus.
The label is optional, but allows key points in the profile to be highlighted in the output
report.

Downhole Equipment Tab

Select the type, position (in terms of its MD), properties and optional label of any downhole
equipment. Click Properties to configure each item of equipment, as follows:
• Gas Lift Injection Properties (p.82) button
• ESP Properties button
• PCP Properties (p.191) button
• Rod Pump Properties (p.238)
• Choke Properties (p.433), button
• SSSV (p.433). Enter the bean ID using the Properties button.
• Separator Properties (p.114) button
• Keyword Tool Properties (p.92) button
• Injector Properties (p.99) button

User Guide
78
PIPESIM User Guide

Gas lift valves

Click G/L Valve system (p.82) to enter Gas lift valves.

Note: Using Gas lift injection points is different from adding Gas Lift valves. The valve option takes
into account the physics of the gas lift system, whereas the injection point assumes that the
amount of gas supplied can always be injected. See Gas Lift system (p.213) for more details.

Wellbore Heat Transfer

Various input data can be entered in the Tubing Heat Transfer Properties dialog to compute the
overall heat transfer coefficient (p.474).
To open this dialog, open a detailed tubing model, select the Geothermal Survey tab and click
Heat Transfer Properties.

Ground Properties
The parameters are as follows:
Thermal Conductivity
The ground/rock thermal conductivity (default = 1.5 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Specific Heat Capacity
The ground/rock specific heat capacity (default = 0.2 BTU/lb/F).
Density
The ground/rock density (default = 140 lb/ft3)

Wellbore Properties
The parameters are as follows:
Production/Injection Time
The time the well has been producing/injecting (default = 168 hr).
Tubing Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the tubing material (default = 35 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Completion Fluid Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the completion fluid in the annular space between the tubing
and the casing (default = 3.2 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Casing Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the casing material (default = 35 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Casing Thickness
The thickness of casing.
Cement Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the cement between the casing and the rock/ground (default =
2 BTU/hr/ft/F).

User Guide
79
PIPESIM User Guide

Cement Thickness
The thickness of cement.

Figure 1.6. Typical Wellbore

Summary tubing table

To view this table, double-click a tubing object and click Summary Table in the dialog. The dialog
has the following three sections:

Configuration summary
There is just one parameter, as follows:
Spreadsheet
shows a summary of the nodes that will be used to model the well and any equipment or
ID changes in the tubing. The data cannot be changed here.

User Guide
80
PIPESIM User Guide

Options
The parameters are as follows:
Distance between nodes
to speed up the calculations, increase the distance. To make the calculation more
accurate, decrease it. (Default =1,000 ft).
Refresh
update the spreadsheet after the node distance has been changed.

Schematic
This shows a schematic of the well with any equipment placement noted.

Gas Lift Properties

To open this dialog, double-click a tubing object. Select one of the following tubing models:
• simple tubing model (p.75): Set the Artificial Lift method to Gas Lift, then click Properties under
Artificial Lift.
• detailed tubing model (p.77) On the Downhole Equipment tab, add Gas Lift Injection.

Properties of the lift gas

The flow rate of the injected lift gas can be specified directly, or calculated to give specified values
of the stock tank GLR of the produced fluid. Select from the following options:
Injection Gas Rate:
The actual (fixed) amount of lift gas to be injected. PIPESIM will always inject this amount
at the specified depth regardless of whether or not the gas injection systems (that is the
casing head pressure or gas lift valve) can deliver this amount.
Set GLR to ...:
The injection rate will be calculated so that the stock tank gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid
downstream of the injection point is equal to this value. Note, if this value is less than the
gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid upstream of the injection, then gas will actually be removed.
Increase GLR by ...
The injection rate will be calculated so that the stock tank gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid is
increased by an amount equal to this value.

Sensitivity of the gas lift quantity

To perform sensitivity of the gas lift quantity, use the artificial lift operation (p.212).
Surface temperature
the temperature of the lift gas at the surface. This is used to compute the lift gas
temperature at the injection point. If the temperature is omitted, the lift gas temperature is
assumed to be the same as the production fluid temperature.

Injection gas
The following injection gas properties depend on the fluid model:

User Guide
81
PIPESIM User Guide

Blackoil fluid
Specify the gas specific gravity. If this is omitted, the specific gravity of the gas from the
production fluid is used (default 0.64).
Compositional fluid:
Specify the composition of the injection gas fluid.

Optional data
This data does not affect the amount of gas that can be passed through the gas lift point. The data
allows further calculations to be performed. For example, if the Valve Port Diameter is provided,
the pressure drop across the valve and the Joule-Thomson temperature change are calculated.
This data is also needed if the Alhanati instability (p.231) check is required — see OPTIONS
(p.578).
Valve Port Diameter
The operating gas lift valve port (orifice) diameter.
Surface injection pressure
The gas lift injection surface pressure (upstream of the surface injection choke).

Set Gas Lift Injection point/points

The Gas Lift Injection points do not take into account the gas lift system. It is assumed that the
quantity of lift gas requested is fully injected into the production string at the specified depth(s) and
that this takes no account of the available injection pressure or valve details. You can specify
different injection depths and injection rates at each depth. To allow the program to calculate the
injection depth, based on the available injection pressure, use the Gas Lift valves (p.82) method.
PIPESIM offers the following options for setting the gas lift injection points.
If the depth(s) of injection and injection rate(s) are known, do the following:
1. Create a tubing object and double-click it to edit it.
2. In simple profile enter the gas lift depth and the gas lift properties.
3. In detailed profile set the Gas Lift injection points in the Downhole equipment tab and enter
the gas lift properties .

Gas Lift Valves

The actual gas lift valve depths are specified. For normal PIPESIM operations, gas is injected at
the specified rate at the deepest possible valve depth (taking into account the available injection
pressure). For the Gas Lift Diagnostics operation only, the actual gas throughput for each valve is
calculated based on the injection pressure, production pressure, valve details and valve status. For
this operation, details of the gas lift system are required (valve size, Ptro and so on). The valve
throttling response is modeled (based on the bellows load rate of the valve).
Allows gas lift valves to be selected from a database and placed in the tubing string.

Installed Design

Spreadsheet
This is a list of installed valves:

User Guide
82
PIPESIM User Guide

Valve MD
the depth of the valve
Valve Choke size
(optional)
All other data is populated from the database when a valve is added by using the Add button.

Note: To expand the spreadsheet and to see available buttons, select Edit Valve Details (only
used for Gas Lift Diagnostics) check box.

Add (p.84)... (Valve Lookup)

add a valve from the database to the installed valve table. The valve will be added to the
bottom of the current list.
Edit Selected Valve
replace selected valve with the selected entry from the database. You can also double
click the cell under model or Port size that corresponds to the required depth.
Remove Selected Valve
remove the selected valve
Remove All Valves
remove all valves

Note: Take care with this option.

Gas Lift System Properties

Available Injection Pressure
the available injection operating pressure
Injection Gas Rate
the specified injection gas rate for normal PIPESIM operations. (For the Diagnostics
operation only, this is the maximum amount of gas that can be injected through all valves).
Surface Injection Temperature
the temperature of the lift gas at the surface. This will then compute the lift gas
temperature at the injection point. If the temperature is omitted then the lift gas
temperature will be assumed to be the same as the production fluid temperature.
Minimum Valve Injection DP
a minimum differential between injection and production pressures to allow injection at a
valve depth.
Max Allowable Injection TVD
maximum possible injection depth (TVD). Normally the packer depth.

User Guide
83
PIPESIM User Guide

Gas specific gravity

the specific gravity of the lift gas. If omitted then the specific gravity of the gas from the
production strung will be used (default 0.64)

Valve database
Valve Database (p.192)
The database contains a list of the current valves available. To add your own valves to the
database, use Data » New/Edit Gas Lift Valve...
Spreadsheet
list all the valves in the database that match the criteria defined by the filter. A valve can be
selected by selecting the appropriate row.
Add valve
add the selected valve to the installed design table.

Filter
Use this to apply a filter to the listed valves.
Manufacturer
valve manufacturer filter
Type
Valve type filter
• IPO
• PPO-N: Production Pressure Operated Valve that uses a nitrogen charged dome as
the loading element to cause the valve to close. Most gas lift equipment manufacturers
use a valve setting temperature base of 60 degrees for nitrogen charged gas lift valves.
The valve is submerged in a 60 degrees F water bath to ensure a constant nitrogen
temperature in the dome of each valve during the test rack setting procedure.
• PPO-S: Production Pressure Operated Valve with a spring to preload the bellows and
hold the valve stem on the port (for example, a spring is used as the loading element to
cause the valve to close). They are also called as PPO unbalanced spring valve. The
advantage of this type of PPO valve is that there is no temperature effects to consider
when setting the valves opening pressure.
• Orifice
• Dummy
Size filter
Valve outer diameter
Series filter
series type
Refresh
update the spreadsheet listing by applying the filters

User Guide
84
PIPESIM User Guide

Remedial Coiled Tubing / Velocity String

This option allows the modeling of a remedial coiled tubing string inserted inside the tubing. You
enter the coiled tubing Outside Diameter and its injection gas rate (normally nitrogen). The
PIPESIM model then simulates an annular flow path between the coiled tubing string and the
tubing specified in the Tubing Configurations window.
Gas is injected into the produced fluid (at the depth of the coiled string) at the user specified gas
injection rate. You can also optionally enter the coiled tubing surface injection pressure (and coiled
tubing ID). PIPESIM will then calculate whether the injection pressure is sufficient to inject the
specified gas rate or not. If the pressure is not sufficient, then a warning message is written to the
output and summary files, however, the specified gas rate will still be injected. Therefore, PIPESIM
will not calculate the coiled tubing injection gas rate; it is user specified.
The remedial coiled tubing description in PIPESIM has no association (or functionality) with Gas
Lift Design routines. Therefore PIPESIM does not perform coiled tubing gas lift design. The gas lift
mandrels and valves will be assumed to be installed in the tubing specified in Tubing
Configurations window.
To model coiled tubing, do the following:
1. Double-click the tubing object. Select Detailed Model.
2. Select the Remedial Coiled Tubing option on the tubing's Downhole Equipment tab.
3. Properties
• Bottom MD:
• OD
• Injection
4. Injection Gas Rate
5. GLR
• Surface Injection Gas Temperature
• Gas specific Gravity = 0.967 for N2
6. Coiled Tubing Pressure Drop Calculation (optional)
• Coiled Tubing ID
• Surface Injection Gas Pressure
7. To model a velocity string, set the gas injection rate to 0.

Tubing and Pipeline Tables

Equipment/Tubing sizing OR physical property sensitivity (1 parameter)

To size tubing or a piece of equipment, perform the following basic steps:
1. Build the required model, pipeline tools (p.89) or well (p.51).
2. Include one of the following:
• tubing/flowline/equipment to be sized
• the physical property to vary

User Guide
85
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Select the Pressure/Temperature profile (p.196) operation.

4. Select the sensitivity parameter.
5. Enter the data for the sensitivity parameter.
6. Run (p.194) the operation.
7. Save the model (p.34).

Equipment/Tubing sizing OR physical property sensitivity (multiple parameters)

To size tubing or a piece of equipment with multiple sensitivity parameters, perform the following
basic steps:
1. Build the required model, (p.51) pipeline tools (p.89) or well (p.51).
2. Include one of the following:
• tubing/flowline/equipment to be sized
• the physical property to vary
3. Select the System Analysis (p.195) operation.
4. Select the multiple sensitivity option.
5. Select the x-axis parameter.
6. Enter the data for the x-axis parameters.
7. Select the multiple sensitivity parameters.
8. Enter the data for the sensitivity parameters.
9. Decide whether the sensitivity parameters are permuted or change in step.
10.Run (p.194) the operation.
11.Save the model (p.34).

Nodal Analysis Point

This defines where the system is to be broken into two for the Nodal Analysis (p.199) operation.
Nodal analysis breaks the system into two parts around a particular (solution) point and then
computes the inflow to and outflow from that point. The solution node is defined as the location
where the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) of the node is zero.
This is represented graphically by the intersection point of the inflow and outflow performance
curves; this is the operating point. The Nodal Analysis point must be connected between two
objects.
Nodal Analysis is normally performed at the following locations:
Bottom hole
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the completion and the tubing.
Well head - upstream of any wellhead equipment
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the tubing and the equipment.
Well head - downstream of any wellhead equipment.
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the equipment and the following object (flowline,
riser, and so on).

User Guide
86
PIPESIM User Guide

Riser base
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the flowline and the riser.
See also: Connecting objects (p.33)

Injections Wells
Besides standard production wells, you can model the following injections wells in PIPESIM:
To model an injection well, do the following:
1. Define the well (that is, its flowline, tubing, completion, fluid model, and so on), as for a
production well.
2. Add a source (p.116) to the start of the system.
3. Set the well injectivity using the Well PI option in the Well completion dialog.
4. Define the operation. Remember that inlet conditions are now at the surface, and outlet
conditions at the completion or reservoir.
In the network module (p.39), injection wells are modeled explicitly using the Injection Well icon.

Injection Performance
Perform the following basic steps to build an injection well model:
1. Select the units (p.169) set of your preference.
2. Add a source object at the inlet.
3. Add (p.33) the necessary components (p.50) to the model (tubing, choke, and so on) and
defined the necessary data.
4. Determine the completion of the well, one of the following:
• Vertical (p.57)
• Horizontal (p.51)
5. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.497), compositional (p.139) or steam (p.165)). Water
injection systems can be modeled by black oil or compositional.
6. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.497) .
7. Define the flow correlation to use.
8. Save the model (p.34).
Once the basic model has been developed, a number of operations can be performed, or the well
model can be utilized in additional PIPESIM modules.

Operations
• Correlation matching (p.119)
• Pressure/Temperature profile (p.196)
• Physical property sensitivity - 1 parameter (p.85)
• Physical property sensitivity - Multiple parameters (p.86)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - 1 parameter (p.85)

User Guide
87
PIPESIM User Guide

• Equipment/flowline sizing - Multiple parameters (p.86)

• Nodal Analysis (p.199)

Multiple Completion Well

Model multiple completions by setting the following properties to different values for each layer:
• Static pressure
• Temperature
• Depth
• IPR specification
• Fluid model
The IPR for each individual layer can be specified by using any of the standard completion (p.386)
options. Similarly the fluid description for each layer can be specified using the standard black oil
(p.497) or compositional (p.139) fluid description.
A multiple completion model is defined by adding the required number of completions to the model
and connecting with the tubing (p.74) object, (the length of each tubing string should be set to
reflect the depth of the completions). If the layers are stacked, then they can be connected using
the connector object rather than by the tubing object as the connector object has zero length.
When performing Nodal Analysis (p.199) on multiple completions the composite IPR curve will be
created (and shown) for the inflow performance. The individual layer IPR curves can however, be
displayed using the plot utility.

Note: As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

Liquid Loading

Implementation
The functional form of Turner’s Equation is implemented in PIPESIM and you have the ability to
specify a correction factor (E). The default correction factor is 1.2, corresponding to Turner’s
original model. You can specify E factors suggested by any of the authors listed in the table
(p.384), or input your own E factor between 0.1-10. This is done using the ELIQLOADING
subcode of the OPTIONS (p.604) maincode.
You can control what velocity ratio

vt vt
- or - is reported using the LLVELOCITY subcode of the OPTIONS (p.604) maincode.
vm vg

Inclination Angle
There is a critical pipe angle where the droplets fall back onto a liquid film on the lower section of
the pipe instead of falling back to the bottom of the well. Thus, the stable rate would depend on
liquid film characteristics rather than a force balance on a droplet. This my indicate that the liquid
loading equations are valid for vertical wells and should not be used beyond a certain angle. You

User Guide
88
PIPESIM User Guide

can select a maximum pipe angle to restrict vt calculation for vertical or near vertical section of well
using the LLANGLE subcode of the OPTIONS (p.604) maincode.

Pipeline tools
Pipeline and facilities specific operations
The operations specific to pipeline and facilities are the following:
• Pressure Temperature Profile (p.196)
• Flow correlation comparison (p.197)
• Systems Analysis (p.195)
Once the basic model has been developed, the following operations can be performed, or the
model can be utilized in additional PIPESIM modules.
• Correlation matching (p.119)
• Pressure/Temperature profile (p.196)
• Physical property sensitivity - 1 parameter (p.85)
• Physical property sensitivity - Multiple parameters (p.86)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - 1 parameter (p.85)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - Multiple parameters (p.86)
• Multiphase booster design (p.100)
See also Hot Keys (p.22), Main toolbar (p.24), Well Performance (p.50), Network (p.35)
components, case studies (p.265) and How to add objects (p.33).

Pipeline and facilities model

Perform the following basic steps to build a pipeline and facilities model:
1. Select the units (p.169) set of your preference.
2. Add a source to the model.
3. Add (p.33) the necessary components to the model (flowline, equipment, and so on.) and
defined the necessary data.
4. Set heat transfer (p.98) options for each flowline.
5. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.497) or compositional (p.139)).
6. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.497).
7. Define suitable Horizontal correlations (p.169) and vertical correlations (p.169).
8. Save the model (p.34).

Compressor Details
Either centrifugal or reciprocating compressors can be modeled. The basic compressor model
uses centrifugal compressor equations to determine the relationship between inlet pressure and
temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and efficiency. It is also
possible to use user-defined compressor curves (p.186) to describe the relationship between

User Guide
89
PIPESIM User Guide

differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of compressor speeds. Reciprocating
compressors only work off user entered performance curves (p.185). If compressor curves are
used the compressor speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Double-click the compressor to open its Properties tab. Enter at least one of the following
parameters:
Discharge Pressure
Pressure at the compressor outlet (default 20,000 psia). This is not allowed in Network
(p.35) models.
Pressure Differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the compressor. The default is
10,000 psia.
Pressure Ratio
Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. (Pout/Pin) The default is 1,000.
Power (shaft power) (default unlimited).
Power of the compressor.
Route
Select one of the following options: (see also Reciprocating Compressor (p.91))
• Adiabatic — compressor follows an adiabatic (no heat transfer) compression process
(the default). This is available for blackoil modeling and compositional modeling.
• Polytropic — compressor follows a polytropic compression process. This is available
for black oil modeling and compositional modeling. This is the default for the black oil
model.
• Mollier — compressor follows an isoentropic (no change in entropy) compression
process. This is available for compositional models only, it is their default.
Efficiency (default 100%).
Efficiency of the compressor.
Honor Stonewall limit
If this is set, the compressor will honor the stonewall.
The remaining quantities are calculated using centrifugal compressor equations. If more than one
value is supplied, the parameter which leads to the smallest compressor differential pressure is
used, and all other supplied parameters are discarded.
See also: How to add objects (p.33)

User Curves
Select the User Curves check box to specify that a compressor curve is to be used. This displays
the parameters listed below:
Select
Select the compressor curve to use from the database (p.186).

User Guide
90
PIPESIM User Guide

Compressor type:
Specify Centrifugal or Reciprocating.
Speed
If a compressor curve is supplied, the speed can also be specified. This is used to adjust
the supplied curve against its specified speed. The adjustment is made using the so called
affinity or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is
proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed". See Data
Entry (p.184) for entering curve data. If a reciprocating compressor is selected, a variable
speed device may be used and this requires the minimum and maximum operating speed.

Reciprocating Compressor Details

Adding a new Reciprocating Compressor to the PIPESIM database

To add a new reciprocating compressor to the database:
1. Select Data » New Reciprocating Compressor (only available in the single-branch menu).
2. Set the Abs. Min. Suction Pressure to zero and the Abs. Maximum Capacity to a value
equal to or less than the maximum flowrate on the suction pressure curves.

3. Add at least two Suction Pressure versus FlowRate performance curves (p.185) for a range of
discharge pressures covering all likely eventualities. These two curves can be identical if
required

Adding a Reciprocating Compressor to a PIPESIM-Net Model

The compressor must exist in its own PIPESIM-Net branch. That is, no other piping or equipment
can be present.
To add a compressor to a model, do the following:
1. Double-click on the compressor icon and select User Curves.
2. Choose the required reciprocating compressor from the PIPESIM database and enter the
operating speed.
3. Leave all other compressor parameters (Discharge Pressure, Pressure Differential, and so
on) blank.

User Guide
91
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: If the model has two or more reciprocating compressors in series (for example, field
compressors followed by a plant compressor), any downstream compressor must have a greater
capacity than the upstream compressor. (Even if only fractionally greater, for example 10.00
mmscf/d followed by 10.01 mmscf/d.

Engine Keyword Tool

Placing an Engine Keyword Tool (EKT) in the model allows access to the PIPESIM Input
Language (p.590). This is a powerful input language that gives direct access to the calculation
engine via the GUI, reducing the need for you to embark on the more complex Expert mode, or
Keyword mode. Expert mode is where keywords are entered directly into a text file and the
calculation engine processes the contents of the file to produce results.
The EKT can be used in the following situations:
• to access advanced features
• to access new features that do not have an entry mechanism in the GUI yet.
See also adding keywords at the start of the model (p.590).

Expander Details
The basic expander model uses centrifugal expander equations to determine the relationship
between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power,
and efficiency. Built in, or user-developed expander curves can be used to describe the
relationship between differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of expander speeds.
If expander curves are used, therefore, the expander speed and number of stages become
additional factors.
Enter at least one of the following parameters:
Discharge Pressure
Pressure at the expander outlet (not allowed in Network (p.35) models). (The default is 20
psia.)
Pressure Differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the expander. (The default is
10,000 psia.)
Pressure Ratio
Inlet pressure / discharge pressure ratio.(Pin/Pout). (The default is 1,000.)
Power
Shaft power, the power of the expander. (The default is unlimited.)
Route
Adiabatic (p.455)
Polytropic (p.455)
default for black oil model

User Guide
92
PIPESIM User Guide

Mollier (p.455)
default for compositional models
Efficiency
Efficiency of the expander (default =100%).
The remaining quantities are calculated using centrifugal expander equations. If more than one
value is supplied, the parameter which leads to the smallest expander differential pressure is used,
and all other supplied parameters are discarded.
See also keywords (p.682)

User Curves
Select the User Curves check box to specify that an expander curve is to be used. This displays
the parameters listed below:
Select
Select the expander curve to use from the database (p.186).
% Speed
If an expander curve is supplied, the % speed may also be specified. This is used to adjust
the supplied curve against its specified speed. The adjustment is done using the so called
affinity or fan laws, which state that" capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is
proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed". See Data
Entry (p.184) for entering curve data.

Flowline Details
Placing a flowline in the model allows modeling of horizontal or near-horizontal flow (up or
downhill). Heat transfer (p.98) can be modeled by entering or computing an overall heat transfer
coefficient (U value).
Each flowline has fixed characteristics in terms of inner diameter, outer diameter, roughness, and
so on. If any of these dimensions changes along the pipeline length, add an additional flowline
object to the model.
Double-click the flowline to view its Properties tab. The flowline's profile (distance vs. elevation)
can be defined by either a simple (p.94) or detailed (p.95) model. Specify which to use, using
the Preferred Pipe Description list. The simple model is often used when an initial model is being
developed and the exact profile of the flowline is unknown. When additional data becomes
available, you can switch to the detailed model.

User Guide
93
PIPESIM User Guide

Simple model

For a simple model, provide the following information:

Rate of Undulations
An artificial factor that can be used to automatically introduce some undulations into the
flowline to reflect terrain effects. The value entered is the total change in elevation for
every 1,000 units (feet, m, and so on). Thus, a rate of undulations of 10 on a flowline 1,000
m long would have a peak of 5 m at 500 m along the flowline. This is different to the
manner in which this was handled in the PIPESIM Suite. To model a totally flat flowline,
set the rate to 0. Default = 10.
Horizontal Distance
the horizontal distance covered by the complete flowline, NOT the length of the pipeline!
Elevation Difference
the change in elevation between the start (source end for a single branch model) and the
end of the flowline object. Enter a negative value for a downhill flowline, a positive value
for an uphill one. Thus the elevation change is relative to the object, not from some datum.
Inner Diameter (ID)
the flowline inner diameter for the complete flowline. If this value changes significantly part
way along the flowline, add a second flowline object.
Wall Thickness
the wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete flowline. If this value changes
significantly part way along the flowline, add a second flowline object. Default = 0.5 inches,
12.7 mm.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete flowline. Typical values (p.567). If this value
changes significantly part way along the flowline, add a second flowline object. Default =
0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm
Ambient Temperature
the surrounding ambient temperature for the complete flowline. If this value changes
significantly part way along the flowline, add a second flowline object.
Once the flowline details have been entered its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

User Guide
94
PIPESIM User Guide

Detailed model

For a detailed model, provide the following information:

Distance / Elevation
node points detailing the flowline profile. This can be cut and pasted from another
spreadsheet application. PIPESIM uses the difference in elevation between each point.
Therefore the datum is not important.
Ambient Temperature profile
this is optional except at the first and last nodes, which must have a temperature defined.
U Value
this is optional except at the first and last nodes, which must have a U value specified. If
the option to calculate the U value was selected, this column will show "calc".
Inner diameter (ID)
flowline inner diameter for the complete flowline. If this value changes significantly part
way along the flowline then a second flowline object should be added.
Wall Thickness
wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete flowline. If this value changes
significantly part way along the flowline then a second flowline object should be added.
Default = 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm
Roughness
absolute pipe roughness for the complete flowline. Typical values (p.567). If this value
changes significantly part way along the flowline then a second flowline object should be
added. Default = 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm.
Label
text field that can be used to identify key points in the flowline. These will then appear in
the main output file.
Once the flowline details have been entered its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Flowline Properties
Use Setup » Flowline Properties.. to display, edit and sort flowline details in a model. The
following parameters can be edited using this view:

User Guide
95
PIPESIM User Guide

Distance
horizontal distance of the flowline. This cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has
been used to define the flowline.
Elevation Difference (+ve for uphill, -ve for down hill).
this cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has been used to define the flowline.
ID
Inside Diameter
Wall Thickness
pipe wall thickness
Roughness
pipe roughness
Ambient Temperature
surrounding ambient temperature. This cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has
been used to define the flowline
Use Detailed Profile
If this is set, the flowline has been defined in detail and the Distance, elevation difference
and ambient temp cannot be changed here.
Other data associated with a flowline can be edited by selecting the required flowline and using the
Edit... button. This displays the normal data entry screens for a flowline.

Heat Exchanger Details

Adding (p.33) a heat exchanger in the model allows a fluid temperature and/or pressure change to
be modeled. Double-click the Heat Exchanger to view the options.

Temperature Change
To model a temperature change, do the following:
1. Specify the temperature effects of the heat exchanger on the flowing fluid.

Note: The heating or cooling media itself is not modeled.

2. Select the parameter to use from the following and enter a value for it:
Discharge Temperature
a fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature
Temperature differential
temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the heat exchanger
Duty
enthalpy change across the exchanger (positive values mean that heat is added to the
fluid)

User Guide
96
PIPESIM User Guide

Pressure Change
To model a pressure change, do the following:
1. Specify the pressure effects of the heat exchanger on the flowing fluid.
2. Select the parameter to use from the following and enter a value for it:
Discharge Pressure
a fixed flowing fluid discharge (outlet pressure)
Pressure Drop
pressure decrease (negative) across the heat exchanger
See also: How to add objects (p.33)

Equipment
Adding an equipment item to the model allows simulation of a generic unit operation, in which the
pressure and/or temperature of the stream are modified.
To configure the equipment, double-click it to view its Properties tab.

Route
Specify the thermodynamic mode of operation of the equipment. This is used to calculate the fluid
outlet temperature. The options are:
Isenthalpic
Constant enthalpy (the default)
Isentropic
Constant entropy
Isothermal
Constant temperature
For instance, to simulate chokes and the Joule-Thomson cooling across pressure reduction valves,
the most appropriate choice is isenthalpic.

Temperature Change
Use this to specify the temperature effects of the equipment on the flowing fluid.

Note: The heating or cooling media itself is not modeled.

Select one of the following and enter a data value:

Discharge Temperature
a fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature
Temperature differential
temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the equipment

User Guide
97
PIPESIM User Guide

Duty
enthalpy change across the equipment (positive values mean that heat is added to the
fluid)

Pressure Change
Use this to specify the pressure effects of the equipment on the flowing fluid.
Select one of the following and enter a data value:
Discharge Pressure
a fixed flowing fluid discharge (outlet pressure)
Pressure Drop
pressure decrease (negative) across the equipment
See also: How to add objects (p.33)

Heat Transfer
Heat transfer between the fluid and surroundings occurs, depending upon the temperature
gradient. To configure this, right-click on a flowline and select Data, then select the Heat Transfer
tab.
There are two options for modeling the heat transfer:
• Input U value (p.98) — you enter an overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) based upon the
pipe outside diameter.
• Calculate U value (p.98) — the heat transfer coefficient is calculated from entered pipe and
conductivity data.

Input U value
You can select the most appropriate U value, or use a default value for an insulated, coated or
bare flowline.

Note: These values only apply when the simple view (p.94) is used. When the detailed view (p.95)
is selected, the U values are entered directly into the detailed view spreadsheet. The U value is
based on the pipe outside diameter and reported in the output file. To allow the value to be
reported at a different reference point, use the HEAT HTCRD (p.706) keyword through the EKT
(p.92).

In addition the Inside Film Coefficient (IFC) can either be included in the overall U value, or
calculated separately and added to the U value.

Calculate U value
Detailed heat transfer input and output information can be obtained by selecting Setup » Define
Output and then selecting the heat transfer options in the Define output (p.172) dialog.
Enter the following information to compute the overall Heat Transfer coefficient:

User Guide
98
PIPESIM User Guide

Pipe coatings
Up to 26 pipe coatings can be added in the table. For each pipe section, specify the following:
• K (Thermal conductivity) of the material. Typical values (p.567)
• Thickness of the pipe coating.
• Description - for reference purposes only.
Pipe overall outside Diameter
This is automatically computed from data supplied.

Pipe conductivity
The default is 35 Bth/hr/ft/F Typical values (p.567)

Ambient fluid
Specify either air or water depending on whether the system is onshore or offshore.
Ambient median
For a pipe that is exposed to different media along its length, use two (or more) pipe
sections. Select Air or Water.
Velocity
Average velocity of the surrounding median. (Default = 0.1 ft/s)

Pipe burial data

Burial
The burial depth of the flowline from the pipe's center line. Enter a positive value for buried
pipe and negative for a pipe elevated above the ground. Enter 0 for a half-buried pipe. The
default value is -2000 mm. More examples (p.716)
Ground conductivity
This is for flowlines only.
Status
This changes, based on the entries above.

Injection Point
Placing an injection point in the model allows a side stream to be modeled.
Double-click the injection point and specify the following :
Fluid
fluid to be injected. Select the radio button for one of the following:
• Black Oil (p.497)
• Compositional (p.139)
• PVT File (p.160)
• MFL File (p.152)

User Guide
99
PIPESIM User Guide

Temperature
temperature of the incoming fluid at the injection point
Rate
incoming liquid/mass/gas rate (this can be entered at stock tank or flowing conditions
using the "@" button).
In a network model a stream removed at the separator can be reinjected using the re-injection tool
(p.703).

Important Notes
Note the following:
• The injected fluid type must be consistent with the main fluid type set in the model.
• The injection fluid toolbox can be used anywhere within the model; at the surface, or in the
tubing as a downhole object.

Multiphase Boosters
Multiphase boosters can be used where the fluid contains both liquid and gas phases. A number of
models for booster performance are available, based on the different types of booster available on
the market:
• Generic Multiphase Booster (p.100)
• Twin Screw Multiphase Booster
• Nuovo Pignone (p.102)
• User defined (p.103)
• Generic (p.101)
• Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster
• Framo 2009 (p.103)
• Framo 1999 (p.106)

Generic Multiphase Booster

The generic multiphase booster module is based on splitting the multiphase fluid in its
constituent liquid and gaseous phases at booster suction. Conventional pump theory is used to
calculate the shaft power required to raise the pressure of the liquid phase and conventional
compressor theory is used to calculate the shaft power required to raise the pressure of the
gaseous phase. The total shaft power required by the multiphase booster is the sum of the two
computed shaft powers. The use of the generic multiphase booster module is envisaged for
preliminary checks only and can be used to benchmark the multiphase booster power requirement.
As a rule, using the generic booster module with realistic values for pump efficiency and
compressor efficiency, a 'best case' estimate for multiphase boosting power is obtained. That is,
using a specifically designed multiphase booster, its power requirement will be higher than that
calculated using the generic booster module (up to 100% higher is possible). Realistic values for
pump and compressor efficiency are considered to be 75% for initial screening purposes.

User Guide
100
PIPESIM User Guide

Data Entry
Double-click the Multiphase booster to open its Properties tab. Enter one or more of the following
parameters:
Discharge Pressure
discharge pressure from multiphase pump (default 20,000 psia)
Pressure Differential
pressure differential across multiphase pump (default 10,000 psia)
Pressure Ratio
the multiphase pump pressure ratio is the absolute discharge pressure divided by the
absolute suction pressure (pressure ratio must be between 0 and 5)
Power
power available for pump (default unlimited)
Pump Efficiency
Efficiency of the pump. The default is 100%.
Compressor Efficiency
Efficiency of the compressor. The default is 100%.
When differential pressure, pressure ratio, or discharge pressure is specified, the program
calculates the required power for multiphase boosting. Alternatively, when power is specified the
program calculates the differential pressure (or pressure ratio or discharge pressure) that can be
developed by the booster. When more than one variable is specified, the program determines the
"most limiting specification" during the course of the simulation, and recalculates the other
parameters.
As the generic booster is modeled as a parallel pump/compressor, you can define pump and
compressor efficiency. Pump efficiency and compressor efficiency are percentage values; the
defaults are 100%. Typical efficiency values (p.472)
The output provided using the generic multiphase booster option includes the calculated total
power requirement, as well as its constituent shares of compression power and pumping power.
See also MPUMP keyword (p.695).

Twin Screw Boosters

After adding a Multiphase booster, double-click it to open the Multiphase Booster dialog. In the
Properties tab, select a multiphase booster type from the list .
The following twin screw multiphase boosters are available:

Generic Twin Screw Multiphase Booster

In essence, this option provides the same functionality and input (p.101) as the generic type
multiphase booster, but rather than assuming a parallel pump/compressor process, actual twin
screw multiphase booster performance data is used to predict pump performance.
Based on actual pump operating conditions, the program selects a suitable pump from the generic
database available in PIPESIM and calculates performance accordingly. Note that, using the
generic twin screw multiphase booster option, you do NOT specify a pump model, but leave it

User Guide
101
PIPESIM User Guide

to the program to select a suitable pump for the operating conditions. If different operating
conditions need to be investigated, the program may select a different pump for each of these; if
you want to investigate the performance of one specific model under all these operating conditions,
use one of the modeling options below.
Based on the calculations performed under this option, the main parameters characterizing the
multiphase booster operating point are provided in the output reports or plots. These include
booster speed (as a % of nominal speed), total volumetric flow rate at booster suction, gas volume
fraction (GVF) at booster suction, booster differential pressure, and booster power requirement. In
addition, the program suggests which pump to select from the generic pump database for a more
detailed investigation.

Twin Screw Multiphase Booster

This option is based on nominal capacity data only, rather than offering a detailed model booster
from vendor catalogues or similar. This approach provides sufficient detail for you to make a first
assessment, does not require you to fully know all of the booster models available for use. It lets
you progress your studies without requiring detailed vendor information. If you wish to simulate a
specific vendor model, use the user defined curve.
The generic database contains performance data for seven different twin screw multiphase booster
models. Rather than asking the program to select a suitable pump for investigated operating
conditions, you can preselect one of these seven boosters and assess its performance under
different operating conditions. This lets you, for example, study the effect of the same booster
under different operating conditions (for example, later in field life with lower reservoir pressure), or
study the effect of changes to pump operations (for example, the effect of changes in pump
speed). Unlike the Generic Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (p.101) option, this option therefore
allows you to explore the operating envelope of a specific pump model.
The seven different twin screw multiphase boosters available from the generic database in
PIPESIM are characterized by their theoretical flow rate at 100% speed, typically referred to as
'booster capacity' or 'nominal capacity'. It is the flow rate of the selected booster when operated at
100% speed and zero differential pressure (that is no internal leakage). The seven nominal
capacities available are:
• 100 m3/h
• 250 m3/h
• 500 m3/h
• 700 m3/h
• 1000 m3/h
• 1400 m3/h
• 2000 m3/h
Select a booster from the Nominal Booster list.
In the % speed box, you can also specify booster speed as a percentage of nominal speed; the
speed range a specific booster model can operate at is typically from 50% to 110% of nominal
booster speed.

User Guide
102
PIPESIM User Guide

Based on the calculations performed under this option, the main parameters characterizing the
multiphase booster operating point are provided in the output reports or plots. These include
booster speed (in % of nominal speed), total volumetric flow rate at booster suction, GVF at
booster suction, booster differential pressure and booster power requirement. PIPESIM also gives
the option of downloading the simulation output onto a multiphase pump process data sheet. This
allows multiphase pump operating conditions to be communicated and further information to be
obtained directly from the vendors.
Note the following:
• Performance curves in the PIPESIM generic database are provided for different values of
booster speed, suction pressure and GVF at suction. Where actual conditions do not exactly
match the conditions for which the performance curve is supplied, the program interpolates as
appropriate.
• Performance curves in the PIPESIM generic database are valid for a liquid viscosity of 6 cSt.
For viscosities different from this, the program incorporates a module to make the required
corrections.

Vendor Twin Screw Multiphase Booster

Offering the same functionality and input (p.101) as the Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (p.102)
option, you can input this data as a user defined booster performance. Thus this entered data
will allow you to model a booster specifically of interest and determine the effects of changing
operating parameters on system and booster performance.
This option may be of specific interest when you need to assess the suitability of a multiphase
pump of which performance data is well known. This could be when you have received a technical
proposal from a vendor, or when a booster has already entered field operation, but you want to
explore the effects of changing operating conditions or booster operations for that specific pump
and system where the booster is placed in.
Obtain the booster data file from the vendor. Enter the location of the file in the Full Path of
Vendor File box.
In the % speed box, you can also specify booster speed as a percentage of nominal speed; the
speed range a specific booster model can operate at is typically from 50% to 110% of nominal
booster speed.

Note: Schlumberger does not supply any vendor data file, but please contact us for more details.
See also Vendor Performance Curve Format. (p.108)

Framo 2009 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster

See also Multiphase Boosting Technology (p.457), FRAMO 2009 (Optional) (p.684).
The Framo 2009 pump model supersedes the earlier 1999 model (p.106). You can select the
Framo 2009 Multiphase Booster from the list in the Multiphase Booster dialog box.
Pump performance is defined by pump data files provided by Framo. The pumps are classified
based on their nominal capacity and maximum pressure differential achievable. The nominal
capacity refers to the total volumetric flowrate (gas & liquid) at suction conditions and is thus
dependent on suction pressure and fluid properties. The quickest way to determine the pump
requirements is to first model the system using a generic multiphase pump (p.100) based on

User Guide
103
PIPESIM User Guide

expected operating conditions and inspect the summary or output file to determine the total
volumetric flowrates at the suction.
The following pumps are available as part of the standard Framo catalog:

Pump Impeller Diameter Nominal Capacity Maximum DP

mm in m
3
/h m
3
/ day BBL/d bar psi

FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-250/180 310 12.2 250 6000 37739 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-400/180 310 12.2 400 9600 60382 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-500/45 310 12.2 500 12000 75478 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-500/180 310 12.2 500 12000 75478 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-600/120 310 12.2 600 14400 90573 120 1740
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-700/45 310 12.2 700 16800 105669 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-800/120 310 12.2 800 19200 120764 120 1740
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-900/45 310 12.2 900 21600 135860 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-1100/45 310 12.2 1100 26400 166051 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310 12.2 1100 26400 166051 120 1740
310-1100/120
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1200/38 360 14.2 1200 28800 181146 38 551
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1500/38 360 14.2 1500 36000 226433 38 551
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1800/38 360 14.2 1800 43200 271719 38 551

Note: The numbers in the pump name refer to impeller diameter (mm); nominal capacity (m3/hr);
Max. dP (bar).

New files can be added if they become available, as follows:

1. Add any new file to the Framo pump directory (for a default installation this is C:\Program Files
\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Data\framo09).
2. Update the index of pump files to reference the new file; see the file pipesim_framo.xml in the
above directory for more details.
Modeling the Pump
All types of multiphase boosters allow standard operating constraints to be defined. The user may
enter any combination of the following parameters or none at all. Note that the default values for all
parameters are unrealistically high; this ensures that each parameter will not be the limit on pump
performance, unless the user supplies a lower, more realistic value. If none of the parameters is
specified, the limit of pump performance will usually be the speed, and which will in this case be
100%; or otherwise the DP limit for the specific pump model.
• Discharge pressure: Pressure at the pump outlet. Not allowed in Network models and generally
not advisable to specify. The default is 20,000 psia.
• Pressure differential: Pressure increase across the pump. The default is 10,000 psia.

User Guide
104
PIPESIM User Guide

• Pressure ratio (Pout/Pin): Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. The default is 1,000.
• Power (shaft power): Power available for the pump. The default is unlimited, though it may be
constrained by the selected pump model.
For example, when differential pressure is specified, the program will calculate the required power
for multiphase boosting, or alternatively when power is specified the program will calculate the
differential pressure that can be developed by the pump. When both values are specified, the
program will determine the "most limiting specification" during the course of the simulation, and
recalculate the other parameter. When none of the two operating parameters are specified, the
program will calculate the differential pressure that can be developed by the selected pump for the
prevailing suction conditions.
There are several operating parameters specific to the Framo 2009 Multiphase booster which may
be optionally supplied. These include:
• Tuning factor: This is a linear multiplier on calculated pump differential pressure used to match
field operating conditions. Allowable range is from 0.7 to 1.5.
• Number of pumps in parallel: Used to simulate multiple identical pumps operating in parallel
(equal flow split between pumps). Allowable range is from 1 to 999999.
• Speed Limit: Allows the user to specify a maximum speed limit for the pump. Allowable range is
from 0 to 100%.
• Flow in recirculation: Allows the user to specify the quantity of flow in recirculation.
It should be noted that if the required flowrate through the pump is less than the minimum required
the amount of fluid recirculated through this pump to achieve the minimum rate is automatically
added.
Output
Based on the calculations performed, parameters characterizing the multiphase pump operating
point are provided in the summary and output reports and available as system plot variables.
These include:
• Pump speed
• Total volumetric flow rate at pump suction
• GVF at pump suction
• Pump differential pressure
• Power requirement
• Fraction of the flow in recirculation (if applicable)
• Minimum flowrate (with zero recirculation)
Additionally, the limiting constraint will be reported in the output report.
If Simulated Operating Conditions Performance Map is selected, a performance map file is
created for each case. These files can be viewed using PsPlot. The files are named
"pump_n.pfm", where "pump" is the pump model name, "n" is the case number, and ".pfm" is the
file extension. The file created by the first case can be plotted by right-clicking on the Multiphase
Booster icon in the model view, and selecting the option "Booster map". If you want to plot files
from subsequent cases, you should select the desired file from PsPlot's file > open menu.

User Guide
105
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The pump name should be unique, otherwise plot files will over write each other.
Alternatively the user can rename the pump for each scenario to see the booster map for each
case/scenario.

A performance map is valid for a given set of operating conditions, including:

• Gas volume fraction
• Suction pressure
• Liquid density
• Liquid viscosity
A typical performance map is shown below.

The operating point is displayed on the map. Several scenarios are illustrated.
• A. Pump is operating unconstrained. Pump speed is 100%.
• B. Pump is limited by a speed constraint. Since the operating point falls to the left of the
minimum flowrate line, some fluid is being recirculated.
• C. Pump is limited by a constraint on pressure differential. Pump speed is reduced.
• D. Pump is limited by power available. Pump speed is reduced.

Framo 1999 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster

The Framo 1999 model has now been superseded by the 2009 model (p.103).
You can select the Framo 1999 Multiphase Booster from the list in the Multiphase Booster
dialog box.
When choosing the helico axial multiphase booster, you can enter the pump driver type, pump
parameters and pump operating conditions, as detailed below.

User Guide
106
PIPESIM User Guide

You can select one of three drive types from the dropdown-menu in the dialog box
Hydraulic Drive
characterizes Framo hydraulically driven multiphase pump, usable subsea and topsides/
onshore
Electrical Air cooled drive
characterizes Framo E-motor driven multiphase pump, usable topsides/onshore only
Electrical Oil cooled drive
characterizes Framo E-motor driven multiphase pump, usable subsea and topsides/
onshore
To define the size of the pump and number of stages, enter the following pump parameters:
Flowrate Parameter (FQ)
The pump flow parameter determines the size of the multiphase pump relative to a
reference pump; FQ=1 denotes a pump equal in size to the reference pump. The range of
values for FQ is 0.1 to infinity, values FQ>1 typically indicate that more than one pump is
in parallel operation. The default value for FQ is 1.0.
Head Parameter (FZ)
The pump head parameter determines the number of stages inside the multiphase pump
relative to a reference pump; FZ=1 denotes a pump with a number of stages equal to the
maximum number of stages in the reference pump. The range of values for FZ is 0 to 1.0.
The default value for FZ is 1.0.
Based on the values for FQ and FZ, the program will calculate the required booster speed for the
prevailing operating conditions. Booster speed is shown as pump speed parameter FN, being the
speed expressed as a fraction of the pump maximum continuous speed. FN is recommended to
have values within the range of 0.50 - 0.85.
A value for FN significantly larger than 0.85 means that the pump is running at an unnecessary
high speed because the actual multiphase flow rate is higher than the flow rate recommended for
the selected pump. It will not be harmful to run with FN>0.85, but there will be no extra margin to
further increase speed should operating conditions require it. Therefore, for initial screening
purposes, a maximum value of FN = 0.85 is rather prudent.
A value for FN smaller than 0.50 means that the pump is running at an unnecessary low speed
because the actual multiphase flow rate is lower than the flow rate recommended for the selected
pump.
The differential pressure developed by the booster is proportional to pump head, which is
dependent on the number of stages and pump speed. With pump speed targeted to be between 50
and 85% of the booster maximum continuous speed, changes to pump head are mainly
implemented by changing the number of stages within a pump. The number of stages is reflected
in pump head parameter FZ; the larger the value of FZ, the higher the number of stages.
The differential pressure developed by a single multiphase pump is set to be no greater than 70
bar, the maximum available differential pressure for the multiphase booster.
Whereas the selection of pump driver type is straightforward, the selection of a suitable pump flow
rate parameter FQ and pump head parameter FZ is somewhat more complicated. For this reason,
you have the option to omit suggested values for FQ and FZ in the first instance, upon which the

User Guide
107
PIPESIM User Guide

program (once a simulation has been run) will recommend values for FQ and FZ. If FQ and FZ are
entered by the user, the program will perform the simulation on the basis of the pump model as
defined by those parameters.
For pump operating conditions, you can enter any of the following values, or a combination of
these:
Pressure Differential
pressure differential across multiphase pump
Power
power available for pump
When differential pressure is specified, the program will calculate the required power for
multiphase boosting, or alternatively when power is specified the program will calculate the
differential pressure that can be developed by the booster. When both values are specified, the
program will determine the "most limiting specification" during the course of the simulation, and
recalculate the other parameter. When none of the two operating parameters are specified, the
program will calculate the differential pressure that can be developed by the selected booster for
the prevailing suction conditions and associated shaft power requirement; the thus calculated
operating point will be on the 'best efficiency line' as shown in the user guide.
Based on the calculations performed under the option 'helico-axial multiphase booster', main
parameters characterizing the multiphase booster operating point are provided to the output
reports or plots, and include booster speed parameter, total volumetric flow rate at booster suction,
GVF at booster suction, booster differential pressure and booster power requirement. In addition,
PIPESIM has the option to download the simulation output onto a multiphase pump process data
sheet. This will therefore allow multiphase pump operating conditions to be communicated and
further information to be obtained by the user directly from the vendors. See also FMPUMP
(p.684) keyword.

Vendor Performance Curve Format for Twin Screw Multiphase Pumps

PIPESIM allows you to model the behavior of twin screw multiphase pumps by defining a set of
performance curves. These curves specify volumetric rate/dP performance and associated power
requirement to account for variations in pump speed, suction pressure and GVF at suction
conditions. The following sensitivities are suggested:
Gas Volume Fraction
0%, 20%, 50%, 70%, 85%, 95%
Speed
50%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%
Suction pressure
1 bara, 10 bara, 50 bara
The first line of the file must be:

Booster Performance Data

The second line of the file should be the vendor name.

User Guide
108
PIPESIM User Guide

The file then contains sets of curve data. The first line of the curve data should contain the pump
model, nominal flow rate in m3/h, the GVF, the speed in % and the suction pressure all in the
correct order. This is followed by data lines giving the points on the curves and should contain the
pump differential pressure (bar), volumetric flowrate (m3/h), and the power (kW).

Model NomQv(m3/hr) GVF Speed(%max) Psuction(bar)

dP(bar) Qvol(m3/hr) Power
" " "
" " "

At the end of the file a capital END must be present.

Typical Booster Performance Data File

Booster Performance Data

NUOVO_PIGONE
PSP250 2000 0 100 1
0 2001 150
10 1907 706
20 1842 1262
30 1787 1817
40 1735 2373
50 1684 2929
60 1633 3485
70 1582 4041
PSP250 2000 20 100 1
0 2001 134
10 1997 702
20 1991 1259
30 1979 1815
40 1960 2371
50 1930 2927
60 1911 3483
70 1892 4039
...
END

Notes:
1. The data should always be separated by at least once character space.
2. Comment lines (beginning with a "!") and blank lines can be used to make the table easier to
read. They will be ignored by the program.
3. The Model name should contain at least one non numeric character to allow the program to
determine where each set of curve data begins and ends.
4. The maximum number of different nominal flow rates (NomQv) is 10.
5. The maximum number of different GVF values is 10.
6. The maximum number of different speed values is 10.
7. The maximum number of different suction pressure values is 10.
8. There must be one curve for each combination of nominal flow rate, GVF, speed and suction
pressure.

User Guide
109
PIPESIM User Guide

9. There must be at least two points on each curve.

10.The total number of curve points must not exceed 10000.
11.There should be no stationary points on the curves, that is, for each curve the dP values should
increase, the Qvol values should decrease and the Power values should increase.

Flowrate Operator Details

Only use the Flowrate Operator in a single branch model, not in the network module.
A flowrate operator is a rate change device that can increase or decrease the fluid flowrate at that
point in the system. All fluid properties remain the same as those upstream of the object. The
flowrate units (for the adder) are the same as those specified for the source flowrate (that is liquid
or gas), as set by an operation. For example, if the operation sets the flowrate as 1,000 STB/d then
the adder will add x STB/d.
Double-click the Flowrate Operator to set the following properties:
Adder
values > 0 apply a rate increase, < 0 apply a rate decrease
Multiplier
values > 1 apply a rate increase, < 1 apply a rate decrease.

Note: This feature cannot be used when the feed flowrate is computed.

Riser Details
Placing a riser in the model allows the modelling of vertically or near-vertical flow (up, down or
inclined). Heat transfer (p.98) is modeled by either entering or computing an overall heat transfer
coefficient (U value).

Note: The direction of the riser on the screen has no effect on the flow direction. If the riser is
defined as going downhill, the elevation difference MUST be set to a negative (-ve) value. To
model a riser going uphill, the elevation difference must be set to a positive (+ve) value. Take care
to ensure that the correct sign is used, as the definition of up or downhill depends on your starting
point!

User Guide
110
PIPESIM User Guide

A riser can be defined by either a simple (p.111) or detailed (p.112) profile.

Simple profile
Provide the following information:
Horizontal distance
the horizontal distance covered by the complete riser, NOT the length of the riser!
Elevation difference
the change in elevation between the start (source end for a single branch model) and the
end of the riser. Enter a negative value for a downhill riser and positive for an uphill one.
Inner diameter (ID)
the riser inner diameter for the complete riser. If this value changes significantly part way
along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Wall Thickness
the wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete riser. If this value changes
significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete riser. Typical values (p.567). If this value
changes significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.

User Guide
111
PIPESIM User Guide

Ambient temperature
the surrounding ambient temperature for the complete riser. If this value changes
significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Once the riser details have been entered, its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Detailed profile
Provide the following information:
Distance / Elevation
Node points detailing the riser profile. This can be cut and pasted from another
spreadsheet application.
Ambient temperature profile (optional), at the point specified.
First and last nodes MUST have a temperature defined.
Heat transfer profile (optional).
First and last nodes MUST have a U value specified defined. If the option to calculate the
U value has been invoked then this column will show "calc".
Inner diameter (ID)
the riser inner diameter for the complete riser. If this value changes significantly part way
along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Wall Thickness
the wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete riser. If this value changes
significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete riser. Typical values (p.567). If this value
changes significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Label
A text field that can be used to identify key points in the riser. These will then appear in the
main output file.
Once the riser details have been entered, its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Gas lift in the riser

PIPESIM can be used to model the common situation of gas lifting at the riser base.This is
becoming a common technique in the industry.
As the riser object does not have a location to enter the gas lift location or the gas lift quantity, you
may insert a tubing to "represent" the riser. By doing this the gas injection location and quantity can
be specified.
In the tubing dialog, set the parameters as follows:
1. wellhead TVD to 0 - represents the top of the riser
2. riser height in the (TVD) perforations field
3. Artificial lift to single injection point
4. gas lift injection point

User Guide
112
PIPESIM User Guide

5. gas injection quantity (under the single G'L valve button) or a sensitivity variable in one of the
operations
6. Riser diameter (using tubing configuration)
7. Ambient temperature at the top and base of the riser (using the Ambient Temperature field on
the Tubing dialog, Properties tab).
8. For clarity the objects identified can be changed to, say, "Riser 1" from "Tubing 1".

Note: If the artificial lift operation is to be used then in addition to the above the "normal" tubing,
must be replaced with a riser object (this is due to the artificial lift dialog assuming that gas lift will
be allocated to the first tubing after the completion ) . Other operations allow the required tubing
object to be set and do not need this change.

Report Tool Details

Placing a report tool in a single branch model gives additional reporting of the conditions at that
point in the model. To do this, click the Report Tool icon on the main toolbar, then click on the
model. Double-click the Report Tool object to open its Properties tab. There is a check box for
each report item available, as listed below. Select the box for each item you want to report on.
Flow Map
This applies to multiphase flow regions only. If this box is ticked, a high resolution map is
produced, showing the multiphase flow regimes plotted against superficial liquid and gas
velocities. Note that the map is scaled so that the operating point is always inside it. To
display a map, select Reports » Flow Regime Map and select it in the list of available
maps. The list shows all available maps for the case that has been run.
Phase Split
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the
output file, showing the constituents of each phase.
Stock Tank Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties
such as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at stock tank conditions.
Flowing Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties
such as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at flowing conditions.
Cumulative Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing properties, such as liquid
holdup, where the cumulative value may be of interest
Multiphase Flow Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various multiphase fluid
flow values such as superficial gas and liquid velocities.
Slugging Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various slug values such as
slug lengths and frequencies.

User Guide
113
PIPESIM User Guide

Sphere Generated Liquid Volume

If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various sphere generated
liquid values.
Heat Transfer Input Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing heat transfer input data.
Typically, the following are printed: Pipe and Coating Thicknesses and Thermal
Conductivities, Soil Thermal Conductivity, Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and
Ambient Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file showing heat transfer output data.
Typically, the following information is printed: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy,
and Heat Transfer Coefficients.
Composition Details
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the
output file showing some compositional data such as water specific gravity.
Phase Envelope
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, the fluid's phase envelope is
automatically computed and stored in the branch's plot file. In network cases, the file that
contains the phase envelope will be noted in the output file.

Separator Details
Placing a separator in the model removes up to 100% of the gas, water or liquid (oil plus water)
phase. A flash is performed to determine the quantity of each phase at the separator inlet. Double-
click the separator and set the following properties:
Type
Liquid, Gas or Water separator.
Efficiency
The efficiency or efficiency fraction refers to the amount of that material removed.
For example, a 90% efficient water separator removes 90% of the water. From that point onward
only flow of the remaining fluids will be modeled.

Note: To remove both gas and water place two separators in the model.

See also: How to add objects (p.33)

Track all streams from separator

A stream can only be removed from the system by the separator. The removed fluid is normally
lost to the model, but it can be reinjected into the network by using the reinjection tool (p.703). All
the fluid removed at the separator is reinjected. (To only reinject a percentage of the removed fluid
then the multiplier/added (p.110) object should be used in the separated branch.
The following are required;
• The branch that contains the separator of the fluid stream to reinject

User Guide
114
PIPESIM User Guide

• The reinjection temperature. If this is omitted then the separator temperature is used
• An estimate of the fluids flowrate (required)

Pump Details
The basic pump model uses centrifugal pump equations to determine the relationship between
inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, hydraulic
power and efficiency. Built in or user-developed pump curves can be used to describe the
relationship between differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of pump speeds. If
pump curves are used, therefore, the pump speed and number of stages become additional
factors.
Enter at least one of the following parameters:
Discharge pressure
Pressure at the pump outlet. Not allowed in Network (p.35) models. The default is 20,000
psia.
Pressure differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the pump. The default is
10,000 psi.
Pressure ratio (Pout/Pin)
Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. The default is 1,000.
Power (shaft power)
Power of the pump. The default is unlimited.
Efficiency
Efficiency of the pump. The default is 100%.

User Pumps
Viscosity Correction
Available for user-suplied pumps. Pump curve correction for viscosity effect using the
TURZO method (p.506). Because viscosity degrades head, flow rate, and efficiency,
usually more power is needed to lift the same amount of fluid. To apply viscosity correction
using another method, use the engine keywords (p.700).

User Curves
Select User Curves to use a performance curve for the pump. See data entry (p.184) for details of
how to enter pump curve data.
Speed
If a pump curve is supplied, the speed can also be specified. This is used to adjust the
supplied curve against its specified speed. The adjustment is made using the so called
affinity or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is
proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed".
Stages
Number of stages of the pump.

User Guide
115
PIPESIM User Guide

The remaining quantities will then be calculated using centrifugal pump equations. If more than one
value is supplied, then the parameter which leads to the smallest pump differential pressure will be
used, and all other supplied parameters will be discarded.
The main pump equations used are as follows: Hydraulic Power = Flowrate x Differential Pressure
Hydraulic Power = Shaft Power x Efficiency
See also keywords (p.700).

Source
The generic source object is a means by which you can specify explicit upstream boundary
conditions of pressure and temperature in a given model. By its nature, the source component is
generic and must be placed upstream of the first component in any model. Examples of where a
source component can be used to emulate input boundary flow conditions include:
• Wellhead conditions in a subsea production flowline system.
• Export flow conditions from an offshore platform.
• Production well test conditions at a down hole gauge.

Note: The generic source object can be used in place of a well performance model or horizontal
well performance model in cases where reservoir inflow is a fixed value relationship. More details
(p.116).

Source, Sink and Boundary Conditions

In order to solve the system, boundary conditions must be provided at the source or sink. This
means setting values for the following:
• Pressure
• Flowrate
• Temperature - always required at a source and always computed at the sink.
In a single branch model, the boundary conditions are: Inlet pressure, Outlet pressure, Flowrate
and Inlet temperature. Of these the inlet temperature and two of the others must be set. Set these
either by using the source dialog or from the operation that is being performed.
The Source dialog requires the following:

Properties
Pressure
Required, but can be overwritten by the operation (p.194).
Temperature
Required, but can be overwritten by the operation.

Fluid model
This is used to set local fluid data that overrides the global setting, that is:
• Water cut
• GOR

User Guide
116
PIPESIM User Guide

Example
In the single branch mode there is no sink object. The outlet of the last object (furthest from a
source object) is defined as the sink point. For example, a model with a vertical completion tubing,
choke and flowline, will have the following;
Inlet pressure
Static reservoir pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure at the end of the flowline
Flowrate
Flowrate (liquid, gas or mass) at the model's source.

Note: The flowrate may be different at the model's sink due to a rate change device added
to the model (for example, an adder (p.110), multiplier (p.110), side stream injection (p.99),
and so on).

Any of the above values can be computed. For example:

• Set: static reservoir pressure and outlet pressure. PIPESIM computes the maximum flowrate
that can be obtained.
• Set: static reservoir pressure and flowrate. PIPESIM computes the outlet pressure. (This is the
fastest option)
• Set: static flowrate and outlet pressure. PIPESIM computes the static reservoir pressure by
using the IPR after the bottom hole flowing pressure has been determined.

Inlet Pressure
This is the pressure that exists at the inlet to the first object in the model. This table shows
examples:

In a model with: The inlet pressure is:

Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke the static reservoir pressure
Source - Flowline the pressure inlet to the flowline
Source - Tubing - Vertical completion the well head pressure (this is an injection well)
Horizontal Completion - Tubing the "toe" pressure

Outlet Pressure
This is the pressure that exists at the end of the last object in the model. This table shows
examples:

In a model with: The outlet pressure is:

Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke - Flowline at the top of the riser
- Riser
Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke downstream of the choke

User Guide
117
PIPESIM User Guide

In a model with: The outlet pressure is:

Source - Flowline at the end of the flowline
Source - Tubing - Vertical Completion the static reservoir pressure (this is an injection
well)

Flowrate
This is the flowrate at the inlet to the first object in the model. The inlet conditions (pressure and
temperature) that the flowrate pertains to can be entered. The flowrate at the model outlet can
differ from that at the inlet if any of the following are used in the model:
• Separator
• Flowrate Operator
• Injection point

1.3 Flow Correlations

Select flow correlations using Setup » Flow Correlations... Make the following selections for
vertical and horizontal correlation from either those supplied as standard or from a User Defined
Correlations (p.645).
For more information about flow correlations, refer to Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlation
(p.360) and Vertical Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations (p.365).

1.3.1 Selecting a flow correlation

Source
This defines the source of the correlation for either the vertical or horizontal correlation. Options
are:
bja
The code for the correlation has been developed by Baker Jardine (now Schlumberger)
and has been extensively tested. (default)
tulsa
The code for the correlation was developed by Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects
(TUFFP). This is the original library of empirical correlations developed in 1989. The code
is usually of academic quality and may give errors. This library is included mainly for
benchmarking purposes. It is not recommended for general use.
OLGAS
The OLGAS steady-state model developed by SINTEF/SPT. ( Only available if the OLGAS
2–phase or 3–phase option has been purchased.)
Tulsa 3-Phase Flow Correlation
Latest unified mechanistic model developed by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects
(TUFFP). It is available for general use.

User Guide
118
PIPESIM User Guide

LEDA
The Leda steady-state model developed by SINTEF/Kongsberg.
Neotec
The Neotec flow correlations were developed by a company called Neotec based in
Calgary. Neotec was formed in 1972 by Gary Gregory and Khalid Aziz, professors at the
University of Calgary who specialized in Multiphase Flow research. Neotec developed
several software applications used in the oil and gas industry, including WELLFLO,
PIPEFLO and FORGAS. In 2010, Neotec was acquired by SPT Group and became part of
Schlumberger in 2012 when Schlumberger acquired SPT Group.
See also User Defined Correlations (p.645)

Correlation
The available correlations depend on the "source" selected.
The Flow Correlation Comparison (p.197) operation allows users to compare various flow
correlations with an option of using measured data. The Data Matching (p.197) operation has
been specifically developed to assist with this task of determining the most suitable flow correlation
from well test data and calculating the friction and holdup multipliers to achieve a best match.

Options Control
This allows to control globally in conjunction with the flow correlation selected at each branch level,
which flow correlation is used in the network.
When you select:
• Use local branch options: PIPESIM will use whatever setting is at the branch level (locally
defined flow correlation or network global flow correlation - see also the flow correlation window
accessible by right clicking on any branch or in the single branch viewer window)
• Use network options: PIPESIM will use the network globally defined flow correlation for all
branches. This is achieved with an override statement in the network engine file.
• Apply network options to all branches: PIPESIM will override in all branches the flow correlation
settings by the network global setting. WARNING: You will loose ANY local flow correlation
defined in any branch.

1.3.2 Defining User Flow Correlations

PIPESIM lets you define your own multiphase flow correlations and implement them directly. See
User Defined correlations (p.645) for further details on how to create your own flow correlation
DLL.

Tuning flow correlations

Flow correlations can be adjusted (tuned) by using friction and hold up factors.

Data matching
If measured pressure data is available, the Data matching (p.197) operation can be used to
calculate friction and holdup factors automatically.

User Guide
119
PIPESIM User Guide

Flow Correlation comparison

The Flow correlation comparison (p.197) operation can be used to compare different flow
correlations with measured data. Unlike the Data matching (p.197) operation it does not try to tune
any parameters, so will be quicker to run.

Suggested correlations
If no production data are available, Schlumberger have found the following to give satisfactory
results based on previous studies using field data:
Single phase system
Moody (p.374)
Vertical oil well
Hagedorn and Brown (p.369)
Highly deviated oil well
Hagedorn and Brown (p.369) or Duns and Ros (p.366) or OLGA-S (p.369)
Gas/condensate well
Hagedorn and Brown (p.369)
Oil pipelines
Oliemans (p.364)
Gas/condensate pipelines
BJA Correlation (p.360)

Correlation Vertical and Highly Vertical Gas/ Oil Gas/

Predominantly Deviated Condensate Pipelines CondensatePipelines
Vertical Oil Oil Wells Wells (p.360) (p.360)
Wells (p.365) (p.365) (p.365)
Duns and Ros yes yes yes yes yes
Orkiszewski yes no yes no no
Hagedorn and yes no yes no no
Brown
Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes
Revised
Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes
Original
Mukherjee and yes yes yes yes yes
Brill
Govier, Aziz yes yes yes yes yes
and Forgasi
NoSlip yes yes yes yes yes
OLGAS yes yes yes yes yes

User Guide
120
PIPESIM User Guide

Ansari yes no yes no no

BJA for no no yes no yes
Condensates
AGA and no no no no yes
Flanigan
Oliemans no no no yes yes
Gray no no yes no no
Gray Modified no no yes no no
Xiao no no no yes yes
LEDA yes yes yes yes yes
TUFFP yes yes yes yes yes

1.3.3 Flow Regime Number and Flow Pattern

The following flow regimes (patterns) are available for plotting:
• gas-liquid
• oil-water

Gas-Liquid
The following table shows the current gas-liquid regimes:

Flow Regime Flow Map Number

'Undefined' '? ' -1
'Smooth' 'Sm' 00
'Stratified' 'St' 01
'Annular' 'A ' 02
'Slug' 'Sl' 03
'Bubble' 'B ' 04
'Segregated' 'Sg' 05
'Transition' 'T ' 06
'Intermittent' 'I ' 07
'Distributed' 'D ' 08
'Strat. Smooth' 'Ss' 09
'Strat. Wavy' 'Sw' 10
'Strat. Dispersed' 'Sd' 11
'Annular Disp. ' 'Ad' 12
'Intermit./Slug ' 'Is' 13

User Guide
121
PIPESIM User Guide

Flow Regime Flow Map Number

'Churn' 'C ' 14
'Dispersed Bubble' 'Db' 15
'Single Phase' 'Sp' 16
'Mist' 'M ' 17
'Liquid' 'L ' 18
'Gas' 'G ' 19
'Dense Phase' 'De' 20
'Annular Mist' 'Am' 21
'Two Phase ' '2 ' 22
'Wave ' 'W ' 23
'Dispersed ' 'Dp' 24
'Plug ' 'P ' 25
'Tr. Bubble/Slug' 'Tb' 26
'Tr. Froth/Slug' 'Tf' 27
'Heading' 'H ' 28
'Oil ' 'O ' 29
'Oil/Water ' 'Ow' 30
'Water/Oil ' 'Wo' 31
'Water ' 'Wa' 32
'Froth ' 'F ' 33
'Strat. 3-phase ' 'S3' 34
'Bubbly' 'B ' 35

Oil-Water
The following table shows the current oil-water regimes:

Flow Regime Flow Map Number

'Undefined' '? ' -1
'Stratified' 'St' 00
'Strat. liq. film in slug flow' 'Sf' 01
'Oil/Water' 'Ow' 02
'Water/Oil' 'Wo' 03
'Water' 'Wa' 04
'Oil' 'O ' 05
'Emulsion' 'Em' 06

User Guide
122
PIPESIM User Guide

1.3.4 Configuration File for user specified flow correlations

The userdll.dat is a text file that contains PIPESIM installation configuration information. For a
standard PIPESIM installation, the file can be edited by selecting Setup » Preferences » Choose
Paths and selecting “edit” next to the userdll path. If you want to select flow correlation(s) from the
Setup » Flow Correlations menu, you must edit the dll to define the flow correlation(s). Each dll
requires a section starting with:

[UserDLL_32_X]

where 'X' can be 1, 2, 3, ... 20. This number must be unique within this userdll.dat file. Each section
contains lines that start with the strings 'filename=', ”title=', psname=', 'epname=', 'linktype=',
'eptype=', 'mpflow title =', 'options=' , and so on.
The general syntax is as follows:

'01' 'FILENAME', req, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &

'02' 'EPNAME', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'03' 'PSNAME', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'04' 'EPTYPE', opt, chr1, str, BUS01, NUS01, 4, pcnone, &
'05' 'LINKTYPE', opt, int1, str, 1, 2000, 2, pcnone, &
'06' 'SDESCRIPTION', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'07' 'LDESCRIPTION', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'07' 'TITLE', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'08' 'OPTIONS', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, /

The EPTYPE can be

'MPFLOW', '1', &

'HMPFLOW', '2', &
'VMPFLOW', '3', &
'SLUG', '0', &
'OTHER', '0', &
'ETC', '0', &
'EQUIPMENT', '4'

filename =
Filename when no path is provided. The assumption is that the file exists in same directory
as the PIPESIM executables. Filenames should confirm to the accepted syntax of the
environment being used. Do not use special characters or embedded spaces.
Title or LDESCRIPTION =
The DLL that you can access from the Setup » Flow Correlations menu.

User Guide
123
PIPESIM User Guide

psname =
The SLB internal identifier for this selection. To specify a user equipment DLL routine,
enter a unique string within the user dll for flow correlation and any engine options.
EPNAME =
The actual name of the subroutine or entry point exported from the DLL. It is case-
sensitive. EPNAME can be up to 40 characters long, and must obey the ANSI
FORTRAN-77 standard. For example, it must be composed of uppercase alphabetical and
decimal digits and it must start with a letter of the alphabet. You can code the routines in
any language, but you must compile the routines to present a Microsoft FORTRAN-
compatible calling linkage.
In the userdll.dat file, you can enter the same EPNAME many times on different lines with
various options and titles.
EPTYPE =
An integer that describes the job that the routine performs. It also controls where and why
the PIPESIM engine calls it. Valid TYPES are:
1 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for both vertical and horizontal flow
2 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for vertical flow
3 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for horizontal flow
LINKTYPE =
An integer that specifies the LINKAGE of the routine. The LINKAGE comprises the exact
number, type, meaning, and order of the arguments or formal parameters declared by the
routine, the direction of the data for each argument (IN to or OUT of the routine), the Units
of the data (if any), and its valid range. The following LINKAGE values are valid:
21 (Compaq) and 1021 (Intel) — Three phase model
22 (Compaq) and 1022 (Intel) — Two phase model
SDESCRIPTION =
A character string that describes the correlation or job performed by the routine.
OPTIONS =
Keyword(s) for the PIPESIM engine or for the particular correlation. This text must be
passed to the engine as-is, enclosed in quotes, as the value of the OPTIONS= keyword.
The engine recognizes the following options:

+SLUG SRTCA only. Selects artificial slug model

+DP SRTCA only. Adds slug pressure drop; requires SLUG
+3PHASE SRTCA only. Selects 3-phase model
+WOD SRTCA only. Adds water-oil dispersion; requires 3PHASE
+DISP Same as WOD
+G Specifies the correlation that handles single-phase gas
+L Specifies the correlation that handles single-phase liquid

User Guide
124
PIPESIM User Guide

+OW Specifies the correlation that handles oil & water with no gas
+WO Same as +OW
+EMULn Specifies whether the emulsion model used is from
PIPESIM or from a user-provided dll that is based on the
value of n.
• n=0 corresponds to the default model supplied in the
user DLL.
• n=1 corresponds to the model that you selected in the
PIPESIM GUI. (The supplied liquid emulsion viscosity
in the linkage 21 specification “overrides” any liquid
viscosity used internally in the user DLL.)
• n=k (where k>1) corresponds to any further models
supplied in the user DLL.
+EXTRAINx.x! The extra input as “!” separated values. All extra input
yy!z should be converted already to eng units and parsed in an
array of 200 real and passed to the user dll as is. Any
enumeration should be converted to a number. The extra
input are written in the same order as provided by the
get_extra_inputs function.
olga_key LIBOLGAS only. This keyword activates olga-specific call to
Set_Vendor_Key, which is required for olga release 4.13,
nov 2004.
N.B. All unrecognized strings will be silently ignored.

As an example:

[UserDll_32_9]
title = User-defined 3P
ident = 3P_Demo_UFC
filename = UFC3P_Demo.dll
Copyright = $3-Phase_demo_UFC 32-bit DLL
ep1 = 3P_Demo_UFC, UFC_3P, 1021, 1, Joe Bloggs Demo BBR Correlation,+G +L +
OW +EXTRAIN1!200!30000!50 +EMUL0

1.4 Fluid modeling

In a network model different fluid descriptions cannot be used. That is, the model must be either
black oil, compositional or steam. However, each source can have its own fluid properties or use
shared (common) data. Changes to the common (shared) data will results in all sources using that
data being changed.

1.4.1 Creating or Editing Fluid Models

Fluid modeling is a fundamental aspect of multiphase flow simulation. Before running any
simulations, you need to create one or more fluid models. Fluid models are used to describe phase
behavior and provide physical and transport properties of the fluid required for any simulation run.

User Guide
125
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM* supports several types of fluids. These fluid types are currently available:

Fluid Type Description

Black Oil Black oil fluids are modeled as three phases: oil, gas, and water. The amount of
each phase is defined at stock tank conditions by specifying gas and water
phase ratios, typically the gas/oil ratio (GOR) and the watercut. Properties at
pressures and temperatures other than stock tank are determined by
correlations. Water is assumed to remain in the liquid phase. The key property
for determining the phase behavior of hydrocarbons is the solution gas/oil ratio,
which is used to calculate the amount of the gas dissolved in the oil at a given
pressure and temperature.
Compositional Compositional fluid refers to a fluid made up of a number of components. These
fluid can be real molecules, such as methane, ethane, or water, known as library
components, or user-defined pseudo-components that represent the properties
of several molecules known as petroleum fractions. The Flash packages
available in PIPESIM include ECLIPSE 300, GERG, and Multiflash. When the
Multiflash package is chosen in the Compositional fluid mode, the fluid definition
is done using the PIPESIM interface (Multiflash "native"). However, when the
MFL File mode is chosen, the fluid definition is done using files generated by
launching the Multiflash interface (Multiflash MFL file). Refer to the section
Multiflash in the Compositional Fluid mode (native) vs. Multiflash MFL files
(p.125) for more details on these two options. A compositional fluid can be
defined within PIPESIM and written to a PVT file.
PVT File PVT files are generated from a third-party PVT simulator such as Calsep's
PVTSim, KBC's Multiflash™, GUTS, DBR Solids, and OLI's ScaleChem. The
PVT simulator writes a data file that is stored externally to PIPESIM in an ASCII
file. When properties are required at a specific pressure and temperature (PT),
the data file will be interrogated, and interpolation (or extrapolation) used to find
the properties at the required PT point. You may define only one PVT fluid per
model.
MFL File MFL files are generated from KBC's Multiflash software, a 3rd-party PVT flash
package available as a separate licensed module in PIPESIM. Multiflash
enables full phase behavior modeling of multiphase fluids and solids using
standard models with petroleum fluid characterization. You may define a new
MFL fluid or edit existing MFL fluid files by launching the Multiflash interface
from PIPESIM or simply use existing MFL files by pointing to their locations.
Multiple MFL files can be defined in one PIPESIM model and mapped to
different sources and wells in the Fluid Manager, however care must be taken to
ensure that the models and components are consistent across all MFL files.

1.4.2 Modeling systems

You can model the following systems in PIPESIM:

Water Systems
Water systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:

User Guide
126
PIPESIM User Guide

Black Oil (p.134)

Set the water cut to 100% and specify the water S.G. All other properties will be ignored
Compositional (p.140)
Select the water component to water and set its molar rate to 1.

Gas Condensate Systems

Gas Condensate systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:
Black Oil (p.134)
Set the (oil/gas ration) OGR or (liquid/gas ratio) LGR, Gas S.G, watercut, water S.G. and
API
Compositional (p.140)
Select the required components and set their molar rates.
See also: Gas Condensate IPR (p.386)

Dry Gas Systems

Dry Gas systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:
Black Oil (p.134)
Set the (liquid/gas ratio) LGR = 0, Gas S.G, watercut (to model a 2–phase system) , water
S.G.
Compositional (p.140)
Select the required components and set their molar rates.
See also: Gas IPR (p.386).
Fluids can be defined as follows:
• Black oil data — for black oil fluids. Please note that black oil fluids cannot be active in the
same model as any type of compositional fluid.
• Compositional data — for compositional fluids. Please note that compositional fluids cannot be
active in the same model a black oil fluid.
• Steam
• PVT file — This can contain table information, for table fluids, or compositional information, for
compositional fluids, or both.
• MFL file — This is a Multiflash file for Multiflash compositional fluids.

Compositional Fluid Types

Type Description Notes

"Vanilla" or plain Specified by the user in a Contains default compositional properties.
composition PIPESIM GUI dialog.
MFL file Created with the Multiflash GUI
composition and stored in an .MFL file.

User Guide
127
PIPESIM User Guide

Type Description Notes

PVT file Specified by the user in a The PIPESIM GUI writes a PVT file to
composition PIPESIM GUI dialog and saved convey the plain compositions to the engine.
to a file.
Note: PVT file and PVT File table are not
differentiated by the user interface. Make
sure that you do not mix the two types of
PVT files.

PVT file table Specified by the user in a third-

party program and saved by the Note: PVT file and PVT File table are not
user to a file. differentiated by the user interface. Make
sure that you do not mix the two types of
PVT files.

Important: The PIPESIM GUI enforces a single active fluid mode of the four possible types:
• Blackoil
• “Vanilla” or plain composition
• MFL file
• PVT file
You cannot mix composition with PVT, composition with blackoil, PVT with MFL, and so forth.

If possible, the PIPESIM GUI preserves the state (local or global) and the settings. For MFL and
PVT files, the action of toggling between the two modes resets the file selected. Otherwise, the file
selected is kept.

Where Fluids Are Defined

Black Oil Compositional data PVT file MFL file

data
Menu Setup » Setup » Setup » PVT File... Setup »
Black Oil... Compositional MFL File...
Template... Setup »
Compositional... (the
network default)
Black Oil Fluid Yes
Compositional Yes Yes — if the file contains Yes
Fluid compositional data
Table Fluid Yes — if the file contains
property tables

User Guide
128
PIPESIM User Guide

Table fluids are not suitable for mixing.

PVT files that contain compositional information can also be imported into PIPESIM and used as
Compositional data.

1.4.3 Managing Multiple Fluid Models

Fluids can be defined as follows:
• Black oil data — for black oil fluids. Please note that black oil fluids cannot be active in the
same model as any type of compositional fluid.
• Compositional data — for compositional fluids. Please note that compositional fluids cannot be
active in the same model a black oil fluid.
• Steam
• PVT file — This can contain table information, for table fluids, or compositional information, for
compositional fluids, or both.
• MFL file — This is a Multiflash file for Multiflash compositional fluids.

Compositional Fluid Types

Type Description Notes

"Vanilla" or plain Specified by the user in a Contains default compositional properties.
composition PIPESIM GUI dialog.
MFL file Created with the Multiflash GUI
composition and stored in an .MFL file.
PVT file Specified by the user in a The PIPESIM GUI writes a PVT file to
composition PIPESIM GUI dialog and saved convey the plain compositions to the engine.
to a file.
Note: PVT file and PVT File table are not
differentiated by the user interface. Make
sure that you do not mix the two types of
PVT files.

PVT file table Specified by the user in a third-

party program and saved by the Note: PVT file and PVT File table are not
user to a file. differentiated by the user interface. Make
sure that you do not mix the two types of
PVT files.

Important: The PIPESIM GUI enforces a single active fluid mode of the four possible types:
• Blackoil
• “Vanilla” or plain composition

User Guide
129
PIPESIM User Guide

• MFL file
• PVT file
You cannot mix composition with PVT, composition with blackoil, PVT with MFL, and so forth.

If possible, the PIPESIM GUI preserves the state (local or global) and the settings. For MFL and
PVT files, the action of toggling between the two modes resets the file selected. Otherwise, the file
selected is kept.

Where Fluids Are Defined

Black Oil Compositional data PVT file MFL file

data
Menu Setup » Setup » Setup » PVT File... Setup »
Black Oil... Compositional MFL File...
Template... Setup »
Compositional... (the
network default)
Black Oil Fluid Yes
Compositional Yes Yes — if the file contains Yes
Fluid compositional data
Table Fluid Yes — if the file contains
property tables

Table fluids are not suitable for mixing.

PVT files that contain compositional information can also be imported into PIPESIM and used as
Compositional data.

Precedence of Fluids when Multiple Fluids Defined

In a network, fluids can be defined at the
• network level (Setup » Black Oil)
• well or source level (Setup » Fluid Models or right-click the well or source and select Fluid
Models)
• equipment level
The following table shows which value PIPESIM uses when fluids are defined at the different
levels:

Network Level Well or Source Level Equipment Level Fluid Definition Used
Defined Defined Defined Equipment Level
Defined Defined Not defined Well or Source Level
Defined Not defined Defined Equipment Level

User Guide
130
PIPESIM User Guide

Network Level Well or Source Level Equipment Level Fluid Definition Used
Defined Not defined Not defined Network Level

Note:
• Injection points and gas lift injection points always use locally defined fluids.
• Multi-layered wells always use the default setting, unless a local fluid model is defined at the
completion level. (The fluid model cannot be defined at the network level.)

Local Fluid Data

There are two types of branches in PIPESIM: well branches and normal branches. Well branches
in a network use the global fluid by default (except for multi-layer). A normal branch uses the
default unless a local fluid is defined. The definition of a local fluid for a normal branch means that
the branch uses the local fluid.
Fluid data must be defined for each well, source or injection point in a simulation model. The fluid
type (black oil, compositional, or table fluid) must be the same as the default fluid (p. 0 ) type for
the simulation model. A local fluid can be set to be the same as the default fluid, or can be locally
defined.
To edit the local fluid:
1. Right-click on the source/completion icon.
2. In the menu displayed, select the Fluid Model option.
3. Set Use locally defined fluid model and click Edit to set the fluid properties.
Alternatively, in a network model, select Setup » Fluid Models.... To edit a fluid, double-click its
row.

Local overrides
For black oil or compositional fluids, once a local fluid has been defined, the surface phase ratios
can be changed without editing the fluid properties.
To set the phase ratios:
1. Right-click on the source / completion icon.
2. In the menu displayed, select the Fluid Model option and select Override fluid model
parameters .
3. Enter the data.
Alternatively, in network models, select Setup » Fluid Models....
This allows access to the watercut and GOR/GLR/OGR/LGR entry fields. Data entered here
overrides the local or default fluid data. This is especially useful for multi-zone wells or networked
wells that have the same [default] fluid properties but different watercut, and so on. For
compositional fluids, the composition will be modified to give the correct phase ratios, in a similar
manner to GLR matching.
Also, network level well fluid override does not override coning info in completion.

User Guide
131
PIPESIM User Guide

1.4.4 Ensuring consistency among multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM

network model
To ensure reasonable simulation results for network models using multiple fluid files (for example,
MFL files), it is important to maintain consistency in the fluid characterization in the various fluid
files used.
Here are a few guidelines to follow when using multiple fluid files in a single PIPESIM network
model:
• All fluid files should have the same template of components

Note: Some components may be set to have zero number of moles in the different fluids, but
the component set should be the same across all fluids.

• All fluid files should be characterized to the same number of pseudo-components and use the
same correlations and methods to estimate the properties of the pseudo-components (for
example, critical properties, acentric factors, omegas, etc.).
• All fluid files should be defined with the same Binary Interaction Parameter (BIP) set.
• It is recommended that you designate one MFL file as the master MFL file using the
PROCOPTIONS (p.740) keyword to ensure that all component properties and fluid tuning
information are taken from the master file and applied to all the other MFL files in the model.
This requires that all fluids in the model be defined with MFL files that have the same set of
components and component properties i.e. the files should only differ from one another in the
mole ratios of each component. If the PROCOPTIONS keyword is not used, PIPESIM will
arbitrarily select one of the MFL files to be the master.

Note:
• When only one MFL file is mapped in the PIPESIM workspace, all of the information in the MFL
file will be honored by PIPESIM in the simulation. This includes the Equation of State, Models
for Viscosity, Thermal Conductivity, Surface Tension, BIP sets, etc. including any tuning done to
the fluid.
• PIPESIM can currently use tuned data in only one MFL fluid file in the workspace. If you tune
the models (EOS, Viscosity, etc.) to match experimental data, e.g. viscosity, density, etc., in the
Multiflash interface, it is strongly recommended that you use only one MFL file (the one with the
tuned data) in the workspace. If you use multiple MFL files with tuned data in the PIPESIM
workspace, the tuned data in only one of the MFL files will be used in the PIPESIM simulation
run.

1.4.5 Black Oil Fluid Modeling

Introduction
Fluid properties can be predicted by blackoil correlations, which have been developed by
correlating gas/oil ratios for live crudes with various properties, such as oil and gas gravities. The

User Guide
132
PIPESIM User Guide

selected correlation is used to predict the quantity of gas dissolved in the oil at a particular
pressure and temperature.
The black oil correlations have been developed specifically for crude oil/gas/water systems and are
therefore most useful in predicting the phase behavior of crude oil well streams. When used in
conjunction with the calibration options, the black oil correlations can produce accurate phase
behavior data from a minimum of input data. They are particularly convenient in gas lift studies
where the effects of varying GLR and water cut are under investigation. However, if the accurate
phase behavior prediction of light hydrocarbon systems is important, it is recommended that the
more rigorous compositional model is employed.
The Black Oil fluid description can be used for the following fluid types:
• Water
• Dry Gas
• Condensate (not recommended)
• Volatile Oil (not recommended)

Black Oil Data Sets

A name and optional description/comment must be entered for each black oil data set. A data set
consists on all the black oil properties including viscosity, coning data, calibration data, and so on.

PIPESIM also allows black oil data sets to be stored externally (p.170) [to the model in a
database], if required, so that it can be shared between sources in a single model, different models
and different users or groups, etc.

Note: The external database base is used only as a data storage system to allow data to be
transferred. It should be regarded as allows the black oil data set to be imported and exported. The
actual (black oil) data for a source is stored locally with the source. For example the database
could be located on a LAN and the model on a PC. When the PC is disconnected from the LAN the
model will still run as the black oil data for the sources is stored within the model. Thus, if the
database set is changed the local source data is not affected.

Exporting a data set

To export a data set to the database:
1. Select Setup » Black Oil.
2. In the Black Oil properties dialog, set the required data, include and viscosity or calibration
data.
3. Provide the data set with a name and description.
4. Click the Export button. A confirmation dialog appears.
The data set can now be shared.

Importing a data set

To import a data set, for a source, from the database for a Network model:

User Guide
133
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select the source (or sources). To make multiple selections, hold down the Shift key while
selecting the objects.
2. Right-click and select the Fluid Model option from the menu displayed.
3. Deselect the Use Default Black Oil set option.
4. Click Import.
5. Select the name of the fluid to import, take a copy of, the data from the database to the local
source. It does not point to the data set in the database. That is, if the data in the database is
changed, the black oil data for the selected source is not changed.

Black Oil Options

To access these options, select Setup » Black Oil.
Keyword Reference. (p.728)

Stock Tank Properties

On the Black Oil Properties tab, enter the data at stock tank conditions (p.165) for the following
parameters:
Watercut
The % of the liquid phase that is water (default 0%)
GOR/GLR
Gas oil/liquid ratio for oil systems (default not set).
OGR/LGR
Oil/liquid ratio for gas systems (default not set).
Gas S.G.
Gas specific gravity (default 0.64)
Water S.G
Water specific gravity (default 1.02)
API/DOD
API/Dead oil density (default 30 API and 54.68 lb/ft3)
See also Database Sets (p.133), Calibration Data at Bubble Point (p.135), Solution Gas
Correlations (p.500), Coning (p.505), Viscosity data (p.507), Advanced Calibration Data (p.136),
Contaminates (p.138) and Thermal Data (p.138).

Calibrate a Fluid to match lab data

The method to use to model (and calibrate) the fluid will depend upon the fluid type (oil or gas) and
the data available. Most oil systems are modeled using the black oil correlations whereas gas-
condensate and gas systems are normally modeled using the more rigorous compositional (p.139)
model.

Black Oil Calibration

To calibrate the black oil defined fluids, perform the following basic steps:

User Guide
134
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select a units (p.169) set.

2. Enter the basic fluid data.
3. Enter the Bubble Point data.
4. Either OFVF, density or Compressibility above the bubble point.
5. Either OFVF or density and Live oil viscosity, Gas viscosity and Gas Z factor at or below the
bubble point.
6. (Optional) Enter the Advanced calibration data.
7. Run the operation.
8. Save the model (p.34)
In a network model the calibration data is "mixed" at junctions to provide average calibration data
for the resulting stream.
Calibration on Black Oil data is limited to 1 data point per property. After entering the basic Black
oil data (API, GOR, viscosity, and so on) by using Setup » Black oil, enter the following:
• Bubble point data (required for calibration).
• One of the following:
• Either OFVF, density or Compressibility above the bubble point.
• Either OFVF, density and Live oil viscosity, Gas viscosity and Gas Z factor at or below the
bubble point.
A calibration factor (p.726) is then computed for each property. The effect of the measured data
can be further examined by plotting the PVT data.

Correlations
See the Technical Description (p.498).

Bubble point calibration data

To access these options, select Setup » Black oil.

Note: If you want the following options to appear on the Black Oil Properties tab in the dialog, set
the Calibration option, under the Advanced Calibration data tab to No Calibration.

The oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir
conditions) should be entered to allow calibration of the black oil model. Such calibration will
significantly improve the accuracy of the predicted gas/liquid ratios. If the calibration data is omitted
the program will calibrate the correlation on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone and there will be
a consequent loss in accuracy.
Sat. Gas
Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given pressure and
temperature
Pressure
Pressure at which the above applies

User Guide
135
PIPESIM User Guide

Temperature
Temperature at which the above applies

Advanced Calibration Data

Select Setup » Black oil and select the Advanced Calibration Data tab. The following options
are available:

No Calibration
No (advanced) calibration data is available for the fluid. The bubble point information can however
be entered.

Single Point Calibration

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance when
compared with the value calculated by the blackoil model. In this situation it is useful to "calibrate"
the property using the measured point. PIPESIM can use the known data for the property to
calculate a "calibration constant" Kc;
Kc = Measured Property @(P,T)/Calculated Property @(P,T)
This calibration constant is then used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in
question, that is: Calibrated value = Kc (Predicted value)
If you select Single Point Calibration the following properties can be calibrated:

Above Bubble Point

Select the property in the list and enter data for it. The options are:
• Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.497) . This is the ratio of the liquid volume at stock-
tank conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Density

At Bubble point
Enter the oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir
conditions) to allow calibration of the black oil model. The required correlation (p.497) can also be
selected.
Sat. Gas
Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given pressure and
temperature.

At or Below the Bubble point

Select the property in the list and enter data for it. The required correlation (p.497) can also be
selected. The options are:
• Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.497): The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Live oil viscosity (p.511)
• Gas viscosity (p.518)

User Guide
136
PIPESIM User Guide

• Gas Z (compressibility) (p.515)

Plot PVT Data

These two buttons produce plots of properties as a function of pressure versus temperature:
@ Laboratory conditions - GOR = GSAT
sets the GOR to that defined by the Saturation Gas value under the Bubble Point data
section on the main Black Oil dialog.
@ Reservoir conditions
uses the GOR as defined by the GOR value on the main Black Oil dialog.

Generate tables
If you select this check box, the output file (*.out) will contain tables of the properties as a function
of pressure and temperature.

Multi Point Calibration

The black oil correlations will be tuned so that the correlation goes through ALL the data points.
Note: This is not a best fit method - all points will be fitted exactly. Any outlying data MUST be
smoothed before entering into PIPESIM.
Temperature
The temperature at which the properties apply. All other data is assumed to be at this
temperature. The blackoil correlations will then be used to calculate fluid properties at
different temperatures.

Below the Bubble point

Enter the property at various pressures. The required correlation (p.497) can also be selected.
1. Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.135). The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
2. Solution Gas (p.135) Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure
3. Density
4. Live oil viscosity (p.511)
5. Gas Z (compressibility) (p.515)
6. Gas viscosity (p.518)

At Bubble Point
1. Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.135). The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
2. Solution Gas (p.135) Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure
3. Density
4. Live oil viscosity (p.511)

User Guide
137
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Gas Z (compressibility) (p.515)

6. Gas viscosity (p.518)

Above Bubble Point

Select Density or Oil formation volume factor (OFVF) (p.135) (the ratio of the liquid volume at
stock-tank conditions to that at reservoir conditions), then enter the following properties at various
pressures:

• Oil formation volume factor (OFVF) (p.497) . This is the ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Density
• Live oil viscosity (p.511)
• Gas Z (compressibility) (p.515)
• Gas viscosity (p.518)
In the Correlation (p.135) list, select the correlation to use for each property.

Plot PVT Data

This produces a plot of properties as a function of pressure versus temperature.
Plot Calibration Data Points Only
Displays a plot of the calibration data.
@ Laboratory Conditions- GOR = GSAT.
This sets the GOR to that as defined by the Saturation Gas value under the Bubble
Point data section on the main Black Oil dialog.
@ Reservoir Conditions
Uses the GOR as defined under the GOR value on the main Black Oil dialog.

Generate tables
The output file (*.out) will contain tables of the properties as a function of pressure and
temperature.
More details (p.726).

Gas Phase Contaminants

This allows gas phase contaminants (CO2, H2S, N2, H2 and CO) to be tracked through the
system. Enter the mole fraction of each contaminant (<1) of the gas phase at stock-tank
conditions. The default for each contaminant is 0.
Contaminants are used to imporeve the accuracy of the compressibility (z) factor and may be used
for corrosion calculations and optimization constraints. For more information, see deWaard
Corrison Model (p.378).

Black Oil Thermal Data

To set up Black Oil thermal data, do the following:

User Guide
138
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select Setup » Black Oil....

2. On the Thermal Data tab, enter the following thermal properties for the three phases (gas, oil
and water) of the black oil fluid:
• Specific Heat Capacity
• Thermal Conductivity
3. Select the Black Oil Enthalpy Calculation method (p.519) to use. Currently, there are two
options:
• 1983 Method — original method implemented in PIPESIM.
• 2009 Method — for this option, you are asked to supply a Specific Latent Heat of
Vaporisation.

1.4.6 Compositional Fluid Modeling

PIPESIM allows full compositional modeling of the fluid by accessing a PVT modeling package.
This uses a compositional interface as an alternative to the blackoil model (p.497).
Compositional fluid modeling is generally regarded as more accurate, but also more expensive in
terms of runtime than black oil fluid modeling. It is justified for problems involving volatile fluids
which need rigorous heat transfer calculations and more accurate phase fractions.

Compositional Template
Multiple fluids can be used in both network and single branch simulations. For example, in a
network model each source or well can have a separate fluid. In a single branch model, an
injection fluid can be different from the fluid in the branch. At the same time, PIPESIM allows users
to select a variety of fluid packages, components, thermodynamic and transport models, to
describe compositional fluids. However, it is important that there is some consistency between all
the fluids used in a model, to ensure they can be mixed. The Compositional Template imposes a
consistent global set of properties on all fluids in the model.
Creating a compositional fluid is therefore a two stage process, as follows:
1. Define (or update) the compositional template by selecting Setup » Compositional Template.
2. Specify the composition (p.147).

Creating a compositional template

To build a compositional model, do the following:
1. Select the compositional package (p.140).
2. Select library components (p.141).
3. (Optional) Define any petroleum fractions (p.141).
4. Select the compositional property models (p.143).
Alternatively, import (p.140) a template from an existing PVT file. The template ensures the
following:
• the same package is used for all fluids

User Guide
139
PIPESIM User Guide

• the total number of components used by all fluids is less than the limit for the package
• the thermodynamic and transport models are consistent for all fluids

Updating the compositional template

When adding a new fluid to the model, you must first check that it is compatible with the template.
If the fluid contains components that are not already in the template, they must be added to it, as
follows:
1. Select library components (p.141).
2. Define any petroleum fractions (p.141).
Any new component added to the template will be added to all the existing fluids, but with zero
moles.

Importing a compositional template

To import a template from an existing PVT file, click the Import button. There are three options
when importing a template:
• Imports only Component List, Petroleum Fractions and Property Models. This option removes
any components already in the template and changes all template compositional property
models (p.143) (EoS, Viscosity etc.)
• Merge with existing template Component List and Petroleum Fraction. This options adds any
new components in the file to the template. It does not remove any existing components from
the template, and it does not affect the template compositional property models (p.143).
• Imports only Property Models information. This option only changes the template compositional
property models (p.143) (Equations of State, viscosity, and so on.)

Note: If you only import the property information and the property is not selected in the dialog
box, the property for the item that is selected is altered.

Phase Behavior Package

PIPESIM currently has access to the following compositional packages:
• E300 (from Schlumberger)
• DBR (from Schlumberger)
• REFPROP v8.0 (from The National Institute of Standards and Technology, United States)
• GERG-2008 (from Ruhr-Universitat Bochum)
• Multiflash (from InfoChem)
The E300 flash package is the same PVT package that is used by Schlumberger Reservoir
Simulation products such as ECLIPSE Compositional, PVTi, VFPi and so on.
See also: Viscosity (p.507), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.145), Emulsions (p.144), Equation
of State (p.528), Technical Description (p.139)

User Guide
140
PIPESIM User Guide

Selecting Components
Three types of component are available: aqueous, library components and petroleum fractions
(p.141). However, note that the maximum number of components allowed is as follows:
• 50 for Multiflash
• 50 for E300 flash
• 50 for DBR flash
• 20 for REFPROP and GERG-2008 flashes. This excludes water, which can be added to make
21 in total
To change components, select Setup » Compositional Template and then select the
Component Selection tab.
To select the library components, click on each required component in the list, then on Add>>.
This adds the selected components into one of the Selected Components lists on the right hand
side of the window. All but the aqueous (p.541) components will appear in the Hydrocarbons list.
(Aqueous components are displayed in blue.)
To define a Petroleum fraction (p.141), specify its name and relevant characterization parameters.
Once the petroleum fraction data has been entered, it MUST be added to the component list. To
do this, click Add to Composition>>.
To remove an unwanted component from the spreadsheet lists, do the following:
1. Click on the row number to the left of the component name in the spreadsheet. This highlights
the whole row.
2. Click <<Delete.

Petroleum Fractions
Oil systems contain in reality many thousands of pure components, consisting of a spectrum of
molecules with different carbon numbers and exponentially increasing numbers of different isomers
of each. It would be impossible to model the behavior of such systems by explicitly defining the
amount of each of these molecules, both because of the excessive computing power needed and
the fact that laboratory reports could not possibly supply all this information. Luckily, since the
alkane hydrocarbons are non-polar and therefore mutually relatively ideal, lumping them together
in the form of a number of 'pseudo-components' results in fairly accurate phase behavior and
physical property predictions.
Petroleum fractions are normally defined by splitting off sections of a laboratory distillation of the
C7+ mixture. Curves of boiling point, density and molecular weight are produced from which the
properties of the individual pseudo-components may be derived. The default characterization
parameters are boiling point (BP), the molecular weight (MW) and the specific gravity (SG). The
maximum value allowed for the specific gravity in PIPESIM is 1.3.
There is an alternate specification for users, with additional information in the form of critical
temperature (TC), critical pressure (PC) and an acentric factor.

Petroleum Fraction data entry

Select Setup » Compositional and, on the Petroleum Fractions tab, enter the following
information:

User Guide
141
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: You can enter a maximum of 50 Petroleum fractions. Some properties may not be applicable
to a PVT package.

Name
A name to describe the petroleum fraction, for example C7+.

Property data

For Multiflash
The minimum data that must be entered are either
• M.W. and S.G.
• M.W. and B.P.
• B.P. and S.G.
• T.C., P.C. and Acentric Factor

For E300 and DBR

The minimum data that must be entered is
• M.W.

For REFPROP and GERG-2008

Petroleum fractions cannot be entered

Input and Calculated Data

The input and calculation availability of all property data is summarized in the following table:
• I = Input only
• C = Calculated (These read-only properties are disabled for input and highlighted in grey. The
calculated values display if button “Calculate properties” is performed.)
• N = Non-applicable (highlighted in grey)
• I, C = Calculated if not input

Multiflash DBR Eclipse 300

Name I I I
B.P. I, C C C
M.W. I, C I I
S.G. I, C I, C C
T.C. I, C I, C I, C
P.C. I, C I, C I, C
Liq. Visc. N C I, C
V.C. N C I, C

User Guide
142
PIPESIM User Guide

Ac. factor I I, C I, C
Volume Shift N C I, C
Ref. Dens. N C C
Ref. Temp. N C C
Watson K N C C
Omega A N I, C I, C
Omega B N I, C I, C

Add to composition >>

When the petroleum fraction is added it is initially displayed in red. This shows that not enough
data has been entered. When sufficient data has been added, the row reverts to black. After
defining the petroleum fraction, you MUST add it to the main component list by selecting the row
and clicking Add to Compositions>>. Petroleum fractions that have been added to the main
component slate are shown in green. Next set its composition by using the Component Selection
tab.

Delete
Click this to delete the selected row(s).

Calculate properties
Once the minimum data has been entered then all properties not entered and marked as “C” in the
table above can be computed (if required) using the Calculate properties button. However, before
this can be done the petroleum fractions MUST be added to the main component list and its
composition set. That is, the petroleum fraction must be displayed in green and have a molar rate
defined.

Notes:
• This option is only available for the Multiflash, DBR, and Eclipse 300 PVT packages.
• When you import a file and calculate petroleum fraction properties, the properties are updated
and the petroleum fractions are changed. If you import the original file again, a new set of the
original petroleum fractions are imported. The original petroleum fractions are different than the
calculated ones.

Recalculate properties
Before recalculating some properties, you MUST remove the values to be computed from the
spreadsheet. This can be easily done by selecting a group of cells and using Ctrl-X.

Compositional Property Models

Compositional thermodynamic and transport properties are determined by using the following
models and parameters:
• Equation of State models (p.528) and Binary interaction parameter (p.145) used to calculate
the following:

User Guide
143
PIPESIM User Guide

• fugacity, to determine the phases present and the composition of the phases
• density
• enthalpy
• entropy
• Viscosity models (p.507)
• Surface Tension models
• Thermal Conductivity models

Model scope
Use of the same set of models and parameters for all fluids in a network or single branch
simulation is recommended, as this allows the fluids to be mixed correctly. For back-compatibility,
you can define a different model for each fluid. This facility is also useful if a network is made up of
several disjoint sub-networks, where the fluids may be characterized differently. If different property
models are used for different fluids, results may be unpredictable when these fluids mix. PIPESIM
chooses the property models corresponding to the fluid with the most mass to model the mixture
fluid.
To set the scope of the compositional property models, select Setup » Compositional Template
and use the Property Models tab.
If the scope is set to global, the template property models are used for all fluids. If the scope is set
to local, individual property models can be set for each fluid in the Compositional Template
Properties dialog.

Emulsion Viscosities
Three mixing rules have been implemented for the liquid viscosity. These are only valid for the
Multiflash PVT package.
Select one of the following options :
• Set to oil viscosity (Inversion method) (p.144)
• Volume ratio (p.144)
• Woelflin (p.145)
• None (p.145)

Set to oil viscosity (Inversion method)

1. Use Oil viscosity at water cut less than or equal to CUTOFF
2. Use Water viscosity at water cut greater than or equal to CUTOFF

Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities

(
μ L = μo 1 −
wcut
100 )
+ μw ×
wcut
100
Eq. 1.1

User Guide
144
PIPESIM User Guide

Woelflin
1. Use Woelflin correlation at watercut less than or equal to CUTOFF. The correlation is defined
as follows:

μ L = μo (1.0 + 0.00123 × wcut )

2.2
Eq. 1.2

2. Use Water viscosity at watercut greater than CUTOFF.

None
This option calculates the liquid viscosity from the oil and water viscosities, using the Kendal &
Monroe equation.

How to set the cutoff

You can define the CUTOFF, but it is typically set to 60% (default).
Cutoff can be set for
• Black Oil — Use Setup » Black Oil . On the Viscosity Data tab, enter the Watercut Cutoff
Method in the User Specified field.
• Compositional — Use Setup » Compositional. For the name, enter WCut. For the comment,
enter *EMULSION and the percent. Enter the word EMULSION in all uppercase. Do not enter
the percent sign. For example, “*EMULSION 60” means a 60% water cut.
See also: Package (p.140), Viscosity (p.507), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.145), Equation of
State (p.528)

Binary Interaction Parameter(BIP) Set

Select the Binary Interaction Parameters to use: Select or choose
• OilGas1 (only available for Multiflash)
• OilGas2 (only available for Multiflash)
• OilGas3 (only available for Multiflash)
• OilGas4 (only available for Multiflash)
• E300 Flash default (only available for E300)
• DBR Flash default (only available for DBR)
• REFPROP default (only available for REFPROP)
• GERG-2008 default (only available for GERG-2008)
• User BIPs (p.146).

Note: User BIPs are not available under REFPROP or GERG-2008.

Binary interaction parameters (BIPs) are adjustable factors, which are used to alter the predictions
from a model until the predictions match experimental data as closely as possible. BIPs are usually
generated by fitting experimental VLE or LLE data to the model in question. BIPs apply between
pairs of components, although the fitting procedure may be based on both binary and multi-
component phase equilibrium information.

User Guide
145
PIPESIM User Guide

BIP Set Multiflash E300 DBR REFPROP GERG-2008

OilGas1 x
OilGas2 x
OilGas3 x
OilGas4 x
E300 Flash Default x
DBR Flash Default x
NIST REFPROP default x
GERG-2008 default x

For Multiflash
The interaction parameters in OILGAS1 were from the correlation recommended by Nishumi et al.
They correlated parameters between all the light gases and hydrocarbons up to Decane. However,
when these were used in the prediction of hydrate dissociation temperatures for systems
containing a significant amount of condensate or crude, it became apparent that neither the bubble
or dew points nor the hydrate dissociation temperatures were being predicted accurately.
After further investigation new correlations contained in OILGAS2 based on BIPs recommended by
Whitson for Methane with heavy hydrocarbons were introduced. The new correlations provide
heavy hydrocarbon interaction parameters for Ethane to Pentane, all of which were previously set
to zero. For systems containing Methane and alkanes up to C10 there is no major difference
between OILGAS1 and OILGAS2 BIP sets, but after C10 OILGAS1 parameters decrease rapidly in
value, reaching negative values after C16. In contrast, the values of OILGAS2 parameters continue
to increase gently with increasing carbon number.
OILGAS3 and OILGAS4 were later introduced and the only difference is in the parameters for
MEG/alkanes for the RKSA-info (hydrate) model. The newer parameters predict a lower (correct)
solubility for MEG in heavy hydrocarbons but are less accurate for the solubility of hydrocarbons in
MEG. We would generally recommend the use of the latest parameters, OILGAS4.
How to...: Setup » Compositional » Options
See also: Package (p.140), Viscosity (p.507), user-defined BIPs (p.146), Emulsions (p.144),
Equations of State (p.528)

User Defined BIPs

If you have interaction parameters available and wish to supplement or overwrite those used, you
can do this by selecting the User BIPs option.
1. After selecting the components, select User BIPs as the BIP Set
2. and then Load BIPs.
This will load the default BIP (p.145) set for all the components that have been defined in the main
component list. These values can then be modified accordingly. The modified values will then be
used providing that the BIP Set is set to User BIPs.

User Guide
146
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: You must make sure that the BIPs you supply conform to the model definition used. Not
available under REFPROP, or GERG-2008.

Specifying the Composition

Once the component list has been selected and added in the Compositional Template (p.139), you
can enter the desired composition for each component.
The Aqueous list contains the aqueous components. Typically their input units are per volume of
stock-tank gas (for gas systems) or per volume of stock-tank liquid (for oil systems). In order to use
the watercut matching (p.151) option, the water MUST be expressed on a mole basis.
The Hydrocarbons list contains the oil and gas components, whose composition is normally
specified in mole percent (water-free). As the mole rates are added the total number of moles is
computed and displayed automatically.

Normalize
After entering the composition, you can normalize the total number of mole (to 1.0) by clicking
Normalize. If the aqueous components have been entered on a volume or mass basis, they are
first converted to a Mole basis and then normalized. Once a component set has been normalized,
it cannot be reversed.

Importing the Composition

A composition can be imported from the following file types: PVT, PTT, and PVO. The data in the
imported file overwrites the existing fluid. Any component in the imported file that is not in the
Compositional Template (p.139) is added to it. The thermodynamic or transport models in the
imported file are not imported.
Note: When importing a PVO file, select the units in which the file was written. The default is
metric.

Phase Envelope
To determine a fluid phase envelope, do the following:
1. Select Setup » Compositional.
2. In the Compositional tab, enter the components, including any petroleum fractions and their
composition.
3. In the Compositional tab, click Phase Envelope.
4. The phase envelope is displayed (automatically) if appropriate, showing the following:
• Dew line
• Bubble line
• Critical point
• Hydrate lines (p.545) — Multiflash only
• Ice line (p.547) — Multiflash only
• Water or aqueous line — Multiflash only

User Guide
147
PIPESIM User Guide

For the hydrocarbon lines, which include the dew and bubble lines, PIPESIM uses a two-phase
stream to perform the phase envelope. In other words, if a given compositional fluid contains
aqueous components (water, methanol, and so on), PIPESIM removes all those aqueous
components from the original fluid and only uses the remaining subset fluid to perform and display
the hydrocarbon lines. However, when Multiflash MFL files are used to perform the phase
envelope, the aqueous components are not removed from the stream. Hence, for the same
compositional fluid the hydrocarbon lines may be different depending whether the MFL file is used
or not.
In addition to the above phase plot lines, when using the MFL files, the phase envelope can also
display (if appropriate).
• Wax line (p.547)
• Asphaltene locus (p.544)
For phase envelopes generated using the Multiflash PVT package, the maximum pressure plotted
is initially set to 300 bars for the hydrocarbon lines and 400 bars for the water and solids (hydrates,
ice, and wax) lines. These values will, if necessary, automatically increase up to 1000 bars for the
hydrocarbon lines and 1200 bars for the water and solids lines.
The quality lines (p.149) can also be added.
The phase envelope can also be superimposed over the flowline temperature or pressure profile.
See how (p.257).

Comment
You can add a comment line to the fluid definition.
For a phase envelope created with Multiflash, the extent of the pressure (Y) axis can be set by
using the following keyword placed in the comment line:

**penv_pmult=n

where n is a factor. The pressure axis is then plotted to a value of n times the phase envelope
cricondenbar value.

Search
This allows the component database to be searched and sorted. To locate a specific component,
enter either its name or formula.

Show Quality lines on a Phase Envelope

To show quality lines on a phase envelope, do the following:
1. Define your composition using Setup » Compositional and the Compositional tab. Include
any Petroleum Fractions.
2. Select the Phase Envelope tab.
3. Enter the quality lines that you want to view.
4. Click Phase Envelope.

User Guide
148
PIPESIM User Guide

Quality Lines
To add quality lines to phase envelope plots:
1. Select Setup » Compositional » Phase Envelope.
2. Go to the Phase Envelope tab and specify the quality line percentages that you want to see on
the phase envelope.
3. Press the Phase Envelope button.

Note:
1. Selecting the Phase Envelope button from the Component Selection tab will NOT produce
quality lines.
2. The behavior of this option is different for the Multiflash package.
• For Multiflash, two lines are plotted for each percentage value entered, one corresponding
to the gas quality and the other to the liquid quality. For example, in a Multiflash case, if the
10% line is selected, a 10% gas quality line and a 10% liquid (90% gas) quality line are
plotted together. For Multiflash, the first Quality Line Percentage should always be 0.00%,
which will plot both the bubble line (0% gas) and the dew line (0% liquid / 100% gas).
• For all the other flash packages, bubble and dew lines are always plotted, but only the gas
quality lines are plotted.
Therefore, to plot quality lines at 10% intervals, for Multiflash select (0,10,20,30,40,50), for all
other packages select (10,20,30,40,50,60,70,80,90).

Export Property Table

Assuming a component list with an associated composition has been specified, a PVT property
table can be generated. This can be given to other PIPESIM users or used in different models.
Temperature and Pressure points
The Pressure and Temperature grid points at which to create the file. The number of
temperate and pressure points can be different. The minimum grid size is 1 x 1.
Reset to Defaults
Reset the default temperature and pressure points.
Clear All
Remove all temperature and pressure points.
Export Property Table
The PVT file is created on a series of Pressure and Temperature grid points. The file is
created after you are prompted for a file name and location. It is recommended that you
use the .pvt file extension.
Care should be taken when creating (and using PVT files) to ensure that the selected Pressure
and Temperature points span the range of operating values and are correctly spaced around
phase boundaries. A check using the rigorous (p.163) option is recommended.

User Guide
149
PIPESIM User Guide

Saving and Restoring Data

Compositional input data can be stored in the PIPESIM model or exported to a *.PVT file.
Compositional data from a previous session may be restored by using the Import button to load it
from the relevant *.PVT file. To prevent you from accidentally overwriting the original *.PVT file, the
File Name must be entered manually. However, it should be noted that not all PVT files can be
imported in the PIPESIM Compositional GUI, only those generated by PIPESIM, or third party PVT
packages (Multiflash, PVTi) whose equation of states are available in the PIPESIM GUI.

Graphing the Results

The generated .PVT file is stored in PsPlot format, the standard plotting utility used by PIPESIM.
All the physical properties generated can be viewed by a separate PsPlot task.

Flash/Separation
Flash/separation allows a single point flash of the current composition to be performed, or a multi
stage separation.
Do the following:
1. Select Setup » Compositional » Flash Separation.
2. Select the Flash type and enter the (PT) conditions, press the Perform Flash button. The
results are displayed in a spreadsheet that can be copied (CTRL-C) and pasted (CTRL-V) to
other applications.

Multi-Stage Separation
Multi stage separation allows the input of pressure and temperature conditions at multi stage liquid-
vapor separation levels with a final gas separation stage used to flush out any remaining liquid in
the gas stream. Each separator operates at 100% efficiency, that is the two exit streams from each
stage are pure liquid and vapor.
1. Input the conditions (pressure and temperature) for each of the stages as well as for the final
gas separation stage. By clicking on Perform Flash, the component mole fraction (in
percentages) and fluid properties of the specified liquid stage are displayed. To get the
properties of the fluid at the final exit streams (liquid and gas), enter a liquid stage of 0 before
clicking on Perform Flash or enter a liquid stage of 1 to n, click on Perform flash then click on
Final stage. After a flash has been performed, you can also get a specific stage (gas, liquid or
final) by clicking on the appropriate button as described below.
• By entering the liquid stage number (1, 2, ....n) and clicking on Liquid stage, the mole
fraction and fluid properties for the liquid stage exit stream are displayed. Note that a liquid
stage of 0 is not valid at this point and is allowed only when performing the flash to indicate
the final stage.
• By clicking on Gas stage, the mole fraction and fluid properties for the gas stage exit stream
are displayed.
• Clicking on Final stage displays the mole fraction and fluid properties for final gas and final
liquid exit streams.

User Guide
150
PIPESIM User Guide

GLR Matching
Tune the composition to match a specified water cut and gas/oil ratio.
1. Select Setup » Compositional » GLR.
2. Enter all of the following:
• Water cut (percentage of the liquid phase that is water) of the fluid. Water MUST be included
in the component list and expressed in a mole basis if this is set to anything other than 0%.
• GLR/GOR/LGR/OGR of the fluid.
• Pressure and Temperature at which the above conditions apply. Default is stock-tank
conditions.
3. Press Perform Calculation to compute the molar flow rates of the composition to match those
conditions if this is possible. If the conditions cannot be meet then an error message is
displayed. This is displayed in the calculated column.
4. To update the main composition, press the Update Composition list button after the new
composition has been computed.

Salinity (Salt) Analysis

One of the components in the database is a "salt component". This is used to represent a salt
pseudo-component, based on sodium chloride equivalence, for use in calculating freezing point
depression or hydrate inhibition. Define the salinity content of the water. To carry out such
calculations you need to provide the amount of salt in the stream. Often the data for the salt, brine
or formation/production water ion analysis will not be available. The Salt calculator can assist.
The water content of the stream MUST be defined. The Salt component can either be added from
the component list or will be automatically added when the salt quantity has been computed.
To define the salt, select Setup » Compositional » Salinity Analysis. The salt can be defined in
the following ways:
• Ion Analysis
a. Density (SG) of solution
• Salt Analysis table

User Guide
151
PIPESIM User Guide

• Total amount of dissolved solid (TDS)

a. Density (SG) of solution
b. Total dissolved solid
After entering the required data, click the Calculate button. This computes the salt quantity and
adds that amount to the component list.
Salt quantity is always in mole units.

Compositional using MFL file

Some considerations exist for mixing MFL files. For instance, multiple MFL Files may be used in a
single model. However, care must be taken to ensure that the methods and components are
consistent across all MFL files. The standard PIPESIM compositional user interface enforces this
consistent use through the Compositional Template definition. When using MFL files, you must
ensure that all fluid models are consistent.
Two examples of MFL usage include the following:
• A reservoir composition may include many components and be mixed with an MFL file used for
gas lift.
• The gas lift MFL file must include all of the same components as the MFL file for the reservoir
fluid, even if many of them (e.g., all except methane) are defined as zero.
To use an MFL file, select Setup » MFL file. This opens a dialog with the following fields and
buttons:
Select MFL File
Should either contain the full path and name of a previously created MFL file or be left
blank if an MFL file is intended to be created by selecting Create New.
Browse
Locate and select a previously created MFL file.
Create New
Allows you to define this fluid by using InfoChem's MultiFlash GUI. The MultiFlash GUI will
be launched. From this location, the component list, component quantities, equation of
state, transport property, wax, asphaltene, hydrate, or combined solid models can be
selected.
Edit
Enables you to edit an MFL file that has been selected and is displayed in the field above.
The MultiFlash GUI is launched and displays the component and model selection in the
MFL file to be edited. These elements can be modified as required.
Phase Envelope
Plots the phase envelope of the fluid selected in the File field. After an MFL file has been
created, edited, or selected after browsing to it, the phase envelope can be plotted. The
hydrocarbon phase envelope and any other phase selected in the MFL file, will be plotted.

User Guide
152
PIPESIM User Guide

Availability of Multiflash models in PIPESIM using the MFL file fluid option
Multiflash is a 3rd party flash package that enables full phase thermodynamic modeling of
multiphase fluids and solids using standard and state-of-the-art models. Multiflash incorporates an
extensive suite of equations of state for advanced flashes and viscosity, interfacial tension and
thermal conductivity models for the prediction of transport properties. Multiflash enables flashes
that can result in up to 7 separate phases simultaneously including gas, liquid, water, ice, hydrates,
wax and asphaltene.
Multiple MFL files can be defined in one PIPESIM model and mapped to different sources and
wells in the Fluid Manager, however care must be taken to ensure that the models and
components are consistent across all MFL files. Refer to the section Ensuring consistency among
multiple fluid files in a PIPESIM network model (p.132) for more details.

Note:
• When only one MFL file is mapped in the PIPESIM model, all of the information in the MFL file
will be honored by PIPESIM in the simulation. This includes the Equation of State, Models for
Viscosity, Thermal Conductivity, Surface Tension, BIP sets, etc. including any tuning done to
the fluid.
• PIPESIM can currently use tuned data in only one MFL fluid file in the model. If you tune the
PVT models (EOS, Viscosity, etc.) to match experimental data, e.g. viscosity, density, etc. in
the Multiflash interface, it is strongly recommended that you use only one MFL file (the one with
the tuned data) in the PIPESIM model. If you use multiple MFL files with tuned data in the
PIPESIM model, the tuned data in only one of the MFL files will be used in the PIPESIM
simulation run.

Viewing Wax or Asphaltene Curves on Phase Envelopes

Waxes are complex mixtures of solid hydrocarbons that freeze (solidify) out of crude oils if the
temperature is low enough - below the critical wax deposition temperature. They are formed from
normal paraffins (n-paraffins) and isoparaffins and naphthenes, if present.
Asphaltenes are defined as the fraction of crude oil that is insoluble in n-alkanes (for example, n-
heptane or n-pentane) but soluble in aromatic solvents such as benzene and toluene. They are
extremely complex mixtures whose molecular structure is difficult to determine because the
molecules tend to stick together in solution. They do not have a specific chemical formula but are
generally made up of large rings of aromatic molecules consisting of carbon, hydrogen, sulfur,
oxygen, and nitrogen.
The Wax precipitation line and Asphaltene precipitation envelope can only be visualized in
PIPESIM using Multiflash MFL fluid files. The requirements for displaying these precipitation lines
on the PIPESIM phase envelope are outlined below.

Requirements for Display of Wax Precipitation Line on Phase Envelope

• The Coutinho model for the precipitation of the Wax phase must be used in conjunction with the
RKSA equation of state for the phase equilibria of the other phases (This is done by choosing
Waxes or Combined Solids in the Model set when defining the fluid in Multiflash).

User Guide
153
PIPESIM User Guide

• Composition of Live Oil or Stock Tank Oil from a gas chromatography analysis, entered under
Select » PVT Lab. Input (if measured n-paraffin distribution is not available) or Select » PVT
Input with n-paraffin (if measured n-paraffin distribution is available).
• The wax content must be provided in Multiflash when defining the fluid using any one of the
following options:
• Enter a lab-measured n-paraffin distribution under Select » PVT Input with n-paraffin
(most accurate and recommended)
• Enter a Total Wax content under Select » PVT Lab. Input. In this case, the n-paraffin
distribution will be estimated by Multiflash based on the provided total wax content using the
Coutinho & Daridon method
• Check the box Estimate Wax Content under Select » PVT Lab. Input. Multiflash will
estimate both the total wax content and the n-paraffin distribution. The wax content will be
estimated empirically and the n-paraffin distribution will be estimated using the Coutinho &
Daridon method (least accurate and not recommended)
• Optional Tuning Data for improving wax prediction accuracy
• Measured Bubble Points (under Tools » Matching » Bubble Point / GOR in Multiflash
• Measured Wax Appearance Temperatures at corresponding pressures (under Tools »
Matching » Wax Phase in Multiflash)
• Measured amounts of precipitated wax at corresponding pressures and temperatures (under
Tools » Matching » Wax Phase in Multiflash)

Requirements for Display of Asphaltene Precipitation Envelope on Phase Envelope

• The version of the RKSA equation of state that includes association terms for Asphaltene-
Asplatene and Asphaltene-Resin interactions must be defined (This is done by choosing
Asphaltenes or Combined Solids in the Model set when defining the fluid in Multiflash).
• Composition of Live Oil or Stock Tank Oil from a gas chromatography analysis, entered under
Select > PVT Lab. Input (for asphaltene precipitation only) or Select > PVT Input with n-
paraffin (for both asphaltene and wax precipitation, if measured n-paraffin distribution is
available for the wax).
• The amount of asphaltene in the oil and the ratio of resins to asphaltene, using any one of the
following options in Multiflash:
• Lab-measured, complete SARA analysis for example, Amount of Saturates, Aromatics,
Resins and Asphaltenes (Most accurate and recommended).
• Amount of Resins and Asphaltenes, as measured in the lab
• Check the box Estimate RA (Resin-Asphaltene ratio) under Select > PVT Lab. Input or
Select > PVT Input with n-paraffin. Checking this box will cause Multiflash to estimate the
resin-asphaltene ratio using proprietary methods (least accurate and not recommended)
• Optional Tuning Data for improving asphaltene prediction accuracy
• Measured Bubble Point(s) (under Tools » Matching » Bubble Point / GOR in Multiflash)

User Guide
154
PIPESIM User Guide

• All of the following (if available) under Tools » Matching » Asphaltene in Multiflash):
• Measured Asphaltene Onset Pressures for Live Oil, ideally at two different temperatures
(most accurate, recommended)
• Measured Amount of n-Heptane required for the Onset of Asphaltene precipitation for the
Dead Oil (most accurate, recommended in addition to (Measured Asphaltene Onset
Pressures for Live Oil) if available)
• Reservoir pressure and temperature (least accurate, should be provided if (i) and (ii) are
not available)

Using MFL files with Wax and Asphaltene Phases

Once the MFL fluid file has been created to meet the Requirements for Display of Wax
Precipitation Line on Phase Envelope or Requirements for Display of Asphaltene Precipitation
Envelope on Phase Envelope, you may incorporate it in your PIPESIM model by browsing to it
under Setup » MFL file. You can also report and plot the following wax and asphaltene system
and profile variables by adding them to the report template using keywords:
• Wax formation temperature (profile): This is the wax precipitation temperature along the profile.
• Wax sub-cooling delta temperature (profile): This is the wax precipitation temperature minus the
fluid temperature along the profile. A negative wax sub-cooling delta temperature indicates that
the fluid is warmer than the wax formation temperature and there is no risk of forming wax.
Conversely, a positive value indicates there is tendency for wax to form at that location.
• Maximum wax subcooling temperature difference (system): This is the maximum value of the
wax sub-cooling delta temperature and pinpoints the location in the entire system that is at the
greatest risk of forming wax, if it is a positive value.
• Asphaltene formation temperature (profile): This is the asphaltene precipitation temperature
along the profile.

Reporting wax formation and subcooling temperatures

PIPESIM* may be configured to report the wax formation and subcooling temperatures. To enable
these result variables, you will need to specify the following Keyword in Setup » Engine options:
WAXCALC=ON.

Multiflash in the Compositional Fluid mode (native) vs. Multiflash MFL files
PIPESIM enables two options for using the Multiflash package:

Package Type Description

Multiflash in the This option is enabled when you create a Compositional fluid and choose
Compositional Multiflash as the PVT package. With this option, the entire fluid definition is
Fluid mode done at a global level using the PIPESIM interface. The models selected
("native") (equation of state, viscosity, BIP set, etc.) are applied to all individual fluids
defined in the model. The models available with this option are a subset of
the full extent of the models available with the Multiflash MFL files option,
which gives you access to the standalone Multiflash program directly.

User Guide
155
PIPESIM User Guide

Package Type Description

Multiflash MFL This option is enabled when you reference an MFL file by selecting Setup »
files MFL file. The fluid definition is done using files generated by launching the
Multiflash interface from within PIPESIM. This option gives you access to the
full extent of the models available in Multiflash and is the required option for
wax and asphaltene thermodynamics.

PVT Files
PVT files are one of the fluid modeling options available for running a PIPESIM simulation. The
structure and content of a PVT file varies, depending on the software it was generated from. At the
minimum, a PVT file contains a grid of thermodynamic and transport properties calculated at
specific pressures and temperatures, by a PVT flash package. These properties must be
calculated over a range of pressures and temperatures that cover the expected simulation
conditions of the PIPESIM model. Some PVT files also contain the thermodynamic models used
e.g. the equation of state and transport models, the component list as well as the moles of each
component. The structure of a PVT file governs the way it can be used in PIPESIM.
A list of the typical properties available in a PVT file are presented below. It is not exhaustive.
Depending on the source of the PVT file; a subset of the following properties will be available in it.
For certain PVT flash packages, additional information such as the wax and hydrate precipitation
lines can be exported as part of the PVT file, or as separate files.

PVT File Properties

Pressure Temperature Liquid volume fraction

Watercut volume fraction Water mass fraction Water thermal conductivity
Liquid density Liquid viscosity Liquid heat capacity
Liquid surface tension Gas heat capacity Gas density
Gas compressibility Gas molecular weight Gas viscosity
Gas enthalpy Oil entropy Gas thermal conductivity
Oil viscosity Oil density Oil mass fraction
Oil compressibility factor Oil molecular weight Oil heat capacity
Oil thermal conductivity Oil enthalpy Oil entropy
Oil-Gas surface tension Total enthalpy Total entropy
Wax density Wax thermal conductivity Derivative of gas density with
respect to pressure
Derivative of gas density with Derivative of oil density with Derivative of oil density with
respect to temperature respect to pressure respect to temperature

Structure of PVT Files

A PVT file consists of some or all of the following sections, depending on the software from which it
was exported.

User Guide
156
PIPESIM User Guide

Equation of State Viscosity model Viscosity model coefficients

Component list Moles of each component Molecular weight of each
component
Density of each component Omega A for each Omega B for each component
component
Critical temperatures for each Critical pressures for each Critical volumes for each
component component component
Critical Z-factors for each Volume shift for each Acentric factors for each
component component component
Parachors for each component Critical volumes for viscosity Critical Z-factors for viscosity
calculations calculations
Binary interaction coefficients or
BIP set
Table 1.9: Model Information

Grid Information
A pressure-temperature grid of a subset of the thermodynamic and transport properties listed
under PVT File Properties. The minimum grid size that PIPESIM can handle is 1 x 1.

Importing a PIPESIM-generated PVT File

A PVT file exported from PIPESIM can be re-imported into it.
1. Import the components in the PVT file first, under Setup » Compositional Template » Import,
and browse to select the file.
2. Import the component moles in the PVT file, under Setup » Compositional, and browse to
select the same file.

Viewing the Contents of a PVT File

PVT files with a .pvt extension, are stored in the PsPlot format. PsPlot is the standard plotting
utility used by PIPESIM. PsPlot.exe can be launched to browse to the PVT file and view its
contents in graphical format. All the physical properties generated can be viewed by the PsPlot
task.

Exporting PVT Files from PIPESIM

A compositional fluid defined using the Compositional template in PIPESIM can be exported as a
PVT file (p.156).
1. Create the Compositional fluid by defining the models and component list under Setup »
Compositional template.
2. Enter the moles of each component under Setup » Compositional.
3. In the Compositional properties window, click Export Property Table, and then enter the
pressure and temperature values at which the PVT properties should be calculated, and
exported to the file.

User Guide
157
PIPESIM User Guide

The minimum grid size is 1 x 1.

• Click Reset to default to reset the Temperature-Pressure grid to its original values.
• Click Clear All to delete all the values.
4. Click Export Property Table and select the location where you want the PVT file to be saved.
You can share the exported PVT file with other PIPESIM users. You can also use the exported
PVT file in different models.

Important: Take care when creating (and using) PVT files to ensure that the selected Pressure
and Temperature points span the range of operating conditions and are correctly spaced around
phase boundaries. Running a check using the rigorous (p.163) option is recommended.

It is also important to understand the way PIPESIM uses PVT files. For more information, see
PIPESIM Handling of PVT files (p.158).

PIPESIM Handling of PVT Files

PVT files (p.156) can be generated by PIPESIM*, as well as other software such as ECLIPSE
PVTi, Multiflash, DBRSolids, PVTSim, etc. However, the structure and content of the PVT file is
different, depending on the software it was generated from. For example, PVT files generated by
PIPESIM and PVTi contain model information; such as equation of state, fluid composition, as well
as the PVT properties at the specified grid of pressures and temperatures. For certain other
software, only the PVT properties at the specified grid of pressures and temperatures in written to
the file i.e. the model information is not exported.

Note: Multiflash versions embedded in PIPESIM Classic versions, older than 2012.2, export both
the model and PVT property grid information. However, it is important to note that starting from
PIPESIM 2012.2 and newer versions of PIPESIM Classic, PVT files generated from Multiflash
specifically, do not contain any model information. They only contain the PVT properties at the
specified grid of pressures and temperatures.

It is important to review each PVT file with a text editor, to understand what kind of information it
contains. This is because the information contained in the PVT file determines how it can be used
in PIPESIM, as outlined below.
PVT files can be used in PIPESIM in two ways; Imported and Linked. The table below outlines how
specific PVT files, from different sources, can be used in PIPESIM.
1. Imported: Certain PVT files can be imported as Compositional fluids in PIPESIM. These are
PVT files that contain model information such as composition, equation of state, viscosity
model, etc. This approach creates a new Compositional fluid using the information contained in
the file. To import PVT files, perform the following steps:
a. Import the components in the PVT file first, under Setup » Compositional Template »
Import.
b. Import the component moles in the PVT file, under Setup » Compositional.

User Guide
158
PIPESIM User Guide

When PIPESIM does a simulation with a PVT file imported as a compositional fluid, it actually
performs a flash of the compositional fluid, using the assigned PVT package at the pressures
and temperatures encountered along the flow path.
2. Linked: A PVT file can also be used in PIPESIM via a loose link to the file. This link is
established under Setup » PVT file. The PVT file must be available, in this location for the
simulation to run. In this scenario, the PVT file does not need to contain any model or
composition information, it just needs to have the thermodynamic and transport PVT properties
at a specified grid of pressures and temperatures. The PVT properties also need to cover the
expected pressures and temperatures that will be encountered during simulation.
When you select a PVT file under Setup > PVT file, you have the option to View and Verify
against Composition Template. These 2 options are only available for supported PVT files
that have compositional information, which are PIPESIM-exported PVT files. You will get an
error if you select either of these options with an unsupported PVT file, or one that has no
composition information. You can alternatively view the contents of a PVT file (p.157) using the
PIPESIM PsPlot utility.
When PIPESIM runs a simulation with a linked PVT file, as long as the PVT grid is at least 4 x
4, and there is no kind of fluid mixing or separation that changes the fluid attributes (e.g. a
network model, a model with a separator, gas lift, or with GOR or Water cut tuning) it
interpolates the PVT file to determine the PVT properties at the pressures and temperatures
encountered during the simulation. However, if there is any kind of fluid mixing or separation,
then PIPESIM must use the composition information in the PVT file to perform flashes and
determine the correct fluid attributes. It cannot interpolate PVT properties for these special
scenarios. To reiterate, whenever fluids are mixed or separated in a PIPESIM model using PVT
files, the composition information must be present in the PVT files for the simulation to run
successfully.
The table below outlines how specific PVT files, from different sources, can be used in PIPESIM.

PVT File Source File Extension Can be imported? Can be linked?

PIPESIM .pvt Yes Yes
PVTi .pvo Yes No
DBR Solids .pvt No Yes
PVTSim .pvt No Yes
Multiflash (in PIPESIM Classic versions .pvt Yes Yes
older than 2012.2)
Multiflash (in PIPESIM Classic version .pvt No Yes
2012.2, and newer)
ScaleChem .pvt No Yes
GUTS .pvt No Yes
AsphWax .pvt No Yes

Refer to the topic: Managing Multiple Fluid Models (p. 0 ) to learn more about the other fluid
modeling options available in PIPESIM.

User Guide
159
PIPESIM User Guide

Fluid Property Table (External PVT Tables)

PIPESIM provides various levels of support for several PVT packages; Schlumberger and 3rd
party. One way in which PVT data from other sources can be used in PIPESIM, is via PVT files
(p.156). A PVT file is simply a table of PVT properties generated over a grid of specified pressures
and temperatures. PVT files can be generated by PIPESIM, as well as other software such as
ECLIPSE PVTi, Multiflash, DBRSolids, PVTSim, GUTS, etc., and can be used for simulation.
A PVT data file is written by the PVT simulator and stored externally to PIPESIM in an ASCII file.
When properties are required at a specific pressure and temperature (PT) the data file will be
interrogated, and interpolation (or extrapolation) used to find the properties at the required PT
point. It is important to note that the format of the PVT file is different, depending on the software it
was generated from. The information contained in the PVT file determines how the file can be used
in PIPESIM. For more details on the differences in PVT files generated from different sources, and
the differences in the ways they can be used, see PIPESIM Handling of PVT Files (p.158).
External PVT tables can also be created from within PIPESIM. For more information, see Exporting
PVT Files from PIPESIM (p.157).

Solids Modeling

Solids are modeled in the following ways:

• Sand is modeled for its effects on erosion. (Refer to Erosion and Corrosion Options (p.175).)
Sand inventory is traced in the model. (Refer to Sand Modeling (p.160).)
• Wax is modeled for its deposition behavior. (Refer to Wax Deposition (p.205).)
• Wax, Asphaltene, and Scale are modeled for their appearance in the fluid. (Refer to Solids
Appearance (p.161).)
See also Scale Predictions (p.162).

Sand Modeling
In PIPESIM, the purpose of sand modelling is to predict its erosion effect. Sand has no effect on
pressure drop, heat transfer calculations, or on overall fluid mass balance across the network.
Sand is assumed to be transported at the fluid mean velocity. There is no separate modeling of
sand velocity, sand deposition, or accumulation in low velocity pipe bends or sumps. Fluid density,
viscosity, and other transport properties, are not affected by sand rate.
In a single-branch model, specify the sand rate using Setup » Erosion & Corrosion Properties.
For more information, refer to Erosion and Corrosion Options (p.175). The sand rate applies to the
whole branch. (At present, there is no support for different sand rates from individual reservoirs or
completions).
In a network model, specify the sand rate in each source branch by double-click the branch to
bring up its individual window. Then select Setup » Erosion & Corrison Properties and enter the
desired sand rate for the branch. The network solution keeps track of sand inventory in each
branch and mixes it into downstream branches at network junctions. Thus, the erosion effects of
the sand in link and sink branches are accounted for correctly. (Sand rate can in fact be entered for
any branch in the network. PIPESIM makes no attempt to restrict you to source branches.

User Guide
160
PIPESIM User Guide

However, any sand rates that you enter for link and sink branches are ignored by the network
solver. PIPESIM uses the calculated mixed values.)
Sand is assumed to be present in the liquid phase of the fluid for the purpose of separator
modeling.

Wax Deposition Modeling

PIPESIM can model the deposition of solid wax on the inside surface of the pipe system.

Note: This is distinct and separate from modeling the solids appearance in the fluid. See Solids
Appearance (p.161).

Wax deposition reduces the pipe internal diameter, and therefore affects the fluid velocity and
system pressure drop. The wax deposit causes a change in the heat transfer characteristics of the
pipe system, which affects the fluid temperature. PIPESIM models both effects.
Wax deposition is strictly a transient effect. PIPESIM is a steady-state simulator and cannot not
perform a rigorous wax deposition simulation. Nevertheless, wax deposition typically occurs over a
timescale of weeks or months, so a series of steady-state timesteps is a good approximation to
real system behavior. This is what PIPESIM does. See Operations » Wax Deposition. (Wax
Deposition (p.205)) This operation allows a series of timesteps to be performed for modeling the
buildup of wax in the system and its effect on pressure drop, deliverability, and temperature.
Wax deposition can also be modeled as an effect caused by other system sensitivity variables. If
sufficient wax deposition data is available (see Setup » Wax Properties), a rate of wax deposition
is also available at any point in the system. This information can be viewed in the system and
profile plots along with any other result variables as a function of selected sensitivity data. For
example, you could use the operation Pressure / Temperature profile (p.196) to sensitize on
system inlet temperature, and to view the effect of this on the profile of wax deposition rate.
Deposition of wax has no effect on fluid composition, fluid transport properties, or on overall mass
balance in the system.
See also Solids Modeling. (p.160)

Solids Appearance
The phase behavior of fluids can result in the formation of one or more solid phases. PIPESIM
does not simulate the flow and transport of solids in any rigorous manner, which is comparable to
the support of 2- and 3-phase fluids with flow correlations. However, the formation of solids — such
as Wax, Asphaltene, and Scale in the bulk fluid — can be modeled and predicted using the PVT
tables that are written by third-party programs, such as the Schlumberger product DBR Solids and
OLI's ScaleChem. This modeling is confined to the appearance of the solid phase in the bulk fluid
and does not model the deposition of the solid on the pipe or tubing walls.
Third-party programs write a PVT table file in a PIPESIM enhanced PVT file format. That file
contains fluid phase behavior and transport properties on a grid of pressures and temperatures.
Additional properties in the file describe the solids phases that the third-party programs model. The
exact nature of the solids phase(s) and the properties associated with them depend exclusively on
third-party programs. Because PIPESIM deals with solids phases in a generalized manner,

User Guide
161
PIPESIM User Guide

updates to the third-party programs that write the enhanced PVT files should be compatible with
existing PIPESIM functionality.
Once the PVT files are created, PIPESIM accesses those files when specific pressure-temperature
data is needed. For more information, refer to Fluid Property Table (External PVT Tables) (p.160).

Note: Because PVT files contain fluid phase behavior and transport properties, solids appearance
modeling cannot be combined with other methods of fluid PVT modeling, such as Black oil or
Compositional fluids.

To view the additional solids data in the PVT tables, use the profile plot. For example, if you model
Wax and Scale results, wax and scale appearance temperatures are available in the fluid-
temperature profile plot by setting the x-axis to temperature and the y-axis to pressure. If you want
to view solids appearance in the fluid, plot the solid phase's Mass Fraction data.
See also Scale Prediction (p.162) and Solids Modeling. (p.160)

Scale Prediction
Prediction of scale formation may be performed by using a PVT file (p.160) generated by OLI's
ScaleChem (http://www.olisystems.com/oliscale.htm) program (purchased separately). No extra
license for PIPESIM is required.
To use the PVT file, select Setup » PVT file and browse to the PVT file generated by ScaleChem.
The PVT file contains tables of all fluid phases and transport properties required for thermo-
hydraulic calculations. Additionally, this file contains detailed water chemistry information that
enables PIPESIM to determine the occurrence, type, location, and severity of scale formation.
Various profile properties related to scale formation are reported, including:
• Total scale concentration
• Individual scale species concentrations
• Mass ratio of individual scale species
• Pre-Scale Index
• Post-Scale Index
Scaling tendencies are reported by ScaleChem in two forms: the pre-scale index and the post-
scale index. The pre-scale index is based on a condition where everything remains in solution (no
solid phases are allowed to form). The pre-scale index values can be greater than 1.0
(supersaturated). The post-scale index (more commonly used) represents equilibrium conditions. If
the water is saturated (the scale species precipitates), then the post-scale index is 1. The post-
scale index is also useful for understanding the potential risk of scaling based on the degree of
undersaturation, that is, how close the post-scale index is to 1.
These properties may be viewed in profile plots and tables.
To view phase appearance lines on the same plot as the production profile, select temperature as
the x-axis and pressure as the y-axis. Each scale species will be described by either a phase
“appearance” line, a phase “disappearance” line, or both. Moving from the left side of the plot to the
right (from low to high temperature at a constant pressure):

User Guide
162
PIPESIM User Guide

• If a phase appearance line is encountered first, then solids will exist only at temperatures above
this line until (and if) a phase disappearance line is encountered. This behavior is typical for
CaCO3 and CaSO4.
• If a phase disappearance line is encountered first, then solids exist only at temperatures below
this line. This behavior is typical for BaSO4.
ScaleChem PVT files may be used for corrosion prediction (p.378). OLI’s Corrosion Analyzer may
be used for more detailed corrosion analysis.

Validating contents of PVT file

To view information contained in the PVT file, double-click the file to open it in PSPlot. The
variables in the PVT file can be viewed graphically as a function of pressure and temperature. The
composition of the fluid used to generate the PVT file is recorded in the comments section in the
header of the PVT file. This file can be viewed in a text editor. To view the contents of the PVT file
in a tabular format, under Setup » Define Output, select “Fluid Property Tables”. When you run a
simulation, all fluid properties are written to an output file.
See also
• Example files: Case Studies/Well Design and Performance/ScaleChem
• Fluid Properties Tables Files (External PVT Tables) (p.160)
• Solids Appearance (p.161)

Compositional Flashing
More details. (p.139)
Compositional Flashing determines the way in which physical properties are computed. The
balance is between speed and accuracy.

Note: This is only valid for compositional models.

Select Setup » Flashing to open the Compositional Flashing tab.

Temperature Energy Balance / Physical Properties

The following methods are available for calculating compositional fluid physical properties:
Always Interpolate (fast)
This option uses interpolation between physical properties determined by in a predefined
grid of temperature and pressure points. This grid can be modified from the compositional
menu. (default)
Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolate elsewhere
This is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties will
change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed
whenever the grid points comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same
phases. For example if all 4 points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no
water, then we assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the
hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two or three

User Guide
163
PIPESIM User Guide

of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew point line crosses the
rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
Always Rigorous Flash (slow)
Interpolation never occurs: properties are obtained by flashing at the required pressure
and temperature. This is the slowest but most accurate method.
These apply in the following sections:
Temperature Energy Balance (TH)
These values are used to maintain the temperature/enthalpy/entropy balance of the fluid.
Physical properties (PP)
These are the values required to perform the multiphase fluid flow and heat transfer
calculations. They include phase volume fractions, densities, viscosities, heat capacities,
and surface tension.
Note the following:
• In most simulations, for every PP flash that is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes.
Thus, these (TH flashes) clearly have the greatest effect on speed and run time. The
inaccuracies of TH interpolated flashes are usually minimal.
• The speed impact of each choice obviously depends on the composition, and the phase
behavior in the PT region of interest. As a rough guide, taking the base case as interpolation,
swapping just the PP flashes to "rigorous" will multiply your run time by about 4. With TH
flashes also "rigorous", run time will probably increase at least 20 fold. Use of the 'compromise'
choices will be faster.
• For those requiring more accuracy, we have found the "most useful" settings (that is the
greatest increase in accuracy for the smallest effect on performance) to be the following:
• PP= Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere
• TH= Always Interpolate.

In-line flashing (default)

These are PVT tables that built (in memory) when the simulation is underway. There are three
options to this method, as follows:
Interpolation
In order to maximize the speed of the simulation not all requested PT points are flashed, A
pressure/temperature grid is defined and only these points are created. For points not lying
exactly on a grid point, four-point interpolation is used. The default grid points can be
changed using the compositional option (p.149). The fastest but least accurate method.
Interpolate when close to phase boundary
The above table is used except where 1 or more of the four-points used for the
interpolation is in a different phase. In this case a full flash is performed and the data point
added to the table. This will improve accuracy, but at the cost of speed
Rigorous
a full flash is always performed. Very accurate, but slow!
More details (p.163)

User Guide
164
PIPESIM User Guide

In a Network model each source can have a different composition assigned to it, the streams are
mixed at junctions. These mixer streams are then reported for all branches in the output file.
Additional information on the fluid properties can be reported by adding the report tool (p.113)
object to a model and selecting the compositional reporting options.
The compositional interface takes advantage of concepts and terminology specific to petroleum
engineers, providing an easy to use front-end to a complex multiphase flash packages. It allows
the following:
• compositions to be specified (including petroleum fractions),
• PVT tables to be generated
• phase envelopes (with water and hydrate prediction) to be generated
• compositions to be exported and imported
• PVT Data matching

Stock tank Conditions

Stock tank conditions are defined as:

Pressure Temperature
14.7 psia 60 F
1 bara 15.5 C

Flowing Conditions
Flowing conditions are defined at the actual in-situ flowing pressure (P) and temperature (T).

Examples
Flowing gas flowrate
the gas flowrate at stock-tank conditions (mmscf/d), this rate does not include the
dissolved gas and therefore its value increases along the flow system due to pressure
losses. If the outlet pressure is set to 14.7 psia, then the profile will eventually converge to
the stock-tank gas rate (3).
Flowing gas volume flowrate
the gas volume flowrate at in-situ flowing pressure (P) and temperature (T) (mmcf/d). This
rate has lower values than those of (1).
Stock Tank gas flowrate
the gas flowrate at stock-tank conditions (mmscf/d), this is the total gas (free + dissolved)
which remains constant throughout the flow system.

Steam
For steam systems (production and injection) PIPESIM uses “ASTEM97 - IAPWS IF97 Properties
of Water and Steam for Industrial Use," Copyright Edward D. Throm (C) 2005.

User Guide
165
PIPESIM User Guide

When modeling steam systems the pressure and quality or temperature are required. If the quality
is not provided, superheated (quality =100%) or sub-cooled (quality=0%) then the temperature is
required.
Steam systems can be modeled in both single branch and network models using engine
keywords. These can be specified from the Pipesim GUI as described below. However:

Note: Because the GUI does not understand steam as a fluid model choice, it will require you to
specify a valid fluid model, either as Black Oil, or Compositional. The steam keywords will override
this, so the choice is not really relevant when the model is working.

Single branch steam

1. To model steam in a single branch PIPESIM model, go to Setup » Engine Options in the
single branch view of the steam source branch, and specify the following keywords, for
example:.

STEAM
INLET QUALITY = 0.5

The inlet steam quality needs to be specified, if not, the engine will assume it to be either 0.0 or 1.0
depending on the pressure and temperature at the inlet.
2. Make sure you have a black oil fluid specified, with a GLR of zero and a watercut of
100%.correctly.
3. Mass flow rates must be used with steam. Any operation that specifies a flowrate, or sets a
flowrate limit, must do so with a mass rate, not a gas or liquid rate.
When steam quality is provided, it will be used with the lnlet pressure to calculate the resulting
steam temperature and enthalpy; Any inlet temperature you specify will be ignored.
If quality is not provided, enthalpy will be used instead. If Enthalpy is not provided, the system will
be flashed at the specified inlet pressure and temperature, and as a result will be 100% liquid or
100% vapour at the system inlet.

Network model steam

1. To model steam sources in a network model. go to Setup » Engine Options in the network
view, and enter the following data for example in the lower section of the window:

SETUP COMP = STEAM

SOURCE NAME = SS1 QUALITY = 0.8

2. Enter the quality for all the steam sources. If the quality is not entered, it will be determined from
the temperature and pressure given for that source. If it is entered the source will be considered
saturated at that pressure and the temperature will be adjusted accordingly.

Note: Steam is considered as a third thermodynamic model (after blackoil and compositional). At
present only one thermodynamic model is allowed per network, so steam systems have to be
modeled as a separate network from the hydrocarbon production or injection networks.

User Guide
166
PIPESIM User Guide

1.4.7 Converting Black Oil Models into Compositional Models using

Multiflash for PIPESIM*
The black oil analysis within Multiflash™ allows you to generate a normal compositional analysis
from a very limited input specification (known as Black Oil input).
Knowledge of the type of reservoir fluid to model is one of the main requirements to run any
PIPESIM* Production System Analysis Software simulation. Black Oil and Compositional models
are available in PIPESIM throughout the GUI or by using PVT (Pressure - Volume - Temperature)
or MFL (Multiflash) files.
The black oil model is used for simulating dry gas, water, and non-volatile oils while the
compositional model is best suited for light oils, condensates, and natural gases. Any reservoir
fluid could be described using a compositional model that allows more detailed analysis of the fluid
behavior. However, you rarely have compositional data so are forced to use a black oil model
without being able to analyze further problems like flow assurance issues. However, Multiflash
provides a useful feature to create an equivalent Compositional fluid from basic Black oil data. The
steps to do this are outlined below.
1. Open the PIPESIM application, choose to create a New Single Branch model, and then click
Setup » MFL file.
2. Click Create New to launch the Multiflash interface.

3. Click File » Save Problem Set Up… to create your Multiflash model. Save periodically during
the rest of this procedure.
4. Click Select » Units, choose the units of your preference (for example, All British) and then
click OK.

User Guide
167
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Define the model set.

a. Click Select » Model set… , on the Cubic EoS Models tab. select the desired model, and
then click Define Model.

Note: Refer to the Multiflash Help for a detailed explanation on model selection, or leave the
default selections.

A message displays that shows your selection.

b. Click OK and close the Select Model Set window.
6. Enter values for black oil analysis.
a. Click Select » PVT Lab Input… and click on the Black Oil Analysis tab, enter the
Minimum input for Black Oil Analysis.

b. Enter the available black oil data in the section Minimum input for Black Oil Analysis.
It is strongly recommended that you enter the Watson K-factor value if it is available, even though it
is listed as optional. This is because it is used to determine the molecular weight of the stock tank
liquid for the created, equivalent compositional fluid.

Note: You can also enter values for SARA Analysis, Total Wax Content, and Water Cut (as % of
total liquid).

7. Configure the pseudocomponent settings for the fluid characterization.

a. Select the carbon number you would like the pseudocomponents to start from, when the
characterization is done. Do this by selecting from the Start pseudocomponents at
dropdown menu.
b. Select the number of pseudocomponents you want in the created compositional fluid. Do
this by selecting from the Number of pseudocomponents required dropdown menu.
8. Click Do Characterisation.
A message displays indication that black oil characterization was successfully completed.
This process generates an equivalent compositional fluid made up of pure components and
petroleum fractions in the Multiflash Results window. The pseudocomponents generated will
depend on the settings you configured in steps 7a-b. The more data you enter in the Black Oil
Analysis tab, the closer the match between the created compositional fluid, and the original
black oil fluid.
9. Click OK and close the PVT Lab Fluid Analysis window.
10.View the phase envelope for the fluid by clicking the Phase envelope or Phase envelope for
solids icons on the toolbar. They can also be accessed via Calculate » Phase envelope. Exit
the phase envelope.
11.Save the MFL file again and close the Multiflash interface. This takes you back to the PIPESIM
interface and displays a link to the MFL file you just created. You may now run the PIPESIM
simulation with this file, as long as it is present in the location specified under Setup » MFL file.

User Guide
168
PIPESIM User Guide

1.5 Options
1.5.1 Common Options
Project Data
Use Setup » Project Data to enter any of the following optional information on the PIPESIM
project:
• Project
• User
• Job
• Manager
• Company
• Work order
• Client
• Remarks
The project title will be displayed on all reports.

Units
These are the default units of measurement for the main engineering quantities which appear as a
first choice for input data. The units can be in one of the predefined data sets "Engineering" or "SI".
Alternatively, you can specify a customized set of units by selecting the Custom option.
The current selected data set can also be set so that it is the default when a new model is created.
See how... (p.169)
Some custom data sets are provided. These include Canadian, Mexican and SI unit sets. These
can be imported from the "PIPESIM/data" directory.

Selecting a units set

To select the unit set, do the following:
1. Select Setup » Units.... On the Set Units tab, do one of the following;
• Select Eng to use engineering units.
• Select SI.
• Select Custom and define the unit set for each property.
2. If required, click Set as Default. This makes this unit set the default used when any new model
is opened. Existing models will retain the unit that they were saved with.

Custom units
A custom data set can also be saved to a data file (*.unf) for use by other users or models. A
custom set is, by default, based on the Eng. data set. However, it can be based on the SI set if you

User Guide
169
PIPESIM User Guide

first import the SI set (SI.unf file). Set the required units and provide a data set name, then click
Export to be prompted for a file name and location.
The More Units>> button allows more control over the units selected.

Choose Paths

Note: Only change these entries if advised to by Schlumberger.

To change the path of any tool used, do the following:

1. Select Setup » Preferences » Choose Paths.... Alternatively Expert » Display »
Preferences » Choose Paths...
2. Change the file and full path of any the following:
Editor
can be changed to use your preferred text editor
Single branch calculation engine
can be changed if a new engine is provided by Schlumberger
Network calculation engine
can be changed if a new engine is provided by Schlumberger.
Plot
plot utility to use
Database
database location. Note: If this is changed, close and restart PIPESIM so the changes
take effect.
USERDLL
Location of the USERDLL.dat file. This is used to edit/specify to PIPESIM the
characteristics of USER defined correlations. Changing this may remove some
correlations from PIPESIM. Only for expert Users.

Note: If this is changed, close and restart PIPESIM so the changes take effect.

Heat Transfer Options

To set up the Heat Transfer options, select Setup » Heat Transfer Options.

Pipe Burial Method

You can select the model to be used for pipeline heat transfer calculations. The calculations take
into consideration the burial configuration of the pipe (fully buried, partially buried, or fully exposed)
and give different U-value results based on the model selected. The options available, in
decreasing order of accuracy, are the following:
• Method (p.491)
• Method (p.493)

User Guide
170
PIPESIM User Guide

• Method (p.492)
The three options give identical results for a fully exposed pipeline. However, for a fully buried pipe
or partially buried pipe they give different results. The 2009 Method is recommended for use and is
the current default. See Further details (p.474).
Also see heat transfer. (p.98)

Inside Film Coefficient Method

You can specify the inside film coefficient calculation model to be used during heat loss
calculations. You can choose between the Kaminsky Method (p.482) and the Kreith Method
(p.480)

U Value Multiplier
You can specify a multiplier for user enter U-values in heat loss calculations. This is particularly
useful when performing a temperature match in the Data Matching Operation.

Hydrate Sub-Cooling Calculation

This switch turns on the calculation and reporting of the hydrate formation temperature. The
maximum amount of sub-cooling (Hydrate formation temperature - Fluid Temperature) is reported
for each branch of a network. This can help to determine where the hydrate problem starts in the
flowline.
You can plot the following:
• Fluid Temperature versus Distance
• Hydrate Formation Temperature versus Distance
• Degrees of Subcooling versus Distance
You can display all of the plots on the same plot.
The maximum amount of sub-cooling in a branch is calculated and reported to the system plot file.

Note: This calculation may increase runtime significantly.

Engine Options
To set these options, select Setup » Engine Options. The parameters are as follows:
Segments per pipe length and Maximum Segment Length
These data fields allow you to set the initial maximum segment length either as a length
quantity, or as a division factor of each section. If both are specified, the smaller will be
taken. The segment may be further subdivided by the program, as required, so as to
obtain a converged solution.
Iteration Estimate
This data field allows you to provide an estimated inlet pressure or an estimated mass flow
rate. For further information see ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.616).

User Guide
171
PIPESIM User Guide

Additional engine keywords

This data field allows you to provide additional engine keywords for the PIPESIM single
branch or network engine.

Output Options
More details. (p.619)

Define Output
To change the options, select Setup » Define Output.
Options that apply to the data reported in the main output file for a single branch (*.out) are as
follows:
Primary Output Page(s)
Primary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node :
Distance, Elevation, Horizontal Angle, Vertical Deviation, Pressure, Temperature, Mean
Velocity, elevational and Frictional Pressure Drop, Liquid Flowrate, Free Gas Flowrate,
Liquid and Gas Densities, Slug Number and Flow Pattern.
Auxiliary Output Page(s)
Auxiliary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node :
Distance, Elevation, Pipe ID, Superficial Liquid and Gas Velocities, Liquid and Gas Mass
Flowrates, Liquid and Gas Viscosities, Reynolds Number, Liquid Volume Fraction, Liquid
Holdup Fraction, Enthalpy, Iteration Number, Flash/Table Interpolation Diagnostics.
Well Inflow Performance Data
The well Inflow performance data output page contains the well inflow performance
relationship input and derived values used to model the relationship between well
drawdown and flowrate. This page only applies to models containing a completion.
System Profile
Primary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node :
Distance, Elevation, Section Length, Total Length, Ambient Temperature, Input U, and
Fluid Data File.
Echo Input Fluid Properties
Fluid Property Pages contain the fluid property input data and some calculated properties
at stock tank conditions.
Echo Engine Batch Language
Prints out the input keywords at the top of the output file.
Segment Data in Primary Output
A "section" of the model is defined as the thing between two nodes. Sections are further
divided into "segments" for calculation purposes. Segment data can be included in the
Primary Output Page by checking this box.

User Guide
172
PIPESIM User Guide

Heat Transfer Input Data

The Heat Transfer Input Data Page(s) typically contain the following information for each
node: Pipe and Coating Thicknesses and Thermal Conductivities, Soil Thermal
Conductivity, Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and Ambient Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Data
The Heat Transfer Output Data Page(s) typically contain the following information for each
node: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy, Temperature Gradients, and Heat
Transfer Coefficients.
Slug Output Pages
Slug Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node : Distance,
Elevation, Pipe ID, Slug Lengths and Frequencies, Slug Number and Flow Pattern.
Iteration Progress Log
This prints the log of iterations for iterative models only, that is those where the calculated
variable is inlet pressure or flowrate.
Wax Page(s)
Create specific pages for the wax operation.
Fluid property tables
Create an output file (*.out) that contains tables of the properties as a function of pressure
and temperature for compositional fluids ONLY. Blackoil fluids (p.135) are controlled under
Setup » Blackoil. See also TPRINT Tabular Data Print Options (p.739).
No Cases to Print (Single branch mode only)
Determines the number of cases to print full results for in a single branch sensitivity case.
By default full results are only printed for the 1st case.
Plot File Format
Determines the format of the created plot file.
PS-PLOT
PIPESIM's graphical post-processor (Default)
Lotus compatible
Lotus formatted file
Excel compatible
Excel formatted file
Excel compatible (packed).
Excel formatted file that is compacted.
Neutral
standard ASCII text file.
Report Tool Output Goes To
When a report tool is placed in the model, its results are written to the output file (*.out).
The section of the output file that the report goes to can be selected, the default is
Dedicated.

User Guide
173
PIPESIM User Guide

Output Control
Select Setup » Define Output and select the Output Control tab. The parameters are as follows:
Use local branch options
If this option is selected, engine will use corresponding values specified for each local
branch.
Use network options (in addition to local branch options)
If this option is selected, it allows you to add output options defined for network to options
defined for each local branch.
Use network options (and ignore local branch options)
If this option is selected, it allows you to ignore output options defined for network to
options defined for each local branch.
• Suppress output for report elements - If this option is selected, all report elements
are disabled in the single-branch output pages for each branch.
• Disable plotting - If this option is selected, the results are not graphically displayed.
Apply network options to all branches
This overrides specific options defined on branch level with values defined for network.

Export data to EXCEL

From the calculation engine, the basic [plot] data can be written to an Microsoft Excel formatted
file by specifying one of the Excel options for the Plot File Format under the Setup » Define
Output. This creates an Excel data file with the extension .csv. See Setup/Define Output (p.172).
From the GUI:
1. From the network module (after a simulation) the field results can be exported to Excel using
Reports » Report Tool.
2. In the Report Tool, select the required field data and click the Excel button. If Excel is located
on the PC, this step opens an interface (p.260) to Excel.
From PsPlot, use the Excel button (p.260) on the Data tab.

Produce a custom report

The standard reports (full output and summary files) have been designed to provide commonly
reported results after a simulation. However there will be situations where you only require a
subset of the information or some data that is not available in the standard report. In this case the
custom report feature can be utilized.
Custom reports are invoked by using the PIPESIM Input Language (PIL) using the additional EKT
(p.590).

Note: The EKT (p.92) (spanner tool) can not be used for this operation.

The sub-command CUSTOM (p.619) of the PRINT (p.619) keyword is required to create custom
reports. The keyword PRINT CUSTOM requires a list of variables to print to the custom report,

User Guide
174
PIPESIM User Guide

these can be determined using the PLOT SYNTAX (p.626) keyword. The codes returned from this
list can then be used as argument on the PRINT CUSTOM command.

Example 1
To obtain a list of available custom report variable, use the additional EKT option, add PLOT
SYNTAX and run the model. The output file contains a list of variables and codes for "Profile plot
file, SPOT & CUSTOM reports".

Example 2
To produce a custom report with "Horizontal distance", "Total distance" and "Elevation". In the
output file locate the codes for the required properties, in this case A, Band C. Using the additional
EKT (p.590) option, add PRINT CUSTOM = (A,B,C) (the PLOT SYNTAX can be left if required)
and run the model. The output file contains a custom report section with the variables required.

View tabular results

Tabular (text) results files are created, from the calculation engine, in standard ASCII format (*.out
and *.sum) and can be viewed by any text editor.
You can change this to use a preferred text editor using the Choose Path option (p.170).

Erosion and Corrosion Options

The erosion and corrosion options are used to calculate the following:
• erosion and corrosion rates
• erosional velocity limit
These are reported per-node in the Auxiliary Output page of the main output file, and in the
profile plot file. The maxima for the case are reported in the system plot file. The erosional velocity
is the maximum fluid velocity as recommended by the chosen correlation. The erosional velocity
appears in the Auxiliary Output page as a ratio with the fluid mean velocity, so values of 1 or
greater indicate the need for attention.
To set the options, select Setup » Erosion & Corrosion Properties.

Erosion
Erosion can occur in solids-free fluids, but is usually caused by entrained solids (sand). The rate of
sand production is the main determinant of erosion rate. Sand production rate is specified per-
branch in a network model. Sand produced in source or well branches will be tracked across
manifolds and mixed along with fluids, so an accurate erosion rate will be calculated without the
need for you to specify the sand rate in link branches. Sand is assumed to follow liquid production
when a separator is modeled.
The following erosion models are available:
• API 14 E
• Salama

User Guide
175
PIPESIM User Guide

API 14 E
The API 14 E model comes from the American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice,
number 14 E. This is a solids-free model which will calculate an erosion velocity only (no erosion
rate). The erosion velocity V e is calculated with the formula

K
Ve = 0.5 Eq. 1.3
ρ
where ρ is the fluid mean density and K is an empirical constant. K has dimensions of

( )
0.5
mass
. Its default value in engineering units is 100, this corresponds to 122 in SI
(length × time2)
units.

Salama
The Salama model was published in Journal of Energy Resources Technology, Vol 122, June
2000, "An Alternative to API 14 E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden Fluids", by Mamdouh
M. Salama. This models erosion rate and erosional velocity.
The parameters required for the model are as follows:
Acceptable Erosion rate
rate of erosion that is deemed 'acceptable'. This is used to calculate the erosional velocity.
Erosional velocity appears as a ratio with fluid mean velocity in the Auxiliary output page.
The default is 0.1 mm/year.
Sand production ratio
a measure of sand production rate, as a ratio with liquid rate. Units are Parts Per Million,
by volume, against stock-tank liquid rate. If sand production ratio is zero, erosion rate will
not be calculated.
Sand Grain Size
mean size of the sand grains. The default 0.25 mm.
Geometry Constant
this is the geometry dependent constant Sm. The default is 5.5
Efficiency
a multiplier used to match field data. The default is1.
The equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained from the supplied
volume ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand density, 2650 kg/m 3.
See also EROSION (p.634).

Corrosion
The de Waard (1995) corrosion model (p.577) calculates a corrosion rate caused by the presence
of CO2 dissolved in water. Concentrations of CO2 and water are obtained from the fluid property
definitions, (black oil, compositional, ScaleChem generated PVT files). If CO2 is absent from the
fluid and no liquid water phase is present, the corrosion rate is zero.

User Guide
176
PIPESIM User Guide

The parameters required for the model are:

Efficiency
multiplier Cc to correct for inhibitor efficiency, or to match field data.

Actual pH
if supplied, this value is used instead of the calculated one.
See also CORROSION (p.634) and deWaard (1995) Corrosion Model (p.378).

Engine Preferences
To change the engine preferences, select Setup » Preferences » Engine. The dialog this opens
has two tabs, Engine Preferences and Advanced.

Engine Preferences tab

The following Preference settings affect the running of the calculation engine and apply to
PIPESIM, every time that it is started.

Run Plot tool Allows the plot utility to be run and display results graphically as the calculation
with single engine is running. The default is on.
branch engine

Run engine Runs the engine in a minimized state. The default is on. If you want to see the
minimized progress of the simulation, deselect this option or maximize the PIPESIM
engine window.

Add unit When the data is written to the engine file, the units of each property are
descriptors to added. The default is off.
the engine files

Run engine via Running the engine via a batch file allows the window to be kept open if the
batch file engine fails, so any error messages can be viewed. This also allows license
errors to be identified. The default is on.

Number of PIPESIM 2012 (and newer) introduced a parallelized network solver where you
processes for can run network simulations with multiple processors to increase the speed.
Network engine The selection for this will be limited to the number of available processors on
your hardware as reported by Windows. The larger the selected value the
faster the network simulation. Set this to a smaller value of you would like to
limit the number of processes used for simulation due to other running
applications that may need processing resources. The parallelized network
solver requires the installation of a compatible version of Intel MPI (the version
in the PIPESIM install kit). Most issues with incompatible Intel MPI versions can
be easily resolved by uninstalling the incompatible version and installing the
compatible one. For more information, see Parallelized Network Solver. (p.177)

User Guide
177
PIPESIM User Guide

License As needed (slower)

This option will checkout PIPESIM license features as needed. If a network
license server is used, you may experience latency when running
simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid models due to the time
required to access the license server and check out the appropriate
license. This is the default setting.
At startup (faster)
This option will checkout one of each available PIPESIM license features
when the PIPESIM user interface is opened. The features are checked
back into the license server when PIPESIM is closed. This option
eliminates network latency when checking license features, allowing faster
performance when running simulation tasks or editing compositional fluid
models.

Advanced tab
To change these, select the Advanced tab.

Additional Single Branch Engine Command Line Parameters

The following are command line arguments for the single branch engine:

-vx Controls screen output levels. The default = -v1

-b Do not issue dialog box when simulation has finished

Additional Network Engine Command Line Parameters

The following are command line arguments for the Network engine:

-vx Controls screen output levels. The default = -v1

-b Do not issue dialog box when simulation has finished.

-c Creates well performance curves.

-r Restart but do not keep branches skipped in the restart file permanently skipped. This option
has to be used ONLY with the run button in the toolbar

Note: Use of the restart button

, overrides this option and keeps all branches skipped in the restart file permanently skipped.
See Restart Model (p.211) .

User Guide
178
PIPESIM User Guide

Parallelized Network Solver

PIPESIM 2012 (and newer) introduced a parallelized network solver where you can run network
simulations with multiple processors to increase the speed. This is configured under Setup »
Preferences » Engine » Number of processes for Network engine.

Resolving Intel MPI incompatibility issues

While multiple Intel MPI versions can be installed on a machine, if any of these versions is
incompatible with PIPESIM, such as the Intel MPI version installed with Avocet IAM 2011 (and
older), and was installed last (for example, after a compatible Intel MPI version was already
installed), PIPESIM network simulations will be unable to run with multiple processors.
To resolve Intel MPI incompatibility, perform the following steps:
1. Uninstall all Intel MPI versions including the incompatible Intel MPI version (4.01.007 and older)
and any previously-installed compatible versions. Re-install the compatible version in the
PIPESIM install kit.
2. Uninstall Avocet IAM 2011 (which will also uninstall the incompatible Intel MPI version) and all
other Intel MPI versions and upgrade to Avocet IAM 2013 (or newer) which includes a
compatible Intel MPI version.

Note:
If you do not want to change the Intel MPI version, you still have the option of running the
network simulation with only 1 processor by manually selecting this under Setup »
Preference » Engine » Number of processes for Network engine.
If you have only one (1) Intel MPI version installed and it is the incompatible version, the
PIPESIM network simulation will run, but will default to using only one (1) processor.

1.5.2 Network Options

Network Iterations
To configure Network iterations, select Setup » Iterations. The parameters are as follows:
Tolerance
The tolerance to converge the network model to. (Default 1%). A network has converged
when the pressure balance and mass balance at each node is within the specified
tolerance. The calculated pressure at each branch entering and leaving a node is
averaged.
Max Iterations
The maximum number of iterations in which to try and determine a solution. The simulation
will stop after this number of iterations unless the tolerance has been met. (Default 100)
Background information
The network module uses a GNET algorithm to solve all networks. Reaching a solution involves
continually estimating and refining a matrix of results for each branch while simultaneously taking

User Guide
179
PIPESIM User Guide

into consideration the many sources of discontinuity within the network. These sources of
discontinuity include, dead wells, two phase vertical flow, critical flow, phase changes and flow
regime boundaries.

Note: If there is no convergence after completing the specified number of iterations and the last
iteration performed is not the best solution, the solver performs another iteration to calculate the
best solution from all the iterations. The best iteration is based on where the maximum pressure
and flow rate residual errors are the lowest. PIPESIM publishes the data from the best iteration to
the network report. When there is no convergence, the report tool displays a warning message that
the model did not converge and it lists the tolerance that was achieved.

By default the tolerance for PIPESIM simulations is 1%. Mathematically this means that the
simulation will terminate when all of the root mean square errors for pressure and flowrate at nodes
are less than 1%. If you decrease this value then you are forcing the solver to do more calculations
and produce more accurate results. It should be noted, that for long chains of branches this error
may become cumulative, resulting in a much larger overall error across the network
By default the solver will complete a maximum of 100 iterations per simulation. If after 100
iterations no solution meeting the required tolerance has been found then solver will stop and
display existing results. If you find that a particular system is not converging then, generally, it is
best to relax the tolerance rather than increase the maximum number of iterations.
The solver makes use of convergence techniques that are tuned to suit each individual problem.
These routines are based on well accepted mathematical theorems but modified to allow for the
discontinuities that might be generated by different flow correlations, as well as those originating
from the problem specification. However, as a result of the inherent difficulties associated with
sources of discontinuity, you may find that some network simulations converge slowly, or in some
rare cases, not at all. In these circumstances, the table shown below is a guide to obtaining
satisfactory convergence:

Problem Cause Solution

Oscillates about the solution Machine accuracy or other Relax tolerance if intermediate
but does not converge limitation results is sufficiently accurate
Slow reduction in error Discontinuity in chosen flow Use the results from a NOSLIP run
followed by a large increase correlation, not already as estimates for the simulation
followed by slow reduction, trapped with the solver. using the original correlation
and so on
Alternating forward and Too many non-return Remove all non-return valves,
reverse flow predicted valves in network except in lines where reverse flow is
guaranteed.

Fluid Models
This dialog allows fluid models in a network model to be displayed, edited and sorted in a
spreadsheet type display. This allows you to view what fluid properties are used by all network
wells or sources without having to drill down to the individual fluid model screens.

User Guide
180
PIPESIM User Guide

Setup Fluid Models

The screen allows display and editing of black oil fluid models. If the network is using
compositional fluid models, the screen only allows viewing of fluid models being used and selection
of either Global or Local fluid models for sources.
The following can be edited:
Default / Local
Select whether to use the default (global) fluid model or the local fluid model defined for
the well / source.
Override Wcut/GOR
Select the check box to allow override of the fluid model water cut and gas fraction
(GOR/GLR/OGR/LGR).

Local fluid models

You can edit the following only for local fluid models:
Water Cut
fluid model water cut value.
GOR
fluid model gas fraction value, can be GOR, GLR, OGR or LGR.
Gas SG
stock tank gas specific gravity.
Water SG
stock tank water specific gravity.
Oil Gravity
stock (dead) oil density or API.
Dead Oil Visc
the dead oil viscosity correlation to use. Alternatively, specify User's Data.
Visc 1 & Visc 2
Two dead oil viscosity values. These values are read only if a dead oil viscosity correlation
is selected. If User's Data is selected, these two values are user specified.
Temp 1 & Temp 2
Two temperature values at which to define the dead oil viscosity values.

Note: If you attempt to edit a Global fluid model parameter from this screen, the Global fluid
model dialog boxes open. This is because changing the Global fluid model parameters affects all
other sources that are using the Global fluid.

1.5.3 View Options

To change these options, select View » Options. This opens the View Options dialog, which has
the following tabs.

User Guide
181
PIPESIM User Guide

View Properties tab

This controls background color and grid lines.

Background Color
Double-click the color box to change the color. The default is white.

Grid Lines
The parameters are the following:
Draw Grid
turn the back ground grid on and off
Horizontal spacing
distance between the horizontal grid lines (inn pixels) if the background grid is displayed.
Default =50.
Vertical spacing
distance between the vertical grid lines (in pixels) if the background grid is displayed.
Default =50.
Color
Color of the grid line, if displayed. Double click the color box to change. Default light gray.

Objects tab
Identifiers
The options for object identifiers are as follows:
Leave Display unchanged
default
Show all identifiers
shows all object identifiers on the schematic
Hide all identifiers
Remove all object identifiers from the schematic

Tool Tip Options

You can switch off Tool tips. This is useful on a large model as having these enabled slows model
navigation.
Activate on mouse move
default
Activate on mouse click
Switch off

User Guide
182
PIPESIM User Guide

Red box
Draw red box around incomplete objects
The red box warns the user that a parameter is incomplete. The default = on.

General Tab
This tab appears on most dialogs which show object properties.
Activate/Deactivate
turn the object off (that is remove it from the simulation)

Identifier
The parameters are as follows:
Text box
the object's identifier. This cannot be more that 16 characters, must be unique and must
not contain any of the following characters: .\/[]{}<>|=?'" or spaces.
Bounding rectangle
this places a rectangle around the name
Show identifier
this displays the object's identifier
Back Color
color of the bounding rectangle

Position
Screen coordinates of the object. The limits are as follows:
Top left
X= -2,101 Y= 2,089
Top right
X= 2,064 Y=2,084
Bottom left
X= -2,101 Y= -2,089
Bottom right:
X=2,064 Y=-2,0898

Viewing a large model

When the model is too large to fit on the screen, zooming out can change the view. Zoom options
are located on the Format tab in the Zoom group.
To zoom into the smallest area that will show all your completions, click Zoom to Fit.
To use the zoom out feature, select View » Zoom Out or press Shift+X. This reduces the size of
the objects accordingly.

User Guide
183
PIPESIM User Guide

• To Zoom out to the maximum extent, use Shift+F or View » Zoom Full View.
• To Zoom in, use Shift+Z or View » Zoom In.
• To restore the original (default) view setting, use Shift+R or View » Restore View.

Viewing flowline data

To view the flowline descriptions for all flowlines, select Setup » Flowline Properties. The data
displayed here can be changed. If the flowline has been defined using the detailed profile, the data
is grayed out.

1.6 Database
1.6.1 New ESP/Pump/Compressor Curve
The user curves are used to determine the performance of the device. The data is stored in an
external Access database.
To define a new curve, do the following:
1. Set the device type: ESP, Generic Pump or Compressor. The new device can be based on
data from an existing one.
2. Enter the new manufacturer's name.
3. Enter the new model reference.
The defined curve can then be used in the ESP (p.234), pump (p.115), compressor (p.89), or
expander (p.92) objects to define the performance. At this stage the actual operating speed,
number of stages, and so on, can also be set.

ESP
For an ESP enter the following:
1. The ESP diameter
2. Minimum allowable flowrate
3. Maximum allowable flowrate
4. Base speed that the curves are based upon, typically 60 Hz
5. Base stages that the curves are based upon, typically 1
6. Allowed stages. The stages that are recommended.
7. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flow rate, Head and Efficiency.

Generic Pump
For a Generic Pump enter the following:
1. Minimum allowable flowrate
2. Maximum allowable flowrate

User Guide
184
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Base speed that the curves are based upon, typically 60 Hz

4. Base stages that the curves are based upon, typically 1
5. Allowed stages. The stages that are recommended.
6. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flow rate, Head and Efficiency.

Compressor/Expander
For a Compressor/Expander enter the following:
1. Minimum allowable flowrate
2. Maximum allowable flowrate
3. % design speed that the curves are based upon, typically 100
4. The curves should be entered for a single stage device. Press Next to enter the curve data in
terms of rate, Head and Efficiency. Note the units.
5. Once the curve data has been defined, the device's performance curve can be displayed (and
printed).

New Reciprocating Compressor Curve

The user curves are used to determine the performance of the device. The date is stored in an
external Access database. To define a new curve, do the following:
1. Enter the new manufacturer's name. The new device can be based on data from an existing
one.
2. Enter the new model reference.
3. Enter the following:
• Base Speed
• Absolute Minimum Suction Pressure
• Absolute Maximum Suction Pressure
• Absolute Maximum Capacity
• Stages
• Interstage Temperature. The curves should be entered for a single stage device.
4. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flowrate, Suction Pressure and Efficiency or
Power for various Discharge Pressures, at least two are required. The Discharge Pressure you
must supply is the one at which the data for the associated curve is valid for. If the curve is valid
for a range of Discharge Pressures, then supply the compressor's maximum discharge
pressure. Note the units.
Once the curve data has been defined, the device's performance curve can be displayed (and
printed).
The defined curves can then be used within the compressor (p.89) object. Set the User curves
option and the compressor type to Reciprocating to define the performance. At this stage, the
actual operating speed and or minimum and maximum operating speeds can also be set.
See also Electrical submersible pumps (ESP) (p.234)

User Guide
185
PIPESIM User Guide

User Curves
User curves allow the user to enter basic data to represent the following elements:
• Multiphase Booster

ESP and Pumps

The ESP or pump is defined as curve that represents its performance over a range of operating
conditions. The following data are required:
• Manufacturer
• Model
• Diameter (ESP only) - used only when a search is performed to locate items that fall within
certain ranges
• Min flowrate - minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed
outside of this range. Warning messages show where the operating point is outside this limit.
• Max flow rate - maximum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed
outside of this range. Warning messages show where the operating point is outside this limit.
• Base speed at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
• Base stages at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
• Allowed stages: The number of stages that can be used for this particular item.
• Performance curve
• Flow Rate - flow rate in flowing conditions (not stock tank)
• Head -
• Power - the power requirements
• The defined curve can also be viewed and printed.
The ESP or curve can then be used in the simulation.

Compressors
The compressor is defined as a curve that represents its performance over a range of operating
conditions. The following data are required:
Manufacturer
a new curve can be based on an existing model.
Model
Min flowrate
minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed outside of
this range. Warning messages will be provided where the operating point is outside this
limit.
Max flow rate
maximum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed outside of
this range. Warning messages will be provided where the operating point is outside this
limit.

User Guide
186
PIPESIM User Guide

Base Speed
speed at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
Performance curve
A set (minimum of 3 points) of data comprising the following:
Flow Rate
flow rate in flowing (actual) conditions (not stock tank)
Head
compressor head.
Efficiency
adiabatic efficiency of the compressor.
The defined curve can also be viewed and printed.
The Compressor (p.89) curve can then be used in the simulation.
See also keywords (p.676)

Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP) Selection

To simulate an ESP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which you
can select. For each model the diameter, minimum and maximum flowrate and base speed are
provided. A plot of the ESP's performance is also available. If the required ESP is not in the
database, you can easily enter the basic data required for it into the database using Data » New
ESP/Pump/Compressor. See Data/NewESP-Pump-Compressor Curve (p.184).

Overview of the Steps

1. To open the Tubing dialog box, double-click the tubing.
2. In the Artificial Lift section, select ESP for the lift type.
3. Click Properties.
4. Select the appropriate manufacturer and model.
5. To select a pump or add your data to the ESP Selection, click Advanced Select and enter
your information.
6. Update the Design Data section and the Calculation Options section as necessary.
7. To change data on the Performance Table, click the Performance Table tab and enter the
appropriate information.
8. Click OK to save your changes.
9. To view the curves, click Standard Curves tab or Variable Speed Curves tab.
You can export the data or print the curve.

Selection
When modeling an ESP, it is important that the correct size (expected design flowrate and physical
size) ESP is used. A search facility is available, based on these two parameters, to select the

User Guide
187
PIPESIM User Guide

appropriate ESP from the database. The search can, if required, be restricted to a particular
manufacturer. Pumps that meet the design criteria will be listed.

Stage-by-stage modeling
Stage-by-stage modeling is selected by selecting the checkbox next to the calculate button.
Alternatively by inserting Engine Keywords (PUMP STAGECALCS) (p.700) into the model, using
the EKT (p.92).

Install a Pump
Once the ESP manufacturer and model (p.234) has been selected from the database of common
ESP's some parameters can be altered. The performance curves for each model are (normally)
based on a Speed of 60Hz and 1 stage.

Design data
Speed
The actual operating speed of the ESP
Stages
The actual number of stags of the ESP
Head factor
Allows the efficiency to be factored (default = 1)

Calculation Options
Viscosity Correction
Allow a viscosity correction factor to be applied to take account of changes to the fluid
viscosity by the pressure and temperature.
Gas Separator present
Allow a gas separator to be added (automatically) with an efficiency: Separator efficiency -
efficiency of an installed gas separator (default = 100% if installed)
Performance table
The data used to predict the performance of the ESP
Standard Curves
The standard performance curves for the ESP - can be printed/exported
Variable Speed Curves
Variable speed curves at 30 - 90 Hz.- can be printed/exported

ESP Design
The ESP option is selected from the Artificial Lift. To design an ESP the following stages are
required:
Select a Pump (p.235)
Select a Motor (p.234)
Select a Cable

User Guide
188
PIPESIM User Guide

The ESP should then be installed, added into the tubing, at the required depth. This can either be
performed manually or by using the Install button. Installing automatically removes any existing
ESPs in the tubing. However, any gas lift values or injections points are not removed.
See also: ESP [Reda] web site

ESP System Components: Cable

Cable Selection can be determined after a Pump and motor have been selected.
1. Motor/Cable Selection tab
2. Cable Selection
3. Select Cable
Cable Length
The length of the cable, can be modified
NP Current @ Design Frequency
The [Name Plate] Current at the design frequency. Cannot be changed.
Computed values

Selected Cable

Cable length

Voltage drop

Downhole voltage

Surface voltage

Total System KVA

Design Report
Display a report that details all the selected components of the ESP system.

Errors
Occasionally a pump may not be able to be determined and a Convergence error will be reported.
There could be a number of reasons for such an error and the user is advised to view the output
report.
Common problems:
1. The system cannot reach the outlet pressure specified. Try increasing the outlet pressure.

1.6.2 New PCP Curve

User defined curves are used to determine the performance of the device. Data is stored in an
external Access database. (Setup Preferences Choose paths)
To define a new PCP curve, use one of the following methods:
• Create a new curve (p.190) by entering the information in the PCP Selection window.
• Select a PCP from the catalog (p.190) and edit the data.

User Guide
189
PIPESIM User Guide

Creating a New Curve

To create a PCP curve, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit PCP.
2. Enter the new Manufacturer name.
3. Enter the new Model name.
4. Enter the Diameter.
5. Enter the Nominal Rate.
6. Enter the Base Speed.
7. Click Next .
8. On the Performance Table dialog box, enter the Head, Flowrate, Power, and Torque data for
the curve.
9. To view the standard curve, click Next.
10.If the variable speed curves were calculated, click Next to view them.
Once the curve data has been defined, you can display, export, or print the device's performance
curve at base speed or at variable speeds (when available). You can use the data within a PCP
object.

Selecting a PCP from the Catalog

To select a PCP from the catalog and edit the information, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit PCP.
2. Click Select PCP from Catalog.
3. When asked whether to continue because switching to the catalog will reset all unsaved data,
click Yes.
4. To edit the information on the page, click Copy to User Defined PCP.
5. Enter your changes.
6. Click Next.
7. Edit the information in the performance table, as necessary.
8. To view the curve, click Next.
Once the curve data has been defined, you can display, export, or print the device's performance
curve at base speed or at variable speeds (when available). You can use the data within a PCP
object.
See also ESP Design (p.234)

Standard PCP Curves

When entering the data for standard curves, enter the basic data.

User Guide
190
PIPESIM User Guide

PCP
The PCP requires a curve that represents its performance over a range of operating conditions.
The following information is required:
• Manufacturer
• Model
• Diameter
• Nominal Rate — maximum flowrate through a PCP at a specified speed and zero pressure
differential
• Base speed — testing catalog speed from the manufacturer. Users can input any different
working speed (normally in the range of 50–500 RPM), and PIPESIM calibrates the
performance curves correspondingly.
• Rod Diameter — used for top drive PCPs
• Performance curve
• Flow Rate — flow rate in flowing conditions (not stock tank)
• Head — increased pressure head in feet or meter
• Power — the power requirements
• Torque — tendency of a force to rotate the PCP (moment of force)
• The defined curve can also be viewed, exported, and printed.

Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Selection

To simulate a PCP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which you
can select. If the required PCP is not in the database, you can enter the required data into the
database using Data » New / Edit PCP. See how... (p.189)

Overview of the Steps

1. To open the Tubing dialog box, double-click the tubing.
2. In the Artificial Lift section, select PCP for the lift type.
3. Click Properties.
4. Select the appropriate manufacturer.
5. Update the Design Data fields as necessary.
6. To edit the data on the PCP Selection and Performance Table tab, click Select PCP from
Catalog.
7. To save the model that you defined, change the name of the manufacturer and the model and
click Save.
8. On the Performance Table tab, update the data as necessary.
9. To see the standard curves, click the Standard Curves tab. You can export or print the data
from this tab.
10.To see the variable speed curves, click the Variable Speed Curves tab. You can export or print
the data from this tab.

User Guide
191
PIPESIM User Guide

11.Click OK.

Selecting a Pump
Once the PCP manufacturer and model have been selected from the database of common PCPs,
you can alter some of the parameters. Typically, the performance curves for each model are based
on a Speed of 100 RPM.

PCP Design Data

The following parameters must be specified.
Speed
The speed at which the PCP is expected to run.
Top Drive
Specifies whether the drive is a top-drive or a bottom-drive. This is used for torque
calculations.
Rod Diameter
Specifies the rod diameter (top drive only.)
Head Factor
Allows the pump head to be adjusted to better match field performance data or account for
wear. The default is 1.

Calculation Option
Viscosity Correction
Allows a viscosity correction factor to be applied to account for reduced slippage.
Gas Separator present
Allows a gas separator to be modeled.
Separator Efficiency (%)
Specifies efficiency of the gas separator. The default is 100%.

Errors
If the PCP is modeled outside its intended operating range, warning or error messages will be
reported. For more details, please view the output report. (Reports » Output file)

1.6.3 Gas Lift Valve List

The database contains a list of available valves . You can add valves to this.
To add a valve to the database, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit Gas Lift Valve....
2. The Gas Lift Valve database opens, for checking or editing. Click Add and enter values for the
following parameters :
• Manufacturer – the valve maker
• Series – the valve series or model name (for example BK-1 valve)

User Guide
192
PIPESIM User Guide

• Port Size – the diameter of the valve port

• Type – the valve type - IPO, PPO-N, PPO-S, Orifice or Dummy valve
• Outer Diameter – the valve outside diameter - valves are either 1" or 1 1/2"
• Port Area – the cross sectional area of the port
• Bellows Area – the cross sectional area of the bellows
• Discharge Coefficient – a discharge coefficient for the Thornhill Craver equation, used to
calculate valve gas throughput (given injection and production pressure)
• DP [Delta P] to fully Open – this is only needed for Diagnostics operation if the throttling
behavior of the valve is to be modeled. It is the difference between the production pressure
when the valve is fully open to fully closed (for a fixed injection pressure).
• Inactive – if this is Yes, the valve is not available for a new design
3. Save the new valve.

Note: To edit an entry, select it and click Edit.

1.6.4 Flow Control Valves

Down hole Flow Control Valves (FCVs) allow 'intelligent' or 'smart' wells to be modeled. The
methodology implemented provides a simple way of modelling single branch (that is non
multilateral) intelligent wells where the FCVs are located close to the reservoir.
FCVs can restrict the completion flowrate through the system, but they are only available for
vertical completions. By default, a completion does not have an FCV associated with it.
The purpose of an FCV is to provide a restriction to fluid flow, thereby reducing the productivity or
injectivity of a given completion. They are useful in a model containing multiple completions
(although there is nothing stopping you from adding one to a single-completion model) to distribute
flow from or to each completion in the desired manner.
An FCV is very similar to a choke. Like a choke, it can be modeled as a fixed-size orifice, in which
form it presents a restriction to flow that results in a pressure drop that increases as flowrate
increases. Unlike a choke however, a maximum flowrate can also be specified: this is applied to
the completion, and if necessary the choke bean diameter is reduced to honour the limit. The
choke diameter and flowrate limit can be applied separately or together. If both are supplied, they
are treated as maximum limits.

How to add an FCV to a completion

To add an FCV to a vertical completion, do the following:
1. Select the Flow Control Valve check box in the Completion dialog.
2. Click the FCV Properties button.
3. The Flow Control Valve dialog opens.
4. Select Generic valve or Specific valve and enter values as described below:

User Guide
193
PIPESIM User Guide

Generic valve
Specify the Equivalent Choke Area, Gas and Liquid Flow Coefficients, and choice of
Gas Choke Equation method. The choke area can be omitted if a Maximum Flowrate is
specified (see below). If it is present, the FCV is modeled with that choke area, but if the
resulting flowrate exceeds the limit, the area is reduced to honor the limit.
Specific Valve
Choose from the list of available valves.To add a new valve to the database, use Data »
New/Edit Flow Control Valve Data. Select the required Manufacturer, Valve Type, and
Part Number. Many of the Specific Valves are multi-position devices: they allow the
effective choke area to be selected from a range of pre-installed fixed chokes. If a flowrate
limit is supplied, the simulation will select the choke position required to honor the limit.
Since the choke area cannot be calculated to match the limit exactly, this will usually result
in the flowrate being lower than the limit. The valve position must be specified. The FCV
will be modeled with the corresponding choke area, but if the resulting flowrate exceeds
the limit, a lower position number will be used. Valve positions are numbered in order of
increasing choke size, starting with position zero, which usually specifies a diameter of
zero to allow the valve to be shut. An FCV may have up to 30 positions.

1.7 Operations
1.7.1 Common Operations
Check model
Allows all the data inputs and connectivity to be checked and verified before any simulation is
performed. No lone nodes are allowed in a single branch model. Any errors or omissions will be
reported.
To check a model, select Operations » Check Model.

Run Model
The Run Model option validates the system, creates the necessary engine input files, and then
runs the model.
To use Run Model, do one of the following:
• Click the Run Model button in any of the operating mode dialog boxes that are accessed using
the Operations Menu.
• Select Operations » Run Model .
• Click the Run model button

on the toolbar.

User Guide
194
PIPESIM User Guide

Abort Run
This allows a simulation to be stopped immediately. This kills the engine process. However, if the
engine is being run via a batch file (p.177) this will only kill the batch process, not the engine. In
this circumstance, use Terminate Run (p.195).
To stop a simulation, select Operations » Abort Run.

Terminate Run
This operation terminates a simulation in a tidy manner. A message is sent to the engine, which
terminates at the next convenient point.
Terminating the run using this method allows the engine to delete temporary files it has created.
Simply closing the simulation window or aborting the run (p.195) does not clean up these files,
which may eventually clutter up the hard disk.
To stop a simulation cleanly, select Operations » Terminate Run.

1.7.2 Single Branch

System Analysis
Use the System Analysis operation to determine the performance of a given system for varying
operating conditions on a case-by-case basis. An example is Pressure or Temperature Profiles
where performance is evaluated on a point-by-point basis.

How to perform a System Analysis

To perform a system analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.33)
2. Select Operations » System Analysis.
3. Set the Calculated Variable to Inlet Pressure (p.117), Outlet Pressure (p.117), Flowrate
(p.118) or User Variable (p.211). If an unselected variable has an adjacent data-entry box,
enter its value(s)
4. Choose the X-axis variable: this is a two stage process. First, choose the desired model
Object, by clicking on the down-arrowhead in the topmost combo-box in the X-Axis Values
column (just underneath the Range... button), and selecting one. Repeat this for the next lower
combo box to choose a Sensitivity variable name. Check the units revealed in the next box,
and adjust if desired.
5. Add the desired values of the X-axis into the spreadsheet cells for the X-axis. To enter a range
of values with a starting value, end value and incriment, use the “Range...” button.
6. (Optional) Select sensitivity variables (p.210) by repeating steps 4 and 5 for the columns
marked Sens Var 1, Sens Var 2, etc.
7. If one or more sensitivity variables are defined, choose how they should be combined with the
X-axis, by selecting a radio button in the Sensitivity Variables box at top right of the dialog.
There are three choices:

User Guide
195
PIPESIM User Guide

• Permuted against each other runs a case for every combination of X-axis and all
sensitivity variables. This produces a plot with most lines (and takes the longest time to run).
• Change in step with Sens Var 1 runs a case for every combination of X-axis and Sens var
1, with the remaining sensitivity variables following Sens var 1 in step. This produces a plot
with the number of lines equal to the number of Sens var 1 values.
• Change in step with X-axis runs a case for every X-axis variable value, with all sensitivity
variables following the X-axis in step. This produces a plot with just one line (and takes the
least time to run).
8. Select the Active check box for each sensitivity variable you want to use in this simulation.
9. Click Run Model.

Pressure/Temperature profile
Pressure or temperature profiles can be generated as a function of distance along the system.
Both temperature and pressure profiles are generated on a node-by-node basis for the system.
Perform the following basic steps to determine the pressure or temperature profile along the
system:
1. Build the required model, pipeline tools (p.89) or well (p.51).
2. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature profile.
3. Determine the boundary condition to compute.
4. (Optional) Select and enter any sensitivity parameters.
5. Run (p.194) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.34).
The operation can be run in any of the following modes:
• Calculate inlet pressure (p.117) given outlet pressure and flow rate
• Calculate outlet pressure (p.117) given inlet pressure and flow rate
• Calculate flowrate (p.118) given inlet pressure and outlet pressure
• Calculate the value of a User Variable (p.211) given inlet pressure, outlet pressure and flow
rate

How to perform a pressure or temperature profile

To perform a pressure or temperature profile, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.33)
2. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature profile.
3. Select the property to calculate: inlet pressure (p.117), outlet pressure (p.117), flow rate
(p.118), or User Variable (p.211).
4. (Optional) Select sensitivity variable (p.210) and supply values for it.
5. Select the desired initial default profile plot. You may have either a pressure or temperature
profile, plotted against either total distance or elevation. This selection affects only the initial

User Guide
196
PIPESIM User Guide

view of the profile plot; once the operation is complete the plot may be changed to display any
desired profile.

Note: If unified multiphase models are to be compared for all inclination angles, select
“horizontal” and change the swap angle to 90 degrees from horizontal. (Setup Flow
Correlations)

6. Click Run Model.

Flow correlation comparison

Use this operation to match test data against each multiphase flow correlation for a particular
system, to determine the most suitable correlation for each system model.

How to perform a flow correlation match

To perform a flow correlation match, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.33)
2. Select Operations » Flow Correlation Comparison.
3. Select the property to compute, inlet pressure (p.117), outlet pressure (p.117) or flowrate
(p.118). If the inlet pressure is the same as the pressure entered in a source object (completion
(p.386) or source (p.116)) it can be omitted.
4. Enter the measured data: pressure and/or temperature.
5. Select the type of correlation to examine; Horizontal or vertical.
6. Select the multiphase flow correlations to examine.
7. Click Run Model.
See also Other Variable (p.211).

Adjusting parameters to match measured data

A better match can be achieved by automatically adjusting parameters (p.197) (such as flow
correlation factors).

Data matching
This option allows you to select parameters that will be automatically adjusted to match measured
data for a particular system.
See also User Variable (p.211) which can be used to select a single parameter that will be
automatically adjusted to match the boundary conditions.

How to perform a data match

To perform a data match, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.33)
2. Add and save measured pressure
{PM } Eq. 1.4

User Guide
197
PIPESIM User Guide

and temperature
{T M } Eq. 1.5
data for your model. For tubing, data can be added using the Data menu. For flowlines and
risers, measured data can be added to the properties tab of the detailed view.
3. From the toolbar, select Operations » Data matching.
4. Select up to five of the following parameters:
• U-value multiplier: multiplies all user defined u-values. It can only be selected if measured
temperature data is supplied.
• Vertical flow correlation friction factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data
is supplied.
• Vertical flow correlation holdup factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data
is supplied.
• Horizontal flow correlation friction factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure
data is supplied.
• Horizontal flow correlation holdup factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure
data is supplied.
5. Set limits for each parameter selected. Do not use extreme values, as these may cause
convergence problems. Suggested limits are as follows:
• 0.01 < U-value multiplier < 100
• 0.1 < Friction factor < 10
• 0.1 < Holdup factor < 2
6. (Optional) Select Flow Correlations. If flow correlations are not specified here, Data matching
is performed with the flow correlations specified using Setup » Flow Correlations.
7. Select the property to compute, inlet pressure (p.117), outlet pressure (p.117), or flowrate
(p.118). If the inlet pressure is the same as the pressure entered in a source object (completion
(p.386), source (p.116)), it can be omitted.
8. Select weight factors. If both pressure and temperature data have been specified then use the
weight factors wP and wT to set the relative importance of the pressure and temperature error
terms. PIPESIM will minimize the total error term RMS = wP ⋅ RMS P + wT ⋅ RMS T , where the
pressure error term is given by:
1 2
RMS P = (
⋅ Σ P − PM ) Eq. 1.6
nP
and the temperature error term is given by:
1 2
RMS T = (
⋅ Σ T − TM ) Eq. 1.7
nT
9. Run (p.194) the model. The optimizer performs a number of PIPESIM runs, until it has
minimized the RMS value. The accuracy of the optimization and the number of iterations

User Guide
198
PIPESIM User Guide

allowed can be controlled by using the OPTIMIZE (p.754) keyword, which can be entered
using the Engine Options (p.171) dialog.
For each set of flow correlations selected, two sets of results will be tabulated, an Initial run
using default parameters, and an Optimized run, using fitted parameters. The pressure,
temperature and total RMS values will be displayed.
10.Select the run that gives the best fit, by clicking on the run number in the left hand column.
Then click on the Save Selected Results. This updates the parameters in your model.

Note: The run with the smallest RMS gives the best fit, but it is worth considering how far the
multipliers have been changed from their default value (1). A flow correlation where the
multipliers are close to 1 may be a better model than one where extreme values are needed to
give a good fit.

See also the OPTIMIZE (p.754) keyword.

Nodal Analysis
Nodal (or system) analysis in PIPESIM is defined as solving the total-producing-system by placing
nodes at the reservoir sand-face, the well tubing, the flowline and the separator.
A node is classified as functional when a pressure differential exists across it. In nodal analysis, the
producing system is divided into two halves at the solution node. The solution node is defined as
the location where the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) of the
node is zero. This is represented graphically as the intersection points of the inflow and outflow
performance curves. Solution nodes can be judiciously selected to show the effect of certain
variables such as inflow performance, perforation density, tubing IDs, flowline IDs and separator
pressures.
The solution node can be placed between any two objects, that is bottom hole (between
completion and tubing), wellhead (between tubing and choke), riser base (between flowline and
riser), and so on. Use the Nodal Analysis point (p.86) for this.

How to perform a Nodal Analysis

To perform a Nodal Analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.33)
2. Build the well performance model (p.51)
3. Determine the Nodal Analysis point and insert the Nodal Analysis point (p.86) object into the
model (this is a node type object)
4. Select Operations » Nodal Analysis.
5. Determine the inflow and outflow parameters.
6. Once in the Nodal Analysis Data screen, set the outlet pressure (p.117) and the maximum
flowrate (p.118) that the well will attain (this is to limit the outflow curves).
7. Set any limits (optional) using the Limits (p.200) button. Limit the extent of the resulting plot.
8. Select the Inflow and outflow sensitivity object and variables (p.210) and enter the data.
9. Run (p.194) the model.

User Guide
199
PIPESIM User Guide

10.Save the model (p.34).

Note: If a gas system is being modeled then the liquid loading (p.88) point, for each outflow curve,
will automatically be displayed.

Nodal Analysis Limits

Sets limits on the resulting Nodal Analysis plot.
• The maximum flowrate to be used (optional). This always applies to the outflow curves, and
optionally to the inflow curves, see below. If left blank, the outflow curves will extend to the
maximum AOFP of the inflow curves or to the Maximum Pressure limit (see below).
• Number of points on each inflow curve. Default = 20, maximum 200
• Number of points on each outflow curve. Default = 20, maximum 200.
• Rate Limit option for the inflow curves: these can either obey the maximum flowrate, or be
allowed to extend to the AOFP (the rate where the curve meets the X-axis).
• Pressure limit option for the outflow curves: these can either be limited to the Maximum
Pressure (see below), or be allowed to extend to the flowrate limit.
• Maximum pressure for outflow curves. If supplied, the outflow curves will extend to this
pressure, or the maximum rate, whichever gives the smallest curve. If left blank, a default value
will be assumed, this will be calculated at run-time to be the highest pressure on any of the
inflow curves, plus 50%. Either way, the pressure limit option (see above) can be used to make
the limit be ignored.

Operating Points
The intersection of one inflow curve and one outflow curve is known as an Operating Point.
As of PIPESIM release 2010.1, the nodal analysis operation generates the operating points and
displays them on the plot.
While it is possible to infer the system flowrate geometrically from the line intersections alone, it is
more accurate and far safer to calculate the flowrate by simulating the system end-to-end, which
PIPESIM is well designed to do. The resulting pressure and flow rate is displayed on the Nodal
Analysis graph as an Operating Point (usually a small circle marker). This explicit calculation
ensures the inflow and outflow fluid properties and temperature are identical, thus eliminating the
possibility of a mismatch and consequent error in answer interpretation.
Operating points are generated for each permutation from the lists of inflow and outflow sensitivity
variables. However, it is possible to set up the sensitivities so that some combinations are invalid,
and these do not result in operating points being generated and displayed. For example, if you set
both inflow and outflow sensitivity to the fluid watercut, most of the permutations will be invalid,
because the fluid at the intersection cannot have 2 different values for watercut. With Operating
point generation enabled, the valid intersections are clearly distinguishable from the invalid ones:
operating points will only be generated for "valid" combinations.
Sometimes it will happen that the displayed operating point does not coincide with the geometric
intersection. The cause of this will always be that the inflow or outflow fluid properties or
temperature do not match that of the operating point. The fact that the mismatch is evident should

User Guide
200
PIPESIM User Guide

be regarded as a feature, not a bug, and should alert the user to a problem or condition that
requires particular caution and attention.
With operating point generation enabled, the profile plot file will contain valid profile plots for each
operating point: these can be viewed by selecting Reports » Profile Plot. If you do not want
operating points to be generated, use the OPPOINTS= subcode of NAPLOT. (p.740)

Display Liquid Loading Point

The liquid loading point (p.384), for a gas system, is automatically displayed when a Nodal
Analysis (p.199) plot is requested. The liquid loading point will be displayed for all outflow curves.
The liquid loading point of a given tubing string is the point at which the reservoir energy is not
capable of overcoming the frictional and hydrostatic losses of the given tubing string as a function
of wellhead pressure. Liquid loading in a tubing string is identified when the corresponding Tubing
Performance Curve (TPC) slope approaches zero.
However, in low rate shallow gas wells with high LGRs, it becomes difficult to identify the "minimum
rate to lift liquids" in a given TPC plot. The Turner et al correlation can be used to identify the
minimum gas producing rate that is required to keep a well unloaded. This minima will, of course,
be approaching the "unstable flow point" of a given tubing configuration.

Horizontal length
Optimum Horizontal Well Length analysis accurately predicts the hydraulic wellbore performance in
the completion. It is an integral part of PIPESIM's reservoir-to-surface analysis.
The technique subdivides the horizontal completion into vertical cross-sections and treats flow
independently from other cross-sections. This multiple source concept leads to a pressure gradient
from the blind-end (toe) to the producing-end (heel), which, if neglected, results in over-predicting
deliverability. The reduced drawdown at the toe results in the production leveling-off as a function
of well length. It can be shown that drilling beyond an optimum length would yield no significant
additional production.
Several Inflow Performance Relationships are available. These are solved with the wellbore
pressure drop equations to yield the changing production rate along the well length.

How to perform a Horizontal length optimization

To perform a Horizontal length optimization, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.33). This must include a horizontal well completion.
2. Select Operations » Optimum Horizontal Well Length.
3. Set the outlet pressure and the completion lengths to examine.
4. Click Run Model.

Reservoir tables
The reservoir simulator interface allows you to create tabular performance data, to a file, for input
into a reservoir simulation model.
It is often necessary, for the purpose of reservoir simulation, to generate VFP curves for input to a
reservoir simulator program. The VFP curves supply the simulator with the necessary data to

User Guide
201
PIPESIM User Guide

define bottom hole pressure and tubing head pressures as a function of various parameters such
as flow rate, GOR or GLR (where applicable), watercut, surface pressure and the injection gas
rate. Further choices of input parameters are available through the Expert mode. The effects of
variations of up to five parameters can be investigated and reported. Tabular data is then created
in a format specific to the reservoir simulator selected.
The reservoir simulator interface allows you to write tabular well performance data (in the form of
bottom hole pressures) to a file for input into a reservoir simulation model. Currently, the following
reservoir simulators are supported:
• ECLIPSE
• PORES
• VIP
• COMP4
• MoRes (Shell's In-house simulator)
All combinations of the variables input by you will be used to generate the tables.
You may wish to model networks in their reservoir simulator, by generating VFP curves items of
well tubing, flowline or riser. This may not result in an accurate model of the surface network as
temperatures at network connections will not be modeled correctly.
It is not recommended to generate system plots after running this operation. For system plots,
system analysis operation should be performed instead of reservoir tables.

How to create reservoir look-up tables

To create reservoir look-up tables, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.33). This should include a completion and tubing.
2. Build the well performance model (p.51).
3. Select Operations » Reservoir tables.
4. Enter the data for the sensitivity variables.
5. Select the reservoir simulator.
6. Select well type if the model does not have any completion. Otherwise, injection well is selected
by PIPESIM if the model has a generic source or production well is selected if the model has no
generic source. The well type cannot be changed by the user when the model has a
completion..
7. For ECLIPSE simulator, you can set the following additional options
a. For production wells, you can check the “additional temperature table” box to generate a
temperature VFP table in addition to the pressure VFP table.
b. If you would like to specify an elevation to be written in the VFP table, enter the user-
specified bottom hole datum depth in “User BH Datum Depth” input area. The input value
cannot be negative. (The default value in output VFP table is the total elevation change from
inlet to outlet if this area is left empty)
8. Enter the required data.
9. Click Run Model.

User Guide
202
PIPESIM User Guide

10.Save the model (p.34).

The resulting ASCII file can be used directly by the reservoir simulator. The file contains the data in
the required format with the following file names:
• For ECLIPSE simulator, the files are named <filename>.VFP<PROD|INJ>.<BHP|
TEMP>.<tabnum>.txt, where <filename> is the base model name, <PROD|INJ> indicates
Production or Injection well, <BHP|TEMP> indicates BHP or Temperature VFP table, and
<tabnum> is the table number to be included in ECLIPSE file.
• For other simulators, the files are named <filename>.t<tabnum>, where <filename> is the base
model name and <tabnum> is a two-digit table number.

Well Performance Curves

This operation creates a well [head] performance curve file. This file can be utilized in the network
model to represent the well's performance using the wells offline (p.40) option. This enables the
network to be solved faster.

How to create a well performance curve

To create a well performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.33).
2. Select Operations » Well Performance Curves.
3. (Optional) Select up to five sensitivity variables (p.210). The actual value to use for each
sensitivity variable has to be set before the network simulation.
4. Click Run Model.
An ASCII file of <model name>.pwi is created in the model directory. This file can be utilized by the
well curves (p.40) feature in the Network module.

Gas Lift rate vs Casing head pressure

This operation calculates the gas lift injection rate and resulting production flowrate as a function of
casing head pressure (that is, injection pressure).
The Gas lift injection rate and production rates are calculated over a user-specified range of casing
head pressures. The operation assumes the operating valve is an orifice and the injection depth is
defined as the gas lift injection point in the tubing description.
The result of this operation identifies the relationship between gas lift injection rate and casing
head pressure. This may be particularly useful for wells where the method of gas lift rate control
may be by adjustment of casing head pressure.
The resulting performance curve may also be used by ProdMan to provide casing head pressure
boundary conditions for gas lift allocation and optimization.

How to perform a Casing Head Pressure analysis

To perform a Casing Head Pressure analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.33)
2. Select Operations » Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure.

User Guide
203
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Enter the following data in the dialog:

• Tubing
System Outlet Pressure
pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
• Gas Lift
Max Available Gas Rate
maximum quantity of lift gas that you want to inject.
Gas Temperature
lift gas temperature at the casing head
Orifice Diameter
orifice diameter of the gas lift valve.
Cv
Cv of the gas lift valve
• Casing Head pressure
Min. Casing Head Pressure
minimum casing head pressure to use to determine the well's flowrate
Max Casing Head Pressure
maximum casing head pressure to use to determine the well's flowrate
Step Size
The flowrate is computed from the minimum casing head pressure to the maximum
casing head pressure, in increments of this value.
4. Click Run Model.

Effect of gas lift rate on a well

To analyze the effects of gas lift rate on the casing head pressure for a well, work through the
following basic steps:
1. Build the well performance model (p.50).
2. Ensure that the gas lift depth and gas lift quantity has been set.
3. Select Operations » Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure.
4. Enter the required parameters.
5. Run (p.194) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.34).

Artificial Lift System Performance curves

The Artificial Lift Performance operation analyzes the effects of artificially lifting the well (by gas
lift, ESP lift, or PCP lift). PIPESIM generates lift performance curves of gas lift injection rate, ESP
speed versus gross liquid flowrate, or PCP speed versus gross liquid flowrate from the standard
system model data. The performance curves can also be created with sensitivity analysis on

User Guide
204
PIPESIM User Guide

various parameters, such as wellhead pressure, watercut, tubing ID, and flowline ID. More details
(p.212).

Wax Deposition
To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties.
The following proprietary methods are available:
• Schlumberger DBR singlephase Method (p.209) - available to anyone using an additional
license
• Schlumberger DBR multiphase Method (p.209) - available to anyone using an additional
license
• Shell Method (p.206) - only available to Shell companies
• BP Method (p.207) - only available to BP companies

Wax Deposition Limits

These set limits for the wax deposition calculations. To access this area, select Operations » Wax
Deposition and click Limits.

General
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criterion is met. The stopping criteria may be any
of the following:
End time
The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criterion is met
Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume
The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the
specified DP to occur.
Maximum Wax Thickness
An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate

User Guide
205
PIPESIM User Guide

Maximum System DP
An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet

Timestep Calculation criteria

There is just one parameter currently:
Step size
The time step size

Shell Wax Method

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select Shell. The dialog allows you to
change data for prediction of wax in the model.

Wax Properties - required

Density
Wax density (Must be supplied if the max. wax plug DP/max. volume stopping option is
used. Reasonable value: 55 lb/ft3)
Thermal Conductivity
Wax thermal conductivity. (Reasonable value: 0.15 Btu/hr/ft2/F)
Yield Strength
The yield strength of the deposited wax. (Reasonable value: 0.3 psi).
CWDT (critical wax deposition temperature)
A table of pressures and deposition temperatures may be supplied.
Rate model #
Deposition rate model number. Currently there is only one rate model, number 1.
Modeling Parameters
A table of modelling parameters temperatures, coefficients A and B may be supplied.

Wax Deposition Limits

Sets limits for the wax deposition calculations.

General
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time.
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

User Guide
206
PIPESIM User Guide

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criteria is met. The stopping criteria may be any of
the following:
End time
The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criteria is met.
Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume
The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the
specified DP to occur.
Maximum Wax Thickness
An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate.
Maximum System DP
An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet.

Timestep Calculation criteria

Minimum step
The minimum time step size.
Relaxation parameter
The relaxation factor for automated timestep adjustment. Must be a real number between
0 and 1 — higher values favour the new value, lower the old.
Step size
The time step size.
DP Factor
Fraction of the pressure drop change allowed with the new timestep.
Minimum Dx
The minimum allowable increase in wax ID.
Set Dx
The maximum increase in wax ID.
HTC limit
Controls the application of the Heat Transfer Coefficient limit on the timestep size.

BP Wax Method

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select BP. This dialog allows you to
change or input data for prediction of wax in the model.

User Guide
207
PIPESIM User Guide

Wax Properties - required

Conductivity multiplier

Yield Strength
Wax thermal conductivity. (Reasonable value: 0.15 Btu/hr/ft2/F)
Properties Filename
File that contains the wax properties data - *.thm file.
Diffusion Coefficient Method
Diffusion coefficient method. Can be:
• Wilke-Chang
• Hayduk-Minhas
• User-supplied (with a diffusion coefficient multiplier).
Diffusion Coefficient Multiplier
Molecular Diffusion coefficient multiplier (number between 0.1 to 1).
Oil Fraction in Wax
Oil fraction in the wax (number between 0 and 1).
Roughness Multiplier
Roughness multiplier (number between 0 and 1).
Shear Multiplier
Shear reduction multiplier (number between 0 and 1) to simulate wax stripping.

Wax Deposition Limits

Sets limits for the wax deposition calculations.

General
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time.
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criteria is met. The stopping criteria may be any of
the following:
End time
The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criteria is met.

User Guide
208
PIPESIM User Guide

Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume

The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the
specified DP to occur.
Maximum Wax Thickness
An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate.
Maximum System DP
An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet.

Timestep Calculation criteria

Step size
The time step size.

Schlumberger DBR Wax Methods

Two methods are available; a single phase and a multi-phase method.
Schlumberger DBR wax deposition model (p.554)

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select Schlumberger. The dialog allows
you to change or input data for prediction of wax in the model.
• File that contains the wax properties data,- *.DBRWax file. This file is generated using a third
party package DRR Solids version 4.1 and above.
• Properties are read from the data file and can be viewed using a text editor. Properties can be
over written by entering values in the dialog. The use of multipliers can be switched on or off by
selecting the tick box.

Wax Properties Sensitivity

It is possible to sensitize on some of the wax property variables when using the DBR wax
deposition models. For both single-phase and multiphase models, the following properties are
available for sensitivity:

Sensitivity variable Acceptable range (min, max)

Shear reduction multiplier [–10 : 10]
Molecular diffusion multiplier [–10 : 10]
Oil fraction in wax [0 : 0.99]
Wax surface roughness [1E-8 : 0.99999] cm or [3.933701E-9 : 0.3937] inch
Wax thermal conductivity [0 : 10] W/m/K or [0 : 5.78035] BTU/hr/ft/F

User Guide
209
PIPESIM User Guide

For all the sensitivity variables given above, the default value used in the code is the one specified
in the .DBRWAX property file.
For the multiphase DBR wax deposition model, it is possible to sensitize on extra properties which
are:

Sensitivity variable Acceptable range (min, max)

Shear stress coefficient [-5 : 5]
Shear factor coefficient for porosity [-5 : 5]
Temperature factor coefficient for oil fraction [-5 : 5]
Liquid holdup coefficient [0 : 5]

Wax Deposition Limits

This dialog sets limits for the wax deposition calculations
Limits (p.205)

Sensitivity variables
One of the application's strongest benefits is its ability to perform sensitivity studies on a single or a
number of variables at a time.

Important: Some variables are available many times in the sensitivity list (especially when using
System Analysis) or in the single branch task window in general. If you set sensitivity for duplicate
variables, the system does not detect the duplicates and will not work. For example, sensitizing on
the system inlet pressure and on the bottom-most completion pressure will give inconsistent
results. Similarly, when using sensitivity and calculated variable in an operation, the system will not
detect duplicates. In a case such as this one, you still need to specify the outlet pressure under
calculated variable even if you are sensitizing on it.

To perform sensitivity:
1. Select the appropriate operation, (P/T profile, system analysis, and so on.)
2. From the component row, use the drop down list to select the object that the sensitivity is to be
performed on, that is System data, completion, flowline, and so on. The list of objects displayed
here will reflect the names of each individual object in the model.
3. From the variable row, select the variable from the chosen object, that is rate, well PI, flowline
ID, and so on. The list of variables displayed here will reflect the object chosen in step 2.
4. From the units row, select the units for the variable.
5. Enter the date for the variables from row 1. If a set of data is equally spaced, that is 5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30, 35, then the Range button can be used. In this example enter, the start and end
value and the step size for example 0, 35, step 5 and press Apply.
6. To disable the data in a column, that is perform the operation but ignore a particular sensitivity
variable, then deactivate the Active check box for the required column.
7. Repeat the above process for all the required sensitivity variables.

User Guide
210
PIPESIM User Guide

User variable
In an operation, if you wish to specify all three of inlet pressure (p.117), outlet pressure (p.117) and
flowrate (p.118), you must also tell the engine how to achieve the specified outlet pressure. This is
done by defining the User Variable. This is similar to a sensitivity variable (p.210), but instead of
requiring you to provide a series of values for it, its value is calculated as part of the simulation.

Note: When the engine performs calculations on a user-defined variable, it assumes that the inlet
pressure and flowrate are fixed; therefore, the user-defined variable cannot be the inlet pressure
nor the flowrate.

You must choose an object and a variable, whose value will have an effect on the system outlet
pressure. For example, in a production well model, a choke positioned at the wellhead could be
chosen as the object, and the Bean Diameter as the variable. Any object and any variable can be
chosen, as long as you consider it will have an effect on the system outlet pressure.
You must specify the allowable maximum and minimum values for the variable, and the
proportionality relationship (that is, whether an increase in the variable's value causes an
increase or a decrease in outlet pressure). If Direct is selected, the outlet pressure is assumed to
be directly proportional to the variable, and will increase with it; for example, the choke bean
diameter would behave like this. If Inverse is selected, the outlet pressure is assumed to be
inversely proportional to the variable, and will decrease when the variable is increased. An
example of this might be the watercut of a black oil fluid in a production well: as watercut
increases, the well's static DP increases and hence its outlet pressure decreases.
Sometimes, depending on the choice of object and variable, the proportionality relationship can be
difficult to predict. For example if Tubing Inside Diameter is used in an oil production well, you
would expect outlet pressure to increase as diameter is increased, when starting from a small
diameter value. However, once the diameter exceeds a certain critical value, the well will probably
start to suffer from excessive liquid holdup, causing the outlet pressure to decrease. In this
situation the simulation may have two solutions, one with a small ID, another with a much larger ID.
The choice of proportionality relationship allows you to pick the solution you want. However, also in
this situation, <the simulation may have no solution; this will happen if the specified outlet pressure
is too big.

1.7.3 Network Operations

Restart Model
This is only available in the Network module. See also Engine preferences (p.177), and Optimizing
PIPESIM Network Simulation Performance. (p.43)

Note: The model can be restarted in the following ways:

• Use the Restart button

User Guide
211
PIPESIM User Guide

• Use the Run button

and set the network engine advanced Command Line Parameters (see Engine preferences
(p.177)) as follows:
• -r : Restart but do not keep branches skipped in the restart file permanently skipped.
• -R : Restart but permanently skip all branches skipped in the restart file (this is the default
PIPESIM behavior)
When a Network simulation finishes, the final solution results are stored in a restart file. If the
model is restarted

(as opposed to rerun), these final results are used as the starting point for the run, instead of the
initial estimates (p.42).
The default restart function in PIPESIM restarts the model by keeping all skipped branches
permanently skipped. So if the user has deactivated a branch, run the model, and reactivated the
branch again before using the Restart button

, the deactivated branch remains deactivated.

Running a network model by using Restart , as opposed to Run, should also speed up the solution.
However, the follow limitations apply:
• If the model has changed significantly (for example, a well was added, or a branch or node was
de- or re-activated), the use of Restart may actually slow down the simulation. In addition, the
user should pay attention to the restart option used (-r or -R).
• If minor changes have been made to a network (for example, a flowrate or pipe dimension
change), Restart should provide a faster convergence than a normal run.
• If the program crashes part way through an iteration, or the model does not solve in the allowed
number of iterations, or the run is terminated prematurely by user intervention or other system
error, the Restart function can be useful. The model can simply be restarted and the program
will start from where it left off. Use the Restart button on the PIPESIM toolbar in this case.

Well Optimization
This section provides information on the gas lift optimization functionality of PIPESIM.
This functionality allows an oil field to be optimized in terms of day-to-day oil production for gas
lifted wells. In addition well, manifold and field constraints can be taken into account.
Please select Help » Well Opt. Help for further information.

1.8 Artificial Lift analysis

Perform the following basic steps to analyze the effects of artificial lift on a well:
1. Build the well performance model (p.51).

User Guide
212
PIPESIM User Guide

2. Ensure that the gas lift or ESP lift depth has been set.
3. Select Operations » Artificial Lift Performance.
4. Select the sensitivity parameters.
5. Run (p.194) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.34).

1.8.1 How to create artificial lift performance curves

To create an artificial lift performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.33): include a tubing object and one or more artificial lift points
( Injection points (p.82), gas lift valves (p.82) or ESP (p.234)).
2. Select Operations » Artificial Lift Performance.
3. Set the outlet pressure (p.117).
4. (Optional) Select sensitivity variables (p.210).
5. Select the Artificial lift method, Gas or ESP, and set the appropriate data.
6. Run (p.194) the model.

1.8.2 General Gas Lift

This is the process of raising or lifting fluid from a well by injecting gas down the well through the
tubing, casing, annulus, or riser. Injected gas aerates the fluid to make it exert less pressure than
the formation does; the resulting higher formation pressure forces the fluid out of the wellbore. Gas
may be injected continuously or intermittently, depending on the producing characteristics of the
well and the arrangement of the gas lift equipment.

Note: PIPESIM models the continuous injection process only. For details on Artificial Lift, see the
web site.

PIPESIM has two methods for modeling gas lift systems:

Gas Lift injection points
this uses fixed injection depths and injection rates. It is assumed that the quantity of lift gas
requested is fully injected into the production string at the specified depth(s) and takes no
account of the available injection gas pressure.
Gas Lift Valve System
the actual gas lift valve depths are specified. For normal PIPESIM operations, gas is
injected at the specified rate at the deepest possible valve depth (taking into account the
available injection pressure). For the Gas Lift Diagnostics operation only, the actual gas
throughput for each valve is calculated, based on the injection pressure, production
pressure, valve details, and valve status For this operation, details of the gas lift system
are required (valve size, Ptro, and so on). The valve throttling response (based on the
bellows load rate of the valve) is modeled.
PIPESIM allows the following modes of operation:

User Guide
213
PIPESIM User Guide

• Deepest Injection Point (p.214)

• Lift Gas Response (p.216)
• Bracketing (p.215)
• Gas Lift Design (p.217)
• Gas Lift Diagnostics (p.229)

Gas Lift Operations - Deepest Injection Point

This operation computes the Deepest Injection Point [DIP] and the expected production rate,
based on the data entered. To run it, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Deepest Injection Point.
Set the Outlet Pressure to the pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
The input parameters are as follows:
Injection Gas Rate
injection gas rate
Injection Gas Surface Pressure
gas injection pressure at the surface
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface
Injection Gas Specific Gravity
specific gravity of gas
Minimum Valve Injection DP
pressure drop across the valve
Max Allowable Injection TVD
a limit on the depth at which injection can occur
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.233)
Choose from the following options:
• Use static gradient — the default
• Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP
Gas Injection Depth
Choose from the following options:
• Optimum Depth of injection — gas injection can occur at any depth in the wellbore
• Injection at Valve Depths only — gas injection is restricted to the specified valve/mandrel
depths only, as defined in the model tubing description.
Use the buttons as follows:
• Calculate computes the liquid flow rate, pressure profile and the Deepest Injection Point.
• Copy copies the pressure profile to the clipboard.
• Print prints the pressure profile.

User Guide
214
PIPESIM User Guide

• Summary File displays the PIPESIM standard summary file.

• Output File displays the PIPESIM standard output file.

Gas Lift Operations - Bracketing

This operation computes the Deepest Injection point [DIP] and the expected production rate, based
on the data entered for two set of conditions. (Normally the set of production rate conditions, now
and at some time in the future).
These conditions are used to compute the flowing pressure profiles for the two cases, and
therefore the deepest possible injection depths for the two sets of conditions.
The flowing pressure profiles are computed from the given outlet pressure and flow rates (and GLR
and Watercut). Unlike the other Gas Lift operations, here the model reservoir pressure and IPR are
not used to determine the flowing pressures or flow rates.

To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Bracketing.

Set the Outlet Pressure to the pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
The input parameters are as follows:
Injection Gas Surface Pressure
gas injection pressure at the surface
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface
Injection Gas Specific Gravity
specific gravity of gas
Minimum Valve Injection DP
pressure drop across the valve
Max Allowable Injection TVD
a limit on the depth at which injection can occur
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.233)
There are two options: Use Static Gradient (the default) and Use Rigorous Friction and
Elevation DP
The Bracketing Input section shows the minimum and maximum data for:
• Q: Liquid Flow rate
• GLR or Gas Injection rate [Qgi]
• WCUT: Water cut
Use the buttons as follows:
• Calculate computes pressure profiles and the Deepest Injection Points for the two cases.
• Copy copies the pressure profile to the clipboard.
• Print prints the pressure profile.
• Summary File displays the standard summary file.

User Guide
215
PIPESIM User Guide

• Output File displays the standard output file.

Gas Lift Operations - Lift Gas Response Curves

This operation computes the response of the gas lift system to changes in any variable. You can
select a range of gas lift rates and a set of sensitivity values. The resulting gas lift response curves
show how the production rate and possible gas injection depth vary as a function of injection rate
and the sensitivity parameter.
Use this operation to investigate how the well responds to various parameters before proceeding
with a gas lift design.

To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Lift Gas Response.

The parameters are as follows:

Outlet Pressure
pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
Minimum Valve Injection DP
pressure drop across the valve.
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface.
Max Allowable Injection TVD
a limit on the depth at which injection can occur
Inj Gas SG
injection gas specific gravity
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.233)
There are two options: Use static gradient (default) and Use Rigorous Friction &
Elevation DP.
Sensitivity Data
Perform sensitivity on any parameter in the model
Gas Injection Depth
Choose from the following options:
• Optimum Depth of injection — gas injection can occur at any depth in the wellbore
• Injection at Valve Depths only — gas injection is restricted to the specified valve/
mandrel depths only, as defined in the model tubing description
Injection Gas rate
a range of injection gas rates
Use the buttons as follows:
• Run Model computes the liquid production rate, and the (deepest) injection depths for the
specified range of gas injection rates and sensitivity parameters.
• System Plot displays the system plot.

User Guide
216
PIPESIM User Guide

• Summary File displays the PIPESIM standard summary file.

• Output File displays the PIPESIM standard output file.

Gas Lift Design

The Gas Lift Design (GLD) feature allows detailed design of the location and type of valves to
insert into the tubing to maximize the potential of the well. A gas lift design can be conducted for
the following:
• An existing mandrel spacing (Current Spacing )
• To create a new mandrel spacing (New Spacing )

Data Entry
To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design. This opens a dialog with
the following tabs:
• Design Control (p.217)
• Design Parameters (p.222)
• Safety Factors (Design Bias) (p.223)
Project Data Gas Lift Design - Summary (p.227) (this is only displayed after a successful design
has been created).

Gas Lift Design

To perform a Gas Lift Design, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.33)
2. Select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design.
3. Set the required data (p.217).
4. Select Perform Design.... A redesign can be performed after the design has been created.

Design Control
To set the following parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design and select the
Design Control tab.

Design Spacing
Select from the following options:
New Spacing
calculate a new mandrel spacing for the well as part of the gas lift design and overwrite
(without prompting) any existing valve settings.
Current Spacing:
use the existing mandrel spacing as defined in the PIPESIM model and calculate
appropriate valve parameters.

User Guide
217
PIPESIM User Guide

Design Method
The three following design methods are available (two for IPO design and one for PPO design):
• Uses a user specified fixed surface close (injection) pressure drop between valves.

• Uses a calculated surface close (injection) pressure drop between valves (with user specified
minimum).

User Guide
218
PIPESIM User Guide

• Uses a transfer gradient based on user entered Surface Offset and Operating Valve DP values.
Normally used for design with production pressure operated (PPO) valves.

User Guide
219
PIPESIM User Guide

Surface offset
Either a percentage of the difference between the operating production (wellhead) pressure and
the surface injection pressure, or a DP value (added to the wellhead pressure). The transfer
gradient used for design is then a straight line drawn between the surface offset and the operating
valve DP (at the operating valve location). .

Operating Valve DP
The difference between the injection pressure and the production pressure at the operating valve
location.

Top Valve Location

This is used as the basis for spacing the top unloading valve. The options are as follows:

User Guide
220
PIPESIM User Guide

Assume Liquid to Surface

Assumes that liquid is present in the wellbore to the surface.
Assume Liquid NOT to Surface
Assumes that a liquid level exists, based on the static bottom hole pressure and static
gradient.
Well Absorbs Fluid
If this check box is selected, this assumes that the reservoir can readily absorb fluid from
the wellbore, thus maintaining a constant tubing liquid level during unloading. If it is not
selected, it is assumed that the reservoir cannot absorb any fluid which is unloaded from
the annulus to the tubing.

Valve Selection Filter

You can select the valve manufacturer, type of valve to assume, valve size (nominal OD), valve
series, and the minimum port diameter for the design. The filter selects the appropriate valve from
the gas lift valve database. The appropriate valve parameters (port/bellows dimensions and so on.)
will be used for the design. You can enter new valves into the PIPESIM database if required. Note
that the type of valve selected (IPO or PPO) determines the default safety factors and calculation
of open / close points.

Unloading Temperature
You can select whether to use the expected final production temperature, the ambient
(geothermal) temperature, the injection gas temperature or the calculated unloading production
temperature for the valve test rack pressure determination. You can select a different option for the
top valve and for other valves. You can make a first pass for design based on one of these
temperature profiles and then edit the temperature values for any of the valves on the design
summary screen and recalculate the test rack pressures (using the Re-Design (p.227) option).

Max. Allowable Inj. TVD

This depth (true vertical) is taken as the maximum depth for valve placement in the spacing
calculations. Normally this should be about 100 ft above packer depth.

Production Pressure Curve

Select a flowing production pressure curve to use for the design, one of the following:
Production Pressure Model
uses the objective flowing pressure gradient calculated with the PIPESIM model, assuming
the target injection gas rate injected at the operating valve location (default).
Equilibrium curve
calculates and uses an equilibrium curve based on the target gas injection rate in the
model. The equilibrium curve is a curve of the expected flowing pressure at any depth,
assuming gas lift is being injected at that depth at the target gas injection rate.
Perform Design (p.226)
Gas Lift Design - Summary (p.227)

User Guide
221
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The summary is only displayed after a successful design has been created.

Design Parameters
To set these parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design and select the Design
Parameters tab. The parameters are as follows:
Kickoff Pressure
Maximum possible injection pressure to kick off the well. Used for top valve placement
only.
Operating Injection Pressure
The maximum available injection pressure to be used for the design calculation.
Unloading Production Pressure
Minimum possible production (wellhead) pressure during unloading. Used for placement of
top valve only.
Operating Production
The expected production (wellhead) pressure. Used to calculate the production pressure
curve.
Target Inj. Gas Flowrate
The target injection gas flowrate for design. Used to calculate the production pressure
curve and operating valve sizing. Note that the effect of gas injection flowrate on well
performance can be investigated with the PIPESIM model using the Lift Gas Response
Curves operation. This should give you an understanding of the gas lift performance of the
well and enable determination of the optimum target gas injection flowrate.
Inj. Gas Surface Temperature
The surface temperature of the injection gas. Used to determine the injection gas
temperature profile.
Inj Gas Specific Gravity
Injection gas specific gravity. Used to determine injection gas pressure profile.
Min Unloading Liq rate:
The design includes calculation of the unloading liquid and gas injection rates for the
unloading valves. You can specify the minimum unloading liquid rates for unloading.
Unloading Gradient
Gradient of the well fluid for unloading and spacing calculation.
Minimum Valve Spacing
Minimum distance for valve spacing (TVD). Valves will not be placed deeper if they are
spaced closer than this value.
Minimum Valve Inj DP
Minimum difference between injection and production pressure required for valve
placement. Valves will not be placed deeper if the pressure difference is less than this
value.

User Guide
222
PIPESIM User Guide

Solution Point Rate/Fixed rate

Use either a specified liquid production flowrate or a specified reservoir pressure in the
calculation of the Production Pressure Curve (the remaining property will be computed).
Reservoir Pressure
Static reservoir pressure used in the model. (The liquid production rate is calculated).
Liquid Production Rate
The desired liquid production rate. (The reservoir pressure and inflow is ignored).
Bracketing
Select Enable bracketing Options to view the following options, which control the
bracketing interval for placement of bracketing valves:

Note: The type of bracketing valves depends on the type of operating valve.

• Max TVD — the maximum depth for bracketing valves

• Spacing — distance for bracketing valve spacing (TVD)
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.233)
Select one of the following:
• Use static gradient — the default
• Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP

Safety Factors (Design Bias)

To set the following parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design then select the
Safety Factors (Design Bias) tab:
Surface Close Pressure Drop Between Valves
[IPO valves only] Safety factor normally used for Injection Pressure Operated (IPO)
valves only. Surface close (injection) pressure drop for each successive valve down hole
to ensure valve above closes. For IPO Surface Close method a fixed value is used for all
valves. For Pt Min/Max method it is the minimum value since the design process will
calculate this value. Default value for injection pressure operated valves is 15 psi.

Note: PPO Design does not use this safety factor.

Locating DP at Valve Location

Safety factor normally used for both injection pressure operated and production pressure
operated valves. This is an offset from the injection pressure line to the start of the transfer
(unloading) line at each valve location. Default value for injection pressure operated valves
is 50 psi. and default for production pressure operated valves is 100 psi.

User Guide
223
PIPESIM User Guide

Transfer Factor
[IPO valves only] Safety factor normally used for injection pressure operated valves only.
This is an offset from the production pressure line to the start of the transfer line (transfer
point) at each valve location This can be entered as a percentage of the difference
between the production pressure and injection pressure at each valve location or as a
percentage of the production pressure. Default value is zero.

Note: PPO Design does not use this safety factor (the transfer gradient is itself a transfer
safety factor).

User Guide
224
PIPESIM User Guide

Place Orifice at operating valve location

Select this check box to use an orifice in the operating valve location. You can then edit
the default Discharge Coefficient for Orifice (used for gas throughput calculations).
Subtract delta P from Ptro at Operating Valve Location
If the operating valve is an IPO or PPO valve, you can elect to subtract a delta P from the
calculated Ptro value for this valve (flag the valve). This causes an additional injection
pressure drop at this valve during unloading. Default value is zero.
Place IPO valve at Operating valve location
[PPO Design only] For a PPO design, you can opt to place an IPO valve in the operating
valve location.

User Guide
225
PIPESIM User Guide

Project Data
Data that relates to the current project. This will be displayed on the Gas Lift Design report.

Perform Design
After selecting Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design, enter data on the Design Control
(p.217) , Design Parameters (p.222) and Safety Factors (p.223) tabs. The data are used to design
the gas lift system; see minimum data set (p.226).
When all data is present, click the Perform Design button. The following calculations are
performed using the design data and selected design method:
• The objective production pressure curve is generated.
• The mandrel depths are calculated for New Spacing. For Current Spacing, the specified
mandrel depths (in the tubing description) are used.
• The valve port sizes are calculated. The valve port size is selected to pass the unloading gas
rate for the unloading valves and the target gas rate for the operating valve. If no unloading
calculations are possible (no inflow means that the well does not flow), the minimum port size
for the series is selected by default.
• The unloading injection gas requirement and unloading liquid rates are calculated (by nodal
simulation) for each valve station. Also, the maximum possible gas throughput for each valve is
calculated.
• The valve open pressures, close pressures and test rack open pressures (Ptro) are calculated.
The depth of the operating valve is determined when any of the following conditions is met:
• the position of the next unloading valve would be closer than the minimum valve spacing
criterion
• the injection pressure minus the production pressure is less than the Minimum Valve Injection
DP
• the Maximum Allowable Injection TVD is reached.
If the Bracketing option was selected, bracketing valves are placed below the operating valve
down to the specified max TVD at the specified bracketing spacing. If the operating valve is either
an orifice, a flagged valve, or an IPO valve in a PPO design, the bracketing mandrels are assumed
to contain dummy valves.
When the design calculations are complete, a summary sheet (p.227) is displayed. On this some
valve data can be changed and a re-design (p.227) performed if required.
The standard Gas Lift design graph (Pressure versus Depth plot) and report can also be displayed
and printed.
Once the design has been verified, it can be transferred to the well model using the Install Design
button.

Minimum Data Set

The minimum data set required to perform a gas lift design is the following:
• Target Injection Gas Flowrate
• Injection Gas Surface Temperature

User Guide
226
PIPESIM User Guide

• Injection Gas Specific Gravity

• Operating Prod. Pressure (Flowing tubing head pressure).
• Available Injection Pressure.
In addition, a well model is required, This must contain at least a completion (reservoir), tubing
icons, and a valid fluid model.

Perform Re-Design
You can edit certain parameters in the Gas Lift Design summary sheet (p.227) and perform a
redesign of the gas lift system.
You can edit the following fields:
• Valve Depth (if the Edit Depth check box is selected).
• Valve Model and Port size (if the Edit Valve check box is selected).
• Valve Temperature (if the Edit Temp check box is selected).
To change the valve model and/or port size:
1. Double-click the valve to change out.
2. The gas lift valve (p.82) database opens. You can filter for certain types of valves using the
Filter parameters on the right hand side.
3. Double click the required valve. It is placed in the summary field.
After changing any parameter, click on the Perform Re-Design button to recalculate the design
parameters to reflect the changes.

Note: Only the parameter which has its check box selected remains unaltered. Any other
parameters may be changed by the design process. It is therefore recommended that you change
only one parameter at a time and then perform a redesign.

In this way you can modify the initial gas lift design, for example in the following ways:
1. Reset the valve temperatures for each valve and recalculate test rack pressures.
2. Manually reset the design mandrel depths.
3. Replace the operating valve with an orifice valve or other valve.
4. Replace unnecessary valves with dummy valves.
5. Manually re-size upper valves (port sizes) to user preferred port sizes.
The standard Gas Lift Design graph (Pressure - Depth plot) can also be displayed and printed.
Once the design has been verified, transfer it to the well model using the Install Design button.
See also: Perform Design (p.226)

Gas Lift Design - Summary

This summary screen is displayed after the Perform Design operation is successfully executed.
Use it allows to review and/or change the design, or perform a Re-Design (p.227) or a diagnostic.

User Guide
227
PIPESIM User Guide

Proposed design

Valves and design parameters

This table lists the proposed valves and their design parameters, as follows:
• Valve depth (MD or TVD).
• Valve series
• Port Size - the valve port size is selected to pass the unloading gas rate for the unloading
valves and the target gas rate for the operating valve. If no unloading calculations are possible
(no inflow - well does not flow), then the minimum port size for the series is selected by default.
• Ptro - test rack open pressure.
• Open Pressure at Surface (for IPO design only).
• Close Pressure at Surface (for IPO design only).
• Pdome - Valve dome pressure at depth (for PPO design only).
• Open Pressure at Depth (for PPO design only).
• Gas Rate (Unloading) - injection gas rate required to unload the well to the transfer point (Not
calculated if no inflow from the reservoir).
• Unloading Liquid Rate - calculated liquid unloading rate at the transfer point. (Not calculated if
no inflow from the reservoir).
• Max Valve Throughput - maximum rate that can be passed through the valve given the injection
pressure, production pressure and port size.
• Valve Temperature - Valve temperature used for Petro calibration.
• Injection Pressure Drop - surface close injection pressure drop between valves.
• Cd - discharge coefficient (from the valve database).
• Valve Choke (optional) - can be used if chokes are placed in valve ports.

Buttons
The following buttons are available:

Add (Valve Lookup)

To add a valve from the database to the design valve table, click Add.(Valve Lookup) .. (p.84). The
valve will be added to the bottom of the current list.
To add [change out] a valve at a particular depth:
1. Select the Edit Valve check box.
2. Double click the cell under Valve Series or Port Size that corresponds to the required depth.

Edit Selected Valve

Use this to edit the selected valve. (This is only possible if the Edit Valve check box is selected.)

User Guide
228
PIPESIM User Guide

Remove Selected Valve

Use this to remove the selected valve. (This is only possible if the Edit Valve check box is
selected.)

Perform Re-Design
Use this to change some parameters and perform a Re-Design of the system.
Re-Design is only possible if one of the following parameters is edited in the summary screen:
• Valve Depth ( the Edit Depth check box must be selected)
• Valve Series or Port size (the Edit Valve check box must be selected)
• Valve Temperature (the Edit Temp check box must be selected)

Graph
Click Graph... to display the traditional Gas Lift Design graph (Pressure versus Depth plot). This
can also be printed

Install Design
Click Install Design to install the proposed design in the current tubing description. This overwrites
any gas lift valves already in place for this well.

Target Operating Injection Pressure

This is computed from the design. It can be used, or modified, for the diagnostics operation.

Run Diagnostics
Performs gas lift diagnostics (p.229) on the current gas lift valve system with the operating
injection pressure specified.

Gas Lift Diagnostics

This operation performs a simulation of the gas lift system. It calculates (simulates) the status and
actual throughput for each valve, based on the simulated injection and production pressures. To
run it, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Diagnostics.
The valve status can be closed, throttling or fully open. The valve performance characteristics take
into account the throttling response of the valves. The throttling response is based on the bellows
load rate of the particular valves.
The diagnostic simulation is iterative. The throughput of each valve depends on the simulated
injection and production pressures (in addition to valve characteristics). However, the simulated
production pressure itself depends on the throughput of each valve. Therefore the system is solved
iteratively.
The assumed conditions for the diagnostic simulation are as follows:
• The operating injection pressure, taken from the design result.
• The operating production pressure, taken from the design input.
• The operating reservoir pressure, taken from the design input.
• The valve positions and parameters, taken from the design summary.

User Guide
229
PIPESIM User Guide

All other model parameters are as defined in the model.

The diagnostic results are displayed graphically on a pressure-depth plot. The valve status is
shown on the left hand well schematic as red if closed or green if open (or throttling). To view the
valve details, place the cursor over a valve on the well schematic.
Gas Lift Diagnostics calculates the injection rate and the maximum injection rate for the valves by
using the Thornhill-Craver equation. Total gas lift rates are shown in the Rates section below the
well schematic. This shows the following:
• Measured — the target gas injection rate
• Calc — the value calculated when Diagnostics is run
• %Max — the ratio of the calculated flow rate to the maximum flow rate, expressed as a
percentage
To view the detailed results in tabular form, click Data Sheet... .

Gas Lift Diagnostics

This operation determines which valve or valves a gas lift system is lifting from. It creates a well
performance curve. To use this feature a Gas Lift (p.217) system must have been installed.

How to create a well performance curve

To create a well performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.33)
2. Select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift diagnostics.
3. Enter the required data (p.222).
4. Run (p.217) the diagnostics.

Gas Lift Diagnostics Data

The following parameters are required by the Diagnostics operation:
Outlet Pressure
system outlet pressure (usually wellhead pressure).
Operating Injection Pressure
actual injection pressure.
Target Gas Lift Rate
estimated (measured) gas lift injection rate. This value will be calculated by the diagnostics
routine (based on the injection pressure, production pressure and valve status).
Surface Injection Temperature
surface temperature of the injection gas. Used to determine the injection gas temperature
profile.
Gas Specific Gravity
injection gas specific gravity. Used to determine injection gas pressure profile.
To set these parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Diagnostics.

User Guide
230
PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Lift Theoretical background

Gas lift is a method of lifting fluid by using relatively high pressure (250 psi minimum) gas as the
lifting method through a mechanical process.
Gas lift is particularly applicable for lifting wells where high-pressure gas is available. Gas
compressors may have been installed for gas injection or high-pressure gas wells may be nearby.
Since the cost of compression far exceeds the cost of downhole gas lift equipment, always
consider gas lift when an adequate volume of high-pressure gas is available for wells requiring
artificial lift.
Gas lift is accomplished by one of the following methods:

Continuous flow
In continuous flow a continuous volume of high pressure gas is introduced into the eductor tube to
aerate or lighten the fluid column until reduction of the bottom-hole pressure allows a sufficient
differential across the sand face, causing the well to produce the desired rate of flow. This requires
the following:
• a flow valve that permits the deepest possible one point injection of available gas lift pressure
• a valve that acts as a changing or variable orifice to regulate gas injected at the surface
depending upon tubing pressure.
This method is used in wells with a high productivity index and a reasonably high bottom-hole
pressure relative to well depth. In this type of well, fluid production can range from 200-20,000 B/d
through normal size tubing strings. On casing flow it is possible to lift in excess of 80,000 B/d. The
internal diameter (ID) of the pipe governs the amount of flow, provided the well productivity index,
bottom-hole pressure, gas volume and pressure, and the mechanical conditions are ideal.
Smaller volumes can be efficient using continuous flow where small 'macaroni' tubing is used. As
low as 25 B/d may be produced efficiently through 1-in. tubing by continuous flow.

Intermittent flow
Intermittent flow involves expansion of a high pressure gas ascending to a low-pressure outlet. A
valve with a large port permits complete volume and pressure expansion control of gas entering
into the tubing. This either regulates lift of the accumulated fluid head above the valve with a
maximum velocity to minimize slippage, or controls liquid fall back, fully ejecting it to the tank with
minimum gas.
Intermittent lift is generally used in conjunction with a surface time cycle controller (intermitter). It is
used on wells with relatively low fluid volumes, or wells that present high or low PI with low bottom-
hole pressure. In intermittent lift, gas is injected at regular intervals by the intermitter with regulated
cycling to coincide with fluid fill-in rate from the producing formation into the well bore. The
multipoint injection gas through more than one lift valve may also accomplish intermittent lift.

Gas lift instability

Unstable operational conditions may occur in a continuous gas lift well because the characteristics
of the system mean that small perturbations can degenerate into huge oscillations in the flow
parameters. Therefore, a clearly defined mechanism is required to show the relative importance of
the different factors involved, to help to assure stable flow conditions at the design phase, or to
decide what to do to stabilize an unstable gas lift well.

User Guide
231
PIPESIM User Guide

Unified instability criteria were developed by Alhanati et al. (1993) for continuous gas lift wells to
overcome drawbacks in previous developments. The unified criteria can be used for all possible
flow regimes for the gas-lift valve and surface gas injection choke. The unified criteria were
developed using a number of simplifying assumptions, so are not highly accurate or applicable to
every type of instability experienced in a gas lift installation. However, they cover a number of
common cases encountered in the industry and certainly indicate what can be done to improve
operating instability.
For the Alhanati factors to be computed, the well model must have the following:
• Well IPR (p.386) modeled by the PI (p.387) method
• Casing inside diameter (p.74) is set. The simple (p.75) or detailed (p.77) tubing model can be
used.
• Valve Port Diameter (p.81) set. The operating Gas Lift Valve Port (Orifice) Diameter.
• Surface injection pressure (p.81) set. This is the gas lift injection surface pressure, upstream of
the surface injection choke (which must be set higher than the internally calculated casing head
pressure).
• To ensure accurate results from the Alhanati instability check, the model should be developed
only to the well head.

Note: The factors will not be computed if data is missing or incorrect.

From this data the well model automatically calculates the steady state casing and tubing
pressures. The Gas Lift performance curve should then be developed as normal; the Alhanati
factors C1 and C2 are automatically generated. For stable gas lift operations, both these factors
must be greater than zero.
To view the Alhanati factors (C1 and C2) graphically (using the system plot), select:
• X-axis: Total Injection Gas
• Left Y-axis: Alhanati Criterion 1.
• Right Y-axis (p.253): Alhanati Criterion 2. For stable gas lift operations, both these factors must
be greater than zero.
If the graphical display is empty, this implies that one or more of the above data items is missing/
incorrect.

Assumptions of the Alhanati model

The model assumes:
• Constant pressure at the gas injection manifold, which is upstream of the surface injection
choke
• Adiabatic flow through the choke.
In the unified criteria, two sets of criteria were defined, namely C1 and C2, and both must be
greater than zero for stable gas lift operation.

User Guide
232
PIPESIM User Guide

( )
C2 = F 1
γν
μν
+
γν
Fc
Eq. 1.8

where

(q fo + qGo) ⋅ At Pco
F3 = ⋅ Eq. 1.9
( p f − pG ) ⋅ g q fo
(ZT )c
μch = Eq. 1.10
(ZT )m
Nomenclature

At Cross sectional area of tubing in

2

g Acceleration due to gravity ft / s

2

Pco Steady state casing pressure psia

Pg

Pf

q fo Steady state reservoir fluids flow rate stbd

qGo Steady state injected gas flow rate mmscf

γ Gas expansion factor

T Temperature °F
Z gas compressibility factor

subscripts

ν gas lift valve

ch gas injection choke
t tubing
c casing
m manifold

Annular Gas Pressure Design Method

PIPESIM can calculate the pressure drop caused by gas friction through annular space. Annular
space is defined as the space between the outer diameter of the tubing (ID+2* wall thickness) and
the Casing ID. You must specify the annular dimension in the Tubing dialog (p.74).

User Guide
233
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The Casing ID must be bigger than the outside of the tubing diameter and a Casing ID must
be given for all depths shallower than the Maximum Allowable Injection TVD.

This calculation is available in the following Gas Lift Operations:

• Deepest Injection Point (p.214)
• Bracketing (p.215)
• Lift Gas Response Curves (p.216)
• Gas Lift Design (p.222)

Note: The default is for PIPESIM to use the static annulus gas gradient rather than calculate the
pressure drop. The Annulus Gas Pressure Design option you select applies to all four
operations. For instance, if you select the Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP in the
Deepest Injection dialog, this is adopted for the other three operations.

1.8.3 Electrical submersible pumps (ESP)

General
The electric submersible pump (ESP) is perhaps the most versatile of the artificial lift methods. The
ESP comprises a down hole pump, electric power cable, motor and surface controls. In a typical
application, the down hole pump is suspended on a tubing string hung on the wellhead and is
submerged in the well fluid. The pump is close-coupled to a submersible electric motor that
receives power through the power cable and surface controls.
ESPs are used to produce a variety of fluids and the gas, chemicals and contaminants commonly
found in these fluids. Aggressive fluids can be produced with special materials and coatings. Sand
and similar abrasive contaminants can be produced with acceptable pump life by using modified
pumps and operation procedures.
ESPs usually do not require storage enclosures, foundation pads, or guard fences. An ESP can be
operated in a deviated or directionally drilled well, although the recommended operating position is
in a vertical section of the well.
The ESP has the broadest producing range of any artificial lift method ranging from 100 b/d of total
fluid up to 90,000 b/d.
ESPs are currently operated in wells with bottom hole temperatures up to 350 degree Fahrenheit.
Operation at elevated ambient temperatures require special components in the motor and power
cables of sustained operation at high temperatures, and have efficiently lifted fluids in wells deeper
than 12,000 ft. System efficiency ranges from 18 to 68%, depending on fluid volume, net lift and
pump type.

ESP system components: motor

The ESP system's prime mover is the submersible motor. The motor is a two-pole, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction type. Motors run at a nominal speed of 3,500 rev/min in 60-Hz operation.
Motors are filled with a highly refined mineral oil that provides dielectrical strength, bearing

User Guide
234
PIPESIM User Guide

lubrication and thermal conductivity. The design and operation voltage of these motors can be as
low as 230 volt or as high as 4,000 volt. Amperage requirement may be from 17 to 110 amps. The
required horsepower is achieved by simply increasing the length of the motor section. The motor is
made up of rotors, usually about 12 to 18 inches (300-460 mm) in length that are mounted on a
shaft and located in the electrical field (stator) mounted within the steel housing. The larger single
motor assemblies will approach 33 feet (10 m) in length and will be rated up to 400 horsepower,
while tandem motors will approach 90 feet (27.5 m) in length and will have a rating up to 750
horsepower. The rotor is also composed of a group of electromagnets in a cylinder with the poles
facing the stator poles. The speed at which the stator field rotates is the synchronous speed, and
can be computed from the equation:
120 f
v= Eq. 1.11
M
Where: v is speed in rev/min, f is frequency in cycles/sec and M is number of magnetic poles.
The number of poles the stator contains is determined by the manufacturer. Therefore to change
the speed of the stator magnetic field, the frequency will have to change.
Heat generated by the motor is transferred to the well fluid as it flows past the motor housing.
Because the motor relies on the flow of well fluid for cooling, a standard ESP should never be set
at or below the well perforations or producing interval, unless the motor is shrouded.
Motors are manufactured in four different diameters (series) 3.75, 4.56, 5.40 and 7.8 in. Thus
motors can be used in casing as small as 4.5 in. 60-Hz horsepower capabilities range from a low of
7.5 hp in 3.75-in series to a high of 1,000 hp in the 7.38-in series.
Motor construction may be single section or several "tandems" bolted together to reach a specific
horsepower. Motors are selected on the basis of the maximum diameter that can be run easily in a
given casing size.

ESP system components: pumps

The ESP is a multistage centrifugal pump. Each stage of a submersible pump consists of a rotating
impeller and a stationary diffuser. The pressure-energy change is accomplished as the liquid being
pumped surrounds the impeller. As the impeller rotates it imparts two rotating motion components
to the liquid: one is in a radial direction outward from the center of the impeller (centrifugal force),
the other motion moves in a direction tangential to the outside diameter of the impeller. The
resultant of these two components is the actual direction of flow. The type of stage used
determines the rate of fluid production. The number of stages determines the total design head
generated and the motor horsepower required. The design falls into one of two general categories:
the smaller flow pumps are generally of radial flow design. As the pumps reach design flows of
approximately 1,900 B/D,the design change to a mixed flow.
The impellers are of a fully enclosed curved vane design, whose maximum efficiency is a function
of the impeller design and type and whose operating efficiency is a function of the percent of
design capacity at which the pump is operated. The mathematical relationship between head,
capacity, efficiency and brake horse power is expressed as:

qv Hγ
Power = Eq. 1.12
η

User Guide
235
PIPESIM User Guide

Where: qv is the volume flow rate, H is the head, γ is the fluid specific gravity and η is the pump
efficiency
The discharge rate of a submersible centrifugal pump depends on the rotational speed (rpm), size
of the impeller, impeller design, number of stages, the dynamic head against which the pump is
operating and the physical properties of the fluid being pumped. The total dynamic head of the
pump is the product of the number of stages and the head generated by each stage.
"Bolt-on" design makes it possible to vary the capacity and total head of a pump by using more
than one pump section. However, large-capacity pumps typically have integrated head and bases.

Pump design data

Design Production rate
Desired flowrate through the pump in stock-tank units. The actual flowing quantity will be
computed.
Design Outlet Pressure
the required outlet pressure of the PIPESIM model when the pump is installed. It is
recommended to only model the well, and no associated flowline or riser, while designing
the ESP system. In this case the outlet pressure would then be the wellhead pressure
Static Reservoir Pressure
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.
Water cut
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.
GOR (or GLR)
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.
Pump Depth
The depth at which the pump is to be installed. This is taken from the PIPESIM model if a
pump is already installed or can be entered.
Casing ID
The casing size that the pump has to fit into. Usually 3.38 to 11.25 in.
Design Frequency
The frequency/speed that the pump is expected to run at.
Gas Separator Efficiency
The efficiency of the gas separator if installed.
Head factor
Allows the pump efficiency to be factored (default = 1).
Viscosity Correction
All pump performance curves are based on water systems, this option will correct for oil
viscosity.

User Guide
236
PIPESIM User Guide

Select Pump
Will use the available data to select suitable pumps from the database. The pump intake
conditions will first be computed. The resulting pump list can be sorted by efficiency or
Maximum flowrate by selecting the column header. The Manufactures to select from can
be filtered. Errors in the simulation.

Pump parameters
Calculate
Calculate pump performance at the conditions specified. Errors in the simulation
Stage-by-stage
Perform the stage calculations on a stage-by-stage basis. Default = stage-by-stage.
Selected Pump
The pump selected, by the user, from the design data
No. of Stages required
The computed number of stages for this pump under these conditions.
Pump efficiency @ Design rate
The efficiency of the pump at the design production rate
Pump power required
The power required for this pump to deliver the required flowrate.
Pump intake pressure
The computed pump intake pressure.
Pump discharge pressure
The computed pump discharge pressure.
Head required
The computed pump head required
Liquid density
The computed liquid density at the pump intake
Free gas fraction at inlet conditions
The computed gas fraction.
Pump performance plot
plot performance curves at different speeds
Pump curves
plot standard performance curves
Install pump
Install the pump into the tubing of model. This will replace any existing ESP but not gas lift
valves.
See also: Select a motor (p.234), Select a cable

User Guide
237
PIPESIM User Guide

1.8.4 Rod Pump Module

Design (p.240)
Diagnostics (p.241)
Options (p.246)
New / Edit RP Data (p.244)
New / Edit Pumping Unit (p.245)

About the Rod Pump Module

Use this module to manage rod pump lifted production wells. The rod pump module offers options
in equipment selection and design control specification so you can conduct various optimal design
scenario studies. You also can perform a design study based on your experience and
assumptions. For diagnostics, the combination of neural network technology and comprehensive
analysis provides you with more detailed and rigorous diagnostics analysis.
The module comprises the following main parts:
• Equipment Database
• Rod Pump Design
• Rod Pump Diagnostics with Dynamometer Card

Limitations
The following items are current rod pump limitations:
• The well model should be PI or Vogel.
• The well must not be a gas well and it should have a Liquid IPR.
• The model must have a single vertical completion; it cannot be a multilayer model.
• The fluid model must be BlackOil.
• The bubble point pressure must be specified.
• The well must have at least one tubing section defined.
• The Rod Pump Design has a lower limit of 10 degrees API.

Equipment Database
The equipment database in the RP module includes Pumping Unit data, Rod data, and Pump data.
You can browse the data in the database. You can add, modify, or delete any equipment data that
you entered.

Rod Pump Design and Optimization

The Rod Pump Design module uses the following design methods:
• Specify target flowrate
• Specify pump intake pressure
• Specify dynamic fluid level.
The Rod Pump Design module provides the following design options:

User Guide
238
PIPESIM User Guide

• Specify or select a motor

• Specify or select a stroke
• Specify or select stroke frequency
• Specify or select plunger size
• Specify or select a rod string
• Specify or select a heavy rod

Rod Pump Diagnostics with Dynamometer Card

This module provides the following types of diagnostic analysis based on the dynamometer card
data:
• Plunger Operation Condition
• Stress Analysis of Rod String Torque Plots and Pumping Unit
• Balance Condition
• Multiple Dyno. curves at various sections of rod string
The module offers the following diagnostic options:
• Specify or calculate damping factor
• Use the built-in dyno. card formats. (There are four types supported.)

Getting Started
The rod pump design/diagnostics model is an independently developed module that plugs into
PIPESIM. Well and fluid data defined in PIPESIM is transferred to the rod pump module and vice-
versa.
Reservoir Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR)
PIPESIM transfers the specified IPR to the Rod Pump module.
Well data
PIPESIM transfers well basic data — such as reservoir static pressure, reservoir
temperature and tubing configurations — to the Rod Pump module.
Specific data for rod pump
The data required for Rod Pump Design — such as production flowrate and dynamic fluid
level — must be specified in the Rod Pump module.
Unit System
PIPESIM transfers any specified units to the Rod Pump module.
Project Save and Import
PIPESIM saves all parameters and data information specified in Rod Pump in the .bps
project file.

RP Operation Menu
To access the Rod Pump module, select Artificial Lift » Rod Pump. The following options are
available:

User Guide
239
PIPESIM User Guide

• Design
• Diagnostics
• Options
• Browse/Edit RP Data
• Browse Pumping Unit

Design...
The RP Design dialog box has the following tabs available:
• Well Information
• Equipment Selection
• Design Control
Well Information
The following image shows the properties on the Well Information tab.

Equipment Selection
Here are a few key points when specifying equipment:
• You should specify the crank rotation direction.
• The stroke depends on pumping unit.
• You can select a different motor for Pumping Unit.
• The speed depends on motor.
The following image shows the properties on the Equipment Selection tab.

User Guide
240
PIPESIM User Guide

Simulated Design Results (that is Pressure Profiles)

The following image graphically shows the simulated results.

Diagnostics...
To input data, the RP Diagnostics dialog box has the following tabs available:

User Guide
241
PIPESIM User Guide

• Prod. Data
• Equipment
• Rod String
• Fluid Data
• Tubing
• Dyno. Card
Prod. Data
The following image shows the properties on the Prod. Data tab.

Equipment
• You should specify crank type and the rotation direction.
• You can specify master weights and auxiliary weights and counterweight positions respectively.
The following image shows the properties on the Equipment tab.

User Guide
242
PIPESIM User Guide

Reading / Loading Dynamometer Card

The following image shows the properties on the Dyno.Card tab.

Simulated Diagnostics Results

The following image graphically shows the simulated diagnostic results.

User Guide
243
PIPESIM User Guide

Browse/Edit RP Data...
The following image shows the Browse/Edit RP Data dialog box.

User Guide
244
PIPESIM User Guide

Browse Pumping Unit...

The following image shows the Browse Pumping Unit dialog box.

User Guide
245
PIPESIM User Guide

Components and Options

This section covers the Rod Pump Components and Data Information.

General Data

Reservoir Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR)

You can use the Rod Pump module for vertical well completion only. Before running RP, you must
provide well completion information so the required IPR curve can be calculated. The productivity
analysis is the basis of the diagnostic and design study. To get more accurate results,
• For new completion wells, ensure that a proper PI is specified.
• For existing wells, ensure that the IPR matches current production conditions.

Note: Only Productivity Index (PI) and Vogel IPR's are supported.

Basic parameters
The basic Rod Pump parameters refer to the parameters specified in PIPESIM — such as well
completion data, tubing data and fluid property (PVT) data. Once you specify these parameters in
PIPESIM, the values are transferred to the Rod Pump module automatically. With the exception of
well completion data, you can modify the data during the Rod Pump design and Rod Pump
diagnostics study. When you exit the Rod Pump GUI, you have the option to save the changes that
you made to the PIPESIM well model.

User Guide
246
PIPESIM User Guide

Rod Pump Parameters

Rod Pump parameters refer to the data required by the Rod Pump module. The parameters can be
categorized into the following groups:
• Rod Pump equipment data — static characteristic data of the motor, rod string and plunger.
You can add your own/local data to this database.
• Production data — the equipment configuration data and the related test data. Before executing
Rod Pump Design or Rod Pump Diagnostics study, ensure that you specified the data based on
the existing well operating condition.

Note: If any of the required data is missing, the Rod Pump model will not run.

Dynamometer Card (Dyno.Card) Data

The dyno.card data measured at the surface is required data for the Rod Pump Diagnostics study.
The surface dyno.card is the relationship curve of rod loading vs. rod displacement. You can get
this information from the dynamometer; however, the data file typically contains dyno.card data of
more than 10 wells. You must find the dyno.card for the current well and save it in the Rod Pump
format so the Rod Pump module can read it.
There are four commonly used dyno.card formats that can be read in the Rod Pump module. If the
dyno.card format cannot be read by Rod Pump, convert the format to one of the Rod Pump
readable formats.

Units
The unit system in the Rod Pump module is consistent with the units in PIPESIM. For example, if
you change the unit of each variable in PIPESIM, and then set it as default, the changes are
transferred to Rod Pump automatically.

Rod Pump Design

Overview
There are two types of sucker rod pump systems:
• Beam Pump system
• PC Pump system
The Beam Pump is the most popular artificial lift method because of its simple structure, flexibility
and longevity. It has three main parts: pumping unit, sucker rod, and pump. The motor transfers
high speed rotation movement to the reducing gear box. After a two-level speed down using three
shafts, the rotation movement is transferred to the up and down swing of the beam using a crank
connection rod. This movement drives the pump plunger to perform a reciprocal movement using
the rod to lift fluid (mainly oil) from the bottom hole to the surface.
The pump unit is the main surface equipment of the rod pump system. The beam-balanced
pumping unit transforms the circle movement of the crank to the up and down swing of the horse
head using the connection rod between the beam and crank. Structurally, the process can be
divided into two types: conventional and forward-established. In the oil fields, the conventional type
is the most popular pumping unit. Its main characteristic is a support between the horse head and

User Guide
247
PIPESIM User Guide

crank connection rod. The time for the up and down stroke is the same. Rod Pump is used mainly
for conventional pumping system.
The pump is the main part of the rod pump system. It consists of a pump barrel (outer barrel and
sleeve), a plunger and a valve (traveling valve and standing valve). Sometimes, the traveling valve
is called a discharge valve and the standing valve is called an intake valve. Based on the different
structure, the pump can be divide into two group, the tubing pump and the rod pump.
A polished rod links the steel cable on the horse head with the down hole sucker rod. The polished
rod also helps seal the wellhead together with the sealing box. Polished rods are available in two
different types: a common type and one that has a larger ID on one side. On the common type rod,
you can change the position of the two sides when one side becomes worn; however, if one side
has a larger ID, you cannot switch the sides. The larger ID provides better connectivity.

Introduction of Rod Pump Optimization and Design

The sucker rod pump system is a very complex system that has several components — such as a
motor with a reducing gear box that drives the pumping unit system, a sucker rod, a down hole
pump and tubing, and so on. The optimization and design in Rod Pump includes the optimization
of the swabbing parameters — such as pump diameter, stroke, and frequency of stroke — and the
selection of the swabbing equipment — such as the structure of the rod. Diversity in the
optimization target with various influence factors and the continuity of the changing of design
parameters results in a complex design process.

Selection of Swabbing Parameters

You can specify the combination of the rod and swabbing parameters, or you can let the designer
select the parameters automatically. If all the parameters are specified by the designer, Rod Pump
calculates the production condition based on that data. That is, it uses PIPESIM-RP as a tool to
predict the designed scenarios based on experience or other factors.

Note: Sometimes specifying the strike and frequency of stroke is done because these two
parameters of the actual rod pump system are not standard. Another reason is because this design
method also fits the requirement of sand control.

Selection of Design Methods

There are three design methods in Rod Pump:
• Specify the flowrate — used to meet the requirement of the production allocation of each well
• Specify the intake pressure
• Specify the dynamic fluid level for the well with high GOR — used to improve the pump
volumetric efficiency which affects the whole system efficiency
These methods are based on the principle of equivalent intensity, which re-designs the rod, pump,
and pump depth without taking into account of the current rod pump system. The rod material can
be redesigned as either a common rod or a weighted rod. The optimized solution ensures the
stress percentages on the top side of each rod section are equal.

User Guide
248
PIPESIM User Guide

Rod Pump Diagnostics

Introduction
The diagnostic technology of the rod pump system that was proposed by S.G.Gibbs and A.B.Neily
is based on the principle of treating the rod as a downhole dynamic signals conduct line and the
pump as a transmission device. The working condition of the pump (loading change on the
plunger) is transmitted to surface via rod in forms of a stress wave that is received by the
dynamometer. By building the wave equation with a damping coefficient, the dyno.card of each
cross section of the rod and pump can be deduced. The whole well working condition can be
analyzed and judged.
The traditional pump dyno.card recognition method is to use a numerical value to represent
dyno.card according to a particular specification. Experience shows that the simple specification
cannot classify the dyno.card properly. In the RP module, an NN (Neural Network) method is
introduced. It contains a three level neural network technology for the dyno.card diagnostic.
Because of the complexity of the rod pump system, the use of the dyno.card to recognize the
pump working condition is not enough. You also need a good understanding of loading the rod and
the balance of the pump unit. Comprehensive analysis is added in the Rod Pump diagnostic
module by adding the neural network technology. This method produces a more rigorous and
comprehensive judgment of the working condition of the well.

Operations
This information is related to Rod Pump general operations, optimized design, working condition,
and the diagnostic equipment database.

Rod Pump Database Configuration

The data in Rod Pump database contain the equipment parameters that refer to the static
performance data of the motor, rod string, and pump. You may add your equipment data to the
Rod Pump database. When you finish adding the new data, we recommend that you do not
change the parameters in the database.

Open Project
Before running the Rod Pump module, you must build a new project or open an existing project in
PIPESIM.

Basis Input Data in PIPESIM

For Rod Pump module, the following data should be specified in PIPESIM:
• Well completion data (well productivity)
• Tubing data (only for vertical well completion)
• PVT data (only for black oil including P b)

RP Application from PIPESIM Drop-down Menu

The Artificial Lift » Rod Pump menu has the following operations:

User Guide
249
PIPESIM User Guide

• Design
• Diagnostics
• New/Edit RP data
• New/Edit Pumping Unit

Optimization Design
For an old production well, if you do not need to change the pumping unit, choose an existing
pumping unit and production manufacturer. For a new production well or for an old well that
requires a change in pumping unit, select a model type, and then simulate it to check whether this
pumping unit is suitable for the studied well. The model serial number and manufacturer for new
pumping units may need to be added to the equipment database.

Selection of Pumping Unit

Selection of Motor
You can specify the motor type or you can let the model select one that matches the selected
pumping unit.

Selection of Pump
You can specify a particular pump diameter, or you can let the model select the most suitable
pump diameter. If you specify a new pump diameter, you must add it to the equipment database.

Selection of Stroke
You can specify stroke, or you can let the model select. The optimal stroke is selected from the
various stroke combinations available in equipment database.

Selection of Pumping Speed

You can specify the pumping speed or you can let the model simulate one. If the optimal simulated
speed from the model is not selected from various speed combinations in the equipment database,
you must specify the speed.

Selection of Rod String

You can specify a rod combination, or you can let the model select one. A rod combination
includes rod length, rod diameter, rod elasticity / tensile strength Grade, and the principles of the
rod strength for automatic rod design. If you specify a new rod diameter, enter it into the equipment
database.

Specify Pump Depth

No matter what type of design method you select, you must specify a suitable pump depth. You
can determine the depth from the well production performance curve and pressure profile or from
the corresponding profiles.

Select Design Criteria

The following design principles are available:
• Specified production

User Guide
250
PIPESIM User Guide

• Specified pump inlet pressure

• Specified dynamic liquid level
Once the design principle is chosen, input the specified parameters to continue the design.

Operation Diagnostics
Input Liquid Level or Pump Inlet Pressure
Pump inlet pressure is a compulsory input parameter for diagnostics study. You can input the
parameter directly, or you can input the dynamic liquid level and let the model calculate the pump
inlet pressure.

Input Rod String Information

The operation diagnostic is only applicable to old production wells. The rod string information is
required for the rod combination when the well was in production.

Select Well Dynamometer Card

The well dynamometer card is a required parameter in diagnostic study. You must specify a set of
actual tested dynamometer card data.

Specify Damping Coefficients to obtain Pattern

When applying wave equation to solve a pump performance curve, the magnitude of the damping
coefficients of the rod influences the calculation results. In the module, it offers the following
choices:
• module to automatically calculate damping coefficients
• user specified / input damping coefficients

Database
View Equipment Parameter
To view the equipment database, use the Artificial Lift » Rod Pump » Browse Pumping Unit
menu. The database contains equipment values that can be plotted.

Delete Equipment
Deletes the selected equipment model from the application.

Add New Equipment

Adds a new model type for the existing equipment. You must specify a new diameter for rod
plunger and rod pump. When adding a new pump, ensure that the pump stroke combination and
the crank radius combination are equal.

User Guide
251
PIPESIM User Guide

1.9 Reports
1.9.1 Plotting
After a simulation has been completed, the results can be viewed graphically using the plot utility,
PsPlot.

Single branch plots

Results are (by default) plotted dynamically as the simulation runs. This feature can be enabled or
disabled using Setup » Preferences » Engine and selecting Run Plot tool with Single Branch
engine.
In addition the following plot types are available from the main toolbar:
• System plot — displays data as a result of changing some model parameter.
• Profile plot — displays data in terms of distance from the model's inlet.

Network plots
PsPlot can also be accessed using the Report menu or directly from the main toolbar. Select the
branches that you want to plot, then select the Report option. The results from the selected
branches will be concatenated.

PsPlot
The following list shows what you can do with PsPlot:
• Plot a 2nd Y-Axis (p.253)
• Print or Copy the plot (p.253)
• Close/minimize the plot utility (p.253)
• Export the data to Microsoft Excel (p.253)
• Remove/Add the background grid (p.253)
• Copy the graph to another application (p.254)
• Change the axis or title description (p.254)
• Change the legend description (p.254)
• Change the values on the axis (p.254)
• List/Disable lines (p.254)
• Scale the axes (p.255)
• Change the color display mode (p.255)
• Change the appearance of a line (p.255)
• Sort data (p.255)
• Zoom in & out (p.256)
• Specify Landscape or Portrait plots (p.256)

User Guide
252
PIPESIM User Guide

• Open a new or additional plot file (p.256)

• Remove of change the legend location (p.256)
• Superimpose the phase envelop on to a temperature / pressure profile (p.257)
• Translate plot labels and titles (p.257)

Plot a 2nd Y-Axis

Do the following:
1. Select the Series menu option.
2. Select the property to plot on the Right Y Axis from the list.

Note: The X Axis remains the same for both Y Axes.

Print or copy the plot

To print, do the following:
1. Select File » Print.
2. To preview the plot before printing, or to change any print options, select File » Print Preview.
To copy, select Edit » Copy to Clipboard.
The plot will be available using the clipboard in other applications that support copy-and-paste.

Close/minimize the plot utility

To Close the PLOT utility, do one of the following:
• Select the close button (top right of the dialog) or
• Select File » Exit.
To Minimize the PLOT utility select the minimize button (top right of the dialog).

Exporting graphical data to Excel

Select File » Export Data to Excel. An Excel data file name is requested and Excel loads
(providing it is installed on the PC) and is populated with the data.

Remove / Add the background grid

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Axis, Ticks tab. Select the required Axis and then the
Grid Border button.
3. Change the Visible check box to display or hide the grid lines (for that axis).
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made
without the dialog having to be closed.

User Guide
253
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Copy the graph to another application

Do the following:
1. Load the required graph and select Edit » Copy to Clipboard.
2. The plot will now be available using the clipboard in other applications that support copy-and-
paste.

Change the axis or title description

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Axis tab and Title. Select the Axis to change from the
Axis radio button and enter the new axis title, angle, style, and so on.
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made
without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the legend description

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Series tab.
3. Highlight the legend title to change and select title. Enter the new title.
Changes are dynamic. That is, the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as changes are
made without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the values on the axis

Select the Series menu. Select the property to plot on the Right X Axis from the list. Select the
property to plot on the Left Y Axis from the list.

List/Disable lines
Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup, then choose Chart and its Series tab.
2. Select the check box for each line you want to plot.

User Guide
254
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Scale the axes

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart Axis tab and scales.
3. Select the Axis to change from the radio buttons and disable Automatic.
4. Set the maximum and minimum values using the Change button or set to automatic.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the color display mode

On the Display menu, select one of the following available options:
• Color by Series Data - Graph lines are colored according to which Data Series they belong
(the default).
• Color by Axes Data - Graph lines are colored according to which axes they belong to (with
Data Series differentiated by marker symbol and line style).
• Color by File - Graph lines are colored according to which file they belong (with Data Series
differentiated by marker symbol and line style).

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the appearance of a line

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. Select the Series tab and then the required Data Series from the drop down list
3. Select the Format tab and then the Color button to change the line color or the Border button
to change the line pattern.
4. Select the Point tab and then the Style Combo to change the style of the marker at each data
point.
Changes are dynamic. That is, the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as changes are
made without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: Changes to the first five colors and marker styles ARE saved in the registry between
sessions.

Sort data
Do the following:

User Guide
255
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select Edit » Sort Values.

2. In the resulting dialog, select the required sorting option.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Zoom in or out
Do the following:
Zoom in
On the graph area, place the pointer at the top left position of the area to zoom in to.
Select and hold down the left mouse button and drag the resulting box to the required size.
Default size
On the graph, place the pointer at the bottom right position of the area to zoom out to.
Select and hold down the left mouse button and drag the resulting box. The plot will revert
to its default size.
Zoom out
There is no automatic zoom out feature. Scale (p.255) the x- and y-axis limit to achieve
this.

Specify Landscape or Portrait plots

To do this, on the Print preview dialog, select the required paper orientation.

Open a new or additional plot file

When a new plot file is to be opened, the existing plot file can be handled in the following ways:
• Retained — to retain the existing plot and add the data to it, select File » Append.
• Removed — to remove the existing file, select File » Open.
Opened files can be temporarily made non-active by using Files » Files List.

Remove or change the legend location

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Legend tab.
3. Select Visible to show or hide the legend
4. Select the required position of the legend.
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made
without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

User Guide
256
PIPESIM User Guide

Superimpose the phase envelope on to a temperature / pressure profile

To undertake this task, the model must be compositional (p.139). Do the following:
1. Set the point in the system where you want to create the phase envelope. To do this, add a
report tool (p.113) to the model and select Phase Envelope. The phase envelope will be
created at this point in the system
2. Run the model. This will normally be a Pressure/Temperature operation (p.196).
3. Select and display the profile plot, using Reports » Profile Plot.
4. Using the Series menu, select Temperature as the X-Axis and Pressure as the Y-axis.
The phase envelope will be superimposed on the plot.

Translate plot labels and titles

Load Dictionary:
• Use the supplied label translation dictionary template (PsPlotDict.txt) to create a translation
dictionary, with translation of each label on the same line separated by a comma ','.
• (A usable example is provided for Russian in the file PsPlotDictRus.txt)
• Select File » Dictionary to browse for the translation dictionary file and open it.
• The Dictionary option will remain selected until you cleared it.
Clear Dictionary:
• To clear the dictionary, select File » Dictionary and select Cancel
A dictionary cannot be loaded unless it is based on the template and in the correct format.

1.9.2 Report Tool Details

Placing a report tool in a single branch model gives additional reporting of the conditions at that
point in the model. To do this, click the Report Tool icon on the main toolbar, then click on the
model. Double-click the Report Tool object to open its Properties tab. There is a check box for
each report item available, as listed below. Select the box for each item you want to report on.
Flow Map
This applies to multiphase flow regions only. If this box is ticked, a high resolution map is
produced, showing the multiphase flow regimes plotted against superficial liquid and gas
velocities. Note that the map is scaled so that the operating point is always inside it. To
display a map, select Reports » Flow Regime Map and select it in the list of available
maps. The list shows all available maps for the case that has been run.
Phase Split
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the
output file, showing the constituents of each phase.
Stock Tank Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties
such as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at stock tank conditions.

User Guide
257
PIPESIM User Guide

Flowing Fluid Properties

If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties
such as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at flowing conditions.
Cumulative Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing properties, such as liquid
holdup, where the cumulative value may be of interest
Multiphase Flow Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various multiphase fluid
flow values such as superficial gas and liquid velocities.
Slugging Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various slug values such as
slug lengths and frequencies.
Sphere Generated Liquid Volume
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various sphere generated
liquid values.
Heat Transfer Input Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing heat transfer input data.
Typically, the following are printed: Pipe and Coating Thicknesses and Thermal
Conductivities, Soil Thermal Conductivity, Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and
Ambient Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file showing heat transfer output data.
Typically, the following information is printed: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy,
and Heat Transfer Coefficients.
Composition Details
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the
output file showing some compositional data such as water specific gravity.
Phase Envelope
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, the fluid's phase envelope is
automatically computed and stored in the branch's plot file. In network cases, the file that
contains the phase envelope will be noted in the output file.

1.9.3 Network Report Tool

To use the report tool, select Reports » Report Tool (or click the report tool icon directly at the top
of the menu bar) after a successful network simulation completes. Its primary function is to provide
a report of the computed data in a network simulation. However, it can be also used for single
branch analysis. The report includes a node report (single point properties) and a branch report
(distributed properties), and they can switch by selecting “Node” or “Branch” in group “Type”.
Note: If there is no convergence after completing the specified number of iterations and the last
iteration performed is not the best solution, the solver performs another iteration to calculate the
best solution from all the iterations. The best iteration is based on where the maximum pressure

User Guide
258
PIPESIM User Guide

and flow rate residual errors are the lowest. PIPESIM publishes the data from the best iteration to
the network report. When there is no convergence, the report tool displays a warning message that
the model did not converge and it lists the tolerance that was achieved.
All properties for node report are listed below:
Name, Type, Upstream, Downstream, Temperature, Pressure, ST Gas Flowrate (Stock-tank Gas
Flowrate), ST Liq Flowrate (Stock-tank Liquid Flowrate), ST GLR (Stock-tank Gas Liquid Ratio), ST
Water Cut (Stock-tank Water Cut), Mass Flowrate, Flowing Gas Flowrate (Gas Flowrate at flowing
condition), Flowing Liq Flowrate (Liquid Flowrate at flowing condition), Flowing Water Cut (water
cut at flowing condition), Mean Vel (Mean Velocity), Liq Vel (Liquid Velocity), Gas Vel (Gas
Velocity), Erosion Vel (Erosion Velocity), EVR (Erosion Velocity Ratio).
Note: The meanings of columns “Name”, “Type”, “Upstream”, and “Downstream” are described as
below:

Name Type Upstream Downstream

SOURCE: source or production
None None
well
Object label
SINK: sink or injection well None None
JUNCTION: junction node None None
Type of downstream
INLET: branch inlet None
equipment
Type of upstream
Branch label OUTLET: branch outlet None
equipment
INTERNAL: node between any two Type of upstream Type of downstream
neighboring equipments in a branch equipment equipment

Note: Branch internal nodes in branch “bname” are named as “bname-Node[i]” with index i
ascending from upstream to downstream.
All properties for branch report are listed below:
Name, Type, Power (Equipment power (if applicable) ), DT (Temperature drop), DP (Pressure
drop), Max Press (Maximum Pressure), Max Mean Vel (Maximum Mean Velocity), Max Liq Vel
(Maximum Liquid Velocity), Max Gas Vel (Maximum Gas Velocity), Max Eros Vel (Maximum
Erosion Velocity), Max EVR (Maximum Erosion Velocity Ratio).
Note: Equipment in branch “bname” is named as “bname-Equip[i]” with index i ascending from
upstream to downstream.
The following custom report operations can be applied to the displayed data:

Operation Description
Remove all the data in the report. The underlying data file (*.pnsx) is not removed
Clear
and can be restored using the Restore button.
Delete highlighted rows in the report. The underlying data file (*.pnsx) is not removed
Delete
and can be restored using the Restore button.
Restore Restore all rows to the report which are removed previously.

User Guide
259
PIPESIM User Guide

Print Print the current custom report.

Plot Plot the report data (if applicable).
Sort Sort report rows with respect to user specified properties.
Filters Filter the report to display row data only with specified types or ranges.
Config Configure report to determine what columns are displayed.
Excel Export to an Excel spreadsheet.
Close Close the report
Load report files. To load results from a previous simulation, browse to its results file
Browse
(*.pnsx). The name of the file is displayed in the adjacent dropdown box.

Note: Users can also single click a node or branch object in a network model to add the
corresponding results in the report spreadsheet.

Exporting to Excel
In addition to the copy and paste features of spreadsheets in PIPESIM, the Network Report Tool
can also export data to Microsoft Excel. When you click the Excel button above, an Export to
Excel dialog asks for the following information:
Excel File
All the data viewed in the Report tool will be exported to the specified Microsoft Excel file.
The Excel file must exist already.
Worksheet
The worksheet, within the Excel file, to export the data to.
Start Row
The row in the Excel spreadsheet where the first data item will be placed. The default is
row 1.
Start Column
The column in the Excel spreadsheet where the first data item will be placed. The default
is column A.

1.10 Expert Mode

The PIPESIM calculation engines are keyword (p.590) driven, with the keywords normally written
by the GUI. However, you can gain access to the keywords using the following methods:
• Engine keyword tool (p.92)
• Expert Mode

1.10.1 Expert Mode

Expert Mode allows the following;

User Guide
260
PIPESIM User Guide

Calculation engine
The calculation engine to be driven directly using keyword (p.590) input files. This could be when,
for example, new features are available in the calculation engine but not yet in the Graphical
Interface The keyword input file can either be created, from scratch, using a text editor or from a
model already developed in the GUI. See how (p.262) (Only recommended for single branch
models).

Network models
A number of Network models can be run in batch mode. This could be to run a set of case studies
over night for example.

Single branch models

A number of Single branch models can be run in batch mode, but note the following:
• Models must have been run once already using the GUI
• The operational data used for the last run in the GUI will be used.
• Models in the same directory may have file sharing problems and therefore not run
• You may want to turn off the automatic dynamic plotting (p.177) of results if multiple single
branch models are to be run.

1.10.2 How to work in Expert mode

Do the following:
1. Create your basic model(s).
2. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:
• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files
• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
3. Select Expert » Display and select the above *.tnt or *.psm files by using the Browse button.
Select the Select check box for each model, or click Select All.
4. Edit the relevant text file(s) by clicking Edit.
5. Run the model by clicking Run .
6. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot, or Profile Plot.

Note: In Expert Mode, System Plot and Profile Plot results are only available for single branch
models.

1.10.3 Batch mode

This Expert mode method can also be used to batch run models developed in the GUI.

User Guide
261
PIPESIM User Guide

How to batch run a number of models, using Expert Mode

To batch run a number of models, do the following:
1. Create your basic model using the GUI.
2. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:
• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files
• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
3. Select Expert... » Display and select the above *.tnt or *.psm files by using the Browse button.
Select the Select check box for each model, or click Select All.
4. Click Run.
5. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot, or Profile Plot.

1.10.4 Run Multiple Models

To run multiple models, use the Expert Mode feature.
Do the following:
1. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:
• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files
• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
2. Select Expert » Display to enter Expert mode.
3. Select the above file (*.tnt or *.psm) using the Browse button and check the Select box, or click
Select All
4. Select Edit to modify the engine keyword file, if necessary.
5. You may want to turn off the automatic dynamic plotting (p.177) of results if multiple single
branch models are to be run.
6. Click Run to run all the selected models.
7. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot or Profile Plot.
Batch Mode (p.261).

1.10.5 Expert Data Entry

Select
check box to activate the chosen model. When the run option is selected all models that
have been selected will be run.
Engine Files
A list of the engine files available for running, *.psm for single branch and *.tnt for network
models. Engine input files are created either manually or using the File » Export Files
command.

User Guide
262
PIPESIM User Guide

Browse
locate the required engine files.
Run
Run all the selected models, providing the Selection only option is on.

Note: These are run in silent mode (minimized and no completion dialog displayed).

Edit
edit the selected engine file using a text editor and modify the engine keywords. See also
the keyword list (p.590)
Output File
view the selected models output file after a simulation.
Summary
view the selected models summary file after a simulation.
System Plot
view the selected models system plot after a simulation.
Profile Plot
view the selected models profile plot after a simulation.
Options
Preferences
• Select the path of the engine: Choose Paths (p.170)
• Set preferences: Engine Preferences (p.177). You may want to turn off the
automatic dynamic plotting (p.177) of results if multiple single branch models are to
be run.
• Advanced (p.178)
Select All
Select all models in the list
Deselect All
deselect all models in the list
Selection Only
Only run selected models. Default = on.

User Guide
263
PIPESIM User Guide

2
Tutorials
The following tutorials are described in detail:
• Condensate Pipeline (p.265)
• Oil Well Performance Analysis (p.43)
• Gas Well Performance Analysis (p.300)
• Looped Gas Gathering Network (p.320)
• User Pump
• Field Data Matching (p.330)
• Liquid Loading Analysis (p.335)
• Ramey Heat Transfer Model (p.337)
• Converting Black Oil Models into Compositional Models using Multiflash for PIPESIM* (p.167)
• Pipe Inline Heating (p.342)
Summary of features and tutorials:

Tutorials Module
Gas Network Network Analysis (p.35)
Loop (Folders) Network Analysis (p.35)
Loop Network (p.320) Network Analysis (p.35)
Small Network Network Analysis (p.35)
Water Inj. Net Network Analysis (p.35)
Water Reinjection Network Analysis (p.35)
Gas Lift (p.217) Performance Open Link (p.777)
Production Network Open Link (p.777)
Template Open Link (p.777)
Condensate Pipeline (p.265) Pipeline Tools (p.89)

Tutorials
264
PIPESIM User Guide

Riser (p.110) and Flowline (p.93) Pipeline Tools (p.89)

Surface facilities Pipeline Tools (p.89)
Wax Deposition (p.205) Pipeline Tools (p.89)
Pump User Equipment (p.633)
UserPump User Equipment (p.633)
Bottom Hole Nodal Analysis (p.199) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Compositional (p.139) Nodal Analysis (p.199) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
ESP (p.234) Design Well Design and Performance (p.50)
ESP (p.234) Lift Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Flow Correlation Match (p.197) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
FracPack (p.66) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Gas Lift Design (p.217) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Gas Lift (p.217) Performance Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Horizontal Well Performance (p.662) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Injection Well Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Multilayer Well (p.72) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Multiphase Booster (p.100) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
P and T Profiles (p.196) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
PCP Lift (p.452) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Qgi vs CHP Curve (p.203) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Reservoir VFP Tables (p.201) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
System Analysis (p.195) Well Design and Performance (p.50)
Wellhead Nodal Analysis (p.199) Well Design and Performance (p.50)

2.1 Condensate Pipeline Tutorial

The offshore frontier poses some of the greatest technical challenges facing the oil and gas
industry, particularly as we venture into ever deeper waters and more remote locations.
Development costs can be substantial and many new production systems must be designed to
accommodate subsea multiphase flow across long distances to be economically viable.
Managing costs over extended distances introduces a number of complex risks and reliability
becomes a key concern due to high intervention costs and potential for downtime. Characterizing
and managing these risks requires detailed multidisciplinary engineering analysis and has led to
the emergence of a new field called flow assurance.
Design of subsea tiebacks requires multiphase flow simulation to assure that fluids will be safely
and economically transported from the bottom of the wells all the way to the downstream
processing plant.

Tutorials
265
PIPESIM User Guide

Four flow assurance issues are discussed in this task, including hydrates, heat loss, erosion, and
liquid slugging.
This tutorial involves the following tasks:
• Develop a Compositional PVT Model (p.266)
• Construct the Model (p.268)
• Size the Subsea Tieback (p.270)
• Select Tieback Insulation Thickness (p.273)
• Determine the Methanol Requirement (p.273)
• Screen for Severe Riser Slugging (p.276)
• Size a Slug Catcher (p.281)

2.1.1 Flow Assurance Considerations for Subsea Tieback Design

In this tutorial, a client plans to produce four condensate wells into a subsea manifold through a
subsea tieback and up a riser to a platform. The oil and gas will be separated, with the oil pumped
to shore and the gas compressed to shore.
Figure 2.1. Subsea Tieback

Task 1: Developing a Compositional PVT Model

In this section, you develop a compositional PVT model based on the data in the tables that follow.

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 3
Methane 72
Ethane 6
Propane 3
Isobutane 1

Tutorials
266
PIPESIM User Guide

Component Moles
Butane 1
Isopentane 1
Pentane 0.5
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.1: Pure Hydrocarbon Components

Name Boiling Point (degF) Molecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 0.683 12
Table 2.2: Petroleum Fractions

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 10
Table 2.3: Aqueous Component

To develop a Compositional PVT model:

1. Open the Setup » Compositional Template menu.
2. Choose PIPESIM as PVT Framework.
3. Choose Multiflash as PVT Package.
4. To enter the pure components noted in the preceding tables, select the pure hydrocarbon
components from the component database.

Note: Make multiple selections by holding down the Ctrl key.

5. After selecting all pure hydrocarbon components, click Add >>.

6. Select the Petroleum Fractions tab and characterize the petroleum fraction C7+ by entering
these parameters:
• Petroleum fraction name
• BP
• MW
• SG in Row 1
7. Highlight the row by clicking Row 1 and click Add to composition >>.
8. Return to the Component Selection tab to see that petroleum fraction displays in the
component list table on the right.
9. Click the Property Model tab and check the radio button Use Template Models for all fluids.
10.Select SRK Equation of State and Pedersen viscosity model. Leave all other options as
default.
11.Select Setup » Compositional Local Default and add mole fractions for all library and pseudo
components, as shown in the above tables.

Tutorials
267
PIPESIM User Guide

12.To generate the hydrocarbon phase envelope, click Phase Envelope.

Task 2: Constructing the Model

In this section, you construct the subsea tieback model.
To construct the model:
1. Using the Single Branch toolbar, insert the objects shown in the figure below.

2. Specify each object based on the data provided in the tables that follow.

Note: To enter the detailed heat transfer data in the flowline and riser, select the Heat Transfer
tab and click Calculate U value. Ensure that your Riser Elevation survey matches that shown
below.

Manifold Data
Temperature 176 degF
Pressure 1,500 psia

Subsea Tieback Data

Rate of undulations 0'/1000 feet (not hilly)
Horizontal Distance 6 miles
Elevational difference 0 feet (horizontal)
Available IDs 9,10,11 inches
Heat Transfer
Ambient temperature 38 degF
Pipe thermal conductivity 35 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thermal conductivity 0.15 Btu/hr/ft/degF

Tutorials
268
PIPESIM User Guide

Subsea Tieback Data

Insulation thicknesses available 0.50 in + 0.25 in increments
Ambient fluid water
Ambient fluid velocity 1.5 ft/sec
Burial depth Leave it blank (Elevated above ground)
Ground conductivity 1.5 Btu/hr/ft/degF

Riser (use detailed profile)

Horizontal Distance 0 feet (vertical pipe)
Elevational difference 1,600 feet
Available IDs 9,10,11 inches
Heat Transfer
Ambient temperature @ riser base 38 degF
Ambient temperature @ 1,200 feet 42 degF
Ambient temperature @ 800 feet 48 degF
Ambient temperature @ 400 feet 56 degF
Ambient temperature @ topsides 68 degF
Pipe thermal conductivity 35 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thermal conductivity 0.15 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thickness 0.50 in (plus additional 0.25 in increments if required)
Ambient fluid water
Ambient fluid velocity 1.5 ft/sec

Tutorials
269
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 3: Sizing the Subsea Tieback

You will now determine the required ID for the subsea tieback, such that the separator pressure for
the maximum expected rate is no less than 400 psia.
The expected production rate is 14,000 STBD. The system will be designed to accommodate
between 8,000 STBD (turndown case) and 16,000 STBD, should the wells produce more than
expected.
The riser must be the same ID as the tieback, and you must not exceed the erosional velocity.
To size the subsea tieback:
1. From the Setup » Flow Correlations menu, make the following selections:
• Vertical Flow Correlation = Hagedorn Brown (Duns & Ros map)
• Horizontal Flow Correlation = Beggs-Brill Revised
2. Perform a System analysis with the minimum, maximum, and expected flow rates as the X-axis
variable and the available IDs for the flowline and riser as Change in Step (with Sensitivity
variable 1) sensitivity variables.
3. Determine the minimum flowline ID that satisfies the separator pressure requirement (400 psia)
for the maximum flow rate.
4. Change the Y-axis to display Erosional Velocity Ratio Maximum.

Tutorials
270
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Verify that the selected flowline ID does not exceed an erosional velocity ratio of 1.0 for the
expected flow rate.

Property Value
Pipeline and Riser ID 10 inch
Max. erosional velocity ratio for selected ID 0.828
Min. Separator pressure for selected ID 946 osua
Max. separator pressure for selected ID 1,265 psia
Table 2.4: Results

2.1.2 Hydrates
Gas hydrates are crystalline compounds with a snow-like consistency that occur when small gas
molecules come into contact with water at below a certain temperature. Hydrate formation
temperature increases with increasing pressure, therefore, hydrates risk increases at higher
pressures and lower temperatures. When hydrates form inside the pipeline, the flow can be
blocked by hydrate plugs.
Hydrate forming molecules most commonly include methane, ethane, propane, carbon dioxide,
and hydrogen sulfide.
Three hydrate crystal structures have been identified - Structures I, II, and H. The properties of
Structures I and II hydrates are well defined. Structure H hydrates are relatively new, and their
properties are less well defined.
Hydrates can very easily form downstream of a choke where fluid temperature can drop into the
hydrate formation region due to Joule-Thompson cooling effects.
The Hydrate curve (below), shows a typical gas hydrate curve which is very useful for subsea
pipeline design and operations. On the left side of the curve is the hydrate formation region. When
pressure and temperature are in this region, water and gas will start to form hydrate.
Many factors impact the hydrate curve, including fluid composition, water salinity and presence of
hydrate inhibitors.

Note: Generating Hydrate curves requires the PIPESIM Multiflash Hydrate Package.

Figure 2.2. Hydrate curve

Tutorials
271
PIPESIM User Guide

Hydrate Mitigation Strategies in PIPESIM

Two common strategies available in PIPESIM to mitigate hydrates formation are thermal insulation
and chemical inhibitors. Thermal insulation carries a higher upfront capital cost whereas chemical
inhibition carries a higher operational cost.
Thermal insulation
Heat transfer between the fluid and surroundings occurs, depending upon the temperature
gradient. There are two options for modeling the heat transfer in PIPESIM – Input U value and
Calculate U value.
Input U value is an overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) based upon the pipe outside
diameter is entered.
Calculate U value includes the following information, which can be entered to compute the overall
Heat Transfer coefficient.
• Pipe coatings
• Thickness of the pipe coat.
• K (Thermal conductivity) of the material
• Pipe conductivity
• Ambient fluid (Air or Water)
• Ambient Fluid Velocity
• Pipe burial Depth
• Ground conductivity (for flowlines only)
Chemical Inhibitors
Thermodynamic inhibitors can be used to shift the hydrate curve towards the left, thereby lowering
the hydrate formation temperature. Examples of inhibitors include methanol and ethylene glycol.
Kinetic and anti-agglomerate inhibitors comprise a category known as Low Dosage Hydrate
Inhibitors (LDHIs). These inhibitors do not lower the hydrate formation temperature; instead, they
help prevent the nucleation and agglomeration of hydrates to avoid blockage formation. The effects
of these types of inhibitors cannot be modeled with PIPESIM.

Tutorials
272
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 4: Selecting Tieback Insulation Thickness

Using the tieback/riser ID selected above, determine the thickness of the insulation required for
both the flowline and the riser, such that the temperature of the fluid does not cross the hydrate
curve for all possible flow rates.
To select tieback insulation thickness:
1. Double-click on the Report tool and ensure that Phase Envelope is selected.
2. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature profile.
3. Specify Separator (outlet) pressure as the calculated variable and the three design flow rates
as the sensitivity variables.
4. Use the Series menu on the resulting plot to change the X-axis to Temperature and the Y-axis
to Pressure to display the phase envelope.
5. Observe the production path on the phase envelope and its proximity to the hydrate curve.
6. If required, perform successive runs while increasing the insulation thickness of both the
flowline and riser by 0.25 inch increments until sufficient.

Property Value
Req. Insulation thickness 0.75 in
Table 2.5: Results

Task 5: Determining the Methanol Requirement

Assume the flowline and riser have been insulated but they are under-insulated with only 0.25 inch
of insulation. In this section, you determine the required injection volume of methanol to ensure
that hydrates do not form.
To determine the methanol requirement:
1. Insert an injector just downstream of the source, as shown in the figure below.

Tutorials
273
PIPESIM User Guide

2. Specify Methanol as Injector Fluid.

3. (Use injection temp. = 68 degF). To do this:
a. Select Setup » Compositional Template.
b. Add Methanol to the listed of added components.
c. Double-click the Injector and choose Edit Composition.
d. Specify a composition of 100% Methanol.
e. Specify Injection Temperature and any injection rate.
4. Select Setup » Heat Transfer Options, and verify that Enable Hydrate Sub-Cooling
Calculation is selected.
5. Select Operations » System Analysis.
a. Specify a liquid rate of 8,000 BPD and select calculated variable as the outlet pressure.
b. For the X-axis variable, select the Injector as the object and Rate as the Variable.
c. Select Range and enter a range of 200 to 600 BPD in increments of 50 BPD.
d. Uncheck the active status on all sensitivity variables with defined values.
e. Run the model.
6. On the resulting plot, change the Y-axis to display Maximum Hydrate Subcooling Temperature.
7. From the plot, determine the required Methanol injection rate, such that the flowing temperature
is always above the stable hydrate temperature.

Note: A Positive Hydrate Sub-cooling in the output file indicates the fluid temperature is below
the hydrate stability temperature.

Property Value
Req. Methanol Injection Volume (bbl/d) ~308
Table 2.6: Results

2.1.3 Severe Riser Slugging

Severe slugging in risers can occur in a multiphase transport system consisting of a long flowline
followed by a riser. Severe slugging is a transient phenomenon that can be split into four steps, as
shown in the next figure, The four slugging steps.

Step 1: Slug formation corresponds to an increase of the pressure in bottom of the riser. The
liquid level does not reach the top of the riser. During this period, the liquid is no longer
supported by the gas and begins to fall, resulting in blockage to the riser entrance and
pipeline pressure buildup, until the liquid level in the riser reaches to the top.
Step 2: In slug production, the liquid level reaches the riser outlet, and the liquid slug begins to
be produced until gas reaches the riser base.

Tutorials
274
PIPESIM User Guide

Step 3: In bubble penetration, gas is again supplied to the riser, so the hydrostatic pressure
decreases. As a result, the gas flow rate increases.
Step 4: This corresponds to gas blowdown. When the gas produced at the riser bottom reaches
the top, the pressure is minimal and the liquid is no longer gas-lifted. The liquid level falls
and a new cycle begins.

Figure 2.3. The four slugging steps

PIPESIM does not rigorously model severe slugging associated with risers, as this is a transient
phenomena, but it does report a dimensionless indicator of the likelihood of this occurring (PI-SS
number in PIPESIM output file).
Severe slugging is most prevalent in cases in which a long flowline precedes a riser, especially for
cases in which the flowline inclination angle is negative going into the riser.
In cases of severe slugging, the slug catcher must be able to receive a volume of liquid at least
equal to the volume of the riser. However, severe slugging can be mitigated by topsides choking or
riser base gas lift including self-lifting mechanisms.
PI-SS Indicator (Severe-Slugging Group)

where,
Z = Gas compressibility factor

Tutorials
275
PIPESIM User Guide

R = Gas universal constant

T = Temperature (K)
M = Molecular weight of gas
WG = Gas mass flow rate (kg/s)
WL = Liquid mass flow rate (kg/s)
g =Acceleration due to gravity (m/s2)
LF = Flowline length (m)

= Average flowline gas holdup

Severe slugging is expected when the Pots’ number is equal to, or less than, unity. Pots’ model
can be used to determine the onset of severe slugging, but the model cannot predict how long the
severe slugs will be and how fast severe slugs will be produced into the separator.
The PI-SS indicator is available as part of the PRIMARY output in PIPESIM.

Task 6: Screening for Severe Riser Slugging

To screen for severe riser slugging:
1. Deactivate the methanol injector and reset the insulation thickness to that determined to
prevent hydrate formation.
2. Under Setup » Define Output, select three cases to print. This reports the full output of each
sensitivity value with the Report tool selections appended to the bottom of each sensitivity
output.
3. Perform a System analysis with an inlet pressure of 1,500, outlet pressure calculated and liquid
rates of 8,000; 14,000 and 16,000 BPD.
4. To check for severe slugging:
a. Configure the Y-axis of the System analysis plot to display the PI-SS number. This
represents the maximum value of the PI-SS number along the flowline.
b. View the Output report by selecting Reports > Output File, to determine the prevalent flow
regime at the riser base for the different rates.

Severe Slugging 8,000 stb/d 14,000 stb/d 16,000 stb/day

PI-SS number at riser base 0.938 1.180 1.263
Flow pattern at riser base Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent
Table 2.7: Results

2.1.4 Slug Catcher Sizing

PIPESIM is frequently used to estimate the capacity requirements for slug catchers. More detailed
analysis is typically performed with transient simulators such as OLGA. For offshore platforms, you

Tutorials
276
PIPESIM User Guide

must balance the high cost of added weight to the platform with the potential of a large slug
overwhelming the liquids handling capacity and shutting down the entire system.
There are three typical scenarios to consider in the sizing of slug catchers for this type of system:
• Hydrodynamic slugging
• Pigging
• Ramp-up

Hydrodynamic Slugging
Most multiphase production systems will experience hydrodynamic slugging. Designing systems
simply to avoid hydrodynamic slugging, such as larger pipe ID, is not a common practice. Because
hydrodynamic slugs grow as they progress through the pipe, long pipelines can produce very large
hydrodynamic slugs.
PIPESIM calculates the mean slug length as a function of distance traveled by using the SSB or
Norris Correlations. A continuous intermittent flow regime is required for this to occur. A
probabilistic model (again, based on Prudhoe Bay field data) is applied to calculate the largest slug
out of 10, 100 and 1,000 occurrences. The 1/1000 slug length is often used to determine slug
catcher volume requirement.
The slug output from PIPESIM yields the length and frequency for the selected slug size
correlation:
• Mean slug length (distribution is assumed skewed log normal)
• 1 in 1,000 slug length and frequency
• 1 in 100 slug length and frequency
• 1 in 10 slug length and frequency
The preceding probabilities represent various levels of confidence regarding the maximum slug
size. For example, a 1 in thousand slug length of 50 meters indicates there is only 0.1% probability
of the maximum slug length exceeding 50 meters.
Symbols that can be included in the slug output have the following meanings:

0.0 Flow is not in a slugging regime (as calculated by the relevant flow map correlation at spot
report) and, thus, no hydrodynamic slugs are required.
N/A The slug length calculated using the chosen slugging correlation is negative and, therefore,
slug size is indeterminate at this point in the flowline.

It should be noted that the slug size data output is only printed if SLUG is specified in the
Windows menu option Define Output.
Figure 2.4. Define Output menu options

Tutorials
277
PIPESIM User Guide

Alternatively, you can insert the Report tool and check Slugging values and Sphere-generated
Liquid Volume values, as shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.5. Selecting report properties

Tutorials
278
PIPESIM User Guide

Pigging
In multiphase flow in horizontal and upwards inclined pipe, the gas travels faster than the liquid due
to lower density and lower viscosity. This is called slippage. Multiphase flow correlations predict the
‘slip-ratio’ which depends on many factors, such as fluid properties, pipe diameter and flow regime.
In steady-state flow, the gas travels faster, so it will slip past the liquid and occupy less pipe
volume. This gives rise to a higher liquid volume fraction than if the gas traveled at the same
velocity, resulting in ‘liquid holdup,’ as illustrated in the Liquid Holdup figure, below.
Figure 2.6. Liquid Holdup

During a pigging operation, a solid object the diameter of the pipeline is sent through the line to
push out liquids and debris. As a pipeline is pigged (see next figure), a volume of liquid builds up
ahead of the pig and is expelled into the slug catcher as the pig approaches the exit.

Tutorials
279
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM considers that the pig travels at the mean fluid velocity and, thus, the volume of liquid
that collects ahead of the pig is a function the degree of slip between the gas and liquid phases
(such as magnitude of liquid holdup). PIPESIM reports this volume as the sphere generated liquid
volume (SGLV). The slip ratio (SR) is also reported, which is the average speed of the fluid divided
by the speed of the liquid.
The volume of liquid expelled at the receiving terminal as a result of pigging can be estimated
using steady-state analysis as a first order approximation.
Figure 2.7. Pigging operation

Ramp-up
When the flow rate into a pipeline increases, the overall liquid holdup typically decreases because
the gas can more efficiently sweep out the liquid phase. When a sudden rate increase (ramp-up)
occurs, the liquid volume in the pipeline is accelerated resulting in a surge.
A ramp-up operation is illustrated in the next figure. The size of the surge is influenced by the
sensitivity of liquid holdup with respect to the overall flow rate. A simple material balance approach
can be applied to estimate the volume of the associated surge.
For more details, see Cunliffe's method (p.381).
Figure 2.8. Ramp-up operation

Tutorials
280
PIPESIM User Guide

Evaluating Each Scenario

For a more detailed analysis of slug catcher sizing, you should also consider the drainage rates of
the primary separator and slug catcher. Hydrodynamic slugs and pig-generated slugs typically
occur over a short duration (minutes), while the surge created by a ramp-up operation can be a
long duration (hours/days).

Task 7: Sizing a Slug Catcher

In this section, you screen for severe slugging and determine the required size of the slug catcher
based on the largest of the following criteria, multiplied by a safety factor of 1.2.
Consider these criteria:
• Hydrodynamic slugging, which is the requirement to handle the largest slugs envisaged, chosen
to be statistically the 1/1000 population slug size. This is determined by using the SSB or Norris
Correlations.
• The requirement to handle liquid swept in front of a pig.
• Transient effects, such as the requirement to handle the liquid slug generated when the
production flow is ramped up from 8,000 to 16,000 STB/D, such as Ramp-up surge.

Note: For the purposes of sizing a slug-catcher, it is assumed that severe riser slugging can be
mitigated with topsides choking or riser-based gas lift.

To size the slug catcher:

1. In the Report tool, verify that slugging values and sphere generated liquid volume are selected.
2. Re-run the System analysis configured in the previous .
3. For each sensitivity value, scroll down and read the reported 1/1000 slug volume and the Total
Sphere Generated Liquid Volume So Far.
4. For the ramp-up case, calculate the difference in total liquid holdup, as this will be the surge
volume. You must convert from ft3 > bbl. The conversion factor is 5.615 ft3/bbl.

Tutorials
281
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The surge associated with ramp-up occurs over a much longer time period than the other
cases. The ramp-up volume does not consider the drainage rate of the separator or the
duration of the ramp-up. See Cunliffe's method (p.381) for information on how to calculate the
ramp-up duration.

5. Inspect the output file and observe the flow regimes along the profile for each case.
6. Based on the results in the table below, select a slug catcher size that will be able to handle the
largest slug volume for all conditions.

Slug Catcher Sizing 8,000 stb/d 14,000 stb/d 16,000 stb/d

1/1000 slug volume (bbl) 164 176 207
Sphere generated liquid volume (bbl) 467 437 429
Ramp-up volume (bbl) 982 – 812 = 170
Design volume for slug catcher (bbl) (use 20% safety 467 * 1.2 = 560
factor)
Table 2.8: Results

2.2 Oil Well Performance Analysis Tutorial

This module examines a producing oil well located in the North Sea. You analyze the performance
of this well using NODAL analysis, calibrate black oil fluid (low GOR) using laboratory data, and
match flow correlations with pressure survey data.
You will also analyze the behavior of the well with increased water cut and find an opportunity to
inject gas at a later stage when the well is unable to flow naturally.
This tutorial the following tasks:
• Build the Well Model (p.283)
• Perform NODAL Analysis (p.50)
• Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile (p.287)
• Calibrate PVT Data (p.290)
• Evaluate Gas Lift Performance (p.294)
• Work with Multiple Completions (p.295)
• Modeling a Flow Control Valve (p.300)

2.2.1 NODAL Analysis

NODAL analysis is used to evaluate the performance of an oil well. It involves specifying a nodal
point, usually at the bottomhole or wellhead, and dividing the producing system into two parts - the
inflow and the outflow. This is represented graphically in the next figure, Intersection points of the
inflow and outflow performance curves .
The solution node is defined as the location where the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and
downstream (outflow) of the node is zero.

Tutorials
282
PIPESIM User Guide

Solution nodes can be judiciously selected to isolate the effect of certain variables. For example, if
the node is taken at the bottomhole, factors that affect the inflow performance, such as skin factor,
can be analyzed independently of variables that affect the outflow, such as tubing diameter or
separator pressure.
Figure 2.9. Intersection points of the inflow and outflow performance curves

Getting Started
Before beginning an oil well performance analysis:
1. Select File » New » Single Branch.
2. From Setup » Units, set the engineering units.

Task 1: Building the Well Model

Model building refers to setting up all objects, from the source to the sink, and defining the
properties of these objects. You can select PIPESIM single branch objects using either the Tool
menu or the toolbar at the top of PIPESIM window.
To build the well model:
1. Select a Vertical Completion object from the single branch toolbar, and place it in the Single
Branch flow diagram.
2. Select a Boundary Node and place it in the flow diagram.

Tutorials
283
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Select a Tubing object and connect VertWell_1 to the End Node S1 by clicking and dragging
from VertWell_1 completion to the End Node S1.

Note: The red outlines on VertWell_1 and Tubing_1 indicate that essential input data are
missing.

4. Double-click on the completion and enter the properties listed in the table.

Tutorials
284
PIPESIM User Guide

Completion model Well PI

Use Vogel? Yes
Reservoir Pressure 3,600 psia
Reservoir Temperature 200 degF
Liq. Productivity Index 8 stb/d/psi
Table 2.9: Reservoir and Inflow Data
5. Double-click on the tubing object and enter the tubing properties based on data listed in the
table.

Measured Depth (ft) True Vertical Depth (ft)

0 0
1,000 1,000
2,500 2,450
5,000 4,850
7,500 7,200
9.000 8,550
Table 2.10: Deviation Data

Measured Depth (ft) Ambient Temp. (degF)

0 50
9,000 200
Table 2.11: Geothermal Gradient

Bottom MD (ft) Internal Diameter (inches)

8,600 3.958
9,000 6.184
Table 2.12: Tubing Data
6. Specify an Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient = 5 btu/hr/ft 2/F (override the default value).

Note: You can use the overall heat transfer coefficient to calculate total heat transfer through
the pipe wall. The overall heat transfer coefficient depends on the fluids and their properties on
both sides of the wall, as well as the properties of the wall and the transmission surface.

7. Click the Summary table button to observe the configuration summary.

8. Set the Distance between nodes to 100 ft.
9. Select Setup » Black Oil.
10.Enter the fluid properties, as shown in the table. Assume default PVT correlations and no
calibration data.

Tutorials
285
PIPESIM User Guide

Water Cut 10 %
GOR 500 scf/stb
Gas SG 0.8
Water SG 1.05
Oil API 36 ºAPI
Table 2.13: Black Oil PVT Data

Note: The fluid physical properties are calculated over the range of pressures and temperatures
encountered by the fluid. These physical properties are subsequently used by multiphase flow
correlations to determine the phases present, the flow regime, and the pressure losses in single
and multiphase flow regions. The heat transfer calculations use the fluid thermal properties.

11.From the Setup » Flow Correlation, ensure that the Hagedorn-Brown correlation is selected
for vertical flow and the Beggs-Brill Revised correlation is selected for horizontal flow.

Note: Select the correlation that is best suited for the fluid and operating conditions of interest.
There is no universal rule for selecting a multiphase flow correlation that is good for all
operating scenarios. Refer to the Flow Correlation (p.358) topic for information on the
applicability of flow correlations

12.Save the model as CaseStudy1_Oil_Well.bps.

Task 2: Performing NODAL Analysis

In this section, you perform a NODAL analysis operation for a given outlet (wellhead) pressure to
determine the operating point (intersection) and the absolute open flow potential (AOFP) of the
well. To do this, add a NODAL analysis point at the bottomhole to divide the system into two parts.
Part A extends from reservoir to the bottomhole, while Part B runs from the bottomhole to the
wellhead.
To perform a NODAL analysis:
1. Select a NODAL analysis point from the toolbar and drop it near the completion.
2. Click on the tubing and drag its bottom tip over to the NODAL analysis point.
3. Insert a connector to link the completion with the NODAL analysis point.

Tutorials
286
PIPESIM User Guide

4. Select Operations » NODAL Analysis.

5. Enter an Outlet Pressure (Boundary Condition) of 300 psia.
6. Leave Inflow Sensitivity and Outflow Sensitivity empty.

Note: PIPESIM has implemented several modifications in Nodal Analysis calculation. The most
significant is displaying the intersection point on the nodal plot. As a result, you do not depend
on reading from the plot and the solution points are calculated with the values presented in
Data tab. There is no need to specify/change number of points for inflow and outflow curve
unless you wish to use those data for further processing. The PIPESIM engine automatically
determines the number of points and their spacing for both inflow and outflow curves.

7. Run the model.

8. Inspect the plot and select the Data tab to get these answers.

(Outlet) Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Operating Point Flow rate 8,514 stb/d
Operating Point BHP 2,536 psia
AOFP 21,290 stb/d
Table 2.14: Results

Task 3: Performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile

The Pressure/Temperature profile calculates pressure and temperature on a node-by-node basis
for the system. The results are plotted for pressure or temperature as a function of distance/
elevation along the flow path.

Tutorials
287
PIPESIM User Guide

To estimate bottomhole flowing conditions:

1. Run Operations » Pressure / Temperature Profile.
2. Enter the Outlet (Tubing head) pressure of 300 psia.
3. Specify the liquid rate as the calculated variable.
4. Leave Sensitivity Data empty.

Note: Inlet and outlet pressure always reference the boundaries of the system. In this particular
case, inlet pressure is the reservoir pressure, while the outlet pressure corresponds to wellhead
pressure. The inlet pressure is specified at the completion or source level, whereas the outlet
pressure is always specified manually within the operation.

5. Run the model.

Note: PIPESIM generates a Profile plot for every valid combination of inflow-outflow cases.
Because of this, there is no need to run a separate Pressure Temperature Profile operation.

6. Inspect the plot and summary output report to determine answers.

Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Production Rate 8,514 stb/d
Flowing BHP 2,536 psia
Flowing WHT 133 degF
Depth at which gas appears 7,600 ft
Table 2.15: Results

2.2.2 Fluid Calibration

Fluid properties (also known as PVT properties) are predicted by correlations developed by fitting
experimental fluid data with mathematical models. Various correlations have been developed over
the years based on experimental data sets covering a range of fluid properties.
The PIPESIM help system describes the range of fluid properties used to develop each correlation,
which helps you select the most appropriate correlation for the fluid at hand. The default
correlations in PIPESIM are based on the overall accuracy of the correlations as applied to a broad
range of fluids.
To increase the accuracy of fluid property calculations, PIPESIM provides functionality to match
PVT fluid properties with laboratory data. Calibration of these properties can greatly increase the
accuracy of the correlations over the range of pressures and temperatures for the system being
modeled.
For example, calibration of the bubblepoint pressure can result in the initial appearance of gas at a
depth of perhaps a thousand feet higher or lower than an uncalibrated model. This results in a
significantly different mixture fluid density and, thus, a much different elevational pressure gradient.
Likewise, calibration of the fluid viscosity can drastically improve the calculation of the frictional
pressure gradient, especially in heavy oils and emulsions.

Tutorials
288
PIPESIM User Guide

If the calibration data is omitted, PIPESIM calibrates on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone,
resulting in a loss of accuracy.
After the calibration is performed, a calibration factor calculated as ratio of measured value to the
value calculated by selected correlation.
There are two calibration options available in PIPESIM:
• Single Point calibration
• Multi-Point calibration

Single Point Calibration

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance from calculated
values. When this occurs, it is useful to calibrate the property using the measured point. PIPESIM
can use the known data for the property to calculate a calibration constant Kc;
Kc = Measured Property @(P,T)/Calculated Property @(P,T)
This calibration constant is used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in question,
that is:
Calibrated value = Kc (Predicted value)

Multi-Point Calibration
In multi-point calibration, black oil correlations are tuned so that the correlation honors all data
points as shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.10. Correlation running through all data points

A calibration factor is calculated for every measurement point, and a plot is generated for the
Pressure vs. Calibration factor, as shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.11. Pressure vs. Calibration factor

Tutorials
289
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: This is not a best fit method, as all points are fitted exactly. Any outlying data should be
smoothed before entering it into PIPESIM.

Task 4: Calibrating PVT Data

To calibrate PVT data:
1. From Setup » Black Oil, select the Viscosity Data tab.
2. Enter the following calibration data:
3. Under Dead Oil Viscosity, select User’s 2 Data points as the correlation.
4. Enter the following measurements:

Property Temperature (degF) Value

Viscosity 200 1.5 cp
60 10 cp
Table 2.16: Dead Oil Viscosity Measureents
5. For Live Oil Viscosity, ensure that the Chew and Connally correlation is selected.
6. For the Emulsion Viscosity Method, select the Brinkman 1952 correlation.
7. For the Undersaturated Oil Viscosity, select the Bergman-Sutton correlation.
8. Select the Advanced Calibration Data tab and click Single-Point Calibration.
9. Enter the measured data to calibrate the PVT model.

Range Property Value Pressure (psia) Temp (degF)

P > Pb OFVF 1.18 3,000 200
P = Pb Sat. Gas 500 scf/stb 2,100 200
P <= Pb OFVF 1.22 2,100 200
Live Oil Viscosity 1.1 cp 2,100 200
Gas viscosity 0.029 cp 2,100 200
Gas Z factor 0.8 2,100 200
Table 2.17: PVT Calibration Data

Tutorials
290
PIPESIM User Guide

10.Select the following PVT correlations:

Property Correlation
Saturated gas Lasater
OFVF at / below bubblepoint Standing
Live oil viscosity Chew and Connally
Gas Z Standing

Property Correlation
Saturated gas Lasater
OFVF at/below bubblepoint Standing
Live oil viscosity Chew and Connally
Gas Z Standing
11.From the Advanced Calibration Data tab, select Plot PVT Data (Laboratory Conditions GOR
= GSAT) to generate a plot of the PVT properties for various pressures and temperatures.
12.Select Series and change the y-axis to Oil Formation Volume Factor.
13.Verify that the predicted values match the calibration points.

14.Repeat steps 12 and 13 for Oil viscosity and Gas viscosity to ensure the predicted values are
correct.

Note: Dead Oil conditions are at 14.7 psia.

Tutorials
291
PIPESIM User Guide

Notice that the predicted oil viscosity value at a temperature of 60 degF and 14.7 psia is 10.0 P,
consistent with the laboratory dead oil data.
15.Now that the fluid model is calibrated, re-run the Pressure-Temperature Profile.
16.Determine the flowing bottomhole pressure, flowing wellhead temperature, and production rate
for the given wellhead pressure.
17.Compare your answers to the uncalibrated model results from 2.15 (p.288).
18.Inspect the plot and summary output to determine answers.

Wellhead Pressure Calibrated Uncalibrated

Production Rate 7,810 stb/d 8,514 stb/d
Flowing BHP 2,624 psia 2,536 psia
Flowing WHT 129 defF 133 degF
Depth where gas appears 7,300 ft 7,600 ft
Table 2.18: Results

Note:
The quantity defined by PIPESIM as 'stock tank' GOR is actually the produced GOR, a dynamic
property. The solution gas GOR calibration, an intrinsic property, is specific to the reservoir oil at
reservoir conditions and is obtained through laboratory experiments.
The solution gas liberated at standard conditions is called the associated gas. Produced gas can
also include a contribution from the gas cap, otherwise known as free gas. In other words:
Produced gas = associated (solution) gas + free gas
If free gas is produced, the produced GOR will be higher than the solution GOR and, therefore, the
calculated bubblepoint based on the specified produced GOR will be higher than that defined by
the solution GOR calibration point.

Tutorials
292
PIPESIM User Guide

2.2.3 Pressure/Temperature Matching

The pressure distribution of the fluid as it flows though the tubing is very important in production
engineering tasks such as selecting tubing sizes, forecasting well productivity, and designing
artificial lift installations.
Pressure distribution along particular tubing can be obtained from actual measurements taken with
pressure gauges using wireline/slickline at different depths in the well while it is flowing at a
constant rate. The result of this measurement is a plot of fluid pressure along tubing versus vertical
depth, called a Flowing Gradient survey (FGS) and shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.12. Flowing Gradient Survey

When an FGS is available, it is always best to compare different multiphase flow correlations with
the FGS, to determine the one that best matches the FGS.
Additionally, the correlation can be tuned to more accurately match the data. Optimization routines
in PIPESIM allow the PIPESIM Single Branch engine to calculate optimal values of parameters to
match measured pressure and/or temperature data.
The match is performed by tuning parameters, such as friction and hold-up factor multiplier for
pressure matching, and a U-factor multiplier for temperature matching. After the model is tuned,
you should validate it against test data measured at different conditions.

Note: WARNING: Avoid using large tuning factors. The recommended tuning range of friction and
holdup factor multipliers are +/- 15% (such as 0.85 - 1.15). If it needs > -/+ 15% to match the actual
measured data, you should review the data again. Large adjustments in friction and holdup factors
could also be due to poor fluid characterizations.

Tutorials
293
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 5: Evaluating Gas Lift Performance

The basic principle behind gas lift injection in oil wells is to lower the density of the produced fluid
in the tubing. This results in a reduction of the elevational component of the pressure gradient
above the point of injection and a lower bottomhole pressure. Lowering the bottomhole pressure
increases reservoir drawdown and, thus, production rate.
In this section, you examine how this well responds to gas lift by introducing a Gas Lift Injection
point at 8,000 feet MD in the tubing equipment.
You have two tasks to accomplish:
• Determine how the well responds to gas lift when the water cut is 10% and 60%.
• Determine the liquid production rates as a function of the gas lift rate and water cut.

Wellhead Pressure (psia) 300

Injection Gas SG 0.6
Injection Gas Surface Temp (degF) 100
Table 2.19: Gas Lift Data

To evaluate gas lift performance:

1. Double-click on Tubing and select the Downhole Equipment tab.
2. Under Equipment, select Gas Lift Injection and specify a depth of 8000 ft. MD.
3. Click Properties.
4. Enter a default gas lift rate of 1 mmscf/d.
5. Go to Operations » Artificial Lift Performance and enter the Outlet Pressure as 300 psia.
6. For Sensitivity Data, enter water cut values of 10% and 60%.
7. For the Gas Lift Injection Rate:
a. Select Range.
b. Enter a start value of 1.0.
c. Enter an end value of 10.0.
d. Enter increments of 0.5.
8. Run the model to generate a plot of calculated liquid rate vs. gas lift rate for different water cuts.
9. Inspect the plot and summary output to determine answers.

Gas Lift Rate (mmscf/d) Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 10% Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 60%
Wcut Wcut
1 8,978 5,810
2 9,606 6,454
4 10,260 7,921
6 10,545 8,381

Tutorials
294
PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Lift Rate (mmscf/d) Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 10% Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 60%
Wcut Wcut
10 10,674 8,810
Table 2.20: Results

Task 6: Working with Multiple Completions

Log analysis shows that a shallow gas zone exists at a TVD of 7,500 feet. As an alternative to gas
lift injection, you can investigate the benefits of perforating this zone and self lifting the well.
Figure 2.13. Shallow zone at 7,500 feet

Defining a Second Completion

To define a second completion:
1. Insert a second vertical completion below the NODAL analysis point.
2. Connect to the original completion using a separate tubing model, as shown below.

Tutorials
295
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Modify the upper tubing string to extend only to the top of the upper perforations.
a. Modify the Deviation survey such that it will extend to only 7,200 feet TVD.

b. Modify the Geothermal survey such that the ambient temperature at an MD of 7,500 feet is
180 degF.
c. In the Tubing Configurations tab, specify a bottom MD of 7,500 feet and a tubing ID of
3.958 inches.
d. In the Downhole Equipment tab, remove the gas lift injection.
e. Click OK to close the menu.

Tutorials
296
PIPESIM User Guide

4. Double-click on the lower tubing string to define its properties,

a. In the Deviation Survey tab, define the lower tubing string profile, as shown.

b. In the Geothermal Survey tab, specify temperatures of 180 degF at 7,500 feet and 200
degF at 9,000 feet.
c. Specify the U value as 5 Btu/hr/ft2/F.
d. In the Tubing Configuration tab, specify a tubing ID of 3.958 inches to a depth of 8,600
feet MD and 6.184 inches to a depth of 9,000 feet.
e. Click OK to close the menu.
5. With no test data at hand, model the reservoir performance of the upper zone using the
pseudo-steady state Darcy equation. Specify the upper completion using the following data:

Model Pseudo-steady state

Basis of IPR Calculation Gas
Use Pseudo-pressures? yes
Reservoir pressure 3,000 psia
Reservoir Temperature 180 degF
Thickness 5 feet
Wellbore Diameter 8.5 inches

Tutorials
297
PIPESIM User Guide

Model Pseudo-steady state

Permeability 20 md
Mechanical Skin 0
Rate Dependant Skin 0
Table 2.21: Reservoir Properties — Upper Gas Zone
6. Select the Fluid model tab within the completion dialog and enter the following:
a. Use a locally-defined fluid model with an OGR of 0 STB/mmscfd and a WGR of 0 (all gas).
b. Specify a gas gravity of 0.67.
c. Leave all other properties and correlations at their default settings.

Note: The fluid data used for a well/source is defined by a default, local data set or an
override value [for water cut and/or GOR/GLR/OGR/LGR]. If there are multiple fluids present
in the system with different intrinsic properties, define the main fluid as the default and all
others as local fluids.

7. To analyze the effect of perforating the upper zone (compared with gas lift injection), run a
Pressure/Temperature Profile for the 60% water cut case.
a. From Setup » Black Oil, set the water cut to 60%.

Note: This water cut affects only the lower zone because the lower zone uses the default
fluid model, while the upper zone is defined with a local fluid model.

b. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile.

c. Specify the Outlet Pressure as 300 psia.
d. Specify the Liquid Rate as the Calculated Variable.
e. Run the model. f. Inspect the output file to determine the results.

Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Liquid Rate (stb/d) 8,251
Gas Rate (upper zone) (mmscfd) 6.3844
Table 2.22: Results

2.2.4 Flow Control Valve

A downhole flow control valve (FCV) allows you to model so-called 'intelligent' or 'smart' wells. The
methodology implemented provides a simple way of modeling single branch (non-multilateral)
intelligent wells in which FCVs are located close to the reservoir.
An FCV can restrict the completion flow rate through the system; however, they are available only
for vertical completions. The purpose of an FCV is to provide a restriction to fluid flow, thereby
reducing the productivity (or injectivity) of a given completion. They are useful in a model
containing multiple completions.

Tutorials
298
PIPESIM User Guide

An FCV is very similar to a choke. Like a choke, it can be modeled as a fixed-size orifice, in which
form it presents a restriction to flow resulting in a pressure drop that increases as flow rate
increases.
Unlike a choke however, a maximum flow rate can also be specified. This is applied to the
completion and, if necessary, the choke bean diameter is reduced to honor the limit. The choke
diameter and flow rate limit can be applied separately or together. If they are both supplied, they
are treated as maximum limits.
As shown in next figure, the Flow Control Valve dialog uses radio buttons to present a choice
between a Generic valve and a Specific valve.
Figure 2.14. Flow Control Valve properties

A generic valve is specified with its Equivalent Choke Area, Gas and Liquid Flow Coefficients, and
choice of Gas Choke Equation method. The choke area can be omitted if a Maximum Rate

Tutorials
299
PIPESIM User Guide

Through Valve is specified. If it is present, the FCV is modeled with that choke area but, if the
resulting flow rate exceeds the limit, the area is reduced to honor the limit.
You must choose a specific valve from the list of available valves provided in the PIPESIM
database. Many of the specific valves are multi-position devices, as they allow you to select the
effective choke area from a range of pre-installed fixed chokes.
If a flow rate limit is supplied, the simulation selects the choke position required to honor the limit.
Because the choke area cannot be calculated to match the limit exactly, this usually results in the
flow rate being lower than the limit.
The valve position can be specified or omitted. If specified, the FCV is modeled with the
corresponding choke area, but if the resulting flow rate exceeds the limit, a lower position number
is used.
Valve positions are numbered in order of increasing choke size, starting with position zero. This
position usually specifies a diameter of zero to allow the valve to be shut. An FCV can have as
many as 30 positions.

Task 7: Modeling a Flow Control Valve

A formation integrity test indicates you should not flow more than 2 mmscfd of gas from the upper
formation. To make sure, install the FCV in the upper completion.
To model a flow control valve:
1. Double-click on the upper completion and check Flow Control Valve.
2. In the FCV Properties window, set the Maximum Rate through Valve to 2 mmscfd.
3. Leave Equivalent Choke Area empty.
4. Select Operations » Pressure Temperature Profile. Ensure that the Liquid Rate is the
calculated variable and the outlet pressure is set to 300 psia.
5. Run the model and view the output file for Bean Size. Required Bean Size: 0.0417 in2
6. (Optional) Select any Specific Valve to sensitize on FCV and generate a plot liquid flow rate vs.
FCV position.

Note: TIP: Select SLB : TRFC-HN-AIS value and use System Analysis and mass flow rate.

2.3 Gas Well Performance Analysis Tutorial

A gas well has been drilled for which Drill Stem Test (DST) and compositional fluid data are
available. In this section, you will model the performance of this well.
In this tutorial, you will perform the following tasks:
• Create a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well (p.305)
• Calculate Gas Well Deliverability (p.308)
• Calibrate the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data (p.311)
• Select a Tubing Size (p.313)

Tutorials
300
PIPESIM User Guide

• Model a Flowline and Choke (p.316)

• Predict Future Production Rates (p.318)
• Determine a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading (p.320)

2.3.1 Compositional Fluid Modeling

PIPESIM offers fully compositional fluid modeling as an alternative to the Black Oil model.
Compositional fluid modeling is generally regarded as more accurate, especially for wet gas,
condensate and volatile oil systems. However, detailed compositional data is less frequently
available to the production engineer.
PIPESIM currently has access to two compositional PVT Frameworks that provide several PVT
flash packages.
Original PIPESIM PVT Framework:
• Multiflash, a third-party compositional package (InfoChem).
New PVT Toolbox Framework (available after PIPESIM 2010.1):
• Eclipse 300 Flash, a new interface to ECLIPSE two-phase flash, allowing additional Equation of
States. This is the same Equation of State package used by other GeoQuest products, such as
ECLIPSE Compositional, PVTi, VFPi, and others.
• DBR Flash, two-phase flash developed by the Schlumberger DBR Technology Center. It has a
more extensive component library than ECLIPSE Flash.
• NIST Refprop Flash, two-phase flash using HelmHoltz Equation of State.
• GERG 2008, two-phase flash using HelmHoltz Equation of State.

Equations of State (EoS)

Equations of State describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. Most thermodynamic and transport properties are derived from the
Equation of State. They are a function of pressure and temperature.
One of the simplest Equations of State for this purpose is the ideal gas law, PV=nRT, which is
roughly accurate for gases at low pressures and high temperatures.

Note: The Black Oil model uses this equation along with a compressibility factor (z) to account for
non-ideal behavior.

However, this equation becomes increasingly inaccurate at higher pressures and temperatures,
and it fails to predict condensation from a gas to a liquid. As a result, much more accurate
Equations of State have been developed for gases and liquids.
The Equations of State available in PIPESIM include:

Multiflash • Standard Peng-Robinson

• Advanced Peng-Robinson
• Standard Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)

Tutorials
301
PIPESIM User Guide

• Advanced Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)

• Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling (BWRS)
• Association (CPA).
DBR Flash • Peng-Robinson (with/without Volume Shift)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong (with/without Volume Shift Correction).
ECLIPSE 300 Flash • Peng-Robinson (with/without Volume Shift + Accentric Factor
Correction)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong (with/without Volume Shift Correction).
NIST Refprop • HelmHoltz Equation of State
Flash
GERG 2008 • HelmHoltz Equation of State

Viscosity
Compositional fluid models also use Viscosity models based on corresponding state theory.
Available Viscosity models include:
• Pederson (default)
• Lohrenz-Bray-Clark (LBC)
• Aasberg-Petersen
Comparative testing has shown the Pedersen method to be the most widely applicable and
accurate for oil and gas viscosity predictions. Multiflash uses the Pedersen method as the default
viscosity model, though an option is available to choose the LBC model for backward compatibility.
The choice you make of the Equation of State has a large effect on the viscosities predicted by
these methods. The LBC method is more sensitive to the Equation of State effects than the
Pedersen method.
Figure 2.15. Selecting the default viscosity option

Binary Interaction Parameter (BIP) Set

Binary interaction parameters (BIPs) are adjustable factors used to alter the predictions from a
model until the predictions match experimental data as closely as possible.

Tutorials
302
PIPESIM User Guide

BIPs are usually generated by fitting experimental VLE or LLE data to the model in question. BIPs
apply between pairs of components, although the fitting procedure can be based on both binary
and multi-component phase equilibrium information.
Figure 2.16. Selecting a BIP in the Compositional Properties window

Emulsion Viscosities
An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquid phases. One phase (the dispersed phase) is
carried as droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In oil/water systems at low water cuts, oil is
usually the continuous phase.
As water cut is increased, there comes a point at which phase inversion occurs, and water
becomes the continuous phase. This is the Critical Water cut of Phase Inversion, otherwise called
the cutoff, which occurs typically between 55% and 70% water cut. The viscosity of the mixture is
usually highest at, and just below, the cutoff.
Emulsion viscosities can be many times higher than the viscosity of either phase alone.
Three mixing rules have been implemented that are identical to the options currently available in
the Black Oil section.
You can choose any of these options:
• Set to oil viscosity
• Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities
• Woelflin, which uses Woelflin correlation at water cut less than, or equal to, CUTOFF, and
water viscosity at water cut greater than CUTOFF.
Figure 2.17. Mixing Options

Tutorials
303
PIPESIM User Guide

Flashing Options
Flash calculations are an integral part of all reservoir and process engineering calculations. They
are required whenever it is desirable to know the amounts (in moles) of hydrocarbon liquid and gas
coexisting in a reservoir or a vessel at a given pressure and temperature.
These calculations are also performed to determine the composition of the existing hydrocarbon
phases.
Given the overall composition of a hydrocarbon system at a specified pressure and temperature,
flash calculations can determine four factors:
• Moles of the gas phase
• Moles of the liquid phase
• Composition of the liquid phase
• Composition of the gas phase
The compositional module uses inline flashing (PVT tables built in memory) as the default mode of
compositional simulation. For inline flashing, PIPESIM has three options – Interpolation,
Interpolation when close to phase boundary, and Rigorous.

Interpolation To maximize the speed of the simulation, not all requested P/T points are
flashed. A pressure/temperature grid is defined and only these points are
created.
For points not lying exactly on a grid point, four-point interpolation is used. The
default grid points can be changed via the compositional option.
This is the fastest, but least accurate, method.
Interpolation In a case where one or more of the four points used for the interpolation is in a
when close to a different phase, a full flash is performed and the data point added to the table.
Phase Boundary This will improve accuracy, but at the cost of speed.
Rigorous A full flash is always performed. Very accurate, but slow!

Figure 2.18. Flashing options

Tutorials
304
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 1: Creating a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well

To create a compositional fluid model:
1. Start with a new PIPESIM case – Well Performance Analysis.
2. Open the Compositional Fluid Template menu by selecting Setup » Compositional Template.
3. Choose PVT Framework as PIPESIM and select Multiflash as PVT Package.

Note: Schlumberger employees select PVT Toolbox Framework, E300 Flash Package. Your
results will be slightly different.

4. Click the Component Selection tab.

5. Add following library components by selecting the desired components from the list and click
Add >>.

Methane Butane
Ethane Isopentane
Propane Pentane

Tutorials
305
PIPESIM User Guide

Isobutane Hexane
Table 2.23: Components
6. Add the C7+ pseudo-component:
a. Select the Petroleum Fractions tab.
b. Enter the pseudo-component name and data.
c. Highlight the row number for the pseudo-component and click Add to Composition.

C7+ BP 214 degF

C7+ MW 115
C7+ SG 0.683
Table 2.24: Pseudo-Component Stock Tank Properties
7. Leave Property Models as default.
8. Open the Compositional (Local Default) menu by selecting Setup » Compositional (local
default).
9. Under the Component Selection tab, you will notice all the components pre-defined in step-4
above. Add the mole fraction to these components.

Methane 78
Ethane 8
Propane 3.5
Isobutane 1.2
Butane 1.5
Isopentane 0.8
Pentane 0.5
Hexane 0.5
C7+ 6
Table 2.25: Componistion (%)
10.To determine the water content at saturation at reservoir conditions:
a. Go back to the Compositional Template UI and add Water as additional component.
b. Now come back to Compositional (Local default) UI and add an arbitrary amount of water,
such as 20 moles, to the composition.
c. Select the Flash/Separation tab.
d. Click the PT button and enter the reservoir pressure and temperature, 4,600 psia and 280
degF, respectively.
e. Perform a flash and read the water content for the vapor fraction from the screen.

Tutorials
306
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The hydrocarbon vapor components will be normalized to include the mole fraction of
water.

f. Copy and paste (Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V) the water and the normalized hydrocarbon
composition back into the compositional editor main screen.

Note: Water can be carried along with the gas in the vapor phase or entrained in the gas in
droplet form. There exists at any temperature and pressure a maximum amount of water
vapor that a gas is able to hold. A gas is completely saturated when it contains the
maximum amount of water vapor for the given pressure and temperature conditions.
Keeping the volume and pressure constant on water vapor-saturated gas, water will
condense out at lower temperatures because the capacity of the gas to hold water is less.
The same is true if the volume and temperature are kept constant, but the pressure is
allowed to increase.

11.Click Phase Envelope to generate a phase envelope using the water-saturated composition.
12.From the main Component Selection tab, click Export, name the composition sat_gas and
click Save.
13.Select Setup » Flow Correlations and choose Gray Modified for the vertical flow correlation.
14.Select File » Save As and save the model as GasWell.bps.

Tutorials
307
PIPESIM User Guide

2.3.2 Gas Well Deliverability

Based on the analysis for flow data obtained from a large number of gas wells, Rawlins and
Schellhardt (1936) presented a relationship between the gas flow rate and pressure drawdown that
can be expressed as:
2 2 2
QSC = C ( pR − pwf )
Where

QSC = gas rate (mmscf/d)

pR = average reservoirpressure (PSIA)

pwf = flowing bottomholepressure

C = flow coefficient (mmscf/day/psi2)
n = non-Darcy exponent
The exponent n is intended to account for the additional pressure drop caused by the high-velocity
gas flow, such as turbulence. Depending on the flowing conditions, the exponent n can vary from
1.0 for completely laminar flow to 0.5 for fully turbulent flow.
The performance coefficient C in above equation is included to account for:
• Reservoir rock properties
• Fluid properties
• Reservoir flow geometry
This equation is commonly called the deliverability or back-pressure equation. If you can determine
the coefficients of the equation - n and C - you can calculate the gas flow rate Qsc at any
bottomhole flow pressure pwf and construct the IPR curve.
There are essentially three types of deliverability tests:
• Conventional deliverability (back-pressure) test
• Isochronal test
• Modified isochronal test
Essentially, these tests consist of flowing wells at multiple rates and measuring the bottomhole
flowing pressure as a function of time. When the recorded data are properly analyzed, it is possible
to determine the flow potential and establish the inflow performance relationships of the gas well.

2.3.3 Task 2: Calculating Gas Well Deliverability

In this section, you construct the simple physical well model shown below and perform a simulation
to calculate deliverability.
1. Using the Single Branch toolbar, insert a vertical completion, tubing, and NODAL analysis
point, as shown in the figure.

Tutorials
308
PIPESIM User Guide

2. Edit the reservoir and tubing data according to the data in the table.

Static Pres 4,600 psia

Reservoir Temp. 280 degF
Gas PI 1 x 10-6 mmscf/d/psi2
Table 2.26: Reservoir Data

Mid perf TVD 11,000 feet

Mid perf MD 11,000 feet
Ambient temp 30 degF
EOT MD 10,950 feet
Tubing ID 3.476 inches
Casing ID 8.681 inches
Table 2.27: Tubing Data

The vertical completion properties for Well_1 are shown in the figure below, followed by an
example of tubing properties for a simple model.

Tutorials
309
PIPESIM User Guide

3. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile Operation.

a. Select the Gas Rate as the calculated variable.
b. Specify an Outlet Pressure of 800 psia and click Run. The flow rate displays below the plot.
You can read the bottomhole flowing pressure on the plot.
4. On the Plot menu, select Series.

Tutorials
310
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Change the Y-axis to Temperature. You can read the bottomhole and wellhead temperatures
on the plot.

Pres = 4,600 psia, Tres = 280 degF

% H2O @ saturation 1.8549
Po = 800 psia
QG 18.21 mmscfd
Pwf 1,718 psia
BHT 236 degF
WHT 172 degF
Table 2.28: Results

Task 3: Calibrating the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data

In this section, you use the back-pressure equation for inflow performance relationship for a gas
well producing at a pseudo-steady state. Using a multipoint well test, the C and n parameters are
calculated.
1. Double-click Completion.
2. Choose the Back Pressure Equation from the drop-down menu.
3. Click Calculate/Graph and enter the test data listed in the table.

QGas (mmscf/d) Pwf (psia)

9.7 3,000
11.9 2,500
14.3 1,800
Table 2.29: Multiple Test Data
4. Click Plot IPR.

Tutorials
311
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: To position data points, right-click and drag on a plot. To zoom in, click and drag a window
across the data points towards the lower right.To zoom out, click and drag a window towards the
upper-left.

5. Rerun the Pressure/Temperature Profile operation to determine the following:

• Gas flow rate
• Bottomhole flowing pressure
• Bottomhole flowing temperature
• Wellhead temperature
6. Inspect the profile plot and summary file to determine the results.

Back Pressure Equation

Parameter C 7.9793682e-007
Parameter n 1
Po = 800 psia
QG 14.97 mmscfd
Pwf 1,548 psia
Tbh (degF) 232 degF
Twh (degF) 168 degF
Table 2.30: Results

2.3.4 Erosion Prediction

Erosion has been long recognized as a potential source of problems in oil and gas production
systems. Erosion can occur in solids-free fluids but, usually, it is caused by entrained solids (sand).
Two erosion models are available in PIPESIM – API 14 E and Salama.
Figure 2.19. Selecting erosion options

Tutorials
312
PIPESIM User Guide

API 14 E
The API 14 E model comes from the American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice,
number 14 E. This is a solids-free model which calculates only an erosion velocity (no erosion
rate). The erosion velocity Ve is calculated with the formula:
C
V =
pm
Where pm is the fluid mean density and C is an empirical constant. C has dimensions of (mass/
(length*time2)) 0.5. Its default value in engineering units is 100, which corresponds to 122 in SI
units.
The current practice for eliminating erosional problems in piping systems is to limit the flow velocity
to that calculated by this correlation.

Salama
The Salama model was published in Journal of Energy Resources Technology, Vol 122, June
2000, "An Alternative to API 14 E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden Fluids," by Mamdouh
M. Salama.
This model calculates erosion rate and erosional velocity. The parameters required for the model
are Acceptable Erosion rate, Sand production ratio, Sand Grain Size, Geometry Constant and
Efficiency.
The equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained from the supplied
volume ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand density - 2650 kg/m 3.

Task 4: Selecting a Tubing Size

In this section, you perform a NODAL analysis to select an optimum tubing size. The available
tubing sizes have IDs of 2.992 inches, 3.958 inches, 4.892 inches, and 6.184 inches.
Your final decision will be based on these criteria:
• Flow rate (High)
• Erosional velocity ratio (<1).
• Cost (Generally increases with size)
To select a tubing size:

Tutorials
313
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Ensure that the model includes a NODAL analysis object located between the tubing and the
completion.
2. Select Operations » NODAL analysis.
a. Enter 800 psia as the Outlet Pressure.
b. Enter the tubing IDs as the Outflow Sensitivity.
c. Run the model and observe the outflow curves.

3. Another way to analyze the effect of the tubing ID, is to perform a Pressure/Temperature profile.
a. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile.
b. Enter the tubing size as the sensitivity.
c. Specify the flow rate as the calculated variable and run the model.
d. From the profile plot, change the X-axis to Erosional Velocity Ratio (EVR = actual velocity /
API 14e limit) by selecting the Series option from the toolbar. This lets you determine the
maximum erosional velocity ratio.

Selected Tubing 3.958 inch

Po = 800 psia
QG 15.39 mmscfd
Pwf 1,369 psia
BHT 228 degF

Tutorials
314
PIPESIM User Guide

WHT 167 degF

Max Erosional velocity ratio 0.7693
Table 2.31: Results

2.3.5 Choke Modeling

Wellhead chokes are used to limit production rates to meet surface constraints, protect surface
equipment from slugging, avoid sand problems due to high drawdown, and control flow rate to
avoid water or gas coning. Placing a choke at the wellhead increases the wellhead pressure and,
thus, the flowing bottomhole pressure which reduces production rate.
Pressure drop across wellhead chokes is usually very significant, and various choke flow models
are available for critical (sonic) and sub-critical flow as shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.20. Gas fraction in the fluid and flow regimes

Sound waves and pressure waves are both mechanical waves. When the fluid flow velocity in a
choke reaches the traveling velocity of sound in the fluid under the in situ condition, the flow is
called sonic flow. Under sonic flow conditions, the pressure wave downstream of the choke cannot
go upstream through the choke because the medium (fluid) is traveling in the opposite direction at

Tutorials
315
PIPESIM User Guide

the same velocity. As a result, a pressure discontinuity exists at the choke, which means that the
downstream pressure does not affect the upstream pressure.
Because of the pressure discontinuity at the choke, any change in the downstream pressure
cannot be detected from the upstream pressure gauge. Any change in the upstream pressure
cannot be detected from the downstream pressure gauge either. This sonic flow provides a unique
choke feature that stabilizes the well production rate and separation operation conditions.
Whether a sonic flow exists at a choke depends on a downstream-to-upstream pressure ratio. If
this pressure ratio is less than a critical pressure ratio, sonic (critical) flow exists. If this pressure
ratio is greater than, or equal to, the critical pressure ratio, sub-sonic (sub-critical) flow exists.
The critical pressure ratio is about 0.55 for natural gas, and a similar constant is used for oil flow.
In some wells, chokes are installed in the lower section of tubing strings. This choke arrangement
reduces wellhead pressure and enhances oil production rate as a result of gas expansion in the
tubing string. For gas wells, a downhole choke can reduce the risk of gas hydrates. A major
disadvantage of using downhole chokes is that replacing a choke is costly.

Task 5: Modeling a Flowline and Choke

In this section, you add a horizontal flow line and a choke to the model. You use the gas rate
calculated in the previous to determine the choke bean size that results in a manifold (end of
flowline) pressure of 710 psia.
To model a flowline and choke:
1. Ensure the tubing ID is set to 3.958 inches.
2. Insert a choke at the wellhead and reconnect the tubing to the choke.
3. Select the mechanistic model for both critical and sub-critical flow.

Note: TIP: You can enter any choke size you wish, but it will be overridden by the sensitivity
variable.

4. Insert a flowline downstream of the choke and connect it to a node representing the manifold.
5. Specify the flowline using the data in the table.

Flow-line length 300 feet

Flow-line ID 6 inches

Tutorials
316
PIPESIM User Guide

Pipe Roughness 0.001 inches

Wall thickness 0.5 inches
Ambient Temp 60 degF

6. Select Operations » Pressure Temperature Profile.

a. Select User Variable as calculated and input a choke size. A good estimate is a size
between 1 inch and 3 inches.
b. Set the Outlet Pressure to 710 psia.
c. Specify the gas flow rate calculated in the previous .
d. Run the model and see the PsPlot for the choke size.
7. Enter the resulting choke size into the choke model.
8. Re-run the Pressure/Temperature profile with outlet pressure as the calculated variable to verify
that the calculated wellhead pressure is 800 psia.
9. Inspect the output file to determine individual pressure drops for the reservoir, tubing, choke
and flow line.

Po = 710 psia
Choke size 1.515 inch
Pressure losses across system
Δ P Reservoir 3232 psi
Δ P Tubing 568 psi
Δ P Choke 88 psi
Δ P Flow-line 2 psi
Table 2.32: Results

Tutorials
317
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 6: Predicting Future Production Rates

In this section, you use System analysis to calculate the gas rate as a function of reservoir
pressure.
To predict future production rates:
1. Right-click and choose Active to deactivate the choke and flowline. These objects should be
highlighted in red to indicate they are inactive.
2. Select Operations » System Analysis.
3. Choose Gas Rate as the calculated variable.
4. Set the wellhead pressure to 800 psia.
5. Use Reservoir (Static) Pressure as the X-axis variable and set these values:
• 4,600 psia
• 4,300 psia
• 3,800 psia
• 3,400 psia
6. Run the model and view the resultant plot.

Reservoir Pressure (psia Gas Rate (mmscfd)

4600 8.059
4200 10.281
3800 13.374
3400 15.388
Table 2.33: Results

2.3.6 Liquid Loading

Gas wells usually produce natural gas-carrying liquid water and/or condensate in the form of mist.
As the gas flow velocity in the well drops because of reservoir pressure depletion, the carrying
capacity of the gas decreases. When the gas velocity drops to a critical level, liquids begin to
accumulate in the well (liquid loading).
This increases the bottomhole pressure, which reduces the gas production rate. A low gas
production rate will cause gas velocity to drop further and, eventually, the well will cease
producing.

Turner Droplet Model

In predominantly gas wells operating in the annular-mist flow regime, liquids flow as individual
particles (droplets) in the gas core and as a liquid film along the tubing wall.
By analyzing a large database of producing gas wells, Turner found that a force balance performed
on a droplet could predict whether the liquids would flow upwards (drag forces) or downwards

Tutorials
318
PIPESIM User Guide

(gravitational forces). If the gas velocity is above a critical velocity, the drag force lifts the droplet,
otherwise the droplet falls and liquid loading occurs. This is illustrated in next figure.
Figure 2.21. Turner Droplet model

When the drag is equal to weight, the gas velocity is at critical. Theoretically, at the critical velocity,
the droplet would be suspended in the gas stream, moving neither upward nor downward. Below
the critical velocity, the droplet falls and liquids accumulate in the wellbore.
In practice, the critical gas velocity is generally defined as the minimum gas velocity in the tubing
string required to move droplets upward.
The general form of Turner's equation is given by:

where

Liquid loading calculations are performed in every operation and are available for review in output
files and plot reports. Review the output file to determine if the well is under liquid loading.
A value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio in excess of 1 indicates loading.
The NODAL analysis plot will report the Liquid Loading Gas Rate when the X-axis is configured to
display gas rate. For every point on the outflow curve, the value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is
calculated and the critical gas rate is calculated at a point where liquid loading velocity ratio is
equal to 1.

Note: The reported value comes from interpolation of the outflow curve between two points, one
with a velocity ratio below 1 and another with a velocity ratio above 1. Therefore, the accuracy of
the results depends on the number of points on the outflow curve.

Tutorials
319
PIPESIM User Guide

Task 7: Determining a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading

To determine the Critical Gas Rate:
1. Select Operations » NODAL analysis.
2. Select Limits and change these settings:
• Number of points on each inflow curve = 100
• Number of points on each outflow curve = 200
• Inflow curves to extend to the AOFP
• Outflow curves limited to the pressure range of the inflow curves
3. Set the outlet pressure to 800 psia and run the model.
4. Plot the Pressure at NA point vs. Stock Tank Gas Rate. Note the stock tank gas rate on the
Data tab. The reported critical gas rate is 2.069 mmscfd

Note: The reported critical gas rate refers to the outflow curve, which you can validate by
performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation at the same conditions (flow rate and
outlet pressure).

5. Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation to calculate inlet pressure at the given

critical gas rate corresponding to outflow outlet pressure of 800 psia.
6. View the output file to see if the Maximum Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is close to 1, which is
consistent with the results of the NODAL analysis.

2.4 Looped Gas Gathering Network Case Study

In this case study, you must model the network as a complete system to account for the interaction
of wells producing in a common gathering system. The wellhead pressure and, by extension, the
deliverability of any particular well is influenced by the backpressure imposed by the production
system.
Modeling the network as a whole allows the engineer to determine the effects of such actions as
adding new wells, adding compression, looping flowlines and changing the separator pressure.
In this case study, you learn how to build a gathering network and perform a network simulation to
evaluate the deliverability of the complete system. This case study involves the following tasks:
• Build a Model of a Network (p.327)
• Perform a Network Simulation (p.327)

2.4.1 Model a Gathering Network

Network models are constructed using the network module and solved using its calculation engine.
The basic stages involved in developing a network model are:
1. Build a model of the field, including all wells and flowlines.
2. Specify the boundary conditions.
3. Run the model.

Tutorials
320
PIPESIM User Guide

Boundary Conditions
To solve the network model, you must enter the correct number of boundary conditions. Boundary
nodes are those that have only one connecting branch, such as a production well, injection well,
source or sink.
The number of boundary conditions required for a model is determined by the model’s Degrees of
Freedom, determined as follows:
Degrees of Freedom = number of wells (production and injection) + number of sources + number
of sinks
For example, a 3 production well system producing fluid to a single delivery point has 4 degrees of
freedom (3+1), regardless of the network configuration between the well and the sink.
Each boundary can be specified in terms of Pressure OR Flow rate OR Pressure/Flow rate (PQ)
curve.
Additionally, the following conditions must be satisfied:
• The number of pressure, flow rate or PQ specifications must equal the degrees of freedom of
the model.
• At least 1 pressure must be specified.
• At each source (production well & source) the fluid temperature must be set.

Solution Criteria
A network has converged when the pressure balance and mass balance at each node are within
the specified tolerance. The calculated pressure at each branch entering and leaving a node is
averaged, and the tolerance of each pressure is calculated from the equation:
P − Pave .
Ptol =
Pave . x 100 %
If all Ptol values are within the specified network tolerance, that node has passed the pressure
convergence test. This is repeated for each node.
The total mass flow rate into and the total mass flow rate out of a node are averaged. The
tolerance is calculated from the equation:
(Total mass flow rate in ) − (Total mass flow rate average )
Ptol =
Total mass flowrate average x 100 %
If the Ftol value is within the specified network tolerance, that node has passed the mass
convergence test. This is repeated for each node.
The network has converged when all of the foregoing conditions are satisfied.

2.4.2 Task 1: Building a Model of a Network

In this case study, your goal is to establish the deliverability of a production network. The network
connects three producing gas wells in a looped gathering system and delivers commingled product
to a single delivery point.
Getting Started

Tutorials
321
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Open PIPESIM and go to File » New » Network to create a new network model.
2. Go to File » Save As to save the model in your training directory, such as c:\training\pn01.bpn.
Building the Model
Using the engineering data available at the end of this case study, build a model of a network.
To build the model:
1. Click Production Well to place Well_1 in the work area, as shown.

2. 2. Double-click on Well_1 to reveal the components, as shown below.

3. Double-click on the vertical completion to enter the inflow performance data.

4. Enter a gas PI of 0.0004 mmscf/d/psi2 and a reservoir temperature of 130 degF.

Note: You will enter the reservoir pressure later when the network boundary conditions are
specified. For now, enter any value you wish for reservoir pressure.

5. Double-click on the tubing and select Simple Model as the preferred tubing model.
6. Define vertical tubing with a wellhead datum MD of 0 feet and mid perforations TVD and MD of
4,500 feet.
7. The ambient temperatures are 130 degF at mid-perforations and 60 degF at the wellhead. The
tubing has an I.D. of 2.4 inches.

Note: Essential data fields are shown in a red outline; if the fields are not outlined, data entry is
optional.

8. Close the view of Well_1 by clicking at the upper-right corner of the window, or by selecting
File » Close to return to the network view.
9. Copy the data to Well_2 and Well_3.
a. Select Well_1.

Tutorials
322
PIPESIM User Guide

b. Using the commands Edit » Copy and Edit » Paste (or Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V), create two
copies of the well.

Note: By default, the names of the copied wells will be Well_2 and Well_3 and contain the
same input data as Well_1.

10.Position the new wells, as shown.

11.Modify the data of Well_3.

a. Double-click on Well_3 and modify the completion and tubing data.
b. For the vertical completion, enter a gas PI of 0.0005 mmscf/d/psi2 and a reservoir
temperature of 140 F.
c. Define vertical tubing with a wellhead TVD of 0 and mid-perforations TVD and MD of 4,900
feet.
d. The ambient temperatures are 140 degF at the mid-perforation depth and 60 degF at the
surface. The tubing has an I.D. of 2.4 inches.
e. Close the view of Well_3 to return to the network view.
12.Specify the composition of each production well. This step defines the compositions at the
production wells. Well_1 and Well_2 are producing from the same zone and, thus, are assumed
to have the same composition. Well_3 has a composition that is different than that shown in the
data section at the end of the case study. The most efficient way to define the compositions is
to set the more prevalent composition (that for Wells_1 and Well_2) as the global composition,
then specify the composition of Well_3 as a local composition.

Note: The composition data of all wells is provided at the end of this in Summary data.

a. Save the current network model.

b. Define the global template of all components used in the network model.
1. Select Setup » Compositional Template menu.
2. Add all library components (Hydrocarbon as well as aqueous components).

Tutorials
323
PIPESIM User Guide

c. Under the Petroleum Fraction tab, specify the name and properties of the petroleum fraction
and add it to the list of template components.
d. Select Setup » Compositional (Network Default) and enter the mole fraction for all
components to define global composition (Well_1 and Well_2).

Note: By default, the network global composition applies to all sources/wells in the network
model. This can be checked by viewing the network fluid summary under Setup » Fluid
Models. To define a different composition for any particular source/well, you must set it
locally.

e. Define the local composition for Well_3:

1. Right-click on Well_3.
2. Choose Fluid Model.
f. Select Use locally defined fluid model and click Edit.
g. Choose Local Compositional and click Edit Composition.
h. Enter the composition of Well_3.
13.Connect the network together.
a. Insert a sink and some junction nodes.

Note: Holding down the Shift key while placing junction nodes allows for multiple insertions.
Be sure to release the Shift key before the final insertion.

The network should now look like this:

b. Use the Branch button to connect J_1 to J_2. To do this:

1. Click the Branch object.
2. Hold down the left mouse button over J_1 and drag the cursor to J_2.
3. Release the mouse button. A connected branch is shown in the figure.

Tutorials
324
PIPESIM User Guide

14.Double-click on the arrow in the center of B1 to enter data for that branch.
a. Double-click on the flowline to enter the following data:

Rate of Undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 30,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner Diameter 6 inches
Wall Thickness 0.5 inches
Roughness 0.001 inches
Ambient Temperature 60 degF
b. Close the B1 window to return to the network view.
15.As the looped gathering lines are all identical, the data for branch B1 can be used to define the
other looped gathering lines.
a. Select B1. Click the arrow in the middle of the branch and copy/paste B1 to create B2, B3,
and B4.
b. To connect a pasted branch:
1. Click the arrow in the middle of the new branch. You will see that highlight boxes display
at either end of the branch.
2. Move the cursor over the right-hand, highlight box. The cursor changes to an up arrow.
Use this end of the branch to drag and drop onto a junction node.

c. Position the new branches.

d. Connect the wells to the adjacent junction node and connect J_4 to the sink.

Tutorials
325
PIPESIM User Guide

16.Double-click on branch B5 and insert the following objects in the left-to-right order shown in the
figure:

• Liquid separator with an efficiency of 100%

• Compressor with a pressure differential of +400 psi and an efficiency of 70%
• After-cooler (heat exchanger) with an outlet temperature of 120 degF and ∆P of 15 psi
• Flowline with the following properties:

Rate of undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 10,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner Diameter 8 inches
Wall Thickness 0.5 inches
Roughness 0.001 inches
Ambient Temperature 60 degF
a. Click Connector to join the equipment together.
b. Close the Single Branch window.
17.Select Setup » Flow Correlations menu and choose Beggs-Brill Revised as the global
vertical and horizontal multiphase flow correlations.
18.In the Options Control tab of the Flow Correlations menu:
a. Select Use network options.
b. Click Apply network options to all branches.
19.Select Setup » Erosion and Corrosion Options and choose the deWaard Corrosion model.

Note: This model calculates a corrosion rate caused by the presence of CO2 dissolved in
water. Concentrations of CO2 and water are obtained from the fluid property definitions, (black

Tutorials
326
PIPESIM User Guide

oil or compositional). The corrosion rate will be zero if CO2 or the liquid water phase is absent
from the fluid.

20.In the Options Control tab of the Erosion and Corrosion Options menu:
a. Select Use network options.
b. Click Apply network options to all branches.
21.Save the model as gas_network.

2.4.3 Task 2: Performing a Network Simulation

To perform a network simulation:
1. Select Setup » Boundary Conditions and specify these boundary conditions:

Node Pressure
Well_1 2,900 psia
Well_2 2,900 psia
Well_3 3,100 psia
Sink_1 800 psia

All flow rates are calculated by the network solver.

Note: Any pressure specification defined in the single branch model must be re-specified in the
network model. However, the boundary pressures specified in the Network view will update the
pressures defined in the single branch model for use in single branch operations.

2. Open the Setup » Iterations menu to set the network tolerance to 1%.
3. Save the model.
4. Click Run.
5. When the network has solved, you should see the message: Gas_networkbpn01 – Finished
OK. When this message displays, click OK.
6. Click Report Tool. What is the gas production rate at the sink? 42.51 mmscfd.

Note: More comprehensive reporting is available by clicking Summary File.

7. Hold down the Shift key and select the flow route from Well_3, branch B3 and branch B5.
8. Click Profile Plot. You should obtain the pressure profile for these three branches, and the
effect of the compressor at J_4 on the system pressure should look similar to the figure below.

Tutorials
327
PIPESIM User Guide

9. Select Series and change the Y-axis to Corrosion Rate to observe the calculated corrosion
rate. Maximum Corrosion Rate in network = 44.902 mm/year
10.Determine the field production rate in the event of a compressor shutdown. Assuming a bypass
line exists around the compressor, deactivate the compressor object and rerun. Gas production
rate at the Sink: 38.47 mmscfd

Note: Edit the legend and title on PsPlot to improve the graphical presentation.

Looped Gathering Network Data

The tables that follow contain the data for task 3.
Figure 2.22. Network layout

Well_1 and Well_2 Well_3

Gas PI 0.0004 mmscf/d/psi2 0.0005 mmscf/d/psi2
Wellhead TVD 0 0
Mid Perforations TVD 4,500 feet 4,900 feet

Tutorials
328
PIPESIM User Guide

Well_1 and Well_2 Well_3

Mid Perforations MD 4,500 feet 4,900 feet
Tubing I.D. 2.4 inch 2.4 inch
Wellhead Ambient Temperature 60 degF 60 degF
Mid Perforations Ambient Temperature 130 degF 140 degF
Table 2.34: Completion and Tubing Data

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 3
Methane 72
Ethane 6
Propane 3
Isobutane 1
Butane 1
Isopentane 1
Pentane 0.5
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.35: Pure Hydrocarbon Components (Well_1 and Well_2)

Name Boiling Point (degF) Mocecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 0.683 12
Table 2.36: Petroleum Fraction (Well_1 and Well_2)

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 10
Table 2.37: Aqueous Component (Well_1 and Well_2)

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 2
Methane 71
Ethane 7
Propane 4
Isobutane 1.5
Butane 1.5
Isopentane 1.5
Pentane 0.5

Tutorials
329
PIPESIM User Guide

Component Moles
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.38: Pure Hydrocarbon Components (Well_3)

Name Boiling Point (degF) Molecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 0.683 10.5
Table 2.39: Petroleum Fraction (Well_3)

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 5
Table 2.40: Aqueous Component (Well_3)

Rate of undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 30,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner diameter 6 inch
Wall thickness 0.5 inch
Roughness 0.001 inch
Ambient temperature 60 degF
Overall heat transfer coefficient 0.2 Btu/hr/ft2/degF
Table 2.41: Data for Looped Gathering Lines (B1, B2, B3, and B4)

2.5 Field Data Matching Tutorial

Field data matching is important in building an accurate model. PIPESIM lets you perform fluid
property matching, IPR matching, flow correlation matching, temperature matching, equipment
settings, and so on. The aim of such matching is to eliminate uncertainties based on measured
data or operating conditions and create a model that follows field measurement. This tutorial
involves the following tasks:
• IPR matching (p.332)
• Optimize Flow Correlation and U Value (p.332)
• Validate Match (p.334)
• Determine Choke Settings (p.335)
For this demo, we use the case study titled "TUT_5A_Base Data Matching" which for a standard
installation of PIPESIM is located in C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Case Studies
\Tutorials\ directory.

Tutorials
330
PIPESIM User Guide

2.5.1 Measured Data

The flowing gradient survey data below was acquired when the well was flowing at a liquid rate of
15,000 STB/day. This data has already been loaded in the model and can be viewed under Data >
Load/Add Measured Data.

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 785 145
2 3000 1355
3 5000 1838
4 7500 2550
5 10000 3186
6 11600 (mid Perf.) 3600

Static Pressure measured at mid-perforation is 4224 psia. Temperature = 210 F. This can be
viewed in the vertical completion. The following measured data was also acquired in the flowline
and riser. This will be entered at a later step.
Flowline:

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 785
2 1250 775
3 2500 760

Riser:

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 760
2 80 750 143

The following multi-rate test data was acquired and will be used later in this tutorial.
Multi-Rate Test Data:

Test Point Flow Rate (STB/Day) Tubing Head Pressure Water Cut (%) GOR (scf/STB)
(psia)
1 15000 750 0 892
2 12000 890 0 892
3 9000 1004 0 892
4 6000 1089 0 892

Tutorials
331
PIPESIM User Guide

2.5.2 Model Setup

Do the following:
1. Open the Data Matching Base model.
2. Modify the flowline element by setting Rate of Undulations to 0.
3. Double click the Tubing object to open the Tubing dialog. Click Convert to Detailed Model
and then select Detailed Model from the Preferred Tubing Model list and click OK. This
changes the tubing profile to Detailed mode.

2.5.3 Task 1. IPR matching

IPR matching can be performed by performing a simulation across completion using measured
pressure data at mid-perforation. The objective is to look for the uncertain variable and tune it to
get the best match of the measured IPR data. The IPR model in this case is Well PI and, since
the Static Reservoir Pressure is available, the only uncertain parameter is Productivity Index. You
will use the Pseudo General Iterative Method (p.211) to get the correct value of PI.
Do the following:
1. Deactivate physical objects downstream of the completion (in this case the tubing object,
flowline and riser) by selecting the equipment item(s), right-clicking and pressing Active. The
tick next to the Active becomes unchecked and the deactivated equipment item changes from
blue to red.
2. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile and set User Variable as the Calculated
Variable. The inlet pressure (static reservoir pressure) will be automatically populated from the
completion. Enter an outlet pressure of 3600 psia, which is the measured flowing pressure at
the mid-perf depth, and the measured liquid rate of 15,000 STB/day.
3. For the User Variable (p.211), select Define and select Productivity Index as the variable.
4. Set a valid minimum and maximum range for Productivity Index (for this case we use the
range from 1 STB/day/psi to 30 STB/day/psi). Set Proportionality Relationship to Direct.
5. Run the operation. (Be sure to remove the data set used for sensitivity analysis on Water Cut
(these data were used in the standard P&T; model) and view the plot of pressure vs elevation.
Note that the calculated liquid PI (expected value of PI in this case should be 24.05147
STB/day/psi).
6. Double-click the completion object and update the value of Productivity Index (PI).

2.5.4 Task 2. Optimizing Flow Correlation & Heat Transfer Coefficient

Do we need to optimize? Before proceeding with optimization, we would like to see how the
simulated result compares to measured data. Re-activate all the components of the model and
perform a simulation (Pressure / Temperature profile) to calculate outlet pressure for a liquid rate of
15000 STB/day and compare it with the measured outlet pressure of 785 psia and temperature of
145 deg F. In this case we obtain:
• Calculated outlet pressure of 728 psia is much lower than the measured outlet pressure of 785
psia.

Tutorials
332
PIPESIM User Guide

• Calculated outlet temperature of 154 deg F is higher than the measured outlet temperature of
145 deg F.
To correct these errors, we need to tune the model using the optimization routine (read on).
PIPESIM optimization routines allow the single branch engine to calculate optimal values of
parameters to match measured pressure and/or temperature data.
You can perform any of the following:
• Pressure Match
• Temperature Match
• Simultaneous Match for Pressure and Temperature
The matching is performed by tuning parameters like friction and holdup factor for Pressure
matching and U-factor for Temperature matching. See optimize (p.754) for further details.

Load Measured Data

Measured data must be set up to use the optimizer. As mentioned previously, the measured data
for the well has already been loaded. Now it is time to load the data for the flowline and riser.
Measured data for the flowline and riser can be directly entered into their respective interfaces.
Measured data can only be entered using a detailed profile for flowline and riser:
• Open Flowline/Riser interface and set Preferred Pipe Description to Detailed View.
• Enter the Measured Pressure and Measured Temperature provided in the Measured Data
section and click OK.
Even though this has already been done, the general steps to enter measured data for tubing into
the database are as follows:
1. Select Data » Load/Add Measured Data.
2. Select New and enter the Well Name, Survey Date and the measured data (Pressures and
Temperatures at various measured depths).
3. Click Save Changes.

Setup Optimizer Options

Do the following:
1. Select Operations » Data Matching and click the Parameters tab. Ensure that the Calibrate
check buttons are ticked for U-value multiplier, Vertical flow friction factor, and Vertical flow
holdup factor. Enter the following Min and Max values:

Min Max
U-value multiplier 0.5 10
Vertical flow friction factor 0.7 1.3
Vertical flow holdup factor 0.7 1.3
Horizontal flow friction factor 0.7 1.3
Horizontal flow holdup factor 0.7 1.3

Tutorials
333
PIPESIM User Guide

2. On the Flow Correlations tab, select suitable horizontal and vertical flow correlations. For this
case we will use following correlations:

Vertical Flow Correlations Horizontal Flow Correlations

Ansari Beggs & Brill Revised
Duns & Ros Mukherjee & Brill
Hagerdorn & Brown
3. On the Run tab, select Outlet Pressure as calculated variable (under Operation Run Data)
and enter the given Flowrate (15000 STB/Day). Click Run model. (Set the RMS weight factors
for the pressure and temperature to 1 to give equal weighting to P & T match).

Select flow correlation parameters and U factor

Do the following:
1. Review the table of results. It shows two cases for each combination of Horizontal and Vertical
flow correlations, an initial and the optimized value. The u-value multiplier (U), vertical friction
factor (VF), vertical holdup factor (VH), horizontal friction factor (VF) and horizontal holdup
factor (VH) are all listed before (Initial) and after the optimization (Optimized) along with the
root-mean-square errors in the pressure (P) and temperature (T) match and the total RMS error
(Total).
2. We should be selecting the combination that gives the lowest total RMS error. In this example,
we notice that the optimized combination of Hagedorn & Brown (Vertical Correlation) and
Mukherjee & Brill Revised (Horizontal Correlation) is the best option, with the lowest RMS error.
3. Select Optimized HBR + MB and click Save Selected Results.
4. Go back to the model and select Setup » Flow Correlations. You will see that the optimized
flow correlation results have been applied to the model. The friction factor and holdup factor
have also been updated in the model.
5. Select Setup » Heat Transfer Options. You will see that the optimized U-value multiplier has
also been applied to the model. Now all u-values listed in the models (Tubing, Flowline and
Riser) will be multiplied by the U-value multiplier.
The model is now ready for use.

2.5.5 Task 3. Validate Match

Once the model is tuned, validate it against test data measured at different conditions. We will use
a Multi-rate test data for validation.
Do the following:
1. Select Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile to calculate Outlet Pressure for known
liquid rates. (Use Liquid Rate as the Sensitivity Variable).
2. Run the operation and review the result. Compare the simulated result with the measured data
and see the difference:

Tutorials
334
PIPESIM User Guide

Case No. Flow rate (STB/ THP - (psia) THP - (psia) Difference (%)
Day) Measured Simulated
1 6000 1089 1111 1.98
2 9000 1004 1023 1.86
3 12000 890 905 1.66
4 15000 750 750 0

This confirms a valid match.

2.5.6 Task 4. Determine Choke Settings

The well above will be connected to a common surface facility operating at 400 psia. To avoid a
back-pressure effect on other wells connected to the system, the well must be choked back to give
final delivery pressure of 400 psia, delivering a flowrate of 15000 STB/d. Do the following:
1. Modify the model to add a choke object at the wellhead. Set the bean diameter to any value
(say 0.5 inches).
2. Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation with known values for Inlet Pressure,
Outlet Pressure (400 psia) and liquid rate (15000 STB/day).
3. Set User Variable as the calculated parameter and define Choke Bean Size as the user
variable.
4. Set a valid minimum and maximum range for choke size (for this case we use the range from 0
in to 2 in). Proportionality Relationship should be set to Direct.
5. Run the model and view the results. Viewing the pressure versus elevation plot indicates the
choke bean size as 1.647750 inches.
Set the new choke size and perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation with known
values for Inlet Pressure, Outlet Pressure (400 psia) and request the liquid rate to be calculated.
You will get the expected value of 15000 STB/d for liquid rate. The well is now ready to produce to
the common facility without any back-pressure effect on other wells.

2.6 Liquid Loading Analysis Tutorial

Field data matching is an important exercise to build an accurate model. PIPESIM allows user to
perform fluid properties matching, IPR matching, flow correlation matching, temperature matching,
equipment settings, and so on. The objective of such matching is to eliminate uncertainties based
on measured data, operating conditions and create a model that follows field measurement. This
tutorial involves the following tasks:
• Set up Liquid Loading Model (p.336).
• Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM (p.336).
• Analyze Well for Liquid Loading (p.336)
• Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading (p.337)

Tutorials
335
PIPESIM User Guide

2.6.1 Task 1. Set up the Liquid Loading Model

Liquid Loading is performed in PIPESIM by default. The default model is Turner's Model, but the
user can select different models through engine keywords. See Liquid Loading (p.384) for further
details. In this exercise we use the Coleman (1991) model.
Do the following:
1. Open the Liquid Loading Base model which for a standard installation of PIPESIM is located in
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Case Studies\Tutorials\ directory.
2. Set up the Coleman Liquid Loading Model and other parameters:
• Pick the value of correction (Efficiency) factor for Coleman Liquid Loading Model from the
table (p.384) (this value is 1.0).
• Select Setup » Engine Options and, in the space provided for Additional engine
keywords, enter the following:

OPTION ELIQLOADING = 1.0

This picks Coleman's model.

2.6.2 Task 2. Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM

You have the option of controlling Liquid Loading Calculations for every liquid loading model
selected. This is done using engine keywords. The parameters to control are:
• Implementation and reporting of Liquid loading Velocity Ratio (p.88).
• Inclination angle (p.88) to prevent liquid loading calculations.
The user should add the following engine keywords:

OPTION LLVELOCITY = GAS

OPTION LLANGLE = 30

The first option reports Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio as Terminal Settling Velocity/Gas Velocity.
The second option prevents calculation of Liquid Loading for a Pipe angle up to 30 degrees from
horizontal.

2.6.3 Task 3. Analyze Well for Liquid Loading

Liquid loading calculations are performed in every operation and are available for review through
output and plot reports. Do the following:
1. Select Pressure » Temperature Profile and calculate the Gas Rate for an outlet pressure of
450 psia.
2. Review the output file and plots to see whether the well is under liquid loading. A Liquid
Loading Velocity Ratio in excess of 1 indicates loading.
The result indicates the value for Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio much less than 1 at every node in
tubing; this indicates the well is free from Liquid Loading. (The auxiliary report should show no
calculation performed for the flowline section due to option control set for inclination angle.)

Tutorials
336
PIPESIM User Guide

2.6.4 Task 4. Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading

A Nodal Analysis plot reports Liquid Loading Gas Rate by default. For every point on the outflow
curve, the value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is calculated and the critical gas rate (p.384) is
calculated at a point where Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is 1. The reported value comes from
interpolation of the outflow curve between two points, one with a velocity ratio below 1 and another
with a velocity ratio above 1. The accuracy of the result therefore depends on the number of
points on the outflow curve.
Do the following:
1. Add a Nodal Analysis Point between the tubing and completion.
2. Select Operations » Nodal Analysis and add the following settings:
• Number of points on each inflow curve = 100
• Number of points on each outflow curve = 200
• Allow the inflow curves to extend to the AOFP
• Limit the outflow curves to lie within the pressure range of the inflow curves
3. View the NA plot. Plot the Pressure at NA point versus Stock Tank Gas Rate. Make a note of
the stock tank gas rate under the Data tab. The reported critical gas rate is 2.2584 mmscfd
4. The reported critical gas rate refers to the outflow curve. This can be validated by performing
Operations » Pressure/Temperature Profile at the same conditions (flowrate and outlet
pressure). Perform the operation to calculate inlet pressure at the given critical gas rate (2.2584
mmscfd) corresponding to outflow outlet pressure of 450 psia. Viewing the output file should
reveal that the Maximum Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is close to 1. This is consistent with
the Nodal Analysis result.

2.7 Ramey Heat Transfer Model Tutorial

Heat transfer between a well and its surroundings varies with time – the well exchanges energy
with the formation, heating it up (or cooling it down), until the formation is at the same temperature
as the well. PIPESIM models heat transfer calculation for the wellbore using Ramey's Largetime
model which assumes that the well has produced long enough to achieve a stable thermal gradient
across the wellbore and into the formation.
While you can use PIPESIM to set up Ramey Heat transfer computation in the wellbore, the option
is limited to uniform wellbore configuration, i.e. there is no change in casing or the cement profile
across the wellbore. When the wellbore configuration changes along the flow path, you cannot use
PIPESIM to define it properly.
This tutorial helps you model Ramey Heat Transfer computation for a wellbore with a changing
wellbore configuration. In this tutorial, you will start with a base model that has a uniform wellbore
configuration for Ramey Heat Transfer, and modify it to demonstrate heat transfer configuration for
a variable wellbore configuration. You will perform following tasks:
• Define Variable Wellbore Configuration (p.338)
• Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Common Properties (p.338)
• Set up Variable Heat Transfer Data for the Wellbore (p.339)

Tutorials
337
PIPESIM User Guide

• Configure Results, Run the Model, and View Results

2.7.1 Task 1. Define Variable Wellbore Configuration

In this task, you will start with a base model that has a uniform wellbore and modify the tubing
confirmation to specify a variable wellbore configuration. Perform following steps:
1. Open the Wellbore Heat Transfer Base model.
For a standard PIPESIM installation, the model location is C:\Program Files
(x86)\Schlumberger\PIPESIM2012.4\Case Studies\Tutorial Examples
\TUT_8A_Base Wellbore HT.bps.
2. Modify the wellbore to add additional tubing section to represent a variable wellbore
configuration. Perform the following steps:
• Double click the tubing to open the tubing editor.
• Change the tubing configuration as shown below:

2.7.2 Task 2. Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Common Properties

Modeling wellbore heat transfer using the Ramey model requires setting up ground thermal
properties and other parameters like time and heat transfer reference diameter. Although these
parameters are already defined under the Geothermal Survey tab in the Heat Transfer
properties group, it will not work for changed a wellbore configuration as these properties vary as
the wellbore configuration changes. Perform following steps to define heat transfer properties using
engine keywords:
1. On the Geothermal Survey tab, under Heat Transfer, select Input U Value.
2. Click Setup » Engine Options, and define common heat transfer properties for the well
including ground data as shown below.

Tutorials
338
PIPESIM User Guide

Note:
• A debug code is provided as the first line to enable engine calculation for Heat Transfer.
• The second line refers to RAMEYTIME. Typically, with a value in excess of 168 hours (one
week), surrounding rock should reach steady state heat transfer.
• The third line sets up to calculate the ambient heat transfer coefficient and values of
KGROUND, and defines ground/rock conductivity in this case.
• The forth line refers to the heat transfer method and input data like Ground Heat Capacity
(GRNDCP), and Ground density (GRNDDEN). HTCRD refers to the heat transfer coefficient
reference diameter defined by the user.

2.7.3 Task 3. Set up Variable Heat Transfer Data for the Wellbore
In this task, you will define detailed heat transfer properties for various wellbore sections, including
pipe and coatings information. Looking at a typical wellbore (Figure 1), it is apparent that the upper
section (from the bottom of the tubing to the surface) has got several layers of materials separating
the flowing wellbore fluid from the surrounding rock/ground. These include:
• Tubing material
• Annulus filled with completion fluid/gas
• Casing material

Tutorials
339
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.23. Wellbore Configuration

Similarly, the lower section (from the tubing shoe down to the mid-perforation) has the following
layers of material separating flowing fluid with the surrounding rock:
• Casing material
• Cement behind casing
These layers act as thermal coatings between the flowing fluid and surrounding rock. To define
these for the two wellbore sections, follow these steps.
1. Open the wellbore property dialog box by double-clicking it. On the Downhole Equipment tab,
add keyword tools at 11000 ft and 11500 ft to configure heat transfer data for upper and lower
sections, respectively.

Tutorials
340
PIPESIM User Guide

2. For the Upper Keyword Tool, click Properties, and then define the following data using
keywords.

Tubing Completion Casing Casing Cement Cement

Thermal Fluid Thermal Thermal Thickness Thermal Thickness
Conductivity Conductivity Conductivity (ft) Conductivity (ft)
(BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F)
35 3.25 35 0.78 2 0.75

Keywords will have following text lines:

Note:
• The first line resets the coating detail.
• Lines two, three, and four define the thickness and thermal conductivities for coating layers
between the inner tubing and formation rock. These are completion fluid, casing, and
cement layers respectively.

3. For the Lower Keyword Tool, click Properties, and then define the following data using
keywords.

Casing Thermal Conductivity Cement Thermal Conductivity Cement Thickness

(BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F) (ft)
35 2 0.75

Keywords will have following text lines:

Note:
• The first line resets the coating detail.

Tutorials
341
PIPESIM User Guide

• Line two defines the thickness and thermal conductivities for coating layers represented by
cement.

2.8 Pipe Inline Heating

This tutorial will show you how to use the PIPESIM* electrical inline heating feature to mitigate
hydrate formation for a 14-mile condensate transportation pipeline. The incoming fluid is at 4200
psia and 102 F and the pressure at the delivery point must be maintained at 1200 psia.
Considering the cold climate and presence of water and light hydrocarbon in the fluid stream,
hydrate formation is expected to occur in flowline and riser.

In the tutorial you will design and implement pipeline heating to prevent hydrate formation and
determine the heating power required in order to maintain pipeline temperature above the hydrate
formation temperature.
In this tutorial, you will perform the following tasks:
• Build a Representative PIPESIM Model (p.343)
• Screen for Hydrate Formation (p.347)
• Prevent Hydrate Formation through Inline Heating (p.350)
• Analysis using ILH Keywords (p.353)

2.8.1 Tutorial Data

Use the following data for the tutorial.

Source and Delivery Conditions

Pressure at the Source 4200 psia
Temperature at the Source 102 deg.F
Minimum pressure at the delivery 1200 psia

Tutorials
342
PIPESIM User Guide

Flowline and Riser Data

Flowline length 14 miles
Riser height 1000 ft
Inside diameter (flowline and riser) 4.026 inch
Wall thickness (flowline and riser) 0.237 inch
Pipe roughness 0.0018 inch

Heat Transfer Data (Flowline & Riser)

Pipe Conductivity 28 Btu/hr/ft/F
Ambient fluid (air) velocity 0.6 ft/s
Ambient temperature 38 deg.F
Coating layer conductivity 0.6 Btu/hr/ft/F
Coating thickness 0.76 inch

Fluid Composition Data (mole %)

Methane 42
Ethane 12
Propane 8
Butane 5
Isobutane 1
Pentane 2
Isopentane 1
Hexane 1
Water 12
C7+ (Petroleum fraction) 16

Petroleum Fraction Properties

C7+ (Boiling point) 298 F
C7+ (Molecular weight) 115

Note: Use Multiflash (PVT package) with Peng-Robinson (EoS), LBC (viscosity model) and
OilGas4 (BIP set). Keep the Emulsion option as none.

2.8.2 Task 1: Build a Representative PIPESIM Model

In this task, you will use the model schematic and data provided to create a PIPESIM model.
Do the following:

Tutorials
343
PIPESIM User Guide

1. Open a new PIPESIM single branch window. Add Source, Junction, Report tool, and connect
them using flowline and riser to create a model as shown in the previous figure.
2. Specify the Source properties as shown in the following figure.

3. Specify the Flowline properties including the heat transfer data as shown in the following
figures.

Tutorials
344
PIPESIM User Guide

4. Specify Riser properties including heat transfer data as shown in the following figures.

Tutorials
345
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Go to Setup » Flow Correlations and select Duns & Ros (Vertical Multiphase Flow
Correlation) and Beggs & Brill Revised (Horizontal Multiphase Flow correlation). Keep the
single phase correlation as Moody.
6. Go to Setup » Heat Transfer Options tab and ensure Hydrate Sub-cooling is selected.

Tutorials
346
PIPESIM User Guide

7. Create a custom report template to include additional variables related to inline heating and
hydrate screening as shown in the following figures:
• Go to Setup » Compositional Template, and select Multiflash as PVT package.
• On the Component Selection tab, select and add all the database components.
• On the Petroleum Fractions tab, define C7+ and click Add to composition.
• On the Property Models tab, select to Use template models for all the fluid and specify
Peng-Robinson (EoS), LBC (Viscosity model), OilGas4 (BIP Set). Keep the Emulsion
option as none.
• Click OK to close the Template window.
• Go to Setup » Compositional (local default) and specify mole(%) for all components.
• Click OK to exit.
8. Save the model as Pipe_Inline_Heating.bps.

2.8.3 Task 2: Screen for Hydrate Formation

In this task you will screen for hydrate formation in the flowline and riser, and identify the location
where hydrate is likely to form.
Do the following:
1. Open the Report Tool and ensure that Phase Envelope is selected.
Select Source, configure the Pressure Temperature Profile, and select Liquid Rate as the
Calculated Variable at a given outlet pressure of 1200 psia. Set the default plot to Pressure
vs. total distance.

Tutorials
347
PIPESIM User Guide

2. Go to Operations » Pressure Temperature Profile, and select Liquid Rate as the

Calculated Variable at a given outlet pressure of 1200 psia. Set the default plot to Pressure vs
Total Distance.

3. Run the model and observe the following result:

Stock Tank Liquid Flowrate = 7152.36 STB/day
4. Modify the Profile plot to generate a profile plot superimposed over phase envelope by
modifying the plot to Temperature (X-axis) vs Pressure (Y-axis). You can see that there is
hydrate formation in the system identified as Hydrate 2 in the following figure.

Tutorials
348
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: Part or whole of the profile plot falling to the left of hydrate line indicates hydrate formation in
the system.

5. Identify the location of hydrate formation by generating a plot of Total distance (X-axis) vs
Hydrate subcooling delta Temperature (Y-axis). You can see in the following figure that the
hydrate formation starts 6 miles form the source in the flowline.

Note: A positive hydrate sub-cooling delta temperature indicates that the fluid temperature is below
the hydrate formation temperature.

Tutorials
349
PIPESIM User Guide

6. Identify the minimum temperature that must be maintained in the system to prevent hydrate
formation by doing the following:
• Generate a plot of Total distance (X-axis) vs Temperature (Y-axis).
• Add existing Hydrate Structure (Type 2 in this case) to the left (Y-axis).
• Get the intersection point temperature and add some safety margin.

2.8.4 Task 3: Prevent Hydrate Formation through Inline Heating

In this task you will apply inline heating to maintain a higher system temperature (above hydrate
formation temperature) to prevent hydrate formation.
Inline heating can be applied using engine keywords under Setup » Engine Options. The inline
heating goes under PIPE main code, and there are two sub codes described in the following table:

Sub Code Description

ILH=or ILHPOWER=or This sub code allows a fixed heating power per unit length of pipeline
ILHMAXPOWER (BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m). This will result in higher fluid temperature.
In-Line Heater This sub code allows a fixed power or duty to be specified, that is used
to transfer heat to the fluid flowing in the pipe. The value is interpreted
as power per unit length (BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m).
ILHMINTEMP This sub code allows maintaining a fixed minimum temperature across
the pipeline by assigning required variable heating power per unit
length of pipe (BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m).
ILHMINTEMP and ILH When both these sub codes are used, the supplied power is treated as
(or ILHPOWER, or the maximum limit. Specified minimum temperature is maintained
ILHMAXPOWER) are along the pipeline as long as required power does not exceed available
used together maximum power. When required temperature cannot be maintained
without exceeding the power limit, the available power will be used as
fixed power and resultant temperature will be calculated.

In the previous task you determined that the required minimum temperature is 80 deg. F. You will
use the ILHMINTEMP sub code for this task.
Do the following:
1. Go to Setup » Engine Options enter the following single branch keywords:
PIPE ILHMINTEMP = 80
2. Configure the model to generate additional plots and results for inline heating related
parameters (they are not reported by default) by using following additional keywords.
PLOT PROFILE =+Q27R27S27 (adds additional plot variables)
PRINT CUSTOM = (B,E,Q27,R27,S27) (generates custom page in the output)

Variable Code Variable Description

B Total distance

Tutorials
350
PIPESIM User Guide

Variable Code Variable Description

E Temperature
Q27 Inline heater power used
R27 Inline heater power available
S27 Inline heater minimum temperature
3. Re-run the Pressure Temperature Profile and generate a Profile plot superimposed over
Phase envelope.
In the following figure you can see that the hydrate issue has been resolved.

4. Re-generate a plot of fluid temperature and hydrate temperature vs total distance to confirm the
result.

Tutorials
351
PIPESIM User Guide

5. Estimate maximum inline heating power used to prevent hydrate formation.

Tutorials
352
PIPESIM User Guide

2.8.5 Task 4: Sensitize ILH Keywords

This task will demonstrate the use of inline heating keywords for ILH parameter sensitizing.

Sensitizing on Minimum Temperature

Re-run the P-T Profile using following ILH keywords to perform sensitivity on minimum
temperature:

Tutorials
353
PIPESIM User Guide

Multicase ?beta = (0,80)

PIPE ILHMINTEMP = ?beta

Analysis using ILH Keywords

Re-run the P-T Profile using following ILH keywords to perform sensitivity on heating power:
Multicase ?beta = (0,10,20,30,40,50)
PIPE ILH = ?beta

Tutorials
354
PIPESIM User Guide

ILH Power as Calculated Variable

Variation in ILH power results changes in temperature and pressure profile of the system and thus
impacts the calculated flowrate. Using pseudo iterative method, you can estimate ILH power for a
given flowrate and boundary condition doing the following:
1. Modify the P-T profile operation to calculate ILH power required to achieve a target liquid
flowrate of 7000 STB/day for given inlet and outlet condition. To do this, use following keywords:

ILH Power as Calculated Variable

PLOT casedata jobdata xycase = dc Sets plot parameter
RATE liq = 7000 stb/day Sets liquid rate
ITERN type = PGEN- pout = 1200 psia xmin=0 xmax=50 Sets P-out and ILH power range
push mainc=pipe label='flowline' text='ilh = ?xitern' Sets ILH as calculated variable
2. Rerun the P-T Profile and you will see that the ILP power is calculated as 21.17 Btu/hr/ft.

Tutorials
355
PIPESIM User Guide

Tutorials
356
PIPESIM User Guide

3
Support and Contact
Information
3.1 Support
Schlumberger Software Integrated Solutions (SIS) provides a variety of options for receiving
support:

3.1.1 SIS web support

If you have a problem that cannot be resolved using PIPESIM Help, you can send a support
request via the Software Integrated Solutions Support Web page. The Support Portal provides a
single, online location for all your support needs. Within the Support Portal you can quickly search
a vast knowledge base for the answers you need, participate with your peers in discussion forums,
and receive the latest news about SIS products and services.
All support requests are entered into the SIS Customer Care Center incident tracking system,
where they are resolved by local support staff. For those times when you need to speak with a
support specialist, contact numbers are provided for your local support center.

3.1.2 On-site support

Software Integrated Solutions (SIS) supplements the standard maintenance agreement by offering
extended on-site support worldwide. This enhanced level of support includes on-site assistance,
installation, troubleshooting and maintenance services of licensed SIS software. Contact the help
desk or refer to your licensing agreement for more information.

3.1.3 SIS Education

A large number of training courses are offered at various SIS locations, or on-site for groups or
individuals upon request. These training courses can help you increase the value you are receiving
from your SIS software products. The courses can also act as a form of preventive maintenance as
you learn to achieve smoother and more trouble-free performance with the products. See the SIS
Training Web site for more information.

Support and Contact Information

357
PIPESIM User Guide

4
Technical Description
This section of the User Guide provides additional details and references on the theory and
methods implemented in PIPESIM.
• Flow Models (p.358)
• Completion (IPR) Models (p.386)
• Equipment (p.433)
• Heat Transfer Models (p.474)
• Fluids Models (p.496)

4.1 Flow Models

4.1.1 Flow regimes
Flow regimes classification for vertical two phase flow
The general problem of predicting the pressure drop for the simultaneous flow of gas and liquid is
complex.
The problem consists of being able to predict the variation of pressure with distance along the
length of the flow path for known conditions of flow. Multiphase vertical flow can be categorized
into four different flow patterns or flow regimes, consisting of bubble flow, slug flow, slug-mist
transition (churn) flow and mist flow.
A typical example of bubble flow is the liberation of solution gas from an undersaturated oil at and
above the point in the flow path where its bubble point pressure is reached.
In slug flow, both the gas and liquid phases significantly contribute to the pressure gradient. the
gas phase exists as large bubbles almost filling the pipe and separated by slugs of liquid. In
transition flow, the liquid slugs between the gas bubbles essentially disappear, and at some point
the liquid phases becomes discontinuous and the phase becomes continuous.
The pressure losses in transition (churn) flow are partly a result of the liquid phase, but are more
the result of the gas phase. Mist flow is characterized by a continuous gas phase with liquid

Technical Description
358
PIPESIM User Guide

occurring as entrained droplets in the gas stream and as a liquid film wetting the pipe walls. A
typical example of mist flow is the flow of gas and condensate in a gas condensate well.
PIPESIM Vertical Flow correlations

Bubble Slug Churn Annular/Mist

Flow regimes classification for horizontal two phase flow

Prediction of liquid holdup is less critical for pressure loss calculations in horizontal flow than for
inclined or vertical flow, although several correlations will require a holdup value for calculating the
density terms used in the friction and acceleration pressure drop components. The acceleration
pressure drop is usually minor and is often ignored in design calculations; however, PIPESIM
includes them.
As in the vertical flow, the two-phase horizontal flow can be divided into the following flow regimes:
Stratified Flow (smooth, wavy), Intermittent Flow (plug and slug) and Distributed Flow (bubble and
mist).
PIPESIM Horizontal Flow correlations

Stratified

Technical Description
359
PIPESIM User Guide

Slug

Bubble

Annular

See also: Flow regimes (p.358)

4.1.2 Horizontal multiphase flow correlations

The following horizontal multiphase flow correlations are available:

Baker Jardine (BJA) correlation

Baker Jardine (p.578) (now Schlumberger) has developed a correlation for two phase flow in gas-
condensate pipelines. This model represents no major advance in theory, but rather a
consolidation of various existing mechanistic models, combined with a modest amount of
theoretical development and field data testing. The model uses the Taitel Dukler flow regime map
and a modified set of the Taitel Dukler momentum balance to predict liquid holdup. The pressure
loss calculation procedure is similar in approach to that proposed by Oliemans, but accounts for
the increased interfacial shear resulting from the liquid surface roughness. The BJA correlation is
used for pressure loss and holdup with flow regime determined by the Taitel Dukler correlation.
The BJA correlation has been developed specifically for applications involving low liquid/gas ratios,
for example gas/condensate pipelines with a no-slip liquid volume fraction of lower than 0.1.

Beggs and Brill original

ORIGINAL: The original Beggs and Brill (p.578) correlation is used for pressure loss and liquid
holdup. Flow regime is determined by either the Beggs and Brill or Taitel Dukler correlation. The
Beggs and Brill correlation was developed following a study of two-phase flow in horizontal and
inclined pipes. The correlation is based upon a flow regime map which is first determined as if the
flow was horizontal. A horizontal holdup is then calculated by correlations, and this holdup is
corrected for the angle of inclination. The test system included two 90 ft long acrylic pipes, winched
to a variable elevation in the middle, so as to model incline flow both upwards and downwards at
angles of up to 90°.

Technical Description
360
PIPESIM User Guide

Beggs and Brill revised

REVISED: As above except that the revised version of the Beggs and Brill correlation is used, with
rough pipe friction factors, holdup limits and corrective constants as proposed by Palmer (p.586)
and Payne (p.586). The following enhancements to the original method are used; (1) an extra flow
regime of froth flow is considered which assumes a no-slip holdup, (2) the friction factor is changed
from the standard smooth pipe model, to utilize a single phase friction factor based on the average
fluid velocity.

Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan

The AGA and Flanigan correlation was developed for horizontal and inclined two phase flow of
gas-condensate gathering systems. The Taitel Dukler flow regime map is used which considers
five flow regimes, stratified smooth, stratified wavy, intermittent, annular dispersed liquid, and
dispersed bubble. The Dukler (p.581) equation is used to calculate the frictional pressure loss and
holdup, and the Flanigan (p.581) equation is used to calculate the elevational pressure differential.

Dukler, (AGA) and Flanigan (Eaton Holdup)

As above but with liquid holdup calculated according to the Eaton (p.581) correlation. The Eaton
liquid holdup correlation is based on a study performed on 2 in. and 4 in. steel pipe using water
and natural gas as test fluids. Test pressures ranged from 305 to 865 psia and liquid holdup
measurements ranged from .006 - 0.732.

Eaton-Oliemans
The Eaton, Oliemans combination of methods uses the correlation developed by Eaton et al (1967)
to predict liquid holdup and the Oliemans Pressure Drop Calculations correlation (1976) to predict
frictional pressure losses. This set of correlations has been found to be reliable for gas-condensate
systems in which the liquid loading varies from very small amounts to levels high above that which
is normally found in gas gathering systems. Additionally, while the Eaton method tends to over-
predict liquid holdup, the results for crude oil systems are generally reasonable. Note that since the
Eaton et al correlation does not incorporate elevation change in its computation of liquid holdup,
hydrostatic pressure losses can be significantly underestimated in cases of low flow rates over hilly
terrain. For downhill flow, pressure recovery is based on the gas density, unlike the Baker Jardine
version of the Oliemans model which uses mixture density for downhill pressure recovery.
The Oliemans correlation was developed following the study of large diameter condensate
pipelines. The flow regime is predicted using the Taitel Dukler flow regime map, and a simple
model, which obeyed the correct single phase flow limits was introduced to predict the pressure
drop. The model was based on a limited amount of data from a 30-in, 100-km pipeline operating at
pressures of 100 barg or higher.

Hughmark-Dukler
The Hughmark (1962) (p.583) / Dukler et al (1964) (p.581) method is the procedure that was
recommended by the AGA /API (1970). This approach uses the Dukler model for pressure loss
calculations and the Hughmark model for liquid holdup calculations.
The use of the Hughmark (1962) liquid volume fraction correlation for pipelines is somewhat
anomalous since it was originally based solely on data for flow in vertical pipes. Hughmark did

Technical Description
361
PIPESIM User Guide

however, compare its predictions with some limited data from horizontal pipes and found the
agreement to be reasonable. Since then, a number of studies (Dukler et al, 1964; Mandhane et al,
1975; Gregory, 1975; Gregory and Fogarasi, 1985) have confirmed it to be one of the better
correlations for pipeline applications. For downhill flow, pressure recovery is based on the gas
density.
It can generally be expected to give reasonable pressure drop and liquid holdup results for gas-
crude oil pipelines. This procedure is not recommended however for gas-condensate systems,
where the Hughmark correlation generally predicts excessive liquid holdups; errors of up to 600%
have been observed.

LEDA
The Leda Point Model (PM) (http://www.kongsberg.com/ledaflow) is a mechanistic model
applicable for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model
considers gas-liquid flow whereas the 3-phase model considers gas-oil-water flow.
The 3-phase Leda PM considers 9 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (oil, gas, water, oil in
gas and water, gas in oil and water, water in oil and gas). Separate momentum equations are
solved for oil, gas and water.
The 2-phase Leda PM considers 4 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (liquid, gas, liquid in
gas and gas in liquid. Separate momentum equations are solved for gas and liquid phases. The
flow regimes predicted by LedaPM are stratified smooth flow, stratified wavy flow, slug flow,
annular and bubbly flow. The Leda 2-phase model uses the liquid viscosity associated with the
fluid model defined in PIPESIM. The Leda 3-phase model assumes that the liquid viscosity is equal
to that of the continuous phase; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are
ignored. The continuous phase is determined by the Brauner-Ullman (p.579) inversion criteria.
The Leda Point Model is the steady-state version of the transient model developed by SINTEF in
collaboration with Total and ConocoPhillips and commercialized by Kongsberg. The model has
been calibrated against data collected at the SINTEF Multiphase Flow Laboratory near Trondheim
Norway. Over 10,000 experimental data points have been collected for single-phase, two-phase
(oil-water, water-gas) and three-phase (oil-water-gas) flow. Pipe diameters ranging from 4-12”
were used at pressures up to 90 barg. The models have been validated with field data supplied by
ConocoPhillips and Total.

Minami and Brill

The Minami and Brill correlation calculates liquid holdup though does not predict flow regime or
pressure gradient. The experimental holdup data was obtained by passing spheres through a
1,333 ft long 3 steel horizontal pipe and measuring the liquid volumes removed. Holdup
measurements ranged from .001 to .44. Fluids used in the experiment included air, kerosene and
water with the liquid viscosities ranging from .6 cp to 2 cp.
Two correlations were proposed. The first (BRIMIN1) is valid for all ranges of liquid holdup; the
second (BRIMIN2) is strictly for wet gas pipelines (holdup < .35).
The Minami and Brill (p.585) holdup correlations can be used with any correlation except
Mukherjee and Brill, No Slip, TUFFP, LEDA, and OLGA. To activate the Minami and Brill
correlation, enter the appropriate engine keyword under Setup » Engine Options (for example,
hcorr holdup = brimin1)

Technical Description
362
PIPESIM User Guide

Mukherjee and Brill

The Mukherjee and Brill (p.585) correlation is used for Pressure loss, Holdup and Flow Map. Note:
selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups will cause unpredictable results. The Mukherjee
and Brill correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop behavior in two-phase
inclined flow. The test facility consisted of a U-Shaped pipe that was inclinable +/-90º. Each leg of
the U section was 56 ft with 22 ft entrance lengths and a 32 ft test sections on both sides. Fluids
were air, kerosene and lube oil with liquid viscosities ranging from .9 to 75 cp. Approximately 1000
pressure drop measurements and 1500 liquid holdup measurements were obtained from a broad
range of oil and gas flows.
For bubble and slug flow, a no-slip friction factor calculated from the Moody diagram was found
adequate for friction head loss calculations. In downhill stratified flow, the friction pressure gradient
is calculated based on a momentum balance equation for either phase assuming a smooth gas-
liquid interface. For annular-mist flow, a friction factor correlation was presented that is a function
of holdup ratio and no-slip Moody friction factor. Results agreed well with the experimental data
and correlations were further verified with Prudhoe Bay and North Sea data.

NOSLIP correlation
The NOSLIP correlation assumes homogeneous flow with no slip between the phases. Fluid
properties are taken as the average of the gas and liquid phases and friction factors are calculated
using the single phase MOODY correlation.

OLGAS 2-phase / OLGAS 2000 3-phase

The OLGAS mechanistic models are applicable for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid
properties. The 2-phase Bendiksen (p.579) model considers gas-liquid flow, whereas the 3-phase
model considers gas-oil-water flow.
This model employs separate continuity equations for gas, liquid bulk and liquid droplets, which are
coupled through interphase mass transfer. Two momentum equations are solved: one applied to
the combined balance for the gas and liquid droplets, if present, and a separate momentum
equation for the liquid film. OLGAS considers four flow regimes: stratified, annular, slug and
dispersed bubble flow; and uses a unique minimum slip criteria to predict flow regime transitions.
The OLGA 2-Phase model uses the liquid viscosity model defined within the PIPESIM fluid
property definition. The 3-Phase model uses the Pal and Rhodes emulsion correlation to calculate
liquid viscosity based on the oil and water viscosities defined with the PIPESIM fluid model
definition; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored.
OLGAS is based in large part on data from the SINTEF multiphase flow laboratory near
Trondheim, Norway. The test facilities were designed to operate at conditions that approximated
field conditions. The test loop is 800 m long and 8 inches in diameter. Operating pressures
between 20 and 90 barg were studied. Gas superficial velocities of up to 13 m/s, and liquid
superficial velocities of up to 4 m/ s were obtained. In order to simulate the range of viscosities and
surface tensions experienced in field applications, different hydrocarbon liquids were used (naptha,
diesel, and lube oil). Nitrogen was used as the gas. Pipeline inclination angles between 1° were
studied in addition to flow up or down a hill section ahead of a 50m high vertical riser. Over 10,000
experiments were run on this test loop during an eight year period. The facility was run in both
steady state and transient modes.

Technical Description
363
PIPESIM User Guide

Oliemans
The Oliemans (p.586) correlation was developed following the study of large diameter condensate
pipelines. The flow regime is predicted using the Taitel Dukler flow regime map, and a simple
model, which obeyed the correct single phase flow limits was introduced to predict the pressure
drop. The model was based on a limited amount of data from a 30-in, 100-km pipeline operating at
pressures of 100 barg or higher.

TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase)

The TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model is the collective result of many research projects performed
by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP) research consortium. The model determines
flow pattern transitions, pressure gradient, liquid holdup and slug characteristics. A 2-phase
version is available for gas-liquid flow [Zhang et.al, development (p.589) and validation (p.589)]
and a 3-phase version is available for gas-oil-water pipe flow [Zhang and Sarica (p.589)]. The
model is valid for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties.
The principle concept underlying the model is the premise that slug flow shares transition
boundaries with all the other flow patterns. The flow pattern transition from slug flow to stratified
and/or annular flow is predicted by solving the momentum equations for slug flow. The entire film
zone is treated as the control volume and the momentum exchange between the slug body and the
film zone is introduced into the combined momentum equation. This approach differs from
traditional methods of using separate models for each transition. The advantage of a single
hydrodynamic model is that the flow pattern transitions, slug characteristics, liquid holdup and
pressure gradient are implicitly related.
The 3-phase model contains separate momentum balances for the gas, oil and water phases. The
model determines whether the oil and water phases are separated or fully mixed. If the phases are
separated, individual phase viscosities are used. If the phases are fully mixed, the liquid viscosity
can be determined either by the method within the TUFFP model (emul default option) or
overridden (emul override option) by the liquid viscosity method defined with the PIPESIM fluid
model, which is useful when rheology data are available. In the latter case, for black oil fluid
models, selecting the Brinkman emulsion viscosity method with the Brauner-Ullman watercut cutoff
method will replicate the method used within the TUFFP model. For the 2-phase (gas-liquid)
model, the liquid viscosity from PIPESIM is always used, so the emulsion options defined in the
PIPESIM fluid definition always apply.
The closure relationships included in the model are based on focused experimental research
programs at University of Tulsa and elsewhere. As new and improved closure relationships
become available, the TUFFP Unified Model is updated and validated.

Note: The TUFFP Unified 2-Phase Model v 2007.1 is no longer supported in PIPESIM. Upon
import, TUFFPU2P is used instead.

Xiao
The Xiao comprehensive mechanistic model was developed as part of the TUFFP research
program. It was developed for gas-liquid two-phase flow in horizontal and near horizontal pipelines.
The model first predicts the existing flow pattern, and then calculates flow characteristics, primarily
liquid holdup and pressure drop, for the stratified, intermittent, annular, or dispersed bubble flow

Technical Description
364
PIPESIM User Guide

patterns. The model was tested against a pipeline data bank. The data bank included large
diameter field data culled from the AGA multiphase pipeline data bank, and laboratory data
published in literature. Data included both black oil and compositional fluid systems. A new
correlation was proposed which predicts the internal friction factor under stratified flow. The former
has the advantage of making the film friction sensitive to both the gas and liquid velocities making
the model as a whole more interconnected and a better holdup predictor. The Xiao et al. model is
valid for all fluid types and pipe inclinations between -15º C and +15º C relative to horizontal.

Xiao (film modified)

The Xiao mechanistic model was developed as part of the TUFFP research consortia at the
University of Tulsa (p.589). The standard implementation was modified in the stratified flow pattern
to produce a second method called Xiao film modified. Unlike the Baker-Jardine implementation
(which is based on the TUFFP version of the code, yet also contains a film modification), the
Neotec version was coded independently and therefore the numerical methods and film
modification approach are slightly different.
The modification consists of using the Ouyang and Aziz (p.586) two-phase correlation for film wall
friction instead of the more traditional single phase correlation. The former has the advantage of
making the film friction sensitive to both the gas and liquid velocities making the model as a whole
more interconnected and a better holdup predictor. The Xiao et al. model is valid for all fluid types
and pipe inclinations between -15degC and +15degC relative to horizontal.

4.1.3 Vertical multiphase flow correlations

Setup » Flow Correlations
See also: Flow regimes (p.358), Suggested flow correlation (p.371)
The flow correlations available are affected by the Moody friction Factor calculation method option.
By default, PIPESIM uses the Sonnad (p.588) explicit Moody friction factor calculation method.
The following vertical multiphase flow correlations are available:

Ansari
The Ansari mechanistic model was developed as part of the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects
(TUFFP) research program. A comprehensive model was formulated to predict flow patterns and
the flow characteristics of the predicted flow patterns for upward two-phase flow. The
comprehensive mechanistic model is composed of a model for flow pattern prediction and a set of
independent models for predicting holdup and pressure drop in bubble, slug, and annular flows.
The model was evaluated by using the TUFFP well databank that is composed of 1775 well cases,
with 371 of them from Prudhoe Bay data.

Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi

The Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi model was developed especially for wellbore pressure drop
calculations for upward flow in production wells. The flow regime (for example, annular-mist, slug,
etc.) is determined using the correlation of Govier and Aziz (1972). The flow pattern is predicted
first, and then a corresponding correlation is used to calculate liquid holdup and frictional pressure
loss. The Duns and Ros method is used for holdup and pressure calculations in the annular mist
flow regime as recommended in the published work.

Technical Description
365
PIPESIM User Guide

The correlation of Aziz, Govier, and Forgasi is used for pressure loss, holdup, and flow regime.
The Govier, Aziz, and Fogarasi correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop in
wells producing gas and condensate. Actual field pressure drop versus flowrate data from 102
wells with gas-liquid ratios ranging from 3,900 to 1,170,000 scf/bbl were analyzed in detail. The
phase conditions in the well bore were determined by standard flash calculations. Pressure-
gradient data for flow under single-phase conditions were compared with conventional predictions,
and found generally to confirm them. For the test in which two-phase conditions were predicted
throughout the well bore, the field data were compared with several wholly empirical prediction
methods, with a previously proposed method, and with a new prediction method partly based on
the mechanics of flow. The new prediction method incorporates an empirical estimate of the
distribution of the liquid phase between that flowing as a film on the wall and that entrained in the
gas core. It employs separate momentum equations for the gas-liquid mixture in the core and for
the total contents of the pipe.

Note: This method tends to overpredict the minimum stable flow rate (minimum rate to lift liquids)
and thus can overpredict pressure losses, especially for gas-water wells. Consider the Gregory
method instead.

Beggs and Brill original

ORIGINAL: The Original Beggs and Brill (p.578) correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup.
Flow regime is determined by either the Beggs and Brill or Taitel Dukler correlation. The Beggs
and Brill correlation was developed following a study of two-phase flow in horizontal and inclined
pipes. The correlation is based upon a flow regime map which is first determined as if the flow was
horizontal. A horizontal holdup is then calculated by correlations, and this holdup is corrected for
the angle of inclination. The test system included two 90 ft long acrylic pipes, winched to a variable
elevation in the middle, so as to model incline flow both upwards and downwards at angles of up to
90°.

Beggs and Brill revised

REVISED: As above except that the revised version of the Beggs and Brill correlation is used, with
rough pipe friction factors, holdup limiters and corrective constants as proposed by Palmer (p.586)
and Payne (p.586). The following enhancements to the original method are used; (1) an extra flow
regime of froth flow is considered which assumes a no-slip holdup, (2) the friction factor is changed
from the standard smooth pipe model, to utilize a single phase friction factor based on the average
fluid velocity.

Duns and Ros

The Duns and Ros correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup with flow regime determination
by either the Duns and Ros (p.581) or the Taitel (p.589) Dukler (p.581) correlations. The Duns
and Ros correlation was developed for vertical flow of gas and liquid mixtures in wells. Equations
were developed for each of three flow regions, (I) bubble, plug and part of froth flow regimes, (II)
remainder of froth flow and slug flow regimes, (III) mist flow regime. These regions have low,
intermediate and high gas throughputs respectively. Each flow region has a different holdup
correlation. The equations were based on extensive experimental work using oil and air mixtures.

Technical Description
366
PIPESIM User Guide

Gomez
The Gomez mechanistic flow model was developed at The University of Tulsa (p.582), and the
code written by Neotec based on the published work.
The Gomez et al. model is valid for all fluid types and inclinations between 0 and 90degrees.
(Recommended for 30-90 degrees).

Note: The Gomez model generally causes very slow runtimes.

Gomez enhanced
The standard Gomez et al. implementation was modified by Neotec to produce the Gomez et al.
enhanced method.
The modification consists of using the Oliemans (p.586) liquid entrainment correlation for vertical
annular mist flow instead of the standard Wallis correlation. Even though the Oliemans correlation
was developed using low pressure, mainly water-air, small diameter data, it does a good job of
smoothing the response surface around the slug to annular mist transition region where the Gomez
et al. correlation shows unusual behavior. This improves the statistical performance of this method
in simulations of gas-lift wells as shown by Adames (p.577). The result is an improved method that
works well for all types of wells.

Note: The Gomez model generally causes very slow runtimes.

Govier and Aziz

The correlation of Aziz, Govier, and Forgasi (p.578) is used for pressure loss, holdup, and flow
regime. The Govier, Aziz, and Fogarasi correlation was developed following a study of pressure
drop in wells producing gas and condensate. Actual field pressure drop versus flowrate data from
102 wells with gas-liquid ratios ranging from 3,900 to 1,170,000 scf/bbl were analyzed in detail.
The phase conditions in the well bore were determined by standard flash calculations. Pressure-
gradient data for flow under single-phase conditions were compared with conventional predictions,
and found generally to confirm them. For the test in which two-phase conditions were predicted
throughout the well bore, the field data were compared with several wholly empirical prediction
methods, with a previously proposed method, and with a new prediction method partly based on
the mechanics of flow. The new prediction method incorporates an empirical estimate of the
distribution of the liquid phase between that flowing as a film on the wall and that entrained in the
gas core. It employs separate momentum equations for the gas-liquid mixture in the core and for
the total contents of the pipe.

Gray
The Gray Vertical Flow correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup. This correlation was
developed by H E Gray of Shell Oil Company for vertical flow in gas and condensate systems
which are predominantly gas phase. Flow is treated as single phase, and dropped out water or
condensate is assumed to adhere to the pipe wall. It is considered applicable for vertical flow
cases where the velocity is below 50 ft/s, the tube size is below 3.5 in, the condensate ratio is
below 50 bbl/mmscf, and the water ratio is below 5 bbl/mmscf.

Technical Description
367
PIPESIM User Guide

Gray modified
As above, but with the following modifications: (1) Actual Reynolds number used (Gray Original
assumed Reynolds number to always be 1 million), and (2) Pseudo-roughness is constrained to be
less than the pipe radius.

Gregory
The Gregory et al model (1989) is a modification of the Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi (1972) method
(described in Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi (p.577)). The Gregory et al model uses the Govier and
Aziz flow pattern map (1972) except for the transition from annular-mist flow to froth flow. The
transition between annular-mist (stable flow) and froth flow (unstable flow) is computed using the
technique proposed by Turner et al (1969). Turner et al postulated that the minimum gas velocity
required to lift liquids would correspond to the terminal velocity of the largest stable liquid droplet
that would form. The Gregory model uses the procedure recommended by Coleman which does
not include the 20% increase in velocity added by Turner. If the gas velocity (superficial gas
velocity divided by the gas volume fraction in the input stream) is larger than the velocity expressed
in the equation below, the flow pattern will be annular-mist, otherwise froth flow will be assumed.

where

gas-liquid surface tension (dynes/cm)

droplet drag coefficient

liquid density (lbm/ft3)

gas density (lbm/ft3)

velocity at the boundary between froth and annular-mist (ft/s)

liquid input volume fraction

The rest of the calculations are the same as for the Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi method (described
in Aziz, Govier, and Fogarasi), with the exception that the parameter

(required for froth flow calcuations) is computed as shown in the following equation:

Technical Description
368
PIPESIM User Guide

A default value of 0.44 (which corresponds to a spherical droplet shape) is provided for the droplet
drag coefficient. Additionally, the Gray modified method for pressure drop is used instead of the
Duns and Ros method in the annular-mist regime.

Hagedorn and Brown

The correlation of Hagedorn and Brown (p.582) is used for pressure loss and holdup. While the
Hagedorn and Brown correlation does not predict flow pattern, the flow pattern as predicted by
Orkiszewski is reported. The Duns and Ros flow pattern prediction can also be reported. Neither of
these flow pattern prediction methods affects any of the calculations. The Hagedorn and Brown
correlation was developed following an experimental study of pressure gradients occurring during
continuous two-phase flow in small diameter vertical conduits. A 1,500 ft experimental well was
used to study flow through 1 in., 1.25 in., and 1.5 in. nominal size tubing. Air was the gas phase
and four different liquids were used: water and crude oils with viscosities of about 10, 30 and 110
cp. Liquid holdup was not directly measured, rather a pseudo liquid-holdup value was determined
that matched measured pressure gradients.
Further work by Brill and Hagedorn have led to two modifications: (1) If the Griffith and Wallis
criteria predicted the occurrence of bubble flow, the Griffith bubble-flow method should be used to
predict pressure gradient, and (2) If the predicted liquid holdup is less than the no-slip liquid
holdup, then the no-slip liquid holdup is used.
All of the correlations involve only dimensionless groups, which is a condition usually sought for in
similarity analysis but not always achieved.

Mukherjee and Brill

The Mukerjee and Brill (p.585) correlation is used for Pressure loss, Holdup and flow map. Note:
selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups will cause unpredictable results. The Mukherjee
and Brill correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop behavior in two-phase
inclined flow. For bubble and slug flow, a no-slip friction factor calculated from the Moody diagram
was found adequate for friction head loss calculations. In downhill stratified flow, the friction
pressure gradient is calculated based on a momentum balance equation for either phase assuming
a smooth gas-liquid interface. For annular-mist flow, a friction factor correlation was presented that
is a function of holdup ratio and no-slip Moody friction factor. Results agreed well with the
experimental data and correlations were further verified with Prudhoe Bay and North Sea data.

NOSLIP correlation
The NOSLIP correlation assumes homogeneous flow with no slip between the phases. Fluid
properties are taken as the average of the gas and liquid phases and friction factors are calculated
using the single phase MOODY correlation. Note: selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups
will cause unpredictable results.

OLGAS 2-phase/OLGAS 3-phase

The OLGAS mechanistic models are applicable for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid
properties. The 2-phase Bendiksen (p.579) model considers gas-liquid flow, whereas the 3-phase
model considers gas-oil-water flow.

Technical Description
369
PIPESIM User Guide

This model employs separate continuity equations for gas, liquid bulk and liquid droplets, which are
coupled through interphase mass transfer. Two momentum equations are solved: one applied to
the combined balance for the gas and liquid droplets, if present, and a separate momentum
equation for the liquid film. OLGAS considers four flow regimes: stratified, annular, slug and
dispersed bubble flow; and uses a unique minimum slip criteria to predict flow regime transitions.
The OLGA 2-Phase model uses the liquid viscosity model defined within the PIPESIM fluid
property definition. The 3-Phase model uses the Pal and Rhodes emulsion correlation to calculate
liquid viscosity based on the oil and water viscosities defined with the PIPESIM fluid model
definition; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored.
OLGAS is based in large part on data from the SINTEF multiphase flow laboratory near
Trondheim, Norway. The test facilities were designed to operate at conditions that approximated
field conditions. The test loop is 800 m long and 8 inches in diameter. Operating pressures
between 20 and 90 barg were studied. Gas superficial velocities of up to 13 m/s, and liquid
superficial velocities of up to 4 m/ s were obtained. In order to simulate the range of viscosities and
surface tensions experienced in field applications, different hydrocarbon liquids were used (naptha,
diesel, and lube oil). Nitrogen was used as the gas. Pipeline inclination angles between 1° were
studied in addition to flow up or down a hill section ahead of a 50m high vertical riser. Over 10,000
experiments were run on this test loop during an eight year period. The facility was run in both
steady state and transient modes.

LEDA 2-phase/3-phase
The (Leda Point Model (PM)) is a mechanistic model applicable for all inclination angles, pipe
diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model considers gas-liquid flow whereas the 3-phase
model considers gas-oil-water flow.
The 3-phase Leda PM considers 9 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (oil, gas, water, oil in
gas and water, gas in oil and water, water in oil and gas). Separate momentum equations are
solved for oil, gas and water.
The 2-phase Leda PM considers 4 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (liquid, gas, liquid in
gas and gas in liquid. Separate momentum equations are solved for gas and liquid phases. The
flow regimes predicted by LedaPM are stratified smooth flow, stratified wavy flow, slug flow,
annular and bubbly flow. The Leda 2-phase model uses the liquid viscosity associated with the
fluid model defined in PIPESIM. The Leda 3-phase model assumes that the liquid viscosity is equal
to that of the continuous phase; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are
ignored. The continuous phase is determined by the Brauner-Ullman (p.579) inversion criteria.
The Leda Point Model is the steady-state version of the transient model developed by SINTEF in
collaboration with Total and ConocoPhillips and commercialized by Kongsberg. The model has
been calibrated against data collected at the SINTEF Multiphase Flow Laboratory near Trondheim
Norway. Over 10,000 experimental data points have been collected for single-phase, two-phase
(oil-water, water-gas) and three-phase (oil-water-gas) flow. Pipe diameters ranging from 4-12”
were used at pressures up to 90 barg. The models have been validated with field data supplied by
ConocoPhillips and Total.

Orkiszewski
The Orkiszewski (p.586) correlation is used for pressure loss, holdup, and flow regime. The
Orkiszewski correlation was developed for the prediction of two phase pressure drops in vertical

Technical Description
370
PIPESIM User Guide

pipe. Four flow regimes were considered, bubble, slug, annular-slug transition, and annular mist.
The method can accurately predict, to within 10%, the two phase pressure drops in naturally
flowing and gas lifted production wells over a wide range of well conditions. The precision of the
method was verified when its predicted values were compared against 148 measured pressure
drops. Unlike most other methods, liquid holdup is derived from observed physical phenomena,
and is adjusted for angle of deviation.

TUFFP unified mechanistic model (2-phase and 3-phase)

The TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model is the collective result of many research projects performed
by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP) research consortium. The model determines
flow pattern transitions, pressure gradient, liquid holdup and slug characteristics. A 2-phase
version is available for gas-liquid flow Zhang et.al, development (p.589) and validation (p.589)]
and a 3-phase version is available for gas-oil-water pipe flow [Zhang and Sarica (p.589)]. The
model is valid for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties.
The principle concept underlying the model is the premise that slug flow shares transition
boundaries with all the other flow patterns. The flow pattern transition from slug flow to stratified
and/or annular flow is predicted by solving the momentum equations for slug flow. The entire film
zone is treated as the control volume and the momentum exchange between the slug body and the
film zone is introduced into the combined momentum equation. This approach differs from
traditional methods of using separate models for each transition. The advantage of a single
hydrodynamic model is that the flow pattern transitions, slug characteristics, liquid holdup and
pressure gradient are implicitly related.
The 3-phase model contains separate momentum balances for the gas, oil and water phases. The
model determines whether the oil and water phases are separated or fully mixed. If the phases are
separated, individual phase viscosities are used. If the phases are fully mixed, the liquid viscosity
can be determined either by the method within the TUFFP model (emul default option) or
overridden (emul override option) by the liquid viscosity method defined with the PIPESIM fluid
model, which is useful when rheology data are available. In the latter case, for black oil fluid
models, selecting the Brinkman emulsion viscosity method with the Brauner-Ullman watercut cutoff
method will replicate the method used within the TUFFP model. For the 2-phase (gas-liquid)
model, the liquid viscosity from PIPESIM is always used, so the emulsion options defined in the
PIPESIM fluid definition always apply.
The closure relationships included in the model are based on focused experimental research
programs at University of Tulsa and elsewhere. As new and improved closure relationships
become available, the TUFFP Unified Model is updated and validated.

Note: The TUFFP Unified 2-Phase Model v 2007.1 (available in PIPESIM 2012 and previous) is no
longer supported in PIPESIM. Upon import, TUFFP version 2011.1 is used instead.

4.1.4 Suggested correlations

Use the Flow correlations tab to set flow correlation options at the global level or at local levels. If
you set flow correlation options at the local level, the source, correlation, friction factor, and holdup
factor appear as individual columns for both vertical and horizontal components.

Technical Description
371
PIPESIM User Guide

If no production data are available, Schlumberger have found the following to give satisfactory
results based on previous studies using field data:
Single phase system
Moody (p.374)
Vertical oil well
OLGA-S (p.369), Hagedorn and Brown (p.369), Gregory, TUFFP
Highly deviated oil well
OLGA-S (p.369), Hagedorn and Brown (p.369), Duns and Ros (p.366), TUFFP
Gas/condensate well
OLGA-S (p.369), Hagedorn and Brown (p.369), Gregory, TUFFP
Oil pipelines
OLGA-S (p.369), Oliemans (p.364), TUFFP
Gas/condensate pipelines
OLGA-S (p.369), Baker Jardine (p.360), TUFFP

Correlation Vertical and Highly Vertical Gas/ Oil Gas/

Predominantly Deviated Condensate Pipelines CondensatePipelines
Vertical Oil Oil Wells Wells (p.365) (p.360) (p.360)
Wells (p.365) (p.365)
Duns and Ros yes yes yes no no
Orkiszewski yes no yes no no
Hagedorn and yes yes yes no no
Brown
Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes
Revised
Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes
Original
Mukherjee and yes yes yes yes yes
Brill
Govier, Aziz yes yes no no no
and Forgasi
NoSlip yes yes yes yes yes
OLGAS yes yes yes yes yes
Ansari yes no yes no no
BJA for no no yes no yes
Condensates
AGA and no no no no yes
Flanigan
Oliemans no no no yes yes

Technical Description
372
PIPESIM User Guide

Gray no no yes no no
Gray Modified no no yes no no
Xiao no no no yes yes
LEDA yes yes yes yes yes
TUFFP yes yes yes yes yes
Gregory yes no yes no no

4.1.5 Friction and holdup factors

These two factors can be used to adjust the friction and holdup prediction of a particular flow
correlation. By default these factors are 1.
A linear relationship is used for the friction pressure drop. Setting the friction factor to 0.5, for
example, will mean that the friction element of pressure drop computed by the correlation will be
halved.

A non-linear relationship is used to calculate the liquid holdup H L from the value predicted by the
correlation H Lc :

H L = f H ⋅ H Lc + (1 − f H ) ⋅ H Lc
2
Eq. 4.1

This ensures that the liquid holdup is sensible 0 ≤ H L ≤ 1 when 0 ≤ f H ≤ 2.

These factors are often used as calibration factors when a good match to field data cannot be
obtained by any other method. Changing these factors will affect the results and should be
undertaken with care.

4.1.6 Single phase flow correlations

See also: SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.643)
The steady-state pressure gradient in single phase sections is given by the equation:

dp
dL
=
dp
dL ( ) elev .
+ ( dLdp ) fric .
+ ( dLdp )
acc .
Eq. 4.2

where elevation, friction and acceleration components of the pressure drop are:

( dLdp ) elev .
= − ρg sin θ Eq. 4.3

( dLdp ) fric .
= −
fρv
2D
Eq. 4.4

( dLdp ) acc .
= − ρv
dv
dL
Eq. 4.5

where

Technical Description
373
PIPESIM User Guide

f is the friction factor dimensionless

ρ is the fluid density lb / ft
3

v is the fluid velocity ft / s

g is the gravitational acceleration ft / s
2

θ is the angle of the pipe to the horizontal degrees

D is the pipe diameter ft
L is the length of the pipe ft

There are a number of different ways of calculating the friction factor, which usually depends on
the Reynolds number:
ρvD
Re = Eq. 4.6
μ
where:

μ is the fluid viscosity lb / ft ⋅ s

Moody (default for liquid or gas)

See Sonnad and Goudar paper (p.588) and Moody paper (p.585) for more technical details.

For laminar flow (Re < 2000) 64

f Lam =
Re
For turbulent flow (Re > 4000) 1
f Turb
1/2 = a ln ( qc + δ )
For transition flow (2000 ≤ Re ≤ 4000) (Re − Remin )( f Turb − f Lam )
f = + f Lam
(Remax − Remin )
where:

f Turb is the Moody friction factor

Re is the Reynolds Number
a 2
is
ln (10)
ϵ is the pipe roughness
D is the pipe diameter
b ϵ /D
is
3.7

Technical Description
374
PIPESIM User Guide

c
is ( ln5.02
(10)
)Re
s is bc + ln (c)
q
is s s /(s +1)
z
is ln ( gq )
g
( qc )
is bc + ln

is (
g +1)
δ g
z

The friction factor is interpolated in the transition region (2000 < Re < 4000). The limits for the
transition zone and the interpolation method can be reset by the user.
The various friction factor calculation methods available are:

Friction Factor Approximation used Equation

Calculation method
EXPLICIT or SONNAD Sonnad 2007 linear
approximation (default)
f Turb
1
1/2 = a ln ( qc + δ )

( )
APPROXIMATE or Moody 1947 6 1/3
MOODY approximation ϵ 10
f Turb = 0.0055 1 + 20000 +
D Re
IMPLICIT or ITERATIVE Colebrook-White
equation (Moody chart)
f Turb
1
1/2 = 1.74 − 2log10
( 2ϵ
D
+
18.7
Re f Turb
1/2
)
AGA (for gas)
The AGA friction factor is the same as the Moody friction factor at high and low Reynolds numbers,
but differs in between:

For laminar flow (Re < 1000) 64

f =
Re
For transition flow

(1000 < Re < 4

c2 3.7D
c1 ϵ
( ) /
1 c1
log10 ( 3.7 D
ϵ )) f
1
1/2 = 2c1log
10 ( Re c1
2 c
2
f
1/2
)

Technical Description
375
PIPESIM User Guide

For turbulent flow

c2 3.7D
1
1/2 = 2log10 ( 3.7ϵ D ) = 1.74 − 2log ( 2Dϵ )
10
(Re > 4
c ϵ ( )
1 c1
/ log10( 3.7D
ϵ )) f
1

where:

c1 = 0.98 is the drag factor

c2 = 10
0.15 is a constant

Cullender and Smith (for gas)

The total pressure drop can be calculated from

dp pdown − pup
=
dL L
where:
2 2
2
pdown − a
pup =
b
where:
2 2 2
2
25 f qvG T̄ ZG (b − 1)
a = 5
0.0375(12 D )

b = exp ( 0.0375 γG L
T̄ ZG
)
f is the Moody friction factor dimensionless
L is the pipe length ft
pdown is the downstream pressure psi

pup is the upstream pressure psi

qvG is the stock tank gas volume flow rate scf / day

T̄ is the average temperature °R

ZG is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

γG is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

Technical Description
376
PIPESIM User Guide

Other friction pressure drops for gas

The friction pressure drop can be calculated from

( dLdp ) fric .
=
pdown − pup
L
where:

( )( )
2 a4 1/a3
2 2
T̄ ZG L ps 1 qvG γG
pup − pdown = ⋅ ⋅
5280 Ts a1 η (12 D )a5

where:

L is the pipe length ft

pdown is the downstream pressure psi

pup is the upstream pressure psi

ps is the stock tank pressure psi

qvG is the stock tank gas volume flow rate scf / day

T̄ is the average temperature °R

Ts is the stock tank temperature °R

ZG is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

γG is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

η is a flow efficiency factor dimensionless

and the constants are given by

a1 a3 a4 a5
Panhandle A 435.87 0.5394 0.4604 2.618
Panhandle B 737.00 0.5100 0.4900 2.530
Weymouth 433.50 0.5000 0.5000 2.667

Hazen-Williams (for liquid water)

The friction pressure drop can be calculated from:

( )
1.85

( )
dp
dL fric .
=
0.015 ρm
144(12 D )
4.87 ⋅
qvL
c
Eq. 4.7

Technical Description
377
PIPESIM User Guide

where:

c is the pipe condition factor

qvL is the liquid volume flow rate bbl / day

ρm is the mixture density lb / ft

3

4.1.7 Swap angle

The multiphase flow correlations used to predict the pressure loss and holdup are split into two
categories: vertical and horizontal. Each category lists the correlations that are appropriate for that
type of flow.
By default the selected vertical correlation is used in the situation where the tubing/pipe is at an
angle greater than 45 degrees from the 0 degree axis. For angles that are less than or equal to 45
degrees, the selected horizontal correlation is used. This angle can be changed.

4.1.8 deWaard (1995) corrosion model

The de Waard model (p.580) predicts the corrosion rate of carbon steel in the presence of water
and CO2. The model was developed primarily for use in predicting corrosion rates in pipelines
where CO2 is present in a vapor phase. The model has not been validated at high pressures where
CO2 is entirely in the liquid phase. Corrosion rate is calculated as a function of:
• Temperature
• Pressure

Technical Description
378
PIPESIM User Guide

• Mol% CO2
• Wt% Glycol (Multiflash and ScaleChem only)
• Liquid velocity
• Pipe Diameter
• pH
The model accounts for the flow-independent kinetics of the corrosion reaction as well as the flow-
dependent mass transfer of dissolved CO2 using a resistance model. Additionally, effects of
protective scale at high temperatures are considered in addition to glycol inhibition.

Note: The equations that follow are based on the de Waard 1995 model (p.580). This model is a
revision to the de Waard 1991 model (p.580). Some of the equations below appear only in the
original paper].

General Equation

CcFsFg
Vcor =
1 1 Eq. 4.8
+
Vr Vm

CO2 Partial Pressure/Fugacity

(mole % CO2 * Ptotal )

pCO2 = Eq. 4.9
100

1.4
log ( f CO 2) = log ( pCO2) + (.0031 − )P
t + 273

Reaction Rate term (Vr)

1119
log (Vr ) = 4.93 − + 0.58log ( fCO2) − .34( pH act − pH CO 2) Eq. 4.10
T

pH
By default, the correlation assumes that the actual pH of the water is affected strictly by the
presence of CO2. However, the user may specify the actual pH of a water sample that accounts for
the additional presence of electrolytes and dissolved FeCO3 liberated from the pipe wall. Since pH
is dependent on pressure and temperature, care must be taken when specifying this value. If a
ScaleChem generated PVT file is used, the actual pH is taken from the ScaleChem fluid
description.

pH CO 2 = 3.82 + .00384t − 0.5log ( fCO2) Eq. 4.11

pHact = assumed to equal pHco 2 unless user specified or ScaleChem PVT file is used

Technical Description
379
PIPESIM User Guide

Mass Transfer rate term (Vm)

0.8
UL
Vm = 2.45 0.2 fCO2 Eq. 4.12
d

Effect of Temperature (protective scale)

2400
Ts = Eq. 4.13
6.7 + 0.44log ( fCO2)

(if T > Ts)

1 1
log (Fs ) = 2400 − Eq. 4.14
T Ts
Else,
Fs = 1 Eq. 4.15

Glycol Reduction Effect

log F g = 1.6 log (W % ) − 2 Eq. 4.16

Where W% is the weight percent of water in a water-glycol mixture (100% water results in a factor
of 1.0). The Glycol component is only available when using Multiflash (MEG or DEG) or with
ScaleChem (MEG).

Variable Units Description Default Acceptable Variable

Input Range Source
Vcor (mm/yr) corrosion rate calc
T temperature pipesim

t temperature pipesim

pCO2 atm partial pressure of CO2 calc

fCO2 atm, fugacity of CO2 calc
mol%CO2 — mol % CO2 (comp, BO, pipesim
ScaleChem PVT file)
Ptotal atm pressure pipesim
pHact — actual pH of the system pHco2 1.0–10.0 user spec
pHCO2 — pH of dissolved CO2 in pure water calc
UL m/s liquid velocity pipesim
d m/s pipe diameter pipesim

Technical Description
380
PIPESIM User Guide

Variable Units Description Default Acceptable Variable

Input Range Source
W% fraction Weight percent water in a water- 100 pipesim
glycol mixture
Ts Vcor inversion temperature calc

Fs — scaling factor calc

Cc — multiplier to correct for inhibitor 1 0.1–10.0 user spec
efficiency or match to field data

4.1.9 Cunliffe's method for ramp up surge

When the flow rate into a pipeline increases, the overall liquid holdup typically decreases because
the gas can more efficiently sweep out the liquid phase. When a rate increase (ramp-up) occurs,
the liquid volume in the pipeline is accelerated resulting in a surge. A ramp-up operation is
illustrated in the figure below.

PIPESIM predicts the liquid surge rate using Cunliffe's Method. Cunliffe's Method predicts the
liquid surge rate due to an overall gas rate change for condensate pipelines. This method is
particularly useful for estimating liquid handling capacity for ramp-up (increasing gas rate) cases.
As the gas rate increases, the total liquid holdup in the line will drop owing to less slippage
between the gas and liquid phases. The liquid residing in the line is therefore accelerated to the
equilibrium velocity at the final gas rate and thus expelled at a rate higher than the final equilibrium
liquid rate for the duration of the transition period. The transition period is assumed to be equal to
the residence time at the final gas rate, that is, the time it takes the liquid to travel from one end of
the line to the other.
The average liquid rate during the transition period can be determined as follows:

where:

Technical Description
381
PIPESIM User Guide

liquid rate during the transition period

final gas rate

total liquid holdup volume in line - initial gas rate

total liquid holdup volume in line - final gas rate

LGR out liquid/gas ratio at outlet pressure (assumed constant)

tr liquid residence time (at final flowrate)

Note: The total liquid holdup volume in the line is provided in the summary output report. Cunliffe
(p.580) tested this method with field measurements for a 67 mi. 20 in. pipeline with an average
operating pressure of 1300 psig and an LGR of 65 bbl/MMscf. He found that the change in
condensate flow rate can be predicted to within 15% using this method.

4.1.10 Liquid by sphere (Sphere Generated Liquid Volume, SGLV)

During a pigging operation, a solid object of diameter slightly less than that of the pipeline is sent
through the line to push out liquids and debris. As a pipeline is pigged (refer to the figure below), a
volume of liquid builds up ahead of the pig and is expelled into the slug catcher as the pig
approaches the exit.

PIPESIM considers that the pig travels at the mean fluid velocity. It uses the liquid holdup in the
pipeline to calculate the volume of liquid that will be swept along in front of the pig as it moves. This
calculation is reported as the sphere generated liquid volume (SGLV). Two approaches are
available in PIPESIM for calculating SGLV:
1. SGLV Modified: This method was introduced in PIPESIM 2015 and is the new PIPESIM default.
The SGLV Modified method is consistent with the method used in PIPEFLO and is the method
recommended by Shell.
2. SGLV Original: This is the only method available in PIPESIM versions older than PIPESIM
2015.1 and PIPESIM 2012.3.
Calculations using the SGLV Modified method will result in SGLV values slightly less than those
predicted using the SGLV Original method. The two approaches PIPESIM uses for evaluating
SGLV are steady-state approximations of pigging, which is a transient operation.

Technical Description
382
PIPESIM User Guide

SGLV Modified (Default)

This method compares the steady-state liquid production when a pig is transiting a pipeline, with
the liquid holdup volume or liquid inventory in the pipeline. If the steady state liquid production is
less than the liquid holdup, liquid will accumulate in front of the pig. This difference between the
liquid holdup in the pipe and the steady state liquid production while the pig is transiting the pipe, is
the surge volume associated with the pig or the sphere generated liquid volume. It is evaluated
with the equation below.

The modified SGLV method is the default in PIPESIM. However, the original SGLV method can be
accessed using the SGLV ORIGINAL (p.635) keyword. The sphere transit time and sphere
dumping time can now also be requested as output variables.

SGLV Original
The liquid holdup throughout the pipe is divided into two notional fractions, the 'moving' and the
'static'. Since the liquid normally flows slower than the gas, the division will normally result in a
positive value for both of these volumes. (If the pipe goes downhill the liquid often flows faster, so
the 'static' will be negative in these sections, but this does not affect the equation.) If the fluid's
phase split is assumed to be constant throughout the pipe, the size of the slug that issues when
sphered can be calculated using the following formula:

SGLV = ( TPVSLV
− MLV )
× MLV + SLV Eq. 4.17

where:
SGLV is Sphere Generated Liquid Volume
SLV is Static Liquid Volume in pipe
MLV is Moving Liquid Volume in pipe
TPV is Total Pipeline Volume

Note: SLV + MLV = Total pipeline holdup, which PIPESIM calculates and writes to the summary
output.

The slug of liquid starts to be produced from the pipe outlet when the pipe is full of liquid from its
exit, back along to the position of the sphere. The liquid in the slug comprises 2 notional fractions:
firstly, the entire SLV in the pipe, and secondly, the portion of the MLV that lies between the sphere

Technical Description
383
PIPESIM User Guide

and the outlet. Now, the maximum volume available for the SLV to occupy in the pipe is TPV -
MLV. Dividing the actual SLV by this maximum value gives us the position of the sphere in the pipe
as a value between 0 and 1, where 0 is the outlet. Multiplying the total MLV by the sphere position
gives us the portion of the total MLV that is entrained in the slug, so adding this to the SLV gives
the total slug volume or the total sphere generated liquid volume (SGLV).
The liquid holdup is calculated from the integration of the predicted holdup from the selected
Multiphase Flow Correlation (MFC) along the entire pipeline length. The pipeline is simulated in
segments, each of which has a length and cross sectional area, which multiplied together yields
the segment volume. The MFC calculates a value for holdup in the range 0 to 1 for each segment,
which when multiplied by the segment volume gives the holdup for each segment. The holdups for
all the pipe segments are added together to determine the total holdup for the pipeline as reported
in the summary file.
When a sphere is introduced into the pipeline, PIPESIM assumes it travels at the mean fluid
velocity; as a result of this, a liquid slug will gather in front of the sphere made up of "all the liquid
that is flowing slower than the mean fluid velocity in the pipeline at any given point". Thus the
crucial value that determines Sphere Generated Liquid Volume (SGLV) is the Slip Ratio (SR)
between the fluid phases, which is the average velocity of the fluid divided by the velocity of the
liquid. If the liquid and gas move at the same speed, the slip ratio will be 1, that is there is 'no slip'
between the phases. In this scenario, no liquid will accumulate in front of the sphere, so the SGLV
will be zero. Normally the liquid flows slower than the gas, i.e. the slip ratio is greater than 1, so
"some" of the liquid in the pipeline accumulates in front of the sphere to form the SGLV. The only
way that "all" of the liquid in the pipeline accumulates to form the SGLV, is if the liquid velocity is
zero, i.e. the slip ratio is infinite. This cannot happen in a steady-state reality, so the SGLV is
always smaller than the total liquid holdup.
One complicating factor is that there will be a significant time lag between the time the slug of liquid
swept up by the sphere begins to emerge from the pipe outlet and the time the sphere itself
emerges. The slug will thus be composed of the liquid that accumulated in front of the sphere as it
traveled along the pipeline, plus the normal liquid production of the system. This total volume is the
value required to size the slug catcher, which is why we report it as "Volume by sphere".
To determine the sizes of terrain slugs or slugs from start-up, it is necessary to use a dynamic
multiphase flow simulator such as OLGA.
Related links:
SLUG Slug Calculation Options (Optional) (p.635)

4.1.11 Liquid loading

Critical unloading velocity
The critical unloading velocity is defined as the minimum gas velocity required to lift liquid droplets
out of a gas well. Lower flowing gas velocities will result in liquid loading in the well. The critical
unloading velocity is predicted by Turner’s Equation.
0.25
N σ ( ρ L − ρG )
vt = Eq. 4.18
(CD ρG )
25 0.5

Technical Description
384
PIPESIM User Guide

where

is the gas phase density lb / ft

3
ρg

ρ L is the liquid phase density lb / ft

3

σ is the interfacial tension dynes / cm

vt is the terminal velocity of liquid droplet ft / s

θ is pipe angle from vertical °

CD is the drag coefficient dimensionless

N is a constant dimensionless

The values of N and CD are given in the following table for Turner's model and various others:

Model N CD
Turner (1969) 1.56 0.44
Coleman (1991) 1.3 0.44
Nossier II (2000) 1.482 0.2
Li (2002) 0.724 1.0

Combining N and CD , and discounting Turner's "built-in" 20% "correction factor" gives a constant
of 1.593. The correction factor is split out into the E term below.

Turner's equation (general)

Turner's Equation (General Form):
0.25
(
1.593 E σ ρ L − ρG )
vt = Eq. 4.19
0.5
ρG
Where E is the correction (efficiency) factor. The values of E for Turner's model and various others
are given in the following table:

Model E
Turner (1969) 1.2
Coleman (1991) 1.0
Nossier II (2000) 1.391
Li (2002) 0.454

Technical Description
385
PIPESIM User Guide

Critical gas rate

The critical gas rate is the minimum gas rate required to prevent liquid loading.

4.2 Completion (IPR) Models

4.2.1 Inflow performance relationships for vertical completions
Inflow performance relationships (IPRs) have been developed to model the flow of fluids from the
reservoir, through the formation, and into the well. They are expressed in terms of the well static
(or reservoir) pressure Pws , the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure Pwf , and flowrate Q .
Typically, volume flow rates are proportional to the pressure drawdown:

QV ∝ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.20

For liquid IPRs the stock tank liquid rate is roughly proportional to the volume flow rate at well
conditions, and this form of the equation is used:

QL ∝ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.21

For gas IPRs the stock tank flow rates are roughly proportional to the volume flow rate at reservoir
conditions times the average reservoir pressure:

(Pws + Pwf )
QG ∝ Qv ⋅
2
( 2
∝ Pws − Pwf
2
) Eq. 4.22

See also Vertical Completion OptionsWhen the selected IPR model is Darcy and one of the Skin
options is set to calculate, the following vertical completion options are available:, Multilayer
Completions
PIPESIM offers a comprehensive list of IPR options, for both oil and gas reservoirs, as follows:

IPR Oil reservoirs Gas and Gas Multi-rate testIn addition to the
Condensate standard IPR equations, test
Reservoirs data can be utilized so that the
inflow can be matched to actual
measured data. A minimum of
three data points is required.
Two types of multi-rate test are
available:
Backpressure Equation Yes Yes
(p.391)
Fetkovich (p.389) Yes Yes
Hydraulically fractured Yes Yes
(p.63)
IPR Table (p.403) Yes

Technical Description
386
PIPESIM User Guide

Jones / Forchheimer Yes Yes Yes

(p.390)
Pseudo Steady State Yes Yes
Equation / Darcy (p.392)
Transient (p.397) Yes Yes
Vogel (p.388) Yes
Well PI (Productivity Index) Yes Yes Yes
(p.387)

The Well PI (p.387), Pseudo Steady State (p.392) and Transient (p.397) liquid IPRs can be
combined with a Vogel (p.388) IPR to model flow at pressures below the bubble point; see bubble
point correction (p.403) .

Productivity index (PI)

PI is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow performance relationship
(p.386) (IPR) for a completion. It can be regarded as a simplified version of the Pseudo-steady
state (p.392) or Transient (p.397) IPRs.

Liquid PI
The (straight line) productivity index relationship for liquid reservoirs is perhaps the simplest and
most widely used IPR equation. It states that rate is directly proportional to pressure drawdown
between the bottom hole and the reservoir.

QL = J L ⋅ ( pws − pwf ) Eq. 4.23

where:

QL is the stock-tank oil rate

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

J L is the liquid productivity index.

Below bubble point correction

The liquid PI equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.388) to model inflows when the
bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.403)

Gas PI
For gas reservoirs a non-linear relationship is used:

( 2
QG = J G ⋅ pws − pwf
2
) Eq. 4.24

Technical Description
387
PIPESIM User Guide

where:

QG is the stock-tank gas rate

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

J G is the gas productivity index

Vogel's equation
Vogel's (1968) (p.589) equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the
Inflow Performance Relationship (p.386) (IPR) for a completion. It was developed to model
saturated oil wells. Vogel's equation is a best-fit approximation of numerous simulated well
performance calculations. Vogel's work considers only the effect of rock and fluid properties on
saturated systems. The Vogel relation does not account for high-velocity-flow effects that may exist
in high-rate wells, see the Fetkovich equation (p.389).
Vogel's equation is:

( ( ) ( ))
2
pwf pwf
Q = Qmax 1 − (1 − C ) −C Eq. 4.25
pws pws

Where

Q is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m3/d)

Qmax is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate when the bottom hole
pressure is zero

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

C is the Vogel coefficient.

The Vogel equation has the following properties:

Q = Qmax at pwf = 0

Q=0 at pwf = pws

Technical Description
388
PIPESIM User Guide

∂Q Qmax ⋅ (1 + C ) at pwf = pws

Productivity index = −
∂ pwf pws

Fetkovich's equation
Fetkovich's equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
Performance Relationship (p.386) (IPR) for a completion. The Fetkovich equation is a development
of the Vogel equation (p.388) to take account of high velocity effects.

( ( ))
2 n
Pwf
Q = Qmax 1 − Eq. 4.26
Pws

Where

Q is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m 3/d)

Qmax is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate when the bottom hole
pressure is zero

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

n is the Fetkovich exponent.

Technical Description
389
PIPESIM User Guide

Jones' equation
Jones' equation (p.583) is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
performance relationship (p.386) (IPR) for a completion. It is similar to the PI (p.387) method but
contains an extra term to model turbulence.

Jones equation for gas inflow

The Jones equation for gas reservoirs is :
2 2 2
Pws − Pwf = AQG + BQG Eq. 4.27

where

QG is the stock-tank gas rate

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

A ≥ 0 is the turbulence coefficient

B ≥ 0 is the laminar coefficient

In the case when A = 0 the Jones equation is the same as the gas PI (p.387) equation with
/
productivity index J G = 1 B . Values of B > 0.05 (psi2/MMscf/d) indicate low permeability or the
presence of skin damage .

Jones equation for liquid inflow

Jones proposed the equation for gas flow, but it can also be used to model oil wells. However the
Fetkovich equation (p.389) can also be used for saturated oil wells and is the recommended
method for IPRs in reservoirs producing below the bubble point.
The Jones equation for liquid reservoirs is :
2
Pws − Pwf = AQL + BQL Eq. 4.28

where

QL is the stock-tank oil rate

In the case when A = 0 the Jones equation is the same as the Liquid PI (p.387) equation with
productivity index J L = 1 B /
Forchheimer equation
Forchheimer, 1901 (p.582) gave an equation for non-Darcy flow in the reservoir, which is
essentially the same as the Jones equation (p.390) for liquid inflow.

Technical Description
390
PIPESIM User Guide

Back pressure equation

The Back Pressure Equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
performance relationship (p.386) (IPR) for a completion.
The Back Pressure Equation was developed by Rawlins and Schellhardt (1935) (p.587) after
testing 582 wells. The equation is typically applied to gas wells although its application to oil wells
has also been proven. If correlations already exist for oil wells, use the Back Pressure Equation on
gas wells only. The equation has the following form:

( 2
QG = C ⋅ Pws − Pwf )
2 n
Eq. 4.29

where

QG is the gas flow rate (MMscf/d) (m3/d),

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia) (bara)

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia) (bara)

C is the back pressure constant (MMscf/d/(psia2)n) (m3/d/(bar 2) n)

n is the dimensionless back pressure exponent

The back pressure exponent, n , which ranges between 0.5 and 1.0, accounts for high velocity flow
(turbulence). When n = 1 the back pressure equation is the same as the gas PI (p.387) equation.
The back pressure constant, C , represents reservoir rock and fluid properties, flow geometry and
transient effects.
The parameters C and n must be obtained by multi-rate testingIn addition to the standard IPR
equations, test data can be utilized so that the inflow can be matched to actual measured data. A
minimum of three data points is required. Two types of multi-rate test are available: of the well.
Since

( 2
log QG = log C + n ⋅ log Pws − Pwf
2
) Eq. 4.30

2 2
A plot of flow rate QG versus pws − p on a log-log scale will give a line with slope n and
wf
intercept C . To avoid unit conversion problems when obtaining the parameters, check that the
slope has a value between 0.5 and 1.0. If n is less than 0.5, this implies that the reservoir
stabilization conditions are slow, or that liquid has accumulated in the wellbore (in gas condensate
wells). The value of n can be greater than 1.0 if liquid is removed from the well during testing, or by
removing drilling or stimulation fluids. Also, changes in well capacity during isochronal testing will
cause a wider scatter of data points. This might be the result of liquid accumulation or cleaning of
the wells.

Technical Description
391
PIPESIM User Guide

Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Equation

The pseudo steady state IPR (p.386) equation (PSS), is derived from the equation for single phase
Darcy flow into a well. A number of versions of the equation can be used (some require keywords
(p.652)):
• for liquid flow the PSS equation is written in terms of the stock tank liquid (p.394) flow rate
• this can be optionally combined with a Vogel formula for pressures below the bubble point
(p.395).
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the radial flow equations for oil
and water (p.395)
• for gas flow the PSS is written in terms of the stock tank gas (p.395) flow rate
• a version using the gas pseudo pressure (p.396) (more accurate for high pressure
systems).
• the PSS expressed in terms of reservoir flow (p.392) rates can be used for either liquid or gas
flow.
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the reservoir flow equations for
oil and water (p.394)

Reservoir flow
The pseudo steady state equation, like the transient IPR (p.397), is calculated by solving the
radial, single phase, Darcy flow into a well. It applies for relatively long times, after the well has
passed through the transient stage. The solution is given by Dake 1978 (p.580):

QR Φ = M Φ ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.31

where the PSS transmissibility term is defined by:

2 πkh
T =
C1 ln ()
re
rw
− 0.75 + S
Eq. 4.32

Where:

QR Φ is the volume flow rate at RB / d or

reservoir conditions of phase Φ MCF / d

MΦ is the mobility of phase Φ 1 / cp

pws is the average reservoir pressure psia

pwf is the bottom hole pressure psia

k is the formation permeability mD

h is the formation thickness ft

Technical Description
392
PIPESIM User Guide

rw is the wellbore radius ft

re is the drainage radius ft

S is the skin

C1 is a conversion factor depending

on the flow units
2
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 5.61458 ⋅ 10
−3 If the flow is in RB / d
C1 = −10 = 2 π ⋅ 141.2
86400 ⋅ 10

14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
2 If the flow is in
C1 = −10 MCF / d
86400 ⋅ 10

Note:

• The constant 0.75 comes from using the average reservoir pressure pws = p̄ . A similar formula
can be derived using the pressure at the drainage radius pws = p (re ), but the value 0.75 is
replaced by 0.5.
• The effective drainage radius may be explicitly specified or calculated based on the shape
factor and the reservoir area.

The phase mobility is defined in terms of the phase relative permeability and viscosity:

For single phase flow the relative permeability is kr Φ = 1, and the inflow equation simplifies to :

1
QR Φ = ⋅ T ⋅ ( Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.33
μΦ

Technical Description
393
PIPESIM User Guide

This version of the PSS IPR can be used for liquid or gas inflow.
For multiphase inflow, the total inflow can be written as the sum of the phase inflows:

QR = QRO + QRW + QRG Eq. 4.34

This can be rearranged to give:

QR = M ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.35

Where the total mobility is defined by

M = MO + MW + MG Eq. 4.36

Oil and water flow

A two phase version of the multiphase inflow equation can be used to model liquid inflow.

QRL = ( krO
μO
+
krW
μW
) ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.37

The relative permeabilities can be determined from permeability tables (p.431).

Injection
The reservoir injection flow equation is similar to the PSS production IPR:

QR = M I ⋅ T ⋅ (Pwf − Pws ) Eq. 4.38

Here however, the mobility term represents the mobility of the fluid in the reservoir, rather than that
of the injection fluid, and the properties of the fluid in the target reservoir must be specified in the
fluid model assigned/mapped to the completion being injected into, if different from the injection
fluid. In production, the fluid being produced is the same as that moving through the reservoir. In
injection systems, the two fluids may be different and in this case, two fluids must be defined; the
injection fluid mapped to the injection source, and the reservoir fluid mapped to the completion. In
this scenario, we would expect different flow rates if gas is injected into a liquid filled reservoir
versus a gas filled reservoir. If the injection fluid does differ from the reservoir fluid, then the
injection mobility will change with time, as the reservoir fluid changes.

Note: For an injection well, the fluid properties used in the IPR equation (gas compressibility factor,
viscosity, formation volume factor, etc.) are evaluated at the flowing bottomhole temperature (i.e.
upstream of the flow into the completion) and the average of the static reservoir pressure and
flowing bottomhole pressure.

Stock tank liquid flow

The pseudo steady state equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For liquid flow, the
stock tank flow rate QL = QR BL is given by /

Technical Description
394
PIPESIM User Guide

(
2 πkh pws − pwf )
QL =
C1 μ L BL ln ()
re
rw
− 0.75 + S
Eq. 4.39

QL is the liquid flowrate STB / d

BL is the liquid volume formation factor RB / STB

μ L is the liquid viscosity at reservoir conditions cp

Below bubble point correction

The pseudo steady state equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.388) to model inflows
when the bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.403)

Oil and water flow

The two phase version (p.394) of the reservoir liquid flow equation can also be written in terms of
stock tank liquid flow rate:

QL = QR / BL = QRO / BL + QRW / BL Eq. 4.40

Stock tank gas flow

This pseudo steady state equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For gas flow, the
formation volume factor can be expressed in terms of pressure and temperature
V ZRT Ps
BG = = ⋅ . The reservoir pressure is taken to be the average pressure in the
Vs P Zs RT s
pws + pwf
reservoir: P = , which gives a stock tank flow rate QG = QR / BG :
2
( 2
2 πkh pws − pwf
2
)
QG =
C2 μG TZ ln ()
re
rw
− 0.75 + S + DQG
Eq. 4.41

• The quadratic term in pressure arises from a combination of the pressure difference and the
reservoir average pressure term

(p ws
2
− pwf ) = (p
2
ws )(
− pwf ⋅ pws + pwf .)
• The constant term arises from a combination of the conversion factor and stock tank properties

Technical Description
395
PIPESIM User Guide

2C1Zs P
s
C2 = .
Ts
• The skin has been modified to include a flow rate dependent term.

QG is the gas flowrate MSCF / d

BG is the gas volume formation factor CF / SCF

μG is the gas viscosity at reservoir conditions cp

S is the constant skin

DQ is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate

dependent skin

T is the reservoir temperature o

R

Z is the reservoir compressibility factor

Ps is the stock tank pressure 14.7 psi

Ts is the stock tank temperature 519.67 R

o

Zs is the stock tank compressibility factor 1

2
2 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
2 is a constant, arising from conversion factors
C2 = −10 = 2 π ⋅ 1422 and stock tank properties
86400 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 519.67

Gas pseudo pressure

Dake 1978 (p.580) gives another version of the Pseudo steady state IPR for gas inflow, that is
more accurate for large drawdowns, based on work by Al-Hussainy et al (p.578):

2 πkh m pws − m pwf( ) ( )

QG =
C2T ln ()
re
rw
− 0.75 + S + DQG
Eq. 4.42

Here the gas pseudo pressure is given by:

m( p ) = 2 ∫ μ pZ d p
G
Eq. 4.43

Technical Description
396
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.1. Shape Factors

See Earlougher (1977) (p.581) for reference.

Transient IPR
The transient IPR (p.386) equation, is derived from the equation for single phase Darcy flow into a
well. A number of versions of the equation can be used (some require keywords (p.669)):

Technical Description
397
PIPESIM User Guide

• for liquid flow the transient IPR is written in terms of the stock tank liquid (p.400) flow rate
• this can be optionally combined with a Vogel formula for pressures below the bubble point
(p.401).
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the radial flow equations for oil
and water (p.401)
• for gas flow the transient IPR is written in terms of the stock tank gas (p.401) flow rate
• a version using the gas pseudo pressure (p.402) (more accurate for high pressure
systems).
• the transient IPR expressed in terms of reservoir flow (p.398) rates can be used for either liquid
or gas flow.
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the reservoir flow equations for
oil and water (p.400)

Reservoir flow
The transient IPR, like the pseudo steady state IPR (p.392), is calculated by solving the radial,
single phase, Darcy flow into the well. It applies for relatively small times, before the well has
reached the pseudo steady state. A similarity solution is given by Dake 1978 (p.580):

QR Φ = M Φ ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.44

where the transient IPR transmissibility is defined by:

2 πkh
T =
1 4kt Eq. 4.45
C1 ln ( 2 )+S
2 C γθμCr
0 w

QR Φ is the volume flow RB / d or MCF / d

rate at reservoir
conditions of phase
Φ

MΦ is the mobility of 1 / cp
phase Φ

pws is the average psia

reservoir pressure

pwf is the bottom hole psia

pressure

t time hours
k is the formation mD
permeability

h is the formation ft
thickness

Technical Description
398
PIPESIM User Guide

rw is the wellbore ft
radius

S is the skin

θ is the reservoir
porosity

C is the total 1 / psi

compressibility of
the reservoir and
the reservoir fluids

γ is a constant equal γ = e 0.5772 = 1.781

to the exponential
of Euler's constant

C0 is a conversion 2
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 10
−3
factor C0 = −10
10 ⋅ 3600

C1 is a conversion
factor depending
on the flow units
2
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 5.61458 ⋅ 10
−3 If the flow is in
C1 = −10 = 2 π ⋅ 141.2 RB / d
86400 ⋅ 10

14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
2 If the flow is in
C1 = −10
MCF / d
86400 ⋅ 10

The transient IPR equation can be written in similar terms to the pseudo steady state IPR (p.392)
by defining a radius
2 4kt
r = Eq. 4.46
C0 γθμC
2 πkh
T =
r Eq. 4.47
C1 ln ( )+S
rw
The phase mobility is defined in terms of the phase relative permeability and viscosity:

kr Φ
MΦ = Eq. 4.48
μΦ

Technical Description
399
PIPESIM User Guide

kr Φ is the relative permeability for phase Φ

μΦ is the viscosity of phase Φ at reservoir conditions cp

For single phase flow the relative permeability is kr Φ = 1, and the inflow equation simplifies to :

1
QR Φ = ⋅ T ⋅ ( Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.49
μΦ
This version of the transient IPR can be used for liquid or gas inflow.
For multiphase inflow, the total inflow can be written as the sum of the phase inflows:

QR = QRO + QRW + QRG Eq. 4.50

This can be rearranged to give:

QR = M ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.51

Where the total mobility is defined by

M = MO + MW + MG Eq. 4.52

Oil and water flow

A two phase version of the multiphase inflow equation can be used to model liquid inflow.

QRL = ( krO
μO
+
krW
μW
) ⋅ T ⋅ (Pws − Pwf ) Eq. 4.53

The relative permeabilities can be determined from permeability tables (p.431).

Stock tank liquid flow

This transient IPR equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For liquid flow, the stock
tank flow rate QL = QR BL is given by /
2 πkh ( pws − pwf )
QL =
1 4kt Eq. 4.54
C1 μ L BL ln ( 2 )+S
2 C0 γθ μ L Cr w

QL is the liquid flowrate STB / d

BL is the liquid volume formation factor RB / STB

μ L is the liquid viscosity cp

Technical Description
400
PIPESIM User Guide

The equation can be written using base 10 logarithms, since

4x 4x 4
ln = ln 10 ⋅ log = 2.302 ⋅ (log x + log ) = 2.302 ⋅ (log x − 3.23):
C0 γ C0 γ C0 γ

2 πkh ( pws − pwf )

QL =
kt S Eq. 4.55
1.151 ⋅ C 1 μ L BL log ( 2) − 3.23 +
1.151
θ μ L Crw

Below bubble point correction

The transient IPR equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.388) to model inflows when
the bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.403)

Oil and water flow

The two phase version (p.400) of the reservoir liquid flow equation can also be written in terms of
stock tank liquid flow rate:

QL = QR / BL = QRO / BL + QRW / BL Eq. 4.56

Stock tank gas flow

V ZRT Ps
This transient IPR equation can be expressed in stock tank f BG = = ⋅ low
Vs P Zs RT s
rates. For gas flow, the formation volume factor can be expressed in terms of pressure and
temperature: . The reservoir pressure is taken to be the average pressure in the reservoir:
pws + pwf
P= , which gives a stock tank flow rate QG = QR / BG :
2
2 2
2 πkh ( pws − pwf )
QG =
1 4kt Eq. 4.57
C2 μG TZ ln ( 2 ) + S + DQG
2 C0 γθ μG Cr w
• The quadratic term in pressure arises from a combination of the pressure difference and the
average pressure term pws − pwf ( 2
) = (p
2
ws )(
− pwf ⋅ pws + pwf . )
• The constant term arises from a combination of the conversion factor and stock tank properties
2C1Zs P
s
C2 = .
Ts
• The skin has been modified to include a flow rate dependent term.

QG is the gas flowrate MSCF / d

Technical Description
401
PIPESIM User Guide

BG is the gas volume formation factor CF / SCF

μG is the gas viscosity cp

S is the constant skin

DQ is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate

dependent skin

T is the reservoir temperature o

R

Z is the reservoir compressibility factor

Ps is the stock tank pressure 14.7 psi

T s is the stock tank temperature

o
519.67 R

Zs is the stock tank compressibility factor 1

C2 is a constant, arising from conversion For MSCF / d :

factors and stock tank properties 2 2
2 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
C2 = −10 = 2 π ⋅ 1422
86400 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 519.67

The equation can also be written using base 10 logarithms:

2 2
2 πkh ( pws − pwf )
QG =
kt S + DQG Eq. 4.58
1.151 ⋅ C 2 μG TZ log ( ) − 3.23 +
2
θ μG Cr w 1.151

Gas pseudo pressure

Dake 1978 (p.580) gives another version of the Pseudo steady state IPR for gas inflow, that is
more accurate for large drawdowns, based on work by Al-Hussainy et al (p.578):

( )
2 πkh m pws − m pwf ( )
QG =
1 4kt Eq. 4.59
C2T ln ( 2 ) + S + DQG
2 C0 γθ μG rw
Here the gas pseudo pressure is given by:

m( p ) = 2 ∫ μ pZ d p
G
Eq. 4.60

Technical Description
402
PIPESIM User Guide

Time to pseudo steady state solution

According to Dake 1978 (p.580), the solution to the well inflow equations changes from transient
to pseudo steady state (p.392) when the dimensionless time tDA is given by

kt
tDA = > 0.1 Eq. 4.61
C0 θμCA
2
Writing A = πre , where re is the drainage radius of the reservoir, the time when the pseudo steady
state (p.392) solution becomes applicable is
2
θμCre
t pss = (0.1 ⋅ π ⋅ C0) ⋅ Eq. 4.62
k
A warning will be issued if the time t exceeds this value.

Data File
Enter an IPR in table form (Flowrate versus Pressure) rather than using an IPR (p.386) equation.
This feature is currently only available by using an EKT (p.92) or in expert mode (p.260).
Place the EKT (Spanner icon) between the completion and the tubing and enter the IFPTAB
(p.660) data.
Example:

! n liq pwf gor wcut

ifptab 0 0 3000 986 0
ifptab 0 1000 2990 986 2.0
ifptab 0 2699 2920 1096 2.2
ifptab 0 6329 2800 2540 2.8
ifptab 0 7288 2600 2980 3.9
ifptab 0 8082 2400 3370 5.6
ifptab 0 8805 2003 3770 8.0
ifptab execute

Note: The GOR and water cut values are optional.

All IPR data associated with the completion will be ignored.

Bubble Point Correction

The Productivity index (p.387), Pseudo steady state (p.392) and Transient (p.397) IPRs for liquid
inflow can be modified to use a form of Vogel's equation (p.388) below the bubble point
( pwf < pbp ). This allows the effects of gas break-out to be modelled.

( ( ) ( ))
2
pwf pwf
Q − Qbp = Qmax 1 − (1 − C ) −C Eq. 4.63
pbp pbp

Where

Technical Description
403
PIPESIM User Guide

Q is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m3/d)

Qbp is the flow at the bubble point flow

Qbp Pbp is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate
Qmax = ⋅ when the bottom hole pressure is zero
1+C P − P
ws bp

pbp is the bubble point pressure (psia or bara)

pwf is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

pws is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

C is the Vogel coefficient.

The Vogel equation has been shifted to match a linear IPR above the bubble point:

Q = Qbp at pwf = pbp

∂Q Qmax ⋅ (1 + C ) Qbp at pwf = pbp

Productivity index = − = −
∂ pwf pbp pws − pbp

This correction only works if the bubble point pressure is less than the static (reservoir) pressure,
pbp < pws .

Technical Description
404
PIPESIM User Guide

Vertical Well Skin Factor

The skin factor S is used in the pseudo steady state (p.392) and transient (p.397) IPRs to
represent friction caused by damage to the formation close to the well (mechanical skin) and the
effects of high flow (dynamic skin).

S = SM + D ⋅ Q Eq. 4.64

Mechanical skin factor

The pseudo steady state (p.392) and transient (p.397) IPRs are derived from Darcy's equation for
a homogenous reservoir with a vertical completion. The mechanical skin can be used to represent
friction terms arising from any departure from this idealized model. The mechanical skin has a
number of separate components:

SM = S pp + S θ + Sd + Sg + S p + S f Eq. 4.65

Different components are used in different completion types:

Open Open hole Perforated Gravel Packed Frac Pack

hole gravel pack & Perforated

S pp partial penetration Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(p.408)

S θ deviation (p.408) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sd damaged zone Yes Yes Yes Yes Included in S f

(p.409)

Sg gravel pack (p.409) Yes Yes Included in S f

Technical Description
405
PIPESIM User Guide

S p perforated well Yes Yes Included in S f

(p.411)

S f frac pack (p.414) Yes

Dynamic skin factor

The pseudo steady state (p.392) and transient (p.397) IPRs are derived from Darcy's equation for
a homogenous reservoir with a vertical completion. The dynamic skin can be used to represent
friction terms arising from turbulence in the flow entering the well. The dynamic skin has a number
of separate components:

D = Dd + Dr + D + Dc + D f Eq. 4.66
g
Different components are used in different completion types:

Open hole Open hole Perforated Gravel Packed & Frac

gravel pack Perforated Pack

Dd damaged zone Yes Yes Yes Yes

Dr reservoir Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ds gravel pack screen Yes

Dg gravel pack Yes

Dc crushed zone Yes Yes

D f frac pack Yes

Formulas for these skin components can be found in Golan and Whitson (1986) (p.582). The
damaged zone, reservoir and gravel pack screen dynamic skins all use the same formula DG for
gas flow and the same formula for liquid flow DL :

Dd = { DG (rw , rd , βd )
DL (rw , rd , βd )
Eq. 4.67

Dr = { DG (rd , rr , βr )
DL (rd , rr , βr )
Eq. 4.68

Ds = { DG (rs , rw , βs )
DL (rs , rw , βs )
Eq. 4.69

The general gas flow dynamic skin term is given by:

Technical Description
406
PIPESIM User Guide

( )
k ⋅ h ⋅ γG 1 1
DG (rin , rout , β ) = 2.222 ⋅ 10
−18
⋅β⋅ 2 ⋅ − Eq. 4.70
h c ⋅ μG rin rout
The general liquid flow dynamic skin term is given by:

( )
k ⋅ h ⋅ ρ L ⋅ BL 1 1
DL (rin , rout , β ) = 1.635 ⋅ 10
−16
⋅β⋅ 2 ⋅ − Eq. 4.71
h c ⋅ μL rin rout
The gravel pack dynamic skin for gas flow is given by:

−13
k ⋅ h ⋅ γG ⋅ L pack
Dg = 2.45 ⋅ 10 ⋅ βg ⋅ 4 Eq. 4.72
(2r p) 2
⋅ n p ⋅ μG

The gravel pack dynamic skin for liquid flow is given by:

k ⋅ h ⋅ ρ L ⋅ BL ⋅ L
−11 pack
Dg = 1.8 ⋅ 10 ⋅ βg ⋅ 4
Eq. 4.73
(2r p) 2
⋅ np ⋅ μL

The crushed zone dynamic skin for gas flow is given by:

−15
k ⋅ h ⋅ γG
Dc = 3.84 ⋅ 10 ⋅ βc ⋅ 2 2
Eq. 4.74
L p ⋅ n p ⋅ r p ⋅ μG
The crushed zone dynamic skin for liquid flow is given by:

Dc = 0 Eq. 4.75

The frac pack dynamic skin is given as the sum of the tunnel and annulus terms:

D f = Dt + Da Eq. 4.76

The frac pack dynamic skin annulus term uses the same general formula as used for the damaged
zone, reservoir and gravel pack screens:

Da = { DG (rs , rc , βs )
DL (rs , rc , βs )
Eq. 4.77

The frac pack dynamic skin tunnel term for gas flow:

−18
k ⋅ h ⋅ γG ⋅ L tun
Dt = 2.222 ⋅ 10 ⋅ βs ⋅ 4 ⋅

( )
4
rp Eq. 4.78
2
⋅ den shot ⋅ μG
12
The frac pack dynamic skin tunnel term for liquid flow:

Technical Description
407
PIPESIM User Guide

k ⋅ h ⋅ ρ L ⋅ BL ⋅ L
−16 tun
Dt = 1.635 ⋅ 10 ⋅ βs ⋅ 4.

( )
4 Eq. 4.79
rp 2
⋅ den shot ⋅ μ L
12

Partial penetration skin

Brons and Marting (p.579) (1961) (quoted in Golan and Whitson (p.582)) expressed the effect of
partial penetration and limited entry as a skin factor :

S pp = ( Lh − 1) ln( rh kr
kz
) −Y Eq. 4.80
w
with
2 3 L
Y = 2.948 − 7.363 X + 11.45 X − 4.675 X and X =
h

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability
and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and
the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Deviation skin
Cinco et al. (p.580) (1975) approximate the pseudo-skin factor caused by the slant of a well as :

( ) ( ) ( )
′ 2.06 ′ 1.865
θ θ h kr
Sθ = − − log 10 Eq. 4.81
41 57 100rw kz
′
θ is measured in degrees:

Technical Description
408
PIPESIM User Guide

kz
tan ( θ ′ ) = ⋅ tan( θ ) Eq. 4.82
kr

h Reservoir Thickness

rw Wellbore Radius

kr Reservoir Permeability

kz Completion Vertical Permeability

0 < θ < 75 deviation from vertical in degrees

o

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability
and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and
the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Damaged zone skin

The effect of formation damage on productivity was treated analytically by Muskat (p.585) (1937).
Hawkins (p.583) (1956) translated the Muskat Model of a near wellbore altered permeability into
the following expression for the skin factor :

Sd = ( )
kr
ka
− 1 ln (d )
dw
a
Eq. 4.83

da Damaged Zone Diameter

dw Wellbore Diameter

kr Reservoir Permeability

ka Damaged Zone Permeability

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability
and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and
the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Gravel pack skin

Two different formula are used in PIPESIM. The skin factor is dimensionless. The equations for the
skin factor involves ratios of permeability and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g.
md) are used for all permeability terms, and the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Technical Description
409
PIPESIM User Guide

Open hole gravel pack skin

Assuming a radial flow through formation and gravel, the contribution to the skin is expressed as:

Compare this with the Annulus skin (p.416) for a Frac Pack.

Gravel pack skin

Applying Darcy's law for linear flow in packed perforations for the steady state skin term due to
gravel pack gives :

where
′
lt = lt + ric − rs

Compare this with the Gravel skin (p.416) for a Frac Pack.

Technical Description
410
PIPESIM User Guide

Perforated well skin

McLeod model
McLeod (p.411) (1983) used a model of a horizontal microwell with formation damage around it as
an analogy to a perforation surrounded by a crushed zone. He quantified the effect of the crushed
zone as the following skin factor:
Compacted or crushed zone skin, Sc;

Karakas model
Karakas and Tariq (p.583) (1991) have developed a semi analytical solution for the calculation of
the perforation skin effect. Depending on the size of the damaged zone and the length of the
perforation , the well radius and the perforation length, or their modified value are used in the
model .
The thickness of the damaged zone is :

Technical Description
411
PIPESIM User Guide

1
la = (d − dw ) Eq. 4.84
2 a
For perforation sitting inside the damaged zone :

For perforations extending beyond the damaged zone

( )
}
′
ka
rw = rw + 1 − la
kr
if l p > la Eq. 4.85
′
( )
lp = lp − 1 −
ka
kr
la

The perforation skin effect is divided into the following components :

Horizontal component of the skin

( )
′
rw
Sh = ln ′
Eq. 4.86
rwc
where
′ ′ ′
rwc = α ( φ ) rw + l p Eq. 4.87

φ Phase Angle
α ( φ ) Function of phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.414))
Well bore skin
′
rw
Sw = c1exp c2 Eq. 4.88
(l p′ + rw′ )
with

c1 = c1( φ ) and c2 = c2( φ ) Functions of the phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.414))

Technical Description
412
PIPESIM User Guide

Vertical skin
A B −1 B
Sv = 10 H n Rn Eq. 4.89

with

1 kr
Hn = ′
n p l p kz

Rn =
npd p
4
1+
kz
kr
( )
A = a1( φ ) × log 10Rn + a2( φ )

B = b1( φ )Rn + b2( φ )

a1( φ ), a2( φ ), b1( φ ) and b2( φ ) functions of phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.414))

The equation 4.89 (p.413) is valid for H n ≤ 10 and Rn ≥ 0.01

Crushed zone effect

Sck =
1
n p l p kc
′ ( )
kr
− 1 ln (d ) c
dp
Eq. 4.90

The combined skin effect caused by perforations added to the crushed zone effects is given by :
′
St = Sh + Sw + Sv + Sck Eq. 4.91

If the perforations go beyond the damaged zone, the total perforation skin is the sum of these four
contributions :
′
St = St for l p > la Eq. 4.92

Damaged zone effect

For perforations within damaged zone, the skin caused by the combined effects of perforations and
damage is :

St = ( )( )
kr
ka
− 1 ln
da
dw
+
kr
ka
(St′ + S x ) for l p ≤ l a
Eq. 4.93
da
S x = S x (r ) and r =
dw + 2l p
r Ratio of the damaged zone diameter over the penetration zone diameter
S x (r ) function of r (see table 4.2 (p.414))

Technical Description
413
PIPESIM User Guide

φ (degre) 45 60 90 120 180 360 (0)

α 0.860 0.813 0.726 0.648 0.500 0.250
a1 − 1.788 − 1.898 − 1.905 − 2.018 − 2.025 − 2.091

a2 0.2398 0.1023 0.1038 0.0634 0.0943 0.0453

b1 1.1915 1.3654 1.5674 1.6136 3.0373 5.1313

b2 1.6392 1.6490 1.6935 1.7770 1.8115 1.8672

−5 −4 −3 −3 −2 −1
c1 4.6 × 10 3.0 × 10 1.9 × 10 6.6 × 10 2.6 × 10 1.6 × 10

c2 8.791 7.509 6.155 5.320 4.532 2.675

Table 4.1: Karakas and Tariq Skin Correlation Coefficients

r = da / (dw + 2l p ) S x
18.0 0.000
10.0 − 0.001
2.0 − 0.002
1.5 − 0.024
1.2 − 0.085
Table 4.2: Skin caused by boundary effect, 180 degree phasing

Frac pack skin

The Frac Pack Skin is calculated only in association with a case hole gravel pack. If the gravel
pack is not defined the Frac Pack Skin is 0.
Pucknell and Mason (p.587) (1992) give a review of the contributions to the skin in a cased hole
gravel pack completion.

S f = Shf + S ff + Scf + San + Stg

Shf Hydraulic fracture (p.415)

S ff Fracture face skin (p.416)

Scf Choke fracture skin (p.416)

San Annulus skin (p.416)

Stg Tunnel gravel skin (p.416)

Technical Description
414
PIPESIM User Guide

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equations for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability
and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and
the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Hydraulic fracture
The following model is also applied in IPR Model “Hydraulic Fracture”.
Hydraulic fracture is characterized by its length, capacity or conductivity and related equivalent skin
effect. Prats (p.587) (1961) introduced the concept of effective wellbore radius, providing pressure
profiles in a fractured reservoir as functions of the fracture half-length and a relative capacity. He
provided a graph relating the effective well radius and the capacity. Cinco-Ley et al. (p.580) (1978,
1981a) (see also Economides et al. (p.581) 1994) introduced the fracture conductivity instead,
which is proportional to the inverse of the capacity, and provided an alternative graph relating the
fracture conductivity to the skin. The following correlations are derived from Cinco-Ley and
Samaniego graph.
Dimensionless fracture conductivity:

kp ⋅ w f
F cd = Eq. 4.94
kr ⋅ x f
Pseudo-skin factor for a well with a finite-conductivity vertical fracture

{
( )
− 0.7205 * ln F cd + 1.6368 if F cd < 1
3.0386 − 2.349exp ( − 0.511 F cd )
′ −0.909
Shf = if 1 ≤ F cd < 1000 Eq. 4.95

0.692 if F cd ≥ 1000
and the hydraulic skin is given by:

′
Shf = Shf − ln ( )
xf
rw
Eq. 4.96

x f Fracture Half Length

w f Fracture Width

kr Reservoir Permeability

k p Proppant Permeability

rw Wellbore Radius

Damaged hydraulic fracture performance can deviate substantially from undamaged fracture. Two
types of damage are considered: fracture face (p.416) and choke fracture (p.416).

Technical Description
415
PIPESIM User Guide

Fracture face skin

Cinco-Ley and Samaniego (p.580) (1981b) quantified the damage that may develop on the
fracture face, by a skin effect of the form

S ff =
π waf
2
⋅
xf
⋅
kr
kaf
−1 ( ) Eq. 4.97

waf Depth of Damage (normal to the fracture face) is very thin (0.2 ft or less)

kaf Frac Face Damage Permeability

Choke fracture skin

Damage at the connection between the fracture and a well is referred to as a choke. Different to
the fracture face skin, the damaged zone is within the fracture. Romero et al. (p.588) (2002)
express the extra pressure drop in the fracture in term of a skin effect:

Scf = π ⋅
xcf
xf
⋅ ( kr
kcf
−
kr
kp
) Eq. 4.98

xcf Choke Length

kcf Frac Choke Permeability

Annulus skin
Between the casing internal radius and the screen outer radius, assuming a radial flow through the
gravel the contribution to the skin is expressed as:

San =
kr
⋅ ln (d )ic
Eq. 4.99
kg ds

dic Casing Internal Diameter

ds Screen Diameter

kg Gravel Permeability

Gravel skin in tunnel

If a perforation is not defined, a default perforation diameter and a default perforation density are
set (equal to 0.5 inches and 4 shots/ft respectively) for the calculation of the Frac Pack Skin. If the
perforation tunnels through the casing and cement, where the most significant pressure drops
usually occur, the skin component is:

Technical Description
416
PIPESIM User Guide

kr lt
Stg = 2 ⋅ ⋅ 2
Eq. 4.100
kg np ⋅ r p

lt Tunnel length

n p Perforation Density

r p Perforation radius

4.2.2 Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions

Theory
The main purpose of drilling horizontal wells is to enhance production. There are also many
circumstances that lead to drilling horizontal wells (Cooper, 1988):
Thin reservoirs
The increased area of contact of the horizontal well with the reservoir is reflected by the
productivity index (PI). Typically, the PI for a horizontal well may be increased by a factor
of 4 when compared to a vertical well penetrating the same reservoir.
Heterogeneous reservoirs
When irregular reservoirs exist, the horizontal well can effectively intersect isolated
productive zones which might otherwise be missed. A horizontal well can also intersect
vertical natural fractures in a reservoir.
Reduce water/gas coning
A horizontal well provides minimum pressure drawdown, which delays the onset of
water/gas breakthrough. Even though the production per unit well length is small, the long
well length provides high production rates.
Vertical permeability
If the ratio of vertical permeability to horizontal permeability is a high, a horizontal well may
produce more economically than a vertical well.

Pressure drop
Effect of pressure drop on productivity
In many reservoir engineering calculations, the horizontal wellbore is treated as an infinite
conductivity fracture, that is the pressure drop along the well length is negligible. However, in
practice, there must be a pressure drop from the toe (tip-end) of the horizontal wellbore to the heel
(producing-end) so as to maintain fluid flow within the wellbore (see Figure 1).
Dikken (1989), Folefac (1991) and Joshi (1991) have addressed the effect of wellbore pressure
gradient on horizontal well production performance.

Technical Description
417
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.2. Along-hole pressure gradient of a horizontal well (Joshi, 1991)

Dikken (p.580) (1990) and Folefac (p.582) (1991) contend that the assumption of constant
pressure wellbore is reasonable for single phase laminar flow but is no longer valid when turbulent
or multiphase flow occurs. Folefac (1991) showed that a typical well with the following properties:
ρo = 800 kg/m3; μ = 1.0 cp; d = 0.1968 m; and Q = 5000 RB/d gives a N RE of 4000 which is well
above the turbulence transition limit of 2000. In most practical situations, Dikken (1990) asserts
that horizontal wells will exhibit non-laminar flow. In addition, the pressure drop will be even greater
when multiphase flow exists.
Joshi (p.583) (1991), thus, asked the question: What is the magnitude of the wellbore pressure
drop as compared to pressure drop from the reservoir to the wellbore? If the wellbore pressure
drop is significant as compared to the reservoir drawdown, then the reservoir drawdown, and
consequently, the production rate along the well length will change. Thus, there is a strong
interaction between the wellbore and the reservoir. The reservoir flow and wellbore equations must
be solved simultaneously as shown in Figure 2.

Technical Description
418
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.3. Schematic of reservoir and flow relationship (Joshi, 1991)

The coupled equations were solved by Dikken (1990) analytically by simplified boundary
conditions, notably, no inflow from the toe-end. Folefac (1991) used a Black Oil type model that
involved a finite volume technique.
Folefac (1991) concluded that the well length, wellbore diameter and perforated interval had the
most profound effect on the level of pressure drop in the wellbore. Folefac (1991) pointed out that
the wellbore pressure profile is non-linear with respect to the well length. This is because the
mixture momentum equation has a non-linear term in velocity, the friction force. This in turn will
result in an uneven drawdown in the reservoir that is otherwise considered homogenous.
Furthermore, Folefac (1991) showed that as the wellbore radius increased from 64.5 mm (2.5") to
114.3 mm (4.5"), the rate at which pressure dropped along the wellbore became nearly constant.
This is mainly due to the turbulent flow being converted to laminar flow by drilling a larger size hole.
Joshi (1991) mentions other situations where wellbore pressure drop is considerable:
• High flowrates of light oil (10,000 to 30,000 RB/d)
• High viscous crudes (heavy oils and tar sands)
• Long well lengths
The wellbore pressure drop effects well deliverability and in turn influences well completion and
well profile design. The need to accurately calculate well flowrates and wellbore pressures is
therefore, essential.
Joshi (1991) lists a few remedies to minimize high wellbore pressure drops:
• Drilling a larger diameter hole would dramatically reduce the pressure drop. The reason being
that for single phase flow, D P a 1/d5. For example, Joshi (1991), states " for a given production
rate, by increasing the well diameter twofold, the pressure drop can be reduced at least thirty-
two fold".

Technical Description
419
PIPESIM User Guide

• Varying the shot density of a cemented hole or the slot size of a slotted liner would control
production rates and minimize pressure drop along the wellbore
• Gravel packs are used in high permeability reservoirs. If the well is completed with a slotted
liner, the slots should be placed as far apart as possible. Joshi (1991) states that "this will let
the gravel pack act as a choke and facilitate maintaining minimum pressure drop across the
well length".
Therefore, by selecting the appropriate well geometry, hole size and length, wellbore pressure
drops can be minimized.

Single phase pressure drop

Assuming that the horizontal wellbore can be treated as a horizontal pipe, the single phase flow
pressure drop calculation for oil flow can be written as follows:

(
Δ p = 1.14644 × 10
−5
) fρq 2 L 5 Eq. 4.101
D
where,
Δ p is pressure drop, psia
f is Moody's friction factor, dimensionless
ρ fluid density, gm/cc
q is flowrate at reservoir conditions, RB/d
L is horizontal length, ft
D is internal diameter of pipe, inches
For gas flow, however, the pressure drop calculations are more complex. This is due to friction
which could change the temperature of the gas as it travels through the wellbore. Moreover,
density and viscosity are strong functions of gas pressure and temperature. This would result in a
changing pressure drop per foot length of a well along the entire well length. The Weymouth
equation for dry gas is the simplest equation to estimate pressure drop in a horizontal pipe

qg = 15320
( 2
p1 − p2 D
2
) 16
3
Eq. 4.102
γg TZL
where

qg is gas flowrate, scfd

p1 is pipe inlet pressure, psia

p2 is pipe outlet pressure, psia

L is pipe length, miles
T is average temperature, oR
Z is average gas compressibility factor

Technical Description
420
PIPESIM User Guide

D is pipe diameter, in
γg gas specific gravity
Also, several multiphase correlations (Brill, 1988) are applicable for a single phase flow of either oil
or gas.

Multiphase pressure drop

There is very little discussion on multiphase pressure drop in horizontal wells. Folefac (1991)
studied the effect of two phase flow (hydrocarbon liquid and water are treated as one phase with
identical velocity but averaged properties). The pressure drop along the horizontal wellbore was
similar to that for single phase flow. However, the pressure drop was higher than for single phase
flow for the same volume of fluid intake.
For a horizontal pipe, numerous multiphase flow correlations have been discussed by Brill (p.579)
(1988). Slip velocities between phases make these equations more complex than single phase
flow equations. In general, Joshi (1991) states that, "different multiphase correlations may give
different values of the pressure drop". The various correlations should be compared with actual
pressure drop data. However, measuring the pressure at both ends of a horizontal well and
calibrating the data is very difficult. There is a definite need for further study on multiphase flow in
horizontal wells.

Inflow production profiles

Horizontal wellbore pressure drops also depend upon the type of fluid inflow profiles. Figure 3
shows some horizontal well fluid inflow profiles. On the basis of well boundary condition and
reservoir heterogeneity, several profiles are possible. Joshi (1991) examined the effect of different
fluid entry profiles on the wellbore pressure drop. Depending on the type of profile, Joshi concluded
that the total pressure drop varied from 6 psi to 14.5 psi but it was not large enough to effect the
wellhead pressure.

Technical Description
421
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.4. Horizontal well inflow profiles (Joshi, 1991)

Steady-state productivity
The simplest form of horizontal well productivity calculations are the steady-state analytical
solutions which assume that the pressure at any point in the reservoir is constant over time.
According to Joshi (1991), even though very few reservoirs operate under steady-state conditions,
steady state solutions are widely used because:
Analytical derivation is easy.

Technical Description
422
PIPESIM User Guide

The concepts of expanding drainage boundary over time, effective wellbore radius and shape
factors allows the conversion to either transient or pseudo-steady state results to be quite
straightforward.
Steady-state mathematical results can be verified experimentally.
Giger (1984), Economides (1989), Mukherjee (1988) and numerous others have developed
solutions to predict steady-state productivity. Most are similar in form to the equation given by
Joshi (1988) who simplified the 3-D Laplace equation (Δp=0) by coupling two 2-D problems. This
was based on the assumption that a horizontal well drains an ellipsoidal volume around the
wellbore of length L as shown below.

Figure 4.5. Horizontal Well Drainage Pattern

For isotropic reservoirs kh = kv

kh h Δ p
qh =

( )
2 2

( )
a + a − ( L / 2) h h Eq. 4.103
141.2 μ o Bo ln + ln
L /2 L 2rw
and
0.5

( )
4

a= ( L2 ) 0.5 + 0.25+
2reh
L
Eq. 4.104

where

qh is the flowrate STB / d

a is half the major axis of the drainage ellipse ft

Δ p is the pressure drop psi
L is the horizontal well length ft
h is reservoir height ft
rw is the wellbore radius ft

Technical Description
423
PIPESIM User Guide

reh is the effective drainage radius of horizontal well ft

μo is the oil viscosity cp

Bo is the oil volume formation factor RB / STB

kh is the horizontal permeability mD

If the length of the horizontal well is significantly longer than the reservoir height, that is L >> h,
then the second term in the denominator of the 4.103 (p.423) equation is negligible and the
solution simplifies to

kh h Δ p
qh =
4r eh Eq. 4.105
141.2 μ o Bo ln
L
Muskat (p.585) (1937) suggested a simple transformation to account for permeability anisotropy.
An effective permeability, keff , is defined as

keff = kv kh Eq. 4.106

To account for vertical anisotropy, the reservoir thickness can be modified as follows

kh
h =h Eq. 4.107
kv
In addition, the influence of well eccentricity (distance from the center of the reservoir in the vertical
plane) was also implemented. Thus, equation 4.103 (p.423) was transformed as follows

kh h Δ p
qh =

( ( ))
2 2
a + a − ( L / 2) 2 h h Eq. 4.108
141.2 μ o Bo ln +β ln
L /2 L 2r w
where

kh
β= Eq. 4.109
kv
Productivity comparisons of a horizontal well to that of a vertical well can easily be made by using
the 4.108 (p.424) equation. In converting the productivity of a horizontal well into that of an
equivalent vertical well, an effective wellbore radius can be calculated, rw,eff

rw ,eff = rw exp ( − S ) Eq. 4.110

Technical Description
424
PIPESIM User Guide

The effective wellbore radius is defined as the theoretical well radius which will match the
production rate. Joshi (1991) assumed equal drainage volumes, reh = rev , and equal productivity
indices, J h = J v to give the following for an anisotropic reservoir

( L2 )
r
rw ,eff =
1−( ) +
L
2
βh
βh Eq. 4.111
a 1+ L
2a rw

In this way, controlling parameters like well length, permeability and formation thickness can be
used to screen potential candidates for further simulation studies.
Renard (p.587) (1990) studied the effect of formation damage around the wellbore and modified
the steady-state equation to include skin. Renard (1990) concluded that due to the lower
productivity index per unit length in horizontal wells, the effect of skin damage is not as pronounced
as it is in vertical wells. Celier et al. (p.579) (1989) came to the same conclusion with respect to
the effect of non-Darcy flow.

Pseudo-steady state productivity

It is often desirable to calculate productivity from a reservoir with unique boundary conditions, such
as a gas cap or bottom water drive, finite drainage area, well location, and so on. In these
instances pseudo-steady state equations are employed. Pseudo-steady state or depletion state
begins when the pressure disturbance created by the well is felt at the boundary of the well
drainage area

Pseudo-steady state productivity

Dake (p.580) (1978) and Golan (p.582) (1986) describe the pseudo-steady state flow of an ideal
fluid (liquid) in a closed circular drainage area. Rearranging the equation gives the familiar vertical
well productivity
khΔp
qv =
2.2458 A Eq. 4.112
141.2 μo Bo ln ( 2 ) + S + Sm + Dqv
CArw
where

qv is the flowrate STB / d

Δ p is the pressure drop between the reservoir and the wellbore psi
Sm is the mechanical skin factor due to drilling and completion related well damage

S is the skin due to perforations, partial penetration and stimulation

CA is the shape factor

Dqv is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate dependent skin

Technical Description
425
PIPESIM User Guide

μo is the oil viscosity cp

Bo is the oil volume formation factor RB / STB

k is the formation permeability mD

h is the formation thickness ft
A is the drainage area ft
2

rw is the wellbore radius ft

reh is the drainage radius ft

The above equation can be reduced to the following single-phase pseudo-steady state equation for
oil flow (assuming S = 0, Sm = 0 and Dqv = 0),

kh Δ p
qv =
141.2 μo Bo ln ( )
reh
rw
− 0.75
Eq. 4.113

The equation is for a vertical well which is located in the center of a circular drainage area.
Fetkovich (p.581) (1985) wrote the shape factor in terms of an equivalent skin. This skin was
expressed by choosing a reference shape factor of a well at the center of circular drainage area

CAref
SCA = ln Eq. 4.114
CA
The horizontal well shape factor depends on the following:
• drainage area shape,
• well penetration.

• dimensionless well length, L D =

2h( )
L kv
kh

L is the length of the horizontal well ft

h is the formation thickness ft
kv is the vertical permeability mD

kh is the horizontal permeability mD

Joshi (p.583) (1991) explains that the well performance approaches a fully penetrating infinite-
conductivity fracture when the horizontal well length is sufficiently long, i. e. L D > 10.

Technical Description
426
PIPESIM User Guide

Babu (p.578) (1989), Goode (p.582) (1989) and Mutalik (p.586) (1988) have developed methods
to calculate pseudo-steady state productivity for single phase flow in horizontal wells. Shape
factors were used to arbitrarily locate the well within a rectangular bounded drainage area and the
reservoir was bounded in all directions. Mutalik's model assumed the horizontal well as an infinite
conductivity well (i.e. the wellbore pressure drop is negligible). Babu's model assumed uniform-flux
boundary condition. Goode's model used an approximate infinite conductivity solution where the
constant wellbore pressure is estimated by averaging the pressure values of the uniform-flux
solution along the well length. Goode (1989) also considered the effects of completion type on
productivity. Their model allowed for cased completion, selectively perforated completion, external
casing packers to selectively isolate the wellbore and slotted liner completion with selectively
isolating zones.
Babu (1989) developed a physical model consisting of a well drilled in a box-shaped drainage
volume, parallel to the y direction (see figure 4.6 (p.427)).

Figure 4.6. Babu and Odeh physical model

The derived pseudo-steady productivity equation is

−3
7.08 × 10 b k x k z Δ p
qh =
μo Bo ln ( )
A1
rw
+ ln CH − 0.75 + SR
Eq. 4.115

where

b is extension of the drainage volume in the direction along the well axis Oy ft

SR is the skin factor due to partial penetration

CH is the geometric shape factor defined by Babu (1989)

Technical Description
427
PIPESIM User Guide

k x is the permeability along the x-axis mD

kz is the permeability along the z-axis mD

A1 is the drainage area in the vertical plane

2
ft

rw is wellbore radius ft

The validation rules for Babu and Odeh IPR model are:
• 1. Heel location (X position) must be from 0.0 to ReservoirXDim. In the original publication (see
Babu and Odeh 1989), the requirement in the x-direction for the second case considered is that
heel location (X position) must be from ReservoirXDim * 0.25 to ReservoirXDim * 0.75. While
this requirement is not enforced in this product, user should take caution when operating
outside of the requirement.
• 2. Heel location (Y position) + well length must be less than or equal to the reservoir Y
dimension. Also, heel location (Y position) must be greater than or equal to zero.
• 3. Heel location (Z position) + well radius must be less than or equal to the reservoir thickness.
Also, heel location (Z position) must be greater than or equal to well radius.
The equation 4.115 (p.427) is derived from a very complex general solution. It requires the
calculation of CH and S R . The geometric shape factor accounts effect of permeability anisotropy,
well location and relative dimensions of the drainage volume. The skin accounts for the restricted
entry associated with the well length. Babu (1989) reported an error of less than 3% when
compared to the more rigorous solution.
See Earlougher (1977) (p.581) for reference.

Solution gas-drive IPR

Cheng (1990), Joshi (1991) and Bendakhlia (1989) have studied the inflow performance
relationship (IPR) for solution gas-drive reservoirs. Bendakhlia followed the same approach used
by Vogel for vertical wells and developed the following equation:
2 n
q0
q0,max
= 1−V ( )
pwf
pR
−1−V ( )
pwf
pR
Eq. 4.116

The equation can be used under the assumptions of Vogel's original IPR correlation. The
parameter V and n were correlated as a function of recovery factor.

Horizontal gas wells

The preceding sections have dealt with oil flow. However, horizontal wells are also appropriate for
gas reservoirs. For example, in high-permeability gas reservoirs wellbore turbulence limits the
deliverability of a vertical well. The most effective way, according to Joshi (p.583) (1991), to
reduce gas velocity around the wellbore is to reduce the amount of gas production per unit well

Technical Description
428
PIPESIM User Guide

length which can be accomplished by horizontal wells. Joshi (1991) describes two methods for the
relationship between pressure and flowrate.
The gas flowrate is proportional to the pressure square terms.
Al-Hussainy et al. (p.578) (1966) defined a pseudo-pressure m(p). The gas flowrate is directly
proportional to the pseudo-pressures which is defined as
p
m( p ) = ∫ p0
2 pdp
μ p )z ( p )
(
Eq. 4.117

A comparison of the two methods was done by Joshi (1991). Below reservoir pressures of 2500
psia, either method can be employed. However, above 2500 psia, the pseudo-pressure should be
used.

Steady state gas flow equation

The steady-state equation for gas flow is
−4
7.027 × 10 kh h pe − pwf ( 2
)
2

qh =
μZT ln ( ) reh
rw
′
Eq. 4.118

where

qh is the gas flowrate mmscf / d

pe is the pressure at external radius psia

pwf is the wellbore flowing pressure psia

kh is the horizontal permeability mD

h is the reservoir height ft

reh is the drainage radius ft

rw
′ is the effective wellbore radius ft

μ is the average viscosity cp

Z is the average compressibility factor
T is the reservoir temperature o
R

Pseudo steady state gas flow equation

The pseudo-steady state gas flow equation can be written as follows (Joshi, 1991)

Technical Description
429
PIPESIM User Guide

−4
( 2
7.027 × 10 kh pr − pwf
2
)
qh =
reh Eq. 4.119
μZT ln − 0.75 + S + Sm + Sca − C + Dqh
rw
where

2.222 × 10 ( γG kahβ )
−15

D= 2 Eq. 4.120
μ pwf rw h p

In equation 4.120 (p.430), the high velocity flow coefficient is given by:
10 −1.1045
β = 2.73 × 10 ka Eq. 4.121

where

qh is the gas flowrate mmscf / d

pr is the average reservoir pressure psia

pwf is the wellbore flowing pressure psia

S is the negative skin factor due to horizontal well (or well stimulation)

Sm is the mechanical skin damage

Sca is the shape related skin factor

C is the shape factor conversion constant

k is the permeability mD
h is the reservoir height ft
reh is the drainage radius ft

rw is the wellbore radius ft

μ is the average viscosity cp

Z is the average compressibility factor
T is the reservoir temperature o
R

μ pwf is the gas viscosity at well flowing conditions cp

β is the high velocity flow coefficient 1 / ft

γG is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

Technical Description
430
PIPESIM User Guide

hp is the perforated interval ft

ka is the permeability in the near wellbore region mD

The equation 4.119 (p.430) is based upon circular drainage area as a reference area. In this
equation, Dqh is the turbulence term, also called turbulence skin, or rate dependent skin factor .
(see Joshi (p.583) (1991), Brown (p.579) (1984) and Golan and Whitson (p.582) (1986)). This
term accounts for the extra pressure drop in the near wellbore region due to high gas velocity. This
term was neglected when dealing with oil flow. In addition, the term makes the solution of 4.119
(p.430) iterative.
The equation 4.121 (p.430) is given in Golan and Whitson (p.582) (1986)

Conclusions
The following can be concluded from this review:
The assumption of constant pressure drop in the wellbore is no longer valid, especially for long well
lengths and when turbulent/multiphase flow occurs.
More realistic production geometries are being used in the existing models to calculate horizontal
well productivity.
Existing models need to be verified and validated with actual field data. The absence of case
studies in the literature is indicative of the 'tight-hole' status of most horizontal well projects.

Distributed productivity index method

for liquid reservoirs

Q = J (Pws − Pwf ) L Eq. 4.122

for gas reservoirs

( 2
Q = J Pws − Pwf L
2
) Eq. 4.123

where J is the distributed productivity index.

4.2.3 Oil / water relative permeability tables

( ) (
A table of oil and water relative permeabilities as functions of water saturation (kro Swat , krw Swat ))
can be defined in conjunction with the Pseudo steady-state (p.392) or Tranisent (p.397) liquid IPRs
for vertical completions or the Steady state (p.422) or Pseudo-steady state (p.425) Liquid IPRs for
horizontal completions.
If the reservoir water saturation is known, the water cut of the fluid flowing into the well can be
calculated:

Technical Description
431
PIPESIM User Guide

Qw krw (Swat ) / μw
WCUT = 100 ⋅ = 100 ⋅ Eq. 4.124
Qo + Qw kro (Swat ) / μo + krw (Swat ) / μw
Alternatively, if the water cut is known, the water saturation can be found by solving the same
equation for the water saturation, Swat .
The oil and water inflows can then calculated separately using the relevant liquid IPR equation and
summed to give the liquid flow rate.

Keywords
Data is entered, in keyword mode, using the Additional engine keyword feature (p.590). Use the
PERMTAB (p.667) keyword to define the table. Use the LAYER keyword to define the reservoir
water saturation, if required.
See also Other IPR methods (p.386)

4.2.4 Coning
In order to simulate gas and/or water breakthrough from the reservoir, flowrate-dependent values
of GOR and watercut may be entered. In a homogeneous reservoir, analysis of the radial flow
behavior of reservoir fluids moving towards a producing well shows that the rate dependent
phenomenon of coning may be important. The effect of increasing fluid velocity and energy loss in
the vicinity of a well leads to the local distortion of a gas-oil contact or a water-oil contact. The gas
and water in the vicinity of the producing wellbore can therefore flow towards the perforation. The
relative permeability to oil in the pore spaces around the wellbore decreases as gas and water
saturation increase. The local saturations can be significantly different from the bulk average
saturations (at distances such as a few hundred meters from the wellbore). The prediction of
coning is important since it leads to decisions regarding:
• Preferred initial completions
• Estimation of cone arrival time at a producing well
• Prediction of fluid production rates after cone arrival
• Design of preferred well spacing

Technical Description
432
PIPESIM User Guide

4.3 Equipment
4.3.1 Chokes, Valves and Fittings
Choke
A choke is a mechanical device that limits the flow rate through the pipe. The fluid velocity
increases through the constriction and for compressible fluids can reach the sonic velocity. As the
pressure difference across the choke increases the flow velocity increases too. At the point the
velocity becomes sonic, the flow is said to be critical, and is independent of the down stream
pressure. See Brill and Mukerjee (p.585) (1999) for a detailed description of flow through chokes
and restrictions.

Technical Description
433
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.7. Typical flow-pressure relationship for a choke

The choke is modeled by splitting the flow into two regimes:

flow is subcritical P < P

crit down < Pup q < qcrit
flow is critical 0 < P down < Pup q = qcrit

where

Pup is the upstream pressure

/ 2
psi or lbf in N /m
2

Pdown is the downstream pressure psi or lbf / in N /m

2 2

is the critical (downstream) pressure psi or lbf / in N /m

2 2
Pcrit
q is the flow rate lb / s kg / s
qcrit is the critical flow rate lb / s kg / s

The choke performance is determined by the following:

1. The choke geometry and fluid properties
2. The subcritical flow correlation
3. The critical pressure ratio
4. The critical flow correlation

Choke geometry
The main choke parameters are:

Technical Description
434
PIPESIM User Guide

dup upstream diameter in

dbean constriction (bean) diameter in

cv flow coefficient (used in the Ashford & Pierce (p.436) correlation)

cvL liquid flow coefficient (used in the Mechanistic (p.438) correlation)

cvG gas flow coefficient (used in the Mechanistic (p.438) correlation)

cd discharge coefficient (used for calculating the flow coefficients)

The flow coefficients can either be specified or calculated from the discharge coefficient:

cd
cv = 4
Eq. 4.125
1− δ
where:

dbean is the diameter ratio dimensionless

δ=
dup

Subcritical flow correlations

There are essentially two subcritical flow models used in PIPESIM, the Mechanistic (p.438)
correlation and Ashford and Pierce (p.436) (1975) correlation . A third correlation API-14B (p.439)
is a modification of the Mechanistic correlation

Critical pressure ratio

For single phase liquids, the sonic velocity is high and flow is always subcritical. For single phase
gas flow and multiphase flow, the critical pressure is given by

Pcrit = CPR ⋅ Pup Eq. 4.126

The value of the critical pressure ratio CPR can be set by the user or calculated (p.439).

Critical flow correlations

A critical flow correlation can be used to set the critical flow rate qcrit . There is a danger that this will
not match the subcritical flow at the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM therefore adjusts the
subcritical flow correlation to ensure the flow is correct at the critical pressure. To do this it first
calculates the subcritical flow at the critical pressure:

qlim = qsub(Pup , Pdown ) evaluated at Pdown = Pcrit

Technical Description
435
PIPESIM User Guide

The choke downstream pressure is then calculated from the subcritical correlation using the
( )
upstream pressure and a scaled flow rate qlim/ qcrit q . This matching can be turned off, in which
case the critical flow correlation is ignored when calculating the pressure drop, although it is used
for reporting purposes.
One of twelve correlations of four distinct types can be selected for the critical flow:
1. Mechanistic (p.440), API-14B (p.440)
2. Ashford Pierce (p.440), A-P Tulsa, Poettmann-Beck (p.440)
3. Omana (p.440)
4. Achong (p.441), Baxendale (p.441), Gilbert (p.441), Pilehvari (p.441), Ros (p.441), User
defined (p.441)

Engine keywords
See Choke keyword (p.671)

Choke subcritical flow correlations

Two subcritical flow correlations, Ashford-Pierce (p.436) and Mechanistic (p.438) are available. A
third, API 14B (p.439) is a version of the mechanistic correlation.

Ashford-Pierce
Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.578) give the following equation for oil flow rate through a choke:
2
c1cv (64dbean ) (
1 − ε + RL 1 − ε
k
)/k γo + c3 γG Rs + F wo γw
1 Eq. 4.127
qo = ⋅ Pup ⋅ −1/ γ ⋅ ⋅
c2 1 + RL ε Bo + F wo γo + c3 γG R + F wo γw
where

Bo is the oil formation factor volume factor bbl / STB

c1 = 3.51 is a constant

c2 = 198.6 is a constant

c3 = 0.000217 is a constant

cv is the flow coefficient

dbean is the bean diameter 1 / 64 in

γ −1 dimensionless
k=
γ
F wo is the upstream water to oil ratio

Technical Description
436
PIPESIM User Guide

Pup is the upstream pressure

Pdown is the downstream pressure

qo is the oil flow rate at standard conditions bbl / d

Rs is the upstream gas oil ratio scf / STB

R is the gas oil ratio at standard conditions scf / STB

T up Zup (R − Rs ) is the upstream gas liquid ratio dimensionless

RL =
198.6 Pup

Pdown is the pressure ratio dimensionless

ε=
Pup

Cp is the ratio of specific heats dimensionless

γ=
CV

γo is the upstream oil specific gravity dimensionless

γG is the upstream gas specific gravity dimensionless

γw is the upstream water specific gravity dimensionless

The Ashford and Pierce formula is based on the following assumptions:

• polytropic expansion of gas-liquid mixture
• equal gas and liquid velocities at the throat
• incompressible liquid phase
• liquid dispersed in a continuous gas phase
• negligible friction losses

Recommended values for the flow coefficient cv are:

diameter in 1/64 in d
bean
8 0.125 1.2
12 0.1875 1.2
20 0.3125 0.976
24 0.375 0.96
32 0.5 0.95

Technical Description
437
PIPESIM User Guide

Mechanistic correlation
The pressure drop across the choke is given by the weighted average of the liquid and gas phase
pressure drops:

ΔP = λ L ⋅ Δ pL + λG ⋅ Δ pG Eq. 4.128

The liquid phase pressure drop is given by Bernouilli's equation:

2

( )
ρn v
ΔpL = Eq. 4.129
2⋅c c ⋅Z
vL L

The gas phase pressure drop is given by Bernouilli's equation:

2

( )
ρn v
Δ pG = Eq. 4.130
2⋅c
cvG ⋅ Z
G

q is the mixture velocity through ft / s m/s

v= the choke
Abean ⋅ ρ
n

q is the mass flow rate lb / s kg / s

π ⋅ dbean
2 is the choke area at the ft
2
m
2

Abean = constriction
4
is the no-slip density lb / ft kg / m
3 3
ρn = λ L ⋅ ρ L + λG ⋅ ρG

λ L and λG are the liquid and gas phase

flowing fractions
are the liquid and gas phase lb / ft kg / m
3 3
ρ L and ρG
densities

Z L = 1 and are the liquid and gas

compressibilities
4
0.41 + 0.35 δ ΔP
ZG = 1 − ⋅
γ Pup
c is a conversion factor for c = 144 ⋅ g c=1
engineering units
lb / ( ft ⋅ s ) / psi
2

Total pressure drop for the two-phase system is therefore:

2
ρn ⋅ v λL λG
ΔP = ⋅ + Eq. 4.131
2⋅c 2 2
(cvL ⋅ ZL ) (cvG ⋅ ZG )

Technical Description
438
PIPESIM User Guide

API 14-B formulation

The API 14-B formulation is similar to the mechanistic formulation, with the addition of the following
assumptions:
1. Liquid flow through the choke is incompressible. The discharge coefficient is constant with a
value of

cvL = 0.85.
2. Subcritical gas flow through the choke is adiabatic and compressible. The discharge coefficient
is constant with a value of

cvG = 0.9.

Choke critical pressure ratio

The critical pressure ratio CPR is used to determine the downstream pressure when critical flow
occurs in the choke. You can set a value of CPR or it can be calculated, either from the single-
phase gas formula (used with the Mechanistic subcritical flow correlation) or using the Ashford and
Pierce formula (used with the Ashford and Pierce subcritical flow correlation).

Single phase gas critical pressure ratio

For a single phase gas flow, the critical pressure is given as a function of the specific heat ratio:
γ
2 γ −1
CPR = Eq. 4.132
γ +1

/
The value of γ = CP CV is calculated by the program, but can be overridden by the user. For
diatomic gases (for example air) γ ≈ 1.4 and CPR = 0.53

Ashford and Pierce critical pressure ratio

∂ qo
Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.578) give the critical flow condition = 0 at ε = CPR . 4.127 (p.436) for
∂ε
qo and simplifying gives:

∂ 1 − ε + RL 1 − ε ( k
)/k
=0 Eq. 4.133
∂ε 1 + RL ε
−1/ γ

This can be manipulated to give an equation for ε = CPR :

γ
−1/ γ 2
2 RL
(1 + RL ε ) =
γ
⋅ε
− γ +1
( (
⋅ 1 − ε + RL ⋅ 1 − ε
k
) / k) Eq. 4.134

Technical Description
439
PIPESIM User Guide

Choke critical flow correlations

The following choke correlations are available:

Ashford and Pierce / Sachdeva / Poetmann-Beck

The Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.578) critical flow can be obtained by evaluating 4.127 (p.436) at
ε = CPR , determined from 4.134 (p.439). The stock tank critical oil flow rate takes the form:
2
c1cv (64dbean ) 1 − ε + RL 1 − ε ( k
)/k γo + c3 γg Rs + F wo γw
1 Eq. 4.135
qo = ⋅ Pup ⋅ −1/ γ ⋅ ⋅
c2 1 + RL ε Bo + F wo γo + c3 γg R + F wo γw
The Sachdeva (p.577) critical flow correlation takes a similar form:

2 RL + 0.76 1
qo = 0.858cv (64dbean ) ⋅ Pup ⋅ ⋅
RL + 0.56 Bo + F wo
Eq. 4.136
1
⋅ 2 −1
(62.4( γo + c3 γg R + Fwo γw )) + (62.4( γo + c3 γg Rs + Fwo γw ))
The Poetmann-Beck (p.587) critical flow correlation takes a similar form:

RL + 0.766 1 ρ L + R L ρG
qo = 88992 ⋅ 9273.6 ⋅ 0.4513 ⋅ Abean ⋅ Pup ⋅ ⋅
RL + 0.5663 5.61 ρ L + 0.0765 γG R 3 Eq. 4.137
ρ + R L ρG
2 L

Mechanistic / API14B
The critical mass flow rate can be found by inverting the 4.131 (p.438) and evaluating it at the
critical value of the pressure drop:

2 g ⋅ ρn ⋅ Δ P
q = Abean
λL λG Eq. 4.138
c1 ⋅ 2 + 2
(cvL ⋅ ZL ) (cvG ⋅ ZG )
(
ΔP = 1 − CPR Pup ) Eq. 4.139

The API14B critical flow uses the mechanistic critical flow formula, with cvL = 0.85 and cvG = 0.9

Omana correlation
The Omana (p.586) correlation gives a formula for the stock tank critical liquid flow rate:
−0.657
qL = 1.953 × 10 ⋅ σ L
−3 −1.245
⋅ ρL
1.545
(
⋅ 1 + RL ) 1.8
⋅ dbean ⋅ ρG
−3.49 3.19
⋅ Pup Eq. 4.140

where:

Technical Description
440
PIPESIM User Guide

σ surface tension at upstream conditions (dynes/cm)

Gilbert, Ros, Baxendall, Achong, Pilehvari and user defined correlations

The equations proposed by Gilbert, Ros, Baxendall, Archong and Pilehvari (Ghassan (p.582)) for
stock tank critical liquid flow are all of the form:
c 1/e
Pup ⋅ (64dbean )
qL = Eq. 4.141
b
a ⋅ GLR

where
GLR - producing gas liquid ratio (scf/STB)
a, b, c - empirical coefficient given below

Correlation a b c e
Achong 3.82 0.650 1.88 1
Baxendall 9.56 0.546 1.93 1
Gilbert 10 0.546 1.89 1
Pilehvari 46.67 0.313 2.11 1
Ros 17.4 0.5 2.00 1

Users can also define their own parameters for this formula by using engine keywords (p.671). For
example:

CHOKE CCORR=USER a=0.1 b=0.546 c=1.89 e=1.0 ADJUSTSC dbean = 3

Keywords can be entered in the GUI by replacing the choke with an Engine Keyword Tool.

Flow control valves mechanistic theory

PIPESIM's mechanistic choke equation is based on the theory for subcritical flow (see Brill and
Mukherjee, 1969).

Subcritical flow
The mass flow rate is given in terms of the pressure drop as follows:

2gρ ns Δ P
Qsc = 12 Abean
fL fG Eq. 4.142
2 + 2
(Z L cL ) (ZG cG )
where:

f L and f G are the liquid and gas phase fraction

Technical Description
441
PIPESIM User Guide

cL and cG are the liquid and gas flow coefficient

Abean is the choke cross-section

ΔP is the pressure drop, which is given by:

ΔP = f L ΔP L + f G ΔP G Eq. 4.143

and

( )
2
1 q
ΔP L = Eq. 4.144
2 g ρns (12Z L cL Abean)

( )(
2
1 q
ΔP G = Eq. 4.145
2 g ρns 12Z L cL Abean )

where

ZL = 1 is the liquid compressibility factor

ZG = ZG (k , DP , Pup ) is the gas compressibility factor

ρns = f L ρ L + f G ρG is the no slip density

Critical flow
The critical mass flow is given by the subcritical correlation evaluated at the critical pressure drop:

(
ΔP crit = Pup 1 − CPR ) Eq. 4.146

where CPR is the critical pressure ratio.

Fittings
The pressure drop across a fitting is given by the Crane Technical Paper 410 (p.580):
2
ρ ⋅v
ΔP = K ⋅ Eq. 4.147
2⋅c

K is a dimensionless friction factor or resistance

v is the fluid velocity ft / s m/s
ρ is the fluid density lb / ft kg / m
3 3

c is a conversion factor for engineering units c = 144 ⋅ g lb / ( ft ⋅ s ) / psi c = 1

2

Technical Description
442
PIPESIM User Guide

The velocity of the fluid in the fitting depends on the internal diameter of the fitting where the
velocity is measured. If the fitting has two internal diameters, d1 and d2, the velocities are related
by:
2 2
ρ1 ⋅ π ⋅ d1 ⋅ v1 ρ2 ⋅ π ⋅ d2 ⋅ v2
Eq. 4.148
= =q
4 4
For incompressible fluids the density can be taken as constant and the velocities are inversely
proportional to the square of the diameters. Therefore the pressure drop can be written in terms of
either velocity:
2 2
ρ ⋅ v1 ρ ⋅ v2
Eq. 4.149
ΔP = K 1 ⋅ = K2 ⋅
2⋅c 2⋅c
The fitting resistances are related by:
1
K2 = 4 ⋅ K1 Eq. 4.150
δ

/
and δ = d1 d2 is the ratio of the internal diameters.

Comparison with the choke model

The fitting can be modeled as a choke (p.433) using a mechanistic sub-critical (p.438) liquid flow
correlation. The choke diameter is taken as the minimum diameter of the fitting d1 and the flow
coefficient is calculated from the fitting resistance at d1:

1
cv = Eq. 4.151
K1

Resistance calculation
The fitting resistance K can be specified by the user. Since it is a function of the internal diameter,
d , this value must also be specified to allow the velocity to be calculated correctly.
The fitting resistance can also be calculated by PIPESIM using formulae from the Crane Technical
Paper 410 (p.580). The resistance is a function of the fitting type, the pipe nominal diameter, d N
the internal diameter, d2 and the diameter of any constriction, d1. These Crane Technical Paper
410 (p.580) formula can be written as:

K 1 = a1 ⋅ f T (d N ) + a2 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ 1 − δ ( 2
) + a ⋅ (1 − δ )
3
2 2
Eq. 4.152

The first term a1 ⋅ f T represents friction due to the shape of the pipe fitting, the second term
a2 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ (1 − δ ) is the resistance due to sudden contraction through any constriction in the fitting
2

Technical Description
443
PIPESIM User Guide

2 2
and the third term a3 ⋅ 1 − δ ( ) is the resistance due to sudden expansion after a constriction. The

constants a1, a2 and a3 depend on the fitting type and are given by:

Fitting a1 a2 a3
Check Swing Valve Conventional 100 0 0
Check Swing Valve Clearway 50 0 0
Standard 90 degree Elbow 30 0 0
Standard 45 degree Elbow 16 0 0
Standard 90 degree Short Radius Elbow 14 0 0
Standard 90 degree Long Radius Elbow 12 0 0
Tee - Flow through run 20 0 0
Tee - Flow through branch 60 0 0
Check Lift Globe Valve 600 δ δ
Globe Valve Conventional 340 δ δ
Angle Valve Conventional 150 δ δ
Globe Valve Y-Pattern 55 δ δ
Check Lift Angle Valve 55 δ δ
Gate Valve θ < 45
o 8 θ θ
1.6 ⋅ sin 2.6 ⋅ sin
2 2
o
Gate Valve 45 < θ < 180
o 8 θ 1
sin
2
Ball Valve θ < 45
o 3 θ θ
1.6 ⋅ sin 2.6 ⋅ sin
2 2
o
Ball Valve 45 < θ < 180
o 3 θ 1
sin
2

The friction factor f T , depends on the nominal size of the pipe:

Nominal size d N (inch) f T

1/2 .027
3/4 .025
1 .023
1 1/4 .022
1 1/2 .021

Technical Description
444
PIPESIM User Guide

2 .019
2 1/12, 3 .018
4 .017
5 .016
6 .015
8 - 10 .014
12 - 16 .013
18 - 24 .012

4.3.2 Compressors, Pumps, and Expanders

Centrifugal pumps and compressors

Centrifugal pumps and compressors are described by curves of head and efficiency as functions of
the flow rate for a given speed:

Head (q , N c ) = Head c (q ) Eq. 4.153

η (q , Nc ) = ηc (q ) Eq. 4.154

where:

Head is the head ft ⋅ lbf / lb Nm / kg

Technical Description
445
PIPESIM User Guide

η is the efficiency, expressed as a fraction, 0 < η ≤ 1

q is the flow rate lb / s kg / s
Nc is the compressor speed for the curve

The fan laws can be used to determine the head and efficiency for speeds N that differ from the
curve speed :

( ) ( )
2
N q
Head (q , N ) = Head c Eq. 4.155
Nc N / Nc

η (q , N ) = η c (q
N / Nc ) Eq. 4.156

The change in pressure of the fluid and the power needed to run the pump or compressor can be
determined from the head and efficiency:

ΔP = Pout − Pin = c1 ⋅ Head ⋅ ρ Eq. 4.157

c2 ⋅ q ⋅ Head
Power = Eq. 4.158
η
where

ρ (Pin , T in ) + ρ (Pout , T out ) is the average density lb / ft kg / m

3 3

ρ =
2
Pin is the suction pressure
/ 2
psi or lbf in N /m
2

is the discharge pressure psi or lbf / in N /m

2 2
Pout

T in is the suction temperature o

R K

T out is the discharge temperature o

R K

Power is the power required by the hp W

pump or compressor

( )
c1 is a conversion factor for 1 in
2
engineering units
144 ft

c2 is a conversion factor for 1 hp

engineering units 550 ft ⋅ lbf / s

The outlet temperature depends on how much of the pump energy is transferred to the fluid. Three
different models can be used:

Technical Description
446
PIPESIM User Guide

( ) )
Adiabatic Route: γ −1
T in Pout γ
ΔT = T out − T in = ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.159
η Pin

( ) )
Polytropic Route: n −1
Pout n
ΔT = T out − T in = T in ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.160
Pin

Mollier Route (Isentropic): S ( P , T ) = S ( P , T ) Eq. 4.161

out out in in

where

γ (Pin , T in ) + γ (Pout , T out ) is the average value of γ

γ =
2
Cp is the ratio of specific heats
γ=
CV

n (Pin , T in ) + n (Pout , T out ) is the average value of n

n =
2
n γ is the polytropic coefficient
=η⋅
n−1 γ −1
S is the specific entropy BTU J
o
lb ⋅ F kg ⋅ K

Note that:
• Only a fraction η of the power is converted to head. When using the adiabatic route, the energy
that is not converted to head is assumed to be converted to fluid heat. The usual adiabatic
temperature increase is multiplied by a factor 1 / η ≥ 1.
n
• The polytropic route PV = constant can be used to model constant pressure (n = 0) , constant
temperature (n = 1) , constant enthalpy (n = γ ) and constant volume (n = ∞ ) changes as well
as intermediate routes. PIPESIM uses a value of n that is a function of the efficiency ( η ) and
the specific heat ratio ( γ ). This value can only be used when η > ( γ − 1) / γ .
• In the special case when the efficiency η = 1, the polytropic coefficient equals the specific heat
ratio n = γ and the polytropic and adiabatic formulas are the same.
• The Mollier Route can only be used in compositional models, the PIPESIM blackoil model does
not calculate entropy.

Engine keywords
See compressor keywords (p.677).

Technical Description
447
PIPESIM User Guide

Reciprocating compressor operation

This graph shows how the reciprocating compressor will operate for various field deliverabilities:

Note the following:

1. If the field deliverability falls below the minimum compressor flowrate, recycle mode will be
invoked. Due to the low pressure operation in this region, it may be necessary to add a reverse
block to the branch containing the compressor.
2. If the field deliverability falls below the minimum suction pressure of the compressor, no solution
is possible.
3. Always run the network model in Wells Offline mode, with no reverse blocks set.

Electrical submersible pumps (ESP)

General
The electric submersible pump (ESP) is perhaps the most versatile of the artificial lift methods. The
ESP comprises a down hole pump, electric power cable, motor and surface controls. In a typical
application, the down hole pump is suspended on a tubing string hung on the wellhead and is
submerged in the well fluid. The pump is close-coupled to a submersible electric motor that
receives power through the power cable and surface controls.
ESPs are used to produce a variety of fluids and the gas, chemicals and contaminants commonly
found in these fluids. Aggressive fluids can be produced with special materials and coatings. Sand
and similar abrasive contaminants can be produced with acceptable pump life by using modified
pumps and operation procedures.

Technical Description
448
PIPESIM User Guide

ESPs usually do not require storage enclosures, foundation pads, or guard fences. An ESP can be
operated in a deviated or directionally drilled well, although the recommended operating position is
in a vertical section of the well.
The ESP has the broadest producing range of any artificial lift method ranging from 100 b/d of total
fluid up to 90,000 b/d.
ESPs are currently operated in wells with bottom hole temperatures up to 350 degree Fahrenheit.
Operation at elevated ambient temperatures require special components in the motor and power
cables of sustained operation at high temperatures, and have efficiently lifted fluids in wells deeper
than 12,000 ft. System efficiency ranges from 18 to 68%, depending on fluid volume, net lift and
pump type.

ESP system components: motor

The ESP system's prime mover is the submersible motor. The motor is a two-pole, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction type. Motors run at a nominal speed of 3,500 rev/min in 60-Hz operation.
Motors are filled with a highly refined mineral oil that provides dielectrical strength, bearing
lubrication and thermal conductivity. The design and operation voltage of these motors can be as
low as 230 volt or as high as 4,000 volt. Amperage requirement may be from 17 to 110 amps. The
required horsepower is achieved by simply increasing the length of the motor section. The motor is
made up of rotors, usually about 12 to 18 inches (300-460 mm) in length that are mounted on a
shaft and located in the electrical field (stator) mounted within the steel housing. The larger single
motor assemblies will approach 33 feet (10 m) in length and will be rated up to 400 horsepower,
while tandem motors will approach 90 feet (27.5 m) in length and will have a rating up to 750
horsepower. The rotor is also composed of a group of electromagnets in a cylinder with the poles
facing the stator poles. The speed at which the stator field rotates is the synchronous speed, and
can be computed from the equation:
120 f
v= Eq. 4.162
M
Where: v is speed in rev/min, f is frequency in cycles/sec and M is number of magnetic poles.
The number of poles the stator contains is determined by the manufacturer. Therefore to change
the speed of the stator magnetic field, the frequency will have to change.
Heat generated by the motor is transferred to the well fluid as it flows past the motor housing.
Because the motor relies on the flow of well fluid for cooling, a standard ESP should never be set
at or below the well perforations or producing interval, unless the motor is shrouded.
Motors are manufactured in four different diameters (series) 3.75, 4.56, 5.40 and 7.8 in. Thus
motors can be used in casing as small as 4.5 in. 60-Hz horsepower capabilities range from a low of
7.5 hp in 3.75-in series to a high of 1,000 hp in the 7.38-in series.
Motor construction may be single section or several "tandems" bolted together to reach a specific
horsepower. Motors are selected on the basis of the maximum diameter that can be run easily in a
given casing size.

ESP system components: pumps

The ESP is a multistage centrifugal pump. Each stage of a submersible pump consists of a rotating
impeller and a stationary diffuser. The pressure-energy change is accomplished as the liquid being
pumped surrounds the impeller. As the impeller rotates it imparts two rotating motion components

Technical Description
449
PIPESIM User Guide

to the liquid: one is in a radial direction outward from the center of the impeller (centrifugal force),
the other motion moves in a direction tangential to the outside diameter of the impeller. The
resultant of these two components is the actual direction of flow. The type of stage used
determines the rate of fluid production. The number of stages determines the total design head
generated and the motor horsepower required. The design falls into one of two general categories:
the smaller flow pumps are generally of radial flow design. As the pumps reach design flows of
approximately 1,900 B/D,the design change to a mixed flow.
The impellers are of a fully enclosed curved vane design, whose maximum efficiency is a function
of the impeller design and type and whose operating efficiency is a function of the percent of
design capacity at which the pump is operated. The mathematical relationship between head,
capacity, efficiency and brake horse power is expressed as:

qv Hγ
Power = Eq. 4.163
η
Where: qv is the volume flow rate, H is the head, γ is the fluid specific gravity and η is the pump
efficiency
The discharge rate of a submersible centrifugal pump depends on the rotational speed (rpm), size
of the impeller, impeller design, number of stages, the dynamic head against which the pump is
operating and the physical properties of the fluid being pumped. The total dynamic head of the
pump is the product of the number of stages and the head generated by each stage.
"Bolt-on" design makes it possible to vary the capacity and total head of a pump by using more
than one pump section. However, large-capacity pumps typically have integrated head and bases.

Pump design data

Design Production rate
Desired flowrate through the pump in stock-tank units. The actual flowing quantity will be
computed.
Design Outlet Pressure
the required outlet pressure of the PIPESIM model when the pump is installed. It is
recommended to only model the well, and no associated flowline or riser, while designing
the ESP system. In this case the outlet pressure would then be the wellhead pressure
Static Reservoir Pressure
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.
Water cut
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.
GOR (or GLR)
If you entered a value previously, that value is preserved. However, if this field is empty,
the value is taken from the PIPESIM model.

Technical Description
450
PIPESIM User Guide

Pump Depth
The depth at which the pump is to be installed. This is taken from the PIPESIM model if a
pump is already installed or can be entered.
Casing ID
The casing size that the pump has to fit into. Usually 3.38 to 11.25 in.
Design Frequency
The frequency/speed that the pump is expected to run at.
Gas Separator Efficiency
The efficiency of the gas separator if installed.
Head factor
Allows the pump efficiency to be factored (default = 1).
Viscosity Correction
All pump performance curves are based on water systems, this option will correct for oil
viscosity.
Select Pump
Will use the available data to select suitable pumps from the database. The pump intake
conditions will first be computed. The resulting pump list can be sorted by efficiency or
Maximum flowrate by selecting the column header. The Manufactures to select from can
be filtered. Errors in the simulation.

Pump parameters
Calculate
Calculate pump performance at the conditions specified. Errors in the simulation
Stage-by-stage
Perform the stage calculations on a stage-by-stage basis. Default = stage-by-stage.
Selected Pump
The pump selected, by the user, from the design data
No. of Stages required
The computed number of stages for this pump under these conditions.
Pump efficiency @ Design rate
The efficiency of the pump at the design production rate
Pump power required
The power required for this pump to deliver the required flowrate.
Pump intake pressure
The computed pump intake pressure.
Pump discharge pressure
The computed pump discharge pressure.

Technical Description
451
PIPESIM User Guide

Head required
The computed pump head required
Liquid density
The computed liquid density at the pump intake
Free gas fraction at inlet conditions
The computed gas fraction.
Pump performance plot
plot performance curves at different speeds
Pump curves
plot standard performance curves
Install pump
Install the pump into the tubing of model. This will replace any existing ESP but not gas lift
valves.
See also: Select a motor (p.234), Select a cable

Progressive cavity pump (PCP)

General
Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCP’s) are a special type of rotary positive displacement pump
sometimes referred to as “single-screw pumps”. Unlike ESP’s, PCP performance is based on the
volume of fluid displaced and not on the pressure increase dynamically generated through the
pump. PCP’s are an increasingly common form of artificial lift for low- to moderate-rate wells,
especially onshore and for heavy (solid laden) fluids.
Invented in the late 1920’s by Rene Moineau, PCP’s were not used in the oilfield until the late
1970’s. Their use is becoming increasingly common for low- to moderate- rate onshore wells,
particularly for heavy-oil and sand-laden fluids. (See SPE Production Engineering Handbook
(p. 0 ).)
PCP systems have several advantages over other lift methods:
• Overall high energy efficiency (typically 55-75%)
• Ability to handle solids
• Ability to tolerate free gas
• No valves or reciprocating parts
• Good resistance to abrasion
• Low internal shear rates (limits fluid emulsification through agitation)
• Relatively lower power costs (prime mover capacity fully utilized)
• Relatively simple installation and operation (low maintenance)
• Low profile surface equipment and noise levels
Limitations of PCP systems include:
• Maximum production rates of approximately 5000 BPD

Technical Description
452
PIPESIM User Guide

• The maximum installation depth is about 4,500 ft.

• Maximum operating temperature of approximately 300 º F.
• Corrosive fluids may damage elastomer and result in higher slippage
• Pump stator may sustain permanent damage if run dry even for short periods
• Rod sting and tubing wear can be problematic for directional and horizontal wells (though
downhole drives can be used to avoid this)

Principle of operation
PCP’s are most commonly driven by surface mounted electrical motors (Figure 4.8 (p.453)),
although downhole electric and hydraulic drive systems are available.
A PCP is comprised of two helical gears, a steel rotating gear called the rotor (“internal gear”) and
a stationary gear called the stator (“external gear”), which is commonly made of elastomer but may
be steel as well. The rotor is positioned inside the stator and rotates along the longitudinal axis
(Figure 4.8 (p.453)):

Figure 4.8. PCP Pump Illustration

Technical Description
453
PIPESIM User Guide

The volume between the stator and rotor forms a sealed cavity that trap the fluid and as the rotor
turns this cavity “progresses” the fluid from the inlet to the outlet of the pump. The volume of the
cavity and the rotational speed (N) determine the flow rate achieved by the pump.
The volume of the cavity may be calculated based on geometric parameters. The volume of the
cavity is defined by the diameter of the rotor (Dr ) times the stator pitch length (Ls ) times the
eccentricity (e). The eccentricity is defined as the distance between the centerlines of the major
and minor diameters of the rotor.
Therefore, the flow rate through the pump can be expressed as:
Q = 4eDrLsN
In field units, Ps , e and D are in feet and N in revolutions per-minute to give a rate in ft3/min.
Multiply by 256.46 to convert to BPD. (See Bellarby (p. 0 ).) The geometric parameters required
for this calculation vary considerably among vendors and are generally not published.
Hydraulic power can then be calculated by:
Hhp = 1.7 X 10-5 Δ PQ
Where Δ P is the pressure differential across the pump (psi) and Q is rate (BPD).
In practice, the clearance between the rotor and stator are not perfect due mainly to deformation of
the elastomeric stator as a function of pressure, temperature, and wear. This causes some of the
fluid to slip back into preceding cavities. Slip increases with increasing pressure and number of
stages. Higher viscosity fluids exhibit less slip.
For simulation purposes, PCP performance curves are generally used. While the format of
performance curves varies by vendor, PIPESIM has adopted the format suggested by ISO 15136-1
(2009) (p. 0 ). PIPESIM provides performance curves from several vendors based on reference
conditions (generally water at standard conditions). While catalog performance curves for
rotodynamic-type pumps (such as ESP’s) are generally consistent with field performance, PCP
performance curves vary considerably based on the operating conditions (pressure and
temperature) as well as the fluid properties. Therefore, the catalog curves available from within
PIPESIM should only be used for preliminary analysis. It is common for PCP’s to undergo “bench
tests” to generate performance curves for specific pumps at intended operating conditions. It is
therefore recommended that these curves be used for more detailed simulation studies.

Viscosity effects
PIPESIM has the option to apply a viscosity correction to reduce slippage effects for higher
viscosity fluids. The method of Karassik et al. (p. 0 ) is used.

qv 2 (1)
v1
= Eq. 4.164
qv 1 v2

Where v = the kinematic viscosity, SSU (Saybold Seconds Universal)

q = the slippage, (BPD)

Technical Description
454
PIPESIM User Guide

The range of kinematic viscosity is 100 to 10,000 SSU for this viscosity correction. If the reference
fluid is water with kinematic viscosity of about 32 SSU, the equation reduces to:

32 (2)
qs (v 2) = q Eq. 4.165
v 2 s (curve )

Note: SSU is a viscosity unit that is equal to the measure of the time that 60 cm3 of oil takes to
flow through a calibrated tube at a controlled temperature. This should not be confused with the
dynamic (absolute) viscosity, unit of cp or Pa•s.

Expanders

Expanders are modeled in a similar way to centrifugal compressors (p.445), except they work in
reverse. Fluid flows through the expander and power is extracted. As with compressors, expanders
can be described by curves of head and efficiency as functions of the flow rate for a given speed:

Head (q , N c ) = Head c (q ) Eq. 4.166

η (q , Nc ) = ηc (q ) Eq. 4.167

where:

Head is the head ft ⋅ lbf / lb Nm / kg

η is the efficiency, expressed as a fraction, 0 < η ≤ 1

Technical Description
455
PIPESIM User Guide

q is the flow rate lb / s kg / s

Nc is the expander speed for the curve

The fan laws can be used to determine the head and efficiency for speeds N that differ from the
curve speed :

( ) ( )
2
N q
Head (q , N ) = Head c Eq. 4.168
Nc N / Nc

η (q , N ) = η c (q
N / Nc ) Eq. 4.169

The change in pressure of the fluid and the power needed to run the pump or compressor can be
determined from the head and efficiency:

ΔP = Pin − Pout = c1 ⋅ Head ⋅ ρ Eq. 4.170

Power = c2 ⋅ η ⋅ q ⋅ Head Eq. 4.171

where

ρ (Pin , T in ) + ρ (Pout , T out ) is the average density lb / ft kg / m

3 3

ρ =
2
Pin is the suction pressure
/ 2
psi or lbf in N /m
2

is the discharge pressure psi or lbf / in N /m

2 2
Pout

T in is the suction temperature o

R K

T out is the discharge temperature o

R K

Power is the power extracted by the hp W

expander

( )
c1 is a conversion factor for 1 in
2
engineering units
144 ft

c2 is a conversion factor for 1 hp

engineering units 550 ft ⋅ lbf / s

The outlet temperature depends on how much of the energy is removed from the fluid. Three
different models can be used:

( ) )
Adiabatic Route: γ −1
Pout γ
ΔT = T out − T in = η ⋅ T in ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.172
Pin

Technical Description
456
PIPESIM User Guide

( ) )
Polytropic Route: n −1
Pout n
ΔT = T out − T in = T in ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.173
Pin

Mollier Route (Isoentropic): S ( P , T ) = S ( P , T ) Eq. 4.174

out out in in

where

γ (Pin , T in ) + γ (Pout , T out ) is the average value of γ

γ =
2
Cp is the ratio of specific heats
γ=
CV

n (Pin , T in ) + n (Pout , T out ) is the average value of n

n =
2
n 1 γ is the polytropic coefficient
= ⋅
n−1 η γ −1
S is the specific entropy BTU J
o
lb ⋅ F kg ⋅ K

Notes:
• Only a fraction η of the head is converted to power. When using the adiabatic route, the energy
that is not converted to power is assumed to be converted to fluid heat. The usual adiabatic
temperature decrease is multiplied by a factor η ≤ 1.
n
• The polytropic route PV = constant can be used to model constant pressure ( n = 0), constant
temperature ( n = 1), constant enthalpy ( n = γ ) and constant volume ( n = ∞ ) changes as well
as intermediate routes. PIPESIM uses a value of n that is a function of the efficiency ( η ) and
the specific heat ratio ( γ ). This value can only be used when η < γ / ( γ − 1).
• In the special case when the efficiency η = 1, the polytropic coefficient equals the specific heat
ratio n = γ and the polytropic and adiabatic formulas are the same.
• The Mollier Route can only be used in compositional models; the PIPESIM blackoil model does
not calculate entropy.

Engine keywords
See expander keywords (p.682)

4.3.3 Multiphase boosting technology

Technical Description
457
PIPESIM User Guide

Multiphase boosting technology (also referred to as multiphase pumping technology) for the oil and
gas industry has been in development since the early 1980s, and is now rapidly gaining
acceptance as a tool to optimize multiphase production systems (Oxley, Ward and Derks 1999).
Multiphase boosting has been recognized as a vital technology, preferable to the standard
approach of separation, gas compression, liquid pumping and the use of dual flow lines back to the
host facility. It is particularly beneficial for the development of satellite fields. Multiphase boosting
enables the full (non-separated) well stream to be boosted in a single machine, thus greatly
simplifying the production system, resulting in significant cost savings that in many scenarios, have
made the development of marginal fields, economic.
Since 1990, thousands of multiphase boosters have been installed worldwide, with the vast
majority of the installations based onshore or offshore topsides. Over the years, the development
of multiphase boosting has led to two categories of commercial boosters:
Positive Displacement
The most common types are the Twin screw type & Progressive cavity type multiphase
boosters.
Rotodynamic
The most common type is the Helico-axial type multiphase booster.
The figure below depicts the difference between multiphase boosting technology and the more
traditional technology of separation, pumping and compression.

Traditional Multiphase Production approach

• The incoming fluid is separated into its constituent
liquid and gas phases.
• The separated liquids are pumped up to the required
pressure and exported via the liquid export line.
• Separated gas is compressed up to the required
pressure and exported via the gas export line.

Alternative Multiphase Production approach

• The incoming fluid is separated into its constituent
liquid and gas phases.
• The separated liquids are pumped up to the required
pressure and separated gas is compressed up to the
required pressure.
• The two phases are recombined and exported using a
multiphase export line.

Multiphase Boosting

Technical Description
458
PIPESIM User Guide

• The incoming fluid is directly boosted up to the

required pressure without separation of the gas and
liquid phases.
• It is exported using a multiphase export line.

Multiphase boosters are pumps/compressors that can accommodate fluids ranging from 100%
liquid to 100% gas, and anywhere in between. Although commonly referred to as multiphase
pumps, the terminology used in this document is 'multiphase booster' to recognize the fact that
100% gas can also be handled by this equipment (albeit with some restrictions, as outlined in later
sections of this topic).
Multiphase boosters are used primarily for the following reasons:
Production Enhancement
Multiphase boosting helps to accelerate and/or increase hydrocarbon production by
lowering backpressure on wells.
Pressure Boosting
Multiphase boosting increases fluid pressure thus enabling the transportation of
multiphase fluids over long distances. It also helps to move fluids from low pressure
systems to higher pressure systems.
In many cases, Multiphase boosters will deliver the combined benefit of production enhancement
and pressure boosting. For example, lowering the backpressure on a well by using a multiphase
booster may increase the rate and simultaneously supply the fluid at a higher pressure at the
flowline inlet.
To demonstrate the principle of multiphase boosting, take the example of a well which is connected
using a flowline and riser to the inlet separator on the host facility, as in the following diagram.

Technical Description
459
PIPESIM User Guide

If the Wellhead is selected as the node, the inflow would represent the P-Q (pressure-flowrate)
relationship from the reservoir up to the wellhead and the outflow would represent the P-Q
relationship downstream of the wellhead, including the multiphase booster, flowline and riser. Both
Inflow and Outflow are represented in the Systems plot. The point of intersection of the two curves
is the system operating point, for example, the flowing wellhead pressure and production rate the
system would operate at. In this example, there is no intersection point, which indicates that the
system would not produce at these conditions.
Production system analysis: THP curve and outflow curve

Technical Description
460
PIPESIM User Guide

For this example, you can see from the Production System Analysis graphic that the system is
incapable of producing naturally. From the THP curve, it is clear that if the back pressure on the
well could be lowered, production could be restored. Assuming that you could install a booster
directly downstream of the wellhead, that would provide a pressure 'boost' of 1000 psi to the well
fluids, the outflow curve could be lowered as shown in the figure below. The system would now
produce 134 lb/s (32,412 stb/d of liquid) at a flowing wellhead pressure of 1554 psia. In this
example, multiphase boosting has transformed a dead well to one that produces over 30, 000 stb/d
of fluid.
Production system analysis: the effect of multiphase boosting visualized

Technical Description
461
PIPESIM User Guide

Through the type of analysis outlined above, the effect of multiphase boosting on a production
system can be easily evaluated, and the requirements of the multiphase booster such as power
requirement, speed, etc. can be determined.

Positive displacement multiphase pumps

Positive displacement type pumps work by transferring a definite amount of fluid through a
pumping chamber operating at a particular speed. As the fluid is passed from the suction side to
the discharge end, differential pressure is added hydrostatically rather than dynamically, which
results in these pumps being less sensitive to fluid density than rotodynamic type pumps. This
feature makes positive displacement type pumps more attractive for surface installations than
rotodynamic type pumps. This is primarily because fluids at surface conditions are at lower
pressures and temperatures and tend to have higher gas fractions and a greater tendency for
density change than fluids at subsea conditions (Butler 1999).
There are four (4) types of Positive displacement pumps: Twin Screw, Progressive Cavity (Single
Screw), Piston & Diaphragm, but commercial development has focused mainly on the Twin Screw
and Progressive Cavity types.
The majority of positive displacement type multiphase boosters on the market are of the Twin
screw type, and they will be the primary focus of this topic.

Twin screw type

The twin screw type booster, also referred to as two-spindle screw pump, works on the basis of
fluid carried between the screw threads of two intermeshing feed screws and displaced axially as
the screws rotate and mesh. The fluid is split into two inlets on opposite sides of the pumps. This
equalizes stresses associated with slugging and better enables this type of pump to handle
fluctuating inlet conditions. The fluid passes through a chamber created by the twin interlocking

Technical Description
462
PIPESIM User Guide

screws and moves along the length of the screws to the outlet at the top of the pump. The
volumetric rate pumped depends on the screw pitch, diameter and rotational speed.
The following figure shows an example of a twin screw type pump.

It should be noted that, unlike screw type compressors, the volume of the chambers is not reduced
from pump suction to pump discharge, for example, there is no in-built compression in the twin
screw type multiphase boosters. Pressure buildup in the twin screw type multiphase booster is
entirely based on the fact that a definite amount of fluid is delivered into the outlet system with
every revolution of the feed screws, and the pressure developed at pump discharge is solely the
result of resistance to flow in the outlet system. Additionally, as the fluid makes its way from suction
to discharge, gas is compressed and liquid slips back, resulting in a reduction in the volumetric
efficiency of the pump. This is due to the development of a pressure gradient across the moving
chambers from pump discharge to suction, which causes an internal leakage in the pumping
elements. This internal leakage/slip causes the pump net flow to be less than its theoretical
capacity, as demonstrated in the pump performance curves shown below.

Technical Description
463
PIPESIM User Guide

As can be seen from the typical pump performance curves above, pump flow rate is dependent on
pump differential pressure: the higher the pump differential pressure, the higher the internal
leakage, and thus the lower the pump flow rate.
The theoretical capacity of the pump, i.e. the flow rate if no internal leakage is present; is the flow
rate at zero pump differential pressure. For the pump represented in the pump performance curves
above, its theoretical capacity is 500 m3/h. The difference between the theoretical flow rate and the
actual flow rate, is the internal leakage, also called 'pump slip'. As an example, for the pump
represented in the GVF=0% pump performance curve, the actual flow rate for a pump differential
pressure of 40 bar, would be 400 m3/h, and the pump slip would be 100 m3/h (for example, 500 -
400). Given the relative insensitivity of flow rate to differential pressure, especially at higher GVFs,
the twin screw multiphase booster is sometimes referred to as a 'constant flow rate' pump. The
twin screw pump is good for handling GVFs up to 98% at suction conditions and is the preferred
technology for high viscosity fluids.
It can be seen from the pump performance curves that pump flow rate is dependent on GVF, but
GVF has minimal impact on pump shaft power.
The pump performance curves may suggest that there is an unlimited variety of twin screw
multiphase pumps available for an unlimited number of DP-Q (differential pressure - flow
rate)combinations; however, in practice, there are several physical limitations that restrict pump
options, as below:
• Pump differential pressure is typically limited to 70 bar to avoid excessive deflection of feed
screws and possible contact between rotating screws and stator housing

Technical Description
464
PIPESIM User Guide

• Pump flow rate (i.e. total volumetric flow rate at pump suction) is presently limited to
approximately 2000 m3/h per pump
• Gas volume fraction at pump suction is typically limited to 95% maximum (for GVF > 95%,
some form of liquid recirculation is typically required to maintain GVF at suction at 95%
maximum)
• Pump inlet pressure and outlet pressures are restricted by casing design pressure and seal
design pressure

Progressive cavity type

The progressive cavity type pump (also known as single-rotor screw pump) operates on the basis
of an externally threaded screw, also called rotor, turning inside an internally threaded stator. It is
the same artificial technology used in wells for production enhancement that was adapted for
surface multiphase pumping.

As with the screw type pump, as the rotor rotates within the stator, chambers are formed and filled
with fluid that progress from the suction side of the pump to the discharge side of the pump. The
continuous seal line between the rotor and the stator helix keeps the fluid moving steadily at a fixed
flow rate proportional to the pump rotational speed. Application of the progressive cavity type pump
for multiphase boosting has been less widespread than the twin screw type multiphase booster,
and flow rates and differential pressures are typically lower than those achievable with the twin
screw type (< 30,000 bbl/d total volume).
An example of a progressive cavity type pump for multiphase applications is Moyno's R&M Tri-
Phaze® System, which is considered one of the largest; capable of transferring multiphase flows
up to 29,000 bbl/day (192 m3/h) at differential pressures up to 300 psi (20.7 bar). Progressive
cavity pumps can tolerate high solids content and can be adapted to deliver higher flow rates and
differential pressures by installing them in series or parallel arrangements, which increases the
complexity (Mirza 1999).
Given the wider operating range and greater popularity of twin screw pumps in the oil and gas
industry, PIPESIM has chosen to focus its modeling capabilities in the positive
displacementcategory of multiphase boosters, on twin screw pumps.

Rotodynamic multiphase pumps

Rotodynamic type pumps work by adding kinetic energy to the fluid, which is then converted to
pressure, thus boosting the fluid. The actual increase in pressure is directly proportional to the
density of the pumped fluid, for example, the higher the fluid density, the higher the pressure
increase. Because of this, dynamic type pumps are more sensitive to fluid density than positive
displacement type pumps, and tend to be used in applications with lower maximum gas volume
fractions; for example, in subsea applications.

Technical Description
465
PIPESIM User Guide

The commercial development of dynamic type multiphase boosters has been focused on the
helico-axial type, based on helico-axial hydraulics developed and licensed by Institute François du
Petrole (IFP). For very high gas volume fractions (GVF > 95%), the contra-rotating axial (CRA)
machine was specially developed; originally by Framo Engineering AS and Shell.
The design of the helico-axial type pump has also concentrated on its driver mechanism. For
subsea use, there are electric motor driven units as well as hydraulic turbine driven units. For
onshore or offshore topsides applications, other driver types can also be used.

Helico-axial type
The helico-axial type multiphase booster features a number of individual booster stages, each
consisting of an impeller mounted on a single rotating shaft, followed by a fixed diffuser. In
essence, the impeller imparts kinetic energy to the fluid, which is converted to pressure in the
diffuser. The diffuser homogenizes the fluid and redirects it to the next impeller stage. This
interstage mixing prevents separation of the gas-oil mixture, enabling stable pressure-flow
characteristics and increased overall efficiency. The impeller blades have a typical helical shape,
and the profile of the open type impeller and diffuser blade arrangement are specifically designed
to prevent the separation of the multiphase mixture inside the pump (de Marolles and de Salis,
1999).
Helico-axial pumps are able to pump large fluid volumes compared to positive displacement
pumps, which is the reason they are installed in the majority of offshore and subsea applications.
They can also handle limited amounts of sand but are more prone to stresses associated with
slugging. They are good for handling GVFs up to 95%.
The following figure shows a vertically-configured helico-axial pump and a close-up of four
individual stages.

Technical Description
466
PIPESIM User Guide

The boosting capabilities of the helico-axial type pump are a function of GVF at suction, suction
pressure, speed, number of impeller stages and impeller size.

Technical Description
467
PIPESIM User Guide

As can be seen from the above figure, the pressure boosting capability drastically reduces with
increasing GVF. Also, for lower speeds or a reduced number of stages, the pressure boosting
capability will be less than the maximum shown in the figure. For a given pump with a given
number of stages, speed and impeller diameter, pump performance curves can be provided as
shown in the figure. These curves are valid for a given GVF at suction, suction pressure and fluid
density only. New performance curves will have to be generated for conditions differing from those
represented in a specific set of performance curves.

Technical Description
468
PIPESIM User Guide

Practical operating limits of the helico-axial type multiphase booster are (Siep-RTS 1998):
• Pump differential pressure typically limited to 70 bar
• Pump flow rate (for example, total volumetric flow rate at pump suction) presently limited to
approximately 1500 m3/h per pump
• Gas volume fraction at pump suction typically limited to 95% maximum
• Pump inlet pressure, 3.4 bara minimum
• Pump outlet pressure restricted by casing design pressure and seal design pressure

Contra-rotating axial type

The CRA operates on the basis of axial compressor theory, but rather than having one rotor and a
set of stator vanes, the CRA employs two contra-rotating rotors. The inner rotor consists of several
stages mounted on the outside of an inner cylinder. The outer rotor consists of several stages on
the inside of a concentric, larger diameter cylinder.

Technical Description
469
PIPESIM User Guide

The exact mechanism underlying pressure buildup inside the CRA compressor is not yet fully
understood, nor are there sufficiently mature design rules available for the scale-up of CRA
performance to larger flow rates.
CRA can handle flow rates of the same order of magnitude as the helico-axial type multiphase
booster, however they can achieve significantly lower differential pressures (maximum 20 bar) and
efficiencies (approximately 25%) than conventional boosting systems.
Given the wider operating range and greater popularity of helico-axial multiphase boosters in the
oil and gas industry, PIPESIM currently focuses its modeling capabilities in the rotodynamic
category of multiphase boosters, on the helico-axial type.

Alternative multiphase production approach

The alternative multiphase production approach described in the figure can also be modeled in
PIPESIM. This is done using the generic booster option, which splits the fluid into liquid and gas;
and pumps the liquid and compresses the gas. Efficiency values for the compressor have been
obtained from field data and are available in the help system.

Wet gas compressors

Wet Gas Compressors are a special category of multiphase booster that are used for well streams
with high gas volume fractions and small amounts of liquid. Multiphase pumps operating under
these conditions are termed "wet gas compressors."
These well streams are often found in marginally economic fields where optimizing production and
minimizing cost are critical targets.
The same guidelines that are used to design a multiphase pump, apply for wet gas compression
service. But special attention must be paid to the design of the wet gas compression service, to
ensure it can handle thermal expansion, quick temperature changes, as well as high equipment
temperature due to compression heat generated.

Technical Description
470
PIPESIM User Guide

Wet gas compressors can handle GVF's greater than 98% and small volumes of low viscosity
fluids. The excessive heat generated by the compression of mostly gas in the well stream often
necessitates the installation of a product cooler. PIPESIM currently cannot model Wet gas
compressors, but support will provided for this option in the near future.

References
Subsea Development from Pore to Process, Oilfield Review, Volume 17, Issue 1, Publication Date:
3/1/2005, Amin Amin, Mark Riding, Randy Shepler, Eric Smedstad Schlumberger and John
Ratulowski Shell.

Technical Description
471
PIPESIM User Guide

Guide to multiphase booster efficiencies

Tables 1 and 2 gives guidelines on the (pump and compressor) efficiencies to enter in the generic
multiphase booster module, when the generic model is needed to simulate a Helico-Axial Booster
(p.472) or Twin Screw Booster (p.472).

Helico-axial
The following table gives guidelines on the efficiencies to enter in the generic multiphase booster
module to simulate a Helico-Axial multiphase booster.

FLUID GVF (%) APPROXIMATE PUMP APPROXIMATE COMPRESSOR

EFFICIENCY (%) EFFICIENCY (%) (see 2) (p.473)
0 (see 1) (p.473) 10 10-100
10 50 20 -100
20 40 60-100
30 40 80-100
40 30-40 80-100
50 40(50) (see 3) (p.473) 40 (20) (see 3) (p.473)
60 40(50) (see 3) (p.473) 30(20) (see 3) (p.473)
70 30 60
80 30 50
90 20 70
100 10 100
Table 4.3: Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster

Twin screw
The following table gives guidelines on the efficiencies to enter in the generic multiphase booster
module to simulate a Twin Screw multiphase booster.

FLUID GVF (%) APPROXIMATE PUMP APPROXIMATE COMPRESSOR

EFFICIENCY (%) EFFICIENCY (%) (see 2) (p.473)
0 5 20 -100
10 30 20 -100
20 30 70 -100
30 30 80 -100
40 30 90
50 40(50) (see 3) (p.473) 40(20) (see 3) (p.473)
60 40 50
70 30 70

Technical Description
472
PIPESIM User Guide

80 20 60
90 10 30
100 (see 4) (p.473) 10 100
Table 4.4: Twin Screw Multiphase Booster

See also the Twin screw curve format (p.108) description.

Notes:
1. Helico-Axial multiphase booster not recommended for pure liquid operations.
2. When using fluids with high liquid content the compressor efficiency has little effect as long as
the compressor efficiency is within the range indicated.
3. Two sets of pump and compressor efficiencies are valid for fluids with these gas volume
fractions.
4. Twin screw multiphase booster not recommended for pure gas operations

4.4 Heat Transfer Models

4.4.1 Energy equation for steady-state flow
PIPESIM uses the first law of thermodynamics to perform a rigorous heat transfer balance on
each pipe segment. The first law of thermodynamics is the mathematical formulation of the
principle of conservation of energy applied to a process occurring in a closed system (a system of
constant mass m). It equates the total energy change of the system to the sum of the heat added
to the system and the work done by the system. For steady-state flow, it connects the change in
properties between the streams flowing into and out of an arbitrary control volume (pipe segment)
with the heat and work quantities across the boundaries of the control volume (pipe segment). For
a multiphase fluid in steady-state flow, the energy equation is given by:

(
Δ H+
1 2
)
v + gz dm = ∑ δQ − δW s
2 m
Eq. 4.175

where the specific enthalpy:

H = U + PV Eq. 4.176
is a state property of the system since the internal energy U the pressure P and the volume V are
state properties of the system.
It is clear from the left-hand side of equation 4.175 (p.473), that the change in total energy is the
sum of the change in enthalpy energy,
Δ H dm = Δ (U + PV )dm Eq. 4.177
the change in gravitational potential energy:
ΔEP = Δ ( gz )dm Eq. 4.178

and the change in total kinetic energy (based on the mixture velocity vm)

Technical Description
473
PIPESIM User Guide

ΔE K = Δ ( 12 v )dm ≈ 0
2
m
Eq. 4.179

which is assumed to be negligible.

On the right-hand side of equation 4.175 (p.473), ∑ δQ includes all the heat transferred to the
control volume (pipe segment) and δW s represents the shaft work, that is work transmitted across
the boundaries of the control volume (pipe segment) by a rotating or reciprocating shaft.

4.4.2 Overall heat transfer coefficient

Steady state heat transfer between the fluid inside a pipe (flowline, riser or tubing) and its
surroundings occurs due to the difference between the bulk fluid temperature T b and the ambient
temperature T a. In the case of a flowline or riser, the ambient temperature is the temperature of the
ambient fluid (air or water) moving above the mud line. In the case of a tubing, the ambient
temperature is the ground temperature at a distance far from the well, given by the geothermal
gradient at the tubing depth. The rate at which heat is transferred depends on various thermal
resistances such as:
• Inside fluid film (which is used to model heat transfer between a moving fluid and the pipe wall)
• Wax layers on the inside of the pipe wall
• Pipe wall and surrounding layers (for example coatings, fluid-filled annuli)
• Ground and surrounding medium (air or sea)
The heat transfer Q can be expressed as:

Resistances in series
For resistances in series, (for example pipe coatings, see Fig 4.9 (p.475)) the temperature
difference can be written as the sum of the temperature differences across each resistance:

T a − T b = Σ ΔT i Eq. 4.180
i

Therefore
1 A 1
= − ∑ ΔT i = ∑ Eq. 4.181
U Q i i hi

Here h i is the heat transfer coefficient for resistance i given by:

Technical Description
474
PIPESIM User Guide

1 A
= − ΔT i Eq. 4.182
hi Q

Figure 4.9. Pipeline and Layers

Resistances in parallel
For resistances in parallel, (for example partially buried pipes, see Fig 4.10 (p.476)) the overall
heat transfer can be written as the sum of the heat transfer through each resistance:

Q = ∑ Qi = ∑ U i A(T b − T a) Eq. 4.183

i i

Therefore the overall heat transfer coefficient can be found by summing the heat transfer
coefficients for each resistance in parallel:

U = ∑ Ui Eq. 4.184
i

Technical Description
475
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.10. Burial configurations

Heat transfer models

Heat transfer models are required for:
• radial heat transfer between a moving fluid and the pipe wall, see Inside film coefficient (p.477).
• radial heat transfer through a conductive layer (p.487), such as internal wax layers, the pipe
wall and insulation.
• radial heat transfer through a convective layer (p.489), such as a fluid-filled annulus.
• heat transfer through the ground
• between the pipe and the surface for buried and partially buried horizontal flowlines (p.491)
• radially, between the pipe and the far field geothermal temperature gradient for vertical wells
(p.495)
• heat transfer through the ambient fluid
• between the ground and the ambient fluid for buried and partially buried horizontal flowlines
• between the pipe and the ambient fluid for partially buried and fully exposed horizontal
flowlines
• between the pipe and the ambient fluid for fully exposed vertical risers

Technical Description
476
PIPESIM User Guide

Reference diameter for overall heat transfer coefficient

By default in PIPESIM, all Heat Transfer Coefficients (including local Inside, Outside, and Wall
Coefficients, as well as the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient) are referenced to the pipe outside
diameter (and outside area), in keeping with the industry standard for heat exchanger design.
However, the default reference diameter can be changed from the pipe outside diameter to a user-
specified diameter using the HEAT HTCRD (p.706) keyword, which can either be entered in the
Engine Keyword Tool section or using an Engine Keyword Tool (EKT). This will override the default
basis for all the reported heat transfer coefficients to the user-specified diameter, for all pipes in the
workspace. This can be useful for direct comparison with Heat Transfer Coefficients which are
reported by some other flow assurance software on an inside diameter and area basis (for
example, OLGA, PIPEFLO).
Related links:
HEAT (p.706)
Engine Keyword Tool
Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient (p.477)
Conductive heat transfer coefficients (p.487)
Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients (p.489)
Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface (p.491)
Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock (p.495)

4.4.3 Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient

This inside film heat transfer coefficient accounts for resistance to heat flow between the bulk of
the fluid and the inside of the pipe wall. It is one component of the Overall Heat Transfer
Coefficient (U), which is used to calculate the heat transfer rate, Q. The inside fluid film heat
transfer coefficient consists of convection from the fluid to the pipe wall. There are 3 types of
convection mechanism depending on the nature of the flow; forced, free/natural and mixed
convection, as described below. Usually, one convection mechanism will dominate, which is
determined by the Reynolds number and Grashof number. However, in some instances, mixed
convection may occur.

Reynolds Number
The Reynolds number is a dimensionless number calculated as the ratio of the inertial forces to the
viscous forces acting on the fluid.

Technical Description
477
PIPESIM User Guide

Grashof Number
The Grashof number is a dimensionless number calculated as the ratio of the buoyancy forces to
the viscous forces acting on a fluid.

Forced Convection
Fluid flow, and subsequent convective heat transfer, is caused by external means such as a fan or
pump or differential pressure. It is correlated with the Reynold's number. Forced convection
dominates when Gr/Re2 « 1 i.e. inertial forces on the fluid are much greater than buoyancy forces.
The Forced Convection Nusselt number (p.479) is thus a function of Reynold's number and
Prandtl number. PIPESIM has two models for calculating the forced convection heat transfer
coefficient; Kreith and Kaminsky. For each model, there are different forms of the Nusselt number
correlation that are used depending on the type of flow; laminar, transition or turbulent flow for both
the Kreith and Kaminsy models, and the ratio of the pipe length to diameter i.e. short duct, medium
duct and long duct, specifically for the Kreith model.

Free/Natural Convection
Fluid flow, and subsequent convective heat transfer, is induced by buoyancy forces which are due
to density differences caused by temperature differences in the fluid. Free convection can occur
even when fluids are at rest. It is correlated with the Grashof number. Free convection dominates

Technical Description
478
PIPESIM User Guide

when Gr/Re2 » 1 i.e. buoyancy forces on the fluid are much greater than inertial forces. The
Natural Convection Nusselt number (p.485) is thus a function of Grashof's number and Prandtl
number.

Mixed Convection
This is a combination of forced and free convection where the fluid is in motion and forced
convection is either aiding or opposing natural convection. The combined effects of free and forced
convection (i.e. mixed convection) should be considered when Gr/Re2 ≈ 1.
The type of convection mechanism is important because it determines which Nusselt number
correlation PIPESIM will use to calculate the inside film heat transfer coefficient. PIPESIM
considers that only one convection mechanism will dominate at one time; forced or natural i.e. it
does not account for the mixed convection scenario.
For most PIPESIM cases, forced convection will dominate internal heat transfer and a Nusselt
number correlation will be selected as described above; the exact equation used will depend on
whether the Kreith or Kaminsky model is selected, and whether the forced flow is laminar, turbulent
or in the transition region. For the Kreith model specifically, the Nusselt number correlation is
selected based on an additional parameter; the ratio of the pipe length to the pipe diameter.
For the less common PIPESIM cases where inside natural convection may dominate internal
convective heat transfer, an inside film natural convection Nusselt number is also computed. In
these cases, PIPESIM compares these two competing convection mechanisms; Forced and
Natural convection, and then sets the Inside Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient equal to the
higher of these values.
Related links:
Inside forced convection (p.479)
Inside natural convection (p.485)
HEAT (p.706)
Conductive heat transfer coefficients (p.487)
Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients (p.489)
Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface (p.491)
Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock (p.495)

Inside forced convection

Forced convection heat transfer inside a pipe occurs when the fluid flow is induced by external
means such as a fan or pump or differential pressure. It is correlated with the Reynold's number.
Forced convection dominates when Gr/Re2 « 1 i.e. inertial forces on the fluid are much greater
than buoyancy forces.
A number of inside film coefficient (IFC) correlations for forced convection were added over time to
the legacy PIPESIM engine. Several of those legacy correlations are no longer used. However,
these may still be accessed using the HEAT (p.706) keyword for compatibility with historic work.
PIPESIM has two models for computing the Inside Forced Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient:

Technical Description
479
PIPESIM User Guide

• Kreith method (p.480) (Default method. Uses mixture values for the multiphase properties to
evaluate Reynolds number, etc.)
• Kaminsky method (p.482) (Recommended for cases with a stratified multiphase flow regime,
because of enhanced prediction of the Inside Fluid Film Forced Convective Heat Transfer
Coefficient)
PIPESIM will calculate the Inside Film Forced and Inside Film Natural Convective heat transfer
coefficients and will set its Inside Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient to the higher of these two
values.
Related links:
Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient (p.477)
Inside natural convection (p.485)
HEAT (p.706)
Conductive heat transfer coefficients (p.487)
Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients (p.489)
Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface (p.491)
Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock (p.495)

Kreith
This is the default method in PIPESIM.
Kreith (averaged) mixture properties
For cases with multiphase flow, the Kreith method uses mixture properties for a pseudo single-
phase, based on the local (slip-flow) liquid holdup. These properties are calculated as follows.

First, liquid and gas Reynolds numbers are calculated based on the superficial velocities vSL and
vSG :

ρ L vSL D
ReSL = Eq. 4.185
μL

ρG vSG D
ReSG = Eq. 4.186
μG
where ρ is the density, μ the viscosity, D the pipe diameter and the subscripts L and G refer to
the liquid and gas phase properties.
A total Reynolds number is then obtained:

ReTOTAL = ReSL + ReSG Eq. 4.187

A Prandtl number is then calculated using fluid mixture properties:

Technical Description
480
PIPESIM User Guide

μmc p
m Eq. 4.188
Prm =
km

where c p is the specific heat capacity, k the thermal conductivity, and Μ the viscosity, and the
subscript m refers to the mixture.
The mixture thermal conductivity is given by:
1
km =
HL (1 − H L ) Eq. 4.189
+
kL kg
and the mixture heat capacity:
Cp = H L Cp
m L
( )
+ 1 − H L Cp
G
Eq. 4.190

where H is the holdup.

Kreith single-phase nusselt number relations

In both single-phase and multiphase cases, PIPESIM's Kreith inside fluid film coefficient is based
on the following methods for prediction of the inside film Nusselt Number.

For turbulent flow (ReTOTAL ≥ 6000 ):

Kreith recommends the McAdams enhancement to the respected Dittus-Boelter equation for
turbulent inside Nusselt Number (Nu). McAdams fixes the Pr exponent at 0.33 - in agreement with
the other respected Sieder-Tate equation for turbulent inside Nu. McAdams also applies a 'short-
pipe' entrance effect (D/L) multiplier to Dittus-Boelter's turbulent inside Nu method, similar to the
entrance effects found in all laminar forced-flow Nu methods.

Nu 1P
Turb
= 0.023ReTOTAL
0.8
Pr
0.33
(
1+ ( )
D
L
0.7
) Eq. 4.191

For laminar flow (ReTOTAL ≤ 2000 ):

where the superscripts SD, MD and LD stand for short duct, medium duct and long duct,
respectively.

Technical Description
481
PIPESIM User Guide

For transition flow (2000 ≤ ReTOTAL ≤ 6000 ):

Note: As the Reynolds number decreases, the laminar flow Nusselt number is approaches 4. So if
the Reynolds number is less than 2000, then PIPESIM limits the Reynolds number to a minimum
of 4.

Reference: Kreith (p.584)

Kreith multiphase inside fluid film coefficient

If the flow is multiphase then the void fraction is given by

AvG
ϕ= Eq. 4.192
AvG + AvL
where the cross-sectional area of the pipe:
2
πD
A= Eq. 4.193
4
The gas-weighted two phase fluid thermal conductivity is defined as:

k2P = ϕk G + (1 − ϕ )k L Eq. 4.194

The two phase inside film coefficient for the correlations below (unless otherwise stated) is defined
as:

Nu 2P k2P
hi = Eq. 4.195
2P D

Note: Nu2P in this equation is computed by applying the Kreith (averaged) mixture properties to
the Kreith Single-Phase Nusselt Number relations.

Kaminsky

The Kaminsky method may give enhanced prediction for cases where multiphase stratified-flow
heat transfer effects will strongly affect the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient (as one of its largest
series resistances).

Kaminsky (regime-dependent) film phase and dimensionless parameters

If the flow regime is mist, single gas phase or froth then the Kaminsky method's fluid film at the
inside wall is considered to be a single-phase gas and the base superficial Reynolds number is:

Technical Description
482
PIPESIM User Guide

ρG vSG D
ReS = ReSG = Eq. 4.196
μG
and the Prandtl number is:

μG c p
G Eq. 4.197
Pr = PrG =
kG

where ρ is the density, μ the viscosity, v the velocity, c p the specific heat capacity, k the thermal
conductivity, D the pipe diameter and the subscript SG refers to the superficial gas phase
properties.
For all other flow regimes, the Kaminsky method's fluid film at the inside wall is considered to be a
single-phase liquid and the base superficial Reynolds number is:

ρ L vSL D
ReS = ReSL = Eq. 4.198
μL
and the Prandtl number is:

μL cp
L Eq. 4.199
Pr = Pr L =
kL
where the subscript SL refers to the superficial liquid phase properties.
The following minimum and maximum superficial Reynolds numbers are defined as boundaries of
the laminar-turbulent transition region:

ReS = 2000 Eq. 4.200

min

ReS = 6000 Eq. 4.201

max

Kaminsky base single-phase film nusselt number

The following minimum and maximum superficial Reynolds numbers are defined as boundaries of
the laminar-turbulent transition region: ReS min = 2000

ReS max = 6000

The Kaminsky method bases its single-phase Nusselt Number on the Sieder and Tate equations
for turbulent and laminar flows of the film phase, as follows.

For turbulent Kaminsky Film Phase (ReS > ReS ):

max

Technical Description
483
PIPESIM User Guide

( )
0.14
4/5 1/3 μ
Nu 1PTurb = 0.023ReS Pr Eq. 4.202
μW

For laminar Kaminsky Film Phase (Re ≤ ReS ):

max
1

( ) ( )
0.14
D 3 μ
Nu 1PLam = 1.86ReS Pr Eq. 4.203
L μW

where L is the length of the pipe and the subscript W refers to wall properties. The viscosity μ is
either the liquid or gas viscosity depending on the flow regime (as described above).

Throughout the transition region (2000 ≤ Re ≤ 6000 ), PIPESIM prorates the Kaminsky Νu 1 P by
applying

Nu 1PTurb Eq. 4.204

from Kaminsky Film Equation 1081.16 and

Nu 1PLam Eq. 4.205

from Kaminsky Film Equation 1081.17 to the same

Nu 1P Eq. 4.206

Interpolation Method listed above as Kreith Equation 1081.9.

Reference: Sieder and Tate (p.588)

Kaminsky single-phase inside fluid film coefficient

If the flow regime is mist, single gas phase or froth, this PIPESIM method regards the entire inside
bulk fluid as a single-phase gas and the Inside Film Coefficient is:

kG Nu 1P
hi = Eq. 4.207
1P D
Similarly, for the case of a single-phase bulk liquid flow the inside film coefficient reduces to:

k L Nu 1P
hi = Eq. 4.208
1P D
Kaminsky multiphase inside fluid film coefficient
For all other (multiphase) flow regimes, with a turbulent liquid film (Re ≥ 2300 ):

Δ P2Pf
hi = hi S Eq. 4.209
2P 1 P SL Δ P1 Pf

Technical Description
484
PIPESIM User Guide

Its required input of the single-phase turbulent heat transfer film coefficient h 1, must first be
computed by the Sieder-Tate correlation. This Multiphase Pressure-Drop/Heat-Transfer Analogy
Method also implicitly requires that both the Superficial Liquid Pressure Drop and the Multiphase
Pressure Drop be pre-calculated as additional inputs, before its h 1 can be computed.

For horizontal (for example, if the pipe angle | β | < βswap ) stratified flow, the wetting of the pipe
wall is calculated from
S = πDθ Eq. 4.210
where θ is the wetted wall fraction given by Grolman's correlation (p.582) :

{ }
2 0.8

( ) { }
0.15 0.25
σW ρG ρ L uLS D uGS
1
θ = θ0 + Eq. 4.211
σ + ρG cos( β ) σ 2
ρL (1 − H L ) gD
in which the minimum wetted wall fraction θ0 is approximated by:
0.374
θ0 ≈ 0.624H L Eq. 4.212

For all other types of flow, heat transfer it is reasonable to assume that heat transfer is
circumferentially uniform (i.e. S = 1).
For laminar flow (Re < 2300 ):

(2 − H L )h i 1PSL
hi = 2 Eq. 4.213
2P
3
HL
The single-phase laminar heat transfer is estimated by the Sieder-Tate correlation.
Reference: Kaminsky (p.583)

Inside natural/free convection

Natural convection heat transfer inside a pipe occurs when the fluid flow is induced by buoyancy
forces which are due to density differences caused by temperature differences in the fluid. Natural
convection can occur even when fluids are at rest. It is correlated with the Grashof number (p.477).
Natural convection dominates when Gr/Re2 » 1 i.e. buoyancy forces on the fluid are much greater
than inertial forces.
Whenever fluid temperature may be significantly influenced by Natural Convection heat transfer
(typically laminar flow), PIPESIM checks for the possible influence of Natural Convection inside the
pipe. PIPESIM always computes the inside film natural convection heat transfer coefficient for
laminar flow, and additionally for transition and turbulent flow with a Reynold's number < 10,000
using the Nusselt number equation below.

Technical Description
485
PIPESIM User Guide

This equation is a simple, computationally-inexpensive, and numerically stable way to compute the
inside film natural convection heat transfer coefficient. PIPESIM compares the value calculated
from the correlation above, to the theoretical minimum value for the Natural Convection Nusselt
number which occurs when the heat transfer mechanism is as a result of conduction only (can be
theoretically derived to be 3.66, see Incropera reference below). This Nusselt number value of 3.66
is the conduction-only limiting minimum Nusselt number for a circular pipe. PIPESIM sets

to be equal to the maximum of these 2 values.

Finally, after calculating the inside film forced (

) and inside film natural convective (

) heat transfer coefficients, PIPESIM will determine the higher of the two values and set the Inside
Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient equal to this value.
References
Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, 7th Edition, Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, Pg.
539
Related links:
Inside fluid film heat transfer coefficient (p.477)
Inside forced convection (p.479)
Grashof number (p.477)
HEAT (p.706)
Conductive heat transfer coefficients (p.487)
Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients (p.489)
Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface (p.491)
Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock (p.495)

Inside natural convection nusselt number

PIPESIM computes an Inside Natural Convection Nusselt Number as follows:

Technical Description
486
PIPESIM User Guide

This equation captures the Natural Convective Effect whenever significant, in a simple, compute-
inexpensive, and numerically stable way. Its 'floor' is set to Nu = 3.66 - the Conduction-Only
Limiting Minimum Nu for a Circular Pipe.
PIPESIM computes this NuNC for every Laminar case, to check if this Natural Convection Nu
would dominate.
Further, PIPESIM also computes this NuNC for Transition and Turbulent (Forced Convection)
cases if: Re < 10000 (transition Re)

Maximum Nu method for competing natural and forced convection

Whenever it is computed (for Laminar cases, or for Transition and Turbulent cases within the
Gr/Re or Re range described above), this Inside Natural Convection Nu is compared with
PIPESIM's Inside Forced Convection Nu, and the larger Nu value is used to compute PIPESIM's
Inside Fluid Film Coefficient, as: Nu = max(NuNC, NuFC)
where, NC denotes this Natural Convection Nu, and FC denotes the Forced Convection Nu.
This numerical method approximates a physical reality. One or the other of Natural or Forced
Convection will suppress the other as buoyant density differences, flowrates, and turbulence are
increased or decreased in different cases. This method models that competition, while maintaining
a continuous trend of Inside Fluid Film Nusselt Number for parametric studies with differing
flowrates, insulation levels, ambient temperatures, etc.
Reference: VDI, Incropera, Scandpower (p.583)

4.4.4 Conductive heat transfer coefficients

Brill and Mukherjee (p.579) give a formula for radial heat transfer Q per unit length of pipe through
a conductive layer:

Q ln (ro / ri )
ΔT = T o − T i = − Eq. 4.214
2 πk
where
k is the conductivity of the layer.

ri is the inner radius of the layer

ro is the outer radius of the layer

T i is the temperatures at the inside edge of the layer

T o is the temperatures at outside edge of the layer

Technical Description
487
PIPESIM User Guide

This equation can be used to calculate the heat transfer coefficient for a conductive layer:
1 A A ln (ro / ri ) Eq. 4.215
= − ΔT = ⋅
h Q 2π k
where

A Do is the radius of the reference area (normally the pipe outside radius)
=
2π 2

Wax heat transfer coefficient

4.215 (p.488) can be used for heat transfer through a wax layer on the inside wall of the pipe,
where

k = kwax is the conductivity of the wax layer.

Di is the inner radius of the wax layer (equal to the pipe inner radius minus the wax
ri = − rwax thickness)
2

Di is the outer radius of the wax layer (equal to the pipe inner radius)
ro =
2

Pipe wall heat transfer coefficient

4.215 (p.488) can be used for heat transfer through the pipe wall, where

k = k pipe is the conductivity of the pipe wall.

Di is the inner radius of the pipe

ri =
2

Do is the outer radius of the pipe

ro =
2

Conductive layer heat transfer coefficient

4.215 (p.488) can be used for heat transfer through conductive layers, such as foam insulation or
cement, where

k = kn is the conductivity of the n th layer

Dni is the inner radius of the n th layer

ri =
2

Technical Description
488
PIPESIM User Guide

Dno is the outer radius of the n th layer

ro =
2

4.4.5 Annulus and outside convective heat transfer coefficients

Convective heat transfer can occur in a number of places in a well and surface network, across a
fluid filled annulus; between a pipe or surface and the air or sea. Free (or natural) convection
occurs when the bulk fluid is at rest and convection is driven by buoyancy effects alone. Forced
convection occurs when the fluid is moving, which will increase the rate at which heat is
transferred.
The heat transfer coefficient for free convection at a wall is given in terms of the Nusselt number
( Nu ), the fluid conductivity (k ) and a length scale ( L ):
k ⋅ Nu
h = Eq. 4.216
L
The Nusselt number can be found experimentally, depending on the geometry of the convective
surfaces. It also depends on the fluid properties, which are encapsulated in two dimensionless
numbers, the Prandtl number (Pr ) representing the ratio of velocity and temperature gradients:
cp Μ
Pr = Eq. 4.217
k
and the Grashof number representing the ratio of buoyancy to viscous forces:
3 2
L Ρ Βg ΔT
Gr = 2
Eq. 4.218
μ

β Fluid thermal expansion coefficient K −1

μ Fluid dynamic viscosity kg ⋅ m

−1
⋅s
−1

ρ Fluid density kg ⋅ m
−3

c p Fluid heat capacity

−1
W ⋅ kg
k Fluid thermal conductivity W ⋅m
−1
⋅s
−1

Fluid properties are calculated at a film temperature T film half way between the wall temperature
and the bulk fluid temperature:

T film = (T wall + T f ) / 2 Eq. 4.219

The wall temperature and bulk fluid temperature are used to calculate the temperature difference in
the formula for the Grashof number:

ΔT = |Tf − T wall | Eq. 4.220

Technical Description
489
PIPESIM User Guide

Because the fluid properties and Grashof numbers are functions of the wall temperatures, the heat
transfer coefficient is also a function of the wall temperatures. The heat loss calculation therefore
needs to be solved iteratively.

Convection in a fluid filled vertical annulus

PIPESIM can model the heat transfer in a fluid filled annulus by free convection. The heat transfer
coefficient can be determined from the heat transfer coefficients at the inner and outer walls:
1 1 1
= + Eq. 4.221
h annulus h inner h outer
For vertical pipes (angle ≥ 45 ° ), the Nusselt number is given by Eckert and Jackson (1950)
(p.581) (quoted in Kreith and Bohn(1997) (p.584)) in terms of the Rayleigh number ( Ra):
0.25 9
Nu = 0.555Ra for Ra ≤ 10 Eq. 4.222
0.4 9
Nu = 0.021Ra for Ra > 10 Eq. 4.223

where
Ra = Pr Gr Eq. 4.224
The bulk fluid temperature is assumed to be the average of the annulus wall temperatures:

T f = (T inner + T outer ) / 2 Eq. 4.225

Convective Heat transfer through fluid-filled annuli can be modeled by the use of the EKT. Refer to
the Expert Mode Keyword Reference section on fluid coats (p.711).

Convection in a fluid-filled horizontal annulus

PIPESIM uses the same equations to calculate the heat transfer for a horizontal fluid annulus as
for a vertical annulus. except that the Nuuslet number is given by:
0.25
Nu = 0.53Ra Eq. 4.226

Fully exposed pipe

For a flowline or riser exposed to the sea or the air, the “ambient” heat transfer coefficient can be
calculated by summing the free and forced convection heat transfer coefficients:

h a = h forced + h free Eq. 4.227

For forced convection, the heat transfer coefficient depends on the Reynolds number of the flow

Nu forced = (0.4Re )Pr0.4

0.5 0.67
+ 0.06Re Eq. 4.228

Technical Description
490
PIPESIM User Guide

4.4.6 Heat transfer between a horizontal flowline and the ground surface
Fully buried ground heat transfer coefficient
The fully buried heat transfer coefficient for a flowline is evaluated by determining a conduction
shape factor to account for the geometrical and thermal effects of the burial configuration. Once
the shape factor is known, the ground heat transfer coefficient is calculated from:

where

is the chosen reference length. By default, in PIPESIM, this is the outer circumference of the pipe.
The shape factor used differs depending on the partial burial option that is selected.
A pseudo film coefficient is then added in series in order to model the ambient fluid moving above
ground level:
1 1 1
= + Eq. 4.229
h ext hg ha

2009 method
The conduction shape factor is obtained from a solution to the steady-state heat conduction
equation (the Laplace equation) with convective boundary conditions on the pipe inside wall and
ground surfaces:

B p abur
S=

( ) ( )
2 2 1
Bp Bp 2 Eq. 4.230
cosh α0 − B p abur α0 + − 1+
Bg Bg

where
α0 = − cosh
−1
( − ZR ) Eq. 4.231

is a auxiliary geometrical quantity and

( ) −1
2
Z
abur = − sinh α0 = Eq. 4.232
R
is a scale factor for bicylindrical coordinates and
U ipc R
Bp = Eq. 4.233
kg
is the Biot number of the pipe and

Technical Description
491
PIPESIM User Guide

h aR
Bg = Eq. 4.234
kg

is the Biot number of the ground. U ipc is the combined heat transfer coefficient of the inside film,
pipe, coatings (and wax)
1 1 1 1
= + + Eq. 4.235
U ipc hi h wax h pipe &layers
Equation 4.230 (p.491) is not valid when the pipe&layers surface is just touching the ground
surface (Z/R=1). In such a case, the shape factor is calculated from the following asymptotic
expression

Bp
S∼

( )( )
1
Bp 2 Eq. 4.236
1+ 1 + 2Bp
Bg

We obtain the ground heat transfer coefficient from:

Note: This is the default method in PIPESIM. The shape factor above is accurate to within 2.5% of
the numerical simulation studies given by Schneider (p.588). For information about how the results
of the 2009 method compare to Schneider’s, see Ovuworie (p.586).

1983 & 2000 methods

The conduction shape factor is obtained from a solution to the steady-state heat conduction
equation (the Laplace equation) with isothermal boundary conditions on the pipe inside wall and
ground surfaces:
2π
S=
cosh
−1
( Z
R pipe &layers ) Eq. 4.237

Reference: Kreith (p.584)

Partially buried ground heat transfer coefficient

To calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient for a partially buried pipeline, buried and exposed
heat transfer coefficients must be calculated and combined in parallel. The method of combination
and the ground conduction shape factors used differ depending on the partial burial option that is
selected.

Technical Description
492
PIPESIM User Guide

2009 method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer
coefficient (U exp ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.

{
2. A partially buried conduction shape factor is calculated using the methods described in the
sections above. The shape factor is computed from

(
2 B p apart tan
-1
1 − Apart
1 + Apart
) − 1 < Apart < 1

( )
;
Bp 2
π 1+ 1 − Apart
Bg
B p apart

( )
;
S= Bp Apart = 1 Eq. 4.238
π 1+
Bg

( )
2 B p apart tanh
-1
Apart − 1
Apart + 1
Apart > 1

( )
;
Bp 2
π 1+ Apart − 1
Bg
where

( )( ( ) )
−1
Bp Bp
Apart = 1 + cos β0 + B p apart π + β0 − Eq. 4.239
Bg Bg

is an auxiliary geometrical quantity and

( )
2
Z
apart = − sin β0 = 1 − Eq. 4.240
R
is a scale factor for bicylindrical coordinates.
3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the fraction of pipe exposed and the fraction of pipe buried) using equation 4.241
(p.494) to give the overall heat transfer coefficient:

Note: This is the default method in PIPESIM. For more information, see Ovuworie (p.586).

2000 method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer
coefficient (U bur ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.

Technical Description
493
PIPESIM User Guide

2. A fully buried pseudo pipe (Z=+R) of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer
coefficient (U exp ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.
3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the fraction of pipe exposed and buried) to give the overall heat transfer
coefficient:

U = 1+( β0
π
)
U exp −
β0
U
π bur
Eq. 4.241

where the negative of half of the angle of the exposed arc:

β0 = − cos
-1
( − ZR ) Eq. 4.242

1983 method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe with diameter corresponding to the exposed surface area is
created and an overall heat transfer coefficient (U exp ) is calculated using the methods
described in the sections above.
2. A fully buried pseudo pipe with diameter corresponding to the buried surface area is created
and an overall heat transfer coefficient (U bur ) is calculated using the methods described in the
sections above.
3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the surface areas of pipe exposed and buried) to give the overall heat transfer
coefficient:

Aexp Abur
U = U exp + U Eq. 4.243
A A bur
where the total surface area of the buried pipe:
A = 2 πR Eq. 4.244
The surface area of the exposed portion of the pipe is:

Aexp = πR 1 −( θbur
2π
) Eq. 4.245

where the angle of the buried arc:

θbur = sin
-1
( ZR ) Eq. 4.246

The surface area of the buried portion of the pipe is:

Abur = A − Aexp Eq. 4.247

Technical Description
494
PIPESIM User Guide

4.4.7 Heat transfer between a vertical well and the surrounding rock
Ramey model
Heat transfer between a well and its surroundings varies with time: the well exchanges energy with
the formation, heating it up (or cooling it down), until the formation is at the same temperature as
the well.
The Ramey (1962) (p.587) model is an analytical method for determining the ground heat transfer
coefficient, hg , given the length of time t a well has been operating. The model assumes that heat
transfer in the wellbore is steady-state, whilst heat transfer to the formation is by transient radial
conduction. In his paper, Ramey quotes various solutions for different boundary conditions. He
observed that the solutions eventually converge after about a week. He concluded that a line
source with constant heat flux gives a good asymptotic solution for long times (times greater than
one week).
The wellbore (ground) heat transfer coefficient is given by:

2k g
hg = Eq. 4.248
D f (t )
where the time function:

1
f (t ) = E1
2
D
4 αT
( ) ( )
exp
D
4 αT
2 2
Eq. 4.249

The exponential integral is given by:

D2

E1 ( )
D
4 αt
2

= ∫ 0
4 αT 1 − exp ( − r )
r
( )
d r − ln
D
2

4 αt
−γ
Eq. 4.250

For large values of time t, Ramey uses a series expansion for the exponential integral, which to
leading order gives:

f (t ) ≈ − ln ( ) 4 αt
Dco
−
γ
2
Eq. 4.251

kg ground thermal resistance Wm K

−1 −1

D outside diameter of pipe m

Dco outside diameter of pipe and thermal coatings m

kg ground thermal diffusivity m s

2 −1

α=
ρg cg

cg ground specific heat capacity J kg K

−1 −1

ρg ground density kgm

−3

Technical Description
495
PIPESIM User Guide

r radial distance from the centre of the well m

γ ≈ 0.577 Euler-Mascheroni gamma constant dimensionless

In the case of a tubing we see that:

1 1
= Eq. 4.252
h ext hg
and the ambient temperature used in equation 4.248 (p.495) is given by the geothermal
temperature at some radial distance far from the centre of the well.

Note: To compute a geothermal gradient and hence a geothermal temperature at a particular well
depth,, PIPESIM requires knowledge of at least two ambient temperatures at two corresponding
measured depths (MD) or true vertical depth (TVD) — usually these are the ambient temperatures
at top and bottom of the tubing.

Reference: "Wellbore Heat Transmission", H.J. Ramey (p.587)

4.5 Fluid Models

A number of fluid and solid phases may be present in oil and gas pipeline. These include:
• Fluids
• Vapour hydrocarbon and water (gas)
• Liquid hydrocarbon (oil)
• Liquid water
• Other liquids (e.g. liquid CO2)
• Solids
• Hydrate I
• Hydrate II
• Wax
• Asphaltene
• Ice
• Scale
PIPESIM simulates flow of only three fluid phases, oil, gas and water. In fact some flow models
only consider two phases, liquid and gas. Liquid properties are determined by combining the oil
and water properties.
PIPESIM can be used to model wax precipitation and deposition. Other solid phases cannot be
modelled, although the appearance of hydrates, asphaltene and ice can be predicted. PIPESIM
can model scale prediction.
Fluid models are used to determine the phase state (e.g. single phase oil, single phase gas, two
phase oil and gas etc) and the phase thermodynamic and transport properties needed for

Technical Description
496
PIPESIM User Guide

simulation (e.g. density, enthalpy and viscosity). PIPESIM allows three different types of fluid
description:
• Black oil (p.497) Three phases are allowed, oil, gas and water. The hydrocarbon fluid is made
up of oil and gas. Simple correlations are used to determine how much gas can dissolve in oil
and the phase properties.
• Compositional (p.139) The number of phases allowed depends on the flash package. Fluid is
made up of components, such as methane, ethane, water etc. Phase state is determined by
minimizing Gibbs energy of the system (the flash). This can be a complicated calculation and is
therefore significantly slower than black oil. PIPESIM can use a number of different flash
packages.
• Fluid Property Table Files (p.547) Two phase (liquid and gas) properties can be output from
compositional packages in a tabular form that PIPESIM can read.

4.5.1 Black oil fluid modeling

Black oil fluids are modelled as three phases, oil, gas and water. The amount of each phase is
defined at stock tank conditions, by specifying two ratios, typically the gas oil ratio (GOR) and the
water cut (WCUT). Properties at pressures and temperatures other than stock tank are determined
by correlations (p.498). Water is assumed to remain in the water phase. The key property for
determining the phase behaviour of the hydrocarbons is the solution gas—oil ratio (p.500),
Rs (P , T ), which is used to calculate the amount of the gas dissolved in the oil at a given pressure
and temperature:

Stock tank volume of gas dissolved in oil: R ⋅ V

s O

Stock tank volume of free gas: V G = (GOR − R s ) ⋅ V O

At stock tank conditions Rs = 0. The bubble point pressure (p.504) Pb(T ) can be found by
calculating the pressure at which all the gas is dissolved in the oil Rs ( Pb, T ) = GOR

Technical Description
497
PIPESIM User Guide

For pressures below the bubble point the oil is saturated (no more gas can dissolve in it at that
pressure and temperature). For pressures above the bubble point, there is no vapour phase and
the oil is undersaturated, since more gas could be dissolved in it if it were available. Above stock
tank pressure P > Ps the oil contains dissolved gas, and is known as live oil. Oil at stock tank
pressure (or oil with GOR=0) is known as dead oil. Different correlations apply for dead oil,
saturated live oil, and unsaturated live oil properties.
Correlations (p.498) are needed for the fluid properties needed for simulation:
• the oil formation volume factor (p.505) (which is used to determine oil density),
• the gas compressibility (p.515) (to determine the gas density)
• the water density
• the oil viscosity (p.507)
• the gas viscosity (p.518)
• the water viscosity
• the fluid enthalpy (p.519)
• the oil-gas surface tension (p.518)
• the water-gas surface tension (p.519)
Liquid properties (p.548) are calculated by combining the oil and water properties.

Black oil correlations

The following black oil correlations are available:

Solution gas (p.500) and bubble point Lasater (p.503), Standing (p.503), Vasquez and
pressure (p.504) Beggs (p.504), Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.502),

Technical Description
498
PIPESIM User Guide

Glasø (p.502), De Ghetto et al (p.501) or Petrosky

and Farshad (p.503).
Oil formation volume factor of saturated Standing (p.505), Vasquez and Beggs (p.506),
systems Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.506)
Oil formation volume factor of Vasquez and Beggs (p.506)
undersaturated systems
Dead oil viscosity (p.508) Beggs and Robinson, Glasø, Kartoatmodjo, De
Ghetto, Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy or Users data.
Live oil viscosity of saturated systems Chew and Connally, Kartoatmodjo, Khan, De Ghetto,
(p.511) Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy, or Beggs and
Robinson.
Live oil viscosity of undersaturated Vasquez and Beggs, Kouzel, Kartoatmodjo, Khan, De
systems (p.512) Ghetto, Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy, Bergman or
None.
Viscosity of oil/water mixtures (p.548) Inversion, Volume Ratio, or Woelflin.
Gas viscosity (p.518) Lee et al.
Gas compressibility (p.515) Standing, Hall and Yarborough, or Robinson et al.
Oil-gas surface tension (p.518)
Water-gas surface tension (p.519)

Correlation data
The data points spanned the following ranges :

Lasater (p.584) Standing (p.588) Vasquez and Kartoatmodjo and

Beggs (p.506) Schmidt (p.584)
Data Correlation was Correlation was Correlations use 740 different
developed in based on 105 data from more crude oil samples
1958 from 158 experimentally than 600 oil with 5392 data
experimental determined systems. points from South
data points bubble point Approximately East Asia, North
pressure of 6,000 measured America, the
California oil data points were Middle East, and
systems. collected. Latin America are
used.

Pb bubble point 48 to 5,780 130 to 7,000 50 to 5,250 24.7 to 4764.7

pressure
(psia)
T temperature 82 to 272 100 to 258 70 to 295 75 to 320
(°F)
API API gravity 17.9 to 51.1 16.5 to 63.8 16 to 58 14.4 to 59.0
( °API)

Technical Description
499
PIPESIM User Guide

γG gas specific 0.574 to 1.223 0.59 to 0.95 0.56 to 1.18 0.4824 to 1.668
gravity

Rsb solution gas 3 to 2,905 20 to 1,425 20 to 2,070 0 to 2890

at bubble
point pressure
(scf/STB)

Beggs and Robinson Chew and Connally

Data Data from 600 oil systems were used Data from 457 oil systems
to develop correlations for dead and was used to develop
live oil viscosity. 460 dead oil correlation for live oil
observations and 2,073 live oil viscosity
observations were used.

Pb bubble point pressure 50 to 5,250 132 to 5,645

(psia)
T temperature (°F) 70 to 295 72 to 292
API API gravity ( °API) 16 to 58

γG gas specific gravity

Rsb solution gas at bubble 20 to 2,070 51 to 3,544

point pressure (scf/
STB)

Glasø (p.582) developed PVT correlations from analysis of crude oil from the following North Sea
Fields:- Ekofisk Stratfjord Forties Valhall COD 30/7-2A.

Solution gas-oil ratio

The solution gas-oil ratio, Rs (scf/STB), can be determined using one of a number of correlations:
• De Ghetto et al (p.501)
• Glasø (p.502)
• Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.502)
• Lasater (p.503)
• Petrosky and Farshad (p.503)
• Standing (p.503)
• Vasquez and Beggs (p.504)
The correlations depend on:

P pressure (psia)
T temperature (°F)
API API gravity ( °API)

Technical Description
500
PIPESIM User Guide

γG gas specific gravity

De ghetto et al.
De Ghetto et al. give different correlations for the solution gas-oil ratio and the bubble point
pressure. In PIPESIM it is important to use related formula for these two properties to ensure
consistency. The PIPESIM implementation of the solution gas-oil ratio is therefore derived from the
De Ghetto et al equations for the bubble point pressure.

Extra heavy oil, API < 10

For extra heavy oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.503) formula:
1.1128
P
Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ γG ⋅ Eq. 4.253
10.7025 ⋅ A(T )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.002 ⋅ T − 0.0142 ⋅ API Eq. 4.254

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Heavy oil, 10 < API < 22.3
For heavy oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.503) formula:
1/0.7885
P
Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ γG ⋅ Eq. 4.255
15.7286 ⋅ A(T )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.002 ⋅ T − 0.0142 ⋅ API Eq. 4.256

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Medium oil, 22.3 < API < 31.1
For medium oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Kartoatmojdo and Schmidt
(p.502) formula:
C2 C4
Rs = C ⋅ C 1 ⋅ γG ⋅ (1 + gcorr ) ⋅ A(T ) ⋅ P Eq. 4.257

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
API
log 10 A = C3 ⋅ Eq. 4.258
T + 460
If the separator pressure and temperatures are known then a non-zero gas specific gravity
correction factor is used:

gcorr = 0.1595 ⋅ API

0.4078
⋅ T sep
−0.2466
⋅ log 10 ( )
Psep
114.7
Eq. 4.259

Technical Description
501
PIPESIM User Guide

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

The constants C1, C2, C3 and C4 :

C1 C2 C3 C4
0.10084 0.2556 7.4576 0.9868

Light oil, 31.1 < API

For light oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.503) formula:
1/0.7885
P
Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ γG ⋅ Eq. 4.260
31.7648 ⋅ A(T )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.0009 ⋅ T − 0.0148 ⋅ API Eq. 4.261

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Glasø
The Glasø formula for the solution gas-oil ratio is:
1.22549 1.212009 −0.210784
Rs = γG ⋅ f (P ) ⋅ API ⋅T Eq. 4.262

Here:

log10 f (P ) = 2.887 ⋅ 1 − 1 − 0.397 ⋅ log10 P − C ( ) Eq. 4.263

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt
The Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt formula for the solution gas-oil ratio:
C2 C4
Rs = C ⋅ C 1 ⋅ γG ⋅ (1 + gcorr ) ⋅ A(T ) ⋅ P Eq. 4.264

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
API
log 10 A = C3 ⋅ Eq. 4.265
T + 460
If the separator pressure and temperatures are known then a non-zero gas specific gravity
correction factor is used:

gcorr = 0.1595 ⋅ API

0.4078
⋅ T sep
−0.2466
⋅ log 10 ( ) Psep
114.7
Eq. 4.266

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

The constants C1, C2, C3 and C4 depend on the oil API density:

Technical Description
502
PIPESIM User Guide

C1 C2 C3 C4
API < 30 0.05958 0.7972 13.1405 1.0014
API > 30 0.0315 0.7587 11.2895 1.0937

Lasater
The Lasater formula for the solution gas-oil ratio:

YG γO
Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ 132755 ⋅ ⋅ Eq. 4.267
(1 − Y G ) MW O

Y G = 0.08729793 + 0.37912718 ⋅ ln ( P ⋅ γG
T + 460
+ 0.769066 ) Eq. 4.268

The oil molecular weight is given by

2 3
MW O = 677.3893 − 13.2161 ⋅ API + 0.024775 ⋅ API + 0.00067851 ⋅ API Eq. 4.269

The oil specific gravity is given by

141.5
γO = Eq. 4.270
API + 131.5
C is a calibration (p.504) constant.
Petrosky and Farshad
The Petrosky and Farshad formula for the solution gas-oil ratio is
1
0.8439
γG 0.5774

Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ ( 112.727
P
+ 12.34) ⋅
A(T )
Eq. 4.271

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
−5 1.3911 −4 1.541
A(T ) = 4.561 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T − 7.916 ⋅ 10 ⋅ API Eq. 4.272

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Standing
The Standing formula for the solution gas-oil ratio used in PIPESIM is:
1/0.83
P
Rs (P , T ) = C ⋅ γG ⋅ Eq. 4.273
A(T ) ⋅ 18
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.00091 ⋅ T − 0.0125 ⋅ API Eq. 4.274

C is a calibration (p.504) constant.

Technical Description
503
PIPESIM User Guide

Vasquez and Beggs

The Vasquez and Beggs formula for the solution gas-oil ratio used in PIPESIM is:
C C
Rs (P , T ) = ⋅ γ g ⋅ (P − 14.7) 2 ⋅ A(T ) Eq. 4.275
C1
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

C3 ⋅ API
log 10 A = Eq. 4.276
T + 460
C is a calibration (p.504) constant.
The constants C1, C2 and C3 depend on the oil API density:

C1 C2 C3
API < 30 11.172 1.0937 11.172
API > 30 10.393 1.187 10.393

Calibration

( )
If a calibration data point is provided, Rscal = R Pcal , T cal , then the calibration term C is
s
calculated to ensure the calibration point is a solution of the relevant solution gas-oil ratio equation.
For example, for the Vasquez and Beggs (p.504) equation, the calibration term will be given by
C C
Rscal = ⋅ γ g ⋅ ( Pcal − 14.7) 2 ⋅ A(T cal ) Eq. 4.277
C1
Hence the Vasquez and Beggs (p.504) equation for the solution gas oil ratio can be re-written as:

Rs (P , T ) = Rscal ⋅
( P − 14.7
Pcal − 14.7 )
C2
⋅
A( T )
A(T cal )
Eq. 4.278

It is assumed that the calibration point is a bubble point (p.504), although this will in fact only be
the case if the calibration solution gas-oil ratio Rscal is equal to the fluid GOR.

If no calibration data is provided, PIPESIM uses C = 1.

Bubble point pressure

The bubble point pressure Pb(T ) is the pressure at which all the free gas is dissolved, i.e. when the
solution gas-oil ratio is equal to the fluid GOR:

Rs (Pb, T ) = Rsb Eq. 4.279

The bubble point can therefore be determined by solving the relevant solution gas-oil ratio (p.500)
equation.

Technical Description
504
PIPESIM User Guide

Oil formation volume factor

The oil formation volume factor (FVF) is the ratio of the oil volume (at a given pressure and
temperature) to the stock tank oil volume. As pressure increases, two competing processes take
place: gas is dissolved in oil which increases the volume, and the oil is compressed, which
decreases the volume. Below the bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates and the
saturated oil FVF increases with pressure. However at the bubble point pressure, all the available
gas has dissolved in the oil. Therefore above the bubble point pressure the only effect is
compressibility and the undersaturated oil FVF increases with pressure.

Separate correlations are available for the saturated oil FVF (p.505) and undersaturated oil FVF
(p.506).

Oil formation volume factor for saturated systems

For saturated systems P < Pb the oil formation volume factor Bob (bbl/STB) depends on the
solution gas-oil ratio Rs and the temperature T .

Standing
The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:
1.175
Bob = 0.972 + 0.000147F Eq. 4.280

where the correlating factor is calculated using :

( )
0.5
γg
F = Rs + 1.25T Eq. 4.281
γo

Technical Description
505
PIPESIM User Guide

Data used to develop correlation (p.499)

Vasquez and Beggs

The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:
Bob = 1 + C1Rs + C2(T − 60)
( )
API
γG
+ C3 Rs (T − 60)
API
γG( ) Eq. 4.282

C1 C2 C3
API < 30 4.677 ⋅ 10−4 1.751 ⋅ 10−5 -1.81 ⋅ 10−8

API > 30 4.67 ⋅ 10−4 1.100 × 10

−5
1.337 × 10
−9

Data used to develop correlation (p.499)

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt

The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:
1.50
Bob = 0.98496 + 0.0001F Eq. 4.283

Where the correlating factor

0.755 0.25 −1.50
F = RS γg γo + 0.45T Eq. 4.284

Oil formation volume factor for undersaturated systems

The oil formation volume factor Bo (bbl/STB) for pressures above the bubble point is given by a
simple compressibility law:

Bo = Bob(Rsb) ⋅ exp λZ o ( pb − p ) Eq. 4.285

where Zo is the oil compressibility and λ is a calibration factor (used in mixing different fluids).

Vasquez and Beggs

The Vasquez and Beggs correlation for the oil compressibility is

5 ⋅ Rsb + 17.2 ⋅ T − 1180 ⋅ γG + 12.61 ⋅ API − 1433

Zo = 10 ⋅
−5 Eq. 4.286
P
Data used to develop correlation (p.499)

TURZO method
The performance of a rotodynamic (centrifugal or vertical) pump on a viscous liquid differs from the
performance on water, which is the basis for most published curves. Typically, head and rate of
flow decrease as viscosity increases, while power and the net positive suction head required
(NPSHR) increases. Starting torque could be affected.

Technical Description
506
PIPESIM User Guide

The following formula is the TURZO equation for viscosity correction:

Q⋅ H
Power = Eq. 4.287
E
where
P is power.
Q is the rate.
H is the head.
E is the efficiency.

Qv = Q ⋅ f Q Eq. 4.288
Hv = H ⋅ f H Eq. 4.289
Ev = E ⋅ f E Eq. 4.290

where the value of each equation is less than 1.

The viscosity correction is calculated as follows:
Pv fQ ⋅ fH
= Eq. 4.291
P fE

Oil viscosity
As pressure increases, two competing processes take place: gas is dissolved in oil which lightens
the oil, reducing its viscosity, and the oil is compressed, which increases the viscosity. Below the
bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates and the saturated viscosity decreases
with pressure. However at the bubble point pressure, all the available gas has dissolved in the oil.
Therefore above the bubble point pressure the only effect is compressibility and the
undersaturated viscosity increases with pressure.

Technical Description
507
PIPESIM User Guide

Three sets of correlations are used to determine the oil viscosity:

1. At stock tank pressure the oil viscosity is given by dead oil viscosity correlations (p.508) as a
function of the flowing fluid temperature μo ( Ps , T ) = μod (T ).
2. At pressures below the bubble point the oil viscosity is given by live oil viscosity correlations
(p.511) as a function of the dead oil viscosity and the solution gas-oil ratio
μo (P , T ) = μob( μod , Rs ).
3. At pressures above the bubble point the oil viscosity is given by undersaturated oil viscosity
correlations (p.512), as a function of the bubble point viscosity and the pressure
μo (P , T ) = μou ( μob, P ).

Dead oil viscosity

The correlations available for calculating dead oil viscosity are:

Beggs and Robinson

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
x
μod = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.292
−1.163
where x = yT
z
and y = 10 and z = 3.0324 − 0.02023 ⋅ g API
Data used to develop correlation
The Beggs-Robinson dead oil viscosity correlation was developed using temperature data above
70F. The Beggs-Robinson correlation, when applied to lower temperatures tends to overpredict
visosity and may display asymptotic behavior which worsens with decreasing API gravity and

Technical Description
508
PIPESIM User Guide

temperature. To address this, extrapolation to temperatures lower than 70F are performed by
tuning the Users Data (p.510) equation using Beggs and Robinson calculations at 70F and 80F.
However, as a best practice user data should be used to calibrate dead oil viscosity, especially for
low API oils are modeled at temperatures lower than 70F.
Data used to develop correlation (p.499)

Glasø
Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
d
μod = c log 10(gAPI ) Eq. 4.293

where
10 −3.444
c = 3.141 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T and d = 10.313 ⋅ log 10(T ) − 36.447

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
d
μod = c log 10(gAPI ) Eq. 4.294

where
8 −2.8177
c = 16 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T and d = 5.7526 ⋅ log 10(T ) − 26.9718

De Ghetto et al
De Ghetto et al. use a combination of four correlations to compute the dead oil viscosity depending
on the value of the API.
For API < 10 (extra heavy oils) the following correlation is used:
x
μod = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.295
y
where x = 10 and y = 1.90296 − 0.012619 ⋅ g API − 0.61748 ⋅ log10 (T )
For 10 < API < 22.3 (heavy oils) the following correlation is used:
x
μod = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.296
y
where x = 10 and y = 2.06492 − 0.0179 ⋅ g API − 0.70226 ⋅ log 10(T )
For 22.3 < API < 31.1 (medium oils) the following correlation is used:
d
μod = c log 10(gAPI ) Eq. 4.297

9 −3.556
where c = 220.15 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T and d = 12.5428 ⋅ log 10(T ) − 45.7874
For API > 31.1 (light oils) the following correlation is used
x
μod = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.298

Technical Description
509
PIPESIM User Guide

y
where x = 10 and y = 1.67083 − 0.017628 ⋅ g API − 0.61304 ⋅ log 10(T )

Petrosky and Farshad

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
d
μod = c log 10(gAPI ) Eq. 4.299

7 −2.10255
where c = 2.3511 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T and d = 4.59388 ⋅ log 10(T ) − 22.82792

Hossain et al
Hossain et al. correlation for dead oil viscosity is only valid for heavy oils (10 < API < 22.3) and it is
given as follows:
A B
μod = 10 ⋅ T Eq. 4.300

where A = − 0.71523 ⋅ g API + 22.13766 and B = 0.269024 ⋅ g API − 8.268047

Elsharkawy and Alikhan

Elsharkawy and Alikhan dead oil viscosity is only valid in the API range 20-48 and is calculated as
follows:
x
μod = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.301
y
where x = 10 and y = 2.16924 − 0.02525 ⋅ g API − 0.68875 ⋅ log 10(T )

User's data
If user's data is selected for the dead oil viscosity method, then a curve is fitted through the two
( ) ( )
supplied data points μ1, T 1 and μ2, T 2 based on the functional form of the Beal correlation
(p.578):

( )
log μod = log ( B ) − C log (T ) Eq. 4.302

where

C=
log ( ) μ1
μ2

( )
Eq. 4.303
T2
log
T1
and
C C
B = μ1T 1 = μ2T 2 Eq. 4.304

Technical Description
510
PIPESIM User Guide

Live oil viscosity correlations

Many of the correlations available for calculating live oil viscosity are of the form
B
μob = A⋅ μod Eq. 4.305

where A and B are functions of the Solution gas-oil ratio Rs :

Correlation A B
Chew and
Connally
Data used
to develop 0.2 +
correlation
( 10
0.8
0.000852 Rs ) 0.482 +
( 10
0.518
0.000777 Rs )
(p.499)
Beggs and Data used −0.515 −0.338
Robinson to develop 10.715 ⋅ Rs + 100 ( ) (
5.44 ⋅ Rs + 150 )
correlation
(p.499)
Elsharkawy −1.12410 −1.06622
and Alikhan (
1241.932 ⋅ Rs + 641.026 ) (
1768.841 ⋅ Rs + 1180.335 )
Hossain et 1 − 1.7188311 ⋅ 10
−3
⋅ Rs + 1 − 2.052461 ⋅ 10
−3
⋅ Rs +
al
−6 2 −6 2
+1.58031 ⋅ 10 ⋅ Rs +3.47559 ⋅ 10 ⋅ Rs

Petrosky
and
Farshad

Other authors use more complicated formulas:

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt

Live oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
2
μob = − 0.06821 + 0.9824F + 0.0004034F Eq. 4.306

where
0.43+0.5165⋅ B
F = A ⋅ μod Eq. 4.307

and
−0.000845 Rs
A = 0.2001 + 0.8428 10 Eq. 4.308

and
−0.00081 Rs
B = 10 Eq. 4.309

Technical Description
511
PIPESIM User Guide

Khan

Live oil viscosity calculated by Khan is a function of the gas and oil specific gravities ( γG , γO ), the
solution gas-oil ratio ( Rs ), the bubble pressure ( Pb), and the flowing pressure ( P ). It is given as
follows:
y
μob = A ⋅ e Eq. 4.310

where

y = ln (0.09) + 0.5 ⋅ ln ( γG ) −
1
3
( )
⋅ ln Rs − 4.5 ⋅ ln
T
460( )
− 3 ⋅ ln 1 − γO ( ) Eq. 4.311

and

( )
−0.14
P −2.5×10−4( P − Pb)
A= ⋅e Eq. 4.312
Pb

De Ghetto et al
De Ghetto et al. expression of the live oil viscosity is a combination of 4 correlations depending on
the value of oil API.

F A B
For API μob = 2.3945 + 0.8927F +
0.5798+0.3432 B − 0.0335 + −0.00081⋅ Rs
< 10 A ⋅ μod 10
(extra 2 −0.000845⋅ Rs
heavy +0.01567 F +1.0875 10
oils)
For 10 < μ = − 0.6311 + 1.078 F − 0.4731+0.5664 B 0.2478 + −0.00081⋅ Rs
API < ob A ⋅ μ od 10
22.3 2 −0.000845⋅ R s
(heavy − 0.003653 F +0.6114 10
oils)
For 22.3 μ = 0.0132 + 0.9821 F − 0.3855+0.5664 B 0.2038 + −0.00081⋅ Rs
< API < ob A ⋅ μod 10
31.1 2 −0.000845⋅ Rs
(medium − 0.005215 F +0.8591 10
oils)
For API B −0.6487 −0
> 31.1 μob = A⋅ μod (
25.1921 ⋅ Rs + 100 ) (
2.7516 ⋅ Rs + 150 )
(light
oils)

Undersaturated oil viscosity

The correlations available for calculating undersaturated oil viscosity are:

Technical Description
512
PIPESIM User Guide

Vasquez and Beggs

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

( )
A
p
μou = μob Eq. 4.313
pb

where A = 2.6 p
1.187
(
exp − 8.98 × 10 p − 11.513
−5
)
Data used to develop correlation (p.499)

Kouzel
Undersaturated oil viscosity is derived from the equation:
F ( p)
10
μou = μob ⋅ Eq. 4.314
F ( pb)
10
p − 14.7
F ( p) =
(
1000 A + Bμ od
0.278
) Eq. 4.315

Where A and B are parameters entered by the user. Suggested values for A and B are 0.0239 and
0.01638 respectively.

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μou = 1.00081 μob + 0.001127 A( p − pb) Eq. 4.316

A = − 0.006517 μob ( 1.8148

) + 0.038( μ ) ob
1.59

Khan
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μou = μobexp 9.65e

−5
( p − pb) Eq. 4.317

De Ghetto et al
De Ghetto et al. expression of the undersaturated oil viscosity is a combination of 3 correlations
depending on the value of oil API.
For API < 10 (extra heavy oils) the following correlation is used:

μou = μob − 1 −
( p
pb )( A
B ) Eq. 4.318

where A = 10
−2.19
(μ od
1.055
)( p b
0.3132
) and B = 10( 0.0099 g API )
For 10 < API < 22.3 (heavy oils) the following correlation is used:

Technical Description
513
PIPESIM User Guide

μou = 0.9886 μob + 0.002763 A( p − pb) Eq. 4.319

where A = − 0.01153 μob ( 1.7933

) + 0.03610( μ ob )
1.5939

For API > 22.3 ( medium and light oils) the following correlation is used:

(
μou = μob − 1 −
p A
pb B ) Eq. 4.320

where A = 10
−2.19
(μ oD
1.055
)( p
b ) and B = 10(
0.3132 −0.00288 g API )

Hossain et al
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μou = μob + 0.004481( p − pb)( A − B ) Eq. 4.321

where A = 0.555955 μob ( 1.068099

) and B = 0.527737( μ ob
1.063547
)
Petrosky and Farshad
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μou = μob + 1.3449E

−3
( p − pb)(10 A) Eq. 4.322

where A = − 1.0146 + 1.3322 X − 0.4876 X − 1.15036 X and X = log10 μob

2 3
( )
Elsharkawy and Alikhan
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μou = μob + A 10
−2.0771
( p − pb) Eq. 4.323
1.19279 −0.40712 −0.7941
where A = μod ⋅ μob ⋅ pb

Bergman and Sutton

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
B
μou = μobexp A( p − pb) Eq. 4.324

−4 −5 −7 2
where A = 2.278877 ⋅ 10 − 1.48211 ⋅ 10 ⋅ X + 6.5698 ⋅ 10 ⋅X ,
B = 0.873204 + 2.24623 ⋅ 10 ⋅ X and X = log 10( μob)
−2

Technical Description
514
PIPESIM User Guide

Disabling the calculation of undersaturated oil viscosity

If you select None as the undersaturated oil viscosity method, then the undersaturated oil viscosity
is assumed to be the same as the saturated live oil viscosity at the same temperature and
pressure.

Gas compressibility
The real gas law is given by pV = ZRT where

p pressure
V volume
R universal gas constant
T absolute temperature
Z gas compressibility factor

Numerous equations of state have been proposed to predict this Z-factor. Standing and Katz
presented a generalized Z-factor chart for predicting the volumetric behavior of natural gases. To
employ this chart, we require knowledge of the critical properties of the gas (namely, critical
pressure and critical temperature) as a function of the specific gravity. These are given in the black
oil model by Standing (1977) for natural gas and gas-condensate systems:

Gas systems
2
T c = 168 + 325 γ G − 12.5 γG Eq. 4.325

Gas-condensate systems
2
T c = 187 + 330 γG − 71.5 γG Eq. 4.326

2
pc = 706 − 51.7 γG − 11.1 γ G Eq. 4.327

where

T c critical temperature

pc critical pressure

γG specific gravity of the gas mixture

This allows us to calculate the reduced temperature and reduced pressure, defined respectively
as:
T
Tc = Eq. 4.328
Tc

Technical Description
515
PIPESIM User Guide

p
pc = Eq. 4.329
pc
Various correlations have been proposed for curve fitting this reduced pressure-reduced
temperature Z-factor chart and are available in PIPESIM:
Hall-Yarborough Z-Factor Correlation (p.516)
Standing Z-Factor Correlation (p.516)
Robinson et al. Z-Factor Correlation (p.517)

Hall-Yarborough Z-factor correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:

( )
2
0.06125 pR T R (
x −1.2 1−T R ) Eq. 4.330
Z= e
ρR
where the reduced density is a root of the following equation:

2 (ρ + ρ + ρ − ρ )
R R
2
R
3
R
4

F ( ρR ) = 0.06125 pr T R − 1.2(1 − T R ) +
((1 − ρ ) − ((14.67T )− 9.76T 4.85T ) ρ ) Eq. 4.331
3 2 3 2

R R R R R
(
+ 90.7T R − 242.2T R
2
+ 42.4T ) ρ
R
3
R
2.18+2.82T R
=0

where

where ρ R reduced density

pR reduced pressure

TR reciprocal of the reduced temperature

The method is not recommended for use within a pressure range pR = 0, 1 .

Standing Z-factor correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:
A + (1 − A)
Z= G
x Eq. 4.332
e B + FP r

where the coefficients A to G are given by:

0.5
A = 1.39(T r − 0.92) − 0.36T R − 0.101

Technical Description
516
PIPESIM User Guide

6
0.32 pR
0.666 2
B = (0.62 − 0.23T r ) pR + − 0.037 pR +
(T r − 0.86) 10 (
9 T R −1 )

C = (0.132 − 0.32log (T R ))
2

D = 10 ( 0.3016−0.49T R +0.1824T R
)
The method is not valid for T R < 0.92.

Robinson et al. Z-factor correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:

Z = 1 + A1 +
( )( )
A2
TR
+
A3

TR
3 ρR + A4 +
2
( )
A5
TD
2
ρR +
A5 A6
ρR
DR
5

Eq. 4.333
A7
( )e ( )
2 2 x − A8 ρ R
+ 3 ρR 1 + A8 ρR
Tr

where

0.27 pR
D=
TR

A1 = 0.310506237

A2 = − 1.4067099

A3 = − 0.57832729

A4 = 0.53530771

A5 = − 0.61232032

A6 = − 0.10488813

A7 = 0.68157001

A8 = 0.68446549

Technical Description
517
PIPESIM User Guide

The method is valid within a temperature and pressure range of T r = 1.05, 3.0 and
pr = 0.2, 3.0 .

Gas viscosity
Gas viscosity is calculated using the Lee et al (p.584) correlation as follows:
Y
μg = K ⋅ exp X ⋅ ρg Eq. 4.334

where

(7.77 + 0.183 ⋅ γ G ) ⋅ (T + 460)1.5 −4

K= ⋅ 10
(122.4 + 373.6 ⋅ γG + T + 460)
1914.5
X = 2.57 + + 0.275 γg
T
Y = 1.11 + 0.04 X

μg is the gas viscosity (cp)

γg is the gas specific gravity

ρg is the gas density (g/cc)

T is the temperature ( oF )

Surface tension
Oil-gas surface tension
The oil-gas surface tension is given by Baker and Swerdloff (p.578):

σO = 37.7 − 0.05 ⋅ (T − 100) − 0.26 ⋅ API ⋅

Eq. 4.335
−4 −7 2 −11 3
⋅ 1 − 7.1 ⋅ 10 ⋅ P + 2.1 ⋅ 10 ⋅ P + 2.37 ⋅ 10 ⋅P

σO is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

P is the pressure (psia)

T is the temperature o
( F)

API is the oil API gravity

Technical Description
518
PIPESIM User Guide

Water-gas surface tension

The water-gas surface tension is given by Katz:

σW = 70 − 0.1 ⋅ (T − 74) − 0.002 ⋅ P Eq. 4.336

σW is the surface tension between the water and the gas (dynes/cm)

P is the pressure (psia)

T is the temperature o
( F)

Black oil enthalpy

Black oil fluid enthalpy model
The black oil fluid model makes some approximations in the entropy balance based upon the
thermodynamic behavior of typical hydrocarbon fluids. The black oil model is suitable for light,
medium and heavy oil based fluids, particularly if significant quantities of water are present. The
black oil model is fast, simple to use and easy to calibrate. It is also suitable for gas and gas/
condensate screening studies.
There are currently two black oil enthalpy calculation methods available in PIPESIM.

2009 method
The enthalpy of the gas phase is given by:

H g = c p T − ηg c P + ΔH vap Eq. 4.337

g pg

The enthalpy of the oil phase is given by:

H o = c p T − ηo c P Eq. 4.338
o po

The enthalpy of the water phase is given by:

H w = c p T − ηw c P Eq. 4.339
w pw

where the gas, oil and water Joule Thomson coefficients are approximated by (Ref: Alves, Alhanati
and Shoham (p.578):

/
1 T ∂Z
ηg = 5.40395
Z ∂T Eq. 4.340
ρg c
pg

/
1
ηo = − 5.40395
Eq. 4.341
ρo c
po

Technical Description
519
PIPESIM User Guide

/
1
ηw = − 5.40395
Eq. 4.342
ρw c
pw

The total enthalpy of the fluid is given by:

H = H g wg + H o wo + H w ww Eq. 4.343

where:

H is the specific enthalpy BTU / lb

T is the flowing temperature o
F
P is the flowing pressure psia
cp is the specific heat capacity at constant pressure BTU lb oF
/
η is the Joule Thomson coefficient F / psia
o

ρ is the flowing density lb / ft

3

Z is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

w is the flowing mass fraction dimensionless

ΔH vap is the latent heat of vaporization BTU / lb

/ 3
1 BTU ft = 5.40395 psia

1983 method
The enthalpy of the gas phase is given by:

H g = c p T + P (1.619 × 10 )P − 0.02734
−10 −6
P + 1.412 × 10 Eq. 4.344
g
The enthalpy of the oil phase is given by:
−3
H o = c p T + 3.36449 × 10 P Eq. 4.345
o
The enthalpy of the water phase is given by:

( )
−3
2.9641 × 10
H w = cp T + P Eq. 4.346
w γw
The total enthalpy of the fluid is given by:

H = H g mg + H o mo + H w mw Eq. 4.347

where:

Technical Description
520
PIPESIM User Guide

m is the stock tank mass fraction dimensionless

γ is the stock tank specific gravity dimensionless

Black oil mixing

Introduction
Mixing occurs in network models, when two or more streams meet at a junction and in single
branch models where injected fluid, or fluids from multiple completions mix with fluid already in the
branch. The fluid properties of the mixed stream need to be determined.

Stock tank oil properties

Phase ratios (gas oil ratio / water cut)

The phase ratios for a mixed stream are calculated by adding the individual phase rates of each
stream and then calculating the ratio of the phases. The calculations are at stock tank conditions.

Qvg ,mix
GOR mix = Eq. 4.348
Qvo ,mix
Qvw ,mix
WCUT mix = Eq. 4.349
Qvw ,mix + Q
vo ,mix
Here:

GOR mix is the gas oil ratio of the mixture

WCUT mix is the water cut of the mixture

n is the stock tank oil volume rate of the combined stream

Qvo ,mix = ∑ Qvo ,i
i =1
n is the stock tank water volume rate of the mixture
Qvw ,mix = ∑ Qvw ,i
i =1
n is the stock tank gas volume rate of the mixture
Qvg ,mix = ∑ Qvg ,i
i =1

Qvo ,i = QvL ,i ( )
× 1 − WCUT i is the stock tank oil volume rate of stream i

Qvw ,i = QvL × WCUT i is the water volume rate of stream i

,i

Qvg ,i = QvL × GOR i is the stock tank gas volume rate of stream i
,i

QvL = Qvo ,i + Qvw ,i is the stock tank liquid volume rate of stream i
,i

WCUT i is the water cut of stream i

Technical Description
521
PIPESIM User Guide

GOR i is the gas oil ratio of stream i

n is the number of streams in the mixture

Phase densities
The phase densities (and specific gravities) are determined as a volumetric average of the input
stream densities:

Σ DOD i × Qvo ,i
DOD mix = Eq. 4.350
Qvo ,mix
ΣGSG i × Qvg ,i
GSG mix = Eq. 4.351
Qvg ,mix
ΣWSG i × Qvw ,i
WSG mix = Eq. 4.352
Qvw ,mix
Here:

DOD mix is the dead oil density of the mixture

GSG mix is the gas specific gravity of the mixture

WSG mix is the water specific gravity of the mixture

DOD i is the dead oil density of stream i

GSG i is the gas specific gravity of stream i

WSG i is the water specific gravity of stream i

Contaminants
The mole fractions of contaminants for the mixed stream is determined using a gas phase
volumetric average of the individual stream mole fractions:

ΣZ j ,i × Qvg ,i
Z j ,mix = Eq. 4.353
Qvg ,mix
Here:

Z j ,mix is the mole fraction of contaminant j in the mixture

Z j ,i is the mole fraction of contaminant j in stream i

Technical Description
522
PIPESIM User Guide

Thermal data (heat capacity and thermal conductivity)

The phase thermal properties of mixed streams are calculated using mass averages of the phase
properties of the input streams:

ΣCP φ ,i × Q φ ,i
CP φ ,mix = Eq. 4.354
Q φ ,mix
Σ K φ ,i × Q φ ,i
K φ ,mix = Eq. 4.355
Q φ ,mix
ΣΔH vap ,i × Qg ,i
ΔH vap ,mix = Eq. 4.356
Qg ,mix
Here:

φ is the phase, oil φ = O , vapor (gas) φ = G , or water φ = W

CP φ ,mix is the heat capacity of phase φ in the mixture

K φ ,mix is the thermal conductivity of phase φ in the mixture

ΔH vap ,mix is the latent heat of vaporization of the gaseous phase g in the mixture

CP φ ,i is the heat capacity of phase φ in stream i

K φ ,i is the thermal conductivity of phase φ in stream i

ΔH vap ,i is the latent heat of vaporization of the gaseous phase g in stream i

n is the mass flow rate of phase φ of the mixture

Q φ ,mix = ∑ Q φ ,i
i =1

Q φ ,i is the mass flow rate of phase φ of stream i

Correlations
Unlike other properties, the choice of correlations used for the combined fluid can not be decided
by averaging. Instead, the selected correlation for the mixed stream is chosen as the one which
has the highest flow rate associated with it for the relevant phase. For example the correlation for
mixture Oil Viscosity is set to be the correlation that has maximum stock tank rate associated with
it.
While deciding the correlation for the mixed stream, we have to consider following rules:
• All properties are independent of each other. For example the. choice for mixture dead Oil
viscosity correlation has nothing to do with mixture live Oil viscosity
• Resultant mixture correlation is decided based on associated phase rate (for example, oil if we
are deciding Oil property) ; not based on number of streams using that correlation

Technical Description
523
PIPESIM User Guide

• Stock tank flow rates are used at the point of mixing.

Example 1
For an example assume we are mixing 7 flow streams which have different sets of correlations as
tabulated below:

Stream Flow rate (STB/ Dead Oil Viscosity Live Oil Viscosity Under-saturated Oil
day) Viscosity
1 5000 Hossain Kartoatmodjo Vasquez and Beggs
2 2000 Glasso Khan Kouzel
3 4000 Petrosky-Farshad Chew and Connally Kouzel
4 3000 Beggs and Robinson Khan Kouzel
5 6000 Beggs and Robinson Kartoatmodjo Bergman and Sutton
6 8000 Glasso Hossain Bergman and Sutton
7 2000 Beggs and Robinson Elsharkawy Kouzel

The total oil flow for each correlation, and the correlations selected for the combined fluid are
tabulated below:

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Dead Oil Viscosity

4,5,7 11000 Beggs and Robinson
2,6 10000 Glasso
1 5000 Hossain
3 4000 Petrosky-Farshad
combined 30000 Beggs and Robinson

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Live Oil Viscosity

1,5 11000 Kartoatmodjo
6 8000 Hossain
2,4 5000 Khan
3 4000 Chew and Connally
7 2000 Elsharkawy
combined 30000 Kartoatmodjo

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Under-saturated Oil Viscosity

5,6 14000 Bergman and Sutton
2,3,4,7 11000 Kouzel
1 5000 Vasquez and Beggs
combined 30000 Bergman and Sutton

Technical Description
524
PIPESIM User Guide

Example 2
Mixing of fluids that use different correlations may produce unexpected results. In the above
example, a 51%-49% mixture of streams 1 and 2 will use the same correlations as stream 1, but a
49%-51% mixture will use the same correlations as stream 2. So, even though these to mixtures
are similar, their properties may be modelled completely differently. Therefore it is important to
select compatible correlations when modelling networks.

Calibration data
A number of correlations are calibrated using user supplied data. This section describes how
streams with different calibration data are mixed.

Dead oil viscosity

Dead oil viscosity (p.508) can be specified using no calibration data; 2–point {(T 1, μ1), (T 2, μ2)}
calibration data; or as a User Supplied Table with multipoint calibration data
{(T 1, μ1), ( )}
… , T n , μn . If none of the streams in a mixture use calibration data, then the mixing
is done by simply determining the mixture correlation, as outlined in Correlations (p.523). If
however, at least one of the input streams uses dead oil viscosity with calibration data then a User
Supplied Table is used for the mixture deadoil viscosity. The table entries are calculated in three
steps:

{ }
1. The number and value of the temperature points T x in the table are determined:
• If the inlet streams use multipoint calibration, then the mixed stream will use multipoint
calibration. PIPESIM will try to include all the input temperatures in the mixture table, up to a
maximum of 40 points.
• If the inlet streams only use 2–point calibration data, then the mixed stream will use only two
points. The Temperature will be set to the minimum and maximum temperatures of the input
stream calibration temperatures.

( )
2. The viscosity of each inlet stream μi T x is calculated at each temperature in the mixed stream
table.
3. The mixture viscosity is calculated at each point in the stream using the Kendall and Monroe
cubic mixing rule:

( )
3
n Qvo ,i 1/3
μcomb(T x ) = ∑ ( ( ))
⋅ μi T x Eq. 4.357
i =1 Qvo ,mix

Example 3
Streams 1–3, defined in the table below, mix at a junction. All streams use dead oil correlations
without data, so the mixed stream, stream 4, uses the dead oil correlation with the biggest flow, in
this case Beggs and Robinson. Stream 4 then mixes with stream 5 at another junction. Stream 5
uses a correlation with calibration data. Even though stream 5 has less flow than stream 4, the
mixture, stream 6, will use a User Supplied Table to define its dead oil correlation.

Technical Description
525
PIPESIM User Guide

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Dead Oil Viscosity

1 2000 Beggs and Robinson
2 2500 Chew and Connally
3 1000 Beggs and Robinson
4= 1+2+3 5500 Beggs and Robinson
5 2500 Any correlation with 2–point data, or a User Supplied Table
6 = 4+5 8000 User Supplied Table

Solution gas Rs

( )
If one or more of the input streams has a single point calibration data, Rsi Pref ,i , T ref ,i , then the
mixed stream solution gas will also be calibrated using a single point:
1. Determine the correlation (p.523) for the mixed stream.

( )
2. Determine reference pressure and temperature values Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix for calibrating the
mixed stream viscosity. These are calculated as the mass flow rate average of the input stream
reference pressures and temperatures — for those input streams with calibration data.
3. Determine the solution gas of each stream at the reference pressure and temperature for the
( )
mixed stream Rsi Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix . For those streams that are undersaturated at
(Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix ) the “potential” solution gas is determined by extrapolation.

4. The solution gas for the mixed stream is determined as a volume average of all the input
stream solution gas (or potential solution gas) values.

Technical Description
526
PIPESIM User Guide

Live oil viscosity

A number of steps are needed to determine the live oil viscosity of a mixture:
1. Determine the correlation (p.523) for the mixed stream.

(
2. Determine reference pressure and temperature values Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix for calibrating the )
mixed stream viscosity. These are calculated as the mass flow rate average of the input stream
reference pressures and temperatures, for those input streams with calibration data. If the
mixed stream is not saturated at the calculated reference pressure and temperature, the
reference pressure is reduced to the saturation pressure
n Qo ,i
T ref ,mix = ∑ T ref ,i
1=1 Qo ,mix
n Qo ,i
Pref ,mix = MIN ∑ Pref ,i , Psat ,mix (T ref ,mix )
1=1 Qo ,mix
3. Determine the input stream viscosities at the mixture reference pressure and temperature
μo ,i (Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix ). If an input stream is undersaturated at (Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix ) then its
viscosity is calculated by first adding more gas so that the stream is saturated. The added gas
has a specific gravity equal to that of the mixture.

( )
4. The live oil viscosity of the mixture is calculated at Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix using the 4.357 (p.525)
equation.

5. The live oil correlation can then be calibrated using μo ,mix Pref ,mix , T ref ,mix ( )

Technical Description
527
PIPESIM User Guide

4.5.2 Compositional fluid modeling

In compositional fluid models the user can specify a number of components that make up the fluid.
These can be real molecules, such as methane, ethane or water, known as library components or
pseudo components that represent the properties of several molecules, known as petroleum
fractions. The phase behaviour and thermodynamic properties are determined by an equation of
state (EOS). This equation of state is either a cubic equation (p.528) (this is a modified form of
the Van der Waals equation) or a non-cubic equation (p.532). The number of phases that can be
modelled depends on the flash package:
• Two phase flash. Water is removed from the fluid and the remaining hydrocarbons are flashed
to determine the amount of oil and vapour. This method is used for most compositional flash
packages (and for black oil models). This means that water only appears in the water phase
and does not appear in the vapour phase.
• Three phase flash. If the Multiflash compositional package is used, then a three phase flash is
performed. This means that there is a possibility that water will appear in the vapour phase, and
some components (e.g. water, methanoll) will appear in the aqueous phase.
The three phase flash gives a more accurate model of water behaviour than the two phase
flash. However, there can be problems when the flash produces two non-aqueous liquids —
one of these may be mis-identified as water.
• Multiphase flash. The Multiflash compositional standalone package can be used to model
vapour and three liquid phases as well as solid phases. Within PIPESIM flow simulations,
Multiflash is only ever used to model two liquid phases. However, it can be used within
PIPESIM to plot phase envelopes and to predict whether solid phases (asphaltene, hydrates,
wax and ice) would be present.

Cubic equations of state

Equations of state (EoS) describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. The phase state and most thermodynamic properties (e.g. density,
enthalpy, entropy) are derived from the equation of state. Separate models are used for transport
properties, such as Viscosity (p.507), thermal conductivity and surface tension. PIPESIM can use
both cubic and non-cubic (p.532) Equations of State.
Volume shift (three-parameter) and acentric factor corrections, if available, are recommended for
the cubic equations of state.
The cubic equation of state can be written as:
nRT a
P= + Eq. 4.358
V − b (V + m ⋅ b) ⋅ (V + m ⋅ b)
1 2

Where:

P is the pressure of the fluid

V is the total volume of the container containing the fluid
a is a measure of the attraction between particles
b is the volume excluded from V by a particle

Technical Description
528
PIPESIM User Guide

n is the number of moles

T is the temperature
R is the gas constant

m1, m2 constants:
( )
for the Peng-Robinson EOS m1, m2 = (1 + 2, 1 − 2)

( )
for the Soave— Redlich—Kwong EOS m1, m2 = (1, 0)

The EoS is a cubic equation for the volume, as a function of the pressure, temperature and EoS
parameters. It is often written in terms of the compressibility:
PV
Z= Eq. 4.359
nRT
( )
In the special case m1, m2 = (0, 0) the cubic EoS reduces to van der Waals equation, and in the
special case when a = b = 0 the cubic EoS reduces to the ideal gas equation.
The parameters a and b are in fact functions of the pressure, temperature, composition,
component properties and the mixing rules. If there is more than one phase present, the
composition of each phase differs and hence each phase has different equation of state
parameters. Assuming a quadratic mixing rule for a and a linear mixing rule for b the parameters
for phase φ are given by
2 2 2
n ⋅R ⋅T 1/2
aφ = ⋅ ΣΣ( Ai ⋅ A j ) ⋅ (1 − δij ) ⋅ x φi ⋅ x φj Eq. 4.360
P
n⋅R⋅T
bφ = ⋅ Σ Bi ⋅ x φi Eq. 4.361
P
Where:

x φi is the mole fraction of component i in phase φ

Ai is a function of the temperature T , the component critical pressure Pci , critical temperature
T ci and acentric factor ωi

Bi is a function of the component critical pressure Pci and critical temperature T ci

δij is the Binary Interaction Parameter (p.145) between component i and component j

Thermodynamic properties
Thermodynamic properties can be calculated from the equation of state. The method may vary
between flash packages. The following equations are used in E300 flash.

The fugacity coefficient Φ φi for each component in each phase is used to determine the phase
state and phase split. It is given by:

Technical Description
529
PIPESIM User Guide

∞
ln Φ φi =
RT ∫
−1
V
RT
V
−
∂P
∂ ni ( ) T ,V ,n j
d V − ln
PV
RT Eq. 4.362

The phase density can be found from the phase volume. For a two parameter Equation of State,
this is found by solving the cubic equation. However, this can give poor prediction of the liquid
density. For a three parameter Equation of State, the phase volume is modified by subtracting a
volume shift term:
eos
V φ = V φ − Σ x φi ⋅ V si Eq. 4.363
o
The phase enthalpy H φ is calculated from the ideal gas enthalpy: H φ :
∞
Hφ =
o
Hφ − ∫ V
T ( ∂∂TP )V
− P d V − RT + PV Eq. 4.364

o
The phase entropy S φ is calculated from the ideal gas entropy: S φ :
∞
Sφ =
o
Sφ − ∫ ( ∂∂TP )
V V
−
R
V
d V + R ⋅ ln
PV
RT
Eq. 4.365

o
The ideal gas enthalpy and entropy are determined from the ideal gas specific heat C pφ :
T
o
Hφ = ∫ T ref
o
C pφ dT Eq. 4.366

T o
C pφ
=∫
P
− R ⋅ Σ ( x φi ⋅ ln x φi )
o
Sφ dT − R ⋅ ln Eq. 4.367
T ref T P ref
The ideal gas specific heat is calculated by summing the component specific heats
o o
C pφ = Σ C pi ⋅ x φi Eq. 4.368
o
For library components, the component specific heat C pi is a known functions of temperature. For
user defined petroleum fractions, the component specific heat is calculated as a function of
temperature and the component molecular weight MW i , boiling point temperature T Bi , specific
gravity γi and acentric factor ωi .

E300 flash

The ECLIPSE version of the Peng Robinson EoS has an option correction for the Ai term for large
acentric factors (ECLIPSE PRCORR keyword).

E300 flash name Peneloux Volume Shift Correction Peng Robinson 1978 Acentric Factor
Correction
Peng-Robinson

Technical Description
530
PIPESIM User Guide

Peng-Robinson Yes
Peng-Robinson Yes
Peng-Robinson Yes Yes
SRK Yes
SRK

Multiflash
The Multiflash Implemnetation in PIPESIM has the cubic Equations of State, Peng-Robinson and
RKS, along with the Cubic Plus Association (CPA) model, which is an extension of the RKS
(advanced) cubic EoS to handle polar and hydrogen bonding components. The Multiflash
implementation also includes non-cubic EoS (p.532).
EoS names differ from those in the Multiflash GUI.

Peng Robinson
Peneloux Volume
PIPESIM GUI name Multiflash GUI name 1978 Acentric
Shift Correction
Factor Correction
Peng-Robinson PR (Advanced) Yes
NOT CURRENTLY
PR78 (Advanced) Yes
AVAILABLE
SRK RKS (Advanced) Yes
Association (CPA-
Association (CPA) Yes
Infochem)

Versions of the Peng-Robinson and SRK equations of state without the volume shift correction are
available, but are not recommended. Liquid densities predicted by these equations of state can be
poor. In particular the liquid water density is out by about 15%. This causes problems in PIPESIM,
since it can predict water being lighter than oil. This particular problem does not arise in two phase
flashes, where the water properties are not determined by the equation of state. It does occur in 3
phase flashes, such as Multiflash.

Peng Robinson 1978

Multiflash GUI Volume Shift
PIPESIM GUI name Acentric Factor
name Correction
Correction
Standard Peng-Robinson PR
NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE PR78 Yes
Standard SRK RKS

DBR flash

The DBR flash has both the Peng Robinson and the Soave— Redlich—Kwong equations of state,
with both two and three parameter (volume shift) options:

DBR flash Volume Shift Correction

Technical Description
531
PIPESIM User Guide

Peng-Robinson
Peng-Robinson Yes
SRK
SRK Yes

Non-cubic equations of state

Equations of state (EoS) describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. The phase state and most thermodynamic properties (e.g. density,
enthalpy, entropy) are derived from the equation of state. Separate models are used for transport
properties, such as viscosity, conductivity and surface tension.
PIPESIM can use both cubic (p.528) and non-cubic and Equations of State.

Multiflash

BWRS
The BWRS is an 11-parameter non-cubic equation. The BWRS equation gives much more
accurate volumetric and thermal property predictions for light gases and hydrocarbons. It should
give reasonable vapor-liquid phase equilibrium predictions, but owing to its complexity, it requires
more computing time than the cubic EOS (e.g SRK or Peng-Robinson). The EoS is similar to a
virial expansion in density:

( ) ( )
′ 2 2
RT B C D C γ −γ
P= ⋅ n+ + 2 + 5 + 5 ⋅ 1 + 2 ⋅ exp Eq. 4.369
V V V V V V V
2

The BWRS EoS can be used with most of the components that can be used with the cubic EoS.
(p.537)

Note: It does not work with the Hydrogen component or with aqueous components.

CSMA
CSMA is the Multiflash multi-reference fluid corresponding states model. The CSMA model is
based on a collection of very accurate equations of state for a number of common substances. The
density, thermal properties and VLE of each substance are generally reproduced to within the
accuracy of experimental measurements. The properties of mixtures can be estimated from a
model that reduces to the (accurate) pure component values as the mixture composition
approaches each pure component limit.
An important application is mixtures containing CO2, H2S and light hydrocarbons. It can only be
used with a limited selection of components (p.542).

Note: It can only be used via an MFL file.

Technical Description
532
PIPESIM User Guide

CPA
The CPA (cubic-plus-association) model extends the capabilities of industry-standard cubic
equations of state to polar and hydrogen-bonding components. It is applicable to a wide variety of
systems of importance to the upstream oil industry such as hydrocarbons, gases, water and
hydrate inhibitors (alcohols and glycols).
The Multiflash CPA model is based on the Infochem RKSA (advanced Redlich-Kwong-Soave)
equation of state. It has the advantage for non-polar substances, because it reduces the RKSA eos
so that all the characterization methods and parameters for standard oil and gas mixtures can be
used. Extra terms in the equation describe polar and associating compounds. The main application
in Multiflash is representing the fluid phases when modeling hydrates and hydrate inhibition. CPA
shows improvements over standard cubic eos for other systems such as acid gases and water.

Note: Salt components are not supported.

The CPA model is the subject of an active research program that is extending its applicability to
many other systems of industrial importance.

Reference fluid thermodynamic and transport properties — REFPROP

REFPROP is an acronym for REFerence fluid PROPerties. The flash package provides
thermodynamic and transport properties of industrially important fluids and their mixtures with an
emphasis on refrigerants and hydrocarbons, especially natural gas systems. It is developed by the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
REFPROP is based on highly accurate single component and mixture models based on the
Helmholtz energy.

NIST recommendation for pure fluids / mixture

For single components, REFPROP has a recommended set of equations of state explicit in
Helmholtz energy. That is, for each single component, a specific equation of state explicit in
Helmholtz energy is chosen. e.g. for carbon dioxide this is Span and Wagner (1996) (p.588) .
Mixture calculations employ a model that applies mixing rules to the Helmholtz energy of the
mixture components; it uses a departure function to account for the departure from ideal mixing.

GERG

Introduction
GERG is an acronym for Groupe Européen de Recherches Gazières, which is supported by the
European natural-gas companies. The European natural-gas companies include E.ON Ruhrgas
(Germany), Enagás (Spain), Gasunie (The Netherlands), Gaz de France (France), Snam Rete Gas
(Italy) and Statoil (Norway).
The flash package, developed at Ruhr-Universitat Bochum, provides thermodynamic and transport
properties of industrially important gases and other mixtures with an emphasis on hydrocarbons
and further components. Lehrstuhl fuer Thermodynamik (Department of Thermodynamics) of Ruhr-
Universitat Bochum, Germany have developed a wide-range equation of state (EOS) for natural
gases and other mixtures that meets the requirements of standard and advanced natural gas
applications.

Technical Description
533
PIPESIM User Guide

The first published equation of state by Ruhr-Universitat Bochum covers mixtures consisting of up
to 18 components as listed below:

Annotations:
Yellow – natural gas main components
Red – further hydrocarbons
Blue – further components

In 2004, the new equation of state was evaluated by the GERG group and then adopted under the
name GERG-2004 equation of state (or GERG-2004 for short) as an international reference
equation of state for natural gases and similar mixtures (GERG standard).

GERG-2008
In 2008, Ruhr-Universitat Bochum further extended GERG-2004 by including three additional
components n-nonane, n-decane and hydrogen sulfide, making its component list up to 21
components. This expanded equation of state was called GERG-2004 XT08, where "XT08" meant
"eXTension 2008". In 2010, upon the request of the ISO Working Group (ISO TC193 SC1 WG13),
Ruhr-Universitat Bochum simplified the name of GERG-2004 XT08 to GERG-2008, the current
version of GERG.
The GERG-2008 equation of state has been adopted as an ISO Standard (ISO 20765-2 and ISO
20765-3) for natural gases. The ISO group ISO TC 193/SC 1/WG 13 is working on this matter.

Reference fluid thermodynamic and transport properties — REFPROP

For thermodynamic and transport properties, REFDROP is used.
REFPROP is an acronym for REFerence fluid PROPerties. The flash package provides
thermodynamic and transport properties of industrially important fluids and their mixtures with an
emphasis on refrigerants and hydrocarbons, especially natural gas systems. It is developed by the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
REFPROP is based on highly accurate single component and mixture models based on the
Helmholtz energy.

NIST recommendation for pure fluids / mixture

For single components, REFPROP has a recommended set of equations of state explicit in
Helmholtz energy. That is, for each single component, a specific equation of state explicit in
Helmholtz energy is chosen. e.g. for carbon dioxide this is Span and Wagner (1996) (p.588) .
Mixture calculations employ a model that applies mixing rules to the Helmholtz energy of the
mixture components; it uses a departure function to account for the departure from ideal mixing.

Technical Description
534
PIPESIM User Guide

Description

Structure
The GERG equation of state is based on a multi-fluid approximation, which is explicit in the
reduced Helmholtz energy α = a/(RT) [α = Alpha in the figures] dependent on the density ρ, the
temperature T and the composition x (mole fractions) of the mixture. The structure of the equations
of state is shown in the following figure:

Figure 4.11. The basic structure of the equations of state GERG-2004 (N = 18) and GERG-2008
(N = 21) for natural gases and other mixtures.

Three elements are necessary to set up a multi-fluid approximation:

• Pure substance equations of state for all components
• Reducing functions for density and temperature
• Departure function
The reducing functions as well as the departure function were developed to describe the behaviour
of the mixture and contain substance and mixture specific parameters. From the reducing
functions, the reducing values ρr and Tr for the density and the temperature of the mixture are
calculated. They only depend on the mixture composition and turn into the critical properties ρc
and Tc, respectively, for the pure components. The departure function depends on the reduced
density δ, the inversely reduced temperature τ ( τ = Tau in the figures) , and the composition x of
the mixture. It contains the sum of binary specific and generalized departure functions, which can
be developed for single binary mixtures (binary specific) or for a group of binary mixtures
(generalized). The following equation illustrates this summation:

Technical Description
535
PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.12. The departure function for the mixture in a multi-fluid approximation as a double
summation over all binary specific and generalized departure functions developed for the binary
subsystems; GERG-2004: N = 18; GERG-2008: N = 21.

The mathematical structure of the part of the binary specific and generalized departure functions
that depends on δ and τ is similar to the structure of pure substance equations of state and is
determined by our method for optimizing the structure of equations of state. Furthermore, the
departure functions contain a factor that only depends on the composition of the mixture. For
further details, see the references given at the end of this description.
In order to obtain a reference equation of state that yields accurate results for various types of
natural gases and other multi-component mixtures over wide ranges of composition, the reducing
and departure functions were developed using only data for binary mixtures. The 18 pure
components covered by GERG-2004 form 153 different binary mixtures, and the 21 pure
components covered by GERG-2008 result in 210 possible binary mixture combinations. Departure
functions Δαrij(δ,τ, x) were developed only for such binary mixtures for which accurate
experimental data existed. For binary mixtures with limited or poor data, no departure functions
were developed, and only the parameters of the reducing functions ρr(x) und Tr(x) were fitted; in
case of very poor data, simplified reducing functions without any fitting were used.
The multi-fluid approximation used enables a simple inclusion of additional components in future
developments. This means that, for example, fitted parameters of the existing equation of state do
not have to be refitted when incorporating new components. This also holds for the departure
function with its optimized structure, which remains unchanged when expanding the model.

Range of validity and accuracy

The entire range of validity of GERG-2008 covers the following temperatures and pressures:
• Normal range: 90 K ≤ T ≤ 450 K, p ≤ 35 MPa
• Extended range: 60 K ≤ T ≤ 700 K, p ≤ 70 MPa
Moreover, the equation can be reasonably extrapolated beyond the extended range, and each
component can basically cover the entire composition range, i.e. (0-100)%.
GERG-2008 represents most of the experimental data, including the most accurate measurements
available, to within their uncertainties. The uncertainty values given in the following correspond to
the uncertainties of the most accurate experimental data.
In the gas region, the uncertainties in density and speed of sound are 0.1%, in enthalpy differences
(0.2-0.5)% and in heat capacities (1-2)%. In the liquid region, the uncertainty in density is
(0.1-0.5)%, in enthalpy differences (0.5-1)% and in heat capacities (1-2)%. In the two-phase
region, vapour pressures are calculated with a total uncertainty of (1-3)%, which corresponds to
the uncertainties of the experimental VLE data. For mixtures with limited or poor data, the
uncertainty values stated above can be somewhat higher.

Technical Description
536
PIPESIM User Guide

These accuracy statements are based on the fact that GERG-2008 represents the corresponding
experimental data to within their experimental uncertainties (with very few exceptions).

References
The comprehensive descriptions of GERG (with the entire numerical information, experimental
data used, quality, range of validity, etc.) are retrievable from the following reference:
Kunz, O., Klimeck, R., Wagner, W., Jaeschke, M. The GERG-2004 wide-range equation of state
for natural gases and other mixtures. GERG TM15 2007. Fortschr.-Ber. VDI, Reihe 6, Nr. 557, VDI
Verlag, Düsseldorf, 2007; also available as GERG Technical Monograph 15 (2007).
Kunz, O., Wagner, W. The GERG-2008 wide-range equation of state for natural gases and other
mixtures: An expansion of GERG-2004. To be submitted to J. Chem. Eng. Data (2011).

Note: This GERG Monograph is available for downloaded from the website of GERG - http://
www.gerg.eu/publications/tm.htm

Components for cubic equations of state

For the cubic equations of state (p.528), non-aqueous components can either be selected from a
library (p.537), or user-defined components (petroleum fractions (p.542)) can be selected by
defining their properties.
For two phase flashes, water can be selected, but it is treated differently from the other
components. It is removed from the flash calculations, and the water phase properties are
calculated separately. For three phase flashes (Multiflash), aqueous components (p.541) can be
selected from the component library. User-defined aqueous components are not allowed.

Non-aqueous library components

Different library components are available for each package. When converting from one package
to another, if a library component is not available in the new package, it will be converted into a
petroleum fraction (p.542). Default molecular weight and boiling point temperature are used to
define the petroleum fraction — data for pure components are taken from Poling et al (p.587).
The non-aqueous library components can be divided into three types
1. Pure hydrocarbon components (p.537)
2. Non-hydrocarbon components (p.539)
3. Pseudo-components (p.540)

Pure hydrocarbon components

The following pure library components can be selected:

Formula Multiflash E300 flash DBR 2–phase flash MW (g/gmol) Tbp (K)
CH4 Methane C1 C1 16.043 111.66
C2H4 Ethylene Ethylene 28.054 169.42
C2H6 Ethane C2 C2 30.070 184.55
C3H4 Propadiene 40.065 238.77

Technical Description
537
PIPESIM User Guide

C3H6 Propylene 42.081 225.46

C3H6 Cyclo-C3 42.081 240.34
C3H8 Propane C3 C3 44.097 231.02
C4H6 1,3-Butadiene 54.092 268.62
C4H6 1,2-Butadiene 54.092 269.00
C4H8 iso-Butene 56.108 266.24
C4H8 1-Butene 56.108 266.92
C4H8 tr2-Butene 56.108 274.03
C4H8 cis2-Butene 56.108 276.87
C4H10 Isobutane IC4 i-C4 58.123 261.34
C4H10 N-Butane NC4 n-C4 58.123 272.66
C5H10 1-Pentene 70.134 322.38
C5H10 Cyclopentane Cyclo-C5 70.134 303.11
C5H12 2,2-Dimethylpropane 72.150 282.65
C5H12 Isopentane i-C5 72.150 300.99
C5H12 N-Pentane n-C5 72.150 309.22
C6H6 Benzene BEN Benzene 78.114 353.24
C6H12 1-Hexene 84.161 336.63
C6H12 Methylcyclopentane Mcyclo-C5 84.161 344.98
C6H12 Cyclohexane Cyclo-C6 84.161 353.93
C6H14 N-Hexane n-C6 86.177 341.88
C7H8 Toluene TOL Toluene 92.141 383.79
C7H14 1–Heptene 98.188 366.79
C7H14 Methylcyclohexane Mcyclo-C6 98.188 374.09
C7H16 3-Methyl Hexane 100.204 365.00
C7H16 N-Heptane n-C7 100.204 371.57
C7H16 3-Methyl Hexane 100.204 365.00
C8H10 Ethylbenzene C2-Benzene 106.167 409.36
C8H10 P-Xylene p-Xylene 106.167 411.53
C8H10 M-Xylene m-Xylene 106.167 412.34
C8H10 O-Xylene o-Xylene 106.167 417.59
C8H16 1–Octene 112.215 394.44
C8H16 Ethylcyclohexane 112.215 404.00
C8H18 N-Octane n-C8 114.231 398.82
C9H12 124–MBenzene 120.194 442.49

Technical Description
538
PIPESIM User Guide

C9H12 Cumene 120.194 425.52

C9H20 N-Nonane n-C9 128.258 423.97
C10H14 1,2-Diethylbenzene 134.22 456
C10H22 N-Decane n-C10 142.285 447.30
C11H24 N-Undecane 156.312 469.08
C12H26 N-Dodecane 170.338 489.48
C13H28 N-Tridecane 184.365 508.63
C14H10 Phenanthrene 178.233 611.55
C14H30 N-Tetradecane 198.392 526.76
C15H32 N-Pentadecane 212.419 543.83
C16H34 N-Hexadecane 226.446 559.98
C17H36 N-Heptadecane 240.473 574.56
C18H38 N-Octadecane 254.500 588.30
C19H40 N-Nonadecane 268.527 602.34
C20H42 N-Eicosane 282.554 616.84
C21H44 N-Heneicosane
C22H46 N-Docosane
C23H48 N-Tricosane
C24H50 N-Tetracosane
C25H52 N-Pentacosane
C26H54 N-Hexacosane
C28H58 N-Octacosane
C29H60 N-Nonacosane
C30H62 N-Triacontane
C32H66 N-Dotriacontan
C36H74 N-Hexatriacontane

Non-hydrocarbons
The following pure library components can be selected:

Formula Multiflash E300 flash DBR 2–phase flash MW (g/gmol) Tbp (K)
H2 Hydrogen H2 H2 2.016 20.38
He Helium Helium 4.003 4.30
N2 Nitrogen N2 N2 28.014 77.35
O2 Oxygen O2 31.999 90.17
Ar Argon Argon 39.948 87.27

Technical Description
539
PIPESIM User Guide

Kr Krypton 83.800 119.74

Xe Xenon 131.290 165.01
NH3 Ammonia NH3 17.031 239.81
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide H2S H2S 34.082 212.84
CO Carbon Monoxide CO CO 28.010 81.66
CO2 Carbon Dioxide CO2 CO2 44.010
SF6 SF6 146.06 209.00

Pseudo-hydrocarbon components
Some packages contain pseudo components, essentially pre-defined petroleum fractions
(p.542), that can be used to represent the heavy end of the oil.

Formula Multiflash E300 flash DBR 2–phase flash MW (g/gmol) Tbp (K)
C4 58.124 268.9
C5 72.151 305.9
C6 C6 84.00 341.9
C7 C7 96.00 371.6
C8H10 m&p-Xylene 106.167 411.9
C8 C8 107.00 398.8
C9 C9 121.00 424.0
C10 C10 134.00 447.0
C11 C11 147.00 469.0
C12 C12 161.00 489.0
C13 C13 175.00 508.0
C14 C14 190.00 527.0
C15 C15 206.00 544.0
C16 C16 222.0 560.0
C17 C17 237.00 575.0
C18 C18 251.00 589.0
C19 C19 263.00 603.0
C20 C20
C21 C21
C22 C22
C23 C23
C24 C24
C25 C25

Technical Description
540
PIPESIM User Guide

C26 C26
C27 C27
C28 C28
C29 C29
C30 C30
C31 C31
C32 C32
C33 C33
C34 C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
Bitumen 544.00 773.2

Aqueous library components

Aqueous components are defined as those that will distribute mainly in the second liquid phase.
These are water and the hydrate suppressants methanol, ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol and
triethylene glycol. The calculation in of the amount of aqueous components to add corresponds to
an agreed definition. The water phase is added as a proportion of the DRY gas at stock tank
conditions (15 degrees C, 1bar). The discrepancy between hand calculations and software is
because the software makes a correction for the amount of aqueous components that will partition
to the gas phase. That is, it aims to add the amount of aqueous components requested as a
separate aqueous phase. There will also be some loss to the hydrocarbon liquid phase but this will
not be significant unless the aqueous phase contains a lot of methanol. The amount lost to the
vapor phase will be significant if there is a large amount of gas present relative to other phases.

Formula Multiflash
H2O Water
CH3–OH Methanol
C2H5–OH Ethanol

Technical Description
541
PIPESIM User Guide

C2H6O2 Ethylene Glycol (MEG)

C4H10O3 Diethylene Glycol (DEG)
C6H14O4 Triethylene Glycol (TEG)
NaCl Salt Component

Petroleum fractions

User-defined components can be created by defining key properties: molecular weight MW i ,

critical pressure Pci , critical temperature T ci , boiling point temperature T Bi , specific gravity γi and
acentric factor ωi . It is not always necessary to supply values for all these properties — the flash
packages can use correlations to determine unspecified properties from those that are specified.
Minimum data required is shown in the table below:

Multiflash E300 flash / DBR flash

MW i , γi yes

MW i , T Bi yes

T Bi , γi yes

MW i yes

Pci , T ci , ωi . yes

Note: The Multiflash routines that calculate the petroleum fraction properties assume the molecular
weight of petroleum fractions exceed 72.

Components for non-cubic equations of state

Only library components can be used for the CSMA, NIST recommendation for pure fluid/mixture
and GERG-2008 non-cubic equations of states (p.532).

Formula Multiflash (CSMA) REFPROP (NIST recommendation GERG-2008 (GERG-2008)

for pure fluid/mixture)
CH4 Methane methane Methane
C2H6 Ethane ethane Ethane
C3H8 Propane propane Propane
i-C4H10 Isobutane isobutane Isobutane
n-C4H10 Butane butane n-Butane
i-C5H12 Isopentane isopentane Isopentane
n-C5H12 Pentane pentane n-Pentane

Technical Description
542
PIPESIM User Guide

n-C6H14 Hexane hexane n-Hexane

n-C7H16 Heptane heptane n-Heptane
n-C8H18 Octane octane n-Octane
n-C9H20 nonane n-Nonane
n-C10H22 decane n-Decane
C2H2 Ethylene
C6H12 Cyclohexane
C7H8 Toluene
H2 Hydrogen hydrogen (normal) Hydrogen
He Helium helium Helium
N2 Nitrogen nitrogen Nitrogen
O2 Oxygen oxygen Oxygen
Ar Argon argon Argon
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide hydrogen sulfide Hydrogen sulphide
CO Carbon Monoxide carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide
CO2 Carbon Dioxide carbon dioxide Carbon dioxide
NH3 Ammonia

Multiflash is a 3–phase flash and allows aqueous components. REFPROP and GERG-2008 allow
water, but are two phase flashes. The water component is therefore removed before the flash
calculation, and water properties are calculated outside the flash.

Formula Multiflash (CSMA) NIST-REFPROP GERG-2008

H2O Water water Water
C2H5–OH Ethanol

Viscosity models for compositional fluids

Select Setup » Compositional, then on the Property Models tab, select one of the following
models for determining viscosity:
• Pedersen (the default)
• LBC (Lohrenz-Bray-Clark)
• Aasberg-Petersen (only available for E300 and DBR)
• NIST recommendation for pure fluids / mixture (only available for REFPROP and GERG-2008)
Preliminary testing has shown the Pedersen method to be the most widely applicable and accurate
for oil and gas viscosity predictions. Multiflash uses the Pedersen method as the default viscosity
model, though an option is available to choose the LBC model for backward compatibility. The
Pedersen method has been adopted as the default in response to the deficiencies of the LBC
method. The Pedersen method is based on the corresponding state theory, as is the LBC method.

Technical Description
543
PIPESIM User Guide

The results for different components are as follows:

Lower Alkanes
Predicted liquid viscosities using LBC and Pedersen methods have been compared to
experimental data for Methane and Octane as a function of both temperature and pressure
and for Pentane as a function of temperature. For both Methane and Pentane the
Pedersen method predictions show close agreement with experimental data. For Octane,
the Pedersen and LBC methods give comparable results. For the aromatic compound,
Ethyl Benzene, the Pedersen method is not as good as LBC.
Higher Alkanes
The results for higher alkanes Eicosane and Triacontane are mixed: the Pedersen method
is adequate for Eicosane whereas LBC is slightly better than Pedersen for Triacontane.
For Triacontane both the LBC and Pedersen methods are inadequate. However, in the
majority of cases the higher hydrocarbons should be treated as petroleum fractions rather
than as single named components.
Petroleum Fractions
The LBC method describes viscosity as a function of the fluid critical parameters, acentric
factor and density. The LBC model is therefore very sensitive to both density and the
characterization of the petroleum fractions.
Water
The Pedersen method suffers the same drawback as LBC in that it is unable to predict the
temperature dependence of water, a polar molecule. To overcome this problem, the
Pedersen method has been modified especially for water so that it now accurately models
the viscosity of water in the liquid phase. This was achieved by the introduction of a
temperature-dependent correction factor. However the prediction of the viscosity of the
gas phase is also affected, though in only a minor way.
Methanol
Neither the LBC nor Pedersen method can deal with polar components, with the Pedersen
method slightly worse than LBC. This is not surprising, as both methods were developed
for non-polar components and mixtures. The Pedersen method works best with light
alkanes and petroleum mixtures in the liquid phase. It performs as well or better than the
LBC method in nearly all situations.
The choice of the equation of state has a large effect on the viscosities predicted by both methods.
The LBC method is more sensitive to the equation of state effects than is the Pedersen method.
See also: Package (p.140), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.145), Emulsions (p.548), Equation
of State (p.528)

Solid Precipitation
Asphaltene prediction
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH MFL FILES
Asphaltene formation line is displayed automatically on the phase envelope to enable the
determination of the conditions (temperature and pressure) at which asphaltene appears

Technical Description
544
PIPESIM User Guide

Hydrates
Only available with Multifllash.
Requires additional licensing option.
Hydrate lines are displayed automatically on the Phase Envelope When working with
compositional fluid models or models with MFL files, you will find it helpful to display phase
envelopes and fluid properties associated with individual sources and wells using the Phase
envelope viewer. This is useful for quickly inspecting fluid models associated with source branches
(wells, generic sources, and junction sources). Additionally, after running a simulation task, you
may view the simulated flowing pressure/temperature profile superimposed on a phase envelope
for each source branch. if water is in the component list and hydrates will form. The amount of
water may influence the results of the calculations, particularly when inhibitors or water-soluble
gases are present.

Background
Natural gas hydrates are solid ice-like compounds of water and light components of natural gas.
The phase behavior of the systems involving hydrates can be very complex because up to six
phases must normally be considered. The behavior is particularly complex if there is significant
mutual solubility between phases.
The Multiflash hydrate model uses a modification of the SRK equation of state for the fluid phases
plus the van der Waals and Platteeuw model for the hydrate phases. The model can explicitly
represent all the effects of the presence of inhibitors.

Hydrate inhibitors
Hydrate inhibitors decrease the hydrate formation temperature or increase the hydrate formation
pressure in a given gas mixture. The model includes parameters for the commonly used inhibitors
such as Methanol, and the glycols MEG, DEG and TEG.
A new mixing rule has been developed for the SRK equation of state to model the inhibitors' effects
on the fluid phases. The treatment of hydrate inhibition has the following features. The model can
represent explicitly all the effects of inhibitors, including the depression of hydrate formation
temperature, the depression of the freezing point of water, the reduction in the vapor pressure of
water (i.e. the dehydrating effect) and the partitioning of water and inhibitor into the oil, gas and
aqueous phases. The model has been developed using all available data for mixtures of water with
Methanol, MEG, DEG and TEG. This involves simultaneously representing hydrate dissociation
temperatures, depression of freezing point data and vapor-liquid equilibrium data. The solubilities
of hydrocarbons and light gases in water/inhibitor mixtures have also been represented. There is
no fundamental difference between calculations with and without inhibitors. To investigate the
effect of an inhibitor it must be added to the list of components in the mixture and the amount must
be specified just as for any other component. It is not possible to specify the amount of inhibitor in
a particular phase, only the total amount in the mixture. This is because the inhibitor will be split
among the different phases present at equilibrium with the amount in a particular phase depending
on the ambient conditions and the amounts of other components present in that phase This is
exactly what happens in reality. The amount of inhibitor typically needed would be approximately
35% by mass of inhibitor relative to water.

Technical Description
545
PIPESIM User Guide

Model features
The main features of the model are:
• The description of the hydrate phase behavior uses a thermodynamically consistent set of
models for all phases.
• The vapor pressures of pure water are reproduced. The following natural gas hydrate formers
are included: METHANE, ETHANE, PROPANE, ISOBUTANE, BUTANE, NITROGEN, CO2
AND H2S.
• The thermal properties (enthalpies and entropies) of the hydrates are included, permitting
flashes involving these phases.
• The properties of the hydrates have been fixed by investigating data for natural gas
components in both simple and mixed hydrates to obtain reliable predictions of both structure I
and structure II hydrates.
• The properties of the empty hydrate lattices have been investigated and the most reliable
recent values have been adopted.
• Proper allowance has been made for the solubilities of the gases in water so that the model
parameters are not distorted by this effect. This is particularly important for Carbon Dioxide and
Hydrogen Sulphide, which are relatively soluble in water.
• Correct thermodynamic calculations of the most stable hydrate structure have been made. The
model has been tested on a wide selection of open literature and proprietary experimental data.
In most cases the hydrate dissociation temperature is predicted to within 1 degree Kelvin.
To ensure that reliable results are obtained, it is particularly important to use the correct set of
models and phase descriptors. The hydrates model set contains a complete set of model and
phase specifications.

Hydrate model details

The hydrate model set has the following definitions:
FLUID PHASE MODEL
The recommended fluid phase model is the advanced SRK equation of state with the a
parameter fitted to the pure component vapor pressure, the Peneloux density correction
and the INFOCHEM mixing rule. The required binary interaction parameters (BIP) for
hydrocarbons, light gases, water and inhibitors are available from the OILGAS2 BIP data
set.
HYDRATE MODELS
The hydrate model consists of lattice parameters for the empty hydrate and parameters
interaction of gas molecules with water in the hydrate. There are different parameter
values for each hydrate structure, HYDRATE I and II. In addition, the hydrate must be
associated with a liquid phase model that is used to obtain the properties of water. It is
important that this is the same model that is used for water as a fluid phase.
PHASES
In most cases, six phase descriptors are required: gas, hydrocarbon liquid, aqueous liquid,
hydrate I, hydrate II and ice. At high pressures and/or low temperatures the `gas' phase
may become liquid-like and a second non-aqueous liquid PD is needed. This is also the

Technical Description
546
PIPESIM User Guide

case if there is a significant amount of CO2 or H2S present. In most practical cases, the
gas contains propane and has a hydrate II stable hydrate structure. Key components are
defined to distinguish between the hydrocarbon and aqueous liquid phases. In principle,
hydrate calculations and phase envelope plotting with Multiflash are no different from flash
calculations and envelope plotting for the fluid phases alone. Multiflash treats fluid and
solid phases the same. It can carry out a full range of flashes for streams with hydrates.

Ice prediction
Only available with Multiflash Flash.
Ice is treated as a pure solid phase. The ice formation line is displayed automatically on the phase
envelope if water is in the component list and ice will form.

Wax prediction
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH MFL FILES
Waxes are complex mixtures of solid hydrocarbons that freeze (solidify) out of crude oils if the
temperature is low enough - below the critical wax deposition temperature. They are mainly formed
from normal paraffins or if isoparaffins and naphthenes are present. The wax formation line is
displayed automatically on the phase envelope to enable the determination of the conditions
(temperature and pressure) at which wax could deposit.
Wax deposition (p.205) can also be modelled.

4.5.3 Fluid property table files

Fluid properties can be pre-calculated for a range of pressure and temperature values and stored
in a table. PIPESIM reads the table and can interpolate it to get properties for any pressure and
temperature. Tables in a format that can be read by PIPESIM can be generated by a range of
Compositional Fluid Packages, including PIPESIM itself. Table files representing different fluids
cannot be mixed. They are therefore useful in single branch models, but less so in network models,
unless the entire network contains only a single fluid.
The tables contain liquid and gas properties:

Property
Pressure psia kPa
Temperature F K
Liquid Volume Fraction % %
Water cut % %
Liquid Density lb / ft kg / m
3 3

Gas Density lb / ft kg / m
3 3

Gas Compressibility
Gas Molecular Weight lb / lbmol kg / kgmol
Liquid Viscosity cP cP

Technical Description
547
PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Viscosity cP cP
Total Enthalpy BTU / lbmol kJ / kgmol
Total Entropy BTU / (lbmol ⋅ F ) kJ / (kgmol ⋅ K )
Liquid Heat Capacity BTU / (lbmol ⋅ F ) kJ / (kgmol ⋅ K )
Gas Heat Capacity BTU / (lbmol ⋅ F ) kJ / (kgmol ⋅ K )
Liquid Surface Tension dyne / cm dyne / cm
Gas Thermal Conductivity BTU / (hr ⋅ ft ⋅ F ) W / (m ⋅ K )
Oil Thermal Conductivity BTU / (hr ⋅ ft ⋅ F ) W / (m ⋅ K )
Water Thermal Conductivity BTU / (hr ⋅ ft ⋅ F ) W / (m ⋅ K )

The number of phases and the phase volume fractions, can be determined from the liquid fraction
and water cut. However, since only liquid and gas properties are available, these tables are only
suitable for use with two-phase flow models.
The table files also contain the total molecular weight of the fluid, which is independent of the
pressure and temperature. This allows PIPESIM to calculate the liquid molecular weight from the
other table properties. The total molecular weight, liquid molecular weight and gas molecular
weight are then used to convert the molar quantities (enthalpy, entropy and heat capacities) to
mass based quantities.
Table files may also contain compositional data. In this case the table data may be ignored and
PIPESIM may use normal compositional flashing.

Internal fluid property tables

PIPESIM can also use property tables to store fluid data in compositional runs. Properties are
interpolated from the table properties and as the simulation progresses, tables values are filled in
when necessary. This can speed up compositional simulations, although it requires more memory
to store the data. These tables can be used in network simulations with multiple fluids — a new
mixture can be created by mixing the fluid components and a new internal table created for the
new fluid.

4.5.4 Liquid mixture properties

Two phase flow correlations model flow of a liquid and a gas phase. When there are two liquid
phases, such as oil and water, the two liquid phases need to be combined and modelled as a
single liquid phase. The oil and water will flow at the same velocity. The liquid density can be
simply averaged. However more complicated models are used for liquid viscosity (p.548) and
liquid-gas surface tension (p.553).

Liquid viscosity and oil/water emulsions

An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquid phases. One phase (the dispersed phase) is
carried as droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In Oil/Water systems at low watercuts, oil is
usually the continuous phase. As watercut is increased there comes a point where phase
inversion occurs, and water becomes the continuous phase. This is the Critical Watercut of

Technical Description
548
PIPESIM User Guide

Phase Inversion, otherwise called the cutoff. It occurs typically between 55% and 70% watercut.
The viscosity of the mixture is usually highest at and just below the cutoff. Emulsion viscosities can
be many times higher than the viscosity of either phase alone.

Correlations and methods

The methods available for calculating the oil/water mixture viscosity are:
• Inversion
• Volume Ratio
• User-supplied Table
In addition a number of emulsion correlations are available:
• Woelflin
• Brinkman
• Vand
• Richardson
• Leviton and Leighton
The cutoff can be entered as a watercut, or calculated using the Brauner and Ullman correlation.
The cutoff is used by all the emulsion correlations and methods, except for the Volume ratio
method.

Figure 4.13. Viscosity of oil/water mixtures

Technical Description
549
PIPESIM User Guide

Inversion
The inversion method sets the liquid viscosity to the viscosity of the continuous phase. This means
that, at a watercut below or equal to the cutoff, water droplets are carried by a continuous oil
phase, and the mixture assumes the viscosity of the oil. At a watercut above the cut-off value, oil
droplets are carried by a continuous water phase, and the mixture assumes the viscosity of the
water.

Volume ratio
The Volume ratio method calculates mixture viscosity as follows:

μm = μo φo + μw φw Eq. 4.370

where

μo is oil viscosity

φo is the volume fraction of oil

μw is the water viscosity

φw is the volume fraction of water

User-supplied table
This method uses a user-supplied table of viscosities or viscosity multipliers against flowing (in
situ) watercut. The table is entered in the dialog revealed by pressing the Setup emulsion table
button. The first watercut value in the table must be zero. The viscosity value at zero watercut is
used to divide into all the others to yield multipliers. Therefore, the viscosity table can be populated
with absolute viscosity values, or with multipliers.
The table is applied to watercuts from zero up to the supplied watercut cutoff value; above this, the
liquid viscosity is set to the water viscosity using a transition region.

Woelflin
The Woelflin correlations assume that the continuous phase changes from oil to water at a given
watercut cutoff point. This means that, at a watercut below or equal to the cutoff value, a water-in-
oil emulsion forms, and the emulsion viscosity is given by the Woelflin correlation. At a watercut
above the cutoff value, oil droplets are carried by a continuous water phase, and the mixture
assumes the viscosity of the water, using a transition region.
In his 1942 paper, Woelflin described 3 types of water-in-oil emulsions, which he labeled loose,
medium and tight. The paper provides tables of viscosity multiplication factors as a function of
watercut for the 3 types, and a chart showing curves to fit the data. The PIPESIM implementation
is a digitization of the curves.
The viscosity of all 3 emulsion types increases with watercut up to the specified cutoff value, above
which it falls and assumes the value of the water viscosity. It should be noted that all 3 emulsion
types can yield emulsion viscosities many times greater than the oil viscosity. In the case of
the tight emulsion, multiplier values in the region of 100 are readily obtained. In his experiments on

Technical Description
550
PIPESIM User Guide

tight emulsions, Woelflin reported that the viscosity of a 60% watercut emulsion could not be
determined, because the mixture was too viscous to flow through the viscometer.
Versions of PIPESIM prior to the 2007.1 release implemented only the loose emulsion correlation,
using a curve-fit as follows:

(
μm = μo 1 + 0.00123V W
2.2
) Eq. 4.371

where μo is oil viscosity, and φw is volume fraction of water. This option is retained for backwards
compatibility and is called Pipesim Original Woelflin. It gives very similar answers to the new
loose emulsion option up to a watercut of 60%, but diverges above this.

Brinkman
The Brinkman correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff, using
the formula
−2.5
μ L = μc (1 − φd ) Eq. 4.372

where μc is the viscosity of the continuous phase and φd is the volume fraction of the
discontinuous phase.

Vand
The Vand correlations calculate elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff, using the
formula

(k1 φd )
Eq. 4.373
μ L = μc e ( 2 d )
1−k φ

where μc is the viscosity of the continuous phase,

φd is the volume fraction of the discontinuous phase,

and the coefficients k1 and k2 are selected as follows. The Vand coefficients are 2.5 and 0.609;
Barnea and Mizrahi are 2.66 and 1.0; the user-supplied coefficients are entered in the
accompanying data entry boxes.

Richardson
The Richardson correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff,
using the formula
e
μ L = μc (k φd ) Eq. 4.374

where μc is the viscosity of the continuous phase,

φd is the volume fraction of the discontinuous phase,

Technical Description
551
PIPESIM User Guide

and k is a user-supplied constant. Separate values of k can be provided for oil-in-water and water-
in-oil conditions, the default values are 3.8 and 6.6.

Leviton and leighton

The Leviton and Leighton correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities either side of the
cutoff, using the formula
e
(
2.5 μd + 0.4 μc )
μ L = μc
(μd )(
+ μc φd + φd
1.66
+ φd
3.66
) Eq. 4.375

where μd and μc are the viscosities of the discontinuous and continuous phases, and φd is the
volume fraction of the discontinuous phase.

Brauner and ullman

The Brauner and Ullman correlation can be used to calculate the watercut cutoff value. It uses the
formula

(( ))
0.6 0.4
ρt μt
c=1− 0.4
Eq. 4.376
0.6
1 + ρt μt

where

c is the cutoff/100

μo
μt =
μw

μo is the oil viscosity (in cP)

μw is the water viscosity (in cP)

ρo
ρt =
ρw

ρo is the oil density (in lb/ft3)

ρw is the water density (in lb/ft3)

See also: Inversion (p.550) and Volume Ratio (p.550).

Limits and safety factors

Emulsion correlations and methods have the potential to cause difficulty for the calculation engine.
Extremely large viscosities can be predicted, this can cause convergence failure. The

Technical Description
552
PIPESIM User Guide

discontinuous behavior around the inversion point (cutoff) can also cause problems, particularly in
a network model. As a result, a number of limits and safety factors have been introduced, as
described below. All of these are properties of the model: only one value is held, and it is applied
to all fluids in the model.

Maximum cutoff
A typical value for the cutoff is between 55% to 70%, and the default is 60%. The Woelflin
correlations are particularly sensitive to high cutoff values, so there is a maximum limit of 70%,
which will be applied silently. The limit may be extended using the keyword MAXCUTOFF=
(p.604).

Transition region above the cutoff

The Woelflin and user-supplied table methods exhibit pronounced discontinuity about the cutoff.
For these methods therefore, the discontinuity about the cutoff is smoothed with a transition region,
extending from the cutoff value in the direction of increasing watercut. By default this is 5% wide.
Predicted viscosities in this region are interpolated between the value predicted at the cutoff (the
maximum emulsion viscosity point, with oil the continuous phase) and the value at cutoff plus
transition region width (the viscosity predicted from a continuous water phase). The size of the
transition region can be controlled with the keyword SMOOTHCUTOFF (p.604) =.

Maximum emulsion table multiplier

The user-supplied and Woelflin correlations are subject to a maximum multiplier limit, default value
100. This can be controlled with the keyword MAXEMULSION (p.604) =.

Maximum liquid viscosity

As viscosity increases, the resistance to fluid flow also increases. There comes a point where
viscosity is so high that the term 'fluid' ceases to be appropriate, and the prediction of pressure
drops due to fluid flow can be regarded as non physical. The maximum liquid viscosity is by default
1.0E+7 (ten million) cP, this can be controlled by the keyword MAXLIQVISC (p.604) =.

Liquid-gas surface tension

The surface tension between the liquid and gas phase is used in two phase flow correlations, for
example to calculate bubble velocity. If there are two liquid phases present, the surface tension will
depend on the oil-gas surface tension, the water-gas surface tension, and the water cut.
In black oil models, when there is sufficient oil, it is assumed that the liquid is segregated with the
water below the oil. The gas in therefore only in contact with the oil, and the surface tension is
given by:

σ L = σO WCUT < 60

If water dominates the liquid then the surface tension is taken as an average of the oil-gas and
water-gas surface tensions:

(
σ L = σO ⋅ 1 −
WCUT
100 )
+ σO ⋅
WCUT WCUT > 60
100

Technical Description
553
PIPESIM User Guide

σL is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

σO is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

σW is the surface tension between the water and the gas (dynes/cm)

WCUT is the water cut (%)

4.5.5 PIPESIM-DBR Wax Deposition Models

The DBR wax models are described in Pan et al 2009 (p.586).

Single phase (oil) Wax Deposition Model

The single phase wax model consists of two mechanisms, shear stress effects and molecular
diffusion. The molecular diffusion mechanism is the same approach taken by many authors (Brown
et al, 1993 (p.579), Singh, 2000 (p.588), Hernandez et al 2004 (p.583) and others). The
diffusion coefficient of each component is calculated with the Hayduk and Minhas (p.583)
correlation. The shear removal effects are modelled using the Venkatesan (2004) (p.589)
correlation.
wax a

( ) d Ci τ
sp
d δ dT
(1 − φ ) ⋅ = − Di ⋅ ⋅ −k ⋅ δ ⋅ b Eq. 4.377
dt i dT dr ϕ
The wax porosity φ is modelled as a function of the shear stress

( )
z
1
φ = φmax τ
τ for > 0.5
0.5 + τmax
τmax Eq. 4.378
τ
φ = φmax for < 0.5
τmax

Two Phase (Gas/Oil) Wax Deposition Model

Oil wetting of the wall is one of the primary driving forces for wax deposition. Therefore the flow
pattern contributes to the amount of wax deposited. Matzain (p.585) used empirical correlations
for varying flow patterns. DBR’s plan is to account for the flow pattern through liquid holdup
(available from the flow model) and to directly calculate the surface wetting (Grolman, 1996
(p.582)). The new two phase deposition rate will then be:

( ) ( )
tp sp
d δ α β d δ
=S H Eq. 4.379
dt i dt i
where

Technical Description
554
PIPESIM User Guide

1
α=β=
2
In doing this, the model is setup to address three phase wax deposition by scaling the deposition
rate by the surface wetting of oil.

Nomenclature
δ Wax deposition thickness (m)

( ) Single phase wax deposition rate at point i in the pipe (m/s)

sp
d δ
dt i

( ) Two phase wax deposition rate at point i in the pipe (m/s)

tp
d δ
dt i

Di Diffusion coefficient (m
2
/ s)
Ci
wax Concentration of wax components

T Temperature (variable K)

r radius (variable m)

R Inner radius of pipe (m)

k Shear reduction multiplier or parameter

τ Shear stress (variable Pa)

τmax Yield stress of wax (Pa)

φ Porosity of wax

φmax Maximum porosity

α Surface wetted coefficient

β Liquid holdup coefficient

a Shear stress coefficient (a=1.9 )

b Wax porosity coefficient (b=2.3 )

z Porosity coefficient (z= 1)

S Surface wetting ratio

Technical Description
555
PIPESIM User Guide

H Liquid holdup

4.6 Solvers
4.6.1 Tolerance Equations
The tolerance of each pressure is calculated from the equation:

tol = abs (( ( p − pav )

pav × 100 % )
) Eq. 4.380

If all tolerance values are within the specified network tolerance then that node has passed the
pressure convergence test. This is repeated for each node. The total mass flowrate into and the
total mass flowrate out of a node are averaged.
The tolerance is calculated from the equation:

tol = abs ( (Totalmqin − Totalmqav )

(Totalmqav × 100 % ) ) Eq. 4.381

4.7 Typical and Default Data

4.7.1 Limits
The following limitations apply to the PIPESIM modules.

General
• Maximum number of components in a stream: 50

Pipeline and facilities

• Maximum number of sources: 1
• Maximum number of sinks: 1
• Maximum number of pipe coatings: 4
• Maximum number of nodes for a pipeline or riser: 101

Well Performance
• Maximum number of completions: 10
• Maximum number of sinks: 1
• Maximum number tubing coatings (using Expert mode) : 10
• Maximum number of nodes for a tubing: 100
• Maximum number of geothermal survey points: 100

Technical Description
556
PIPESIM User Guide

• Maximum number of tubing strings: Detailed model = 20, Simple model = 4

Network
• Maximum number of wells / branches: Unlimited.
• Maximum number of nodes: Unlimited.
• Maximum number of PVT files: 500
• Maximum number of compositions: 1,000
• Maximum number of Black Oil compositions: 1,024
• Maximum number of PQ data points: 30

Note: Although the maximum number of wells, and so on, is unlimited practical limits may apply
depending upon the configuration of the PC used. The limiting factors [for large models] will be
memory and processor speed. Please see the License and Installation Guide for your version of
PIPESIM for recommendations on memory.

4.7.2 Tubing and pipeline tables

Tubing/casing tables

Nominal Weight OD ID in WT
Bore lb/ft in in
1 1/4in 3.02 1.660 1.278 0.191
1 1/4in 2.3 1.660 1.379 0.140 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
1 1/4in 2.33 1.660 1.379 0.140
1 1/4in 2.4 1.660 1.379 0.140 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
1 1/4in 2.1 1.660 1.410 0.125
2 3/8in 7.7 2.375 1.703 0.336
2 3/8in 6.2 2.375 1.853 0.261
2 3/8in 5.8 2.375 1.867 0.254 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 3/8in 5.95 2.375 1.867 0.254 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 3/8in 5.3 2.375 1.939 0.218
2 3/8in 4.6 2.375 1.995 0.190 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 3/8in 4.7 2.375 1.995 0.190 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 3/8in 4 2.375 2.041 0.167 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
2 7/8in 11 2.875 2.065 0.405
2 7/8in 10.7 2.875 2.091 0.392
2 7/8in 9.5 2.875 2.195 0.340

Technical Description
557
PIPESIM User Guide

2 7/8in 8.6 2.875 2.259 0.308 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing

2 7/8in 8.7 2.875 2.259 0.308 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106 Tubing
2 7/8in 7.8 2.875 2.323 0.276 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 7/8in 7.9 2.875 2.323 0.276 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106 Tubing
2 7/8in 6.4 2.875 2.441 0.217 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
2 7/8in 6.5 2.875 2.441 0.217 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
3 1/2in 16.7 3.500 2.480 0.510
3 1/2in 15.8 3.500 2.548 0.476
3 1/2in 12.7 3.500 2.750 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
3 1/2in 12.95 3.500 2.750 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106 Tubing
3 1/2in 12.8 3.500 2.764 0.368
3 1/2in 9.2 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
3 1/2in 9.3 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105 Tubing
3 1/2in 10.2 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
3 1/2in 7.7 3.500 3.068 0.216 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
4 in 13.4 4.000 3.340 0.330
4 in 11.6 4.000 3.428 0.286
4 in 11 4.000 3.476 0.262 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
4 in 9.5 4.000 3.548 0.226 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
4 1/2 in 19.2 4.500 3.640 0.430
4 1/2 in 19.1 4.500 3.626 0.437 Q-125*,V-150* Casing
4 1/2 in 16.6 4.500 3.750 0.375 Q-125*,V-150* Casing
4 1/2 in 15.1 4.500 3.826 0.337 HC-95*,P-110,Q-125,V-150* Casing
4 1/2 in 15.5 4.500 3.826 0.337
4 1/2 in 13.5 4.500 3.920 0.290 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110
4 1/2 in 12.6 4.500 3.958 0.271 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
4 1/2 in 12.75 4.500 3.958 0.271 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90 Tubing
4 1/2 in 11.6 4.500 4.000 0.250 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110 Casing
4 1/2 in 10.5 4.500 4.052 0.224 J-55,K-55 Casing
4 1/2 in 9.5 4.500 4.090 0.205 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
5 in 24.2 5.000 4.000 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125 Casing
5 in 23.2 5.000 4.044 0.478 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
5 in 21.4 5.000 4.126 0.437 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110 Casing
5 in 20.8 5.000 4.156 0.422
5 in 20.3 5.000 4.184 0.408

Technical Description
558
PIPESIM User Guide

5 in 18 5.000 4.276 0.362 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing

5 in 15 5.000 4.408 0.296 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*, Casing
P110,Q125,V150*
5 in 13 5.000 4.494 0.253 J-55,K-55 Casing
5 in 11.5 5.000 4.560 0.220 J-55,K-55 Casing
5 1/2in 35 5.500 4.200 0.650 C-90 Casing
5 1/2in 26.8 5.500 4.500 0.500 Q-125*,V-150* Casing
5 1/2in 26 5.500 4.548 0.476 C-90 Casing
5 1/2in 23 5.500 4.670 0.415 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
5 1/2in 20 5.500 4.778 0.361 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
5 1/2in 17 5.500 4.892 0.304 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125* Casing
5 1/2in 15.5 5.500 4.950 0.275 J-55,K-55 Casing
5 1/2in 14 5.500 5.012 0.244 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
5 1/2in 13 5.500 5.044 0.228
6 in 26 6.000 5.132 0.434
6 in 23 6.000 5.240 0.380
6 in 20 6.000 5.352 0.324
6 in 18 6.000 5.424 0.288
6 in 15 6.000 5.675 0.163
6 5/8 in 32 6.625 5.524 0.550 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
6 5/8 in 28 6.625 5.791 0.417 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
6 5/8 in 24 6.625 5.921 0.352 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
6 5/8 in 20 6.625 6.049 0.288 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
6 5/8 in 17 6.625 6.135 0.245
7 in 42.7 7.000 5.750 0.625 Q125*,V150* Casing
7 in 38 7.000 5.920 0.540 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
7 in 35 7.000 6.004 0.498 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
7 in 32 7.000 6.094 0.453 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
7 in 29 7.000 6.184 0.408 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
7 in 26 7.000 6.276 0.362 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110 Casing
7 in 23 7.000 6.366 0.317 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95* Casing
7 in 20 7.000 6.456 0.272 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
7 in 17 7.000 6.538 0.231 H-40 Casing
7 5/8 in 47.1 7.625 6.375 0.625 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125 Casing
7 5/8 in 45.3 7.625 6.435 0.595 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing

Technical Description
559
PIPESIM User Guide

7 5/8 in 39 7.625 6.625 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing

7 5/8 in 33.7 7.625 6.765 0.430 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
7 5/8 in 29.7 7.625 6.875 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
7 5/8 in 26.4 7.625 6.969 0.328 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95* Casing
7 5/8 in 24 7.625 7.025 0.300 H40 Casing
7 5/8 in 20 7.625 7.125 0.250
8 5/8 in 49 8.625 7.511 0.557 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
8 5/8 in 44 8.625 7.625 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150* Casing
8 5/8 in 40 8.625 7.725 0.450 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125* Casing
8 5/8 in 36 8.625 7.825 0.400 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95* Casing
8 5/8 in 32 8.625 7.921 0.352 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
8 5/8 in 28 8.625 8.017 0.304 H-40 Casing
8 5/8 in 24 8.625 8.097 0.264 J-55,K-55 Casing
9 5/8 in 71.8 9.625 8.125 0.750
9 5/8 in 70.3 9.625 8.157 0.734 V150* Casing
9 5/8 in 61.1 9.625 8.375 0.625 HC-95*,Q125*,V150* Casing
9 5/8 in 58.4 9.625 8.435 0.595 HC-95*,Q125*,V150* Casing
9 5/8 in 53.5 9.625 8.535 0.545 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150* Casing
9 5/8 in 47 9.625 8.681 0.472 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125 Casing
9 5/8 in 43.5 9.625 8.755 0.435 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110 Casing
9 5/8 in 40 9.625 8.835 0.395 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95* Casing
9 5/8 in 36 9.625 8.921 0.352 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
9 5/8 in 32.3 9.625 9.001 0.312 H-40 Casing
9 5/8 in 29.3 9.625 9.063 0.281
10 3/4 in 79.2 10.75 9.282 0.734 Q125*,V150* Casing
0
10 3/4 in 73.2 10.75 9.406 0.672 Q125*,V150* Casing
0
10 3/4 in 71.1 10.75 9.450 0.650 HC-95*,Q125*,V150* Casing
0
10 3/4 in 65.7 10.75 9.560 0.595 HC-95*,P-110,Q125,V150* Casing
0
10 3/4 in 60.7 10.75 9.660 0.545 HC-95*,P-110,Q125,V150 Casing
0
10 3/4 in 55.5 10.75 9.760 0.495 L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q125* Casing
0

Technical Description
560
PIPESIM User Guide

10 3/4 in 51 10.75 9.850 0.450 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110 Casing

0
10 3/4 in 45.5 10.75 9.950 0.400 H-40,J-55,K-54 Casing
0
10 3/4 in 40.5 10.75 10.05 0.350 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
10 3/4 in 32.75 10.75 10.19 0.279 H-40 Casing
0 2
11 3/4 in 66.7 3.915 11.75 10.65 Q-125*,V-150* Casing
0 6
11 3/4 in 60 3.522 11.75 10.77 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q-12 Casing
0 2 5
11 3/4 in 54 11.75 10.88 0.435 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
11 3/4 in 47 11.75 11.00 0.375 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
11 3/4 in 42 11.75 11.08 0.333 H-40 Casing
0 4
11 3/4 in 38 11.75 11.15 0.300
0 0
13 3/8 in 100.3 13.37 11.90 0.734 V-150* Casing
5 7
13 3/8 in 98 13.37 11.93 0.719
5 7
13 3/8 in 92.5 13.37 12.03 0.672 Q-125* Casing
5 1
13 3/8 in 86 13.37 12.12 0.625 HC-95* Casing
5 5
13 3/8 in 85 13.37 12.15 0.608
5 9
13 3/8 in 77 13.37 12.27 0.550
5 5
13 3/8 in 71 13.37 12.28 0.547 Q-125* Casing
5 1
13 3/8 in 72 13.37 12.34 0.514 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q-125 Casing
5 7
13 3/8 in 68 13.37 12.41 0.480 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P-110 Casing
5 5
13 3/8 in 61 13.37 12.51 0.430 J-55,K-55 Casing
5 5

Technical Description
561
PIPESIM User Guide

13 3/8 in 54.5 13.37 12.61 0.380 J-55,K-55 Casing

5 5
13 3/8 in 48 13.37 12.71 0.330 H-40 Casing
5 5
16 in 109 16.00 14.68 0.656
0 8
16 in 84 16.00 15.01 0.495 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
16 in 75 16.00 15.21 0.393 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 4
16 in 65 16.00 15.25 0.375 H-40 Casing
0 0
16 in 55 16.00 15.37 0.312
0 6
18 5/8 in 87.5 18.62 17.75 0.435 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
5 5
20 in 133 20.00 18.73 0.635 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
20 in 106.5 20.00 19.00 0.500 J-55,K-55 Casing
0 0
20 in 94 20.00 19.12 0.438 H-40,J-55,K-55 Casing
0 4

Pipeline tables

Nominal Bore Schedule OD in ID in Wall Thickness in

1/8in Sch 80 0.406 0.217 0.094
1/8in Sch 40 0.406 0.268 0.069
1/4in Sch 80 0.539 0.303 0.118
1/4in Sch 40 0.539 0.362 0.089
3/8in Sch 80 0.673 0.421 0.126
3/8in Sch 40 0.673 0.492 0.091
1/2in XXS 0.839 0.252 0.293
1/2in Sch 160 0.839 0.461 0.189
1/2in Sch 80 0.839 0.543 0.148
1/2in Sch 40 0.839 0.622 0.108
3/4in XXS 1.051 0.437 0.307
3/4in Sch 160 1.051 0.614 0.219
3/4in Sch 80 1.051 0.744 0.154

Technical Description
562
PIPESIM User Guide

3/4in Sch 40 1.051 0.827 0.112

1in XXS 1.315 0.599 0.358
1in Sch 160 1.315 0.815 0.250
1in Sch 80 1.315 0.957 0.179
1in Sch 40 1.315 1.049 0.133
1 1/4in XXS 1.661 0.898 0.382
1 1/4in Sch 160 1.661 1.161 0.250
1 1/4in Sch 80 1.661 1.280 0.191
1 1/4in Sch 40 1.661 1.382 0.140
1 1/2in XXS 1.902 1.102 0.400
1 1/2in Sch 160 1.902 1.339 0.281
1 1/2in Sch 80 1.902 1.500 0.201
1 1/2in Sch 40 1.902 1.610 0.146
2in XXS 2.375 1.503 0.436
2in Sch 160 2.375 1.687 0.344
2in Sch 80 2.375 1.939 0.218
2in Sch 40 2.375 2.067 0.154
2 1/2in XXS 2.874 1.772 0.551
2 1/2in Sch 160 2.874 2.469 0.374
2 1/2in Sch 80 2.874 2.323 0.276
2 1/2in Sch 40 2.874 2.126 0.203
3in XXS 3.500 2.300 0.600
3in Sch 160 3.500 2.624 0.438
3in Sch 80 3.500 2.900 0.300
3in Sch 40 3.500 3.068 0.216
4in XXS 4.500 2.728 0.886
4in Sch 160 4.500 3.438 0.531
4in Sch 120 4.500 3.622 0.439
4in Sch 80 4.500 3.826 0.337
4in Sch 40 4.500 4.026 0.237
5in XXS 5.563 4.063 0.750
5in Sch 160 5.563 4.311 0.626
5in Sch 120 5.563 4.563 0.500
5in Sch 80 5.563 4.815 0.374
5in Sch 40 5.563 5.047 0.258

Technical Description
563
PIPESIM User Guide

6in XXS 6.625 4.897 0.864

6in Sch 160 6.625 5.187 0.719
6in Sch 120 6.625 5.504 0.561
6in Sch 80 6.625 5.761 0.432
6in Sch 40 6.625 6.211 0.280
8in Sch 160 8.626 6.815 0.906
8in XXS 8.626 6.878 0.874
8in Sch 140 8.626 7.004 0.811
8in Sch 120 8.626 7.189 0.719
8in Sch 100 8.626 7.437 0.594
8in Sch 80 8.626 7.626 0.500
8in Sch 60 8.626 7.815 0.406
8in Sch 40 8.626 7.980 0.323
8in Sch 30 8.626 8.071 0.278
8in Sch 20 8.626 8.126 0.250
10in Sch 160 10.748 8.496 1.126
10in Sch 140 10.748 8.748 1.000
10in Sch 120 10.748 9.059 0.844
10in Sch 100 10.748 9.311 0.719
10in Sch 80 10.748 9.559 0.594
10in Sch 60 10.748 9.748 0.500
10in Sch 40 10.748 10.020 0.364
10in Sch 30 10.748 10.134 0.307
10in Sch 20 10.748 10.248 0.250
12in Sch 160 12.752 10.126 1.313
12in Sch 140 12.752 10.500 1.126
12in Sch 120 12.752 10.752 1.000
12in Sch 100 12.752 11.063 0.844
12in Sch 80 12.752 11.378 0.687
12in Sch 60 12.752 11.630 0.561
12in Sch 40 12.752 11.941 0.406
12in Sch 30 12.752 12.091 0.331
12in Sch 20 12.752 12.252 0.250
14in Sch 160 14.000 11.189 1.406
14in Sch 140 14.000 11.500 1.250

Technical Description
564
PIPESIM User Guide

14in Sch 120 14.000 11.811 1.094

14in Sch 100 14.000 12.126 0.937
14in Sch 80 14.000 12.500 0.750
14in Sch 60 14.000 12.811 0.594
14in Sch 40 14.000 13.122 0.439
14in Sch 30 14.000 13.252 0.374
14in Sch 20 14.000 13.378 0.311
14in Sch 10 14.000 13.500 0.250
16in Sch 160 16.000 12.811 1.594
16in Sch 140 16.000 13.126 1.437
16in Sch 120 16.000 13.563 1.219
16in Sch 100 16.000 13.937 1.031
16in Sch 80 16.000 14.311 0.844
16in Sch 60 16.000 14.689 0.656
16in Sch 40 16.000 15.000 0.500
16in Sch 30 16.000 15.252 0.374
16in Sch 20 16.000 15.378 0.311
16in Sch 10 16.000 15.500 0.250
18in Sch 160 18.000 14.437 1.781
18in Sch 140 18.000 14.874 1.563
18in Sch 120 18.000 15.252 1.374
18in Sch 100 18.000 15.689 1.156
18in Sch 80 18.000 16.126 0.937
18in Sch 60 18.000 16.500 0.750
18in Sch 40 18.000 16.878 0.561
18in Sch 30 18.000 17.122 0.439
18in Sch 20 18.000 17.378 0.311
18in Sch 10 18.000 17.500 0.250
20in Sch 160 20.000 16.063 1.969
20in Sch 140 20.000 16.500 1.750
20in Sch 120 20.000 17.000 1.500
20in Sch 100 20.000 16.650 1.675
20in Sch 80 20.000 17.937 1.031
20in Sch 60 20.000 18.378 0.811
20in Sch 40 20.000 18.811 0.594

Technical Description
565
PIPESIM User Guide

20in Sch 30 20.000 19.000 0.500

20in Sch 20 20.000 19.252 0.374
20in Sch 10 20.000 19.500 0.250
24in Sch 160 24.000 19.311 2.344
24in Sch 140 24.000 19.874 2.063
24in Sch 120 24.000 20.378 1.811
24in Sch 100 24.000 20.937 1.531
24in Sch 80 24.000 21.563 1.219
24in Sch 60 24.000 22.063 0.969
24in Sch 40 24.000 22.622 0.689
24in Sch 30 24.000 22.878 0.561
24in Sch 20 24.000 23.252 0.374
24in Sch 10 24.000 23.500 0.250
30in Sch 30 30.000 28.748 0.626
30in Sch 20 30.000 29.000 0.500
30in Sch 10 30.000 29.378 0.311

4.7.3 Typical values

Fluid properties
The table below gives typical values for properties, in Engineering units and data for various oil
locations worldwide.

Default Min Max North North South Middle Far Australia

Sea America America East East
Black Oil
Properties
Water cut 0 0 100
GOR required 340 -1,100 600-20,000
Gas s.g. 0.64 0.64 - 0.81 0.65 - 0.8
Water s.g. 1.02 1.01 - 1.03 1.01 - 1.05
API 30 38 13 - 56 7-45 32-44 34
Solution Gas Lasater Glaso Lasater
Correlation
Viscosity
Data

Technical Description
566
PIPESIM User Guide

Dead Oil Beggs Beggs and

viscosity and Robinson
Robinson
Viscosity @ 2.247 0.4 -11 5 - 10,000
200F
Viscosity @ 117.8 3.8 - 120 -
60F 82,000 10,000
Heat
capacities
Oil (p.725) 0.45
Gas (p.725) 0.55
Water 1.0
(p.725)

Default values can be changed - click the relevant link.

Roughness

Material ft. in
Drawn tubing (brass, lead, glass, and the like) 0.000005 0.00006
Commercial steel or wrought iron 0.00015 0.0018
Asphalted cast iron 0.0004 0.0048
Galvanized iron 0.0005 0.006
Cast iron 0.00085 0.010
Wood stave 0.0006-0.003 0.0072-0.036
Concrete 0.001-0.01 0.012-0.12
Riveted steel 0.003-0.03 0.036-0.36

Thermal Conductivities

Material Density Thermal Conductivity Thermal Conductivity

(kg/m3) Btu/hr/ft/F (W/m/K)
Anhydrite 0.75
Carbon Steel 7900 28.9 50
Concrete Weight Coat 2000 - 3000 0.81 - 1.15 1.4 - 2.0
Corrosion Coat (Bitumen) - 0.19 0.33
Corrosion Coat (Epoxy) - 0.17 0.30
Corrosion Coat (Polyurathane) - 0.12 0.20
Dolomite 1.0

Technical Description
567
PIPESIM User Guide

Ground (Earth) 0.37 - 1.5

Gypsum 0.75
Halite 2.8
Ice 900 1.27 2.2
Lignite 2.0
Limestone 0.54
Line pipe 27 46.7
Mild Steel tubing 26 45
Mud 1500 0.75 - 1.5 1.3 - 2.6
Neoprene Rubber - 0.17 0.3
Plastic coated pipe 20 34.6
Plastic coated tubing 20 34.6
Polyurathane Foam (dry) 30 - 100 0.011 - 0.023 0.02 - 0.04
Polyurathane Foam (wet) - 0.023 - 0.034 0.4 - 0.6
PVC Foam (dry) 100 - 340 0.023 - 0.025 0.040 - 0.044
Sandstone 1.06
Shale 0.7
Stainless Steel - 8.67 15
Stainless steel (13%) 18 31.14
Stainless steel (15%) 15 26
Syntactic Foam (dry) 500 0.052 0.09
Syntactic foam (wet) - 0.17 0.3
Volcanics 1.6
Wet Sand 1600 1.04 - 1.44 1.8 - 2.5

Thermal Conductivities in W/m/K (Liquids and Gases)

Fluid Default Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

5oC 20oC 100oC 200oC
Air 0.024 0.026 0.030 0.037
Crude oil (p.714) (30 API) 0.138 0.14 0.14 0.12 0.10
Glycol (DEG) 0.26 0.25 0.20 0.14
Natural gas (p.714) (P=1 0.035 0.030 0.032 0.045 0.062
bara)
Natural Gas (p.714) 0.045 0.045 0.052 0.070
(P=100 bara)

Technical Description
568
PIPESIM User Guide

Natural gas (p.714) 0.071 0.067 0.064 0.074

(P=200 bara)
Natural gas (p.714) 0.090 0.085 0.076 0.083
(P=300 bara)
Water (p.714) 0.605 0.56 0.59 0.68 0.68

Default values can be changed - click the relevant link.

Permeability
For a gas well, this is gas permeability. For an oil well, this is total liquid permeability.
Typical values are:
• < 1 md : Very low
• 1 - 10 md: Low
• 10 - 50 md: Mediocre
• 50 - 200 md: Average
• 200 - 500 md: Good
• > 500 md: Excellent

Drainage radius
Common drainage radii are:
• 40 acres 745 ft (227 m)
• 80 acres 1053 ft (321 m)
• 160 acres 1490 ft (454 m)
• 640 acres 2980 ft (908 m)

Fittings
Model fittings
Fittings (elbows, values and tees) are modeled by the standard practice of utilizing equivalent
length. From the fittings table determine the extra length of pipe that needs to be added to the
model to exert the same pressure drop as the required fitting.

Valves - equivalent lengths of 100% open valves in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 inch angle value add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of 12 feet.

Pipe Size Gate Valve Globe Valve Angle Valve

(Inches) (feet) (feet) (feet)
1/2 .35 17 8
3/4 .50 22 12

Technical Description
569
PIPESIM User Guide

1 .6 27 14
1 1/4 .8 38 18
1 1/2 1.0 44 22
2 1.2 53 28
2 1/2 1.4 68 33
3 1.7 80 42
4 2.3 120 53
5 2.8 140 70
6 3.5 170 84
8 4.5 220 120
10 5.7 280 140
12 9 400 190
14 10 450 210
16 11 500 240
18 12 550 280
20 14 650 300
22 15 688 335
24 16 750 370

Elbows: Equivalent length of elbows in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 standard elbow add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of 2.2 feet.

Pipe Size: St'd elbow Med. sweep elbow Long sweep elbow
Inches feet feet feet
1/2 1.5 1.3 1
3/4 2.2 1.8 1.3
1 2.7 2.3 1.7
1 1/4 3.6 3 2.3
1 1/2 4.5 3.6 2.8
2 5.2 4.6 3.5
2 1/2 6.5 5.5 4.3
3 8 7 5.2
4 11 9 7
5 14 12 9
6 16 14 11

Technical Description
570
PIPESIM User Guide

8 21 18 14
10 26 22 17

Tees: Equivalent length of Tees in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 inch Tee (straight through) add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of
1.3 feet

Pipe Size: Tee (straight through) Tee (rt. angle flow)

Inches feet feet
1/2 1 3.2
3/4 1.3 4.5
1 1.7 5.7
1 1/4 2.3 7.5
1 1/2 2.8 9
2 3.5 12
2 1/2 4.3 14
3 5.2 16
4 7 22
5 9 27
6 11 33
8 14 43
10 17 53

4.8 Glossary
The PIPESIM help uses the following symbols:

4.8.1 Roman Letters

a is the major axis of ft m
the drainage ellipse

πD
2 is the pipe cross- ft
2
m
2

A= sectional area
4

hR is the Biot number dimensionless dimensionless

B=
k

Technical Description
571
PIPESIM User Guide

Bo is the oil formation bbl / STBO

volume factor

c, C is the specific heat BTU / lb ⋅ F J / kg ⋅ K

o
capacity

d, D is the pipe diameter ft m

E is the specific total BTU / lb J / kg
energy

f is the friction factor dimensionless dimensionless

is the frequency Hz Hz
F, R is the gas/oil ratio dimensionless dimensionless

g is the acceleration
due to gravity
= 32.17 ft s / 2
= 9.81m s / 2

L ρ βg ΔT is the Grashof dimensionless dimensionless

3 2

Gr = number
2
μ

h is the local heat BTU / h ⋅ ft ⋅ F W /m ⋅ K

2 o 2
transfer coefficient

H = U + PV is the specific BTU / lb J / kg

enthalpy

HL is the liquid holdup dimensionless dimensionless

Head is the head ft ⋅ lb f / lb N ⋅ m / kg

J is the productivity
index

k is the thermal BTU / h ⋅ ft ⋅ F W /m ⋅ K

o
conductivity 2
2 m
is the absolute ft
permeability

L is the pipe length ft m

is the horizontal well
length

m is the mass lb kg
M is the molecular lb / mol kg / kmol
weight

Technical Description
572
PIPESIM User Guide

is the number of dimensionless dimensionless

magnetic poles in an
ESP

n is the polytropic dimensionless dimensionless

coefficient mol mol
is the number of
moles

N is the compressor
speed

hL is the Nusselt number dimensionless dimensionless

Nu =
k
p, P is the pressure
/
psi or lbf in
2
N /m
2

Power is the power hp W

μc p is the Prandtl number dimensionless dimensionless

Pr =
k
q is the mass flow rate lb / s kg / s
Q is the heat transfer BTU / h W
rate
is the average liquid
rate

r is the radial distance ft m

from the centre of
well

rw is the wellbore radius ft m

reh is the is the drainage ft m

radius of a horizontal
well

R is the pipe radius ft m

is the gas constant
/
= 1545.35lb f ⋅ ft lb − mol ⋅ R = 8.314 J / K ⋅ mol
o

Ra = Pr Gr is the Rayleigh dimensionless dimensionless

number

Re is the Reynolds dimensionless dimensionless

number

Technical Description
573
PIPESIM User Guide

S is the specific entropy BTU J

Q is the pipe burial o
lb ⋅ F kg ⋅ K
S= shape factor
2 πk ΔT dimensionless
dimensionless
is the skin

t is the well operating h s

time

T is the temperature o
F, R
o K

U is the specific internal BTU / lb J / kg

energy
BTU / h ⋅ ft ⋅ F W /m ⋅ K
2 o 2
is the overall heat
transfer coefficient

v is the fluid velocity ft / s m/s

is the ESP speed rev / min rev / s
V is the volume ft
3 J / kg

wt is the pipe wall ft m

thickness

Ws is the shaft work BTU J

z is the vertical ft m
displacement above
a gravitational datum
level

Z is the compressibility
ft m
is the pipe burial
depth

4.8.2 Greek Letters

θ is the angle of the pipe to the horizontal

θbur = sin
-1
( ZR ) is the angle of the buried arc of a
partially buried pipe

k is the thermal diffusivity ft / s /s

2 2
α= m
ρc p

Technical Description
574
PIPESIM User Guide

β= − ( )
1 ∂ρ is the volumetric thermal expansion
coefficient
1 / oF , 1 / oR 1/K
ρ ∂T H

Cp is the ratio of specific heats dimensionless dimensionless

γ= is the specific gravity (relative density) dimensionless dimensionless
CV
γ

dbean is the choke diameter ratio dimensionless dimensionless

δ=
dup

ϵ is the pipe roughness ft m

η is the efficiency, expressed as a
fraction, 0 < η ≤ 1

AvG is the void fraction dimensionless dimensionless

ϕ=
AvG + AvL

μ is the fluid dynamic viscosity cp = 10 Pa ⋅ s Pa ⋅ s = kg / m ⋅ s

−3

ρ is the density lb / ft kg / m
3 3

ρns = λ L ρ L + λG ρG is the no-slip density lb / ft kg / m

3 3

λ is the flowing fraction dimensionless dimensionless

σ is the interfacial (surface) tension dynes / cm N /m

4.8.3 Subscripts
b bubble point
bulk

c critical
G gas phase
L liquid phase
m mixture
o oil

Technical Description
575
PIPESIM User Guide

r reduced

R reservoir
s gas/oil ratio, solution
slip or slippage

v vaporization or vapor phase

volume or volumetric

w water

4.9 Conversion factors

Common conversion factors used in PIPESIM are tabulated below.

4.9.1 Length
1 ft = 0.3048 m 1 m = 3.28084 ft

1 ft = 12 in

4.9.2 Volume
3 3 3 3
1 ft = 0.02832 m 1 m = 35.31467 ft

3 3
1 barrel = 5.61458 ft 1 ft = 0.17811 barrel

3 3
1 barrel = 0.15899 m 1 m = 6.28981 barrel

4.9.3 Mass
1 lb = 0.4536 kg 1 kg = 2.2046 kg

4.9.4 Time
1 hour = 3600 s

1 day = 86400 s

4.9.5 Gravity
−2 −2
g = 32.18 ft ⋅ s g = 9.81 m ⋅ s

Technical Description
576
PIPESIM User Guide

g = 1 / 144 psi ⋅ ft ⋅ lb
2 −1

4.9.6 Pressure
The engineering units of pressure psi, needs to be treated with care. One psi is one pound-force
per square inch, or 144 pound force per square foot. A pound force is the force exerted by one
−2
pound weight, which is one pound times the acceleration due to gravity g = 32.18 ft ⋅ s .

lbf ft 1
1 psi = 144 2 = 144 ⋅ g lb ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2
ft s ft
5
1 bar = 10 Pa 1 bar = 14.504 psi

1 Atm = 1.01325 bar 1 Atm = 14.70 psi

4.9.7 Energy
1 BTU = 1.055056 kJ 1 kJ = 0.947817 BTU
−3 3
1 kJ = 10 Pa ⋅ m

4.9.8 Power
2
1 hp = 550 ⋅ g ft ⋅ lb ⋅ s
−3 1 hp = 0.7457 kW

4.9.9 Dynamic viscosity

−3
1 cP = 10 Pa ⋅ s

4.9.10 Permeability
−10 Pa 2
1 mD = 10 ⋅m
Atm

4.10 References

Adames, P.E. "Analysis and comparison of three comprehensive mechanistic

hydrodynamic models for vertical upward and deviated gas-liquid
flow through pipes". MSc thesis, University of Calgary, 2009.

Technical Description
577
PIPESIM User Guide

Aggour "Hydrodynamics and Heat Transfer in Two-Phase Two-

Component Flow", PhD thesis, University of Manitoba, Winnepeg,
Canada (1978).

Al-Hussainy, R., Ramey Jr., "The Flow of Real Gases Through Porous Media", JPT (1966)
H. J. and Crawford, P. B. 624-636.

Alhanati, F. J. S., Schmidt, Z., "Continuous Gas-Lift Instability: Diagnosis, Criteria, and
Doty, D. R. and Lagerlef, D. Solutions", SPE 26554 (1993)
D.

Alves,I.N., Alhanati, F. J. S. "A Unified Model for Predicting Flowing Temperature Distribution
and Shoham,O. in Wellbores and Pipelines", SPE 20632 (1992)

Ashford, F.E. and Pierce, "Determining Multiphase Pressure Drops and Flow capacities in
P.E. Down-Hole Safety Valves", Journal of Petroleum Technology,
Paper No. SPE-5161, (September, 1975).

Aziz, K., Govier, G. W. and "Pressure Drop in Wells Producing Oil and Gas," J. Cdn. Pet.
Forgasi, M. Tech. (July-Sept. 1972) 38-48.

Babu, D. K. and Odeh, A. S. "Productivity of a Horizontal Well", SPE Reservoir Engineering

(November 1989) 417-421.

Baker, A., Nielsen, K., and "Pressure Loss, Liquid-Holdup Calculations Developed,"
Gabb, A. Technology, Oil & Gas Journal (Mar. 14, 1988).

Baker, O. and Swerdloff, W. "Calculation of Surface Tension - 3";, Oil & Gas Journal (Dec. 5,
1955) 141.

Beal, C. "The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and its
Associated Gases at Oil Field Temperatures and Pressures". SPE
946094, Trans AIME, December 1946.

Beggs, H. D. "Gas Processing Operations", OCGI Publications, (1984), ISBN

0-930972-06-6

Beggs, H. D., and Brill, J. P. "A Study of Two Phase Flow in Inclined Pipes", J. Pet. Tech. (May
1973) 607-617.

Beggs, H. D. and Robinson, "Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil Systems", J. Pet. Tech.
J. R. (Sept. 1975) 1140-1.

Behrmann, L., Grove, B., "A Survey of Industry Models for Perforator Performance:
Walton, I., Zhan, L., Graham, Suggestions for Improvements", SPE 125020, Presented at the
C., Atwood, D., and Harvey, 2009 SPE ATCE, New Orleans, 4-7 October, 2009.
J.

Behrmann, L.A., Hughes, K., "New Underbalanced Perforating Technique Increases Completion
Johnson, A.B. and Walton, Efficiency and Eliminates Costly Acid Stimulation," SPE 77364.
I.C.

Technical Description
578
PIPESIM User Guide

Bellarby, Jonathan “Well Completion Design”, Chapter 6, Elsevier, 2009.

Bendakhlia, H. and Aziz, K. "Inflow Performance Relationships for Solution-Gas Drive

Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 19823 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition, San Antonio, (October
1989).

Bendiksen et al. “The Dynamic Two-Fluid Model OLGA: Theory and Application,”
SPE Production Engineering, 171-180, May 1991.

Bergman, D. F. and Sutton, "Undersaturated Oil Viscosity Correlation for Adverse Conditions",
R. P. SPE 103144 (2006).

Bhatti and Shah "Turbulent and Transition Flow Convective Heat Transfer in
Ducts", Handbook of Single-Phase Convective Heat Transfer, ed.
Kakac, Shah, Aung Wiley Interscience, NY (1987)

Brauner, N. and Ullmann, A. “Modeling of Phase Inversion Phenomenon in Two-Phase Pipe

Flows,” Int. J. Multiphase Flow, 28, 1177, 2002.

Brill, J. P. et al. "Analysis of Two-Phase Tests in Large Diameter Flow Lines in

Prudhoe Bay Field", SPEJ (June 1981).

Brill, J. P. and Beggs, D. H. "Two-Phase Flow in Pipes", 6th Edition, University of Tulsa, Tulsa,
Oklahoma, (December 1988).

Brill, J.P. and Mukherjee, H. "Multiphase Flow in Wells", SPE Monograph 17, (1999)

Brons, F. and Marting,V. E. "The Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on Well Productivity", Trans.,
AIME (1961) 222, 1972.

Brown, T.S., Niesen, V.G., "Measurement and Predition of Kinectics of Paraffin Deposition",
And Erickson, D.P. SPE 26548, 68th Annua Technical Conference and Exhibition of
SPE Houston, TX, 3-6 October, 1993.

Brown, K.E. "The Technology of Artificial Methods", Penwell Publishing

Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1984.

Butler, B. "Success grows in pumping high-gas-fraction multiphase fluids",

Petroleum Engineer International, July 1999.

Celier, G. C. M. R., Jouault, "Zuidwal: A Gas Field Development With Horizontal Wells", SPE
P. and de Montigny, O. A. M. paper 19826 presented at the Annual Technical Conference and
C. Exhibition in San Antonio, October 1989.

Cheng, A.M. "Inflow Performance Relationships for Solution-Gas-Drive Slanted/

Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 20720 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition, New Orleans, September
1990.

Technical Description
579
PIPESIM User Guide

Chew, J. and Conally, C. A. "A Viscosity Correlation for Gas Saturated Crude Oils", Trans.,
Jr. AIME (1974) 23.

Chu and Jones "Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient Studies in Upward and
Downward, Vertical, Two-Phase, Non-Boiling Flows", AIChE
Symp. Ser., vol. 76, 79-90 (1980).

Cinco, H., Miller, F.G.,and "Unsteady-State Pressure Distribution created By a Directionally

Ramey H.J. Drilled Well," JPT 5131, (1975)

Cinco, H., Samaniego, V., "Transient Pressure Behavior for a Well With a Finite-Conductivity
and Dominguez A. Vertical Fracture", SPE 6014, August 1978.

Cinco-Ley, H., and "Transient Pressure Analysis for Fractured Wells", JPT, 1749 -
Samaniego, F. 1766, September 1981a.

Cinco-Ley, H., and "Transient Pressure Analysis: Finite Conductivity Fracture Case
Samaniego, F. versus Damage Fracture Case", SPE Paper 10179, 1981b.

Colburn "A Method of Correlating Forced Convection Heat Transfer Data

and a Comparison With Fluid Friction", Trans. AIChE, 19, 174
(1933) [reprinted in Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 7, 1359 (1964]..

Cooper, R.E., and Troncoso, "An Overview of Horizontal Well Completion Technology", SPE
J.C. paper 17582 presented at the International Meeting on Petroleum
Engineering, Tianjin, China, (November 1988).

Crane Technical Paper 410 "Flow of fluids through valves, fittings and pipe", 1988, Crane Co.

Cunliffe, R. "Prediction of Condensate Flow Rates in Large Diameter High

Pressure Wet Gas Pipelines", APEA Journal (1978), 171-177

Dake, L.P. "Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering", Elsevier Scientific

Publishing Co., New York, (1978).

De Ghetto, G. et al. "Reliability Analysis on PVT Correlations", SPE 28904 (1994).

De Ghetto, G. et al. "Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations for Heavy and Extra

Heavy Oils", SPE 30316 (1995).

de Marolles, C. abd de Salis, "Innovations in multiphase hydrocarbon operations", www.pump-

J. zone.com, (1999).

C.de Waard, U. Lotz “Influence of liquid flow velocity on CO2 corrosion: a semi-
empirical model.” CORROSION/95, Paper No. 128, NACE, 1995.

C.de Waard, U. Lotz, "Predictive model for CO2 Corrosion Engineering in Natural Gas
Milliams, D.E Pipelines", Corrosion, Vol. 47, No. 12, Dec. 1991 (976-985).

Dikken, B.J. "Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells and its Effect on Production
Performance", JPT (November 1990) 1426-1433.

Technical Description
580
PIPESIM User Guide

Dipprey and Sabersky "Heat and Momentum Transfer in Smooth and Rough Tubes at
Various Prandtl Numbers", Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 6, 329
(1963)

Dittus and Bolter "Heat Transfer in Automobile Radiators of the Tubular Type",
University of California Pub. Eng., 2, 443 (1930).

Dranchuk , P.M., Abou- "Calculation of Z Factors For Natural Gases Using Equations of
Kassem, J.H. State," J. Cdn. Pet. Tech. (July-Sept., 1975) 34-36

Drexel and McAdams "Heat Transfer Coefficients for Air Flowing in Round Tubes and
Around Finned Cylinders", NACA ARR No. 4F28, [also Wartime
Report W-108 (1945)].

Dukler, E. A., et al. "Gas-Liquid Flow in Pipelines, I. Research Results", AGA-API

Project NX-28 (May 1969).

Duns, H., and Ros, N. C. J. "Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid Mixtures in Wells", 6th. World Pet.
Congress (1963) 452.

Earlougher, R. C. Jr, "Advances in Well Test Analysis", SPE Monograph 5, (1977)

Eaton, B. A. "Prediction of Flow Patterns, Liquid Holdup and Pressure Losses

Occurring During Continuous Two-Phase Flow in Horizontal
Pipelines", Trans., AIME (1967) 815.

Economides, M.J., Hill, D.A., "Petroleum Production Systems", PTR Prentice Hall, 1994.
and Economides, C.E.

Economides, M.J., "Performance and Stimulation of Horizontal Wells", World Oil, (July
McLennan, J.D., Brown, E., 1989) 69-76.
and Roegiers, J.C.

Eckert, E.R.G. and Jackson, "Analysis of Turbulent Free Convection Boundary Layer on a Flat
T.W. Plate", NACA Repot 1015 (July 1950)

Elsharkawy, A.M. and "Models for predicting the viscosity of Middle East crude oils", Fuel
Alikhan, A.A. 78 (1999), 891-903.

Elamvaluthi and Srinivas "Two-Phase Heat Transfer in Two Component Vertical Flows", Int.
J. Multiphase Flow, vol. 10, no. 2, p. 237-242 (1984).

Fetkovich, M.J. "The Isochronal Testing of Oil Wells", SPE 4259, (1973).

Fetkovich, M.J. and Vienot, "Shape Factors, CA, Expressed as a Skin, sCA", JPT (February
M.E. 1985) 321-322.

Flanigan, O. "Effect of Uphill Flow on Pressure Drop in Design of Two-Phase

Gathering Systems", Oil and Gas J. (March 10, 1958) 56, 132.

Technical Description
581
PIPESIM User Guide

Folefac, A. N., Archer, J. S. "Effect of Pressure Drop Along Horizontal Wellbores on Well
and Issa, R. I. Performance", SPE paper 23094 presented at the Offshore
Europe Conference held in Aberdeen (September 1991).

Forchheimer, Ph. "Wasserbevegung durch Boden", Z. Ver. Deutch. Ing., Vol. 45

(1901) p. 1781 - 1788

Friend and Metzner "Turbulent Heat Transfer inside Tubes and the Analogy among
Heat, Mass, and Momentum Transfer", AIChE J., 4, 393 (1958).

Ghassan, H. A., and Maha, "Correlations developed to predict two-phase flow through
R. A. wellhead chokes", The Journal of Canadian Petroleum technology,
Volume 30, No 6, 1991

Giger, F. M., Reiss, L. H., and "The Reservoir Engineering Aspects of Horizontal Drilling", SPE
Jourdan, A. P. paper 13024 presented at the Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition in Houston, September 1984.

Glasø, O. "Generalized Pressure Volume Temperature Correlation", J. Pet.

Tech. (May 1980) 785.

Golan, M. and Whitson, C.H. "Well Performance", International Human Resources Corporation,
Boston, MA (1986).

Gomez, L.E., Shoham, O., "Unified mechanistic model for steady-state two-phase flow:
Schmidt, Z., Chokshi, R.N., Horizontal to vertical upward flow". SPE Journal, 5(3):339-350,
and Northug, T. 2000.

Goode, P. A. and Wilkinson, "Inflow Performance of Partially Open Horizontal Wells", SPE
D. J. paper 19341 presented at the SPE Eastern Regional Meeting,
Morgantown, WV, October, (1989).

Gowen and Smith "Turbulent Heat Transfer from Smooth and Rough Surfaces", Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, 11, 1657 (1968)

Grolman, E. "Gas-Liquid Flow with Low Liquid Loading in Slightly Inclined

Pipes", Ph.D. Dissertation, U. of Amsterdam, Amsterdam, The
Netherlands (1994).

Grolman, Commandeur, de "Wavy-to-Slug Flow Transition in Slightly Inclined Gas-Liquid Pipe

Basst and Fortuin Flow", AIChE Journal, vol 42. No. 4, p901 (1996)

Gurley, D. G., Copeland, C. "Design Plan and Execution of Gravel-Pack Completion," J. Pet.
T. and Hendrick, J. L. Tech. (Oct. 1977).

Hagedorn, A. R. and Brown, "Experimental Study of Pressure Gradients Occurring During

K. E.: Continuous Two-Phase Flow in Small-Diameter Vertical Conduits",
J. Pet. Tech. (April 1965) 475-484.

Harvey, J., Grove, B., Zhan, "New Predictive Model of Penetration for Oilwell-Perforating
L. and Behrman, L. Shaped Charges", SPE 127920. Presented at the 2010 SPE

Technical Description
582
PIPESIM User Guide

International Symposium and Exhibition on Formation Damage

Control, Lafayette, Louisiana, 10-12 February, 2010.

Hausen "Neue Gleichungen fur die Warmeubertragung bei frieier oder

erzwungener Stromung", Allg. Warmetchn., 9, 75 (1959).

Hawkins, M. F., Jr. "A Note on the Skin Effect", Trans. AIME, 207: 356-357, (1956).

Hayduk, W. and Minhas, B.S. "Correlations for Predictions of Molecular Diffusivities in Liquids",
The Canadian Journal of Chemical Engineering, 60, 295 (1982).

Hernandez, O.C., Hensley, "Improvements in Single-Phase Paraffin Deposition Modeling",

H., Sarica, C., Brill, J.P., Volk, SPE Production and Facilities, 237, (2004).
M., Delle-Case, E.

Hossain, M.S. et al. "Assessment and development of Heavy-Oil Viscosity

Correlations", SPE/PS-CIM/CHOA 97907, PS2005-407.

Hughmark, G. A. "Holdup in Gas Liquid Flow", Chem. Eng. Prog., v.58, p.62.

Incropera, F. P. and DeWitt, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer", Fourth Edition, Wiley,
D.P. New York. (1996).

ISO Standard 15136–1 "Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries – Progressing Cavity Pump
Systems for Artificial Lift", Second Edition, 2009-11-15.

Jones, L.G., Blount, E.M. and "Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow Tests To Predict
Glaze, O.H. Performance of Wells Having Turbulence", SPE 6133 (1976).

Jones, L. G. and Slusser, M. "The Estimation of Productivity Loss Caused by Perforation -

L. Including Partial Completion and Formation Damage", SPE paper
4798 (1974).

Joshi, S. D. "Horizontal Well Technology", Penwell Publishing Company,

Tulsa, Oklahoma (1991).

Joshi, S. D.: "A Review of Horizontal and Drainhole Technology", SPE paper
16868 presented at the Rocky Mountain Regional Meeting in
Casper, WY (May 1988).

Kaminsky, R. D. "Estimation of Two-Phase Flow Heat Transfer in Pipes", J Energy

Res Tech, vol 121, p 75 (1999).

Karakas, M. and Tariq, S,M. "Semianalytical Productivity Models for Perforated Completions",
SPE 18247 (1991).

Karassik, I.J., Messina, J.P., "Pump Handbook," 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1991
Cooper, P., Heald, C. C.

Karassik, I. J. "Pump Handbook," 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill, New York, 2001.

Karassik, J. et al. "Pump Handbook", 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1986

Technical Description
583
PIPESIM User Guide

Kartoatmodjo, R.S.T. and "New Correlations For Crude Oil Physical Properties", SPE 23556
Schmidt, Z. (1991).

Katz, D. L. et al. "Handbook of Natural Gas Engineering", McGraw Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York (1959).

Kawase and Ulbrecht "Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer in Dilute Polymer Solutions",
Chem Eng Sci, 37, 1039 (1982)

Kawase and De "Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer in Dilute Polymer Solutions
Flowing Through Rough Tubes", Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 27,
140 (1984)

Kern, D.Q. and Seaton, R.E. "A Theoretical Analysis of Thermal Surface Fouling", British
Chemical Engineering, Brit. Chem. Eng. 4, 258 (1959).

Khoze, Dunayev, Sparin "Heat and Mass Transfer in Rising Two-Phase Flows in
Rectangular Channels", Heat Transfer-Sov. Res., vol. 8, no. 3, p
87-90, (1976)

King "Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop for an Air-Water Mixture

Flowing in a 0.737 Inch I.D. Horizontal Tube", MS Thesis,
University of California, Berkeley,CA, (1952).

Knott et al. "An experimental Study of Heat Transfer to Nitrogen-Oil Mixtures",

Ind. Eng. Chem., vol. 51, no. 11, p. 1369-1372 (1959).

Kreith, F. and Bohn, M. "Principles of Heat Transfer", 5th Edition, PWS Publishing
Company (1997).

Kudirka, Grosh, McFadden "Heat Transfer in Two-Phase Flow of Gas-Liquid Mixtures", I&EC
Fundamentals, vol 4, no 3, p 339-344 (1965)

Kunz, Klimeck The GERG-2004 wide-range equation of state for natural gases
and other mixtures. GERG TM15 2007. Fortschr.-Ber. VDI, Reihe
6, Nr. 557, VDI Verlag, Düsseldorf, 2007; also available as GERG
Technical Monograph 15 (2007).

Kunz, Wagner The GERG-2008 wide-range equation of state for natural gases
and other mixtures: An expansion of GERG-2004. To be submitted
to J. Chem. Eng. Data (2011).

Lasater, J. A.: "Bubble Point Pressure Correlation", Trans., AIME (1958) 379.

Lee, A. L., Gonzales. M.H. "The Viscosity of Natural Gases", Trans., AIME (1966), 237,
and Eakin, B.E. 997-1000.

Lockhart, R. W. and "Proposed Correlation of Data for Isothermal Two-phase, Two-

Martinelli, R. C. Component Flow in Pipes", Chem. Eng. Prog. (January 1949) 45,
39.

Technical Description
584
PIPESIM User Guide

Martin and Sims "Forced Convection Heat Transfer to Water with Air Injection in a
Rectangular Duct", Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, vol 14, p
1115-1134, (1971).

Matzain, A. "Multiphase Flow Paraffin Deposition Modeling", Ph.D.

Dissertation, U. Tulsa, Tulsa, OK (2001).

Matzain, A., Apte, M.S., "Multiphase Flow Wax Deposition Modeling", Proceedings of
Zhang, H.-Q., Volk, M., ETCE 2001, ETCE2001-17114, 927 (2001).
Redus, C.L.,Brill, J.P., Creek,
J.L.

Matzain, A., Apte, M.S., "Investigation of Paraffin Deposition During Multiphase Flow in
Zhang, H.-Q., Volk, M., Brill, Pipelines and Wellbores-Part 1: Experiments", Transactions of the
J.P., Creek, J.L. ASME, 124, 180 (2002).

McAdams, W.H. "Heat Transmission", McGraw Hill, New York (1954).

McCain, William D. Jr. "Petroleum Fluids", edition 2.

McLeod, H. O. "The Effect of Perforating Conditions on Well Performance", JPT

(Jan. 1983).

Manabe, R. "A comprehensive heat transfer model for two phase flow with high
pressure flow pattern validation", University of Tulsa, (2001).

Manhane, J. M., Gregory, G. "A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-Liquid Flow Pattern in Horizontal
A. and Aziz, K. Pipes", Int. J. of Multiphase Flow.

Martinelli "Heat Transfer to Molten Metals", Trans. ASME, 69, 947 (1947).

Minami, K. and Brill, J. P. "Liquid Holdup in Wet Gas Pipelines", SPE J. Prod. Eng. (May
1987).

Mirza, K. Z. "Progressing cavity multiphase pumping systems: expanding the

possibilities", presented at BHR Conference Multiphase, 1999

Moody, L. "An approximate Formula for Pipe Friction Factors", Transactions

ASME, vol 69, pp. 1005 (1947)

Mukherjee, H. and Brill, J. P. "Liquid Holdup Correlations for Inclined Two-Phase Flow", JPT
(May 1983) 1003-1008.

Mukherjee, H. and "A Parametric Comparison of Horizontal and Vertical Well

Economides, M. J. Performance", SPE paper 18303 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition in Houston, October 1988.

Muskat, M. "The Flow of Homogeneous Fluids Through Porous Media",

I.H.R.D.C., Boston (1937).

Technical Description
585
PIPESIM User Guide

Mutalik, P. N., Godbole, S. P. "Effect of Drainage Area Shapes on Horizontal Well Productivity",
and Joshi, S. D. SPE paper 18301 presented at the Annual Technical Conference
and Exhibition, Houston (October 1988).

Norris, L. "Correlation of Prudhoe Bay Liquid Slug Lengths and Holdups

Including 1981 Large Diameter Flowlines Tests", Internal Report
Exxon (October 1982).

Nunner "Warmeubergang und Druckabfall in Rauhen Rohren", VDI-

Forschungsheft 445, ser B, 22, 5 (1956) or 786-Atomic Energy
Research Establishment, Harwell UK

Oliemans, R. V. A. "Two-Phase Flow in Gas-Transmission Pipeline", ASME paper 76-

Pet-25, presented at Pet. Div. ASME meeting Mexico City (Sept.
1976).

Oliver and Wright "Pressure Drop and Heat Transfer in Gas-Liquid Slug Flow in
Horizontal Tubes", Bri. Chem. Eng., vol. 9, no. 9, p 590-596 (1964)

Omana, R. et al. "Multiphase Flow Through Chokes", SPE 2682, 1969

Orkiszewski, J. "Predicting Two-Phase Pressure Drops in Vertical Pipes", J. Pet.

Tech. (June 1967) 829-838.

Ouyang, L., Aziz, K "Development of New Wall Friction Factor and Interfacial Friction
Factor Correlations for Gas-Liquid Stratified Flow in Wells and
Pipelines", SPE 35679, 1996.

Ovuworie, Chukwuemeka "Steady-State Heat Transfer Models For Fully And Partially Buried
Pipelines," SPE 131137, International Oil and Gas Conference and
Exhibition in Beijing, China, 8-10 June 2010.

Oxley, K. C., Ward, J.M. and "How multiphase pumping can make you money", presented at
Derks, W.G. Facilities 2000 Conference, New Orleans 1999

Palmer, C. M. "Evaluation of Inclined Pipe Two-Phase Liquid Holdup Correlations

Using Experimental Data", M.S. Thesis, The University of Tulsa
(1975).

Pan, S., Zhu, J., Zhang, D., "Case Studies on Simulation of Wax Deposition in Pipelines",
Razouki, A., Talbot, M, and IPTC-13420-PP, 7-9 December 2009
Wierzchowski, S.

Park, H. Y., Falcone, G. and "Decision Matrix for Liquid Loading in Gas Wells for Cost/Benefit
Teodoriu, C. Analyses of Lifting Options," Journal of Natural Gas Science and
Engineering 1 (2009) 72-83.

Payne, G. A.: "Experimantal Evaluation of Two-Phase Pressure Loss

Correlations for Inclined Pipe", M.S. Thesis, The University of
Tulsa (1975).

Technical Description
586
PIPESIM User Guide

Poettman, F. H. and Beck, R. "New Charts Developed to Predict Gas-Liquid Flow Through
L. Chokes", World Oil, March 1963, 95-101

Prandtl, L. "Furhrrer durch die Stomungslehre", Vieweg, Braunschweig, p 359

(1944)

Petrosky, G.E. Jr. and "Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations for Gulf of Mexico

Farshad, F .F. Crude Oils", SPE 51395 (1998)

Petukhov and Gnielinski Int. Chem. Eng., 16-2, p 359, (1976)

Petukhov and Kirillov "Heat Transfer and Friction in Turbulent Pipe Flow with Variable
Physical Properties", Adv. Heat Tranfer, vol. 6, p 505-564 (1970)

Poling, B.E., Prausnitz, J.M. "The Properties of Gases and Liquids", Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill
and O'Connell, J.P.

Pots, B. F. M., Bromilow, I. G. "Severe Slug Flow on Offshore Flowline/Riser Systems", SPE
and Konijn, M. J. W. paper 13723, (March 1985).

Prats, M. "Effect of Vertical Fractures on Reservoir Behavior-Incompressible

Fluid Case", SPEJ, pp. 105-118, June 1961.

Pucknell, J.K. and Mason "Predicting the Pressure Drop in a Cased-Hole Gravel Pack
J.N.E. Completion", SPE 24984, 1992.

Ramey, H.J. "Wellbore Heat Transmission", JPT 435 Trans AIME, No. 225
(April 1962)

Ravipudi and Godbold "The Effect of Mass Transfer on Heat Transfer Rates for Two-
Phase Flow in a Vertical Pipe", Proc. 6th Int. Heat Transfer Conf.-
Toronto, vol. 1, p 505-510, (1978)

Rawlins, E.L. and "Backpressure Data on Natural Gas Wells and Their Application to
Schellhardt, M.A, Production Practices", Monograph Series, USBM 7, (1935).

REFPROP: Lemmon, E.W., Reference Fluid Thermodynamic and Transport Properties-

Huber, M.L., McLinden, M.O. REFPROP, Version 9.1, National Institute of Standards and
NIST Standard Reference Technology, Standard Reference Data Program, Gaithersburg,
Database 23 2013

Renard, G. I. and Dupuy, J. "Influence of Formation Damage on the Flow Efficiency of

M. Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 19414 presented at the Formation
Damage Control Symposium, Lafayette (February 1990).

Rezkallah and Sims "An Examination of Correlations of Mean Heat Transfer

Coefficients in Two-Phase and Two-Component Flow in Vertical
Tubes", AIChE Symp. Ser., vol. 83, pp. 109-114, 1987.

Technical Description
587
PIPESIM User Guide

Romero, D.J., Valko, P.P., "The Optimization Of The Productivity Index And The Fracture
and Economides, M.J. Geometry Of A Stimulated Well With Fracture Face And Choke
Skins", SPE 73758, 2002.

Sandall et al. "A New Theoretical Formula for Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer
with Gases or Liquids in Tube Flow", Can. J. Chem. Eng., 58, 443
(1980)

Scandpower PT Tech Note "TN-11: Heat Transfer Calculations", Scandpower PT, Oslo
TN-11 (internal) (February 2003).

Shell report SIEP 98-5463 "Satellite multiphase boosting - Multiphase boosting study", Siep-
RTS, ABB Lummus Global

Scott, S. L., Shoham, O., and "Prediction of Slug Length in Horizontal Large-Diameter Pipes",
Brill, J. P. SPE paper 15103 (April 1986).

Schlunder, E.U. (ed) VDI Wärmeatlas, VDI-Verlag, Düsseldorf (1984).

Schneider, G. E. "An Investigation Into Heat Loss Characteristics of Buried Pipes",

Journal of Heat Transfer Vol. 107 (pp696-699) (Aug 1985).

Shah "Generalized Prediction of Heat Transfer during Two Component

Gas-Liquid Flow in Tubes and Other Channels", AIChE Symp.
Ser., vol. 77, no. 208, p. 140-151, (1981).

Sieder and Tate "Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop of Liquids in Tubes", Ind. Eng.
Chem., 28, 1429 - 1453 (April 1936).

Singh, P. "Gel Deposition on Cold Surfaces", U. of Michigan, Ann Arbor,

Michigan (2000).

SPE Production Engineering Volume IV, Chapter 15, Society of Petroleum Engineers, 2007.
Handbook

Sonnad, J. and Goudar, C. "Explicit Reformulation of the Colebrook-White Equation for

turbulent Flow friction Factor calculation", Ind. Eng. Chem. Res,
46, pp. 2593-2600, (2007)

Span, R. and Wagner, W. "A New Equation of State for Carbon Dioxide Covering the Fluid
Region from the Triple-Point Temperature to 1100 K at Pressures
up to 800 MPa," J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, 25(6):1509-1596,
1996.

Standing, M. B. "Volumetric and Phase Behavior of Oil Field Hydrocarbon

Systems", Society of Petroleum Engineers, (1977) 121.

Standing, M. B. "A General Pressure Volume-Temperature Correlation for Mixtures

Of California Oils and Greases," Drill. and Prod. Prac., API (1947)
275.

Technical Description
588
PIPESIM User Guide

Standing, M. B. and Katz, D. "Volumetric and Density of Natural Gases", Trans., AIME (1942)
L. 140.

Taitel, Y. and Dukler, A. E. "A Model for Predicting Flow Regime Transitions in Horizontal
Gas-Liquid Flow", AICHE J. (vol. 22, no. 1) (Jan. 1976) 47-55.

Vasquez, M., and Beggs, H. "Correlations for Fluid Physical Property Prediction", SPE paper
D. 6719, presented at the 52nd Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition of the Society of Petroleum Engineers, Denver,
Colorado (1977).

Venkatesan, R. "The Deposition and Rheology of Organic Gels", U. of Michigan,

Ann Arbor, Michigan (2004).

Vijay, Aggour, and Sims "A Correlation of Mean Heat Transfer Coefficients for Two-Phase
Two-Component Flow in a Vertical Tube", Proc. 7th Int. Heat
Transfer Conf., vol. 5, p. 367-372 (1982).

von Karman, "The Analogy Between Fluid Friction and Heat Transfer", Trans.
ASME, 61, 705 (1939).

Vogel, J. V. "Inflow performance relationships for solution gas drive wells",

Journal Pet. Tech., SPE 1476, (1968)

Walton, Ian C., Johnson, "Laboratory Experiments Provide New Insights into Underbalanced
Ashley B., Behrmann, Larry Perforating", SPE 71642.
A. and Atwood, David C.

Webb "A Critical Evaluation of Analytical Solutions and Reynolds

Analogy Equations for Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer in Short
Tubes", Warme-und Stoffubertrag, 4, 197 (1971).

Woelflin, W. "The Viscosity of Crude-Oil Emulsions", Drill. and Prod. Prac., API
(1942) 148.

Xiao, J.J., Shoham, O., and "A comprehensive mechanistic model for two-phase flow". In
Brill J.P. Proceedings of the 65th SPE Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition, pages 167-180, 1990.

Zhang, H.Q., Wang, Q., "Unified Model for Gas-Liquid Pipe Flow Via Slug Dynamics - Part
Sarica, C., Brill, J.P. 1: Model Development", ASME Journal of Energy Resources
Technology, Vol.125 (December 2003) 274.

Zhang, H.-Q., Wang, Q., "Unified Model for Gas-Liquid Pipe Flow Via Slug Dynamics - Part
Sarica, C. and Brill, J.P. 2: Verification", ASME Journal of Energy Resources Technology,
Vol.125 (December 2003) 266.

Zhang, H.-Q. and Sarica C. "Unified Modeling of Gas/Oil/Water Pipe Flow – Basic Approaches
and Preliminary Validation," SPE Project Facilities & Construction
1(2), pp. 1- 7, 2006.

Technical Description
589
PIPESIM User Guide

5
Keyword index
Input files and input data conventions (p.595)
General data (p.601)
Compositional data (p.730)
Blackoil data (p.717)
MFL files (p.739)
Heat transfer data (p.706)
Flow correlation data (p.633)
System and equipment data (p.670)
Well performance modeling (p.645)
PIPESIM operations (p.740)
PIPESIM-net keywords (p.761)

5.1 Keyword list

A (p.590) B (p.590) C (p.591) D (p.591) E (p.591) F (p.591) G (p.592) H (p.592) I
(p.592) J (p.592) K (p.592) L (p.592) M (p.593) N (p.593) O (p.593) P (p.593) Q
(p.593) R (p.593) S (p.594) T (p.594) U (p.594) V (p.594) W (p.594) X (p.595) Y
(p.595) Z (p.595)

5.1.1 A
• ASSIGN (p.753)

5.1.2 B
• BACKPRES (p.662)
• BEGIN (p.629)
• BLACKOIL (p.717)

Keyword index
590
PIPESIM User Guide

• BRANCH (p.764)

5.1.3 C
• CASE (p.603)
• CALIBRATE (p.726)
• CHOKE (p.671)
• COAT (p.709)
• COMP (p.733)
• COMPCRV (p.676)
• COMPLETION (p.647)
• COMPRESSOR (p.677)
• CONETAB (p.661)
• CONFIG (p.714)
• CONTAMINANTS (p.728)
• CORROSION (p.634)
• CPFLUID (p.725)

5.1.4 DE
• END (p.629)
• ENDCASE (p.629)
• ENDJOB (p.629)
• EROSION (p.634)
• EQUIPMENT (p.433)
• ESP (p.700)
• EXPANDER (p.682)

5.1.5 F
• FETKOVICH (p.651)
• FITTING (p.683)
• FLOWLINE (p.647)
• FMPUMP (p.684)
• FORCHHEIMER (p.668)
• FRACTURE (p.668)
• FRAMO2009 (p.684)

Keyword index
591
PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.6 G
• GASLIFT (p.686)
• GFAA compositional fluid can be defined by a GFA (generic fluid artifact) string. The GFA string
encodes a binary representation of the associated compositional fluid. The GFA maincode
contains no subcode and must be directly followed by the GFA string. The string can span
multiple lines by appending "&" at the end of each unfinished line.

5.1.7 H
• HCORR (p.640)
• HEATER (p.685)
• HEADER (p.602)
• HEAT (p.706)
• HORWELL (p.662)
• HVOGEL (p.668)

5.1.8 I
• IFPPSSE (p.652)
• IFPTAB (p.660)
• IFPCRV (p.658)
• INLET (p.618)
• INJGAS (p.691)
• INJFLUID (p.691)
• INJPORT (p.689)
• IPRCRV (p.658)
• ITERN (p.616)

5.1.9 J
• JOB (p.603)
• JONES (p.652)
• JUNCTION (p.770)

5.1.10 K
• KCOAT (p.711)

5.1.11 L
• LAYER (p.664)

Keyword index
592
PIPESIM User Guide

• LVIS (p.720)

5.1.12 M
• MPBOOSTER (p.694)
• MPUMP (p.695)
• MULTICASE (p.745)

5.1.13 N
• NAPLOT (p.740)
• NAPOINT (p.744)
• NODE (p.696)
• NOPRINT (p.629)
• NSEPARATOR (p.771)

5.1.14 O
• OPTIONS (p.604)
• OPTIMIZE (p.754)

5.1.15 P
• PCP (p.700)
• PERMCRV (p.666)
• PERMTAB (p.667)
• PETROFRAC (p.738)
• PIPE (p.698)
• PLOT (p.626)
• PRINT (p.619)
• PROCOPTIONS (p.740)
• PROP (p.719)
• PUMP (p.700)
• PUMPCRV (p.676)
• PUSH (p.631)

5.1.16 Q R
• RATE (p.614)
• REINJECTOR (p.703)
• RISER (p.647)

Keyword index
593
PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.17 S
• SEPARATOR (p.705)
• SETUP (p.762)
• SINK (p.769)
• SLUG (p.635)
• SOURCE (p.766)
• SPHASE (p.643)

5.1.18 T
• TABLE (p.752)
• TCOAT (p.710)
• TIME (p.205)
• TPRINT - Compositional (p.739)
• TPRINT - Blackoil (p.726)
• TRANSIENT (p.669)
• TUBING (p.647)

5.1.19 U
• UNITS (p.603)
• USERDLL - Flow Correlations (p.645)
• USERDLL - Equipment (p.633)

5.1.20 V
• VCORR (p.636)
• VOGEL (p.651)

5.1.21 W
• WAX (p.205)
• WELLHEAD (p.706)
• WELLPI (p.650)
• WCOPTION (p.654)
• WPCURVE (p.651)

Keyword index
594
PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.22 XYZ

5.2 Input files and input data conventions

5.2.1 General
The PIPESIM engine input processor accepts data under a system of main-code and sub-code
keywords. The entire input data file is checked for syntax errors before program execution begins;
if any input errors are detected, diagnostics are written to the terminal (for interactive jobs) and to
the Input Data Echo in the main job output, and program execution is halted.

5.2.2 Statements
Data is entered in statements. Each statement must begin with a main-code keyword (unless it is a
comment card or a blank line), and is followed by sub-code keywords and equated values
appropriate to the maincode. Statements are usually entered one per line in the file; but if desired,
a statement can be split across multiple lines, or multiple statements can be provided on one line.
In all cases there is a limit of 256 characters per statement, and per line, including spaces.
Statements are composed of printable text characters. Valid characters are those in the 7- or 8-bit
ASCII set between decimal values 32 (space, [ ]) and 126 (tilde, [~]). Some computers or
installations will generate characters outside this range, due to differences in national language
alphabets and punctuation. Usually this will not cause any problems but this cannot be guaranteed.
(Files containing ASCII codes greater than 128 or less than 32 are often created using a word-
processing program, because these characters are used as formatting instructions to produce a
correctly formatted printed page. For PIPESIM however they are not required and will sometimes
cause the program to generate large numbers of syntax errors. Use of such programs for preparing
input files is best avoided, you should use a text editor instead; alternatively acceptable results
may be obtained by requesting the word-processor to produce ASCII text files as output.)
Upper and lower case can be freely mixed, except where doing so would cause the computer
system to assign a different meaning to the data. All Maincodes and Subcodes described in this
document are case-insensitive, but for example some computer systems are case-sensitive in
filenames, so where these are specified care must be taken to provide the correct case.

5.2.3 Delimiters
There are a number of characters reserved for use as delimiters. In general these can only be
used for the purpose described, however if a reserved delimiter character is required for use in a
character string, the string can be quoted with apostrophes or double quotes. The delimiters (with
ASCII decimal codes) are:
• [ ] One or more blanks or spaces can be used to delimit main-code and sub-code entries, and
to improve readability in conjunction with other delimiter characters. (ASCII 32)
• [,] A comma (with or without one or more blanks) can also be used to delimit main-code and
subcode entries, but its main use is to delimit data items when a multiple set of values is
provided with parentheses (see below). (ASCII 46)

Keyword index
595
PIPESIM User Guide

• [=] An equal's sign is used to separate each subcode from its associated numeric or character
data. Additional spaces may be inserted either side of the equals to improve readability. Some
subcodes do not require values; if no value is provided the equals must be omitted. (ASCII 61)
• ['] Apostrophes (also known as closing single quotes) can be used in matching pairs to delimit
character data which itself contains delimiter characters, e.g. embedded blanks. (Do not
confuse apostrophe with the opening single quote[`], and do not attempt to match opening and
closing single quotes with one another.) (ASCII 39)
• ["] Double quotes can be used in matching pairs as an alternative to apostrophes in delimiting
character data. This is useful when the character string contains one or more single quotes.
(Note that double quote is itself a single character or keystroke, and is not equivalent to two
single quotes.) (ASCII 34)
• [$] or [!] Either a dollar sign or an exclamation point is used to delimit end-of-line comments
from input data. All characters on the line between the comment delimiter and end-of-line will be
ignored. (ASCII 36 and 33)
• [(] [)] Parentheses are used to enclose Multiple Value Data Sets when 2 or more values are
provided for a subcode. Supplied data values should be separated with commas. (Additional
separators are valid in multiple data sets, see below.) (ASCII 40 and 41)
• [&] The ampersand is used to continue a statement across two or more lines. It is placed as the
last character on a line to specify that the statement continues on the next line. There is no limit
to the number of continuation lines, but the complete statement cannot span more than 256
characters, including spaces. The ampersand should appear between subcodes. Continued
lines can be separated with blank lines, but not with comment lines. (ASCII 38)
• [;] The semicolon is used to separate multiple statements provided on a single line. (ASCII 59)

Examples
RATE LIQUID = 6000 GLR = 400 WCUT = 20
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20
MULTICASE LIQ = ( 200, 250, 300 ) GLR = ( 95, 105 )
HEADER PROJECT=TEST, USER=J. BLOGGS
HEADER PROJECT=TEST, USER='JOE BLOGGS'
$ This line is a comment and will be ignored
! This line is also a comment
MULTICASE LIQ=(200.250,300) GLR=(95,105) ! This is an end-of-line comment
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20 $ This is also an end-of-line comment
MULTICASE LIQ=(200.250,300) & ! This statement is continued on the next line
GLR=(95,105)
! the next line contains two statements
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20 ; MULTICASE
LIQ=(200,250,300) GLR=(95,105)

5.2.4 Abbreviations
Main-code and sub-code keywords can be abbreviated down to the minimum number of letters
required to make them unique in their context. For maincodes the context is all other main-codes;
thus for example the GASLIFT maincode can be abbreviated to G because no other maincode
starts with G, but COMP is an illegal abbreviated maincode because it matches COMPRESSOR,
COMPLETION and COMPOSITION. The context for subcodes is restricted to the set of legal

Keyword index
596
PIPESIM User Guide

subcodes for the maincode concerned. If the keyword is abbreviated too much, the input processor
will generate a syntax error and processing will terminate.

Example
For example the following 2 lines are equivalent:

OPTIONS SEGMENTS=10
OPT S=10

5.2.5 Numeric data

Except where noted, all numeric data must be equated to a preceding subcode with an equals sign
[=]. Decimal points are optional, if provided only one is allowed and it must be the period or full
stop character, [.] (ASCII 46). Large and small values may carry an exponent, for example,
1200000 may be written as 1.2e6 (or 0.12E7, .12e7, 1.2+6, 1.2e+6, 1.2D6, and so on). For
example 0.000034 may be written as 3.4e-5 (or 0.34e-6, and so on). Do not embed spaces or
commas in numeric data; they will be interpreted as delimiters signaling the end of the data item,
and the remaining digits will then cause a syntax error.
Some main-codes allow data to be provided without keywords, in a strict positional order. Usually
this is to allow easy entry of tabular data. Examples are PERMTAB (p.667), CONETAB (p.661),
IFPTAB (p.660).

Example
In the following example, all lines are equivalent:

RATE MASS=224.0
RATE MASS=.224e+3
RATE MASS=224

5.2.6 Units description

A Units Description String can accompany numeric data. Such strings are the best way to provide
data in units different to the defaults established with the UNITS statement. The string must contain
no embedded blanks or other recognized delimiters. It can appear after the data to which it refers,
or between the keyword and the equals. For example:

RATE LIQ = 3000 bbl/day WCUT = 55 % GOR = 300 scf/bbl

RATE LIQ bbl/day = 3000 wcut % = 55 GOR scf/bbl =
300

Multiple value data sets equated to non-symbolic subcodes can also accept unit's description
strings placed outside the parentheses, for example:

PUMPCRV head = (300, 250,200,150,100,50) kj/kg

Symbolic subcodes (eg ?ALPHA, ?BETA on Multicase) will not allow units description strings.
Instead, the description can be placed on the line where the symbol is used, for example:

Keyword index
597
PIPESIM User Guide

MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(20,30,40)
PUMP DP = ?ALPHA kg/cm2

5.2.7 Character input

Character data should be enclosed in a single or double quotes if it contains reserved delimiter
characters (for example embedded blanks). It must be equated to a sub-code with an [=] sign.

Example
For example:

HCORR PLOSS = BJA HOLOUP = BJA MAP = TD

NODE dist=0 elev = 0 t=100 u=0.8 label = "Station Z' to
J2"

5.2.8 Comment statements and blank lines

Any information to the right of a comment delimiter [$ or !] is ignored. Lines beginning with a
comment delimiter sign will be ignored completely and can be entered at any location in the input
data file.
Blank lines are also ignored and so may be used to improve layout and readability.

Example
$ ~---- THIS LINE WILL BE IGNORED -----
RATE, MASS=224 $ THIS IS AN IN-LINE COMMENT

5.2.9 Multiple value data sets

Some subcodes accept more than one value, and for these an explicit syntax is available using
parentheses. At its simplest the Multiple Value Data Set is a 2 or more values, separated by
commas, and enclosed by parentheses. For example:

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,250,300) GLR=(95,105)

CHOKE dbean = 0.5 ccorr = (pratio, sonicup, flowrate)
DOVCORR uovcorr=table temps=(80,100,120,140)
viscs=(6.5,5,2,1.5)
PRINT CUSTOM=(g3,h3,i3,k1,l1,m4,g4,f4,h11,i11,j11,m11)
PLOT CASE=(+,f7,g7,h7)

Multiple value sets can become very long, and care should be taken to avoid the maximum
statement limit of 256 characters.
A range of data values can be specified for numeric data, this is a convenient alternative to
entering long strings of explicit values. The syntax is ( start : finish ; iop increment), which specifies
a Starting value, a Finishing value, an Increment Operator, and an Increment Value. The special
characters used are:

Keyword index
598
PIPESIM User Guide

colon [:] separates the starting value from the finishing value

semicolon [;] separates the finishing value from the increment operator

plus [+] the addition operator

minus [-] the subtraction operator

asterisk [*] the multiplication operator

hash/sharp/number sign the enumeration operator.

[#]
Note: On computers outside the USA, the hash character will
sometimes display as the national currency symbol. The required
ASCII code is 35 decimal.

Examples
Some examples:

Example 1
To specify values from 10 to 100 by repeated addition of 5:

(10:100;+5).

Example 2
To specify values from 10 to 100 in 50 equal-sized steps:

(10:100;#50)

Example 3
To specify values from 10 to 100 by repeated multiplication by 1.5:

(10:100;*1.5)

Example 4
To specify values from 100 to 10 by repeated subtraction of 7:

(100:10;-7)

Example 5
The range syntax can appear many times and be combined with other values, E.g.:

MULTICASE GLR=( 0, 1:1000;*1.5, 1200, 1600, 2000:10000;+1000 )

Keyword index
599
PIPESIM User Guide

5.2.10 Input files

General
The input data may appear in more than one file. At least one file is required, this may contain
explicit references to further files if desired. In addition certain other files, if they exist, will be
automatically read and processed in addition to your main input file.

The main input ('.PSM' or '.PST') file

Conventionally, the main input file has a filename with an extension of '.PSM'. It is specified on the
engine command line or in answer to the engine prompt 'INPUT FILE NAME:'. In fact however any
extension can be chosen, and will be used as specified. Beware however that word-processing
programs can generate files with embedded formatting characters (that the engine will not
recognize) if certain extensions are used, for example .TXT, .DOC. You are advised to use .PSM
as the extension for all PIPESIM keyword main input files.

Note: The PIPESIM Graphical User Interface (GUI) program generates temporary engine keyword
files with the extension .PST. All such files are assumed by it to be volatile, so if you choose to
create files with a .PST extension, they are likely to be overwritten with no warning. Use .PSM
instead.

Included files and the INCLUDE statement

Input data can be explicitly split among 2 or more files by use of the INCLUDE statement.
INCLUDE has no subcodes, and the only value allowed is the name of the file to be included. The
contents of the included file will be processed as though it appeared in the input file instead of the
INCLUDE statement. For example if the file 'oil23.inc' contains the following:

UNITS in=eng
BLACKOIL
PROP gassg=.68 watersg=1.05 api=37.6
PROP psat=600 psia tsat=120 F GSAT=370
RATE wcut=20 GOR=320

This file can be referenced from the main input file by use of an INCLUDE at the appropriate point,
for example:

INCLUDE oil23.inc

The Included file is assumed to reside in the same directory as the main input file; if this is not the
case a path can be provided, such as:

include ..\..\proj-45\common\oil23.inc

Filenames containing spaces and other delimiter characters must be quoted, for example:

INCLUDE "k:\my special projects\pipesim files\my common

files\proj-45\common\oil type 23c.inc"

Keyword index
600
PIPESIM User Guide

Included files can themselves contain INCLUDE statements, and such nested includes can go to a
maximum of 10 levels. Take care to ensure such an include nest does not attempt to include a file
that has already been included.
All Included files should specify a UNITS statement before any numeric data is supplied. Failure to
do this is not an error, but the interpretation of the contents of the included file will then depend on
the units in force in the main input file at the point of the INCLUDE statement. This is an unsafe
situation, and can lead to unforeseen errors, which do not necessarily manifest themselves
immediately. Any UNITS statement in an included file will only affect data in that file, and will not be
remembered when processing returns to the main input file. Thus an included file cannot be used
to alter units settings in the main input file.

AUTOEXEC.PSM
This is a special include file that, if it exists in the same directory as the main input file, is
automatically included for processing as though an INCLUDE statement referenced it. The file is
named after the MS-DOS control file AUTOEXEC.BAT because of the obvious parallels between
them. Note however that, while AUTOEXEC.BAT must reside in the root directory of a DOS boot
disk to do its job, AUTOEXEC.PSM must instead reside in the same directory as the engine main
input file. It is therefore possible to have many different autoexec.psm files in different directories of
a computer's file system.

modelname.U2P or branchname.U2P
The .U2P file is a file whose contents are defined identically to AUTOEXEC.PSM, but whose
applicability is limited to just one main input file name. This is specified by matching the rootnames
of the files. For example if the main input file is called fred.psm, the matching .u2p file is fred.u2p.

5.3 General data

HEADER (p.602) Job Accounting Header
JOB (p.603) Job Title
CASE (p.603) Case Title
UNITS (p.603) Input and Output Units
OPTIONS (p.604) Calculation Procedure Options
RATE (p.614) Fluid Flow Rate Data
ITERN (p.616) Iteration Data (Optional)
INLET (p.618) System Inlet Data
PRINT (p.619) Output Printing Options
NOPRINT (p.629) Output Print Suppression Options
PLOT (p.626) Output Plotting Options
BEGIN, END (p.629) Block delimiters
PUSH (p.631) Remote action editing
PLOT FILE DATA (p.632)

Keyword index
601
PIPESIM User Guide

EXECUTE (p.632)
USERDLL (p.633) Equipment

5.3.1 Change parameters within the system profile

One of the features of PIPESIM which gives a great deal of flexibility is the ability to change any
parameter, for example, flow rate or fluid property, at any point (node) in the system. In fact, almost
any main-code can be inserted at any point in the System Profile, that is the cards between the first
NODE card and the ENDCASE card. There are one or two exceptions where the main-code must
appear before the first NODE card (for example ITERN main-code) and these are documented in
the relevant sections. This feature allows changes of pipe diameter, fluid inflow and outflow, and so
on, to be easily modeled.
The main-code to change parameters within the System Profile should be inserted after the NODE
card at which it is to take effect. There is no limit to the number of parameters which can be
changed at a particular node.

Example
Example:
A pressure control valve is located at a position 2000' down a flowline and sets the downstream
pressure to 800 psia. There is a change of pipe diameter (to 6"), and another flowline from a
similar well joins thus doubling the flow rate.

Multiple cases
If multiple cases are to be considered, where the same feature within the profile is to be repeated
but with a different value assigned to it, then the user has a choice. Either the whole profile may be
repeated or an ASSIGN (p.753) card may be used to avoid repetition of the profile.

Note: The MULTICASE (p.745) card provides a convenient alternative to the use of repeated
ENDCASE cards.

5.3.2 HEADER - Job Accounting Header (Required)

Main-code: HEADER
The HEADER card must be the first card in a job and must contain both a PROJECT and USER
sub-code.

PROJECT= Project name (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the
string contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

USER= User name (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the
string contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

PASSWORD= Password (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the
string contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

Keyword index
602
PIPESIM User Guide

Example
HEADER PROJ=TEST USER='JOE BLOGGS'

5.3.3 JOB - Job Title (Optional)

Main-code: JOB

JOB Job title (70 characters maximum). Quotes are not required even if the title string includes
delimiters.

5.3.4 CASE - Case Title (Optional)

Main-code: CASE

CASE Case title (70 characters maximum). Quotes are not required even if the title string
includes delimiters.

5.3.5 UNITS - Input and Output Units (Optional)

Main-code: UNITS

INPUT= Specifies the units in the input file

SI Input data in SI units (default).

ENG Input data in engineering units

OUTPUT= Specifies the units in the output file

SI Output data in SI units (default).

ENG Output data in engineering units

ALL= Specifies the units in both the input and output files.

SI Input data in SI units (default).

ENG Input data in engineering units

The UNITS statement should appear before the input data to which it relates and is therefore
usually placed at the top of the input file after the HEADER statement.
If input data is provided in additional files, viz. AUTOEXEC.PSM, (p.595) branchname .U2P, or
files specified on INCLUDE statements, each file should commence with its own UNITS statement
to ensure the units in the file are not dependent on the position in the main input file where it is
processed. A UNITS statement in an additional file does not affect the units already established for
the main input file.

Keyword index
603
PIPESIM User Guide

The UNITS statement may appear many times in the input file, to ensure the subsequent data has
the desired units system. Please note however it is preferable for each data item to be qualified
with its own units description string.

Example
UNITS INPUT=SI OUTPUT=ENG

5.3.6 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional)

Main-code: OPTIONS

SEGMENTS= The number of segments in each pipe or tubing section. The pipeline is
divided into sections by entering distance and elevation data (or TVD/MD)
on NODE statements. Each section is then sub-divided by the program
into a number of segments for calculation purposes. The default number
of segments is 4; allowable range is 1 to 500. The intermediate segment
data will only be printed if PRINT (p.619) sub-code SEGMENT is
selected. The MAXSEGLEN= subcode (below) can also be used to
subdivide sections. The EOFS= setting may add 2 additional short
segments to the section, see below.

MAXSEGLEN= The maximum segment length to be used by the program (ft or m). The
number of segments in each section is computed by dividing the section
length by the specified MAXSEGLEN= length. The final number of
segments used is the maximum of this calculation, rounded up, and the
number specified by the SEGMENTS= subcode. above. The default for
MAXSEGLEN= is infinite. The EOFS= setting may add 2 additional short
segments to the section, see below.

MINSECTLEN or The minimum length of any section of pipe that the PIPESIM engine will
DUPENODELEN compute properties such as pressure, temperature, etc. for. Any node
which is closer than this length from the previous node will be ignored and
removed from the system profile.

EOFS= “Extra One-Foot Segments”. Pipe sections between NODE statements

are divided into segments for calculation purposes, under the control of
the SEGMENTS= and MAXSEGLEN= subcodes above. In addition, extra
short segments are added to the start and end of the section to ensure
the reported fluid properties and flowrates are calculated at an almost
identical temperature and pressure as that reported at the node. In fact,
the fluid properties are calculated at segment average pressure and
temperature. With EOFS enabled, the discrepancies caused by this
mismatch are minimized; however, it does have some effect of the
runtime. Can be set to ON or OFF. Default is ON.

SEC= Controls the calculation of pressure losses due to Sudden Expansions

and Contractions (SEC) of pipe diameter. Can be set to ON or OFF. The
default is ON.

Keyword index
604
PIPESIM User Guide

SECLIM= The lower limit for printing of SEC pressure losses. Any SEC DP less than
this value will not be reported. DPs are reported with a one-line message
in the primary output page. Default is 10 psi.

GRIDPRES=(...) Values of pressure to be used in the P/T grid for compositional

interpolated flash calculations. Psia or bara. Exclusive with
NUMGRIDPRES=.

GRIDTEMP=(...) Values of temperature to be used in the P/T grid for compositional

interpolated flash calculations. F or C. Exclusive with NUMGRIDTEMP=.

NUMGRIDPRES= The number of grid pressure points desired in the P/T grid for
compositional interpolated flash calculations. A number between 60 and
100, default 60. If this subcode is specified, the actual values of grid
pressure will be generated internally using an arithmetic increment
algorithm, between atmospheric pressure and approximately. 40,000 psi.
Exclusive with GRIDPRES=.

NUMGRIDTEMP= The number of grid temperature points desired in the P/T grid for
compositional interpolated flash calculations. A number between 60 and
100, default 60. If this subcode is specified, the actual values of grid
temperature will be generated internally using a linear increment
algorithm, between -60 and +300 F. Exclusive with GRIDTEMP=.

2010GRID Reverts from the current 60x60 compositional table pressure-temperature

grid size to the 21x21 grid size present in PIPESIM 2010.1 and earlier
releases. Can be specified either as 2010GRID or 2010GRID=ON

HTCRD= “Heat Transfer Coefficient Reference Diameter”. All HTCs printed on the
Heat Transfer Output pages will normally use a reference diameter equal
to the local pipe outside diameter. However, if a value is provided for
HTCRD=, the supplied reference diameter will be used instead. This is
useful when sensitizing on pipe diameter, or when different pipe
diameters are present in the system, because it allows HTCs to be
compared without the need to convert for different diameters. Units are In.
or mm.

GTGRADIENT= Controls geothermal gradient assumptions in Pipe objects. When a

temperature profile is provided for a well tubing with TEMP= on the
various NODE statements, the values are assumed to specify measured
points on a geothermal gradient, so temperatures are interpolated
between them based on the true vertical Depth. However, when
temperatures are provided for flowlines and risers, they are assumed to
be specifications that exhibit a step-change at the nodes. This subcode
can be set to ON, OFF or AUTO. ON makes all pipe objects, notably
flowlines and risers, interpolate the temperatures according to the
elevation or depth (NB, not distance). OFF prevents all pipe objects,
notably well tubing and horizontal completions, from interpolating. AUTO

Keyword index
605
PIPESIM User Guide

is the default setting, which allows well tubing pipes to interpolate, but
prevents flowlines and risers.

PPMETHOD= Compositional Flashing methodUse the Advanced tab to configure

additional calculation options and specify keyword input. for determination
of fluid transport properties. Can be set to 1, 2, or 3. The default is 1. The
meaning of these is:

1: Interpolate (fastest). This option uses interpolation between physical

properties from flash results in a predefined grid of temperature and
pressure points. This grid can be modified using the GRIDPRES= and
GRIDTEMP= subcodes above.

2: Hybrid when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere.

This is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that
properties will change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary.
Interpolation is performed whenever the grid points comprising a
rectangle all show the presence of the same phases. For example. if all 4
points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then we
assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the
hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however
one, two or three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon
dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.

3: Rigorous (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties are obtained

by flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This is the most
accurate method, but it is also the slowest.

THMETHOD= Compositional Flashing methodUse the Advanced tab to configure

additional calculation options and specify keyword input. for Temperature/
enthalpy balance calculation. In most simulations, for every PP flash that
is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes, so these have the
greatest effect on speed and run-time. The inaccuracies of TH
interpolated flashes are usually minimal. Can be set to 1, 2, or 3, as for
PPMETHOD=.

IFP= This is a way to switch off all existing completion options in the model.
Should only be used by another program controlling the engine as a sub-
task. Can be set to ON or OFF. The default is ON.

ACTIVELAYER= In a multi-layer well, specifies that only one of the reservoir layers is to be
active. Must be set to a number between 1 and the number of reservoir
layers in the well. Layers are numbered starting with 1 for the deepest.

COMPLETION= or Controls the way temperature and enthalpy changes are handled when
COMPHBAL= modelling the pressure drop calculations across a completion. may be set
to:
ADIABATIC or ISENTHALPIC: The pressure change will be at constant
enthalpy, so the fluid will undergo a temperature change according to it's
Joule-Thomson coefficient. For Liquids this will result in a temperature

Keyword index
606
PIPESIM User Guide

increase; for gases, temperature will usually decrease, but in high-

pressure reservoirs it may increase.
ISOTHERMAL: The pressure change will be at constant temperature. The
fluid temperature will not change, so a consequent enthalpy change will
occur,

MAXEMULSION= Maximum value for the multiplier as interpolated or extrapolated from the
emulsion viscosity table for user-supplied and Woleflin emulsion
correlations (p.720). Default 100. The limit will be applied silently. This
is a global (model-wide) option.

MAXCUTOFF= Maximum value for the BOUNDARY= and CUTOFF= (p.720) keywords
on the LVIS statement, default 70. Limit will be applied silently. This is a
global (model-wide) option.

MAXLIQVISC= Maximum liquid viscosity the engine will allow. If any correlation predicts
values greater than this they will be limited to it. Default 1e7 cP. Limit will
be applied with warnings. This is a global (model-wide) option.

SMOOTHCUTOFF= Size of the transition region that is used to interpolate the viscosity
multiplier when watercut is above the cutoff value. Default 5%. This is a
global (model-wide) option.

EMUL3PHASE= Method for assigning priority between Emulsion options and a 3-phase
flow correlation. This is a PIPE component level option. May be set to one
of the following values:

EMULSION: Emulsion option will take priority. Any fluid with an emulsion
viscosity will override a 3-phase correlation. Oil and water phase
Viscosities and densities will be set to the emulsion liquid phase values
before calling the correlation.

3PHASE: 3 phase correlation will take priority. Separate oil and water
phase densities and viscosities will be passed to it, and its answers will be
used as-is. The liquid phase emulsion viscosity will be ignored. This is the
default setting, chosen for backward compatibility with previous versions
of the engine.

HYBRID: The 3 phase correlation will be called as for the 3PHASE option,
and its prediction of the mixing status of the liquid phase will be
examined. If it predicts separate, unmixed oil and water phases, the
answers will be used as-is. If however it predicts mixed oil and water, and
the fluid has an emulsion viscosity, then the answers will be discarded,
and a further call made in the EMULSION mode as described above.

Note: The test for "the fluid has an emulsion viscosity" is that the mixed
liquid viscosity has to be at least 1% greater than the maximum of the oil
and water phase viscosities. The test will therefore give a positive result

Keyword index
607
PIPESIM User Guide

for any emulsion option, that is, it is not restricted to Woleflin and user-
supplied-table options

HYDRATECALC= Controls calculation of Hydrate Formation Temperature (HFT) in

compositional models. HFT optionally appears in the profile plot file, but
calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence it is
not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

WAXCALC= Controls calculation of Wax Formation Temperature (WFT or Cloud Point)

in compositional models. WFT optionally appears in the profile plot file,
but calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence it
is not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

ASPHALTCALC= Controls calculation of Asphaltene Formation Temperature (AFT) in

compositional models. AFT optionally appears in the profile plot file, but
calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence it is
not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

ALHANATI= Controls calculation of Alhanati Gas Lift Instability (GLI) criteria. GLI
criteria can be calculated for wells that have gas lift, but the calculation
requires a number of additional data items that are not needed for any
other purpose. Can be set to ON or OFF, default OFF.

ON: GLI criteria calculation is requested. If the additional data items are
available, the calculated criteria values will be written to the system plot
file; otherwise, diagnostic message(s) will be issued to enumerate the
missing data. To remove the messages, you can either supply the
missing data, or switch the calculation OFF.

OFF: GLI criteria will not be calculated, and diagnostic messages will not
appear.

GLMAXMASS= Specifies a maximum gas lift rate limit, in mass ratio terms. Unlimited gas
lift in a network branch can lead to the existence of multiple network
solutions, so the network may converge to an unwanted solution, where a
well produces nothing but lift gas. This subcode specifies the maximum
mass rate of gas that can be injected, as a ratio with the current
production mass flow rate. Its purpose is to prevent the well from
converging at the unwanted solution. It is only applied in a network model.
The default value is 0.2, thus the gas lift mass rate will be limited to 20%
of the current production mass flowrate in a network model.

GLMAXGLR= Specifies a maximum gas lift rate limit as a GLR. Unlimited gas lift in a
network branch can lead to the existence of multiple network solutions, so
the network may converge to an unwanted solution, where a well
produces nothing but lift gas. This subcode specifies the maximum rate of
gas that can be injected, as a volume ratio with the current production
stock-tank liquid flow rate. Its purpose is to prevent the well from

Keyword index
608
PIPESIM User Guide

converging at the unwanted solution. The default value is infinite. A

sensible value for this limit is in the range 1000 to 2000 scf/sbbl. Units are
scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3.

FMMINTEMP= Specifies the minimum temperature used in fluid property flash

calculations. Units are F or C. The default value is 0K (absolute zero).
However some flash packages will refuse to produce results at
temperatures higher than this. For example, NIST Refprop requires
temperature to be above -100F. This keyword can be used to limit the
temperature range for the iterative PH flash algorithm when calculating
temperature from enthalpy. If the temperature is out of the flash package
range, you get an error message stating this. Only the minimum
temperature the package will allow is reported. Use this keyword to set
the equivalent minimum temperature. A similar keyword FMMAXTEMP=
is used for the maximum temperature.

SYSTEMTYPE= Specifies if the branch or model represents a production well or an

injection well. Usually there is no ambiguity between these and it is
unnecessary for this to be explicitly stated by the user. However
sometimes the model is open to interpretation either way. If it makes a
difference, the user can supply an override value here. One example
where this can be important is the production of VFP tables for a flowline
branch. If there is no elevation difference between the branch start and
end, then the system type is moot. However, VFP tables must be written
with VFPPROD for a production branch and VFPINJ for an injection
branch. Also, a VFPPROD allows sensitivity on GLR, Watercut and
Artificial lift, and these must be provided in the table. Can be set to
PRODUCER or INJECTOR. If omitted, PIPESIM will determine the
system type, based on overall branch elevation change and the
location(s) and numbers of completions it contains.

LAYERINJECT= Controls the ability for reservoir layers to operate in injection mode. By
default layers are able to accept fluid injection if the tubing pressure
exceeds the layer pressure. Setting this option to NO makes all layers to
refuse to allow injection; if the tubing pressure exceeds the layer
pressure, the layer's flowrate will be zero. Can be set to YES or NO,
default is YES.

ELIQLOADING=, Specifies the correction factor to be applied to Turner's general equation

LLE= in liquid loading (p.384) calculations. Minimum is 0.1, maximum is 10.0
and the default is 1.2.

LLVELOCITY= Controls which Gas Velocity is used in liquid loading (p.384) calculations
to get the Critical Gas Rate (CGR). Choices are: VSG, VM, VG, and EQN,
whose meanings are:

VSG: The Superficial Gas Velocity is used. This yields a result that is
closest to that obtained by a hand calculation (from which it differs
because the fluid phase behaviour is predicted by the selected fluid PVT

Keyword index
609
PIPESIM User Guide

package). However it is insensitive to Liquid Volume Fraction (LVF), and

under some conditions can predict a CGR that reduces when LVF
increases. This is the default.

VM: The fluid Mean Velocity is used (i.e. the average of the gas and liquid
phase velocities, the velocity at no-slip conditions). This yields a
conservative result, i.e. a CGR somewhat higher than that obtained with
VSG. Its main advantage is that the CGR it calculates should increase
with VFL.

VG: The Actual Gas Velocity is used. VG is calculated by the selected

multiphase flow correlation, thus in principle it ought to be the most
accurate choice. The CGR it calculates is generally the largest, or most
conservative. However it will always be considerably larger than a hand
calculated result, and will be strongly affected by the choice of multiphase
flow correlation.

EQN: The gas velocity is calculated from the Stock-tank gas flowrate
using the equation: Vg = Qgas* (T+460) * Z / (3.067 * P * A) . This allows
the resulting CGR to be verified by hand calculation. However, it takes no
account of the fluid PVT behaviour.

LLANGLEMIN= or Maximum pipe angle for liquid loading (p.88) calculations. The Turner
ALIQLOADING= equation assumes vertical or near vertical uphill flow. As deviation
increases, so the equation becomes less applicable; so it makes sense to
restrict it to pipe sections where the local deviation angle is a reasonable
approximation to the vertical. By default the limit is 45 degrees. It can be
set to any vertical deviation angle between 0.1 and 90 degrees. When the
Pipe is deviated greater than this, the calculation is not performed.

LLFRNLIQMAX= Maximum Liquid Volume Fraction (LVF) for liquid loading (p.88)
calculations. The Turner equation assumes a continuous gas phase with
small dispersed liquid droplets entrained in it. As LVF increases, so the
equation becomes less applicable, and it makes sense to restrict it to pipe
segments where the LVF is consistent with the description “liquid droplets
in a continuous gas phase”. By default the limit is 0.1. It can be set to any
value between 0 and 1. When the LVF is greater than this, the calculation
is not performed.

RAMEYTIME= Specifies the length of time a well has been operating when HEAT
(p.706) subcode RAMEYMETHOD is invoked for a piece of tubing.
Minimum is 0 hour and default is 168 hours. The minimum recommended
value for RAMEYMETHOD=LARGETIME is 168 hours.

UFACTOR= Specifies a multiplier for all supplied (not calculated) U-values in heat loss
calculations. U-values are entered on the numerous NODE statements
that specify the geometry of the pipe and tubing of the branch. This
multiplier is applied to all of these before they are used in calculation of
heat transfer and temperature change of the fluid. This is useful if you
want to sensitize on the overall effective U-value for the branch. Note it is

Keyword index
610
PIPESIM User Guide

NOT used if the U-value is calculated. Default is 1, allowed range is 0 to

1e10.

SEPMASSCALC= Method for calculating the flowrate of fluid separated when a

compositional fluid passes through a separator. Can be set to TABLE or
FLASH, default TABLE.

MPBOOSTROUTE= Specifies an override thermodynamic route to adjust the fluid temperature

and enthalpy at the discharge of any multiphase booster. Can be set to
ISENTHALPIC, ISOTHERMAL, or NONE.

FCVSHUTMODE= Shut-in behaviour for Flow Control Valves (FCVs). An FCV can be
specified with a table of fixed bean areas, and a flowrate limit. PIPESIM
enforces the flowrate limit by selecting the largest area that results in a
flowrate at or below the limit. However, it may happen that the smallest
bean area in the table is too large to enforce the limit. In this case the
value specified on this subcode is used to select a mode of behaviour.
Can be set to OPEN, SHUT, or EXACT, whose meanings are:

OPEN: The smallest non-zero bean area is used, so the flowrate will
exceed the specified limit.

SHUT: The valve will be set to the closed position, so the flowrate will be
zero.

EXACT: The flowrate will be set to the limit, and the required bean area
will be calculated and reported.

RETAINHEEL= Can be set to YES or NO. If YES, selects the Multiple Completion
algorithm for the well's iterative solution, regardless of the number of
completions the well may contain. The default is NO.

IFC= An override on the state of the IFC= subcode on the HEAT statement.
Can be set to INPUT or CALC; if set to CALC, this overrides any
subsequent HEAT statement that may set it to INPUT.

SLUGREGIME= Specifies the Flow Regimes that allow slug length calculations.

NOSLUGREGIME= Specifies the Flow Regimes that do not allow slug length calculations.

MINSEGLEN= The minimum segment length to be used when pipe sections are
subdiivided. (ft or m).

OPPOINTS= Controls the explicit generation of Operating Points in the Nodal Analysis
operation. Can be set to YES, to generate them, or NO, to omit them.
This subcode is also available on the NAPLOT (p.740) statement; it is
duplicated here so that it can be used without the additional effects that
occur when NAPLOT is used.

DOWNHILLPREC= Downhill Pressure Recovery method. When a two-phase fluid flows in a

pipe that is angled downhill, the liquid phase usually flows faster than the

Keyword index
611
PIPESIM User Guide

gas. Sometimes the liquid flows downhill at its terminal, or critical,

velocity, whereby its speed is limited by friction against the pipe walls, and
there is no net pressure gain due to the elevation change. This is often
called slack flow conditions. The multiphase flow correlations will not
usually model slack flow, so this keyword allows a choice of methods for
simulating how pressure recovery is modelled in downhill pipe sections,
and will affect the value for Elevation Pressure gradient:

CORR or NORMAL: Downhill pressure recovery is modelled by the

selected multiphase flow correlation. The exact calculations performed
will depend on the selected correlation. Typically, they use some mixture
fluid density based on the calculated liquid holdup. This is the default
method.

GAS: Downhill pressure recovery is calculated using the density of the

gas phase alone. This option assumes the liquid will segregate into a
stream at the bottom of the pipe and flow at its terminal velocity, similar to
open-channell flow. N.B. This option is applied only when the in-situ liquid
volume fraction is less than 0.8; at higher values, the CORR method is
used.

NONE: Downhill Pressure Recovery is disabled. The elevation pressure

gradient is set to zero in downhill pipe sections.

SSMETHOD= Segment Solution Method. The pipe and tubing objects (for example,
flowlines, risers, tubing strings, and distributed completions) are divided
into computational elements called segments. Each segment is simulated
one after another in a so-called marching algorithm. This subcode allows
a choice of segment length selection and solution method. (Note: To
activate this subcode requires a specific debug flag. To get the debug
flag, please contact Schlumberger.) Currently, the following choices are
available:

1: This is the Original method, which uses predefined, fixed segment

lengths. The segment length is defined using the SEGMENTS= and
MAXSEGLEN= keywords. (See above.) All pressure drop, heat transfer,
and fluid inflow calculations are based on this segment length. If the
segment convergence algorithm fails, then the entire section (NB, not just
the current segment) is subdivided into double the previous number of
segments and the calculation is restarted from the start of the section.

2: This is the Gradient method, which uses values of gradients to select a

suitable segment length at the position in the system being simulated.
The gradients considered are Pressure, Temperature, Enthalpy, and
Reservoir Fluid Inflow. These are expressed as a change in the quantity
per unit length of pipe. For example, pressure gradient is expressed as
psi/ft or bar/m, temperature gradient is expressed as F/ft or C/m, and so
on. Each gradient is evaluated at the segment boundaries. For each
gradient, a user-specifyable tolerance exists which, when divided by the

Keyword index
612
PIPESIM User Guide

gradient, yields a segment length. The minimum of these segment lengths

is used as the length of the next segment in the simulation. (For reasons
of backwards-compatability, the values of SEGMENTS= and
MAXSEGLEN= keywords are also honoured in this method.) If the
segment convergence algorithm fails, the segment length is halved and
the calculation is restarted. This is known as a "chop". NB, unlike the
original method, the chop applies only to the current segment and not to
the entire section.

DPRTOL= Delta Pressure Relative Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a unitless ratio of pressure expressed as (PIN-POUT)/
PIN, where PIN is the segment inlet pressure, and POUT is the segment
outlet pressure. The segment length for the next segment is calculated as
DPRTOL*PIN/PGRAD, where PGRAD is the pressure gradient (DP per
length) from the previous segment. The default is 0.04. Smaller values will
result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DPATOL= Delta Pressure Absolute Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a value of Delta Pressure (DP) in units of psi or Bar. The
segment length for the next segment is calculated as DPATOL/PGRAD,
where PGRAD is the pressure gradient (DP per length) from the previous
segment. The default is 1 psi. Smaller values will result in smaller, and
therefore more, segments.

DTATOL= Delta Temperature Absolute Tolerance is a tolerance used by the

Gradient method. This is a value of Delta Temperature (DT) in units of
Farenheit or Celcius. The segment length for the next segment is
calculated as DTATOL/TGRAD, where TGRAD is the temperature
gradient (DT per length) from the previous segment. This ensures that the
temperature change across any segment is never more than DTATOL.
The default is 5 F. Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore
more, segments.

DHATOL= Delta Enhtalpy Absolute Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a value of Delta Enthalpy in units of BTU/lb or KJ/Kg. The
segment length for the next segment is calculated as DHATOL/HGRAD,
where HGRAD is the enthalpy gradient (DH per length) from the previous
segment. This ensures that the enthalpy change across any segment is
never more than DHATOL. The default is 10 btu/lb. Smaller values will
result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DPGTOL= Delta Pressure Gradient Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a unitless ratio of pressure gradients that is used to
validate the results of the current segment's DP calculation. The pressure
gradient in the current segment is compared to the previous segment. If
the difference is greater than this tolerance, the segment is "chopped", or
divided into two smaller segments. This allows the algorithm to identify
and recover from a pressure gradient discontinuity, such as what is often

Keyword index
613
PIPESIM User Guide

encountered in multiphase flow correlations. The default value is 0.05.

Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DTGTOL= Delta Temperature Gradient Tolerance is a tolerance used by the

Gradient method. This is a unitless ratio of temperature gradients that is
used to validate the results of the current segment's DT calculation. The
temperature gradient in the current segment is compared to the previous
segment. If the difference is greater than this tolerance, the segment is
"chopped", or divided into two smaller segments. This allows the
algorithm to identify and recover from a temperature gradient
discontinuity, such as what is caused step-changes in ambient
temperature. The default value is 0.25. Smaller values will result in
smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DQGTOL= Delta Flowrate Gradient Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a unitless ratio of flowrates and/or flowrate gradients. It is
relevant only in distributed completions and horizontal wells. It is used in
the following ways:

• The segment length for the next segment is calculated as DQGTOL/

QGRAD. QGRAD is the inflow rate gradient that is calculated from
QI/QP/Segl, where QI is segment inflow rate (the rate entering the
segment from the reservoir), QP is segment production rate (the rate
entering at the segment inlet), and Segl is segment length. These
values are all from the previous segment. This ensures the flowrate
change across any segment, when expressed as a ratio, is never
more than DQATOL.
• Used to validate the results of the current segment's Delta Flowrate
(DQ) calculation. The inflow gradient in the current segment is
compared to the previous segment. If the difference is greater than
this tolerance, then the segment is "chopped", or divided into two
smaller segments. This allows the algorithm to identify and recover
from an inflow gradient discontinuity, such as what is caused by step-
changes in reservoir properties ( for example, pressure, and step-
changes in reservoir fluid properties.)
The default value is 0.2 .Smaller values will result in smaller, and
therefore more, segments.

MEMCHOPFACTOR= Memory Chop factor is a factor used by the Gradient method. When a
previous segment length was set as a result of a "chop" (see above), it is
desirable to restrict the speed at which subsequent segments are allowed
to grow. The maximum segment length for the current segment is limited
to the length of the previous segment multiplied by this factor. The default
value is 2.

5.3.7 RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data

Main-code: RATE

Keyword index
614
PIPESIM User Guide

RATE allows flow rate to be defined for all fluid types.

For both Blackoil and Compositional fluids, a flow rate may be defined in volumetric terms using
the GAS= or LIQ= subcodes, or in mass terms using MASS=. A mass rate refers to the total
stream without regard for which phases may exist. A volumetric rate refers only to the phase it
specifies, and is always measured at stock-tank conditions. The other phase may or may not be
present at stock-tank conditions, depending on the fluid definition, but it is never included in the
specified flowrate.
Stock tank conditions are 1.013 bara and 15.6 oC, or 14.696 psia and 60 oF.

LIQ= Gross liquid flow rate at stock tank conditions (sm 3/d or STB/D). The liquid phase
includes both hydrocarbon and aqueous phases (oil and water), but not gas.

GAS= Gas flow rate at stock tank conditions (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d).

MASS= The total mass flow rate (kg/s or lb/s). Note this defines the mass flow rate of the
total stream, in contrast to LIQ= and GAS=, which defines a flow rate for one
phase only.

MULTIPLIER= Factor to mix or split a previously defined flow rate by a fixed ratio. Supplied value
must be greater than zero. Valid only within the system profile, that is after the
PROFILE or the first NODE statement.

ADDLIQ= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank liquid flow rate. Supplied
value may be greater or less than zero. (sm 3/d or STB/D). Valid only within the
system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement. See also
the INJFLUID. (p.691) statement.

ADDGAS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank gas flow rate. Supplied
value may be greater or less than zero. (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d). Valid only within
the system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See
also the INJFLUID and INJGAS. (p.691) statements.

ADDMASS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined total mass flow rate. Supplied value
may be greater or less than zero. (kg/s or lb/s). Valid only within the system
profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See also the
INJFLUID. (p.691) statement.

ADDER= Quantity to be added to a previously defined flow rate (may be greater or less than
zero). Note The units of ADDER= are inferred from the type of flowrate as
originally defined, viz. Gas, Liquid or Mass, and the system of unit conversions
currently in force, that is Engineering or SI. ). Valid only within the system profile,
that is after the PROFILE or first NODE statement.

WCUT= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

GWR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

WGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

Keyword index
615
PIPESIM User Guide

GLR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

GOR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

LGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

OGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split on the BLACKOIL statement, using
the subcodes: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=, or LGR=, and WCUT=, WGR= or GWR=. For historical
reasons these subcodes are also available on the RATE statement. However, since RATE applies
to all types of fluid (Compositional and Steam in addition to Blackoil), it is natural to assume that
GLR= and so on behave similarly. Alas they do not, they apply to black oil fluids only. You are
strongly encouraged to refrain from using these subcodes on RATE; use them on the BLACKOIL
or COMPOSITION. (p.733) statement instead.

5.3.8 ITERN Iteration Data (Optional)

Allows the System Outlet Pressure to be specified.
Because PIPESIM performs a heat balance simultaneously with the pressure loss calculations, it is
necessary for the calculation procedure to begin at the pipeline source and proceed in the direction
of flow. A problem with a fixed delivery pressure therefore requires an iterative solution. The
program will iterate on the user's specified Control variable, which can be System Inlet Pressure,
Flow Rate, or a user-defined variable, as specified with the TYPE subcode.
The ITERN main-code should appear in the initial part of the input file, i.e. before the PROFILE or
NODE statements.
Main-code: ITERN

POUT= The required System Outlet Pressure (psia or Bara).

TYPE= Specifies the identity of the Control variable ('guess') to be changed ('guessed') in
order to match the specified outlet pressure. May be one of:

PRESSURE or IPRESSURE: The system inlet pressure.

GFLOW: The system gas flow rate.

LFLOW: The system liquid flow rate.

MFLOW: The system mass flow rate.

PGEN+: A User-specified variable, as defined with the special symbol ?XITERN.

See note 1 below. Outlet pressure is expected to increase as ?XITERN
increases.

PGEN-: A User-specified variable, as defined with the special symbol ?XITERN.

See note 1 below. Outlet pressure is expected to decrease as ?XITERN
increases.

Keyword index
616
PIPESIM User Guide

XEST= Initial Estimate of the Control Variable ('guess') to be changed ('guessed') in

order to match the specified outlet pressure. The units for this is dependent on
the TYPE. For example: = Estimated inlet pressure (bara or psia) if TYPE=PRES.
= Estimated mass flow rate (kg/s or lb/s) if TYPE=MFLOW. = Estimated gas flow
rate (kg/s or lb/s) if TYPE=GFLOW.= Estimated liquid flow rate (kg/s or lb/s) if
TYPE=LFLOW

PTOL= Allows control over the Outlet Pressure Tolerance. The program will iterate until
the difference between the calculated outlet pressure and the pressure specified
in the POUT sub-code is less than outlet pressure tolerance. The user can
specify the required tolerance, as a percentage, by use of the PTOL sub-code. If
PTOL is not specified, the program will use a value of 1% or 1 psi, whichever is
the smaller.

XTOL= Allows control over the Control Variable ('guess') Tolerance. This is important if
the system being simulated is prone to becoming 'ill-conditioned' (i.e., when a
small change in guess results in a disproportionately large change in outlet
pressure). Under such conditions it may take the iterative procedure many more
iterations than usual to calculate a solution to within the outlet pressure tolerance
(if it can manage it at all). Also, the user may not be interested in such accuracy,
because for example, s/he may only be able to control the guess to within fairly
coarse limits. XTOL exists to stop the program performing numerous
unnecessarry iterations, by terminating the iterative procedure when two
successive guesses fall within the specified tolerance. The user can control the
value of this tolerance, as a percentage, with the XTOL sub-code. The default
value for XTOL is 1.0E-4 %.

XMIN= Specifies a lower bound for the Control variable. If the iterative procedure
attempts to guess below this limit, the guess will be reset to the limit. If this shows
the required answer lies below the limit, the iterative procedure will terminate with
a suitable diagnostic, and case output will be written.

XMAX= Specifies an upper bound for the Control variable. If the iterative procedure
attempts to guess above this limit, the guess will be reset to the limit. If this
shows the required answer lies above the limit, the iterative procedure will
terminate with a suitable diagnostic, and case output will be written.

LIMIT= Specifies the maximum allowed number of iterations. The default value is 40 and
the maximum is 100. If a solution has not been obtained within this number of
iterations, the iterative procedure will be terminated, and results printed for this
case with the current (i.e. last guessed) value of input pressure or flow rate.

SCREEN Gives node by node output on the user's terminal for each iteration. If this sub-
code is omitted, the only output that appears on the terminal during the iteration
procedure is one line for each iteration, summarizing the iteration progress so far.
Note this sub-code has no effect if PIPESIM is running in batch mode.

OPWI Enables OPWI ("Output Printing While Iterating") mode. Node-by-node output for
the system profile is written to the output files during every iteration. Normally,

Keyword index
617
PIPESIM User Guide

this output would be suppressed until the iterative procedure has converged. This
is useful for debugging the iterative procedure.

LASTANSWER Using this sub-code, the guess from the previous case is used as an estimate for
the next case. Thus the value which you have set for XEST will only be used in
the first case.

CFCMODE= Controls the iteration routine's interaction with a system containing a Choke in
critical flow. Can be set to ON or OFF, default is ON. In the ON state, a choke in
critical flow will terminate the iterative procedure early. Thus is usually beneficial,
since the converged solution is likely to require the choke to be in critical flow.
However when TYPE=PGEN, and the Control variable is applied downstream of
the choke, an early iterative termination will prevent correct convergence, so the
OFF state is preferable.

CFCSOLN= Controls the post-convergence behavior when a case has converged with a
choke in critical flow. Can be set to ON or OFF, default ON. In the ON state, a
further round of iteration is performed, to converge on the pressure downstream
of the choke that allows the specified system outlet pressure to be achieved. In
the OFF state, this further round is omitted, thus the system outlet pressure will
be higher that the one specified.

TITLE= Specifies the title to be used for the Control variable in the system and profile plot
files.
TITLE keyword is working only when TYPE = PGEN+ or PGEN-.

Note: When TYPE=PGEN+ or PGEN- is used, the iterations will guess the value of a user-defined
variable in order to achieve the specified outlet pressure. The variable is called ?XITERN, and the
user must arrange that this name appears at a suitable point in the input file as the value of a
subcode that will have an effect on the system outlet pressure. This is how PIPESIM implements
its user variable (p.211) feature. PGEN is an acronym for "Pseudo-GENeral iterative mode" (it is
not truly general since it converges only on outlet pressure).

5.3.9 INLET System Inlet Data

Main-code: INLET
The INLET statement is optional. It is useful if the system contains no reservoir completions, and is
typically used to define a Generic Source at the start of a surface pipeline model. If supplied, must
appear before the PROFILE or first NODE statement.

TEMPERATURE= The temperature of the fluid entering the system at the System inlet. (oC or
oF). If omitted, the inlet fluid is assumed to enter the system at the ambient

temperature as defined on the first NODE statement.

PRESSURE= The System inlet pressure (bara or psia). Not required if the inlet pressure is
to be determined using the iteration option (see the ITERN main-code), or if
the reservoir pressure is supplied with a well inflow performance option .

Keyword index
618
PIPESIM User Guide

ENTHALPY= or H= As an alternative to temperature, the inlet fluid enthalpy can be supplied;

PIPESIM will then calculate its temperature. (btu/lb or Kj/kg)

QUALITY= As an alternative to Temperature or Enthalpy, and only if the fluid is specified

as Steam, the inlet steam quality can be supplied. Quality is the steam mass
fraction vapour: must be in the range 0 to 1.

5.3.10 PRINT Output Printing Options (Optional)

Main-code: PRINT
PIPESIM offers a wide choice as to the amount of printed output. The PRINT maincode controls
most of the available options, which can be divided into 4 behavioral categories:
Per-case Output pages
Subcodes such as PRIMARY and AUXILIARY control the production of complete pages
which are repeated for as many cases as desired (as specified on CASES=). Pages are
typically 132 characters wide and usually have (at least) one line for every node in the
system, or otherwise have about 60 lines of relevant data. These page selections should
be made at the start of the job or between cases.
Attributes
Subcodes such as SEC and TITLES affect the way data appears on output pages, e.g. by
adding something to an existing page or changing the representation of the data on the
page. Page attributes are best selected at the start of the job and not changed thereafter.
Point reports
Subcodes such as SPOT and PHASE SPLIT control the production of localized reports
dedicated to an aspect of the system at a chosen position, or to a piece of equipment
within it. Reports are requested by supplying the PRINT statement, with the required
subcode, at the position within the system profile where the information is required. They
are written to one of the selected output pages (as specified on REPORTS=) and appear
for as many cases, and as many positions, as desired.
One-off Output pages
Subcodes such as SYNTAX, ECHO and NARESULT control the production of single page
reports that appear only once per job. These page selections should be made at the start
of the job.
Except where noted, the options can appear without a value, in which state a value of ON will be
assumed. Values of OFF or ON can be provided if desired

Per-case output page options

The per-case output page options are as follows:

Default

PRIMARY The primary output page consists of a line for each node, containing ON
node distance and elevation, pipe angle, fluid pressure, temperature

Keyword index
619
PIPESIM User Guide

and mean velocity, friction and elevation pressure drop, phase

flowrates, phase densities, and Flow Regime pattern.

AUXILIARY The Auxiliary output page consists of a line for each node, containing ON
node distance and elevation, , phase superficial velocities, mass flow
rates and viscosities, overall Reynolds number, Liquid volume fraction,
Liquid Holdup fraction, Flowing Liquid Watercut, total enthalpy, Erosion
velocity, Erosion rate, Corrosion rate, Hydrate sub-cooling Delta
Temperature, Liquid loading Velocity ratio, and segment iteration
counters. For compositional fluids 3 additional columns hold table
interpolation diagnostics.

HORWELL The Horizontal Well output page consists of a line for each node, OFF
containing: node distance and elevation; Reservoir and Wellbore
Pressure; Reservoir, Inflow, and Wellbore temperature; Inflow Joule-
Thomson Coefficient; Distributed Productivity Index; Wellbore flowrate;
Specific inflow (i.e., flowrate between wellbore and reservoir, per unit
length); Friction Gradient; Reservoir and Wellbore GLR and Watercut;
and Liquid Viscosities for Reservoir, Inflow and Wellbore. The Horwell
output is restricted to the portion of the system that is defined to be a
distributed completion (see the COMPLETION (p.647) statement).

FLUID The Input Fluid data page shows the definition of the Blackoil or ON
Compositional fluids used as input to the case (fluid definitions resulting
from mixing or separation can be obtained with the SPOT=FLUIDSPEC
subcode, see below). A compositional fluid is specified mostly by its
component list and their respective molar flowrates, along with other
data controlling the attributes of the selected PVT package and table
interpolation control data. A blackoil fluid is specified by a number of
correlation choices and tunable values. This page also specifies fluid
input flowrates.

PROFILE The profile and Flow Correlations output page consists of a line for ON
each node, containing node distance and elevation, pipe section
length, cumulative length, ambient temperature, input U-value, node
TVD and MD, and fluid definition detail. In addition the selected
Horizontal, Vertical, and Single Phase flow correlation choices will be
echoed, along with pertinent options currently in force.

ITERATION The case-level iteration progress log page. This page will only appear if ON
the case is iterative, i.e. the Outlet Pressure has been specified. Data is
one line per iteration plus information on how each iteration's guess is
computed. Errors encountered during iteration will also appear on this
page.

INFLOW Details of the selected Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) appear OFF
on this page. Data includes relevant input values and all derived or
computed values and answers. If the model contains multiple
completions, each will have its own section on this page.

Keyword index
620
PIPESIM User Guide

HINPUT The heat Transfer Input data page has a line for each node showing OFF
the input data for detailed heat transfer calculations across multiple
layers of pipe and coatings. Values are: node distance, wax pipe and
coatings thicknesses, wax pipe and coatings conductivities, burial
depth, ambient fluid velocity, and ambient temperature.

HOUTPUT The Heat Transfer Output page has a line for each node showing the OFF
results of heat transfer calculations. Values are: Node distance, fluid
temperature and enthalpy, Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient (HTC),
Fluid film HTC, wax pipe and coatings HTCs, soil/ambient HTC, and
text description of burial configuration. (All HTCs are referenced to the
Pipe (Note: not coatings) outside diameter, this can be changed with
the HTCRD= subcode of HEAT (p.706) ).

SLUG The Slug output page has a line for every node showing the results of OFF
slugging calculations. Values are: node distance and elevation, mean
slug length and frequency, 1 in a thousand slug length and frequency,
1 in a hundred slug length and frequency, 1 in ten slug length and
frequency, PI-SS, and flow regime pattern.

GLINPUT The gas Lift Input data page has a line for every gas lift valve in the OFF
system, showing the input data supplied for it.

Note: The lines in this page appear in order of depth from the
wellhead, i.e. shallowest at the top of the page, deepest at the bottom;
this is the opposite to the direction of fluid flow in a gas lifted well, so
this page will usually be in reverse order when compared with all other
pages.

Values are: Valve TVD and MD, valve port diameter, Cv, test rack
pressure, Ap/Ab, Throttling factor, valve type, and valve operation
mode. (To request this page be produced in the same direction as the
rest of the output pages specify GLINPUT=*FWD). N.B. The values in
this page are only useful when MODE=SIMULATE has been specified
on a GASLIFT (p.686) statement.

GLOUTPUT The Gas Lift Output page has a line for every gas lift valve in the OFF
system, showing all calculated values for the valve. The lines are
ordered shallowest first as for the GLINPUT page (see above). Values
are: valve MD, test rack dome pressure, valve operating temperature at
depth, dome pressure at depth, casing and tubing pressure at depth,
valve opening and closing pressures, DP across valve, Orifice gas
flowrate, throttled gas flowrate, actual gas flowrate, and text description
of valve operating status. (To request this page be produced in the
same direction as the rest of the output pages specify
GLOUTPUT=*FWD). N.B. The values in this page are only useful when
MODE=SIMULATE has been specified on a GASLIFT (p.686)
statement.

Keyword index
621
PIPESIM User Guide

3PHASE For Shell clients only, this page has a line for every node showing three OFF
phase flow values as calculated by the SRTCA 3-phase flow
correlation. The 3-phase SRTCA (p.640) correlation must be the
selected multiphase flow correlation for this page to appear.

ARTSLUG For Shell clients only, this page has a line for every node showing the OFF
results of Artificial Slug calculations. The Artificial Slug SRTCA
(p.640) correlation must be the selected multiphase flow correlation
for this page to appear.

WAX this page has a line for every node showing Wax Deposition input data, OFF
calculations and results.

CUSTOM=(x,x,x) The Custom output page allows you to create your own page of output OFF
organized one node per line. Values appear in columns on the page
and are chosen from the set of Profile Plot variables. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set (p.595). An up-to-date list of the
available identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX subcode of
PLOT (p.627). Each column will be 10 characters wide plus one
space, so 11 columns will conveniently fit on a standard width page. If
desired you can specify up to 40 identifiers, but be aware this will give
an output page that is 440 characters wide.

INDATA This is a combination of PROFILE and FLUID. ON

EXTRA= The Extra output page allows installation-specific data to be printed. OFF
This subcode requires an equated value. If the value TGRAD is
provided, the result is a page containing a line for each node with
temperature Gradient information from heat transfer calculations. Other
values are installation-specific..

Attributes
The Attributes are:

Default

TITLES Print case titles on job summary output ON

SEGMENTS Print segment data. The pipe or tubing section between each node is OFF
sub-divided for computation purposes into a number of segments (as
controlled by OPTIONS SEG= (p.604) and MAXSEGLEN= (p.604) , and
the accuracy needs of the calculation at each point). With this subcode
selected, each segment will have its own line of output in all the per-case
output pages; without it, the output will be restricted to each node.

SEC Print details of pressure drops caused by Sudden Expansion and ON

Contraction. When Pipe ID changes, the junctions between the non-
matching diameters are assumed to be straight-edged, and to cause
pressure reduction due to turbulence effects. With this subcode enabled

Keyword index
622
PIPESIM User Guide

a one-line message will be written to the primary output where SEC

losses are greater than a specified threshold value (as defined with
OPTIONS SECLIM=).

CASES= Specifies the number of cases to print. This subcode requires a numeric 1
value. The selected per-case output pages will appear for as many
cases as are specified. In Nodal Analysis jobs, the value applies to both
the inflow and the outflow cases, thus the actual number of cases printed
will be double.

REPORTS= Specifies the name of the per-case output page to receive point report PRIMARY
output. Any of the per-case page names can be provided to direct the
point reports to the specified page. In addition the value DEDICATED
specifies that an additional page be created to hold them instead.

Point report subcodes

The point report subcodes must appear on a PRINT statement, positioned within the system
profile, at the position where the values are required. If multiple reports are required at any point a
separate PRINTstatement must be used for each report. Each report is written to the output page
chosen with the REPORTS= subcode above. Reports vary in length between 6 and 200 lines.
They are:

SPOT=STPROPS Fluid Stock-tank properties: phase flowrates and physical properties are
reported at stock-tank conditions, viz. 14.696 psia, 60 F.

SPOT=FLPROPS Fluid flowing properties: phase flowrates and physical properties are
reported at the current pressure and temperature

SPOT=MPFLOW Multiphase Flow values: Fluid properties, pipe dimensions, and calculated
values with particular relevance to multi-phase flow calculations. See note
1.

SPOT=SLUG Slug flow values: fluid properties and calculated values with relevance to
slug size calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=SGLV Sphere-Generated Liquid Volume values: input data and results from
SGLV calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=HTINPUT Heat Transfer Input values: fluid properties, pipe and coatings thicknesses
and conductivities etc. as used in heat transfer calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=HTOUTPUT Heat transfer output and calculated values: heat transfer coefficients,
coating layer temperatures, film coefficients and dimensionless groups.
See note 1.

SPOT=FLUIDSPEC Fluid specification values. The complete set of values that define the fluid.
A compositional fluid is specified mostly by its component list and their
respective molar flowrates, along with other data controlling the attributes
of the selected PVT package and table interpolation control data. A

Keyword index
623
PIPESIM User Guide

blackoil fluid is specified by a number of correlation choices and tunable

values.

SPOT=ACVALUES 'Accululated' values. These are values that accumulate over the length of
the system, for example total liquid holdup, total friction DP, total pipeline
volume, etc.

SPOT=SHELL Shell clients only, a report specific to the SRTCA slugging and 3-phase
flow correlation. See note 1.

SPOT=COMPLETION Distributed or multipoint completion values: reservoir inflow, drawdown,

Distributed P.I., Skin values, relevant pipe dimensions, fluid phase
flowrates and physical properties. See note 1.

USPOT=(x,x,x) Custom spot report: allows you to create a report of values of your choice.
Values are chosen from the set of Profile Plot variables. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set (p.595). An up-to-date list of the available
identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX subcode of PLOT. (p.626)

MAP Print the flow regime map at the current position. A flow regime map is
specific to each choice of multiphase flow correlation, and is affected by
fluid properties, pipe dimensions, and (critically) pipe angle. Since the map
must be requested at a node position, please note that the pipe angle (and
perhaps other dimensions) may change across the selected node. The
dimensions and angle used to generate the map are those of the
Upstream pipe section. The fluid properties used are those at the current
pressure and temperature. If the map is requested at the start of the
profile, pipe dimensions and angle are taken from the first pipe section.

PHASESPLIT Print a Phase Split report, for compositional fluids only. This lists the molar
flowrates of all components in the feed stream and in the phases that exist
at that pressure and temperature. Additional phase properties such as
density, viscosity etc. are also printed.

PRESSURE= Pressure value for use with PHASESPLIT; if provided, will be used instead
of the system current pressure. (psia or Bara)

TEMPERATURE= Temperature value for use with PHASESPLIT; if provided, will be used
instead of the system current temperature. (F or C)

PHASENV= Produce a plot file containing the Phase Envelope (and other lines) for the
current compositional fluid. Note this option produces no printed output;
instead, a plot file will be created, named with an 8-character code known
as the handle, and with an extension of .ENV. This file can be processed
by the plotting post-processor PSPLOT to display the phase envelope.

N.B., you do not need to know the name of the file to plot the phase
envelope. From the GUI, select Profile Plot, then select Series, and
choose axes of pressure and temperature. The phase envelope file(s) will
be automatically processed along with the model's profile plot data, so you

Keyword index
624
PIPESIM User Guide

should see the phase envelope and other available line(s) along with the
pipeline system's pressure-temperature traverse.

By default the phase envelope file will contain a number of lines,

depending on the phase behaviour of the fluid, the capabilities of the
selected PVT package, and the PVT feature licenses you have available.
The lines can be selected by supplying a list of line types as a multiple
value set. (p.598) Available line types are:

HYDROCARBON: the hydrocarbon phase envelope, consisting of a

bubble point line and a dew point line

CRITICALPOINT: the Hydrocarbon critical point

WATERDEW: the water dew point line

HYDRATE1: Hydrate type 1 line

HYDRATE2: Hydrate type 2 line

WATERICE: the water ice line

WAX: the wax appearance, or cloud point, line

ASPHALTENE: the asphaltene appearance line

If you do not supply a list of line types, the file will contain as many lines
as the PVT package is capable of generating for the fluid, and for which
you have a valid license.

QUALITY= Values of Quality for use with PHASENV. If present, must be equated to a
multiple value set (p.598) of quality values, each in the range 0 to 1. The
resulting plot file will contain a hydrocarbon quality line for each value.

Note: The values in this report are calculated during the simulation of a piece of pipe, and
therefore refer to the pipe segment immediately upstream of the statement's position.

One-off output pages

The One-off output pages are:

Default

NARESULT Nodal Analysis result page. Lists the pressure, temperature and ON
flowrate at the Nodal Analysis point for all cases in each inflow and
outflow curve. Will only appear in Nodal Analysis jobs.

SUMFILE Controls the generation of the summary output file. This file is named ON
from the model file's root name with an extension of .SUM, and
contains a line for each labelled node for every case that was run in
the job. Data values are: Stock-tank watercut, Stock-tank liquid flow

Keyword index
625
PIPESIM User Guide

rate, flowing free gas flow rate, pressure, temperature, friction

elevation and total pressure losses, mixture velocity, liquid holdup
fraction, liquid holdup volume, and flow regime pattern.

SUMMARY Requests that the summary file be copied to the end of the main ON
output file at the end of the job. Requires that SUMFILE be set to ON.

WAXRESULT For Shell clients only, this page has one line per case or per reporting OFF
interval showing the history of wax deposition in the system.

ECHO Writes a line-numbered copy of the input data file at the start of the ON
job. All included files will be expanded in-line, and any syntax errors
generated will appear after the line that caused them.

SYNTAX Print formatted table of valid keyword input data. This extends over OFF
about 20 pages and lists the available maincodes, subcodes, value
types they can be equated to, conversion factors, maximum and
minimum limits for numeric data, and allowable character values. This
report is generated from the engine code used to read and validate the
input data file. It is useful when up-to-date documentation is not to
hand or appears to be incorrect.

NEWINPUTDATA Writes a copy of the input data file, but with the numeric data OFF
converted to the units system specified for output (with UNITS OUT=).

5.3.11 PLOT Output Plotting Options (Optional)

Main-code: PLOT (or NOPLOT to switch off)
The PLOT statement requests the production of plot files, and controls various aspects of program
behavior with relevance to plotting. Plot files are post-processed with the BJA plotting program
PSPLOT, or your chosen plotting program (for example Microsoft EXCEL). When driven using the
PIPESIM GUI, plots will normally appear concurrently with running the engine.

CASE or PROFILE Requests the production of the Profile Plot File, which contains data that
is organized to be plotted against position in the pipeline system. For
example a pressure profile for a flowline shows pressure on the Y-axis
against total distance on the X-axis; A temperature profile shows
temperature against total distance. For a well the axes may be reversed,
and/or the Y-axis might be elevation or depth. The profile plot file will
contain many quantities that can sensibly be plotted against distance,
elevation, or total length. (They may also be plotted against one another,
with varying degrees of usefulness.) By default, each NODE (p.696) in
the system will produce a point on the plot, and each case (p.745) will
produce a separate line on the plot. The SEGMENT subcode (see below)
will increase the number of plot points on each line.

CASE= or PROFILE= As above, and if a value is provided, it specifies the data that is to appear
in the plot file. Identifiers are provided as a multiple value set (p.598). An
up-to-date list of the available identifiers can be obtained using the

Keyword index
626
PIPESIM User Guide

SYNTAX subcode (see below). If no value is supplied a default set of plot

file data will be written. If your supplied value starts with a plus sign [+],
your identifiers will be added to the default set instead of replacing it.

JOB or SYSTEM Requests the production of the System Plot File, which contains data that
is organized to be plotted against sensitivity variables. For example a job
that sensitizes on flowline ID could produce a plot of ID on the X-axis
against flowrate on the Y-axis (or ID against holdup, or flowrate against
holdup, etc...). The plot file will contain many values, and you can plot
anything against anything, with varying degrees of usefulness. Each
case will produce one point on the plot, and separate lines on the plot are
produced by combinations of sensitivity variables as specified by
MULTICASE or NAPLOT statements.

JOB= or SYSTEM= As above, and if a value is provided, it specifies the data that is to appear
in the plot file. Identifiers are provided as a multiple value set. An up-to-
date list of the available identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX
subcode (see below). If no value is supplied a default set of plot file data
will be written. If your supplied value starts with a plus sign [+], your
identifiers will be added to the default set instead of replacing it.

SEGMENT Requests that profile plot data be written for every segment. By default a
point is written only for each node, but the pipe between each node is
usually sub-divided into a number of segments for calculation purposes.
With this subcode you can plot the intermediate segment data as well.

HERE= Requests that specified profile plot variables be added to the existing
system plot file at the current profile position. This can be used for
example to obtain fluid properties at any point, so they can be plotted
against sensitivity variables. This subcode is only valid within the system
profile. Identifiers are provided as a multiple value set (p.598). chosen
from the profile plot variables list (see SYNTAX below).

SYNTAX Will create a list (in the standard output file) in two columns of available
plot file variables and their identifiers (for example A, B, Y2, etc.) These
identifiers can be provided to the JOB=, CASE= or HERE= subcodes
(see above), and to SPOT= and CUSTOM= subcodes of PRINT (p.619).

EQUIPJOB= Controls the addition of equipment plot variables to the system plot file.
Each item of equipment (for example, pumps, chokes, heaters, and so
on) placed in the profile will, by default, result in additional plot variables
being added to the system plot file. For each equipment item, between 6
and 20 additional variables will be added, the exact number and
selection being specific to the equipment concerned. Can be set to ON or
OFF, default ON.

PVTDATA= Presence of this subcode triggers production of a fluid calibration plot file,
similar to that produced when one of the PLOT buttons in the Black oil
dialog advanced calibration tab is pressed. If a value is provided it must
be a multiple value set of identifiers specifying the fluid properties to be

Keyword index
627
PIPESIM User Guide

written to the plot file. The file created is named from the model or branch
root file name with an extension of .PEX.

FORMAT= The overall textual layout of the plot files. Can be set to:

BJA: Write the plot files in BJA (i.e., original PIPESIM) format. This is the
default option. BJA format plot files are composed of printable ASCII
characters, arranged in lines of less than 200 columns. Header
information is present at the start of the file. This is the option to use if
you intend to read the file with PSPLOT.

LOTUS: Write the plot files in LOTUS '.PRN' file format. Files will be
named with the extension .PRN. The Lotus 123 spreadsheet program will
recognize .PRN files and will often read them without further user
intervention.

NEUTRAL: Write the plot files in NEUTRAL format. NEUTRAL format

consists entirely of lines of numeric data arranged in columns. No header
information is written.

CSV: Write plot files in Comma Separated Value format. Files will be
named with the extension .CSV. The EXCEL spreadsheet program will
recognize .CSV files and will usually read them without further user
intervention.

PACKEDCSV: As for CSV above, but the data is written in a compressed

form that occupies less space, thus using less disk space; however, it
takes more run-time to produce.

GOAL: Write files in GOAL-compatible format. This is a combination of

revision B (see below) and BJA.

XYJOB= For the System plot file, specifies the identifiers to be used as the X and
Y axes when the plotfile is first opened by PSPLOT. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set.

XYCASE= For the Profile plot file, specifies the identifiers to be used as the X and Y
axes when the plotfile is first opened by PSPLOT. Identifiers are provided
as a multiple value set.

VERSION= or Specifies the revision standard that the plot file is to be written to
REVISION= conform to. May be set to B or C, whose meanings are:

B: Revision B plot files conform to an older standard that contains some

fixed-format data and hence is not forward compatible. Some older
programs that read plot files, notably GOAL, can only process revision B
plot files.

C: Revision C plot files contain additional information, and are written

using textual Tags at the start of every line. This allows a measure of
forward compatibility, thus additional features may be present in the file,

Keyword index
628
PIPESIM User Guide

and these can be silently ignored by an older reading program, without

causing an error.

COMPOSITIONS= Controls the addition of composition records to the system plot file.
Composition records specify the fluid definition at the system outlet, and
are important in .PWH files created for use in PIPESIM.net's Wells Off-
line mode. With composition records present, a PWH file can be used to
replace a well definition in a network run, resulting in considerable
speedup of the network solution. Can be set to YEs (the default) or NO.

CASEFILENAME= or Specifies the name of the profile plot file. By default this will be created at
PROFILEFILENAME= run-time from the root name of the branch or model input file name, with
an extension of .PLC.

JOBFILENAME= or Specifies the name of the system plot file. By default this will be created
SYSTEMFILENAME= at run-time from the root name of the branch or model input file name,
with an extension of .PLT.

PVTFILENAME= Specifies the name of the Fluid calibration plot file produced with the
PVTDATA= subcode. By default this will be created at run-time from the
root name of the branch or model input file name, with an extension
of .PEX.

ALHANATI= Controls the calculation of Alhanati gas lift Instability criteria. The
Alhanati criteria are required by GOAL, so production of GOAL-format
files will enable this option. If it is enabled, but some of the data it
requires is missing, warning messages will be produced: these will list
the nature of the required missing data. This subcode allows the
calculation to be controlled explicitly, thus the messages can be
suppressed if the calculation is not required. Can be set to YES or NO,
default being dependent on model input data.

A PLOT statement should appear before the first NODE card in a case, to specify the required
SYSTEM and PROFILE plot options. Additional PLOT HERE statements can appear anywhere in
the profile.

5.3.12 NOPRINT Output Print Suppression Options (Optional)

Main-code: NOPRINT
The NOPRINT card has the opposite effect to PRINT (p.619) and suppresses printing of the
specified data. The same sub-codes as specified under PRINT are valid (with the exception of
MAP). This card is often used to suppress output in the second and subsequent cases of a job.

5.3.13 BEGIN , END - Block delimiters

Main-codes: BEGIN, END
The BEGIN and END statements delimit a block of one or more further statements that collectively
define an entity, and give it a name which can be referred to later. There are two types of entity

Keyword index
629
PIPESIM User Guide

that can be defined, a CURVE, or a FLUID. The input file can contain as many BEGIN..END blocks
as are needed to define as many fluids or curves as desired.

FLUID Specifies that the block defines a fluid. A Blackoil or Compositional fluid can be
specified with as many delimited statements as are necessary, and the resulting fluid
can be referred to on subsequent main-codes (such as . LAYER, INJGAS, INJFLUID,
GASLIFT, BLACKOIL, COMPOSITION) to specify the injected or reservoir layer fluids

CURVE Specifies that the block defines a curve. Curve definitions are used in 2 situations:
Inflow performance : a reservoir or layer can be characterized by a curve of Bottom hole
pressure against flowrate. Also, variation of GLR and Watercut can be specified as a
coning relationship. Pumps and compressors: these devices can be specified with
curves of flowrate against head, power and efficiency

NAME The name of the entity being defined.

INHERIT Optional, for FLUID blocks only. Controls inheritance of black oil fluid properties from
the 'current' fluid. By default, each new fluid starts off with nothing defined. However the
fluid already defined and currently in use can he inherited as the basis for a new fluid if
desired. This is useful in legacy .PSM files which define only one black oil fluid and do
not give it a name, and when additional fluids are being defined in additional input files.
(p.600)

Example
The subcodes can appear on either maincode. Blocks cannot be nested, but it is possible to refer
to an earlier block when defining a subsequent block.
For example:

begin fluid name=oil1

BLACKOIL
PROP API = 33 GASSG=0.65 PSAT=4000 TSAT=250
GSAT=320
LVIS T1=250 VIS1=0.6 T2=60 VIS2=20
RATE GOR=320 WCUT=30
end fluid

begin
BLACKOIL
PROP API = 45 GASSG=0.6 PSAT=3770 TSAT=240
GSAT=350
LVIS T1=250 VIS1=0.63 T2=60 VIS2=22
RATE GOR=300 WCUT=10
end fluid name=oil2

begin fluid name=oil3

BLACKOIL USE = oil1
RATE GOR=600 WCUT=12
end

BLACKOIL use = oil2

Keyword index
630
PIPESIM User Guide

5.3.14 PUSH - Remote Action Editing (optional)

The PUSH statement is provided primarily to allow other computer programs to exert control over a
PIPESIM engine run, without the need to modify an existing input file. For a human, almost
everything that is possible with the PUSH statement can be accomplished far more easily by
editing the main input ('.psm') file with a text editor. However, designing a computer program to
reliably interpret and correctly modify a .PSM file without human help is surprisingly difficult. PUSH
is best viewed a replacement for a text editor and a human. Nevertheless, humans can sometimes
find PUSH statements useful as an alternative way to organize input data. (Beware however that
a .psm file containing PUSH statements may not behave as expected if it is itself the subject of
control by another program using PUSH.)
The PUSH statements are generally supplied in an additional input file (p.600) but this is not a
requirement.
PUSH allows an editing action (the action ) to be performed on a subsequent statement (the
target). The target is specified by its maincode and label The action can be: the addition of extra
text on the end of the target statement; addition of an extra statement before or after the target; or
the removal of the target statement.
Main-code: PUSH

MAINCODE= Required: Specifies the target maincode.

LABEL= or Specifies the label of the target statement. Serves to distinguish the required
OBJECT= target statement when multiple statements having the same maincode are
present. To specify that the target has no label (and thus prevent an earlier
statement that does have a label from being the target), supply
LABEL=*NONE.

TEXT= Text to be appended to the target statement. The text should be enclosed in
quotes since it will usually contain spaces, and equated pairs of keywords and
values. The supplied text must conform to the syntax necessary for the target
maincode, otherwise a syntax error will occur and processing will terminate.

ETEXT= Exclusive text to be appended to the target statement. When 2 or more PUSH
operations append text to the same target, the appended text will normally
grow as each push is actioned; however if ETEXT= is specified the current text
will replace any existing text resulting from earlier push(es).

LINE= OR Text to be added as a separate line after the target statement.

LINEAFTER=

LINEBEFORE= Text to be added as a separate line before the target statement.

REMOVE Results in the target statement being removed from the input. (This is actually
achieved by transforming it into a comment by prepending the comment
character '!'.)

ERROR= Sets the severity of the action when errors occur. The most common error is
that the position or target was not found, so the action did not occur. May be
set to one of the following:

Keyword index
631
PIPESIM User Guide

FATAL: Errors will be fatal, i.e. processing will terminate. A diagnostic

message will be issued to the screen and the output file. This is the default
behavior.

WARNING: Errors will result in a diagnostic message on the output file and a
message box on the screen, but processing will continue.

NOTE: Errors will result in a diagnostic message on the output file, processing
will continue.

SILENT: Errors will be silently ignored.

GLOBAL Specifies that this push statement is to be applied to all matching statements.
If GLOBAL is not specified, the first statement that matches the specified
maincode and label will be the only target.

Notes:
• Multiple PUSH statements may be present in the input file or additional files.
• If many PUSHes specify the same target, the order in which the actions occur is the order in
which they appear in the file. However the result may turn out to be reversed from that expected
by the user. For example, if 2 pushes each add a line after the same target (the LINE=
subcode), the second push will insert its new line immediately after the target thus displacing
the one added by the first push. For the TEXT= and LINEBEFORE= subcodes this does not
cause a problem, because the definition of the action corresponds to what the user expects. If
one push specifies REMOVE=, then all subsequent pushes will not find the target, so position
this push last.
• The text added with TEXT=, LINE= etc can be any text valid for the specified position in the file.
Multiple statements can be provided by separating them with a semicolon (':'). Remember to
enclose the text in quotes ('"') or apostrophes ('''). If the text you are adding itself contains
quotes , enclose it in apostrophes, and vice-versa.
• The subcodes TEXT=, ETEXT=, LINE=, LINEBOFORE= and REMOVE are mutually exclusive.
• Any statement that has a label starting with an exclamation point ('!') will be excluded from
being selected as a PUSH target. This is useful to prevent a line that was previously inserted
with one push from being modified or removed by a subsequent push.

5.3.15 PLOTFILEDATA
Main-code: PLOTFILEDATA

5.3.16 EXECUTE - deferred execution of a statement

Main-code: EXECUTE
The EXECUTE statement allows some other statement to be positioned within the system profile,
to be executed during system simulation. Normally, any statement in the profile is processed by the
input processor, and is used to build the system model. The system model consists of a set of

Keyword index
632
PIPESIM User Guide

global values, (for example fluid properties, options, inlet pressure, and so on.) and a set of
connected equipment items (for example pipes, pumps, chokes, flowlines, and so on). When the
system model is simulated, the global values cannot normally be changed, but use of the
EXECUTE statement makes some values available for control.
EXECUTE has no subcodes: instead, any text supplied on it will be stored, and interpreted as a
statement by the input processor when the system is simulated.
The EXECUTE statement should appear within the profile, that is after the PROFILE statement.

EXECUTE text comprising an otherwise complete and valid statement

5.3.17 USERDLL - Equipment

The API for the inclusion of user-defined 32-bit equipment DLL's is provided by Schlumberger.
See User Equipment DLL Case Study - User Pump
Main-code: USERDLL

FILENAME= The name of the DLL.

EPNAME= The entry point of the DLL - the actual name of the routine as exported
from the DLL

PSNAME= The internal PIPESIM name of the routine. The psname's must be unique
- the user should check that other DLLs specified in the userdll.dat file
(located in C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\data for a standard
installation of PIPESIM - look for ep_ident) do not use the same
psname's.

LINKTYPE= 24 The DLL linkage type. Note that it must be 24

EPTYPE= The type entry point for the DLL. Note that it must be equipment to
EQUIPMENT distinguish it from flow correlations.

TITLE= The title text describing the DLL.

OPTIONS= The string that will be sent as the first argument to the routine. (This is a
global option, perhaps specified by the author of the DLL).

SDESCRIPTION=

LDESCRIPTION=

5.4 FLOW CORRELATION DATA

VCORR (p.636) Vertical Flow Correlation Options
HCORR (p.640) Horizontal Flow Correlation Options
Single Phase Flow Options (p.643)
User Defined DLL (p.645)

Keyword index
633
PIPESIM User Guide

5.4.1 CORROSION
Maincode: CORROSION
Subcodes:
This maincode allows corrosion rate to be calculated.
METHOD= or Specifies the correlation to be used. Choices are:
MODEL=

DEWAARD Uses the de Waard model.

NONE disables corrosion calculations

PHACT= Optional: Specifies the actual pH of the fluid system. If not

supplied the value will be calculated internally.

CC= or The multiplier Cc to correct for inhibitor efficiency or to match

EFFICIENCY= field data

5.4.2 EROSION Erosion Rate and Velocity (Optional)

Maincode: EROSION
This maincode allows erosion rate and erosional velocity to be calculated.
METHOD= Specifies the correlation method to be used. Available methods are:

API14E: The API 14 E method. This calculates erosional velocity assuming

solids-free production. Erosion rate is not calculated. The only other
subcode this method recognizes is K=, all others are ignored

SALAMA The SALAMA 2000 method.

K= or KEROS= The desired constant in the API 14 E equation. Default value is 100 in
engineering units. A value of 100 specified when SI units are being used
will be in SI units: this translates to approximately 82 in engineering units.
The value may be qualified with the units descriptor 'ENG' or 'SI' to specify
which units system to use when interpreting it.

H= or EROSRATE= The acceptable erosion rate. Used to calculate erosional velocity. Units are
in/1e3/year or mm/year, default 0.1 mm/year.

SANDRATIO= The rate of sand production, specified as a ratio with liquid rate. Units are
Parts Per Million , by volume, against stock-tank liquid rate. (The
equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained
from the supplied volume ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand
density, 2650 kg/m3.) If sand production ratio is zero, erosion rate will not
be calculated

W= or SANDRATE= The absolute rate of sand production, kg/day or lb/day. Use of this subcode
is not recommended unless the model also fixes the system flowrate. Sand

Keyword index
634
PIPESIM User Guide

production rate is better specified as a ratio with liquid rate, using the
SANDRATIO= subcode (see above).

SM= or S= This is the Geometry constant Sm in the Salama method, default 5.5.

CE= or Multiplier to match field data, default 1.

EFFICIENCY=

D= or SANDSIZE= The mean size of the sand grains. Units are in or mm. Default 0.25 mm

SANDDENSITY= Density of the sand grains. Units are lb/ft3 or kg/m3. Default 2650 kg/m3.

SANDSG= Specific gravity of the sand grains relative to water. Default 2.650

5.4.3 SLUG Slug Calculation Options (Optional)

Main-code: SLUG
The SLUG main-code allows the selection of slug behavior correlations. At present three slug
correlations are available: the severe-slugging group PI-SS proposed by Pots (p.587), and the slug
sizing correlations of Norris (p.586) and of Scott, Shoham and Brill (p.588).

PISS= ON Start calculation of PI-SS

OFF End calculation of PI-SS

SIZE= SSB Switch on Scott, Shohan and Brill slug size correlation.

NORRIS Switch on Norris slug size correlation.

OFF Switch off slug size correlation.

BP= ON Use BP Slug method. To see the results of this the following should
also be used: print custom = (b,o,a24, b24, c24, d24,
e24,f24,g24,h24,i24)

SGLV= MODIFIED Use the modified PIPESIM method for computing the sphere generated
(p. 0 ) liquid volume. This is the default method.

ORIGINAL Use original PIPESIM method for computing the sphere generated
(p. 0 ) liquid volume.

Note: The SIZE and PISS sub-codes are not related, and can be set independently of one another.

The PI-SS routine is based upon a correlation developed at Koninklijke Shell Laboratory. PI-SS is
a dimensionless number that is a means of quantifying the likelihood of severe riser-slugging.
Normally one would turn the PI-SS calculation on after the first node of the flowline and switch it off
at the downstream riser base. If the value of PI-SS is less than one at the riser base and the flow
regime (as predicted by the Taitel-Dukler correlation) is stratified, then severe riser slugging is
possible. Conversely, PI-SS values significantly greater than one indicate that severe riser slugging

Keyword index
635
PIPESIM User Guide

is not likely. The PI-SS number can also be used to estimate slug size. As a rule of thumb the slug
length will be approximately equal to the riser height divided by PI-SS, that is PI-SS values less
than unity imply slug lengths greater than the riser height. PI-SS is calculated at each node in the
flowline (while PISS=ON) using averaged holdup data, etc., but it is only the value recorded at the
downstream riser base which is of any real significance. PI-SS is printed as part of the PRIMARY
output (see the PRINT (p.619) main code).
The SIZE sub-code enables the user to specify a slug sizing correlation. At present two
correlations are available, NORRIS and SSB. The NORRIS correlation was developed from
Prudhoe Bay operational data and gives slug size as a function of pipe diameter. The SSB
correlation was developed by Scott, Shohan and Brill and published in SPE paper 15103 in April
1986. The correlation takes account of slug growth. Normally one would switch the SIZE option on
at the start of the profile and slug sizes will be automatically estimated whenever the flow regime
(as predicted by the chosen correlation) is one that will support slugs. It should be noted that the
slug size data output is only printed if SLUG is specified on the PRINT main code.

Slug catcher size

The following comments may help to determine the size of a slug catcher.
The slug output pages should be switched on from the Define Output dialog.
The size of a slug catcher is determined by one of the following parameters.
1. The amount of liquid generated by pigging the lines.
2. The amount of liquid generated by changing the flowrate in the flowline. At low flowrates there
will be a large holdup of liquid in the pipeline and at high flowrates there will be a small holdup
of liquid in the line. As the flowrate is increased you get a surge of liquid from the pipeline. The
flowrate increase can be calculated using Cunliffe's method (p.381).
3. Dealing with slugs created by severe riser slugging. The likelihood of severe riser slugging is
determined by the PI-SS correlation. Slugging will occur if there is a segregated flow regime
and a PI-SS number less than one. The size of the slug is determined by using the following
formula. Slug Size = Riser Volume/PI-SS number.
4. Dealing with hydrodynamic Slugging. This is determined by use of the SSB or Norris
Correlations. You need a slugging flow regime for this to occur such as intermittent. The slug
size and frequency is taken from the slug length and frequency table in the output. It is normal
that the slug catcher is sized for the 1 in 1000 slug. These two correlations can predict huge
slug sizes with volumes greater than the holdup in the pipeline. Therefore one must be careful
to check the holdup as the slug cannot be bigger than the total amount of liquid in the pipeline.
5. Dealing with terrain slugging. PIPESIM cannot accurately predict slugging. If the holdup
increases as the pipeline goes over successive humps - this may indicate a propensity for
terrain slugging.

5.4.4 VCORR Vertical Flow Correlation Options

See also: SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.643)
Main-code: VCORR

Keyword index
636
PIPESIM User Guide

PLOSS= Pressure loss correlation (refer to the Summary of Valid Vertical Flow
Correlation Combinations (p.637)).

HOLDUP= Holdup correlation (refer to the Summary of Valid Vertical Flow Correlation
Combinations (p.637)).

MAP= Flow regime map (refer to the Summary of Valid Vertical Flow Correlation
Combinations (p.637)).

ANGLE= Angle above which vertical flow correlations are used (default = 45 o)

TYPE= This sub-code allows the commonly recommended combinations of flow

regime maps, holdup, and pressure loss correlations to be specified with one
sub-code instead of separate MAP=, HOLDUP=, and PLOSS= sub-codes.
Please refer to the table next page.

FFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

friction pressure gradient (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust
('tune') the friction pressure drop values calculated by the correlation to match
measured data.

HFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

liquid holdup fraction (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust
('tune') the liquid holdup (and hence elevation pressure drop) values calculated
by the correlation to match measured data.

SOURCE=

OVERRIDE=

ACCELL=

SWITCHES=

ENTRAINMENT=

OPTIONS=

Summary of valid vertical flow correlation combinations

The following table summarizes the valid combinations of pressure loss, holdup and flow pattern
map available for vertical flow. Entering non-valid combinations will result in an input data error.
For details on the vertical flow correlation abbreviations, refer to Vertical Flow Correlations -
Abbreviations (p.638).

PLOSS HOLDUP MAP TYPE

DR DR DR/TD DR

BBO BBO BB/TD BBO

Keyword index
637
PIPESIM User Guide

BBR BBR BB/TD BBR

ORK ORK ORK ORKISZEWSKI

GA GA GA

HB HB BB/DR/BJA HBR

HBO HBO BB/DR/BJA

BJA BJA1/BJA2 TD BJA

MB MB MB

Any BRIMIN1 Any

Any BRIMIN2 Any

NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP

GRAY GRAY TD GRAY

Vertical flow correlations - abbreviations

The abbreviations for vertical flow correlations is different for each source. This topic covers the
BJA and TULSA sources. For OpenLink users and for flow correlations like OLGAS,LEDA, TUFFP
defined in the userdll.dat file, the source is the identifier (IDENT) for the flow correlation, while the
abbreviation is the entry point identifier (ep_ident) for the selection that the user wants to use.

BJA
The abbreviations for BJA are as follows:
ANSARI
Ansari Vertical Flow Correlation
BBO
Beggs & Brill Original
BBR.
Beggs & Brill Revised
BJA
BJA correlation
BJA1
Original BJA holdup correlation
BJA2
Revised BJA holdup correlation
BRIMIN 1 or 2
Brill & Minami Holdup Correlation

Keyword index
638
PIPESIM User Guide

DR
Duns and Ros
GA
Govier and Aziz and Forgassi
GRAY
Gray Vertical Flow Correlation
GRAYM
Gray (modified)
GRAYO
Gray (original)
HB
Hagedorn and Brown (Revised)
HBO
Hagedorn & Brown (Original)
HBR
Hagedorn & Brown
HBRDR
Hagedorn & Brown, Duns & Ros map
LEDA
LEDA steady-state correlation
MB
Mukherjee and Brill
NOSLIP
No Slip Assumption
OLGA
OLGA-S steady-state correlation
ORK
Orkiszewski
TD
Taitel Dukler
TU2P
TUFFP Unified 2-phase v2007.1

TULSA
The abbreviations for Tulsa are as follows:
TBB
Beggs & Brill

Keyword index
639
PIPESIM User Guide

TDR
Duns & Ros
TGA
Govier, Aziz
THB
Hagedorn & Brown (Original)
THBR
Hagedorn & Brown (Revised)
TMB
Mukherjee & Brill
TORK
Orkiszewski

5.4.5 HCORR Horizontal Flow Correlation Options

See also: SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.643)
Main-code: HCORR

PLOSS= Pressure loss correlation (refer to the Summary of Valid Horizontal Flow
Correlation Combinations (p.641)).

HOLDUP= Holdup correlation (refer to the Summary of Valid Horizontal Flow Correlation
Combinations (p.641)).

MAP= Flow regime map (refer to the Summary of Valid Horizontal Flow Correlation
Combinations (p.641)).

TYPE= This sub-code allows the commonly recommended combinations of flow

regime maps, holdup, and pressure loss correlations to be specified with one
sub-code instead of the separate MAP=, HOLDUP=, and PLOSS= sub-codes.
Please refer to the table next page.

FFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

friction pressure gradient (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust
('tune') the friction pressure drop values calculated by the correlation to match
measured data.

HFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

liquid holdup fraction (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust
('tune') the Liquid holdup (and hence elevation pressure drop) values
calculated by the correlation to match measured data.

SOURCE=

ANGLE=

Keyword index
640
PIPESIM User Guide

OVERRIDE=

ACCELL=

SWITCHES=

ENTRAINMENT=

Summary of valid horizontal flow correlation combinations

The following summarizes the valid combinations of pressure loss, holdup and flow pattern map
available for horizontal or inclined flow. Entering non-valid combinations will result in an input data
error. For details on the horizontal flow correlation abbreviations, refer to Horizontal flow
correlations - abbreviations (p.638).

PLOSS HOLDUP MAP TYPE

DR DR/BJA DR/TD DR

DKAGAF DKAGA TD

DKAGAF EATON TD DKAGAF

BBO BBO/BJA1/BJA2 BB/TD BBO

BBR BBR/BJA1/BJA2 BB/TD BBR

BJA BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD BJA

BJA1 BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD

MB MB MB

HB HB BB/DR/BJA HBR

HBO HBO BB/DR/TD

OLI BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD OLIEMANS

MB MB MB

Any BRIMIN1 Any

Any BRIMIN2 Any

NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP

Horizontal flow correlations - abbreviations

The abbreviations for vertical flow correlations is different for each source. This topic covers the
BJA and TULSA sources. For OpenLink users and for flow correlations like OLGAS,LEDA, TUFFP

Keyword index
641
PIPESIM User Guide

defined in the userdll.dat file, the source is the identifier (IDENT) for the flow correlation, while the
abbreviation is the entry point identifier (ep_ident) for the selection that the user wants to use.

BJA
The abbreviations for BJA are as follows:
BBR
Beggs and Brill (Revised)
BBO
Beggs and Brill (Original)
BBOTD
Beggs & Brill, Taitel Dukler map
BJA
Baker Jardine Revised
BJA1
BJA correlation
BJA2
Revised BJA holdup correlation
BRIMIN 1or 2
Brill and Minami Holdup Correlation
DKAGA
Dukler (AGA)
DKAGAD
Dukler, AGA & Flanagan
DKAGAF
Dukler, AGA & Flanagan (Eaton Holdup)
DR
Duns and Ros
HB
Hagedorn and Brown Revised
HBO
Hagedorn and Brown Original
LEDA
LEDA steady-state correlation
LOCKMAR
Lockhart & Martinelli
LOCKMARTD
Lockhart & Martinelli

Keyword index
642
PIPESIM User Guide

MB
Mukherjee and Brill
NOSLIP
No Slip Assumption
OLIEMANS
Oliemans
OLGA
OLGA-S Steady-State Correlation
OLI
Oliemans Correlation
TD
Taitel Dukler
TU2P
TUFFP Unified 2-phase v2007.1
XIAO
Xiao horizontal mechanistic model

TULSA
The abbreviations for TULSA are as follows:
TBB
Beggs & Brill
TDUK
Dukler
TMB
Mukherjee & Brill

5.4.6 SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (Optional)

See also: Single Phase Flow Correlations (p.373), Horizontal Flow Correlation Options (p.360),
Vertical Flow Correlation Options (p.365)
PIPESIM will automatically select either the specified two-phase or single-phase correlation
depending on the phase behavior at the particular section in the pipeline. The single phase
correlation is set by default to the MOODY correlation. If no single-phase correlation is
specified but single-phase flow is encountered in the pipeline, the program automatically
switches to the MOODY correlation.
In addition, when the specified phase correlation is the Moody correlation or the Cullender-Smith
correlation, PIPESIM will calculate the Moody friction factor using either an iterative implicit method
(Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)), an explicit method (see the Sonnad and Goudar paper
(p.588)) or a fast explicit or approximate method (see the Moody paper (p.585)) . The default
calculation method for the friction factor is the explicit method. The Moody friction factor calculation

Keyword index
643
PIPESIM User Guide

method will also have an impact on the horizontal and vertical flow correlations as the friction factor
used to compute the pressure gradient in the flow correlations will be evaluated based on the
method specified by the Moody friction factor calculation method.
Main-code: SPHASE

CORRELATION= Single-phase flow correlation.

AGA Use the AGA dry gas equation for single phase flow.

MOODY At Reynolds numbers greater than 2000, use the

method specified by the MOODYCALC option and at
Reynolds numbers less than 2000, assume laminar
flow (f=64/Re) (default).

PANA

PANB

WEYMOUTH

HAZENWILL

CULLSMITH Uses the Cullender and Smith Correlation for Gas with
a Moody friction factor calculated using the method
specified by the MOODYCALC option.

DRAGFACTOR= The AGA drag factor (default = 0.98).

LFMIN= The liquid volume fraction below which single phase

gas flow is assumed to exist (default = 0.00001).

LFMAX= The liquid volume fraction above which single phase

liquid flow is assumed to exist (default = 0.99).

TRMIN=

TRMAX=

TRMETHOD=

INTERPOLATE

CUTOFF

MAXIMUM

CUTOFF

COMPARE=

ON

Keyword index
644
PIPESIM User Guide

OFF

C= Hazen-Williams C parameter

LFPROP=

MOODYCALC EXPLICIT or SONNAD Sonnad 2007 linear approximation (default)

APPROXIMATE or Moody 1947 approximation

MOODY

IMPLICIT or Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)

ITERATIVE

5.4.7 USERDLL - Flow Correlations

The API for user-defined multiphase flow correlation plug-in is provided by Schlumberger.
For a standard installation of PIPESIM, example Fortran source code is provided in the following
directory (assuming the default installation location):

C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools\User Flow Correlations

\Fortran_code

. Two files are included, “UFC2P_Demo.f90” for 2-phase correlations and “UFC3P_Demo.f90” for
3-phase correlations. These files are self-documenting templates that will compile as is (using
Beggs-Brill as an example) and can be modified to interface with your own correlation and
compiled into a dll that is called directly by the PIPESIM engine. For PIPESIM 2012, configuration
of the flow correlations and related options is contained within the USERDLL.dat file which may be
edited by selecting Setup » Preferences » Choose Paths.

5.5 Well performance modeling

INTRODUCTION (p.646)
WELLPI (p.650) Well Productivity Index
VOGEL (p.651) Data for the Vogel Equation
FETKOVICH (p.651) Data for the Fetkovich Equation
JONES (p.652) Data for the Jones Equation
IFPPSSE (p.652) Data for the Pseudo-steady state inflow equation
WCOPTION (p.654) Well Completion Data
IPRCRV or IFPCRV (p.658) Well performance and/or coning relationship tabulation
IFPTAB (p.660) Inflow Performance Tabulation (obsolete)
CONETAB (p.661) Coning relationship Tabulation (obsolete)
BACKPRES (p.662) Backpressure Equation (BPE)
NAPOINT (p.744) System Analysis Point

Keyword index
645
PIPESIM User Guide

NAPLOT (p.740) System Analysis

HORWELL (p.662) Horizontal Well Inflow Performance
LAYER (p.664) Reservoir Layer properties
PERMTAB (p.667) Permeability Saturation Relationship Tabulation
HVOGEL (p.668)
FORCHHEIMER (p.668) Data for the Forchheimer Equation
TRANSIENT (p.669) Data for the Transient inflow equation.

5.5.1 Introduction
Several options for well performance modeling have been introduced. A number of basic options
are presently available and are summarized below with application limits:
1. Well productivity index (p.650). Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.
2. Vogel's equation (p.651). Oil reservoirs. Black oil only.
3. Fetkovich's equation (p.651). Oil reservoirs. Black oil only.
4. Jones' equation (p.652) . Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.
5. Pseudo steady state equation (p.652) . Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and single phase
compositional.
6. Well completion options (p.654) (such as perforation and gravel steady state pack models)
are available in association with the pseudo equation..
7. Inflow performance tabulation (p.660). Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.
Options 1 to 7 are mutually exclusive (except the Well Completion options, which must be used in
combination with the Pseudo-Steady-State Equation). If more than one option is entered, the last
one entered will be invoked. Normally inflow performance data would be entered after the INLET
statement, and must appear before the first NODE card in a case. However, if injection wells are
modeled, the system profile should describe the well geometry in the direction of flow, that is
ending at the bottom hole. The appropriate inflow performance data should appear after the bottom
hole and before the ENDCASE.
Printing inflow performance data
A comprehensive printout of the well inflow performance data can be obtained by invoking
the PRINT INFLOW option (Ref. Section 1.6).
Definition of reservoir type
For black oil cases, PIPESIM will interpret the reservoir type (oil or gas) from the way in
which the flow rate is defined under the RATE or ITERN statement as follows:
• If the rate is defined on the basis of liquid flow plus a gas/liquid ratio (that is LIQ plus
GLR sub-codes) then an "oil" reservoir is assumed.
• If the rate is defined on the basis of gas flow plus a liquid/gas ratio (that is . GAS plus
LGR sub-codes) then a "gas" reservoir is assumed.

Keyword index
646
PIPESIM User Guide

5.5.2 COMPLETION Completion Profile Delimiter

Main-code: COMPLETION
The profile delimiters (supercodes) are used by PIPESIM as required flags if the model contains
horizontal wells or if you wish to perform system analysis anywhere in the system profile. The
presence of the COMPLETION delimiter informs PIPESIM that subsequent wellbore sections form
a "completion," or "productive interval." The program will therefore model the flow of reservoir fluid
into the wellbore.

INLINE= If this sub code is present, the entire profile is modeled as a single unit. If it is absent,
the completion is modeled separately from the rest of the system profile.

EFFLENG= The effective length of the horizontal completion (m or ft). This allows you to specify
a completion length which is less than the actual length supplied with subsequent
NODE maincodes. Thus, sensitivities on length can be performed using the NAPLOT
maincode.

IPRPOINT=

DPRETIO=

TOL=

LABEL=

TYPE=

For datum reset feature, please refer to Node (p.696) .

Supercode
The supercodes are:
TUBING
Tubing Profile Delimiter
FLOWLINE
Flowline Profile Delimiter
RISER
Riser Profile Delimiter
Main-code: TUBING, FLOWLINE, RISER
The profile delimiters (supercodes) are used by PIPESIM as required flags if the model contains
horizontal wells or if you wish to perform system analysis anywhere in the system profile. The
portions of profile so delimited are sometimes be described as objects.
When any of these are encountered after the COMPLETION delimiter, the inflow modeling is
switched off, and the resulting flowrate is used for the remainder of the system profile.
Other modes of program behavior depend on the current delimiter, and the junctions of different
delimiters. For example, Heat Transfer data implying that a pipe is buried, will not be applied to a

Keyword index
647
PIPESIM User Guide

riser; the junction of a flowline and an upward-going riser is identified as a riser-base and triggers
checks on slugging parameters; the junction of tubing and flowline triggers actions relevant to the
wellhead.

LABE L= or The name of the profile object. This is used to print on the output file, and for
NAME= object identification with the PUSH (p.631) statement.

RESETDATUM= Can be set to YES (the default) or NO. The NODE statements on either side of
a supercode are, by default, assumed to be coincident. This allows the last
node of (for example) a previous flowline to specify the same position as the
first node of the next flowline, with no intermediate length of pipe joining them,
regardless of the values of distance and elevation these 2 nodes may specify.
This behavior can be reversed with RESETDATUM=NO, which will model a
pipe section between the 2 nodes in the same way as between any other 2
nodes in the same object.

INHERIT= Can be set to YES (the default) or NO. Controls the application of Upstream
Inheritance. Pipe object dimensions (for example Pipe ID, wall thickness,
coatings thickness and conductivity, burial configuration, and so on.) are by
default inherited from upstream objects. This allows each subsequent object to
be specified with a minimum of input data, as the only required values are
those that change between objects. However, mistakes in the specification of
data can easily occur with this mode of behavior, particularly when complex
pipe coatings and burial configurations are being specified, as unwanted data
from previous objects can be mistakenly inherited by the current object.
Specification of INHERIT=NO will ensure that each new object inherits nothing
from its upstream neighbor.

5.5.3 FCV : Flow control valve

Note: This keyword is only appplicable for PIPESIM 2012.3.

Main-code: FCV
Down hole flow control valves (FCV) allow so-called 'intelligent' or 'smart' wells to be modeled.
The methodology implemented provides a simple way of modeling single branch (that is non
multilateral) intelligent wells where the FCVs are located close to the reservoir.
The FCV statement should be placed in the system profile, immediately above the IPR statement
describing the completion that is to contain the FCV, If the model contains multiple completions,
then each of them can have an associated FCV.
FCVs are currently only available for point-type completions. If one is supplied for a distributed
completion, it will be ignored.

ECAREA= Equivalent Choke Area: the cross-section area of a choke bean that is of
equivalent size to the FCV port size setting. (in2 or mm2)
ECDIAM= Equivalent Choke diameter: the diameter of a choke bean that is of
equivalent size to the FCV port size setting. (in or mm)

Keyword index
648
PIPESIM User Guide

MAXLIQ= Upper limit for stock-tank liquid flowrate (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

MAXGAS= Upper limit for stock-tank gas flowrate (mmscf/day or mmsm3/day).
MAXMASS= Upper limit for total mass flowrate (lb/sec or kg/sec).
LIQFC= Liquid flow coefficient
GASFC= Gas flow coefficient
GASEQN= Sub-critical correlation choice. may be:
ASHFORD : the Ashford and Pierce correlation
MECHANISTIC : (default) The MECHANISTIC choke model is purely
theoretical, based on a combination of Bernoulli's equation with an
equation of continuity.
API14B : This is a special-case of the MECHANISTIC correlation, wherein
the GAS and Liquid Csp values are preset to 0.9 and 0.85 respectively.
DPFACTOR= Pressure ratio at which flow through choke becomes critical. (Default =
0.53). (It is also possible to force PIPESIM to calculate the Critical
Pressure Ratio; to do this, enter DPFACTOR=0.0.)
CD= Discharge coefficient (default = 0.6). This value is used to calculate the
flow coefficient, CSP.
DIAMTABLE=(,) A multiple-value dataset (p.598) containing a list of Equivalent Choke
Diameters, maximum 30 values. (in or mm). Exclusive with
AREATABLE=.
AREATABLE= A multiple-value dataset (p.598) containing a list of Equivalent Choke
Areas, maximum 30 values. (in2 or mm2). Exclusive with DIAMTABLE=
POSITION= If a table of diameters or areas is supplied, the POSITION= subcode
specifies which of them is to be used as the active initial diameter or area.
The diameters or areas are assigned position numbers, starting from
position zero for the smallest diameter or area. It is useful for the first
diameter or area to be set to a value of zero, this allows the FCV to be
closed.
PERCENTOPEN= or
OPEN=
SHUTMODE=

The subcodes MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS= and MAXMASS= are mutually exclusive. If a flowrate limit is
supplied with a value for ECAREA=, then the supplied area will be used first to calculate the
resulting flowrate. If this exceeds the limit then the area required to meet it will be calculated.

Example 1
This is a simple layer and point completion such as might appear as part of a larger multi-
completion model: LAYER temp = 220 use = 'fluid A' label = 'Layer one' WELLPI pwstatic = 3650
LPI=9.5 Example 2. This completion includes a coning relationship. LAYER and CONETAB may

Keyword index
649
PIPESIM User Guide

be supplied in either order as long as the CONETAB statements are not separated from one
another. The selected IPR maincode, JONES in this case, must always come last:

LAYER temp=240 F pres = 4503 psiause = 'fluid B'inject=NO label = 'Layer two'
conetab 0, 986, 0
conetab 1000, 986, 2.0
conetab 2699, 1096, 2.2
conetab 6329, 2540, 2.8
conetab 7288, 2980, 3.9
conetab 8082, 3370, 5.6
conetab 8805, 3770, 8.0
JONES LA=1e-4 LB=3e-2

5.5.4 WELLPI Well Productivity Index (Optional)

Main-code: WELLPI
The WELLPI statement allows the Productivity Index (p.387) to be specified for a point-type
completion or a distributed completion. Exactly one of the subcodes LPI=, GPI=, MIPI=, MCPI=,
LDPI=, GDPI=, MIDPI=, or MCDPI= should be provided.

Subcodes
PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

LPI= Liquid Productivity Index (bbl/day/psi or sm 3/day/bar)

GPI= Gas Productivity Index (MMscf/day/psi/psi or MMsm 3/day/bar/bar) Note: Under

normal circumstances, a gas well PI is much smaller than the typical liquid well PI.
Typical gas well PIs are between 1E-3 and 1E-6 mmscf/day/psi 2. Oil well PIs
usually vary between 1 and 40 STB/D/psi.

MIPI= Mass Incompressible Productivity Index (lb/sec/psi or kg/s/bar)

MCPI= Mass Compressible Productivity Index, (lb/sec/psi/psi or kg/s/bar/bar)

LDPI= Liquid Distributed Productivity Index (bbl/day/psi/ft or sm 3/day/bar/m)

GDPI= Gas Distributed Productivity Index (MMscf/day/psi/psi/ft or MMsm 3/day/bar/bar/m)

MIDPI= Mass Incompressible Distributed Productivity Index (lb/sec/psi/ft or kg/s/bar/m)

MCDPI= Mass Compressible Distributed Productivity Index, (lb/sec/psi/psi/ft or

kg/s/bar/bar/m)

Keyword index
650
PIPESIM User Guide

BPCORR= Allows a correction to the straight-line PI to allow for gas breakout when the fluid
goes below its bubble point pressure: can be set to ON or OFF (default OFF). If
enabled, the portion of the IPR below the bubble point is modelled with a Vogel
relationship.

PICOEF= Specifies the PI coefficient for the Vogel equation used if BPCORR= is enabled.
(default 0.8)

5.5.5 WPCURVE (Optional)

Main-code: WPCURVE
This statement is obsolete, please do not use it.

5.5.6 VOGEL Vogel Equation (Optional)

Main-code: VOGEL
This keyword is used to specify data for Vogel's Equation (p.388).

Subcodes
PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

AOFP= Absolute Open Flow Potential of the well (sm 3/d or STB/D). This is a hypothetical
liquid flow rate when bottom hole pressure is set to 0.0 psia

PICOEF= The PI-coefficient used in Vogel's equation to adjust the degree of curvature of the
inflow performance curve. Curvature increases with increasing PICOEF. A straight
line is produced when PICOEF=0. (Default = 0.8).

5.5.7 FETKOVICH Fetkovich Equation (Optional)

Main-code: FETKOVICH
This keyword is used to specify data for Fetkovitch's Equation (p.389).

Subcodes
PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

AOFP= Absolute Open Flow Potential of the well (sm 3/d or STB/D). This is a hypothetical
liquid flow rate when bottom hole pressure is set at 0.0 psia.

EXP= Exponent used in the Fetkovich equation to adjust the degree of curvature of the
inflow performance curve. Unlike the Vogel equation it is not possible to produce a
linear well inflow characteristic as a special case of the Fetkovich equation. The
default is 1.0.

Keyword index
651
PIPESIM User Guide

5.5.8 JONES Jones Equation (Optional)

Main-code: JONES or FORCHHEIMER
This keyword is used to specify data for the Jones Equation (p.390).

Subcodes
PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at
a flow rate of zero.

A= Turbulent flow coefficient. (Use TYPE= to define fluid type.)

B= Laminar flow coefficient. (Use TYPE= to define fluid type.)

TYPE= Used to define the type of fluid.

LIQ Liquid

GAS Gas

LA= Liquid turbulent flow coefficient. (psi /MMscf 2/d 2 or bar/m 6/d 2)

LB= Liquid laminar flow coefficient. (psi/MMscf/d or bar/m 3/d)

GA= Gas turbulent flow coefficient. (psi 2/MMscf 2/d 2 or bar 2/m 6/d 2)

GB= Gas laminar flow coefficient. (psi 2/MMscf/d or bar 2/m 3/d)

5.5.9 IFPPSSE : Data for the Pseudo Steady State Equation (Optional)
Main-code: IFPPSSE
The Pseudo Steady-state equation employs a radial reservoir model. The equation takes into
account both the effects of laminar and turbulent flows on pressure drawdown.

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the

bottom hole pressure at zero flow rate.

PERM= Average formation permeability (md).

THICKNESS= Average formation thickness (metres or feet).

RADE= Radius of external boundary of drainage area (metres or

feet). Default = 609.6 m or 2000 ft.

SKIN= Dimensionless skin factor (mechanical). Default = 0.

DIAMWELL= Wellbore diameter.

IPRTYPE= Inflow performance relationship model

PSS Pseudo steady-state model

Keyword index
652
PIPESIM User Guide

JONES Jones mode;

BASIS= or FLOWTYPE=

LIQUID

GAS

2PHASE

GASMETHOD=

PSEUDO Use pseudo pressure

SQUARED Use pressure squared

GA=

GB=

SOURCE=

ST Use the stock tank flow formulation of the pseudo steady

equation (default)

RES Use the reservoir flow formulation of the pseudo steady

equation

BPCORRECTION= Controls whether to apply the Vogel correction below the

bubble point

YES

NO

PICOEFF= Vogel coefficient for Vogel correction. Default = 0.8

DSKINLIQUID= Dynamic skin for liquid phase. Default = 0.

DSKINGAS= Dynamic skin for gas phase. Default = 0.

RESAREA= Reservoir area. (If entered, reservoir radius is calculated)

SHAPEFACTOR= Reservoir shape factor. (If entered, reservoir radius is

calculated) Default = 31.62

DRAINAGESKIN= Reservoir drainage skin.

RESMOBILITY= Reservoir mobility. Should only be used for injection

systems (1/cp).

Keyword index
653
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: If the skin is entered with the IFPPSSE main-code, any skin associated with the Well
Completion options (see Section 7.6) will be overwritten by this value.

5.5.10 WCOPTION Well Completion Data (Optional)

Main-code: WCOPTION
Well Completion Options (WCOPTION) allow the mechanical and dynamic skin factors to be
calculated from the details of the well completion configuration. Note: The well completion options
are only valid when used in conjunction with the Pseudo-Steady-State or Transient equations (as
defined under the IFPPSSE and TRANSIENT main-codes).
The WCOPTION maincode is an alternative to the FRACTURE maincode, and is exclusive with it.
TYPE= Specifies the type of well completion

OPENHOLE Openhole completion option. The program calculates

the skin factors assuming the well is not cemented. The
required data are DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE, INTERVAL,
PVERT and DEVIATION. All other sub-codes will be
ignored.

OPENGRAVEL Openhole gravel pack completion option. The required

data are DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE, INTERVAL, PVERT,
DEVIATION, PGRAV and DSCREEN. All other sub-
codes will be ignored.

PERFORATED Perforated completion option. The program calculates

the skin factors using the McLeod (p.411) or Karakas/
Tariq model. The required sub-codes are; DDAMAGE,
PDAMAGE, INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION,
PERFSNMTHD, SHOTS, LPERF, DPERF,
PHASEANGLE, DCOMP, PCOMP. All other sub-codes
will be ignored.

GRAVELPACKED Gravel-packed and perforated completion Option. The

required sub-codes are; DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE,
INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION, PERFSNMTHD,
SHOTS, LPERF, DPERF, PHASEANGLE, DCOMP,
PCOMP, PGRAV, DSCREEN, CASINGID and
LTUNNEL. All other sub-codes will be ignored.

FRACPACK Fracpack completion option. (i.e. a gravel packed

hydraulic fracture model). The required sub-codes are;
INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION, SHOTS, DPERF,
PGRAV, DSCREEN, CASINGID, LTUNNEL,
FPHLFRAC, FPWFRAC, FPPPERM, FPDDEPTH,
FPDPERM, FPCLEN, FPCPERM. All other sub-codes
will be ignored

Keyword index
654
PIPESIM User Guide

INTERVAL= Completion interval length (metres or feet). Default =

formation thickness, as defined previously under the
IFPPSSE (p.652) main-code.
The use of the INTERVAL subcode is deprecated. Use
MDINTERVAL instead.

MDINTERVAL= Completion interval length (metres or feet). Default =

MDPAYZONE.

TVDINTERVAL = Completion interval projected to the vertical direction

(meters or feet). Default = Completion interval length,
as defined in MDINTERVAL subcode, projected to the
vertical direction.

RATIOINTERV= Ratio of the length of the perforated interval to the

thickness of net pay of the reservoir. The thickness of
net pay has to be defined by the THICKNESS subcode
under the IFPPSSE (p.652) main-code, the
THICKNESS subcode under the TRANSIENT (p.669)
main-code, or the THICK subcode under the
HORWELL (p.662) main-code.

PDAMAGEDZONE= Permeability of the damaged zone around well bore

(md). The formation data should be given under the
IFPPSSE (p.652) main-code. Default = formation
permeability.

RATIOPDMZO= Ratio of the permeability of the damaged zone to the

horizontal permeability of the reservoir. The horizontal
permeability has to be defined by the PERM subcode
under the IFPPSSE main-code, the PERMEABILITY
subcode under the TRANSIENT (p.669) main-code,
or the KX subcode under the HORWELL (p.662)
main-code.

DDAMAGEDZONE= Diameter of the damaged zone around well bore (mm

or inches). Default = well bore radius (i.e., damaged
zone does not exist).

THKDMZO = Thickness of the damage zone around the well bore

(mm or inches). The borehole diameter needs to be
provided by the DIAMWELLBORE subcode under the
IFPPSSE (p.652) / TRANSIENT (p.669) main-code.

LPERFORATION= Length of perforation into the formation (mm or inches).

Default = infinity (which will result in a zero skin due to
perforation).

Keyword index
655
PIPESIM User Guide

MDPAYZONE= Formation length along the wellbore trajectory (metres

or feet). Default = Average formation thickness, as
defined in the THICKNESS subcode under the
IFPPSSE (p.652) main-code.

SHOTS= Shot density (shots/m or shots/ft). Default = 13.12

shots/m or 4 shots/ft.

PCOMPACTEDZO= Permeability of the compacted zone (or crushed zone)

around the perforation. Default = permeability of the
damaged If neither the damaged zone nor compacted
zone permeability is defined, the default value for
compacted zone permeability will be the formation
permeability specified under IFPPSSE zone.

RATIOPCMPZO= Ratio of the permeability of the compacted (or crushed)

zone to the horizontal permeability of the reservoir. The
horizontal permeability has to be defined by the PERM
subcode under the IFPPSSE main-code, the
PERMEABILITY subcode under the TRANSIENT
(p.669) main-code, or the KX subcode under the
HORWELL (p.662) main-code.

THKCMPZO = Thickness of the compacted zone (or crushed zone)

around the perforation (mm or inches). The diameter of
the perforation needs to be provided by
DPERFORATION subcode.

PVERTICAL= Permeability in the vertical direction (md). Default =

formation permeability, as defined previously under the
IFPPSSE (p.652) main-code.

RATIOPVERT= Ratio of the vertical permeability of the reservoir to the

horizontal permeability of the reservoir. The horizontal
permeability has to be defined by the PERM subcode
under the IFPPSSE main-code, the PERMEABILITY
subcode under the TRANSIENT (p.669) main-code,
or the KX subcode under the HORWELL (p.662)
main-code.

DPERFORATION= Diameter of perforation (mm or inches). Default = 12.7

mm or 0.5 inches.

DCOMPACTEDZO= Diameter of the compacted zone (or crushed zone)

around the perforation. Default = diameter of the
perforation (i.e., compacted zone does not exist).

PGRAVEL= Permeability of gravel pack (md). Default = estimated

according to sieve size input.

Keyword index
656
PIPESIM User Guide

SIEVESIZE=

LTUNNEL= Length of tunnel; which is usually the sum of the

thicknesses of cement, casing and annulus (mm or
inches). Default = 0.0.

DSCREEN= Gravel pack screen ID (mm or inches).

PHASEANGLE= Perforation phase angle (degrees).

DEVIATION= Well deviation (degrees).

CASINGID= Casing ID (mm or inches).

FPDDEPTH= Fracture damage depth (mm or inches). For fracture

face skin term.

FPDPERM= Fracture face damage permeability (md). For fracture

face skin term.

FPPPERM = Fracture proppant permeability (md). Frac pack

proppant permeability.

FPCLEN = Frac pack choke length (mm or inches). Choke length

for choke fracture skin term.

FPCPERM= Frac pack choke permeability (md). Choke permeability

for choke fracture skin term.

FPWFRAC= Fracture width (mm or inches). Frac pack fracture

width.

FPHLFRAC= Fracture half length (ft or m). Frac pack fracture half
length.

PERFSKNMETHOD= Method for calculation of perforation skin.

0 McLeod (p.411) model

1 Karakas / Tariq model

DZSKINCALC=

GPSKINCALC=

PFSKINCALC=

PPDSKINCALC=

FPSKINCALC=

FACESKINCALC=

Keyword index
657
PIPESIM User Guide

CHOKESKINCALC=

Note: The well completion options are only valid when used in conjunction with either the Pseudo-
Steady-State equation or the Transient equation (as defined under the IFPPSSE (p.652) and
TRANSIENT (p.669) maincodes). All data entered under the WCOPTION main-code will be
ignored if the IFPPSSE or TRANSIENT main-codes are not also specified.

5.5.11 IPRCRV or IFPCRV: Inflow Performance Curve

The IPRCRV statement is a generalized replacement for IFPTAB, GIFPTAB, and CONETAB. It
allows a tabular Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) to be specified using PIPESIM's multiple
value syntax (p.598). A Coning relationship can also be supplied, either stand-alone, or in addition
to a tabular IPR. The available range of formats in which the data can be supplied is a superset of
those available with IFPTAB, GIFPTAB and CONETAB.
Maincode: IPRCRV or IFPCRV

NAME= Required. Defines the name of the curve. This name is then used on (a)
subsequent LAYER statement(s).

GAS=(...) Specifies values of Gas flowrate (mmscfd or mmsm3d). Exclusive with LIQ=
and MASS=.

LIQ=(...) Specifies values of liquid flowrate (sbbl/d or sm3/d). Exclusive with GAS= and
MASS=.

MASS=(...) Specifies values of mass flowrate (lb/sec or kg/sec). Exclusive with GAS= and
LIQ=.

GLR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Liquid Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with
GOR=, OGR=, LGR=.

GOR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Oil Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with GLR=,
OGR=, LGR=.

OGR=(...) Specifies values of Oil Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive with
GOR=, GLR=, LGR=.

LGR=(...) Specifies values of Liquid Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive

with GOR=, OGR=, OGR=.

GWR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Water Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with
WGR= , WCUT=.

WGR=(...) Specifies values of Water Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive

with GWR= , WCUT=.

WCUT=(...) Specifies values of Watercut (% vol/vol). Exclusive with WGR= , GWR=.

Keyword index
658
PIPESIM User Guide

PWSTATIC= Specifies the reservoir static (zero flowrate) pressure (psia or Bara).

PWF=(...) Specifies values of Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure (psia or bara). Exclusive
with DP=. Must be accompanied by PWSTATIC= unless the first flowrate value
point is zero.

DP=(...) Specifies values of drawdown (Delta pressure, the difference between PWS
and PWF). (psi or bar). Exclusive with PWF=, and must be accompanied by
PWSTATIC=.

GASSG=(...) Specifies values of Gas Specific Gravity in a coning table. Exclusive with
CONEDGASSG=.

DEGREE= The degree of polynomial to fit to the data, default 1.

CONEDGASSG= Specifies the Specific gravity of the gas in the gas cap. Used to calculate the
produced gas SG. Exclusive with GASSG=.

Exactly one of the flowrate subcodes GAS=, LIQ= or MASS= must be specified. Then:
• To specify an IPR table, supply also one of PWF= or DP=.
• To specify a gas or liquid coning table, supply also one of GLR=, GOR=, LGR=, or OGR=. The
gas specific gravity may be provided with GASSG= values, or a single value of
CONEDGASSG=.
• To specify a water coning table, supply one of WGR=, GWR=, or WCUT=.
Gas and Water coning can be supplied with IPR data in the same table.
Care must be taken when combining the coning subcodes, since some combinations can cause
unphysical situations, and others can leave the system undefined. For example, if OGR= and
WCUT= are provided, the water flowrate is undefined when OGR is zero, so WGR= should be
used instead of WCUT= or LGR= instead of OGR=. If GLR= and GWR= are provided, the GWRs
must always be less than the GLRs, so WCUT= should be used instead of GWR=, or OGR=
onstead of LGR=

Examples
1. This defines a coning table for a liquid production well. The statement has been provided on 2
lines using the '&' character as the continuation marker at the end of the first line. The entire
statement (i.e. the total characters in all the continued lines) may be no more than 255 characters
in length.

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ=(0,1000,2000,3000,4000) GLR=(300,300,550,600,620) &

WCUT=(10,10,18,22,30) GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)

2. This defines the same coning table as above, but shows how multiple statements can be used.
Each statement may be no more than 255 characters in length, but the use of multiple statements
allows more data points to be entered if necessary. Note that the curve name must appear on
every statement.

Keyword index
659
PIPESIM User Guide

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ= (0 ,1000,2000,3000,4000)

IFPCRV name=cc1 GLR= (300 ,300 ,550 ,600 ,620 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 WCUT= (10 ,10 ,18 ,22 ,30 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)

5.5.12 IFPTAB Inflow Performance Tabulation (Optional)

Main-code: IFPTAB

Note: The IFPTAB statement is obsolete, its functionality has been replaced by IPRCRV (p.658).

Specifies a liquid inflow performance relationship in the form of a table of bottom hole pressure
versus flow rate. Each IFPTAB statement holds a single data point. To complete the tabulation, at
least four statements are required.

Values
should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order, as follows:

value 1 Data point ordinal. If the IFPTAB statements are provided in order of increasing
flowrate this can be set to 0 for all statements (recommended) ; otherwise, it must be
a value between 1 and 30 to specify the ordinal.

value 2 Liquid flow rate value at stock tank conditions. (sbbl/day or sm3/day)

value 3 Bottom hole pressure (bara or psia).

value 4 Gas Oil Ratio (optional, scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3)

value 5 Watercut (optional, %)

EXECUTE see note 4.

Notes:
1. The first 3 values are mandatory. If values 4 and 5 are present they define a table of coning
performance for the well or completion
2. One of the data points must be at zero flow rate such that the corresponding pressure is the
static bottom hole (and reservoir) pressure.
3. The ordinal (value 1) is present for historical reasons to ensure backwards compatibility with
earlier versions of the PIPESIM engine. As long as the statements are provided in order of
increasing flowrate, and no other statements apart from IFPTAB appear in the middle of the
table, the value can be left at zero.
4. If the IFPTAB table is provided inside the system profile, the last statement must contain no
values, but instead must contain the EXECUTE sub-code. This syntax ensures that only one
completion is actually executed regardless of the number of IFPTAB statements actually

Keyword index
660
PIPESIM User Guide

present. If IFPTAB is provided outside the system profile the EXECUTE subcode is
unnecessary.
5. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more IFPTAB tables can be used to enter data
relevant to each completion.

Example
! n liq pwf gor wcut
ifptab 0 0 3000 986 0
ifptab 0 1000 2990 986 2.0
ifptab 0 2699 2920 1096 2.2
ifptab 0 6329 2800 2540 2.8
ifptab 0 7288 2600 2980 3.9
ifptab 0 8082 2400 3370 5.6
ifptab 0 8805 2003 3770 8.0
ifptab execute

The ! line is a comment line.

5.5.13 CONETAB Coning Relationship Tabulation (Optional)

Main-code: CONETAB
The CONETAB statement is obsolete, its functionality has been replaced by IPRCRV (p.658).
Specifies a coning relationship for a well or completion, in the form of a table of stock-tank liquid
flowrate versus produced GOR and watercut. Each CONETAB statement holds a single data point.
To complete the tabulation, at least four statements are required. CONETAB does not define an
inflow performance relationship, it is intended to be used in addition to an existing maincode that
specifies the desired IPR. Values should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order,
as follows:

LIQUID= Liquid flow rate value at stock tank conditions. (sbbl/day or sm 3/day)

GOR= Gas Oil Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm 3/sm 3)

WCUT= Watercut (%)

Notes:
1. The CONETAB table should be provided in the system profile immediately before the maincode
specifying the required IPR.
2. No other maincode should appear in the body of the table.
3. Values should be provided in increasing order of liquid flow rate.
4. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more CONETAB tables can be used to enter
data for each completion.

Keyword index
661
PIPESIM User Guide

5. For BLACKOIL (p.717) fluids, the Specific Gravity of the coned and associated gas should be
provided with the PROP (p.719) statement. See example below.

Example
For example:

! liq gor wcut conetab 0 986 0 conetab 1000 986 2.0 conetab 2699 1096 2.2
conetab 6329 2540 2.8 conetab 7288 2980 3.9 conetab 8082 3370 5.6 conetab
8805 3770 8.0

5.5.14 BACKPRES Back Pressure Equation (BPE) (Optional)

Main-code: BACKPRES
This keyword is used to specify data for the Back Pressure Equation (p.391).

Subcodes
PWSTATIC The static reservoir pressure (psia or bar)

N The back pressure exponent (dimensionless).

C The back pressure constant (dimensions of (mmscf/d)/ (psi 2) n or equivalent SI).

5.5.15 HORWELL Horizontal Well Inflow Performance

The following Inflow Performance options are available in addition to the Distributed Productivity
Index Inflow option (see WELLPI (p.650))
• Pseudo-steady state equation of Babu and Odeh for oil wells
• Joshi's steady-state equation
• Backpressure equation
The backpressure equation is accessed via the BACKPRES maincode BACKPRES (p.662), which
applies to horizontal completions as well as vertical. As with the WELLPI maincode, WELLPI
(p.650), the backpressure C and N parameters are assumed to apply per unit length of wellbore.
The steady-state and pseudo steady-state options are both accessed via the TYPE= subcode of
the HORWELL maincode. The well completion option, WCOPTION (p.654) , can be used in
conjunction with the HORWELL maincode.
Main-code: HORWELL

TYPE= PSSOIL The PSSOIL subcode calculates the horizontal well distributive
productivity index based on Babu and Odeh's (p.578) SPE paper
18298. It is recommended the user read this reference before
applying the equation. The equation is based upon the pseudo-
steady state IPR well model applied to a rectangular drainage area.

Keyword index
662
PIPESIM User Guide

ADIM Drainage width perpendicular to the well (ft or m).

BDIM Drainage width parallel to the well (ft or m).

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD)

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

RATIOKZ Ratio of permeability in the z-direction (or vertical permeability) of

the reservoir to the permeability in the x-direction (or horizontal
permeability perpendicular to the direction of well) of the reservoir.
The permeability in the x-direction has to be defined by the KX
subcode under the HORWELL main-code.

XZERO X-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

YONE Starting y-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

YTWO Ending y-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

ZZERO Z-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

RWELL Sandface radius (such as pipe + annulus + cement) (in or mm).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

PSSGAS The pseudo-steady state gas flow equation is based upon a circular
drainage area and is described in Joshi's (p.583) "Horizontal Well
Technology". It is recommended that the user read this reference
and Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions
(p.417) . This equation contains two skin terms; the skin due to
drilling/perforations and the rate-dependent skin due to turbulent gas
flow around the wellbore.

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (i.e. pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft. or m). Default =

infinity

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

Keyword index
663
PIPESIM User Guide

SSOIL The simplest form of horizontal well productivity calculations are the
steady-state analytical solutions which assumes that the pressure at
any point in the reservoir does not change with time. The steady-
state distributive productivity index is based upon Joshi's (p.583)
SPE 16868 "Review of Horizontal and Drainhole Technology". The
equation is based on the assumption that the horizontal well drains
an ellipsoidal volume around the wellbore of length L. See Inflow
Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions (p.417) , for
more details.

ECCENT Wellbore eccentricity (i.e. offset of the well from the centre of the pay
zone) (in or mm).

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (i.e. Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (that is pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft or m).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

SSGAS The steady-state gas distributive productivity equation is described

in Joshi's (p.583) "Horizontal Well Technology", Chapter 9, and
Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions
(p.417)

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (that is pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft or m).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

5.5.16 LAYER Reservoir Layer Properties

Main-code: LAYER
LAYER specifies the presence of a distinct reservoir Layer or Zone. It allows the properties of a
fluid to be defined, along with its pressure and temperature. Some additional layer-specific

Keyword index
664
PIPESIM User Guide

properties can also be set. LAYER is intended to be used in a model that contains multiple
completions, which may be point-type, or distributed/horizontal. It should only appear within the
system profile, and be followed by a statement that selects a choice of IPR relationship, for
example, WELLPI, FETKOVICH, IFPPSSE, and so on.
All subcodes are optional.

PWSTATIC= or Reservoir layer (Static bottom hole) pressure (bara or psia). This can
PRESSURE= also be defined on the selected IPR maincode, in which case it may be
omitted from LAYER. If supplied on both, the one on the IPR will be
used.

TEMPERATURE= Reservoir layer temperature (F or C). This should be the same as the
ambient temperature on the node, and is therefore unnecessary.

USE= or FLUIDNAME= Name of a Black Oil or Compositional fluid, as previously defined with
BEGIN FLUID (p.629) . Exclusive with PVTFILE=.

PVTFILE= Name of an existing .PVT file defining a compositional fluid. Exclusive

with USE=.

INJECT= Controls if the a layer will accept fluid injection: can be set to YES or NO,
default YES.

IPRCURVENAME= Specifies the name of an Inflow Performance and/or Coning curve for
the Completion, as defined in (a) previous IPRCRV (p.658) statement(s).

LDORATE= or Specifies a fixed, overriding value for the Specific Inflow Rate in a
MDORATE= or horizontal completion. Normally the inflow rate of a horwell is calculated
GDORATE= from the supplied Inflow Performance data, and reservoir and wellbore
pressure difference. If one of these subcodes is supplied however, all
other data is ignored, and the reservoir inflow rate is unconditionally set
to this value. LDORATE= supplies a Liquid rate (bbl/day/ft or m3/day/m);
GDORATE= supplies a gas rate (mmscf/day/ft or mmsm3/day/m),
MDORATE= supplies a mass rate (lb/sec/ft or Kg/sec/m).

EXECUTE= For use with IPRCURVENAME=. If the supplied curve specifies a

complete Inflow Performance relationship, this subcode can be used to
render it executable.

PERMCURVENAM= or Specifies the name of an Oil/Water Relative Permeability table or curve

PERMCRVNAME= for the completion, as defined in (a) previous PERMCRV (p.666)
statement(s).

SATURATION= For use with PERMCURVENAME=. Allows the reservoir saturation value
to be specified. This results in the calculation of the watercut of the
produced fluid. If absent, the specified fluid watercut is used, and
reservoir saturation calculated from it.

HBALANCE= or Specifies the thermodynamic route for calculation of temperature/

ROUTE= enthalpy change consequent upon the DP across the completion. May

Keyword index
665
PIPESIM User Guide

be set to ISENTHALPIC, for constant enthalpy (the default), or

ISOTHERMAL, for constant temperature.

Examples
Example 1
This is a simple layer and point completion such as might appear as part of a larger multi-
completion model:

LAYER temp = 220 use = 'fluid A' label = 'Layer one'

WELLPI pwstatic = 3650 LPI=9.5

Example 2
This completion includes a coning relationship defined with . IPRCRV (p.658) , which must appear
first. LAYER follows because it references the curve name defined in the IPRCRV. Finally the
selected IPR, JONES, comes last:

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ= (0 ,1000,2000,3000,4000)

IFPCRV name=cc1 GLR= (300 ,300 ,550 ,600 ,620 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 WCUT= (10 ,10 ,18 ,22 ,30 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)
LAYER temp=240 F pres=4503 psia use='fluid B' inject=NO IPRCURV=cc1
label='Layer two'
JONES LA=1e-4 LB=3e-2

5.5.17 RESERVOIR
Main-code: RESERVOIR
This maincode is obsolete, please do not use it.

5.5.18 PERMCRV: Curves of Relative Permeability versus Saturation

(Optional)
Main-code: PERMCRV
The PERMCRV statement is an alternative to PERMTAB (p.667) . Both these statements allow a
table/curve of oil/water relative permiability to be entered as a function of water saturation. They
differ in the format of the statements: PERMTAB allows a tabular data entry format using multiple
statements, whereas PERMCRV offers subcodes that accept PIPESIM's multiple value syntax
(p.598). PERMCRV requires the curve to be given a name that can be referenced in one or more
subsequent completions.

NAME= Required. Defines the name of the curve. This name is then used on (a) subsequent
LAYER statement(s).

SAT= Water Saturation in the reservoir, as a ratio 0 to 1.

OIL= Oil relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

Keyword index
666
PIPESIM User Guide

WAT= Water relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

The complete definition of a curve requires all subcodes to be specified, but they may be spread
over 2 or 3 statements that reference the same curve name. NAME= must appear on all
statements.

Example
This example shows a table containing the same data as the example given for PERMTAB
(p.667) :

PERMCRV name=pc1 SAT = (0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 , 0.4 , 0.5 , 0.6, 0.7 , 0.8 ,
0.9 , 1 )
PERMCRV name=pc1 OIL = (0.9, 0.9, 0.9, 0.6 , 0.43, 0.35 , 0.2, 0.13, 0.07,
0 , 0 )
PERMCRV name=pc1 WAT = (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.05, 0.1 , 0.125, 0.2, 0.33, 0.44,
0.44, 0.44)
layer PERMCURV=pc1 temp = 185 F use = oil44 inject=no label = 'strat
bk'
ifppsse pwstatic = 4269 psia perm = 200 md thickness = 50 ft &
rade = 2000 ft skin = 2 diamwell = 5 in

5.5.19 PERMTAB: Tabulation of Relative Permeability versus Saturation

(Optional)
Main-code: PERMTAB
The PERMTAB statement is an alternative to PERMCRV. (p.666) Both statements allow entry of a
table of oil and water relative permeability against water saturation, in a different format.
Each PERMTAB statement holds a single data point. To complete the tabulation, at least four
statements are required. PERMTAB does not define an IPR relationship, it should only be used in
addition to the IFPPSSE maincode. If provided with any other IFP maincode it will be ignored.
Values should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order, as follows:

value 1 Water Saturation in the reservoir, as a ratio 0 to 1.

value 2 Oil relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

value 3 Water relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

Notes:
1. The PERMTAB table should be provided in the system profile immediately before the IFPPSSE
maincode.
2. No other maincode should appear in the body of the table
3. Values should be provided in increasing order of Water Saturation

Keyword index
667
PIPESIM User Guide

4. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more PERMTAB tables can be used to enter
data for each completion.

Example
This example shows a table containing the same data as the example given for PERMCRV
(p.666) :

! wsat oil rp water rp

permtab 0.0 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.1 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.2 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.3 0.6 0.05
permtab 0.4 0.43 0.1
permtab 0.5 0.35 0.125
permtab 0.6 0.2 0.2
permtab 0.7 0.13 0.33
permtab 0.8 0.07 0.44
permtab 0.9 0.0 0.44
permtab 1.0 0.0 0.44
layer temp = 185 F use = oil44 inject=no label = 'strat bk'
ifppsse pwstatic = 4269 psia perm = 200 md thickness = 50 ft &
rade = 2000 ft skin = 2 diamwell = 5 in

5.5.20 HVOGEL (Optional)

Main-code: HVOGEL

PWSTATIC=

AOFP= Absolute open flow potential

RF= Recovery factor

5.5.21 FORCHHEIMER (Optional)

Main-code: FORCHHEIMER
see the JONES (p.652) maincode.

5.5.22 FRACTURE: Data for Hydraulic Fracture

Main-code: FRACTURE
This maincode specifies that the mechanical and dynamic skin factors are to be calculated from
the details of the well fracture configuration provided. Note: The fracture options are only valid
when used in conjunction with the Pseudo-Steady-State or Transient equations (as defined under
the IFPPSSE and TRANSIENT main-codes).
The FRACTURE maincode is an alternative to the WCOPTION maincode, WCOPTION (p.654),
and is exclusive with it.

Keyword index
668
PIPESIM User Guide

PERMEABILITY= Average fracture permeability (md).

WIDTH= Average fracture width (feet or metres).

LENGTH= Fracture half-length (feet or metres).

RESAREA= Reservoir area (square feet or square metres).

TRANSIENT= Controls the Transient option. May be set to ON or OFF. Default OFF.

POROSITY= Reservoir porosity (dimensionless, a value between 0 and 1.) Ignored unless
TRANSIENT=ON.

COMPRESS= Reservoir compressibility (1/psi or 1/Bar). Ignored unless TRANSIENT=ON.

TIME= Elapsed time since start of production (hours). Ignored unless

TRANSIENT=ON.

CONDUCTIVITY=

5.5.23 TRANSIENT: Data for the Transient Inflow equation (Optional)

Main-code: TRANSIENT

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom
hole pressure at zero flow rate.

PERMEABILITY= Average formation permeability (md).

THICKNESS= Average formation thickness (metres or feet) .

RADEXTERNAL= Radius of external boundary of drainage area (metres or feet).

Default = 609.6 m or 2000 ft.

SKIN= Dimensionless skin factor. Default = 0.

DIAMWELLBORE= Wellbore diameter (inches or mm).

FLOWTYPE= Type of flow in well.

LIQ Liquid flow

GAS Gas flow

GASMETHOD=

PSEUDO Use pseudo pressure

SQUARED Use pressure squared

SOURCE=

Keyword index
669
PIPESIM User Guide

ST Use the stock tank flow formulation of the transient IPR equation
(default)

RES Use the reservoir flow formulation of the transient IPR equation

BPCORRECTION= Allows user to choose whether to apply the Vogel correction

below the bubble point.

ON Applies Vogel correction.

OFF Does not apply Vogel correction.

PICOEFFICIEN= Vogel coefficient for Vogel correction. Default = 0.8.

DSKINLIQUID= Dynamic skin for liquid phase. Default = 0.

DSKINGAS= Dynamic skin for gas phase. Default = 0.

DRAINAGESKIN=

POROSITY= Porosity of the reservoir, fraction (0 - 1)

COMPRESSIBIL= Total system compressibility (1/psi or 1/bar).

TIME= Time since the well started to flow, hours.

SWAPTOPSS=

ON

OFF

5.6 SYSTEM DATA

PIPE (p.698) Pipe Dimensions
INLET (p.618) System Inlet Data
EQUIPMENT (p.433) Equipment Data
NODE (p.696) System Profile Data
Changing Parameters within the System Profile (p.602)
SLUG (p.635) Slug Calculation Options
COMPRESSOR (p.677) Compressor
CHOKE (p.671) Choke
EXPANDER (p.682) Expander
HEATER (p.685) Heater/Cooler
PUMP (p.700) Pump
ESP (p.700) Electrical submersible Pump

Keyword index
670
PIPESIM User Guide

PCP (p.452) Progressive Cavity Pump

MPUMP (p.695) Multiphase Pump
PUMPCRV (p.694) Pump Performance Curves
COMPCRV (p.676) Compressor Performance Curves
SEPARATOR (p.705) Separator
EROSION (p.634) Erosion Rate and Velocity
CORROSION (p.634) Corrosion Rate
COMPLETION (p.647) Completion Profile Delimiter
TUBING (p.647) Tubing Profile Delimiter
FLOWLINE (p.647) Flowline Profile Delimiter
RISER (p.647) Riser Profile Delimiter
FMPUMP (p.684)
REINJECTOR (p.703)
MPBOOSTER (p.694)

5.6.1 CHOKE (Optional)

Also refer to Choke Theory (p.434)
Main-code: CHOKE
All subcodes are optional unless noted otherwise:

DBEAN= Required. Diameter of the choke bean (mm or inches)

DBEAN64= An alternative to DBEAN=, allows the bean diameter to be

specified in units of 1/64 in.

CCORR= Selects the Critical flow correlation. May be one of:

GILBERT Gilbert (p.441) correlation

ROS Ros (p.441) correlation

BAXENDELL Baxendell (p.441) correlation

ACHONG Achong (p.441) correlation

PILEHVARI Pilehvari (p.441) correlation

ASHFORD Ashford and Pierce (p.440) correlation

ASHFORDT Sachdeva (p.440) correlation

POETBECK Poetmann and Beck (p.440) correlation

OMANA Omana (p.440) correlation

Keyword index
671
PIPESIM User Guide

THEORY or (default) The MECHANISTIC choke model is purely

MECHANISTIC theoretical, based on a combination of Bernoulli's equation
with an equation of continuity. Advanced users may wish to'
fine-tune' the model, or override some of the calculated
values, by means of the sub-codes CD, CSP, CPCV, YCRIT,
GASCP,and LIQCP.

USER User-supplied (p.441) correlation. This uses the same

equation as the Gilbert,Ros (p.441) and so on correlations,
but with parameters supplied with the subcodes A=, B= C=
and E=.

SCCORR= Selects the required sub-critical flow correlation. Maybe one

of:

ASHFORD = Ashford and Pierce (p.440) correlation

MECHANISTIC (default) The MECHANISTIC choke model (see above).

API14B This is a special-case of the MECHANISTIC model, wherein

the GAS and Liquid Csp values are preset to 0.9 and 0.85
respectively.

CPRATIO= Pressure ratio at which flow through choke becomes critical.

(Default = 0.53). (It is also possible to force PIPESIM to
calculate the Critical Pressure Ratio; to do this, enter
CPRATIO=0.0.)

TOL= Percentage tolerance, for identification of critical flow

conditions. (Default 0.5%)

CD= Discharge coefficient (default = 0.6). This value is used to

calculate the flow coefficient, CSP.

CSP= Flow coefficient. This is normally calculated by PIPESIM, but

can be overridden, if desired, by use of this sub-code. The
valid range is 0 to 1.3, typically it is 0.6. It is used to calculate
the pressure drop.

CPCV=
/
Fluid-specific heat ratio, γ = CP CV . This is normally
calculated by PIPESIM, but can be overridden if desired. The
valid range is 0.7 to 2. Typically it is 1.26 for a natural gas, for
a diatomic gas it is 1.4. It is used to calculate the critical
pressure ratio, if CPRATIO=0.0 is specified.

YCRIT= Gas expansion factor at critical flow. This is normally

calculated by PIPESIM, but can be overridden if desired. The
valid range is 0.5 to 1. It is used to modify the pressure drop
equation to allow for gas compressibility.

Keyword index
672
PIPESIM User Guide

GASCSP= Flow coefficient for the gas phase. This is normally equal to
the value calculated or input for CSP, but can be overridden if
desired. For API14B compatibility, set it to 0.9.

LIQCSP= Flow coefficient for the liquid phase. This is normally equal to
the value calculated or input for CSP, but can be overridden if
desired. For API14B compatibility, set it to 0.85.

CRITERION= Allows the reasons for identification of critical, and

supercritical, flow to be defined. This subcode will accept one
or more of the following values, supplied in multiple value
syntax (p.595) :

PRATIO Pressure ratio < critical pressure ratio (default)

FLOWRATE Flowrate flowrate at critical flow

SONICUP Upstream velocity sonic

SONICDOWN Downstream velocity sonic

ALL All of the above

NONE The value NONE will effectively prevent the identification of

critical and supercritical flow, thus flow will always be
subcritical. NONE should be used for API14B compatibility.

VERBOSE= ON or OFF (Default OFF). Allows detailed choke calculation output for the
MECHANISTIC correlation. The detailed output appears on
the user's terminal screen and on the primary output page.
This output is intended primarily to aid the development and
debugging of the choke model, but can also be of use to the
advanced user.

SCADJUST ON or OFF If ON, the selected sub-critical correlation is adjusted to

ADJUSTSC= ensure it predicts a flowrate at critical pressure ratio that
matches that predicted by the critical correlation. Default is
OFF.

A=, B=, C=, E= Parameters for the USER critical correlation.

IDPIPE= or The diameter of the upstream pipe section (in or mm). It is

DPIPE= or used to calculate the Diameter Ratio Δ (For more information,
PIPEID= refer to Choke Geometry (p.434).) This subcode is required
only if the choke is present in a branch and there is no other
accompanying pipe equipment. If the subcode is provided,
PIPESIM uses that value instead of the ID from any existing
upstream pipe.

MAXMASS= Maximum mass rate (lb/sec or Kg/sec).

Keyword index
673
PIPESIM User Guide

MAXGAS= Maximum gas rate (mmscfd or mmsm3d).

MAXLIQUID= Maximum gross liquid rate (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

MAXOIL= Maximum oil rate (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

MAXWATER= Maximum water rate (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

Note: Notes for rate limit subcodes:

• All rate limit values refer to the fluid at stock-tank pressure and temperature, 14.7 psia and 60F.
There is no provision for limiting phase flowrates at flowing or in-situ pressure and temperature.
• Application of any rate limit will result in the choke bean diameter being reduced from its
supplied value (in the DBEAN= subcode).This will cause an additional pressure drop in the
system or branch.
• Any combination of rate limits may be specified. The choke will be sized to ensure that none of
them are exceeded.
• In a single-branch model, the rate limits will be applied at the choke where they are specified.
• In a network model, the limits will be "promoted" to the network branch level, and will be treated
as though they were specified on the BRANCH (p.764) statement. The network solution
algorithm will apply the rate limits at the inlet of the branch containing the choke.
• In a network model, the rate limits will apply regardless of the direction of fluid flow in the
branch

The choke model will calculate the pressure ratio across the choke for the current flow rate. The
pressure ratio calculated is then categorized in one of 3 ways:
Subcritical
The pressure ratio (Pout/Pin) is higher than the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM continues
the case with the calculated pressure drop.
Critical
The pressure ratio is within the tolerance of the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM continues
the case with the calculated pressure drop, and writes an explanatory message to all
output pages. Pressures calculated in the profile from this point on represent maximum
values rather than true values; in reality, the pressures could be less than those reported.
The reason for this is that in critical flow, the flow rate is independent of the system's
downstream pressure.
Supercritical
The pressure ratio is lower than the critical pressure ratio. This represents a situation that
cannot occur in reality, therefore PIPESIM will abort the case or iteration. In a non-iterative
case, this will result in a CASE ABORTED message, but in an iterative case, a further
iteration is started, at a higher inlet pressure or lower flow rate.
PIPESIM does not attempt to model the entire system analytically, rather it breaks it down into
small elements, each of which are then analyzed in turn to achieve the desired answer. Because

Keyword index
674
PIPESIM User Guide

the system's heat balance is calculated rigorously at every element, it is not possible for PIPESIM
to work backwards up the system profile from a known outlet pressure. Consequently, if the user
fixes the outlet pressure, an iterative solution to the case is required. For non-iterative cases,
PIPESIM starts its analysis of the profile with a fixed inlet pressure and flow rate. Iterative cases
are made up of several passes down the profile, with the iteration routine taking informed guesses
at the inlet pressure or flow rate; thus, for each separate iteration, the inlet pressure and flow rate
are effectively fixed, as for the non-iterative case.
When PIPESIM encounters a choke in the profile, it evaluates the pressure drop across the choke,
and labels it as one of critical, subcritical, or supercritical. The supercritical condition means that
the current flow rate cannot pass through the choke with the current upstream pressure: i.e., it is a
situation that cannot occur in reality. (Another example of such an impossible situation is a
negative pressure; PIPESIM must cope with this too). PIPESIM deals with this by aborting the case
or iteration. If the case is iterative, the iteration routine will then guess a lower flow rate or higher
inlet pressure, and another pass down the profile will begin. The critical condition is comparatively
difficult to hit; it means that, at the current pressure upstream of the choke, the flow rate is very
close to the maximum possible flow rate through the choke. When critical conditions exist, the flow
rate is independent of the downstream pressure. The subcritical condition needs no special
handling.
In an iterative case, it often happens that the user's specified outlet pressure cannot be met. This
occurs when a choke in the profile is in critical flow. Any increase in the flow rate will result in
supercritical flow through the choke, and so this sets an upper limit for the iteration routine.
However, the outlet pressure for the flow rate that gives critical flow might be much higher than that
required. Normally in this situation, the iteration routine would increase the flow rate and try again,
but the presence of the choke in critical flow makes this pointless. Therefore, the iteration routine
considers the case to have converged on a solution, and prints the case results. The pressure
profile on the downstream side of the choke, while it does not represent the actual required
solution, nevertheless represents the maximum pressure that can be achieved there; in reality, the
pressures will be lower.
A wellhead choke or bean is used to control the production rate from a well. In the design of tubing
and well completions one must ensure that neither the tubing nor the perforations control the
production from the well. The flow capacity of the tubing and perforations always should be greater
than the inflow performance behavior of the reservoir. It is the choke that is designed to control the
production rate from a well. Wellhead chokes usually are selected so that fluctuations in the line
pressure downstream of the choke have no effect on the well flow rate. To ensure this condition,
flow throughout the choke must be at critical flow condition; that is, flow through the choke is at
acoustic velocity. For this condition to exist, downstream line pressure must be approximately 0.55
or less of the tubing or upstream pressure. Under this conditions the flow rate is a function of the
upstream or tubing pressure only.
Chokes are subjected to sand and gas cutting as well as asphalt and wax deposition, which
changes the shape and size of the choke. This then could result in considerable error when
compared to calculate values of choke for a standard choke size. A small error in the choke size
caused by a worn choke can produce a much larger error in the predicted oil rate. Thus a 'cut'
choke could result in estimated oil rates considerably lower than measured.
From the inflow performance relationship of a well and by knowing the tubing size in the well, the
tubing pressure curve for various flow rates can be calculated.

Keyword index
675
PIPESIM User Guide

5.6.2 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance

curves
Main-code: PUMPCRV or COMPCRV
Centrifugal pump and compressor performance curves are specified as a range of head and
efficiency or power values versus volumetric flow rates. These values should be specified before
the profile, and each curve is given a name so it can be referenced on a subsequent PUMP or
COMPRESSOR statement.

NAME= Required: The name of the curve, for referencing on a subsequent PUMP or
COMPRESSOR statement.

SPEED= The speed for which this curve was generated. (rpm)

FREQUENCY= The frequency for which this curve was generated. (Hz)

Q= Values of flow rate, supplied as a multiple value set (p.595) . Flowrates are
measured in volumetric terms at the flowing pressure and temperature at the inlet
to the device. For a pump curve, units are bbl/day or m3/day; for a compressor
curve, they are ft 3/min or m3/sec. (See note below).

FLOWRATE= Synonym for Q =.

HEAD= Values of head, supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). For a pump curve, units
are feet or metres. For a compressor curve they are ft-lbf/lbm (foot-pounds force
per pound mass) or Kj/kg. Note that the conversion factor between ft-lbf/lbm and
feet is 1.

EFFICIENCY= Values of efficiency (%), supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). (Default is
100%). Exclusive with POWER=.

POWER= Values of power (hp or kw), supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). Exclusive
with EFFICIENCY=.

STAGES= For a Pump curve only, the number of stages for which this curve is defined
(normally 1).

WHEELS= For a compressor curve only, the number of compressor wheels for which this
curve is defined.

The multiple value sets (p.595) supplied for Q=, HEAD=, and EFF= or POWER= sub-codes must
contain at least 3, and no more than 30 values, separated by commas, and enclosed in
parentheses. The values need not be entered in ascending or descending order, however there is
a strict one-for-one correspondence between the values in each list, based on their position. Each
list must contain the same number of values.
Since the multiple value lists can be quite lengthy, they may be supplied across more than one line
in the input file. This can be achieved either by use of the continuation character &, or by repeating
the maincode and curve name on each line. The examples below illustrate this, they both have the
same effect:

Keyword index
676
PIPESIM User Guide

Examples
Example 1

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600

PumpCrv name = GN7000 Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,
9000 ,10666.7)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,
2338.76,971.734)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 eff = (23.6865 ,
55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

Example 2

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600 &

Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,10666.7) &
head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,2338.76,971.734) &
eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

5.6.3 COMPRESSOR Compressor (Optional)

Main-code: COMPRESSOR
Sub-codes: TYPE, ROUTE, POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER, EFF, NAME, SPEED, WHEELS,
STONEWALL VERBOSE

TYPE= COMPRESSOR type.

CENTRIFUGA Centrifugal compressor

ROUTE= ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil

models the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic exponent
in the compression equations is assumed to be constant with a
value equal to 1.26. For compositional models the heat capacity
ratio is calculated using the relationship: Cp = Cv - R The heat
capacity is obtained at the average of the compressor suction and
discharge conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C

p/C v) is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC
compression. This is the default for Black Oil cases.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is

isoentropic compression from suction to discharge pressures.
This option is valid for compositional models only, where it is also
the default.

POUT= Discharge pressure from the compressor (bara or psia) (default

20,000 psia)

Keyword index
677
PIPESIM User Guide

DP= Pressure differential across the compressor (bar or psi) (default

10,000 psi)

PRATI= Compressor pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available for compression (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the compression (default = 100%)

NAME= The name of a previously specified Compressor Curve (see the

COMPCRV (p.676) maincode)

SPEED= Speed at which the compressor will run. This is only useful when
a compressor curve name has been specified. (rpm) (default
unlimited)

WHEELS=

STONEWALL=

VERBOSE=

Notes:
1. At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER and SPEED should be supplied. If
2 or more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.
2. If a compressor curve name is supplied, the speed may also be specified. This is used to adjust
the supplied curve against its specified speed (as set with SPEED (p.676) = on the COMPCRV
(p.676) maincode). The adjustment is done using the so called affinity or fan laws, which state
that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is proportional to square of speed, and
power is proportional to cube of speed".
3. In order to avoid confusion with the COMPOSITION main code, the minimum abbreviation
acceptable for COMPRESSOR is COMPR.

5.6.4 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump

Main-code: RODPUMP or CVFMD
The RODPUMP statement allows the outline specification for a Rod- or Beam-pump to be
supplied.
The volumetric rate of the pump may be defined by one of three methods:
• Nominal Rate: Using the NOMLIQRATE keyword
• Stroke Length X Plunger Diameter X Speed: Using the STROKELENGTH, DIAMETER and
SPEED keywords (most common)
• Volume X Speed: Using the VOLUME and SPEED Keywords

Keyword index
678
PIPESIM User Guide

A rod-pump is an example of a Constant Volume Fluid Motive Device (CVFMD). CVFMDs are
fixed-volume, positive-displacement pumps or compressors designed to move liquids, gases or 2-
phase mixtures. Other notable CVFMD examples are: Progressive cavity pumps, Twin screw
multiphase boosters, and reciprocating compressors. The statement allows a simplistic simulation
of such a device to be performed.

NOMLIQRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m3/day or bbl/day)

SPEED= The pump speed, in strokes per minute. In conjunction with VOLUME=, this
is an alternative to the nominal rate.

STROKELENGTH= Effective length of the stroke at the plunger location, NOT the polished rod.
When multiplied by the plunger diameter, defines the volume of liquid moved
with each stroke (m or ft).

DIAMETER= Diameter of the plunger which when multiplied by the stroke length, defines
the volume of liquid moved with each stroke (mm or in)

VOLUME= The swept volume of the pump cylinder, i.e. its cross-section area multiplied
by the stroke length (bbl or m3). In conjunction with SPEED=, this is an
alternative to the nominal rate.

SLIPCOEF= A coefficient to specify the change in flowrate with respect to Delta pressure
(m3/day/bar or bbl/day/psi). This is used to compute the pressure rise across
the device when the actual flowrate is less than the specified nominal rate.

MAXDP= Maximum pressure rise the device is allowed to exhibit (psi or bar). This is
used to prevent excess rod loading.

MAXPOWER= Maximum power the device is allowed to draw (hp or kw). This is used to
prevent excess rod loading.

EFFICIENCY= Overall efficiency of the pump which is used to compute the power
requirement.

RODDIAMETER= The Diameter of the drive rod (in or mm). The drive rod will be assumed to
exist in the downstream pipe or tubing, and will stretch up to the wellhead or
the end of the tubing. The fluid will flow in the annular space between the
tubing ID and the rod OD. The rod diameter can be adjusted in downstream
pipe sections by use of the RODDIAM= subcode on the PIPE (p.698)
statement, this is useful to simulate taper rods.

NOMINALRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m3/sec or ft3/min). This is the same
information as NOMLIQRATE= but in different units, more suited to other
types of CVFMD.

Keyword index
679
PIPESIM User Guide

5.6.5 EQUIPMENT Generic Equipment

Main-code: EQUIPMENT
The EQUIPMENT maincode may be used to simulate a generic unit operation in which the
pressure and/or temperature of the stream are modified.

DP= Pressure gain (positive), or loss (negative). (Bar or psi). NB. In a network model,
the DP is assumed to follow the flow direction in the branch, so if the branch flow
reverses, the DP will change sign. This can be controlled with DPIFD=, see
below. See note 2

DPIFD= "DP is Independent of Flow Direction". Set this to YES to ensure the sign of the
dp supplied with DP= is independent of branch flow direction in a network model.
Default is NO, thus if the branch flow reverses, the dp will change sign. An
example of a device whose DP is direction -independent is a choke. An example
of a direction-dependent DP is a vertical section of pipe.

POUT= or Equipment outlet set pressure (bara or psia). NB. In a network model, the
SETP= imposition of a set pressure is likely to prevent the model from converging. In a
single-branch model, if the outlet pressure and flowrate are fixed, the use of
SETP= will cause an input data error. See note 2

PRATIO= Pressure Ratio: the equipment outlet pressure is set to the specified multiple of
the inlet pressure. Exclusive with MAXP=, MINP=, SETP= and DP=. See note 2.

MAXP= Maximum pressure (psia or bara). If the pressure at the equipment is greater than
the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted down to the limit. See note 3.

MINP= Minimum pressure (psia or bara). If the pressure at the equipment is less than the
supplied limit, then it will be adjusted up to the limit. See note 3.

ROUTE= Allows the thermodynamic route to be specified, for calculation of fluid

temperature change consequent upon changes in pressure. Exclusive with DT=
and SETT= ;can be used with DUTY=. See note 4. Available choices are:

ISENTHALPIC or ADIABATIC: Constant enthalpy (default)

ISENTROPIC or MOLLIER: Constant entropy (compositional cases only)

ISOTHERMAL: Constant temperature

DT= Temperature gain (+ve), or loss (-ve). (C or F). See note 1.

TOUT= or Outlet set temperature ( &deg;C or&deg;F). See note 1.

SETT=

DUTY= Duty to be used to raise the temperature of the fluid (KW or Btu/hr). See notes 1,
4 and 6.

MAXT= Maximum temperature (F or C). If the temperature at the equipment is greater

than the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted down to the limit. See note 7.

Keyword index
680
PIPESIM User Guide

MINT= Minimum temperature (F or C). If the temperature at the equipment is less than
the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted up to the limit See note 7.

NAME= Defines the NAME of a user-supplied equipment entrypoint, as defined in a prior

USERDLL statement. Note: The presence of this subcode causes all others
(except OPTIONS=) to be ignored.

OPTIONS= A character string that is supplied to the user-supplied equipment routine. Must be
used with NAME=.

VERBOSE= Controls the appearance of the one-line output in the report. may be set to ON or
OFF, default ON.

Notes:
1. The subcodes SETT=, DT= and DUTY= are mutually exclusive.
2. The subcodes SETP=, DP= and PRATIO= are mutually exclusive.
3. If a MAXP= or MINP= is specified, the limit is applied AFTER any pressure change resulting
from a SETP=, DP= or PRATIO=, and BEFORE any temperature or enthalpy change is applied
or calculated.
4. If SETT= or DT is specified, the fluid outlet temperature will be set accordingly, otherwise it will
be calculated using the selected (or defaulted) thermodynamic ROUTE= and DUTY=.
5. If SETP=, DP= or PRATIO= are specified in the absence of TOUT and DT, the choice of
thermodynamic route is used to calculate the fluid outlet temperature. To simulate chokes and
to predict Joule-Thomson cooling across pressure reduction valves etc. the most appropriate
route is ISENTHALPIC (the default).
6. If a DUTY is specified, the corresponding fluid enthalpy change will be calculated, and added to
that resulting from any pressure change using the selected ROUTE=. The outlet temperature is
then adjusted accordingly.
7. If a MAXT= or MINT= is specified, the limit is applied AFTER any temperature change resulting
from any other subcode.
8. All subcodes are optional.

Examples
Example 1
A pipeline compressor station (located at distance 120 Km and elevation 20 m) raises the pipeline
pressure 35 bar and after coolers cool the compressed gas down to 40 C before it reenters the
pipeline. Pipeline gas is withdrawn to power the compressors, so a RATE statement is used to
subtract 2.5 kg/sec from the pipeline. The following three lines define the compressor station:

NODE DIST= 120 km ELEV= 20 m

EQUIPMENT DP = 35 bar SETT = 40 C
RATE ADDMASS = -2.5 kg/sec

Keyword index
681
PIPESIM User Guide

Example 2
A wellhead choke is to be set to reduce the calculated wellhead pressure to 60 bara. The program
will calculate the resulting temperature change across the choke (assuming an isoenthalpic
expansion) :

EQUIPMENT SETP = 60 bar

5.6.6 EXPANDER Expander (Optional)

Main-code: EXPANDER

DP= Pressure differential across the expander (bar or psi) (default 10,000)

POUT= Discharge pressure from the expander (bara or psia) (default 20 psia)

PRATIO= Expander pressure ratio (Pin/Pout ; default 1000)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the expansion (%) (Default = 100%)

POWER= Power required from expansion (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

ROUTE=

ADIABATIC Adiabatic expansion is performed (default). For black oil models

the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) used as the adiabatic exponent in
the expansion equations is assumed to be constant with a value
equal to 1.26 . For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is
calculated using the relationship : Cp = Cv - R. The heat capacity
is obtained at the average of the expander suction and discharge
conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic expansion is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C p/C

v) is calculated in a similar manner to that outlined above for
ADIABATIC expansion. This is the default for Black Oil cases.

MOLLIER Expansion is based upon the Mollier method, that is isoentropic

expansion from suction to discharge pressures. This option is
valid for compositional models only, where it is the default.

UNDEFINED Undefined

NAME=

SPEED=

WHEELS=

STONEWALL=

Keyword index
682
PIPESIM User Guide

ON

OFF

VERBOSE=

ON

OFF

Note: At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, and POWER should be supplied. If 2 or
more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.

5.6.7 FITTING : Valves and Fittings

Main-code: FITTING
Pipe fittings can be modeled in PIPESIM using the FITTING keyword. Either a resistance
coefficient should be specified, or the type and dimensions of the fittings should be specified and
the resistance will be calculated.

TYPE= "GLOBE-CONV" Globe Valve Conventional

"GLOBE-YPAT" Globe Valve Y-Pattern

"ANGLE-CONV" Angle Valve Conventional

"CHECK-SWING1" Check Swing Valve Conventional

"CHECK-SWING2" Check Swing Valve Clearway

"CHECK-LIFT1" Check Lift Globe Valve

"CHECK-LIFT2" Check Lift Angle Valve

"BALL-VALVE" Ball Valve

"GATE-VALVE" GateValve

"ELBOW-STD45" Standard 45 degree Elbow

"ELBOW-STD90" Standard 90 degree Elbow

"ELBOW-LR90" Standard 90 degree Long Radius Elbow

"ELBOW-SR90" Standard 90 degree Short Radius Elbow

"TEE-RUN" Tee - Flow through run

"TEE-BRANCH" Tee - Flow through branch

Keyword index
683
PIPESIM User Guide

NOMINALD Nominal diameter (mm or inches)

MINORD= Minor internal diameter (mm or inches)

MAJORD= Major internal diameter (mm or inches)

DANGLE= Deflection angle

KVALUE = Resistance coefficient

If the resistance K is not specified it will be calculated. In this case the nominal diameter (p.562)
must be specified, together with the internal diameter of the fitting. Some fittings require two
internal diameters to be specified, the minor diameter d1 at a constriction and the major diameter
d2.

If the resistance is specified, one of the internal diameters (d1 or d2) should also be specified. If
both internal diameters are specified, the resistance is assumed to apply at the major internal
diameter d2, that is K = K 2.
See the Technical description (p.442) for further details.

EXAMPLES
The fitting keyword can be inserted between node keywords in a pipe. The fitting is placed
immediately after the preceding node.

...
node dist = 0 elev = 0
node dist = 1000 elev = 0
fitting kvalue = 1.6 majord = 4.815
node dist = 1010 elev = 0
fitting type = "ANGLE-CONV" nominald = 5 majord = 5.047 minord = 4 dangle =
45
node dist = 1200 elev = 0
...

5.6.8 FMPUMP (Optional)

Main-code: FMPUMP

5.6.9 FRAMO 2009 (Optional)

See also Multiphase boosting technology (p.457), Framo 2009 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster
(p.103).
Main-code: FRAMO2009
This keyword requests a Framo pump, modelled with the framo2009 dll provided by Framo.

POUT= Discharge pressure from the pump (bara or psia)

Keyword index
684
PIPESIM User Guide

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi)

PRATIO= Pump pressure ratio

POWER= Power available for pump (KW or hp)

LIMSPEED= Maximum pump speed (valid range 0 – 1.0)

TUNE= Tuning parameter (valid range 0.7 – 1.5)

QRECIN= Flow in recirculation

NPARA= Number of pumps in parallel (valid range 1-999999)

NAME= The name of the pump

FILE= Framo file containing pump performance curves. This sub-code must be specified.
Only the file name should be specified, not the path. The file must exist in the
framo09 sub-directory of the PIPESIM data directory (default location “C:\Program
files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\data\framo09).

PLOT Requests a pump performance plot. A plot file called “file_n.pfm” will be created in
the model directory, where “file” is the pump name specified by the NAME sub-
code and “n” is the case number.
The pump name should be unique, otherwise plot files will over write each other.
If the NAME sub-code is not given, the plot file will be called “framopump_n.pfm”.
Pump performance plot files can be viewed by PSPlot.

EXAMPLE
framo2009 file='framopump.dat' name='test' dp=100 plot

5.6.10 HEATER Heater/Cooler (Optional)

Main-code: HEATER

DP= Pressure drop across the heater (bar or psi) (Default =0)

POUT= Discharge pressure from the heater (bara or psia)

PRATIO= Pressure ratio across the heater

TOUT= Discharge temperature from the heater (oC or oF)

DT= Temperature drop/increase through the heater/cooler (oC or oF)

VERBOSE=

STATUS=

Keyword index
685
PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. The subcodes TOUT DT and DUTY are mutually exclusive only one should be supplied.
Specification of the outlet temperature or DT will result in the calculation of the duty required to
meet these conditions. If the DUTY is supplied PIPESIM will calculate the outlet temperature.
2. The subcodes POUT and DP are mutually exclusive and optional. Changes in pressure across
a heater are modeled using an isoenthalpic route; if large pressure changes are required you
are better served by modeling the DP with a separate EQUIPMENT maincode which gives a
choice of route.

5.6.11 GASLIFT: Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells

The GASLIFT statement is required to simulate the multiple gas lift valves resulting from a Gas Lift
Design in the PIPESIM GUI. It is also used to calculate the Deepest point of Injection (DIP).
GASLIFT should be entered in the initial part of the input file, ie. before the profile or the first NODE
statement. It specifies generic gas lift data such as casing head pressure (CHP), injection gas flow
rate and properties, etc. The profile may then include one or more INJPORT statements to specify
the position and properties of the gas lift valves.
Two modes of operation are available, viz. Deepest Injection Point (DIP), and Simulate; these are
selected with the MODE= subcode.
In DIP mode, PIPESIM will calculate the deepest possible injection point for the system as
specified. Any existing injection points and gas lift valves will be ignored. Required subcodes for
this mode are INJGASRATE=, DP=, CHP= and TEMP=.
In SIMULATE mode, PIPESIM will accept a set of gas lift valves positioned at various depths in the
system profile. Each valve has its associated settings such as Port diameter, test rack Pressure
Setting. etc. The program will simulate the entire system as specified, determining which valve(s)
are operating, and calculate the injection gas flowrate through each valve. Required subcodes for
this mode are MAXQ=, CHP=, and TEMP=.
For either mode, the recommended job will fix the reservoir pressure and outlet (wellhead)
pressure, and calculate the system flowrate; i.e., use ITERN (p.616) TYPE=LFLOW. (Other
iteration types are more difficult to use since the design of the gaslift system constrains the
Injection valves to a narrow range of operating pressure, outside which no gas injection will occur,
rendering meaningful results unlikely.)

Main-code: GASLIFT
MODE= Required. Specifies the operational mode for the gaslift system. Available
modes are:

SIMULATE: requests a rigorous simulation of the system with a set of gas

lift valves installed. The important feature of this mode is that it calculates
the total flowrate of gas that is injected into all the valves, using the
positions and settings of the installed gas lift valves. Be aware however,
that this mode is very sensitive to the exact position and settings of the
valves. Consequently its results are usually difficult to interpret due to the

Keyword index
686
PIPESIM User Guide

likleyhood multiple solutions, or no solution, to the model cases. For this

reason, PIPESIM uses one of the DIP modes instead (see below). Injection
valves must be provided at appropriate depths with INJPORT (p.689)
statements.

DIP: requests a calculation of the Deepest Injection Point (DIP). In this

mode, any existing Injection valves will be ignored. The program will
simulate the injection of gas at the maximum possible depth for the given
system parameters, and report the calculated DIP depth. In this mode the
fixed flowrate of gas as specified with INJGASRATE= is injected at the
deepest depth.

DIP3: similar to DIP mode, but the calculated deepest injection depth is
constrained to be coincident with the position of one of the existing injection
valves specified with INJPORT statements. See note 2.

MAXFLOWRATE= or Required for MODE=SIMULATE. The maximum available lift gas flow rate
MAXQ= (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d).

TEMPERATURE= Required. The temperature of the lift gas (F or C) at the casing head. The
program will adjust this by a formula that takes account of geothermal
temperature gradient and production temperature to calculate the annulus
temperature for each injection valve.

CHP= Required. The casing head pressure (psia or bara) at the wellhead where
the lift gas is supplied to the well. The program will adjust this by the
pressure of the static head of gas in the annulus between the wellhead and
the injection port to calculate the annulus pressure for each injection valve.

DP= Required for MODE=DIP. The minimum allowable pressure difference

across the injection valve. The valve will be positioned at a depth that
ensures the DP between casing and tubing is at least this value. (psi or
bar)

FLOWRATE= or For MODE=DIP. The flow rate of lift gas (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d) to be
INJGASRATE= injected. See note 1.

FTEMPERATURE= Optional. A factor (f) that allows the injection port temperature (Tp) to be
interpolated between the casing gas temperature (Tc) and the production
wellbore temperature (Tw) using the formula Tp = Tc*(1-f) + Tw*f. Can be
set to a value between 0 and 1, default 1. The injection port temperature is
important in gas-charged valves because it determines the dome pressure
and hence the valve opening and closing pressures.

PLOT= Optional, can be set to OFF or ON, default OFF. Produces a plot file
representing the performance characteristics of each valve. One file is
produced for each valve, these are named model.Vxx, where model is the
model file core name, and xx is the valve number (shallowest being 01).
The valve performance is exercised over a range of casing and tubing
pressures, and the plot typically has tubing pressure on the X-axis against

Keyword index
687
PIPESIM User Guide

gas flowrate in the Y-axis, with the casing pressure giving a number of
different lines.

MINFLOWRATE= or Optional, for MODE=SIMULATE. The lower limit of gas flowrate to be

MINQ= injected (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d). If the simulation for any case predicts less
than this gas flowrate, additional gas will be injected at the shallowest
valve. This simulates the effect of the operator increasing CHP to inject
more gas.

FLUIDNAME= or Optional. The name of the fluid (Black Oil or Compositional) representing
USE= the lift gas fluid specification, as specified with a BEGIN FLUID (p.629)
block.

SGGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, the lift gas specific gravity. (Default = SG
of the produced gas).

KGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, The lift gas thermal conductivity. (Default
= K of the produced gas).

CPGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, The lift gas heat capacity. (Default = CP
of the produced gas).

METHOD= Optional. Specifies the equation used to calculate gas flowrate across the
valve. Allowable values are 1 for PIPESIM's standard mechanistic choke
correlation, and 2 for the Thornhill-Craver equation.

PVTFILE= Optional. For compositional fluids only, the name of the PVT file containing
the composition of the lift gas.

GLR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to make the production
fluid Gas Liquid Ratio (GLR) equal the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or sm3/
sm3) See note 1.

GOR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to make the production
fluid Gas Oil Ratio (GOR) equal the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3)
See note 1.

INJGLR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to increase the
production fluid Gas Liquid Ratio (GLR) by the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or
sm3/sm3) See note 1.

INJGOR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to increase the
production fluid Gas Oil Ratio (GOR) by the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or
sm3/sm3) See note 1.

MAXDEPTH= Optional, for MODE=DIP, limits the injection depth to the specified
maximum.

FRICTION= Optional, For Mode=DIP. Requests a rigorous treatment of injection gas

pressure profile resulting from friction in the annulus. This can make a

Keyword index
688
PIPESIM User Guide

significant difference to the calculated DIP when gas rate is high or annulus
cross-section area is small. Can be set to ON or OFF, default OFF.

U= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, specifies the overall Heat Transfer Coefficient

to be used for calculating injection gas temperature changes due to heat
exchange with the tubing and casing. (btu/hr/ft2/F or W/m2/C). Default 20
btu/hr/ft2/F.

IFACTOR= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, A factor (f) that allows the ambient
temperature (Ta) used in gas friction heat transfer calculations to be
interpolated between the ambient rock temperature (Tr) and the production
wellbore temperature (Tw) using the formula Ta = Tr*(1-f) + Tw*f. Can be
set to a value between 0 and 1, default 0.9.

PRINTF= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, requests detailed output from the simulation
of gas flow in the annulus. The resulting output pages are similar to those
produced for the production wellbore. Can be set to ON or OFF, default
ON.

SIP= Optional. Specifies the Surface Injection Pressure used for Alhanati Gas
Lift Instability Criteria calculation. (psia or bara)

Note:
1. The subcodes FLOWRATE=, GLR=, GOR=, INJGLR= and INJGOR= are mutually exclusive.
2. Any subcode valid for MODE=DIP is also valid for MODE=DIP3.

5.6.12 INJPORT Gas Lift Injection Valve

INJPORT statements specify the position of Gas Lift Injection Valves. In conjunction with the
GASLIFT (p.686) statement they allow a well with multiple injection valves to be simulated.
PIPESIM will calculate the production flowrate and the quantity of gas injected through each valve.
INJPORT statements should be positioned in the system profile immediately following the NODE
statement representing the desired position for each valve. In a typical gas lift design, the profile
will contain between 4 and 10 injection valves.
Main-code: INJPORT

DPORT= The diameter of the valve port (in. or mm). Required.

PTR= The Test Rack Pressure Setting for the valve, measured at test
rack conditions, that is 60 oF and 14.696 psia. This is the pressure
(applied to the casing side of the valve, with the tubing side open
to atmosphere) required to just open the valve. Required.

MODE= The valve's mode of operation. Required.

DUMMY

Keyword index
689
PIPESIM User Guide

ORIFICE

TUBING

IPO

PPO

CASING

AP2AB= The ratio of the Port Area to the Bellows Area, AP/AB, for the
valve. Required.

CV= The flow coefficient for the valve port. This is a value normally in
the range 0.4 to 1.6, used to characterize the port in the equation
for gas flow. The valve manufacturer usually measures this in the
laboratory. Optional, default 0.6.

TYPE= The construction type of the valve. (Optional,)

DUMMY

ORIFICE

BELLOWS Default

SPRING

LABEL= An identifier for the valve.

TF= Throttling factor for the valve (mscfd/psi or msm3d/bar). Optional,

if not supplied it will be calculated using an assumed value of (P
open-Pclose).

PCO= Experimental: the Casing Opening pressure for the valve. If

supplied this value will be used instead of the calculated value.

PTC= Experimental: the Tubing Closing pressure for the valve. If

supplied this value will be used instead of the calculated value.

PDT= Experimental: the Dome Pressure of the valve at operating

temperature. If supplied this value will be used instead of the
calculated value.

TEMPERATURE= Experimental: The valve operating temperature. If supplied this

value will be used instead of the calculated value.

The values of TYPE= and OPMODE= determine the characteristics of the valve.
A Bellows valve has a dome and bellows, which is charged with gas (usually nitrogen) in the test
rack to provide the required closing force on the valve plunger. The force exerted by the gas
charge depends on its pressure, which increases with temperature. Since the temperature where

Keyword index
690
PIPESIM User Guide

the valve is installed in the tubing is much higher than test rack temperature, this pressure
correction must be done using an accurate value for valve operating temperature if the valve
simulation is to be relied upon.
A Spring valve has a spring instead of a bellows to provide the closing force on the valve plunger.
The spring force is relatively insensitive to temperature variation.
An Orifice valve has no plunger, and is equivalent to a normal choke. It will always be open,
regardless of tubing and casing pressure, thus in theory not only can gas flow from casing to
tubing, but production fluid can also flow from tubing to casing. In practice this is not a problem as
static head limits fluid buildup in the casing. An orifice valve is sometimes specified as the deepest
injection valve, because it will not suffer from unwanted closure if the gas lift design no longer
matches the system operating parameters.
A dummy valve is a plug that passes no gas.
Bellows and spring valves are sensitive to both tubing and casing pressure to a greater or lesser
extent, depending on their construction and the way they are installed in the tubing string. The
objective of valve design, placement and test rack pressure setting is to achieve a desired
response to changes in tubing and casing pressure. These are called Modes of Operation, and
have the following names and meanings:
IPO:
Injection Pressure operated. Valve will respond only to changes in injection gas pressure.
Response is off-on rather than proportional.
PPO:
Production Pressure Operated. Valve will respond only to changes in tubing pressure.
Response is off-on rather than proportional.
TUBING:
Tubing-sensitive proportional response. Valve will respond predominantly to changes in
tubing pressure, exhibiting a proportional response.
CASING:
Casing-sensitive proportional response. Valve will respond predominantly to changes in
casing pressure, exhibiting a proportional response.

5.6.13 INJGAS: Injection Gas (Optional) and INJFLUID: Fluid Injection

INJGAS and INJFLUID allow the injection and mixing of a side-stream fluid. They both work for
Blackoil and Compositional fluids.
INJGAS simulates a single gas injection point, and allows a specified quantity of gas to be added
to the production fluid at any position. This quantity can be expressed in volume or ratio terms. It
differs from GASLIFT (p.686) in that it always injects the specified gas quantity, whereas GASLIFT
(p.686) will calculate how much gas is injected.
INJFLUID simulates a single fluid injection point, and allows the mixing of the main stream with a
side-stream of any required composition and phase. It allows a base pressure and temperature to
be specified for the side stream, this is used to fix the volume flowrate if specified as a gas or liquid
rate.

Keyword index
691
PIPESIM User Guide

INJGAS will only allow the injected fluid to be gas, it will apply certain sanity limits when working in
PIPESIM-NET mode, and it will calculate values for Alhanati Gas Lift Stability criteria. It also allows
injected gas properties such as SG, Cp and K to be defined for a black oil fluid.
Main-code: INJGAS or INJFLUID

GASRATE= Defines the flow rate of injection gas in volumetric terms (mmscf/d or
mmsm3/d).

MASSRATE= Defines the flow rate of injected fluid in mass terms (lb/sec or kg/sec).

LIQRATE= INJFLUID only. Defines the flow rate of injected fluid in volumetric terms of
its stock-tank liquid phase (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

FLOWRATE= or INJGAS only, a synonym for GASRATE=.

RATE=

GOR= or GLR= Defines the flowrate of injection gas in terms of Gas Liquid Ratio or Gas Oil
Ratio. Sufficient gas will be injected to adjust the produced fluid's GLR or
GOR to the specified value. If the fluid currently has a higher value, no gas
will be injected.

INJGLR= or Defines the flowrate of injection gas in terms of an increase in Gas Liquid
INJGOR= Ratio or Gas Oil Ratio. Sufficient gas will be injected to increase the
produced fluid's GLR or GOR by the specified value.

TEMP= or Temperature of injection fluid at the point of injection (F or C). If omitted,

IPTEMP= defaults to the temperature of the produced fluid at the injection point

SG= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Specific gravity of the
injection gas (default = Value of gas SG from produced fluid)

CP= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Heat capacity of injection
gas (default = Value of gas Cp from produced fluid)

KGAS= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Thermal conductivity of
injection gas (default = Value of gas K from produced fluid)

CHP= INJGAS only, Optional. Casing head pressure to be used for Alhanati Gas
Lift Stability Criteria calculation. (psia or Bara)

DSIC= INJGAS only, Optional. Diameter of the Surface Injection Choke. Used for
Alhanati Gas Lift Stability Criteria calculation (in. or mm). Exclusive with
SIP=.

IDCT= INJGAS only, optional: the presence of the IDCT= subcode signals that gas
injection is occurring through coiled tubing. The value supplied is the Internal
Diameter of the Coiled Tubing (in. or mm.). The Cullinder & Smith
correlation is used to calculate the DP in the injection string, this is
compared with the available Casing Head Pressure and tubing pressure,
and insufficient CHP will trigger an informative message. NB: Subsequent
flow up the tubing should be specified as ANNULAR, using an appropriate

Keyword index
692
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPE statement that supplies the correct annulus dimensions with AID= and
AOD= subcodes. Coiled tubing being used as a 'velocity string' (i.e. with no
injected gas) should be specified simply as annular flow with an appropriate
PIPE statement as above, there is no need for any INJGAS statement.

SIP= INJGAS only, optional. Surface Injection Pressure. Used for Alhanati gas Lift
Stability Criteria calculation. (psia or Bara).

DP= INJGAS only, Optional.. Injection port delta pressure (psia or Bara). used to
calculate casing pressure for Alhanait Gas Lift Stability Criteria calculation.
(psi or Bar). Exclusive with DPORT=.

DPORT= INJGAS only, Optional. Injection port diameter. Used for Alhanati gas Lift
Stability Criteria calculation. (in. or mm)

PVTFILE= Optional. For compositional fluids only, the name of a PVT file containing the
composition of the injected fluid. Exclusive with FLUIDNAME=, USE=, and
STREAMNAME=.

FLUIDNAME= or Optional. The name of the fluid (Black Oil or Compositional) representing the
USE= injected fluid specification, as specified with a BEGIN FLUID (p.629) block.
( A special-case fluid name of *SEP_DISCARD specifies that the injected
fluid specification and flowrate is obtained from the discard stream of a
separator (p.705) located somewhere upstream in the same branch. See
also STREAMNAME= below.). Exclusive with PVTFILE= and
STREAMNAME=.

HANDLE=

STREAMNAME= Optional, INJFLUID only. The name of the fluid stream representing the
injected fluid specification, as specified on the DISCARDNAME= subcode of
an upstream separator. The injected stream definition includes its fluid
definition (Black Oil or Compositional), flowrate, and enthalpy. This feature
provides the same functionality as *SEP_DISCARD described above, but in
addition ensures the fluid enthalpy is conserved. Multiple separated streams
may be re-injected within the same branch by ensuring they are defined with
unique names. Exclusive with PVTFILE=, FLUIDNAME= and USE=.

PRINT= Optional. Requests a verbose printout of the specification of the injected

fluid.

CHTEMP= INJGAS only, Optional. Injection gas temperature can be provided at the
casing head (wellhead) as an alternative to TEMP=. This will be corrected to
a temperature at the injection point by use of a formula that depends on
geothermal gradient and production temperature. (F or C)

LIMIT= or
LIMITMR=

Keyword index
693
PIPESIM User Guide

GLRLIMIT= or
LIMITGLR=

The quantity of gas or fluid to be injected must usually be specified, either as a volumetric or mass
rate, or as a ratio with the liquid phase of the produced fluid. Thus one of the subcodes
GASRATE=, MASSRATE=, LIQRATE= GOR=, GLR=, INJGOR= or INJGLR= should be specified.
However, if STREAMNAME= or *SEP_DISCARD is used, the flowrate is obtained from the
upstream separator..
Mixing of the injected and the produced fluid is assumed to occur at the pressure which pertains at
the injection point during the simulation. The temperature of the fluid after mixing is calculated by a
heat balance around the mixing point.
Alhanati gas-lift stability criteria are calculated for a gas lift system and added to the Plot file for use
by the Well Optimization feature, if sufficient information is provided on the INJGAS statement. Any
two of the subcodes SIP=, DPORT=, CHP=, DP= and DSIC= should be provided, preferably the
first two. The others will then be calculated.

5.6.14 MPBOOSTER (Optional)

Main-code: MPBOOSTER

TYPE= Multiphase pump type.

GENERIC

TWINSCREW

VENDOR

NAME= The pump name.

ROUTE=

ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil models

the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic exponent in the
compression equations is assumed to be constant with a value equal
to 1.26. For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is
calculated using the relationship: Cp = Cv - R. The heat capacity is
obtained at the average of the compressor suction and discharge
conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C p/C

v) is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC compression.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is isoentropic

compression from suction to discharge pressures. This option is valid
for compositional models only

POUT= Discharge pressure from the multiphase pump (bara or psia) (default
20,000 psia)

Keyword index
694
PIPESIM User Guide

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default 10,000 psi)

PRATIO= Multiphase pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

PUMPEFF= Efficiency of compression of the gas phase (default 100%)

SPEED= Pump speed

VISCORR=

STATUS= Status of the pump.

GENERIC

TWINSCREW

VENDOR

5.6.15 MPUMP Multiphase Pump (Optional)

Main-code: MPUMP

TYPE= Multiphase pump type.

CENTRIFUGA Centrifugal pump.

NAME= The pump name.

ROUTE=

ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil

models the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic
exponent in the compression equations is assumed to be
constant with a value equal to 1.26. For compositional models
the heat capacity ratio is calculated using the relationship: Cp
= Cv - R. The heat capacity is obtained at the average of the
compressor suction and discharge conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio

(C p/C v) is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC
compression.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is

isoentropic compression from suction to discharge pressures.
This option is valid for compositional models only

POUT= Discharge pressure from the multiphase pump (bara or psia)

(default 20,000 psia)

Keyword index
695
PIPESIM User Guide

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default

10,000 psi)

PRATIO= Multiphase pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

COMPEFF= Efficiency of pumping the liquid phase (default 100%)

PUMPEFF= Efficiency of compression of the gas phase (default 100%)

SPEED= Pump speed

STAGES=

STONEWALL=

ON

OFF

VERBOSE=

ON

OFF

TARGETGAS=

TARGETLIQUID=

TARGETMASS=

Note: At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, and POWER should be supplied. If 2 or
more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.

5.6.16 NODE System Profile Data (Required)

Main-code: NODE
The physical geometry of the pipeline system is defined by entering the distance and elevation
coordinates of each system node. A minimum of two nodes are required to define a system and
there is a maximum limit of 1,000 nodes.

Note: For the calculation of temperature and pressure profiles, PIPESIM internally subdivides the
section of pipe between each node into a number of segments. Normally 4 segments are created,
but this can be controlled from 1 to 50 if desired (see Options (p.604) ).

Keyword index
696
PIPESIM User Guide

DISTANCE= Horizontal distance coordinate of the node (km or feet).

ELEVATION= Vertical elevation coordinate of the node (m or feet).

MD= Measured Depth (m or feet)

TVD= True Vertical Depth (m or feet)

TEMP= Ambient temperature at the node ( oC or oF). If no value is entered, the

value will be calculate: see below.

U= Overall heat transfer coefficient relative to the pipe outside diameter

(W/m2/K or Btu/hr/ft2/ oF). If no value is entered the value from the
previous node is assumed. The U sub-code is not required if the heat
transfer coefficients are to be calculated by the program (if specified
they will be ignored)

LABEL= Node labels are for information only and can appear on any node card.
There is a maximum length limitation of 12 characters. The label should
be included in quotes if it contains delimiter characters (for example
blanks). If a node is labeled, it will appear on the Summary Output at
the end of the job.

MP or MPRESSURE= Specified measured pressure.

MT or Specified measure temperature.

MTEMPERATURE=

MH or MHOLDUP= Specified measured liquid holdup. For more information, see Friction
and Holdup factors (p.373).

Note: This parameter is only available for PIPESIM 2015.1 and later.

Note:
1. Each node may have either specification of DISTANCE= and ELEVATION= , or TVD= and
MD=, but not both. It is also possible to join together pipe sections with either specification, in
which case the nodes where the sections join are assumed to occupy the same position.
2. The ambient temperature is optional.
3. If it is omitted on MD/TVD nodes, it is assumed to be a point on a geothermal temperature
gradient, and its value is calculated by linear interpolation against TVD between known values
on either side. On the DIST/ELEV nodes however, the value from the previous node will be
used.
4. It is possible to place separate sections of pipe within the PIPESIM input file exactly as they
were measured, i.e. with their own particular X/Y datums, effectively a datum reset feature.
Datums are reset whenever a change of NODE card specification occurs (change from using

Keyword index
697
PIPESIM User Guide

DISTANCE= and ELEVATION= to MD= and TVD=), and when a supercode is used
(COMPLETION, TUBING, FLOWLINE, RISER NAPOINT, see Completion (p.647) and
NAPOINT (p.744) ) .
5. As with all other maincodes and subcodes, the node data keywords can be abbreviated down
to the minimum number of letters required to make them unique.
6. In addition, if distance and elevation is used, the subcodes can be omitted, as long as the data
is supplied in the correct order, viz distance, elevation, temperature, U, label. Blank fields
should be delimited by commas.
7. Zero length pipe sections can be defined, that is NODE cards with DISTANCE= and
ELEVATION= sub-codes the same as the previous one can be defined.

5.6.17 PIPE: Pipe or Tubing cross-section dimensions (Required)

Main-code: PIPE

ID= Pipe Internal diameter (mm or inches).

WT= Pipe wall thickness (Default = 12.7 mm or 0.5 inches)

ROUGHNESS= Pipe roughness (Default = 0.025 mm or .001 inches).

AID= Annulus inside Diameter (mm or inches). (Default = 0). See

notes below.

AOD= Annulus Outside Diameter (mm or inches). See notes below.

FLOWTYPE= Specifies the flowpath for a tubing/annulus system. May be:

TUBING Flow is in the normal tubing or pipe, whose internal diameter is

specified with ID=. This is the default.

ANNULUS Flow is in the annular space between tubing and casing,

dimensions set with AID= and AOD=

BOTH or Flow is in both tubing and annulus: tubing internal diameter is

TUBANN set with ID=, casing dimensions set with AOD=, ID= and WT=;
the AID= subcode will be ignored.

CONDUCTIVITY= or Pipe thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF)

KPIPE=

WAXTHICKNESS= The thickness of a coating of wax that exists on the inside of

the pipe (in or mm) (default zero).

WAXK= The thermal Conductivity of the wax (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF)

RODDIAM= Drive rod diameter. This subcode allows the pipe cross-
section area to be reduced, to simulate the presence of a drive

Keyword index
698
PIPESIM User Guide

rod for a pump in the center of the pipe or tubing. The

diameter of the rod must be provided (inches or mm). Note, if
the RODPUMP or CVFMD statement is used to place a pump
in the system, the drive rod diameter can also be set there, in
which case it is not necessary to supply it here as well.
If flowtype is set to TUBING, fluid will flow in the annular space
between the rod and the pipe internal diameter specified with
the ID= subcode.

AXID= or AAREA= or Optional. The cross-section area of the flowpath (ft 2or m 2). If
ANNULUSAREA= specified, this value is used as the preferred area that would
otherwise be calculated from ID=, AID=, flowpath, and so on to
compute the fluid velocity. This is useful for modeling flow in
ducts that do not have a circular or annular shape.

AWP= Optional. The total Wetted Perimeter WP (in or mm). If

specified, this value is used in preference to the sum of the
relevant diameters specified with ID=, AID- and AOD=,
depending on the flowpath. This is useful for modeling flow in
ducts that do not have a circular or annular shape.

AEHD= Optional. The Equivalent Hydraulic Diameter (in or mm). This

is normally calculated from the relation EHD = 4 AXID / WP . It
is used to obtain the friction factor. This is useful for modeling
flow in ducts that do not have a circular or annular shape.

ILH= or ILHPOWER= In-Line Heater. This subcode allows a fixed power or duty to
or ILHMAXPOWER= be specified, that is used to transfer heat to the fluid flowing in
the pipe. The value is interpreted as power per unit length
(BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m). See notes below.

ILHMINTEMP= This subcode allows a fixed minimum temperature to be

maintained across the pipeline by assigning required variable
heating power per unit length of pipe (BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m.) See
notes below.

Note:
1. The AID= and AOD= subcodes should only be used if annular flow is desired. For normal pipe
or tubing flow, ID=should be used. The FLOWTYPE subcode should always be used to confirm
the desired type of flow.
2. Both AID= and AOD= refer to the dimensions of the annulus, that is the space between tubing
and casing, or between successive casings. For example, if annular flow between tubing and
casing is to be modeled, the AOD= is the casing inner diameter, and the AID= is the tubing
outer diameter.
3. Most of the published multiphase flow correlations have been developed assuming normal pipe
flow, not annular flow. Whilst Schlumberger have taken every care in the coding and validation

Keyword index
699
PIPESIM User Guide

of these correlations, you should carefully examine the results of annular flow simulation to
ensure the selected correlation behaves as expected. We recommend that the results from a
number of correlations be compared when annular flow is modeled.
4. When ILHMINTEMP= and ILH= (or ILHPOWER= or ILHMAXPOWER=) subcodes are used
together, the supplied power is treated as the maximum limit. The specified minimum
temperature is maintained along the pipeline as long as the required power does not exceed
the available maximum power. When the required temperature cannot be maintained without
exceeding the power limit, the available power will be used as fixed power and resultant
temperature will be calculated.

5.6.18 PUMP Pump (Optional)

Main-code: PUMP

POUT= Discharge pressure from the pump (bara or psia) (default

20,000 psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default

10,000 psia)

PRATIO= Pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available for pump (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the pump (%) (Default = 100%)

NAME= The name of the pump. Used to specify which pump curve
defined before the profile under the PUMPCRV main-code is
to be used.

SPEED= The pump impeller speed (rpm) (default unlimited)

FREQUENCY= The pump impeller frequency (Hz).

STAGES= The number of stages for this particular pump. (default:

number of stages as specified on the PUMPCRV maincode.)

ROUTE= The thermodynamic route of operation of the pump

ADIABATIC No heat transfer

ISENTHALPIC Constant enthalpy

MOLLIER Mollier

ISENTROPIC Constant entropy

ISOTHERMAL Constant temperature

ACF

Keyword index
700
PIPESIM User Guide

UNDEFINED Undefined

VISCCORR= Viscosity correction

NONE

CENTRILIFT

REDA

TURZO

USER

VERBOSE=

ON

OFF

STAGECALCS= Perform the calculations through the pump on a stage-by-

stage basis. The details are then reported in the output file.

ON

OFF

SEPEFF=

EQUILIBRIUM=

ON

OFF

CALCNSTAGES=

MAXWCUT=

MINSSU=

VISCFLUID=

OIL

WATER

LIQUID

MIXTURE

VISCFACTOR=

STATUS=

Keyword index
701
PIPESIM User Guide

Note:
1. At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER and SPEED should be supplied. If
2 or more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.
2. If a pump curve name is supplied, the speed and/or number of stages may also be supplied.
These are used to adjust the supplied curve against its specified speed and number of stages
(as set with SPEED= and STAGES= on the PUMPCRV maincode). The adjustment for speed is
done using the so called affinity or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to
speed, head is proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed".

5.6.19 COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance

curves
Main-code: PUMPCRV or COMPCRV
Centrifugal pump and compressor performance curves are specified as a range of head and
efficiency or power values versus volumetric flow rates. These values should be specified before
the profile, and each curve is given a name so it can be referenced on a subsequent PUMP or
COMPRESSOR statement.

NAME= Required: The name of the curve, for referencing on a subsequent PUMP or
COMPRESSOR statement.

SPEED= The speed for which this curve was generated. (rpm)

FREQUENCY= The frequency for which this curve was generated. (Hz)

Q= Values of flow rate, supplied as a multiple value set (p.595) . Flowrates are
measured in volumetric terms at the flowing pressure and temperature at the inlet
to the device. For a pump curve, units are bbl/day or m3/day; for a compressor
curve, they are ft 3/min or m3/sec. (See note below).

FLOWRATE= Synonym for Q =.

HEAD= Values of head, supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). For a pump curve, units
are feet or metres. For a compressor curve they are ft-lbf/lbm (foot-pounds force
per pound mass) or Kj/kg. Note that the conversion factor between ft-lbf/lbm and
feet is 1.

EFFICIENCY= Values of efficiency (%), supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). (Default is
100%). Exclusive with POWER=.

POWER= Values of power (hp or kw), supplied as a multiple value set (p.595). Exclusive
with EFFICIENCY=.

STAGES= For a Pump curve only, the number of stages for which this curve is defined
(normally 1).

Keyword index
702
PIPESIM User Guide

WHEELS= For a compressor curve only, the number of compressor wheels for which this
curve is defined.

The multiple value sets (p.595) supplied for Q=, HEAD=, and EFF= or POWER= sub-codes must
contain at least 3, and no more than 30 values, separated by commas, and enclosed in
parentheses. The values need not be entered in ascending or descending order, however there is
a strict one-for-one correspondence between the values in each list, based on their position. Each
list must contain the same number of values.
Since the multiple value lists can be quite lengthy, they may be supplied across more than one line
in the input file. This can be achieved either by use of the continuation character &, or by repeating
the maincode and curve name on each line. The examples below illustrate this, they both have the
same effect:

Examples
Example 1

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600

PumpCrv name = GN7000 Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,
9000 ,10666.7)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,
2338.76,971.734)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 eff = (23.6865 ,
55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

Example 2

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600 &

Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,10666.7) &
head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,2338.76,971.734) &
eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

5.6.20 REINJECTOR (Optional)

Main-code: REINJECTOR

5.6.21 RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump

Main-code: RODPUMP or CVFMD
The RODPUMP statement allows the outline specification for a Rod- or Beam-pump to be
supplied.
The volumetric rate of the pump may be defined by one of three methods:
• Nominal Rate: Using the NOMLIQRATE keyword
• Stroke Length X Plunger Diameter X Speed: Using the STROKELENGTH, DIAMETER and
SPEED keywords (most common)
• Volume X Speed: Using the VOLUME and SPEED Keywords

Keyword index
703
PIPESIM User Guide

A rod-pump is an example of a Constant Volume Fluid Motive Device (CVFMD). CVFMDs are
fixed-volume, positive-displacement pumps or compressors designed to move liquids, gases or 2-
phase mixtures. Other notable CVFMD examples are: Progressive cavity pumps, Twin screw
multiphase boosters, and reciprocating compressors. The statement allows a simplistic simulation
of such a device to be performed.

NOMLIQRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m3/day or bbl/day)

SPEED= The pump speed, in strokes per minute. In conjunction with VOLUME=, this
is an alternative to the nominal rate.

STROKELENGTH= Effective length of the stroke at the plunger location, NOT the polished rod.
When multiplied by the plunger diameter, defines the volume of liquid moved
with each stroke (m or ft).

DIAMETER= Diameter of the plunger which when multiplied by the stroke length, defines
the volume of liquid moved with each stroke (mm or in)

VOLUME= The swept volume of the pump cylinder, i.e. its cross-section area multiplied
by the stroke length (bbl or m3). In conjunction with SPEED=, this is an
alternative to the nominal rate.

SLIPCOEF= A coefficient to specify the change in flowrate with respect to Delta pressure
(m3/day/bar or bbl/day/psi). This is used to compute the pressure rise across
the device when the actual flowrate is less than the specified nominal rate.

MAXDP= Maximum pressure rise the device is allowed to exhibit (psi or bar). This is
used to prevent excess rod loading.

MAXPOWER= Maximum power the device is allowed to draw (hp or kw). This is used to
prevent excess rod loading.

EFFICIENCY= Overall efficiency of the pump which is used to compute the power
requirement.

RODDIAMETER= The Diameter of the drive rod (in or mm). The drive rod will be assumed to
exist in the downstream pipe or tubing, and will stretch up to the wellhead or
the end of the tubing. The fluid will flow in the annular space between the
tubing ID and the rod OD. The rod diameter can be adjusted in downstream
pipe sections by use of the RODDIAM= subcode on the PIPE (p.698)
statement, this is useful to simulate taper rods.

NOMINALRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m3/sec or ft3/min). This is the same
information as NOMLIQRATE= but in different units, more suited to other
types of CVFMD.

Keyword index
704
PIPESIM User Guide

5.6.22 SEPARATOR Separator (Optional)

Main-code: SEPARATOR

TYPE= Type of separator: required, and may be set to one of:

GAS Defines a gas separator: the Gas phase will be wholly or partly
discarded.

LIQUID Defines a liquid separator: the liquid phase(s) will be wholly or partly
discarded.

WATER Defines a water separator: the Aqueous Liquid phase will wholly or
partly discarded.

EFFICIENCY= The volumetric efficiency of separation expressed as a percentage, 0

to 100. At 100% efficiency, all of the discarded phase will be
removed; at lower values, some of the discard phase will remain in
the kept stream. Note that the efficiency applies only to the discarded
phase; no portion of the kept phase(s) will be discarded at any
efficiency.

DISCARDNAME= Optional: the name of the discarded fluid stream. The discarded
stream can be re-injected in the branch, in a downstream fluid
injector, if it is given a name. This is an alternative to
*SEP_DISCARD, as described in note 3 below.

VERBOSE= Optional: allows control over the detailed output for the separator,
written to the report file (.out).

ON Separator output is written to report file.

OFF Separator output is not written to report file.

Notes:
1. In a Black Oil case, the separator will result in a redefinition of the fluid's stock-tank Gas to
Liquid Ratio (originally supplied on the RATE maincode as GLR, GOR, OGR or LGR) to a GLR
or LGR. In a compositional case, a rigorous flash is performed at the separator pressure and
temperature, and the molar composition re-defined in terms of the flowrates of the components
in the kept phase(s).
2. If the efficiency is 100% and the flowrate is defined in terms of the discarded phase, the
flowrate basis will be changed to that of the kept phase.
3. Use of the SEPARATOR statement normally results in the separated phase being discarded
from the system. In a single branch model, or within a given branch of a network model, the
discarded phase can be recovered and re-injected into the branch further downstream, by use
of the special fluid name *SEP_DISCARD (p.691) on the INJFLUID (p.691) statement. In a

Keyword index
705
PIPESIM User Guide

network model, a Network Separator (p.771) can be used (at the network level) to ensure
both separator outlet streams are kept.

5.6.23 WELLHEAD Wellhead Profile Delimiter

Main-code: WELLHEAD
This maincode marks the position of the wellhead in the system profile. It is required when
modeling multiple injection ports in gas lifted wells.

5.7 HEAT TRANSFER DATA

HEAT (p.706) Heat Balance Options
COAT (p.709) COAT Pipe Coat and Annular Space Medium Data
TCOAT (p.710) Pipe Coat Thickness Data
KCOAT (p.711) Pipe Coat Thermal Conductivity Data
KFLUID (p.714) Fluid Thermal Conductivity Data
CONFIG (p.714) Configuration Data
Pipeline burial depth examples (p.716)

5.7.1 Notes on Heat Transfer Output Printing

1. Normally heat transfer input and output data is invoked by using: PRINT (p.619) HINPUT
HOUTPUT (See Section 1)
2. The radial temperature profile of coatings surrounding the pipe can be printed by invoking:
PRINT (p.619) EXTRA=TGRAD
3. Details of convective heat transfer calculations can be printed by invoking: PRINT (p.619)
EXTRA=CONVx where 'x' can be either 1, 2, 3, or 4 representing coats 1 to 4 respectively.
Note that details can only be obtained for 1 coat in each PIPESIM case performed.

5.7.2 HEAT Heat balance options (optional)

Main-code: HEAT

BALANCE= OFF No heat balance is performed and the fluid temperature is

set equal to the ambient (or local ground) temperature as
specified in the system profile under the NODE main-code.

ON A heat balance is performed (default).

U= CALC Calculate heat transfer coefficients from data supplied in

this section.

Keyword index
706
PIPESIM User Guide

INPUT Heat transfer coefficients are to be read from the NODE

cards (default).

HTCRD= Heat Transfer Coefficient Reference Diameter (in or mm).

This value will be used as the reference diameter (instead
of the current Pipe Outside Diameter) for all Heat Transfer
Coefficients printed in the Heat transfer output data
(p.619) page.

IFCMODE= INPUT Controls whether a separate Inside Film Coefficient (IFC)

is calculated when U values are supplied on NODE
statements (U=INPUT, see above). May be set to INPUT
or CALC. INPUT means the U supplied on the Nodes is
assumed to include the IFC; CALC means it does not, so
IFC will be calculated separately and added (using the
correct reciprocal formula) to the supplied U.(If INPUT is
used, the IFC is calculated, but not added; the calculated
value is compared to the supplied U, and if grossly
smaller, will trigger the production of a warning message.)
Applies only if U=INPUT. Default=INPUT.

CALC IFC is calculated and added to the supplied U value.

SPIFCMETHOD= Single phase fluid Inside Film Coefficient (HFI) correlation.

To be used in conjunction with MPIFCMETHOD= .If the
flow conditions are single phase then the PIPESIM engine
uses this correlation. The default method is BJA.

SIEDERTATE Sieder and Tate

ORIGINAL Original

VOLAVERAGE Kreith eqn 8-20 (Vol Ave.)

KREITH10 Kreith eqn 10-6

GH9 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 9

GH10 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 10

BJA BJA (Kreith eqn 8-20)

SHELL Shell

BP Bp

MPIFCMETHOD= Multiphase Inside Film Coefficient (HFI) correlation

method that is used in conjunction with SPIFCMETHOD=.
If the flow conditions are multiphase then the PIPESIM
engine uses this correlation. The default method is BJA.

Keyword index
707
PIPESIM User Guide

KAMINSKY Kaminsky

ORIGINAL Original

VOLAVERAGE Kreith eqn 8-20 (Vol Ave.)

KREITH10 Kreith eqn 10-6

GH9 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 9

GH10 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 10

BJA BJA (Kreith eqn 8-20)

SHELL Shell

BP Bp

HOLDUP= IFC depends on holdup

ON

OFF Default

TRMIN=

TRMAX

WAX= Wax calculation mode.

PARTBURYMETH= Partial burial calculation method

2009 2009 Method

2000 2000 Method

1983 1983 Method

MASTER= Enthalpy is master.

TEMPERATURE

ENTHALPY

UVALUE=

RAMEYMETHOD= The Ramey heat transfer calculation method for tubings.

OFF Heat transfer coefficients for tubing are to be read from the
NODE cards (default).

LARGETIME Heat transfer coefficients are to be calculated for tubing

using the Ramey model (p.79) (for times greater than 168

Keyword index
708
PIPESIM User Guide

hr). Note that the time is specified via OPTIONS subcode

RAMEYTIME.

GRNDCP= Ground specific heat capacity (default = 837.4 J/kg/K or

0.2 Btu/lb/oF) used in the Ramey model.

GRNDDEN= Ground density (default = 2242.6 kg/m3) or 140lb/ft3) used

in the Ramey model.

DHEQUATION= Energy equation to calculate temperature changes in pipe

flow.

2009 Rigorous energy equation taking into account elevation,

friction and heat loss.

1983 Simplified energy equation.

Heat transfer mode

There are three heat transfer modes to select from:
1. No heat balance is performed and the fluid temperature is set equal to the ambient (or local
ground) temperature as specified in the system profile under the NODE main-code.
2. A heat balance is performed using overall heat transfer coefficients input under the NODE
main-code. Note: This is the default option. So, if the HEAT main-code is omitted, the program
will perform a heat balance and expect heat transfer coefficients to be entered under the NODE
maincode. If the program fails to find a 'U' value on the first node card an input data error will be
generated.
3. A heat balance is performed using heat transfer coefficients calculated by the program from the
data specified in this section.

5.7.3 COAT Pipe coat and annular space medium data (optional)
Main-code: COAT
The COAT statement allows the data for pipe coating or annular space thickness, conductivity and
medium to be specified for a single coat or annular space. For multiple coats, additional COAT
statements may be provided, up to a maximum of 26. COAT is an alternative to the TCOAT and
KCOAT statements, they both allow the same information to be entered.

NUMBER= The coat or annular space number to be specified. Coat 1 is the innermost
coat. Must be an integer between 1 and 26

THICKNESS= Coating or annular space thickness (ins or mm, default zero). All coats are
assumed to be of zero thickness until specified with a positive thickness

CONDUCTIVITY= , Coat thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF, default infinite).

K= Exclusive with MEDIUM=.

MEDIUM= The name of the fluid medium contained in the annular space. This must
match the core portion of a filename with the extension .APF in the

Keyword index
709
PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM installation's data directory. Default available filenames to specify

typical annular fluids are provided, these are as documented for the
KCOAT statement. Exclusive with CONDUCTIVITY=.

PRESSURE= The average pressure in the annular space (psia or Bar, default 1000
psia).

LABEL=, NAME= The name of the coat or space.

U= The overall heat transfer coefficient for this coat (W/m2/K or Btu/hr/ft2/ oF).
This value will be used instead of any calculated value. The reference
diameter for this will be the pipe outside diameter, that is the junction
between the pipe and the first coat, this can be changed using the RD=
subcode below.

RD= The Reference Diameter to be used for the U= subcode provided above
(in or mm).

RESETALL Specifies that all previous coatings information be reset to zero. This
allows new coatings information to be supplied with subsequent COAT (or
TCOAT and KCOAT) statements without risk that earlier higher-numbered
coats will be remembered.

Note: As with other data, any coat thickness data specified at a particular node will automatically
be carried forward to subsequent nodes unless altered or reset to zero thickness. A coat can be
removed (effectively) by specifying its thickness as zero. This will not affect the properties of
higher-numbered coats. All coats can be removed by use of the RESETALL subcode.

Example
PIPE ID=5.25 thickness =.375 K = 56.4
COAT resetall
COAT num = 1 thickness = 3 medium=brine name='brine-filled annulus'
COAT num = 2 thickness = 0.5 K = 50 name='casing 1'
COAT num = 3 thickness = 2 medium=gas65 name='gas filled annulus'
COAT num = 4 thickness = 0.5 K = 50 name='casing 2'
COAT num = 5 thickness = 3 K = 3.5 name='cement'

Note: All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.92).

5.7.4 TCOAT Pipe coat thickness data (optional)

Main-code: TCOAT
The TCOAT and KCOAT main-codes are used to specify up to ten concentric pipe coatings for use
in the heat transfer calculations. This data is only required if U=CALCULATE is specified with the
HEAT (p.706) main-code. Note that the pipe thickness is specified under the PIPE (p.698) main-
code.

Keyword index
710
PIPESIM User Guide

TPIPE= Thickness of pipe (default = 0.0 mm or in).

TWAX= Thickness of wax (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T1= Thickness of coat 1 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T2= Thickness of coat 2 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T3= Thickness of coat 3 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T4= Thickness of coat 4 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T5= Thickness of coat 5 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T6= Thickness of coat 6 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T7= Thickness of coat 7 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T8= Thickness of coat 8 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T9= Thickness of coat 9 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T10= Thickness of coat 10 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

Note: As with other data, any coat thickness data specified at a particular node will automatically
be carried forward to subsequent nodes unless altered or reset to zero.

5.7.5 KCOAT Pipe coat thermal conductivity data (optional)

Main-code: KCOAT

KPIPE= Pipe thermal conductivity (default = 60.6 W/m/ oK or 35 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K1= Coat 1 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K2= Coat 2 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K3= Coat 3 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K4= Coat 4 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

KWAX=

Note: The default value for coat thermal conductivities is infinity (effectively), which means that the
default thermal resistance is effectively zero.

The sub-codes described here are utilized in the modeling of convective heat transfer within fluid
filled annuli.

Keyword index
711
PIPESIM User Guide

F1= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 1 are stored.

F2= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 2 are stored.

F3= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 3 are stored.

F4= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 4 are stored.

P1= Average pressure in Coat No. 1 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P2= Average pressure in Coat No. 2 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P3= Average pressure in Coat No. 3 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P4= Average pressure in Coat No. 4 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

Convective (Fx) and conductive (Kx) coatings can be specified in any sequence desired. The
example below illustrates the modeling of a riser within a gas filled caisson which is insulated on
the outside with 0.5" neoprene. Physical properties for the gas contained within the caisson will be
read from the file 'GAS65.APF'.

Note: The Fx and Kx subcodes for any coating are mutually exclusive. Calculated convective heat
transfer coefficients are printed to the HOUTPUT page as normal. In addition an equivalent thermal
conductivity is calculated from the convective heat transfer coefficient and printed to the relevant
position in the HINPUTpage.

Files
BJA have prepared data files for the most common annular fluids such as natural gas, brine, mud
and so on. These files are located in the PIPESIM data directory. The files currently available are
listed below together with a brief description of the file contents.

File Name Contents

wbm.apf Properties of a typical water based mud

obm.apf Properties of a typical oil based mud

gas65.apf Properties of a 0.65 S.G. gas

brine.apf Properties of a typical brine

Annular property data files are written in a simple to understand text file format to enable users to
edit files or create their own if required.

Example
The example below illustrates the table format.

Keyword index
712
PIPESIM User Guide

Note: A column containing line numbers is not part of the file.

Line 1 Specification of file format. Should not be modified

Line 2 Title line. May be modified as necessary

Line 3 Specifies the number of properties to be read

Line 4 Format in which lines are to be read. Should not be modified

Lines 5 - 10 Identifies the properties contained in the file and the order in which they are
arranged. Note that this order is fixed and cannot be changed by the user. The two
columns of numbers contain the conversion factors necessary to convert the
property from the units specified in the file to standard PIPESIM SI units. Column 1
contains the additive conversion factor whilst column 2 contains the multiplying
factor. This specification allows users to specify data in different units as required.

Line 11 Should not be modified.

Line 12 - 29 Contains the necessary physical property data in the sequence specified in Lines 5 -
10. Columns 1 & 2 contain the pressure and temperature to which the physical
property data relates. Note that the maximum number of pressure and temperature
points permitted within a file is 20.

Line 30 Identifies the end of file.

Example File: BRINE.APF

ANPROP-1.0 LINEAR TABLE-1 ,A, 0, 0, NOGO

JOB : WATER TEST-1
6
(7f11.0)
Pressure PSIA 0. 6.894730
Temperature F 255.3722 .5555555
Liquid Density LB/FT3 0. 16.01800
Liquid Viscosity cP 0. 1.000000
Liquid conductivity BTU/hrftF 0. 1.730104
Liquid Heat Capacity BTU/LBF 0. 4.186800
NEWLINE, SCALE, CONT
14.7 50 62.4 0.880 .332 1.000
14.7 60 62.3 0.760 .340 0.999
14.7 70 62.3 0.658 .347 0.998
14.7 80 62.2 0.578 .353 0.998
14.7 90 62.1 0.514 .359 0.997
14.7 100 62.0 0.458 .364 0.998
14.7 150 61.2 0.292 .384 1.000
14.7 200 60.1 0.205 .394 1.000
14.7 400 53.8 0.001 .394 1.000
1000 50 62.4 0.880 .332 1.000
1000 60 62.3 0.760 .340 0.999
1000 70 62.3 0.658 .347 0.998
1000 80 62.2 0.578 .353 0.998
1000 90 62.1 0.514 .359 0.997

Keyword index
713
PIPESIM User Guide

1000 100 62.0 0.458 .364 0.998

1000 150 61.2 0.292 .384 1.000
1000 200 60.1 0.205 .394 1.000
1000 400 53.8 0.001 .394 1.000
composition

Typical Thermal conductivities (p.567) in W/m/K (Solids) Thermal conductivities (p.567) in W/m/K
(Liquids and Gases)

Note: All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.92).

5.7.6 FLUID Fluid thermal conductivity data (optional)

Main-code: KFLUID
The fluid thermal conductivities are used in the calculation of the pipe internal film heat transfer
coefficients. Default values are supplied and should be adequate for most cases.

OIL= Oil thermal conductivity (default = 0.138 W/m/K or 0.08 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

GAS= Gas thermal conductivity (default = 0.035 W/m/K or 0.02 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

WATER= Water thermal conductivity (default = 0.605 W/m/K or 0.35 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

Note: All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.92).

5.7.7 CONFIG: Pipe Heat transfer configuration data (optional)

Main-code: CONFIG
This data is only required if U=CALCULATE is specified under the HEAT main-code and if near-
surface horizontal or near-horizontal pipe is being considered. For pipe or tubing situated away
from the influences of air and seawater the CONFIG card is not required.
Calculation of the convective heat transfer coefficient requires ambient fluid properties. The default
ambient fluid properties for air and water are given in the table below and based on the following
conditions:
• Water Temperature: 10ºC (50ºF) (~ 328m, 1000 ft. water depth)
• Water Pressure: 32 bar, 460 psia (~ 328m, 1000 ft. water depth)
• Water Salinity: 35%
• Air Temperature: 15.6 ºC, 60 ºF
• Air Pressure: 1.01353 bar, 14.7 psia
• Air relative humidity: 70%
These default values equate to the following Prandtl Numbers:
• Prandtl number for air: 0.713
• Prandtl number for water: 9.5

Keyword index
714
PIPESIM User Guide

While these conditions represent typical field conditions, the properties may be user specified
using the keywords described below. However, for most situations, changing these properties will
have nominal effect on the calculation of the overall heat transfer coefficient. The default values
have been revised in PIPESIM and are consistent with OLGA 2015.1 and later releases.

DEPTH= The burial depth (in mm or inches) as measured from the ground surface or
mudline to the center-line of the pipe. A negative burial depth implies that the pipe
center-line is above the surface and the pipe is therefore partially buried or fully
exposed. Default is Fully Buried at depth of 800 feet.

KGROUND= Ground thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/F).

VAIR= Ambient air velocity. Used to calculate the outside film heat transfer coefficient
(Default = 0.033 m/s or 0.1 ft/s). Exclusive with VWATER=.

VWATER= Ambient water velocity. Used to calculate the outside film heat transfer coefficient.
(Default = 0.033 m/s or 0.1 ft/s). Exclusive with VAIR=.

WDENS= Ambient water density. (Default = 1028.4 kg/m3 or 64.201 lbm/ft3; keyword unit:
lbm/ft3).

WVISC= Ambient water viscosity. (Default = 1.4 cP; keyword unit: cP).

WCP= Ambient water specific heat capacity. (Default = 3978 J/Kg-ºC or .9501 BTU/lbm-
ºF; keyword unit: BTU/lbm-ºF).

WK= Ambient water thermal conductivity. (Default = .5865 W/m-ºC or .3389 BTU/ft-hr-ºF;
keyword unit: BTU/ft-hr-ºF).

WBETA= Ambient water coefficient of thermal expansion. (Default = .000172 1/ºC or .

00009556 1/ºF; keyword unit: 1/ºF).

ADENS= Ambient air density. (Default = 1.2174 kg/m3 or 0.076 lbm/ft3; keyword unit: lbm/
ft3).

AVISC= Ambient air viscosity. (.0178 cP; keyword unit: cP).

ACP= Ambient air specific heat capacity. (Default = 1005 J/Kg/ºC or 0.24 BTU/lb-ºF;
keyword unit: BTU/lbm-ºF).

AK= Ambient air thermal conductivity. (Default = .02510 W/m-ºC or 0.0145 BTU/ft-hr-ºF;
keyword unit: BTU/ft-hr-ºF).

ABETA= Ambient air coefficient of thermal expansion. (Default = .00347 1/ºC or 0.00193
1/ºF; keyword unit: 1/ºF).

TOPDEPTH= The burial depth (in mm or inches) as measured from the surface to the top of the
pipe.

Example

Keyword index
715
PIPESIM User Guide

$ OVERRIDE AMBIENT WATER PROPERTIES

CONFIG WDENS = 64.201 WVISC = 1.4 WCP =.9501 WK = .3389 WBETA = .00009556
$ OVERRIDE AMBIENT AIR PROPERTIES
CONFIG ADENS = .076 AVISC = .0178 ACP = .24 AK = .0145 ABETA = .00193

5.7.8 Pipeline burial depth examples

For a horizontal pipeline
Z : burial depth.
D : outside diameter of pipe and coatings

Burial depth Pipe and coatings Exposed to Schematic

air or water
− D/2 > Z above ground / yes
seabed

Z = − D/2 resting on ground/ yes

seabed

0 > Z > − D / 2 partially (less than yes

half) buried

D/2 > Z > 0 partially (more than yes

half) buried

Z > D/2 completely buried no

Keyword index
716
PIPESIM User Guide

5.8 Fluid models

5.8.1 BLACK OIL DATA
BLACKOIL (p.717) Black Oil Correlation Options
PROP (p.719) Fluid Property Data
LVIS (p.720) Liquid Viscosity Data
CPFLUID (p.725) Fluid Heat Capacity Data
RATE (p.614) Flow Rate Data
ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.616)
TPRINT (p.726) Black Oil Table Printing
CALIBRATE (p.726) Black Oil Property Calibration
INJGAS and INJFLUID (p.691) Injection Gas and side stream fluid injection
WELLHEAD (p.706) Wellhead Profile Delimiter
GASLIFT (p.686) Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells
INJPORT (p.689) Gas Lift Injection Port
CONTAMINANTS (p.728) Gas contaminants data

BLACKOIL: Black Oil Fluid definitions

Main-code: BLACKOIL
Fluid properties can be generated internally by so called "black oil" correlations which have been
developed by correlating gas/oil ratios for live crudes with various properties, such as oil and gas
gravities. The selected correlation is used to predict the quantity of gas dissolved in the oil at a
particular pressure and temperature.
The black oil correlations have been developed specifically for crude oil/gas/water systems and are
therefore most useful in predicting the phase behavior of crude oil well streams. When used in
conjunction with the calibration options, the black oil correlations can produce accurate phase
behavior data from a minimum of input data. They are particularly convenient in gas lift studies
where the effects of varying GLR and water cut are under investigation.
A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split using one of: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=,
or LGR=, and one of WCUT=, WGR= and GWR=.

Gas saturation (RS) correlations

RSCORR= ELSHARK Elsharkawy

GHETTO de Ghetto

GLASO Glasø (p.502) correlation.

KART Kartoatmodjo

Keyword index
717
PIPESIM User Guide

LASATER Lasater (p.503) correlation (default for bubble point pressure and solution
gas).

PETROSK Petrosky-Farshad

STANDING Standing (p.503) correlation (default for oil formation volume factor at the
bubble point)

VAZBEG Vazquezand Beggs (p.504) correlation (default for oil formation volume
factor above the bubble point).

Gas densities are calculated using a Z-factor correlation developed by Katz (p.584) and Standing
and so the black oil correlations can also be used for single phase gas systems and gas/
condensate systems with more or less constant gas/liquid ratios. However, if the accurate phase
behavior prediction of light hydrocarbon systems is important, it is recommended that the more
rigorous compositional models is employed.

Gas Compressibility correlation choices

GASZCORR= DPR The Dranchuk, Purvis and Robinson correlation for curve fitting the
Standing- Katz (p.584) reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-
Factor chart.

GOPAL The Gopal correlation for curve fitting the Standing- Katz (p.584)
reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-Factor chart.

HALLYAR Hall & Yarborough correlation for curve fitting the Standing- Katz
(p.584) reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-Factor chart.

STANDING The Standing modification to the Brill and Beggs correlation for
curve-fitting the Standing- Katz (p.584) reduced pressure-reduced
temperature Z-Factor chart.

TSTANDING

Oil Formation Volume Factor correlation choices

OFVFCORR= ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy

KART Kartoatmodjo

PETROSKY Petrosky

STANDING Standing

VAZBEG Kartoatmodjo

Gas dissolution and saturation in water

WRSCORR= HPPAC

Keyword index
718
PIPESIM User Guide

KATZ

NONE

Gas viscosities are calculated using the Lee et al. (p.584) correlation.
Blackoil fluids that have been previously defined with BEGIN FLUID (p.629) can be selected with
the FLUIDNAME= or USE= subcode.

Stock-tank Phase Ratios

A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split using one of: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=,
or LGR=, and one of WCUT=, WGR= and GWR=. (For historical reasons, these subcodes are also
available on the RATE statement, but you are strongly encouraged to use them here instead. A
compositional fluid can also define them but they must be supplied on the COMPOSITION
statement. ).

GWR= Gas Water ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB)

WGR= Water/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

WCUT= Watercut, i.e. the volume % aqueous phase in the total liquid phase at stock tank
conditions.

GLR= Gas/liquid ratio at stock tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB).

GOR= Gas/oil Ratio at stock tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB).

LGR= Liquid/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

OGR= Oil/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

Care must be exercised in combining these subcodes, as it is possible to specify a value for one of
them that renders the use of the other one meaningless or illegal: such as with WCUT=100, any
value for GOR= is meaningless; for example, GLR=0 conflicts with any non-zero value for GWR=.
It is however always possible to re-state the desired definition correctly by well-chosen alternative
subcodes.

PROP Fluid Property Data (Optional)

Main-code: PROP

API= Dead oil API gravity at stock tank conditions (see note 1). Default = 30 API.
The API gravity is defined as follows: - API = (141.5/sg) - 131.5 where sg is the
oil specific gravity relative to water. Exclusive with DOD=.

DOD= Dead oil density (kg/sm 3 or lb/ft 3) at stock tank conditions (see note 1).
Default = 876 kg/sm 3. Exclusive with API=.

GASSG= Associated gas specific gravity relative to air (MW/28.964) at stock tank
conditions (see note 1). Range 0.55 < GASSG 1.2. Default = 0.64.

Keyword index
719
PIPESIM User Guide

CONEDGASSG= Coned gas specific gravity (default: same as associated gas SG as defined
with GASSG=). The coned gas SG will only be used if a coning relationship
has been defined for the completion with CONETAB (p.661) or IPRCRV
(p.658). Coning will result in a mix of associated and coned gas, resulting in a
produced gas SG somewhere between these 2 values.

WATERSG= Water specific gravity at stock tank conditions (see note 1). Default = 1.02.

STENSION= Specifies the method for calculating Liquid/gas interfacial tension. This allows
for the possibility of three phase (gas/oil/water) flow where the liquid
hydrocarbon (oil or condensate) flows as a segregated layer on top of the
aqueous phase. Some 2-phase flow correlations (such as BJA and Duns and
Ros) take account of the interfacial surface tension when calculating such
parameters as the liquid wave height. Can be set to MIXED or SEGREGATED,
meaning:

MIXED: Surface tension is calculated based on the average properties of the

water and hydrocarbon liquid mixture. This is the default value.

SEGREGATED: Surface tension is calculated based on properties of the

hydrocarbon liquid only. This option should only be used when it is expected
that the liquid hydrocarbon and aqueous phases will be segregated, for
example, long pipelines operating in the stratified flow regime.

GSAT= The quantity of gas which would dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure and temperature (sm3/sm3 or scf/bbl) (see note 2).

PSAT= The saturation pressure for GSAT= (bara or psia) (see note 2).

TSAT= The saturation temperature for GSAT= ( oC or oF) (see note 2).

PSEP= The separator pressure used by Kartoatmodjo (etc) correlations

TSEP= The separator temperature used by Kartoatmodjo (etc) correlations

Note:
1. The oil, water and gas properties should be entered at stock tank conditions, that is 14.696 psia
and 60 oF .
2. The oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir
conditions) should be entered to allow calibration of the black oil model. Such calibration will
significantly improve the accuracy of the predicted gas/liquid ratios. If the calibration data is
omitted the program will calibrate the correlation on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone and
there will be a consequent loss in accuracy. Note, the value of GSAT= is independent of any
GLR= or GOR= supplied on the BLACKOIL statement

LVIS: Liquid Viscosity Data (Optional)

Main-code: LVIS

Keyword index
720
PIPESIM User Guide

DOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Dead Oil Viscosity correlation.

USER or BEAL Dead oil viscosity will be calculated by fitting two

measured values of viscosity versus temperature to
Beal's chart. Use with TEMP1=, TEMP2=, VIS1= and
VIS2=. PIPESIM will fit a curve of the form
1
log ( μ ) ∝
T
through the two given data points and then interpolate (or
extrapolate) to find dead oil viscosities at given
temperatures. Normally you would enter viscosity data at
temperatures close to the expected maximum and
minimum operating temperatures. Entering two identical
temperatures or viscosities will cause an error.

TABLE Dead oil viscosity will be calculated by fitting a table of

viscosity vs. temperature to Beal's chart. Use with
TEMPS= and VISCS=. See note 1 below

BEGROB Beggs and Robinson (1975). This correlation is

constrained to work within limits as published by the API
(Petroleum Engineering handbook, Page 22-16), that is
Temperature between 70 and 295 oF, and oil API gravity
between 16 and 58.

GLASO Dead oil Viscosity will be calculated using the correlation

of Glasϕ (1980)

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

LOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Live (gas-saturated) Oil Viscosity

correlation. May be set to one of:

CHEWCON Chew and Connally correlation

BEGROB Beggs and Robinson correlation

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

KHAN Khan correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

Keyword index
721
PIPESIM User Guide

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

UOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Undersaturated Oil Viscosity

correlation. May be set to one of:

VAZBEG Vasquez and Beggs correlation (default)

KOUZEL Kouzel correlation. Coefficients are supplied with the KA=

and KB= subcodes.

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

KHAN Khan correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

BERGMAN Bergman and Sutton correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

NONE Undersaturated oil viscosity calculation will be omitted, oil

viscosity will be set to the result of the Live Oil viscosity
correlation at the minimum of (actual and bubble point)
pressure.

EMULSION= Used to select one of various options for the calculation

of oil-water mixture viscosities. The water viscosity data
is generated internally by PIPESIM, using the van Wingel
correlation. Generally speaking, at water cuts less than
approximately 60% water (by volume), the oil phase is
continuous with the water phase distributed. Under these
conditions some oil-water mixtures can form highly
viscous water-in-oil emulsions, particularly at water cuts
in the range of 30-50%. Emulsion viscosities many times
higher than that of either the oil or water are not
uncommon. At water cuts above 60%, water is usually
the continuous phase and the resulting oil-in-water
emulsion has a viscosity similar to that of water. Used in
conjunction with the CUTOFF= subcode.

SWAP The mixture viscosity equals the oil viscosity at water cuts
less than or equal to cutoff % and equals the water
viscosity at water cuts greater than cutoff % (default).

Keyword index
722
PIPESIM User Guide

VOLRATIO The mixture viscosity equals the volume ratio of the oil
and water viscosities.

WLOOSE Use Woelflin "Loose Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the cutoff, set to water viscosity above.

WMEDIUM Use Woelflin "Medium Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the cutoff, set to water viscosity above.

WTIGHT Use Woelflin "Tight Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the cutoff, set to water viscosity above.

WORIG Use PIPESIM original Woelflin loose emulsion correlation

at watercuts below the cutoff, set to water viscosity
above.

KENMONROE Liquid viscosities are calculated from oil and water

viscosities using the Kendal & Monroe equation. This is
the option used when Emulsions are set to None for a
Compositional fluid.

TABLE Emulsion viscosities are interpolated from the table

supplied with the EWCUTS= and EVISCS= subcodes.
See note 1 below.

BRINKMAN Use the Brinkman correlation. This generally predicts

elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

VAND Use the Vand correlation, using Vand's coefficients. This

generally predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either
side of the cutoff.

VANDBARNEA Use the Vand correlation, using Barnea and Mizrahi

coefficients. This generally predicts elevated liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

VANDUSER Use the Vand correlation, using coefficients supplied with

the K1= and K2= subcodes. This predicts liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Suitable choice of
coefficients can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.

RICHARDSON Use the Richardson correlation, using coefficients

supplied with the RKOIW= and RKWIO= subcodes. This
predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.
Suitable choice of coefficients can yield elevated or
depressed viscosities.

LEVITON Use the Leviton and Leighton correlation. This generally

predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the
cutoff.

Keyword index
723
PIPESIM User Guide

REDAOIW

REDAWIO

REDASWAP

ABPCORR=

ON

OFF

ORDER=

UCORR=

TEMP1= Temperature 1 for DOVCORR=USER. (Default = 93.3

oC/200 oF)

VIS1= Oil viscosity at temperature 1 for DOVCORR=USER.

(Default = 0.5 centipoise)

TEMP2= Temperature 2 for DOVCORR=USER. (Default = 15.6

oC/ 60 oF).

VIS2= Oil viscosity at temperature 2 for DOVCORR=USER.

(Default = 10 centipoise).

VISCS= List of oil viscosities for DOVCORR=TABLE, in Multiple

Value format. See note 1.

TEMPS= List of temperatures for DOVCORR=TABLE, in Multiple

Value format. See note 1.

CUTOFF= or The value of watercut where Phase Inversion occurs. In

BOUNDARY= an oil-water mixture at low watercuts, water droplets are
carried dispersed in a continuous oil phase. At much
higher watercuts, water is the continuous phase and oil
droplets are dispersed in it. The CUTOFF is the watercut
where the continuous phase changes. It is used by the
Emulsion subcode, see above. (%, default 60)

PRESSURES=

FLTYPES=

LIVEOIL

DEADOIL

Keyword index
724
PIPESIM User Guide

EWCUTS= List of Watercuts for EMULSION=TABLE, in Multiple

Value format. The first watercut value in the table must
be zero. See note 1.

EVISCS= List of oil viscosities for EMULSION=TABLE, in Multiple

Value format. The first viscosity value in the table is used
to divide into all the others to yield multipliers. See note 1.

K1= or VANDK1= Coefficient k1 for use in the VANDUSER correlation,

default 2.5

K2= or VANDK2= Coefficient k2 for use in the VANDUSER correlation,

default 0.609

RK= or
KRICHARDSON=

RKOIW= or Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used

KROIW= when oil-in-water conditions expected (watercut > cutoff).

RKWIO= or Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used

KRWIO= when water-in-oil conditions expected (watercut < cutoff).

KA= Value of the A parameter for the Kouzel UOV correlation,

default 0.0239

KB= Value of the B parameter for the Kouzel UOV correlation,

default 0.01638

TPVT= Controls three-point viscosity tuning.

ON

OFF

Note: When using the user-supplied table options (DOVCORR=TABLE and EMULSION=TABLE),
at least 3 and no more than 30 viscosity and (temperature or watercut) values must be supplied.
The values need not be entered in any particular order, but there is a strict one-to-one
correspondence between the values in the subcode pairs. Once read, he values will be sorted in
order of increasing temperature/watercut for use by the engine. Viscosity must never increase with
temperature, but may vary with watercut as desired.

CPFLUID: Fluid Heat Capacity Data (Optional)

Main-code: CPFLUID
Fluid specific heat capacity data is required for the calculation of fluid enthalpies.

OIL= Oil heat capacity. Default = 1.89 kJ/kg/K or 0.45 Btu/lb/ oF.

Keyword index
725
PIPESIM User Guide

GAS= Gas heat capacity. Default = 2.31 kJ/kg/K or 0.55 Btu/lb/ oF.

WATER= Water heat capacity. Default = 4.3 kJ/kg/K or 1.0 Btu/lb/ oF.

HVAP= Latent heat of vaporization. Default = 0.0 kJ/kg or 0.0 BTU/lb

CPFLUID is only used for black oil fluids: compositional fluids use heat capacities calculated by the
selected physical properties package.

Note: All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.92).

TPRINT Black Oil Table Printing (Optional)

Main-code: TPRINT
The TEMPERATURE and PRESSURE sub-codes have been added to the TPRINT main-code to
permit the generation of tables of black oil properties.
Note that the property table is printed for information only and cannot be used as input for
subsequent PIPESIM jobs.

TEMPERATURE= Temperature points at which properties should be tabulated ( oC oroF). A

maximum of 20 points may be specified

PRESSURE= Pressure points at which properties should be tabulated (bara or psia). A

maximum of 20 points may be specified.

The format of the table is similar to that generated for a compositional table, however the
properties tabulated in the table do differ from the compositional case.

Example
In the following example, a table of black oil properties at 5 temperatures and pressures is
specified:

TPRINT temp = (400,300, 250, 200, 150)

TPRINT pressure =(3000,2500,2000,1500,1000)

Note: All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.92).

CALIBRATE: Black Oil Property Calibration (Optional)

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance when
compared with the value calculated by the black oil model. In this situation it is useful to calibrate
(or match, or tune) the property using the measured point. PIPESIM uses the known data for the
property to calculate a calibration constant K c as noted below:

Keyword index
726
PIPESIM User Guide

Measuredproperty (T , p )
Kc = Eq. 5.1
Calculatedproperty (T , p )
This calibration constant is then used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in
question, that is:

CalibratedValue = K c × PIPESIMCalculatedValue Eq. 5.2

Properties which may be calibrated in this manner are

• Saturated Oil formation volume factor
• Saturated oil viscosity
• Undersaturated oil formation volume factor
• Undersaturated oil viscosity
• Gas viscosity
• Gas compressibility factor

Main-code: CALIBRATE

FVFRN= Measured value for Saturated oil formation volume factor.

TFVFRN= Temperature to which the figure given for FVFRN= refers (oC oroF).

PFVFRN= Pressure to which the figure given for FVFRN= refers (bara or psia).

LOVIS= Measured value for saturated oil viscosity (cP).

TLOVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for LOVIS= refers (oC oroF).

PLOVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for LOVIS= refers (bara or psia).

UFVFRN= Measured value for undersaturated oil formation volume factor.

TUFVFRN= Temperature to which the figure given for UFVFRN= refers (oC oroF).

PUFVFRN= Pressure to which the figure given for UFVFRN= refers (bara or psia).

UOVIS= Measured value for undersaturated oil viscosity (cP).

TUOVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for UOVIS= refers (oC oroF).

PUOVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for UOVIS= refers (bara or psia).

GASZ= Measured gas compressibility factor.

TGASZ= Temperature to which the figure given for GASZ= refers (oC oroF).

PGASZ= Pressure to which the figure given for GASZ= refers (bara or psia).

GVIS= Measured gas viscosity (cP).

Keyword index
727
PIPESIM User Guide

TGVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for GVIS= refers (oC oroF).

PGVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for GVIS= refers (bara or psia).

For each property being calibrated all three subcodes that is property, temperature and pressure
must be specified.

Example
The example below supplies calibration values for the saturated oil formation volume factor and
viscosity:

CALIBRATE FVFRN = 1.4 TFVFRN = 250 PFVFRN = 4000

CALIBRATE LOVIS = 0.85 TLOVIS = 275 PLOVIS = 2200

CONTAMINANTS Gas phase contaminants data (optional)

Main-code: CONTAMINANTS
Gas Compressibility Factor may be corrected for the presence of non hydrocarbon impurities.
These must be measured as mole fractions (i.e. a value between 0 and 1) of the gas phase at
stock-tank conditions.

CO2= Mole fraction of CO2 (default zero)

H2S= Mole fraction of H2S (default zero)

N2= Mole fraction of N2 (default zero)

H2= Mole fraction of H2 (default zero)

CO= Mole fraction of CO (default zero)

The CO2 and H2S values are used to modify the pseudo-critical pressure and temperature (used
to calculate gas compressibility factor) as described in Beggs pages 30-31. The N2 value is used
to adjust the gas compressibility factor as described in McCain page 120.
The Black Oil model treats contaminants as part of the gas phase, and assumes they dissolve in
the oil as pressure increases in the same manner as the hydrocarbon gas components. Thus for
any given fluid, the mole fractions will not vary with pressure, temperature or RS.

RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data

Main-code: RATE
RATE allows flow rate to be defined for all fluid types.
For both Blackoil and Compositional fluids, a flow rate may be defined in volumetric terms using
the GAS= or LIQ= subcodes, or in mass terms using MASS=. A mass rate refers to the total
stream without regard for which phases may exist. A volumetric rate refers only to the phase it
specifies, and is always measured at stock-tank conditions. The other phase may or may not be
present at stock-tank conditions, depending on the fluid definition, but it is never included in the
specified flowrate.

Keyword index
728
PIPESIM User Guide

Stock tank conditions are 1.013 bara and 15.6 oC, or 14.696 psia and 60 oF.

LIQ= Gross liquid flow rate at stock tank conditions (sm 3/d or STB/D). The liquid phase
includes both hydrocarbon and aqueous phases (oil and water), but not gas.

GAS= Gas flow rate at stock tank conditions (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d).

MASS= The total mass flow rate (kg/s or lb/s). Note this defines the mass flow rate of the
total stream, in contrast to LIQ= and GAS=, which defines a flow rate for one
phase only.

MULTIPLIER= Factor to mix or split a previously defined flow rate by a fixed ratio. Supplied value
must be greater than zero. Valid only within the system profile, that is after the
PROFILE or the first NODE statement.

ADDLIQ= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank liquid flow rate. Supplied
value may be greater or less than zero. (sm 3/d or STB/D). Valid only within the
system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement. See also
the INJFLUID. (p.691) statement.

ADDGAS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank gas flow rate. Supplied
value may be greater or less than zero. (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d). Valid only within
the system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See
also the INJFLUID and INJGAS. (p.691) statements.

ADDMASS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined total mass flow rate. Supplied value
may be greater or less than zero. (kg/s or lb/s). Valid only within the system
profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See also the
INJFLUID. (p.691) statement.

ADDER= Quantity to be added to a previously defined flow rate (may be greater or less than
zero). Note The units of ADDER= are inferred from the type of flowrate as
originally defined, viz. Gas, Liquid or Mass, and the system of unit conversions
currently in force, that is Engineering or SI. ). Valid only within the system profile,
that is after the PROFILE or first NODE statement.

WCUT= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

GWR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

WGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

GLR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

GOR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

LGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

OGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.717) statement.

Keyword index
729
PIPESIM User Guide

A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split on the BLACKOIL statement, using
the subcodes: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=, or LGR=, and WCUT=, WGR= or GWR=. For historical
reasons these subcodes are also available on the RATE statement. However, since RATE applies
to all types of fluid (Compositional and Steam in addition to Blackoil), it is natural to assume that
GLR= and so on behave similarly. Alas they do not, they apply to black oil fluids only. You are
strongly encouraged to refrain from using these subcodes on RATE; use them on the BLACKOIL
or COMPOSITION. (p.733) statement instead.

COMPOSITIONAL DATA
COMP (p.733) Fluid Data File Specification
TPRINT (p.739) Tabular Data Print Options
RATE (p.614) Flow Rate Data

AQUEOUS: Aqueous component specification

Also refer to Compositional modeling (p.139) , COMPOSITION (p.733), LIBRARY (p.737),
PETROFRAC (p.738) and MODEL. (p.737)
A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The
name of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.733) keyword. Another way to
define a composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The AQUEOUS keyword specifies the unit system in which the
aqueous components will be specified.
Main-code: AQUEOUS

BASIS= Selects the desired units. Can be one of:

MOLAR: Aqueous components are specified in moles
GAS: Aqueous components are specified as WGR in m3/mmsm3
LIQUID: Aqueous components are specified as watercut percent in vol/vol

CEMULSION Compositional liquid emulsion data (optional)

Main-code: CEMULSION

INVERSION= or Specifies the “inversion point,” the value of watercut where

CUTOFF= or Phase Inversion occurs. In an oil-water mixture at low
BOUNDARY= watercuts, water droplets are carried dispersed in a
continuous oil phase. At much higher watercuts, water is
the continuous phase and oil droplets are dispersed in it.
The inversion point is the watercut where the continuous
phase changes. (%, default 60). The inversion point can
also be calculated using the Brauner and Ullman

Keyword index
730
PIPESIM User Guide

correlation, this can be selected by supplying the special

value "*CALC".

TR= or The width of a transition region, which is assumed to exist

TRANSITION= immediately above the inversion point. When the fluid
watercut falls within the transition region, the liquid
viscosity is calculated by interpolation between that at the
inversion point and the water viscosity.

METHOD= or Selects the required emulsion model. Available models

MODEL= are:

SWAP The mixture viscosity equals the oil viscosity at water cuts
less than or equal to the inversion point, and equals the
water viscosity at water cuts greater than the inversion
point (default).

VOLRATIO The mixture viscosity equals the volume ratio of the oil and
water viscosities.

WLOOSE Use Woelflin "Loose Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the inversion point, set to water viscosity above.

WMEDIUM Use Woelflin "Medium Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the inversion point, set to water viscosity above.

WTIGHT Use Woelflin "Tight Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the inversion point, set to water viscosity above.

WORIG Use PIPESIM original Woelflin loose emulsion correlation

at watercuts below the inversion point, set to water
viscosity above.

KENMONROE Liquid viscosities are calculated from oil and water

viscosities using the Kendal & Monroe equation. This is the
option used when Emulsions are set to None for a
Compositional fluid.

TABLE or USER Emulsion viscosities are interpolated from the table

supplied with the WCUTS= and VISCS= subcodes. The
table is applied at watercuts below and at the inversion
point, set to water viscosity above.

BRINKMAN Use the Brinkman correlation. This generally predicts

elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the inversion
point.

VAND Use the Vand correlation, using Vand's coefficients. This

generally predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either side
of the inversion point.

Keyword index
731
PIPESIM User Guide

VANDBARNEA Use the Vand correlation, using Barnea and Mizrahi

coefficients. This generally predicts elevated liquid
viscosities on either side of the inversion point.

VANDUSER Use the Vand correlation, using coefficients supplied with

the K1= and K2= subcodes. This predicts liquid viscosities
on either side of the inversion point. Suitable choice of
coefficients can yield elevated or depressed viscosities.

RICHARDSON Use the Richardson correlation, using coefficients supplied

with the RKOIW= and RKWIO= subcodes. This predicts
liquid viscosities on either side of the inversion point.
Suitable choice of coefficients can yield elevated or
depressed viscosities.

LEVITON Use the Leviton and Leighton correlation. This generally

predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the
inversion point.

REDAOIW Use Reda Oil-in-Water correlation for all watercuts.

(Inversion point is ignored.)

REDAWIO Use Reda Water-in-Oil correlation for all watercuts.

(Inversion point is ignored.)

REDASWAP Use Reda Oil-in-Water at watercuts below the inversion

point and Reda Water-in-Oil correlation at or above the
inversion point.

WCUTS= or List of Watercuts for METHOD=TABLE, in Multiple Value

WATERCUTS= format. The first watercut value in the table must be zero.
Between 3 and 40 values must be supplied.

VISCS= or List of oil viscosities for METHOD=TABLE, in Multiple

VISCOSITIES= Value format. The first viscosity value in the table is used
to divide into all the others to yield multipliers.

K1= or VANDK1= Coefficient k1 for use in the VANDUSER correlation. The

default value is 2.5

K2= or VANDK2= Coefficient k2 for use in the VANDUSER correlation. The

default value is 0.609

RK= or Coefficient k for the Richardson correlation. Use

KRICHARDSON= throughout the watercut range. (Inversion point is ignored.)

RKOIW= or Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used when

KROIW= watercut is below the inversion point.

Keyword index
732
PIPESIM User Guide

RKWIO= or Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used when

KRWIO= watercut is at or above the inversion point.

COMPOSITION: Compositional fluid specification

Also refer to Compositional modeling (p.139), LIBRARY (p.737), PETROFRAC (p.738),
AQUEOUS (p.730) and MODEL. (p.737)
A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The
name of this file can be referenced with COMPOSITION as documented here. (Another way to
define a composition is with the LIBRARY (p.737), PETROFRAC (p.738), AQUEOUS (p.730)
and MODEL (p.737) statements.)
PVT files can also be written by other programs, and can conform to a number of different formats.
PVT files may contain a table of fluid physical properties and phase split at various pressures and
temperatures; this table may be in addition to, or instead of, a fluid composition. (In the absence of
a composition certain PIPESIM features will not be available; these include fluid mixing ( INJGAS,
INJFLUID (p.691)), separation ( SEPARATOR (p.705)) and the transformation subcodes described
below.)
The composition will consist of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature.
The supplied composition may be transformed to match a given stock tank phase split. The
subcodes GLR=, WCUT= and so on allow this predefined composition to be transformed so as to
match a specified phase ratios; this of necessity will change the components' mole fractions. The
original composition must exhibit a phase split at stock-tank conditions that includes some of the
phase(s) to be adjusted.
An example of few example of composition are below
library name='CARBON DIOXIDE' comp=0.020600
library name=NITROGEN comp=0.005060
library name=METHANE comp=0.760200
library name=ETHANE comp=0.078500
library name=PROPANE comp=0.039500
library name=ISOBUTANE comp=0.005960
library name=BUTANE comp=0.014400
library name=ISOPENTANE comp=0.004670
library name=PENTANE comp=0.006058
petro name=BPC6 comp=0.007548 tboil=129.29 molwt=0.860E2 sg=0.676
petro name=BPC7 comp=0.010000 tboil=167.09 molwt=0.930E2 sg=0.725
petro name=BPC8 comp=0.010600 tboil=228.29 molwt=0.105E3 sg=0.760
petro name=BPC9 comp=0.006852 tboil=271.49 molwt=0.117E3 sg=0.780

Keyword index
733
PIPESIM User Guide

petro name=BP19 comp=0.010400 tboil=359.69 molwt=0.148E3 sg=0.805

petro name=BP27 comp=0.009832 tboil=519.89 molwt=0.212E3 sg=0.835
petro name=BP37 comp=0.001986 tboil=717.89 molwt=0.325E3 sg=0.864
petro name=BP47 comp=0.000794 tboil=876.29 molwt=0.477E3 sg=0.883
model eos=rks bip=oil1 vis=pedersen
aqueous basis=molar
library name=WATER comp=0.007014

Example of fluid using the default package Multiflash and the RKS equation of state

library name=N2 comp=0.005060

library name=C1 comp=0.760200
library name=C2 comp=0.078500
library name=C3 comp=0.039500
library name=IC4 comp=0.005960
library name=NC4 comp=0.014400
library name=IC5 comp=0.004670
library name=NC5 comp=0.006058
petro name=BPC6 comp=0.007548 tboil=129.29 molwt=0.860E2 sg=0.676
petro name=BPC7 comp=0.010000 tboil=167.09 molwt=0.930E2 sg=0.725
petro name=BPC8 comp=0.010600 tboil=228.29 molwt=0.105E3 sg=0.760
petro name=BPC9 comp=0.006852 tboil=271.49 molwt=0.117E3 sg=0.780
petro name=BP19 comp=0.010400 tboil=359.69 molwt=0.148E3 sg=0.805
petro name=BP27 comp=0.009832 tboil=519.89 molwt=0.212E3 sg=0.835
petro name=BP37 comp=0.001986 tboil=717.89 molwt=0.325E3 sg=0.864
petro name=BP47 comp=0.000794 tboil=876.29 molwt=0.477E3 sg=0.883
model eos=E300PR2
comp package = PVT_E300
aqueous basis=molar
library name=H2O comp=0.007014

Example of fluid using the Eclipse 300 flash package and the Peng Robinson 2 equation of state

Main-code: COMPOSITION

FILENAME= or The name of the data file in which the fluid definition and/or property data
PVTFILENAME= or tables are stored. The name should be enclosed in quotes if it contains
FILE= delimiter characters or spaces.

Keyword index
734
PIPESIM User Guide

USE= Optional. The name of the fluid as specified with a BEGIN FLUID (p.629)
block.

LVISFACTOR= A multiplier for adjusting the tabular liquid viscosity data. (Default = 1.0).

CRICONDENBAR= Upper pressure limit (bara or psia) or the two-phase region which is used
to decide the method of interpolation between 100% liquid and 100%
vapor data points. Above this value PIPESIM will assume dense phase
and interpolate the tabular data appropriately. (Default = 0.0)

WCUT= Watercut, that is the volume % aqueous phase in the total liquid phase at
stock tank conditions. See note 1.

GLR= Gas/liquid ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or scf/stb). See note
1.

GOR= Gas/oil Ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or scf/stb). See note 1.

LGR= Liquid/gas ratio (sm 3/mmsm 3or stb/mmscf) .See note 1.

OGR= Oil/gas ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or stb/mmscf). See note
1.

GWR= Gas/water ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or scf/stb). See note
1.

WGR= Water/gas ratio (sm 3/mmsm 3or stb/mmscf) .See note 1.

PPMETHOD= Flashing method for Physical Properties prediction: may be 1, 2, or 3.

See note 5 below.

THMETHOD= Flashing method for Temperature-Enthalpy-Entropy balance: may be 1,

2, or 3. See note 5 below.

PRINT Prints a verbose printout of the fluid composition and stock-tank phase
split.

ONECOMPONENT= Controls "one component" behavior. Can be set to ON or OFF (default is

OFF). If enabled, the fluid is assumed to consist entirely of one
component molecule, and hence does not exhibit a classical phase
envelope when graphed on axes of pressure versus temperature. Salient
Examples of such systems are pure water or steam, pure Carbon
Dioxide, pure methane, and so on. Special algorithms must be employed
to ensure accurate results in such systems.

PACKAGE= Selects the desired PVT code package name. It can be one of:
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash
package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package

Keyword index
735
PIPESIM User Guide

PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package

PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

Note:
1. The presence of any of the subcodes GLR=, GOR=, LGR=, OGR=, WCUT=, WGR= or GWR=
causes the supplied composition to be transformed match the specified phase ratios. The fluid
is flashed at stock-tank pressure and temperature, and the resulting phases are re-combined to
yield a new composition.
2. The subcodes GLR=, GOR=, OGR= and LGR= are optional, and mutually exclusive..
3. The subcodes WCUT=, WGR= and GWR= are optional and mutually exclusive
4. Care must be exercised in combining these subcodes, as it is possible to specify a value for
one of them that renders the use of the other one meaningless or illegal: for example with
WCUT=100, any value for GOR= is meaningless; for example GLR=0 conflicts with any non-
zero value for GWR=. It is however always possible to re-state the desired definition correctly
by well-chosen alternative subcodes.
5. The PPMETHOD= and THMETHOD subcodes control the manner in which Physical properties
are computed. The balance is between speed and accuracy. Each of these subcodes can be
set to the value 1, 2 or 3, which have the following meanings:
• 1: Always Interpolate (fastest). This option uses linear interpolation between physical
properties stored on a predefined grid of temperature and pressure points (default).
• 3: Always Rigorous Flash (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties are obtained by
flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This is the slowest, but most accurate,
method.
• 2: Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere. This is a
compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties will change more
rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever the grid points
comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same phases. For example if all 4
points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then we assume the
rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase envelope, so
interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two or three of the points have no oil, then
clearly the hydrocarbon dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
PPMETHOD= controls determination of transport Physical properties (PP) These are the values
required to perform the multiphase fluid flow and heat transfer calculations, and include phase
volume fractions, densities, viscosities, heat capacities and surface tensions.
THMETHOD= controls the Temperature-Energy Balance These values are used to maintain the
temperature/enthalpy/entropy balance of the fluid.
In most simulations, for every PP flash that is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes,
thus the TH flashes will have the greatest effect on speed and run time. The inaccuracies of TH
interpolated flashes are usually minimal.

Keyword index
736
PIPESIM User Guide

The speed impact of each choice will obviously depend on the composition, and the phase
behavior in the PT region of interest. As a rough guide, taking the base case as interpolation,
swapping just the PP flashes to "rigorous" will multiply your run time by about 4. With TH
flashes also "rigorous", run time will probably increase at least 20 fold. Use of the 'compromise'
choices will be faster.
For those requiring more accuracy, we have found the "most useful" setting (that is the greatest
increase in accuracy for the smallest effect on performance) to be PPMETHOD=2,
THMETHOD=1..

LIBRARY: Library component specification

Also refer to Compositional modeling (p.139) , COMPOSITION (p.733), PETROFRAC (p.738),
AQUEOUS (p.730) and MODEL. (p.737)
A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The
name of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.733) keyword. Another way to
define a composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The LIBRARY keyword specifies the name and the composition of the
library component..
Main-code: LIBRARY

NAME= The name of the component in the library

COMPOSITION= The composition (in moles for non aqueous elements and in the unit specified
by the AQUEOUS (p.730) keyword for aqueous elements)

MODEL: Model properties specification

Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.139) , COMPOSITION (p.733), LIBRARY (p.737),
PETROFRAC (p.738), AQUEOUS (p.730) and MODEL. (p.737)
A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The
name of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.733) keyword. Another way to
define a composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The MODEL keyword specifies the fluid property model in terms of
EOS, Viscosity model, BIP set, Physical properties method and Temperature-Enthalpy balance
method. In addition, the flash package can be specified. This is a requested package and the
engine will try to honor it if another package has not yet be loaded. To enforce the loading of a
specific package, use the package subcode of the main code COMPOSITION (p.733).
Main-code: MODEL

Keyword index
737
PIPESIM User Guide

EOS= optional – RKS or PR or CSM or RKSS or CPA or BWRS or CSMA or PVTIPRC

or PVTIPRC3P or PVTIPRS or PVTIPR3P or E300PR2 or E300PR2C or
E300PR3C or E300SRK2 or E300SRK3 or DBR2PR2C or DBR2PR3C or
DBR2SRK2 or DBR2SRK3 or GERG-2008 or NIST-DEFAULT.

VISCOSITY= optional – PEDERSEN, PEDERSEN-E, PED-E, LBC, LBC-E, LBC-D, LBCSE,

LBCVR, LBCWOEL. PEDSE, PEDVR, PEDWOEL, SHELL_MODEL

BIP= optional – PVTIDEFAULT, FILE (BIP File), OIL1, OIL2, OIL3, OIL4,
E300_DEFAULT, E300_USERFILE, DBR2_DEFAULT, DBR2_USERFILE,
GERG_DEFAULT, NIST_DEFAULT. See BIP (p.145).

PACKAGE= optional –
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package
PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package
PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

PPPACKAGE= optional –
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package
PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package
PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

PPMETHOD= optional – 1, 2 or 3

THMETHOD= optional – 1, 2 or 3

PETROFRAC: Petroleum fraction specification

Also refer to Compositional modeling (p.139) , COMPOSITION (p.733), LIBRARY (p.737),
AQUEOUS (p.730) and MODEL. (p.737)
A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The
name of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.733) keyword. Another way to
define a composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The PETROFRAC keyword specifies the name, composition and
properties of the petroleum fraction..

Keyword index
738
PIPESIM User Guide

Main-code: PETROFRAC

NAME= The name of the petroleum fraction

COMPOSITION= The composition (in moles) — default 0

BPOINT= optional — Boiling Point

MW= optional — The molecular weight

SG= optional — The specific gravity

TCRIT= optional — The critical temperature

PCRIT= optional — The critical pressure

ACENTRIC= optional — The acentric factor

VISCOSITY= optional — The reference viscosity

Notes:
• Minimum data requirements for a petrofraction component are for the Multiflash package:
a. Either MW and SG
b. BPOINT and SG
c. PCRIT, TCRIT and ACENTRIC
• There is no petroleum fraction supported in GERG and NIST. In E300 and DBR, the minimum
data required is the molecular weight (MW)

TPRINT Tabular data print options (optional)

Main-code: TPRINT

FILE= The name of the fluid data file to be printed (12 characters maximum) which should be
entered in quotes if the string contains delimiter characters. Up to five different files can
be specified. Once a file has been specified it will be printed at the beginning of each
case in the job until table printing is switched off using the NONE sub-code. To print the
main fluid, use the wildcard * INLINE.

NONE= Turns the table printing option off. Table printing can produce large amounts of output, so
it is common practice to print the data files in the first case of a job and then insert a
TPRINT, NONE command in the second case to suppress table printing in the
subsequent cases.

5.8.2 MFL files

PROCOPTIONS (p.740) Master MFL file for Mixing

Keyword index
739
PIPESIM User Guide

PROCOPTIONS: Master MFL file for mixing (optional but recommended)

When multiple MFL files are mixed in a single model, PROCOPTIONS is used to designate one of
the MFL files as the master file. The component properties and fluid tuning information in the
master MFL file are then applied to all the other MFL files in the model. This requires that all fluids
in the model be defined with MFL files that have the same set of components and component
properties i.e. the files should only differ from one another in the mole ratios of each component.
PROCOPTIONS can be used for single-branch and network models. The use of PROCOPTIONS
when mixing MFL files is recommended because without it, PIPESIM will arbitrarily select one of
the MFL files to be the master.
Main-code: PROCOPTIONS

MASTERMFLFILE= Name of the MFL file to be used as the master file when mixing MFL files in
a model. It should be entered in inverted commas in the Engine Keywords
field under Home > Simulation settings > Advanced e.g. PROCOPTIONS
MASTERMFLFILE = "Main.mfl"

Note: The simulation will fail to run if there are inconsistencies between the master MFL file and all
other MFL files in the model e.g. if the number of components differ between MFL files or if the
exact set of components are not defined in all MFL files. Even if a component is not part of the
composition of an MFL file, enter it but specify a mole fraction of zero for it.

5.9 PIPESIM OPERATIONS OPTIONS

MULTICASE Introduction and Summary (p.745)
Explicit Subcodes (p.746)
General PurposeSubcodes (p.748)
Combining MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE (p.750)
Multiple Case and PS PLOT (p.751)
Reservoir Simulator Tabular Data Interface (p.752)
Changing Profile Data by Assignment (p.753)
ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.616)
Wax Deposition (p.205)

5.9.1 NAPLOT: Nodal analysis

Main-code: NAPLOT
This maincode, in conjunction with PIPESIM graphics processor PS-PLOT, allows the generation
of a graph of inflow/outflow curves about the Nodal Analysis point specified with the NAPOINT
maincode.
The '?' - delimiter symbols are like the general purpose ("greek") sub-codes on the MULTICASE
statement. They can be used anywhere in the subsequent profile, and be equated to multiple

Keyword index
740
PIPESIM User Guide

values in the same way as the sub-codes on MULTICASE. For more information see MULTICASE
(p.745).
All subcodes are optional.

?INFLOW= The inflow sensitivity values. Each value will produce one inflow curve. If omitted,
a single inflow curve will be generated. See note 6.

?INFLOW2= These sub codes may be equated to a range of values, the number of values
?INFLOW3= provided must equal the number provided in the ?INFLOW subcode. The values
provided are selected in step with those on ?INFLOW. See note 6.
?INFLOW4=
?INFLOW5=

?OUTFLOW= The outflow sensitivity values. Each value will produce one outflow curve. If
omitted, a single inflow curve will be generated. See note 6.

?OUTFLOW2= These sub codes may be equated to a range of values, the number of values
?OUTFLOW3= provided must equal the number provided in the ?OUTFLOW subcode. The
values provided are selected in step with those on ?OUTFLOW. See note 6.
?OUTFLOW4=
?OUTFLOW5=

NINPTS= The number of points to be used to generate each inflow curve (default 20,
maximum 200).

NOUTPTS= The number of points to be used to generate each outflow curve (default 20,
maximum 200).

POUT= The system outlet pressure. This is used to generate the outflow curves. If this
subcode is omitted the system outlet pressure will be obtained from the POUT=
subcode of the ITERN statement. See note 3. (Psia or Bara.)

LIMITIN= This subcode controls the application of any flowrate limit to the inflow curves.
(Flowrate limits are supplied on the MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS= or MAXMASS=
subcodes, or are assumed implicitly from the maximum value on GAS=, LIQ= or
MASS= subcodes.) Can be set to YES or NO, the default being NO. If YES, the
limit is applied, so the inflow curves will extend to that flowrate limit or to each
curve's natural AOFP (Absolute Open Flow Potential, i.e. the rate at which the
operating point pressure falls to zero), whichever is smaller. If NO, the limit is not
applied so all inflow curves will extend to their natural AOFP.

LIMITOUT= This subcode controls the application of a calculated pressure limit to the outflow
curves. (The pressure limit will be calculated from the maximum pressure
occurring on any of the inflow curves. Note: an explicit pressure limit can also be
provided with the MAXP= subcode, which will take priority.) Can be set to YES or
NO, the default being NO. If the limit is applied, then the outflow curves will
extend to the maximum rate limit supplied or calculated, or to 20% above the
maximum pressure calculated for any of the inflow curves.

Keyword index
741
PIPESIM User Guide

MAXP= The maximum pressure to be used when generating the outflow curves. (Psia or
Bara.) Default is double the maximum pressure in any of the inflow curves.

MINP= The minimum pressure to be used when generating the inflow curves. (Psia or
bara). Default is none, so the inflow curves will extend to their AOFP or the
specified flowrate limit.

MAXLIQ= The maximum liquid flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves.
See notes 2 and 4. (m 3/d or STB/D).

MAXGAS= The maximum gas flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves. See
notes 2 and 4. (MMm 3/d or MMscf/d).

MAXMASS= The maximum mass flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves.
See notes 2 and 4. (kg/s or lbs/s).

PRINT= Sets the number of cases for which detailed output will be generated in the
output file: default is 1. This number is applied separately to the inflow, outflow
and operating points, so you actually get 3 times as many cases printed as the
value you supply. Eg. at its default of 1, you will get detailed output for the first
inflow point, the first outflow point, and the first operating point; set it to 5 and you
get the first 5 cases of inflow, the first 5 of outflow, and the first 5 operating
points.

OPPOINTS= Controls the explicit generation and display of Operating Points. Can be set to
YES or NO, default is YES.
The intersection of one inflow curve and one outflow curve is known as an
Operating Point. Whilst it is possible to infer the system flowrate geometrically
from the line intersections alone, it is more accurate and far safer to calculate the
flowrate by simulating the system end-to-end, which PIPESIM is well designed to
do. The resulting pressure and flow rate is displayed on the Nodal Analysis graph
as an Operating Point. This explicit calculation ensures the inflow and outflow
fluid properties and temperature are identical, thus eliminating the possibility of a
mismatch and consequent error in answer interpretation.
Operating points are generated for each permutation from the lists of inflow and
outflow sensitivity variables, as supplied in the ?INFLOW= and ?OUTFLOW=
subcodes. However, it is possible to set up the sensitivities so that some
combinations are invalid, and these do not result in operating points being
generated and displayed. For example, if you set both inflow and outflow
sensitivity to the fluid watercut, most of the permutations will be invalid, because
the fluid at the intersection cannot have 2 different values for watercut. With
Operating point generation enabled, the valid intersections are clearly
distinguishable from the invalid ones: operating points will only be generated for
"valid" combinations.
Sometimes it will happen that the displayed operating point does not coincide
with the geometric intersection. The cause of this will always be that the outflow
fluid properties or temperature do not match that of the operating point. The fact
that the mismatch is evident should be regarded as a feature, not a bug, and

Keyword index
742
PIPESIM User Guide

should alert the user to a problem or condition that requires particular caution and
attention.
With operating point generation enabled, the profile plot file will contain valid
profile plots for each operating point: these can be viewed by selecting "Reports
> Profile Plot" in the PIPESIM GUI.

MATCH= This subcode selects the method by which the fluid temperature and composition
is matched between the inflow and outflow curves. Can be set to:
MAXFL: The inflow curve with the maximum AOFP rate is used. All outflow
curves will use the values interpolated from this single inflow curve. (This was the
behaviour in release 2009.1 and earlier, before the operating points were
available).
OP: The generated Operating Points are used, along with the appropriate inflow
curve on the low flowrate side. At flowrates higher than the operating points, the
temperature and composition from the highest appropriate operating point is
used. This is the default. If operating point generation is suppressed however
(see OPPOINT= below), the MAXFL method will be used.
OP2: The generated Operating Points are used, along with the appropriate inflow
curve on both sides. This option can cause the outflow curves to exhibit marked
changes in slope at high flowrates, caused by the use of unrealistially low
temperatures interpolated from the high rate inflow curve close to its AOFP.
OFF: matching is turned off. The outflow curves will use the system-defined fluid
properties and inlet temperature.
Matching is important to ensure the fluid temperature/enthalpy and composition
are consistent across inflow and outflow curves. Without it, the intersections or
operating points between the curves may bear little or no resemblance to
physical reality. The matching is achieved by using the temperatures and
composition(s) from the correct inflow curve or operating point(s) to generate the
ones used for the outflow curves. For example, if the inflow curves are generated
from multiple completions, each of which has a different reservoir fluid, the
resulting mixed fluid composition at the NA point will change at each value of
flowrate. The matching algorithm ensures the temperature and composition are
interpolated from the correct inflow curves and operating points, so as to produce
outflow curves that use an appropriate fluid composition and temperature. Thus
each point on the outflow curve will usually have a unique temperature and
composition. Matching is applicable to both black oil and compositional fluids.

MATCHENTH= Allows the use of Enthalpy, instead of temperature, in the matching (see
MATCH= above). Can be set to YES or NO. The default is NO.

LIQ= A set of stock-tank liquid flow rates to be used when generating the outflow
curves. A maximum of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program
will generate the set of flowrates at run-time. See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (m 3/d or
STB/D).

GAS= A set of stock-tank gas flow rates to be used when generating the outflow curves.
A maximum of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program will

Keyword index
743
PIPESIM User Guide

generate the set of flowrates at run-time See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (MMm 3/d or
MMscf/d).

MASS= A set of mass flow rates to be used when generating the outflow curves. A
maximum of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program will
generate the set of flowrates at run-time. See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (kg/s or lbs/s).

Note:
1. If a set of flow rates are supplied with GAS= LIQ= or MASS= subcodes, they will be used to
generate the outflow curves. A maximum of 200 flow rates may be supplied, and the Range
Format can be used. If omitted, then the program will choose the rates for the outflow curves
using an algorithm designed to distribute the points on the curve to best effect. This will result in
rates being clustered close together in areas where the pressure is changing fastest, i.e. in
regions of maximum slope. Rates will also be generated at the operating points, to make the
validity (or otherwise) of the curve intersections evident. (The rates used for the inflow curves
are always generated with this algorithm.)
2. The subcodes LIQ=, GAS=, MASS=, MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS=, and MAXMASS= are mutually
exclusive.
3. The pressure iteration is the only valid iterative option when doing nodal analysis, and is only
applicable to the outflow curves. The outlet pressure and the flow rate are known which
requires the calculation of an inlet flowing pressure. POUT can be specified either on the
NAPLOT statement, or the ITERN statement.
4. MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS= and MAXMASS= will also apply to the inflow curves if
LIMITINFLOW=YES.
5. The special value "*none" can be used on the LIQ=, GAS= and MASS= subcodes. If used, its
effect is to remove or cancel an existing list of flowrates supplied on a previous statement. An
example of why this might be useful is to override a list of rates supplied by PIPESIM.
6. The multiple values should be supplied enclosed in parenthesis, and separated by commas. A
multi-value range can also be specified. For more information, see Multiple value data sets.
(p.598)

5.9.2 NAPOINT system analysis point

Main-code: NAPOINT
Use this main-code to specify the required system (nodal) analysis point. NAPOINT divides the
profile into two halves, and effectively runs separate jobs on each half. NAPOINT can be placed
anywhere in the profile.

LABEL=

RESETDATUM=

ON

Keyword index
744
PIPESIM User Guide

OFF

5.9.3 MULTICASE introduction and summary

The MULTICASE card is available to allow the user to set up many PIPESIM cases without having
to enter many CASE and ENDCASE cards. By use of the MULTICASE card, it is possible to
specify multiple values for various flow parameters on one card, rather than repeating cases.
The central idea behind MULTICASE is that its sub-codes can accept more than one value. So if,
for example, you want to run 8 cases at various different flow rates, then instead of having to
append an extra 7 explicit cases to your input file, a single MULTICASE card can be used to
specify all 8 flow rates, and PIPESIM will execute the 8 separate cases automatically.
If a second multiple-valued subcode is provided, PIPESIM will execute as many separate cases as
are required to combine all the values in each multiple subcode. So, for example, if we had:
Example

MULTICASE LIQ=(10,20,30,40,50,60,70,80) WCUT=(30,60,90)

The result would be 24 cases, representing the combination of all specified flow rates with all
specified water cuts.
There are two distinct classes of sub-code available:
1. Explicit sub codes, such as LIQ=, WCUT, and IPRES are simply duplicates (or duplicate the
function of) sub codes that appear on other main codes, such as RATE and INLET. The
important difference is that they only accept multiple values on the MULTICASE card.
2. General purpose sub codes, such as ?ALPHA and ?BETA, which accept multiple values on the
MULTICASE card and are then used in place of a sub code value further down the input data.
The provision of MULTICASE has allowed other sophisticated PIPESIM features to be built
alongside it, for example the Reservoir table interface (p.752) and Well Performance Curve
Generation.

General rules for use with MULTICASE

The following notes apply to all subcodes on MULTICASE. Further restrictions exist for particular
sub-codes and combinations of sub-codes, and these are documented where they arise.
1. The MULTICASE main-code must appear before the first NODE card in the job.
2. Each multiple-valued sub-code can be equated to a maximum of 20 values, separated from one
another by commas, and the whole group enclosed in parentheses.
3. In any job, the maximum number of subcodes containing multiple values is 5.
4. The MULTICASE card cannot be continued: however, 2 or more MULTICASE cards can
appear sequentially in the input file, thus allowing many sub-codes to be specified.
5. Each sub-code containing multiple values must appear on a single MULTICASE card. A
maximum of 80 characters is allowed for all values enclosed in parentheses. The maximum
input line length is 140 characters.

Keyword index
745
PIPESIM User Guide

6. The MULTICASE card(s) should appear immediately before the first NODE card in the job,
except when greek symbols are used, when the card(s) using the greeks should appear
between MULTICASE and NODE.
7. MULTICASE was designed to be used instead of explicit extra cases (the CASE and
ENDCASE cards), however both can be used in combination as long as no MULTICASE cards
appear in subsequent explicit cases.
8. When subsequent explicit cases are used with MULTICASE, each subsequent explicit case will
result in another complete set of multiple cases (see Section 8.4 for an example of this). The
LIMIT subcode applies only to the set of multiple cases defined by the MULTICASE card(s), not
to the total number of cases in the job.
9. MULTICASE jobs contain an implied 'loop' structure in the input data. Every line of input
between the MULTICASE card(s) and the beginning of the system profile is scanned at the start
at the beginning of every case, to ensure that any Greek symbols are assigned the correct
values. Only the symbolic information is processed, and any other input is ignored except on
the first case.

Multiple case specification card

Main-code: MULTICASE
The subcodes available on the MULTICASE card can be divided into two distinct categories as
outlined in Explicit subcodes (p.746) and General purpose subcodes (p.748) .

5.9.4 Explicit subcodes

LIQ= ( , ) Gross liquid flow rate values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20
flow rates may be specified (sm3/d or STB/D).

GLR= ( , ) Gas/liquid ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values

may be specified (sm3/sm3 scf/STB/D). Default = 0.

GAS= ( , ) Gas flow rate values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 flow rates
may be specified. (mmsm3/d or mmscf/d).

LGR= ( , ) Liquid/gas ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values

may be specified. (sm3/d or STB/scf). Default= 0.

GOR= ( , ) Gas/oil ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may
be specified. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB). Default = 0.

OGR= ( , ) Oil/gas ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may
be specified. (sm 3/d or STB/scf). Default = 0. Note that the flow rate may
be expressed either on the basis of the stock tank liquid or gas flow rate.
The LIQ+GLR and GAS+LGR options are therefore mutually exclusive. An
error will be reported if an invalid combination is entered and program
execution will be terminated.

Keyword index
746
PIPESIM User Guide

MASS= ( , ) Mass flow rates for use with compositional cases. A maximum of 20 flow
rates may be specified. (Kg/s or lbs/s).

WCUT= Water cut values that is the volume % water in the liquid phase at stock
(,) tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may be specified. Default = 0.

WTYPE= Alphanumeric sub-code. This describes the type of well under

(,) consideration that is Injector (INJ) or Producer (PRD). This sub-code is
only required if the WTHP sub-code is used.

WTHP= Tubing head pressure values. The definition of tubing head pressure is
(,) dependent on the physical configuration of the well. In the case of a
producer it is the system outlet (last node) pressure, that is tubing head
pressure for a well only, or the separator pressure in the case of a well
and flowline. In the case of an injector it is the system inlet (first node)
pressure, (bara or psia). A maximum of 20 values may be specified. The
WTYPE sub-code must accompany this sub-code.

IPRES= Inlet set pressure (bara or psia). This provides a means of specifying the
(,) inlet pressure of a system. The maximum number of values which may be
specified is 20.

OPRES= Outlet set pressure (bara or psia). Similar usage to the IPRES sub-code
(,) above. The maximum number of values which may be specified is 20.

XEST= This sub-code does not take multiple values under the MULTICASE
option, but may take a value for iterative cases as defined previously
under the ITERN card (see Section 2.4). For cases where the inlet or
bottom hole pressures are to be calculated an estimate of the parameter
may be made using the following formula.

Default = well (pipe) vertical length x pressure gradient + WTHP (OPRES)

Pressure 0.0679 bar/m or 0.3 psi/ft for liquid) = 0.0113 bar/m or 0.05 psi/ft (for gas).
gradient
=

ITYPE= Iteration Type see ITERN card description.

PRINT= If the MULTICASE option is specified then all output except titles will be
suppressed after the first case. In order to override this 'auto-noprint'
procedure the sub-code PRINT must be included. Care should be
exercised here if a large number of cases are set up as very large
quantities of output can be generated.

LIMIT= This sub-code sets a limit on the number of cases which will be run, and
will abort the job at the start of execution if the number of cases to be run
is greater than this. The default value is ONE, and therefore a limit must
be set by you as a guard against an excessive number of cases being run.

Keyword index
747
PIPESIM User Guide

LINE= When using 3 or more Multicase options, this sub-code allows you to
specify which loop controls the line structure. In the absence of a LINE=
sub-code, the innermost loop controls this. Every time the innermost loop
resets to its first value, a new line is started in the Job Plot file. You can
specify the depth of the required controlling loop with the LINE= sub-code.

Note:
1. Some sub-codes on the MULTICASE card are duplicates, or equivalents of sub-codes on the
ITERN, RATE, and INLET cards (for example the IPRES sub-code is equivalent to the PRES
sub-code on the INLET card and the XEST sub-code serves the same purpose as the one
appearing on the ITERN card ). If such duplicate or equivalent sub-codes are used on both the
MULTICASE card and elsewhere in the same case, then the values supplied on the
MULTICASE card will override the values supplied elsewhere. For example, Here the
LASTANSWER sub-code (see Section 9.1) has been specified along with the MULTICASE
card. Outlet and Inlet Pressures have been specified under both the ITERN and INLET cards in
addition to being specified under the MULTICASE card. In such an example PIPESIM will
ignore the POUT, TYPE, PRESS and XEST sub-codes specified under the ITERN and INLET
sub-codes and will use IPRESS, OPRESS and XEST values specified under the MULTICASE
card. The LASTANSWER option will be in operation even though the rest of the sub-codes
specified under the ITERN card will be ignored.
2. The sub-codes can be entered in any order.
3. The use of certain sub-codes excludes the use of other sub-codes
a. Flow rate must be defined (with LIQ, GAS or MASS sub-codes) when the WTHP sub-code is
used.
b. The well type must be defined with the WTYPE sub-code when the WTHP sub-code is used.
c. ITYPE, IPRES and OPRES sub-codes exclude the use of the WTHP sub-code .
d. Iteration type must be defined with the ITYPE sub-code when the OPRES sub-code is used
and outlet pressure must be defined under OPRES when the ITYPE sub-code is used.
e. If LIQ, GAS or MASS sub-codes appear on the MULTICASE card then either IPRES or
OPRES may be used but not both.

5.9.5 General purpose subcodes

Sub-codes : ?ALPHA, ?BETA, ?GAMMA, ?DELTA, ?EPSILON
The subcodes described here greatly increase the power and flexibility of MULTICASE.
The purpose of the MULTICASE maincode is to allow the user to execute a PIPESIM case for
every combination of a set of input variables. For example, suppose we specify 3 water cuts, 4 flow
rates, 5 GLR's and 6 outlet pressures: all possible combinations of these values will result in
PIPESIM executing 360 individual cases, since 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 = 360. The process of selecting
every possible combination of a series of variables is called permutation, and so we often use the
verb permute when describing what the MULTICASE maincode can do.

Keyword index
748
PIPESIM User Guide

Five new general-purpose symbolic subcodes have been added, namely: ?ALPHA, BETA, ?
GAMMA, ?DELTA, and ?EPSILON. They are collectively known as Greeks. They can be equated
to multiple values in the same way as other subcodes on MULTICASE. The symbols can then be
used further down the input data in place of any other value. Thus, the greeks behave similarly to
symbols created by the ASSIGN (p.753) maincode.

Examples
In the following example, 3 values of inlet temperature are permuted with 2 values of Gas-Lift GLR
in a well:

Example 1
Example

RATE LIQ=45 GLR=180

MULTICASE ?ALPHA =(210,250,290)
MULTICASE ?BETA=(200, 220)
INLET PRESS=4200 TEMP=?BETA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-4000 TEMP=?BETA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-3000 LABEL='GAS LIFT'
RATE GLR=?ALPHA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-2000

The symbol ?BETA is set to 2 values on the MULTICASE card. ?BETA is then used on the INLET
card in place of the value of Inlet Temperature. Note that, while it is possible to control Inlet
Pressure with the existing IPRES subcode on the MULTICASE card, Inlet Temperature is not
available as an explicit subcode on MULTICASE. However, because of the 'general-purpose'
nature of the Greek symbols, it is now possible to control it (and, in principle, almost anything else)
from the MULTICASE card.
The symbol ?ALPHA is set to 3 values on the MULTICASE card. ?ALPHA is then used on the
RATE card in the profile, in place of the value for GLR. Thus, like the ASSIGN card, the greek
symbols provide a convenient way to change values within the system profile. Unlike the ASSIGN
card however, the values equated on the MULTICASE card will be permuted to result in a number
of cases being executed.

Example 2
The values equated to the greeks can be any appropriate numeric value or character string,
depending on the use to which it is put further down the input data. For example, it is possible to
permute a range of flow correlations:

MULTICASE ?DELTA=(BBO,BJA1,BJA2)?GAMMA=(BB,TD)
HCORR PLOSS=BBO HOLDUP=?DELTA MAP=?GAMMA

Note:
1. The new greek subcodes can be used in conjunction with the existing MULTICASE subcodes,
but the maximum number of multiple value specifications on any MULTICASE card set remains
5. One 'multiple value specification' consists of a keyword equated to a number of values in
parentheses.

Keyword index
749
PIPESIM User Guide

2. PIPESIM scans its input data once, starting at the top, so any greek symbols must be equated
on the MULTICASE card before they are used in place of a value elsewhere.

5.9.6 Combine MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE

The MULTICASE card is a way of achieving a large number of PIPESIM cases for comparatively
little input data. It can be called a 'shortcut', for the alternative is to provide explicit extra cases in
the input data, with the ENDCASE and CASE cards. In general, it is always possible to 'expand' a
job containing MULTICASE cards into one containing a (large?) number of explicit cases, with
CASE and ENDCASE cards (except where certain maincodes require the presence of
MULTICASE, viz. TABLE and WPCURVE). However, it is not always possible to 'compress' a job
consisting of a number of explicit cases into a MULTICASE job. The choice is therefore open to
you, depending on the application, whether to use MULTICASE or explicit cases. It is also possible
(but tricky) to combine the two.
Why would anyone want to use MULTICASE and explicit cases? There are a number of things that
are just not possible with MULTICASE, where explicit extra cases are the only way to achieve the
desired result. For example, suppose you want to see the effect of changing pipe diameter and
flow rate on the resulting outlet pressure from a flowline. You might set up something like this:
Example

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,300,400,500,600,700,800)
MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(4.2,5,5.5,6.2)
PIPE ID=?ALPHA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=0

This would result in 28 cases, one for each flow rate/diameter combination. However, it is
incomplete. The pipe wall thickness has not been specified on the PIPE card. And it's when we try
to add the wall thickness that the problems arise, because each pipe diameter has its own
particular wall thickness. We can't use another greek on the MULTICASE card to specify the wall
thicknesses, because to do so would result in PIPESIM permuting all combinations of diameter and
wall thickness and running 112 cases, which is definitely not what we want! The only sensible
solution to this problem is to remove the pipe diameter from the MULTICASE, and add 3 more
explicit cases to do what we want. However, there is a catch. To see what the catch is, look at the
modified input data:
Example

PIPE ID=4.2 WT=.6

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,300,400,500,600,700,800)
MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(4.2,5,5.5,6.2)
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=0
...
ENDCASE
CASE Second size
PIPE ?ID=5 WT=0.8
ENDCASE
CASE Third size
PIPE ID=6.2 WT=0.8

Keyword index
750
PIPESIM User Guide

Now we have complete control over what is with what. The first explicit case will consist of 7
multicase cases, one for each of the flow rates on three MULTICASE card, all at the first pipe
diameter and wall thickness. The second explicit case changes the diameter and wall thickness,
and because it changes nothing else, it too will consist of 7 multiple cases for each flow rate. And
so for the third and fourth explicit cases. What, therefore, is the catch?
The catch in the above example concerns the position of the first PIPE card. Notice that, in the first
example, the PIPE card appeared after the MULTICASE cards. It had to appear there because it
contained a greek symbol which was defined on the MULTICASE card. Why, therefore, have we
moved it? The reason : All input data between the MULTICASE cards and the first NODE card is
scanned by PIPESIM on each case. Therefore, values supplied in these cards will override any
values supplied in subsequent explicit cases.
This, then is the 'MULTICASE/Explicit Case Combination Catch': it is perfectly possible to mix
MULTICASE and explicit cases in the same job, but take care not to put any cards between the
MULTICASE cards and the first NODE card unless they really need to be there, that is if they use
greek symbols defined on the MULTICASE cards.
There is something else which, although perfectly possible and legal, you are advised not to do: do
not put further MULTICASE cards in subsequent cases. You almost certainly will not get the result
you expect if you do.

5.9.7 Multiple case and PS-PLOT

The order in which the subcodes appear on the MULTICASE card determines the order in which
the cases will be executed, which in turn determines which points make up a single 'line' on the
finished graph. Therefore, care should be exercised to ensure that the subcodes appear in an
appropriate order.
An example will serve to clarify this point:

MULTICASE WCUT=(0,25,50,75,90) LIQ=(20,50,100,150,200,250)

This multicase card will result in 30 cases being executed. Since the LIQ subcode appears last, it
forms the 'inner' loop of the execution process: PIPESIM will take the first WCUT value and
execute 6 cases, one at each of the liquid flow rates. Then it will take the second WCUT value, and
execute another 6 cases, one for each of the liquid flow rates. This loop will be repeated until all 5
water cut values have been executed. Since the plot file is written to at the end of every case, the
first 6 points will represent 6 different flow rates at the first water cut, the next 6 will represent 6
flow rates at the second water cut, and so on. Thus the graph that PS-PLOT will draw will contain 5
curves, Bone for each water cut. Each curve will consist of 6 points, corresponding to the flow
rates. Now consider the following MULTICASE card:

MULTICASE LIQ=(20,50,100,150,200,250) WCUT=(0,25,50,75,90)

The only difference between this card and the previous card is the order of the subcodes. Now, the
WCUT subcode appears last and so will form the 'inner' loop of execution. Thus the graph that PS-
PLOT will draw will contain 6 curves, Bone for each flow rate; each curve will consist of 5 points,
one for each water cut.

Keyword index
751
PIPESIM User Guide

5.9.8 Reservoir simulator tabular data interface

Main-code : TABLE
This main-code is used to write tabular performance data to a file for input into another model
(such as a reservoir simulator). The effects of variations of one or more (up to four) parameters are
investigated. A tabular data file is created in a format as specified under the TYPE sub-code
accordingly.
The TABLE main-code should appear before the first NODE (p.696) card in a job and for PIPESIM
versions 2.4+ should appear after the MULTICASE (p.745) card.

FLOWTYPE= Type of flow by definition specified by the Reservoir Simulator. This

must be specified by the user and may be LIQ or GAS for multiphase
flow or OIL, WATER, or GAS for single phase flow

LIQ Liquid

GAS Gas

OIL Oil

WATER Water

TYPE= Type (or format) of data file to which the results of the calculations are
written.

PORES PORES

ECLIPSE ECLIPSE

VIP VIP

WEPS WEPS

MORES MORES

COMP4 COMP4

ADDTEMP= Type of variable to write to the data file (Default = NO)

NO Write out only the BHP data

YES In addition to the BHP data, also write out the Temperature data in a
separate VFP Table file

USERELEV= User specified bottom hole datum depth, in default system unit. If given,
it overrides the engine computed default value.

NUMBER= Table number (between 1 and 10000) which forms part of the name of
the interface data file to be created and appears within the file itself (for
example, if input file is fred.psm and NUMBER=2, for a production well,
the BHP data file name is fred.VFPPROD.BHP.02.txt). Default = 1.

Keyword index
752
PIPESIM User Guide

ALQ= Artifical Lift Quantity. Sensitivity values can be specified for one of the
following quantities: INJGAS, GLR, GOR, INJGLR, INJGOR, INJMAS,
INJLIQ, PUMPDP, PUMPPR, PUMPPO, PUMPPW, PUMPST and
PUMPSP.

Note:
1. Any RATE (p.614) or ITERN (p.616) card in the job input is ignored once the MULTICASE
(p.745) and TABLE option have been selected.
2. The sub-codes can be entered in any order.

5.9.9 ASSIGN change profile data by assignment

Main-code: ASSIGN
In PIPESIM Versions 2.70 and higher, ASSIGN can be used to supply "parallel values" in
MULTICASE'd jobs. Any ASSIGN card defining a multiple-valued symbol, which appears after a
MULTICASE card defining a Greek symbol or explicit multi-value subcode, will be treated as
parallel to the multicase symbol or sub-code immediately preceding it. Please note, a multi-value
ASSIGN card must not appear before the first MULTICASE card.
Suppose you want to set up a MULTICASE job to permute a range of PIPE IDs against something
else, e.g. water cut. To make the analysis more rigorous the correct wall thickness (WT) for each
ID should be used. If a 3rd Greek on the MULTICASE card is included, this will permute all the
combinations of ID and WT, not what is required. However, by using an ASSIGN card, containing
the extra data, at the correct point, will result in the required result.

Note:
1. In PIPESIM Versions 2.41 and higher it is now possible to change variable values within a
system profile without repeating the whole profile. Previously, if a value within the profile was
changed in a second or subsequent case, then the complete system profile had to be re-
entered. It is possible for you to invent one or more symbols and then assign different values to
the symbol in subsequent cases. The symbol is typically used within the profile in place of a
numeric value. The value can then be assigned outside the profile, thus obviating the need to
repeat the entire system profile in subsequent cases.
2. All symbols must begin with a question mark "?" and are limited to 12 characters. The value
assigned can be any appropriate numeric value or alphanumeric string. If delimiters are
included, the string must be enclosed in quotes. Up to 30 symbols can be defined and
assigned.
3. ASSIGN may be used to update data within the profile but it can not be used to introduce new
main-codes or sub-codes within the profile. If a new main-code or sub-code is introduced within
the profile (that is after the second NODE card) then the whole profile must be repeated.

Keyword index
753
PIPESIM User Guide

Example
MULTICASE ?BETA =(0,20,50,80)
MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(3,4,4.5,5,6)
ASSIGN ?THICK=(0.4,0.5,0.5,0.6,0.6)
INLET PRESS=900 TEMP=70
RATE LIQ=3000 WCUT=?BETA
PIPE ID=?ALPHA WT=?THICK

5.9.10 OPTIMIZE
Allows the PIPESIM single branch engine to calculate optimal values of parameters to match
measured pressure and / or temperature data.
Main-code: OPTIMIZE

?OPT01= (...,...) Minimum and maximum values for 1st optimization variable.

?OPT02= (...,...) Minimum and maximum values for 2nd optimization variable.

?OPT03= (...,...) Minimum and maximum for 3rd optimization variable.

?OPT04= (...,...) Minimum and maximum for 4th optimization variable.

?OPT05= (...,...) Minimum and maximum for 5th optimization variable.

PMATCH= Weighting factor for pressure match.

TMATCH= Weighting factor for temperature match.

HMATCH= Weighting factor for liquid holdup match. For more information, Friction and
Holdup factors. (p.373)

Note: This parameter is only available for PIPESIM 2015.1 and later.

TOL= Accuracy (default 0.02). Optimization converges when the fractional change
in the RMS is less than the specified accuracy.

Note: To ensure good convergence, PIPESIM automatically scales the single

branch pressure tolerance (PTOL) to be tighter/smaller than the RMS
tolerance (TOL). However, if either of these tolerances are manually altered
using keywords in such a way that PTOL > TOL, this could result in
convergence problems for the data matching operation.

MAXIT= Maximum number of iterations (default 200). Optimization finishes without

convergence if the number of PIPESIM iterations needed exceeds this limit.
The actual number of PIPESIM runs may be less than the reported number of
iterations. This is because the optimizer may call PIPESIM with the same

Keyword index
754
PIPESIM User Guide

inputs as an earlier iteration. In this case PIPESIM is not re-run — the results
are read from memory.

VERBOSE= ON Outputs details of optimizer iteration runs

OFF Outputs details of the initial and optimized runs. (Default)

Examples
Example 1: optimizing flow correlation parameters to match measured pressure data
In this example the friction factor and hold up factor for the vertical flow correlation are set equal to
the first two optimization variables. The OPTIMIZE keyword is used to set the range for these two
variables (0.2 to 5 in both cases) and to select measured pressure data matching. The OPTIMIZE
keyword is used to set the range for these two variables (0.2 to 5 in both cases) and to select
measured pressure data matching.

optimize ?opt01(0.2,5) ?opt02=(0.2,5) pmatch=1

vcorr type=HBR ffactor=?opt01 hfactor=?opt02

Example 2: optimizing heat loss rate to match measured temperature data

In this example the u value multiplier is set equal to the first optimization variable. The OPTIMIZE
keyword is used to set the range (0.01 to 100) and to select measured temperature data matching.

optimize ?opt01(0.01,100) tmatch=1

vcorr ufactor=?opt01

Example 3: matching measured pressure and temperature data simultaneously

In this example the two previous examples are combined to match both pressure and temperature
data simultaneously. This can be important in cases when the heat loss affect the pressure
calculations. The relative weightings of the pressure and temperature matches have been set
equal in this example. The MULTICASE keyword is also used to allow multiple flow correlations to
be used.

multicase ?beta=(ANSARI,DR,HBR)
optimize ?opt01(0.2,5) ?opt02=(0.2,5) ?opt03=(0.01,100) pmatch=1 tmatch=1
vcorr type=?beta ffactor=?opt01 hfactor=?opt02
options ufactor=?opt03

Example 4: controlling the optimization

To control the optimization you can set the accuracy and maximum number of iterations:

optimize tol=0.001 maxit=500

5.9.11 Wax deposition and time stepping modeling options

Main-code: WAX or TIME

Keyword index
755
PIPESIM User Guide

The deposition of wax from a fluid on to the walls of the pipe or tubing can be modeled as a
function of time. Data must be provided to specify the required wax properties, the required time
parameters, and timestep calculation criteria. Since these properties overlap to a considerable
degree they can all be provided on either the WAX or TIME maincode. All times are currently
assumed to be in HOURS.
Wax deposition can also be modeled on an instantaneous basis. The rate of wax deposition can be
calculated, and used to produce a graph of (for example) wax deposition rate against distance.
Multiple sensitivity cases can then be used in the usual way to sensitize on variables of interest, so
as to observe their effect on wax deposition rate. To do this, ensure your job omits any of the
following time-based subcodes, and specify the desired sensitivity variable values with
MULTICASE.

Time subcodes
Subcodes concerned only with setting time-based data and options:

DURATION= Duration of the simulation: provides an alternative to ENDTIME=. To simulate

the system over a period of time the duration must be positive: if it is zero, the
simulation will consist of a normal PIPESIM steady-state run, valid for an
arbitrary instant in time (which is useful for investigating the factors that
contribute to wax deposition).

STEPSIZE= The size of each timestep: only used if OPTION is 1. Timestep size can also
be computed automatically during the run by selecting a suitable OPTION.

STARTTIME= Time at which simulation is to start. (Default zero)

ENDTIME= Time at which simulation is to finish: see also DURATION= below. (Default
zero)

UNITS= Units of time to be used in simulation. Can be any of YEARS, MONTHS,

WEEKS, DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES, or SECONDS.

MINSTEPSIZE= The minimum allowable time step size that can be computed from OPTIONS
2 through 5.

REPINTERVAL= The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the
timestep size to allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output,
if desired. The timestep size will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each
report interval, in order to allow the report to be written.

PRINT= Specifies the number of timesteps for which the detailed wax deposition
output page will appear. This value will override the CASES= subcode of
PRINT.

RESTART= Time at which to restart from a previous simulation. If a restart time is

specified it overrides any supplied STARTTIME. The wax profile to restart
from is obtained from the restart file, see READRESTART.

Keyword index
756
PIPESIM User Guide

READRESTART= Specifies the name of the restart file to read (default model name.WRS). Has
no effect unless accompanied by RESTART=. The file will be searched for a
profile representing the specified restart time. If necessary, 2 existing profiles
will be interpolated to create a profile representing the required time.

WRITERESTART= Specifies the name of the restart file to write to (default model name.WRS) A
restart file is always written if the run is stepping through time (that is has a
positive duration, see above). If the run is restarting and the read and write
restart filenames are identical, the new profiles will be written at the file
position corresponding to the time of restart, thus any pre-existing profiles for
later timesteps will be overwritten and lost. If this is not the desired behavior,
this or the previous subcode can be used to specify alternate file names,
which can be copies or new files as appropriate. In addition the model name
may be changed (with the File/Save As) menu.

Termination subcodes
Subcodes concerned with or terminating the timestepping simulation, as a result of simulation
conditions:

MAXPIGDP= The maximum Delta Pressure available to push a wax removal scraper
pig through the line. The simulation will terminate early when sufficient
wax has deposited to cause the specified DP to occur.

MAXSYSDP= An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet
(psi or bar). In order to take effect, the simulation operation must have
specified that inlet pressure or outlet pressure be the calculated
variable.

MAXWAXTHICK= or An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the
MAXTHICKNESS= system (in or mm).

MAXVOLUME= or The maximum volume of wax allowed to accumulate in the system. (ft3
MAXWAXVOLUME= or or m3)
MAXPIGVOLUME=

MINLIQRATE= A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid flowrate. (bbl or m3). In order
to take effect, the simulation operation must have specified that
flowrate be the calculated variable.

MINGASRATE= A lower limit for system stock-tank gas flowrate. (mmscf3 or mmm3). In
order to take effect, the simulation operation must have specified that
flowrate be the calculated variable.

MINMASSRATE= A lower limit for system total mass flowrate. (lb/sec or kg/sec). In order
to take effect, the simulation operation must have specified that
flowrate be the calculated variable.

Keyword index
757
PIPESIM User Guide

MINID= or MINWAXID= A lower limit on the internal Diameter of the wax deposit anywhere in
the system (in or mm).

Wax subcodes
Subcodes concerned with Setting wax properties, deposition properties, and modelling options:

METHOD= or The chosen Wax Deposition method. May be:

CLIENTMODEL= DBR or DBRS: D. B. Robinson and Associates, single-phase
DBRM: D. B. Robinson and Associates, multi-phase
SHELL: Shell oil Company proprietary method
BP: British Petroleum Company proprietary method
Note that all methods require an explicit license. D .B. Robinson
and Associates is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Schlumberger.

DENSITY= or RHOWAX= or Wax density (lb/ft3 or kg/m3).

WAXRHO=

CONDUCTIVITY= or Wax thermal conductivity (BTU/hr/ft/F or W/m/C).

WAXCONDUCTIVITY=

ROUGHMODE = Specifies whether wax wall roughness is to be calculated. Set to

INPUT to use the roughness suppied with ROUGH= below (or on
the PIPE statement), or CALC to have it calculated.

ROUGHNESS= or Surface roughness of the wax (in or mm) .

WAXROUGHNESS= or
ROUGH=

WAXYIELDSTR = or the Yield strength of the deposited wax (psi or/bar). Used to
TAUWAX= or WAXTAU= or calculate DP during pigging.
YIELDSTRENGTH=

IFCMETHOD= Inside Film Coefficient method. This is provided for backwards

compatibility, and accepts the same values as SPIFCMETHOD=
and MPIFCMETHOD= subcodes on the HEAT statement.

BP, DBRS or DBRM method subcodes

Subcodes that are specific to the BP, DBRS or DBRM methods:

FILENAME= or FNAME= or The name of the Wax properties file. the BP and DBR methods
INPUTFNAME= require a separate file to hold wax thermodynamic and deposition
properties, the format of which is proprietary to each method.

BPFILENAME= or Same as FILENAME=, and sets METHOD=BP.

BPFNAME= or
BPINPUTFNAME=

Keyword index
758
PIPESIM User Guide

DBRFILENAME= or Same as FILENAME=, and sets METHOD=DBRS.

DBRFNAME= or
DBRINPUTFNAME=

OILFRAC= Oil fraction in the wax (0 to 0.99).

SHEARCOEF= or Shear coefficient to simulate wax stripping. Also known as Shear

SRMULT= reduction Multiplier. Note: Each keyword has different ranges:
SHEARCOEFF= is intended to be used with the BP method (0 to 1);
SRMULT= is intended to be used with the DBR method (—10 to
+10).

DIFFCO= or MDMULT= Molecular Diffusion coefficient multiplier. Note: Each keyword has
DIFCOEFACTOR= different ranges:
Both DIFFCO= and DIFCOEFACTOR= are intended to be used with
the BP subcode (0.01 to 1); MDMULT= is intended to be used with
the DBR subcode (—10 to +10).

COEFWAXK= Multiplier for the oil thermal conductivity, to simulate the thermal
conductivity of the wax deposit. Must be in the range 1 to 2. BP
method only

DCMETHO= or Diffusion Coefficient method, may be:

FLAGDIFFCOEF= WILKECHANG: Wilke & Chang
HAYDUMINHAS: Hayduk & Minhas
USER: user-supplied with DIFFCO=
BP method only.

ROUGHCOEF= Roughness multiplier (0 to 1). BP method only.

BPFFMETHOD= BP Friction factor method. Can be set to ON or OFF. Controls which

Friction factor is used for calculating the Inside Film Coefficient with
BP method (IFCMETHOD=BP). If set to ON, then the friction factor
is calculated using the BP internal flow correlation. if set to OFF, the
friction factor is calculated by the PIPESIM selected flow correlation.
BP method only.

COEFWAXK= Wax Thermal Conductivity Coefficient (0 to 100). BP method only.

LHCOEF= Coefficient on Liquid Holdup for two-phase scaling (-5 to +5). DBRM
method only.

S2YCOEFF= Coefficient on ratio of shear stress to yield stress (-5 to +5). DBRM
method only.

SFCOEF= Coefficient on shear factor used in porosity calculation (-5 to +5).

DBRM method only.

Keyword index
759
PIPESIM User Guide

SWCOEFF= Coefficient on Surface Wetting for two-phase scaling (-5 to +5)

DBRM method only.

T2RCOEFF= Coefficient on ratio of wax thickness to radius (-5 to +5).DBRM

method only.

TFCOEF= Coefficient on temperature factor used in oil fraction calculation (-5

to +5). DBRM method only.

TRANSTEMPRANGE= or Wax transition temperature range / region (F or C). DBRM method

WAXTRANSTEMP= only.

Shell subcodes
Subcodes specific to the SHELL method:

OPTION= Options to control how the timestep size is computed. An integer in the range
1 through 5, meaning:
1: Fixed timestep using the user's specified step size.
2: Auto timestep, all constraints: Wax DX, HTC , DP.
3: Auto timestep, wax DX and DP constraints only.
4: Auto timestep, wax DX and HTC constraints only.
5: Auto timestep, wax DX constraint only.

MINDX= The minimum allowable increase in wax ID. This sets a lower limit on the
timestep size computed from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

SETDX= The maximum increase in wax ID. This is used to compute the timestep size
from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

HTCLIMIT= Controls the application of the Heat Transfer Coefficient limit on the timestep
size. Set to ON or OFF.

RELAX= The relaxation factor for automated timestep adjustment computed from
OPTIONS 2 through 5. Must be a real number between 0 and 1; higher
values favour the new value, lower the old.

DFRACTION= Fraction of the pressure drop change allowed with the new timestep (0.01 ==
1%) computed from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

CWDPRES= Critical Wax Deposition Pressures. A vector of pressures, up to 30 may be

provided, which must be in ascending order (psia or bara). Values are
separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

CWDTEMP= Critical Wax Deposition Temperatures. A vector of temperatures, up to 30

may be provided, to correspond with the values for CWDPRES= (F or C).
Values are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

Keyword index
760
PIPESIM User Guide

MPTEMP= Modeling Parameter temperatures. A vector of temperatures, up to 30 may be

provided, which must be in ascending order (F or C). Values are separated by
commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MPA= Modeling Parameter A values. A vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be

provided, to correspond with the values for MBTEMP=. Values are separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MPB= Modeling Parameter B values. A vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be

provided, to correspond with the values for MBTEMP=. Values are separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses

MPC=, MPD=, Additional subcodes to specify modelling parameters C through J. Each

MPE=, MPF=, requires a vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be provided, to correspond with
MPG=, MPH=, the values for MBTEMP=. Values are separated by commas and enclosed in
MPI=, MPJ= parentheses

RATEMODEL= or Deposition rate model number. Currently there is only one rate model,
MODEL= number 1.

CWRPRES= Critical Wax Removal Pressures. A vector of pressures, up to 30 may be

provided, which must be in ascending order (psia or bara). Values are
separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

CWRTEMP= Critical Wax Removal Temperatures. A vector of temperatures, up to 30 may

be provided, to correspond with the values for CWDPRES= (F or C). Values
are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MODE= Controls whether to model wax deposition or removal: set to DEPOSITION or

REMOVAL.

5.10 PIPESIM-Net keywords

SETUP (p.762)
BRANCH (p.764)
SOURCE (p.766)
SINK (p.769)
JUNCTION (p.770)
NSEPARATOR (p.771)

Note: The preferred order of statements is: SETUP (p.762) , SOURCE (p.766) , JUNCTION
(p.770) , SINK (p.769) , BRANCH (p.764) , NSEPARATOR (p.771).

See Input Files and Data Conventions (p.595) for more detailed information on formatting.

Keyword index
761
PIPESIM User Guide

5.10.1 SETUP
SETUP is a network keyword (p.761), used to define various network options.

Subcodes
TITLE= The model title. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

TOLERANCE= The overall tolerance of the converged network solution. Must be

between 0.5 and 1e-6, default 0.01.

MAXITER= The maximum allowable number of overall network iterations. Must be

between 3 and 1000, default 100.

FLUIDMODEL= or An override on the type of fluid model to use. This is not normally
COMPOSITION= required, as it is obtained from the fluid definitions supplied in the branch
files, but can be supplied here if desired. Can be set to:

BLACKOIL: Fluid type is set to black oil

COMPOSITION: Fluid type is set to compositional

STEAM: fluid type is set to steam

UNSTABLEWELL= How to treat unstable wells. If the converged network solution results in a
well operating in its unstable, or liquid-loaded region, you may wish it be
automatically shut in. Can be set to SHUT or FLOW, meaning:

SHUT: Shut in any well that is operating in its unstable region. This is the
default.

FLOW: allow unstable wells to remain in operation.

RECIPBYPASS= How to treat redundant Reciprocating Compressor (recips). The network

solution can converge with a recip in a so-called “redundant” state,
where pressure actually reduces across it instead of increasing. Clearly,
a recip in this state is not doing the job it was intended to do, and the
network would be better off without it. If this subcode is set to ON, then
any redindant recip will be bypassed, i.e. effectively removed from the
model solution. Can be set to ON or OFF, default ON.

ALGORITHM= The choice of network solution algorithm. Can be set to WEGSTEIN or

JACOBIAN, default WEGSTEIN.

WOFLMODE= Global settings for Wells Off Line Mode. May be set to:

OFF: Disable WOFL mode. All pressure-specified production wells and

source branches are modelled ON-line.

Keyword index
762
PIPESIM User Guide

CREATE: Enable WOFL mode, and unconditionally create WOFL files

for all pressure-specified sources and production wells at the start of the
simulation.

CREATE?: Enable WOFL mode. Read and validate any existing WOFL
files, comparing the fluid definition, pressure boundary condition, and
branch geometry in them to the corresponding values in the current
model for the branch. If they match, use the file, otherwise re-create it.

USE: Enable WOFL mode. Unconditionally read any existing WOFL files
and use them, despite possible mismatch between them and the current
model settings. No new files will be created.

ECHOBRANCH= Allows the contents of all well and branch geometry files to be echoed to
the network output file. Can be set to YES or NO, default NO.

SKIPINACTIVE= Controls the “skipping” (i.e., omission of processing) of geometry files for
inactive branches: can be set to YES or NO.

In a coupled PIPESIM/Eclipse/IAM simulation, it is common practice to

start the simulation with a number of branches turned OFF. The
timestepping simulation then turns them ON at a later timestep, maybe
after many hours of simulation CPU time. If at this time it is found that the
branch geometry files concerned contain syntax or logic errors, the
simulation has to be aborted, resulting in much time and work lost.
Clearly, for this type of simulation, it is preferable to check and validate
all branch geometry files at the start of the run, so as to diagnose such
errors as early as possible. Thus the default state for a coupled
simulation is NO.

By contrast, in a normal uncoupled PIPESIM run, a branch's ON or OFF

state will not change during the run, so any syntax or logic errors caused
by the contents of inactive geometry files can be ignored. Thus the
default state for an uncoupled simulation is YES.

This flag can also be set with the -E command line switch, which has the
same effect as setting it to YES.

RESTARTINTERVAL= Specifies the time interval between writing restart files: a value in
seconds, default 1800. The interval is measured in real (i.e. wallclock,
not CPU) seconds.

Restart files are written at the end of every simulation, and at the end of
any as-yet-unconverged network iteration after the specified interval. The
purpose of the restart file is to allow the simulation to be restarted, which
is useful to allow a new simulation to re-use the converged results of a
previous one, and/or to recover from a simulation that terminated
abnormally. However, the file writing can take considerable time, and so

Keyword index
763
PIPESIM User Guide

impose a speed penalty on the overall simulation. So there is strong

incentive to minimise the frequency of writing them.

By default the files are written every half-hour, the idea being that if the
program is interrupted or fails abnormally, you can restart it, having lost
at most half an hour's work. If you would prefer to loose less work in this
event, set the interval to a value smaller than 1800 seconds, but by doing
so you accept the extra overhead of writing the files more often.

You can also increase the interval to reduce the restart file writing.
Setting it to a very large value (eg 1e10) will result in the files being
written only when the simulation converges, or when it hits iteration limit.

ECHONET= Controls the echo of the network input data to the output file. can be set
to YES or NO, default YES.

5.10.2 BRANCH
BRANCH is a network keyword (p.761), used to define a branch and associated network topology.

Subcodes
NAME= The name of the branch. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

FILENAME= The file name containing the Branch's input data, as formatted for a
Single-branch PIPESIM model. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.
See note 1.

START= The branch start Network Node name. See note 1.

END= The branch end Network Node name. See note 1.

BLOCK= Specifies a direction in which flow is “blocked”, i.e. not allowed to go. Can
be set to:

NONE: No flow block exists, so flow may go in either direction

FORWARD: Flow is blocked in the forward direction, so it may only go in

reverse.

REVERSE: Flow is blocked in the reverse direction, so it may only go

forward,

BOTH: flow is blocked in both directions, so the branch is effectively

inactive.

ON Specifies that the branch is “active” and that no flow block exists in it, so
flow can go in either direction. has the same effect as BLOCK=NONE.

OFF Specifies that the branch is “inactive” and flow is blocked in both
directions. has the same effect as BLOCK=BOTH.

Keyword index
764
PIPESIM User Guide

ESTLIQUID= or An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a stock-tank liquid rate

EST_LIQUID= (sbbl/d or sm3/d). The iterative network solution algorithm will commence
with this as the branch flowrate.

ESTGAS= or An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a stock-tank gas rate

EST_GAS= (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). The iterative network solution algorithm will
commence with this as the branch flowrate.

ESTMASS= or An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a mass rate (lb/sec or Kg/
EST_MASS= sec). The iterative network solution algorithm will commence with this as
the branch flowrate.

UPPERMASS= or Upper limit of mass flowrate for the branch (lb/sec or Kg/sec).. See note 2.
MAXMASS= or
LIMITMASS=

UPPEROIL= or Upper limit of oil flowrate for the branch(sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXOIL= or
LIMITOIL=

UPPERLIQ= or Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the branch (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXLIQ= or
LIMITLIQ=

UPPERGAS= or Upper limit of gas flowrate for the branch (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). See
MAXGAS= or note 2.
LIMITGAS=

UPPERWAT= or Upper limit of water flowrate for the branch (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXWAT= or
LIMITWAT=

USERESTART= A per-branch override on the use of solution data from restart files. When
a model run is restarted (p.211), by default, the solution information for all
branches is extracted from the restart file, and used as the start point for
the run. This subcode allows the restart information for this branch to be
ignored, so the run will use default information for the branch. Can be set
to YES, to use the restart data, or NO, to ignore it. Default is YES.

Notes:
1. The names of the network nodes which adjoin the branch must be specified with the START=
and END= subcodes. Network nodes are defined with the statements SOURCE, (p.766) SINK
(p.769) , JUNCTION (p.770) and NSEPARATOR (p.771) statements. The pipeline
geometry as detailed in the file supplied with the FILENAME= subcode, is assumed to start at
the network node named with the START= subcode, and end at the node named with END=.
Note, this does not specify the direction of fluid flow: the network solution will determine if the
branch actually flows forward, i.e. with the geometry direction, or reverse, i.e. against the
geometry direction.

Keyword index
765
PIPESIM User Guide

2. Any combination of Maximum Flowrate limits may be specified, the simulation will enforce
whichever turns out to be most limiting. The limits are enforced by the addition of a choke at the
branch outlet. The choke bean diameter is calculated so as to enforce the limit, so a pressure
drop will occur across the choke. Flowrate limits may be applied to all branches, except for (a)
any branch connected to the outlet of a network separator, and (b) any branch draining a
source with a fixed flowrate specification.

5.10.3 SOURCE
SOURCE is a network keyword (p.761), used to define conditions at a network inlet.

Subcodes
NAME= The name of the source. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

PRESSURE= Source pressure specification (psia or bara). See note 1.

TEMPERATURE= Temperature of fluid flowing from the source (F or C). If absent, this is
obtained from the data in the branch geometry file.

LIQUIDRATE= or LIQ= Source flowrate specification, as a stock tank liquid rate (sbbl/d or
sm3/d). See note 1.

GASRATE= or GAS= Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank gas rate (mmscf/d or
mmscm/d) . See note 1.

MASSRATE= or Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank mass rate (lb/sec or Kg/
MASS= sec). See note 1.

REBC= “Remove Existing Boundary Condition” for the source. This is used when
multiple SOURCE statements refer to the same named source, and you
want this statement to remove all boundary conditions for this source
specified with earlier statements.

FCLIQUID= Source flowrate specification, as a Flowing liquid rate (bbl/d or m3/d).

See notes 1 & 2.

FCGAS= Source flowrate specification, as a Flowing gas rate (mmscfd or sm3/d).

Note the units of this are at stock-tank conditions.

FCPRESSURE= The pressure for the accompanying flowing rate specified with FCLIQ= or
FCGAS= (psia or Bara)

FCTEMPERATUR= The temperature for the accompanying flowing rate specified with
FCLIQ= or FCGAS= (F or C)

CURVEP= For curve specified source, an array of pressures (psia or bara). See note
3. Example:

Keyword index
766
PIPESIM User Guide

CURVEP=(20,1000,2000) psia

CURVEL= For curve specified sources, an array of liquid rates (bbl/d or m3/d). See
note 3. Example:

CURVEL=(20,1000,2000) bbld

CURVEG= For curve specified sources, an array of gas rates (mmscfd or mmsm3d).
See note 3. Example:

CURVEG=(20,1000,2000) mmscfd

CURVEM= For curve specified sources, an array of mass rates (lb/s or Kg/s). See
note 3. Example:

CURVEM=(20,1000,2000) lb/s

CURVET= For curve specified sources, an array of temperatures (F or C). See note
3. Example:

CURVET=(20,40,60) F

ON Specifies that the source is active, or switched ON.

OFF Specifies that the source is inactive, or switched OFF.

CURVEFILE= Specifies that the source and adjoining branch has already been
simulated in Wells Off-Line (WOFL) mode, and that the results of this are
available in the named file. Example:

CURVEFILE='Curve1.PWH'

A number of additional special values may be supplied instead of the

filenale, these are distinguished by the first character being an asterisk,
'*', namely:

CURVEFLIE=*USE: this has the same effect as above, but the filename
to read from is assumed from the default source and branch names.

CURVEFLIE=*CREATE : Specifies that a WOFL file for the source and

adjoining branch are to be created at the start of the network simulation.
The network simulation will then use the results in this file.

CURVEFLIE=*CREATE?: Same as above, except that any pre-existing

file will be used if its specifications match the current network's.

QUALITY= For steam systems, the quality (fraction gas) of the steam flowing into the
source. If absent, this will be obtained from the branch geometry file.

CURVESENS_P= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in units that
match the data in the WOFL file.

Keyword index
767
PIPESIM User Guide

CURVESENS_T= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in units that
match the data in the current (.TNT) file.

CURVESENS_S= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in Strict SI

units.

UPPERMASS= or Upper limit of mass flowrate for the source (lb/sec or Kg/sec).. See note
MAXMASS= or 4.
LIMITMASS=

UPPEROIL= or Upper limit of oil flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 4.
MAXOIL= or
LIMITOIL=

UPPERLIQ= or Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 4.
MAXLIQ= or
LIMITLIQ=

UPPERGAS= or Upper limit of gas flowrate for the source (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). See
MAXGAS= or note 4.
LIMITGAS=

UPPERWAT= or Upper limit of water flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 4.
MAXWAT= or
LIMITWAT=

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the source (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used as
a datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one junction has an
elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other source, sink and
junction elevations, to help identify where loop elevation mismatch
error(s) have occurred.

N.B. It is useful to supply the absolute elevations of any number of

Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows the elevation
data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that the same node
name may appear in multiple SOURCE statements: the data on each
statement is additive for the overall node specification. Thus for example,
a series of SOURCE statements can be supplied under Setup » Engine
options to set the node elevations for sources already specified in the
GUI's model. Same goes for JUNCTION and SINK statements.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of pressure to be used as a starting point for the network

solution (psia or bara).

Notes:
1. A source may have a pressure specification, or a flowrate specification, or a curve specification.
These are known as Hydraulic Boundary Conditions. (p.41)

Keyword index
768
PIPESIM User Guide

2. A “flowing flowrate” may be specified as an alternative to a stock-tank flowrate. It must be

accompanied by FCPRES= and FCTEMP= .
3. A source may be specified with a curve of flowrate against pressure, as an alternative to a fixed
pressure or flowrate. The subcodes CURVEP=, and one of (CURVEG=, CURVEL=, or
CURVEM=) are used for this, they all accept Multiple Value Data Set (p.598). The curve may
be accompanied by a temperature array with CURVET=. All subcodes so specified must have
the same number of values. Between 3 and 30 values may be supplied.
4. Any combination of Maximum Flowrate limits may be specified, the simulation will enforce
whichever turns out to be most limiting. The limits are enforced in the adjoining branch, by the
addition of a choke at the branch outlet. The choke bean diameter is calculated so as to enforce
the limit, so a pressure drop will occur across the choke.

5.10.4 SINK
SINK is a network keyword (p.761), used to define conditions at a network outlet.

Subcodes
NAME= The name of the sink. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

PRESSURE= Sink pressure specification (psia or bara). See note 1.

LIQUIDRATE= or LIQ= Sink flowrate specification, as a stock tank liquid rate (sbbl/d or sm3/d).
See note 1.

GASRATE= or GAS= Sink flowrate specification, as a Stock tank gas rate (mmscf/d or mmscm/
d) . See note 1.

MASSRATE= or Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank mass rate (lb/sec or Kg/
MASS= sec). See note 1.

REBC= “Remove Existing Boundary Condition” for the sink. This is used when
multiple SINK statements refer to the same named sink, and you want
this statement to remove all boundary conditions for this sink specified
with earlier statements.

ON Specifies that the sink is active, or switched ON.

OFF Specifies that the sink is inactive, or switched OFF.

UPPERMASS= or Upper limit of mass flowrate for the sink (lb/sec or Kg/sec).. See note 2.
MAXMASS=

UPPEROIL= or Upper limit of oil flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXOIL=

UPPERLIQ= or Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXLIQ=

Keyword index
769
PIPESIM User Guide

UPPERGAS= or Upper limit of gas flowrate for the sink (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). See note
MAXGAS= 2.

UPPERWAT= or Upper limit of water flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXWAT=

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the sink (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used as a
datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one network node has
an elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other source, sink and
junction elevations, to help identify where loop elevation mismatch
error(s) have occurred.

N.B. It is useful to supply the absolute elevations of any number of

Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows the elevation
data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that the same node
name may appear in multiple SINK statements: the data on each
statement is additive for the overall node specification. Thus for example,
a series of SINK statements can be supplied under Setup » Engine
options to set the node elevations for sinks already specified in the GUI's
model. The same goes for JUNCTION and SOURCE statements.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of sink pressure to be used as a starting point for the network
solution (psia or bara).

Notes:
1. A sink may have a pressure specification, or a flowrate specification. These are known as
Hydraulic Boundary Conditions. (p.41)
2. Any combination of Maximum Flowrate limits may be specified, the simulation will enforce
whichever turns out to be most limiting. The limits are enforced in the adjoining branch, by the
addition of a choke at the branch outlet. The choke bean diameter is calculated so as to enforce
the limit, so a pressure drop will occur across the choke.

5.10.5 JUNCTION
JUNCTION is a network keyword (p.761), used to define a junction, or to supply additional or
override data for an existing junction.

Subcodes
NAME= Name of the junction. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of pressure to be used as a starting point for the network

solution (bara or psia)

ESTTEMPERATURE= Estimate of fluid temperature to be used as a starting point for the network
solution (F or C)

Keyword index
770
PIPESIM User Guide

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the junction (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used as
a datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one Network node
has an elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other node
elevations, to help identify where loop elevation mismatch error(s) have
occurred.

N.B. It is possible, and useful, to supply the absolute elevations of any

number of Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows
the elevation data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that
the same node name may appear in multiple JUNCTION statements: the
data on each statement is additive for the overall node specification. Thus
for example, a series of JUNCTION statements can be supplied under
Setup » Engine options to set the node elevations for junctions already
specified in the GUI's model. Same goes for SOURCE and SINK
statements.

5.10.6 NSEPARATOR
NSEPARATOR is a network keyword (p.761), used to define a network separator.

Subcodes
NAME= Name of the separator

FEEDBRANCH= Name of the branch feeding the separator

DISCARDBRANCH= Name of the branch to receive the “discarded” stream. See note 1.

TYPE= The phase of the “discarded” stream: may be GAS, LIQUID, or WATER.
See note 1.

PRESSURE= Separator pressure (psia or bara). This is optional: see note 2.

EFFICIENCY= Percentage efficiency of the separation process: see note 3. Must be in the
range 10 to 100.

Notes:
1. A network separator causes a feed stream to be separated into 2 outlet streams, as specified
by the TYPE= subcode. They are known as the “discard” stream and the “kept” stream, for
compatability with the single-branch separator (p.705). In a network model however, the term
“discard” is misleading, because the discard stream is not “discarded”, it is separated and made
to flow into the branch named with the DISCARDBRANCH= subcode.
2. The requirements of the network solution dictate that a pressure discontinuity must occur at the
outlets of a network separator. If a pressure has been specified, then both of the outlet
branches will exhibit a pressure discontinuity, calculated to ensure that the separated streams'
flowrates are maintained in the downstream network(s). If a pressure is not specified, then only

Keyword index
771
PIPESIM User Guide

the “discard” branch will exhibit a discontinuity. These discontinuities represent the necessary
pressure control valves and/or pumps that are required to maintain liquid level control in the
separator.
3. The efficiency term refers to how much of the “discard” phase is separated from the feed
stream. For example, an efficiency of 90% in a gas separator will cause 90% of the gas phase
to be sent down the discard branch; the remaining gas, plus ALL of the liquid, will go down the
keep branch.
4. Separators work at flowing, or in-situ, pressure and temperature. The flowing phase split as
predicted by the selected fluid PVT model will usually be very different from the stock-tank
phase split, please bear this in mind when you look at the resulting branch flowrates. In
particular, PIPESIM allows you to display branch and node flowrates using the “report tool”, but
alas this shows only stock-tank rates, which are not useful to understand separator
performance.
5. If the phase to be separated does not exist, then clearly the separator cannot function as
expected. In this case all flow will go down the keep branch. Inlet and outlet compositions will
be identical.
6. If the phase to be separated is the only phase present, then clearly the separator cannot
function as expected. In this case the “efficient” fraction of the flow will go down the discard
branch, with the remainder going down the keep branch. Inlet and outlet compositions will be
identical.

5.11 Keyword index

Input files and input data conventions (p.595)
General data (p.601)
Compositional data (p.730)
Blackoil data (p.717)
MFL files (p.739)
Heat transfer data (p.706)
Flow correlation data (p.633)
System and equipment data (p.670)
Well performance modeling (p.645)
PIPESIM operations (p.740)
PIPESIM-net keywords (p.761)

5.11.1 Keyword list

A (p.590) B (p.590) C (p.591) D (p.591) E (p.591) F (p.591) G (p.592) H (p.592) I (p.592) J (p.592)
K (p.592) L (p.592) M (p.593) N (p.593) O (p.593) P (p.593) Q (p.593) R (p.593) S (p.594) T
(p.594) U (p.594) V (p.594) W (p.594) X (p.595) Y (p.595) Z (p.595)

Keyword index
772
PIPESIM User Guide

A
• ASSIGN (p.753)

B
• BACKPRES (p.662)
• BEGIN (p.629)
• BLACKOIL (p.717)
• BRANCH (p.764)

C
• CASE (p.603)
• CALIBRATE (p.726)
• CHOKE (p.671)
• COAT (p.709)
• COMP (p.733)
• COMPCRV (p.676)
• COMPLETION (p.647)
• COMPRESSOR (p.677)
• CONETAB (p.661)
• CONFIG (p.714)
• CONTAMINANTS (p.728)
• CORROSION (p.634)
• CPFLUID (p.725)

DE
• END (p.629)
• ENDCASE (p.629)
• ENDJOB (p.629)
• EROSION (p.634)
• EQUIPMENT (p.433)
• ESP (p.700)
• EXPANDER (p.682)

F
• FETKOVICH (p.651)
• FITTING (p.683)
• FLOWLINE (p.647)

Keyword index
773
PIPESIM User Guide

• FMPUMP (p.684)
• FORCHHEIMER (p.668)
• FRACTURE (p.668)
• FRAMO2009 (p.684)

G
• GASLIFT (p.686)
• GFAA compositional fluid can be defined by a GFA (generic fluid artifact) string. The GFA string
encodes a binary representation of the associated compositional fluid. The GFA maincode
contains no subcode and must be directly followed by the GFA string. The string can span
multiple lines by appending "&" at the end of each unfinished line.

H
• HCORR (p.640)
• HEATER (p.685)
• HEADER (p.602)
• HEAT (p.706)
• HORWELL (p.662)
• HVOGEL (p.668)

I
• IFPPSSE (p.652)
• IFPTAB (p.660)
• IFPCRV (p.658)
• INLET (p.618)
• INJGAS (p.691)
• INJFLUID (p.691)
• INJPORT (p.689)
• IPRCRV (p.658)
• ITERN (p.616)

J
• JOB (p.603)
• JONES (p.652)
• JUNCTION (p.770)

K
• KCOAT (p.711)

Keyword index
774
PIPESIM User Guide

L
• LAYER (p.664)
• LVIS (p.720)

M
• MPBOOSTER (p.694)
• MPUMP (p.695)
• MULTICASE (p.745)

N
• NAPLOT (p.740)
• NAPOINT (p.744)
• NODE (p.696)
• NOPRINT (p.629)
• NSEPARATOR (p.771)

O
• OPTIONS (p.604)
• OPTIMIZE (p.754)

P
• PCP (p.700)
• PERMCRV (p.666)
• PERMTAB (p.667)
• PETROFRAC (p.738)
• PIPE (p.698)
• PLOT (p.626)
• PRINT (p.619)
• PROCOPTIONS (p.740)
• PROP (p.719)
• PUMP (p.700)
• PUMPCRV (p.676)
• PUSH (p.631)

QR
• RATE (p.614)
• REINJECTOR (p.703)

Keyword index
775
PIPESIM User Guide

• RISER (p.647)

S
• SEPARATOR (p.705)
• SETUP (p.762)
• SINK (p.769)
• SLUG (p.635)
• SOURCE (p.766)
• SPHASE (p.643)

T
• TABLE (p.752)
• TCOAT (p.710)
• TIME (p.205)
• TPRINT - Compositional (p.739)
• TPRINT - Blackoil (p.726)
• TRANSIENT (p.669)
• TUBING (p.647)

U
• UNITS (p.603)
• USERDLL - Flow Correlations (p.645)
• USERDLL - Equipment (p.633)

V
• VCORR (p.636)
• VOGEL (p.651)

W
• WAX (p.205)
• WELLHEAD (p.706)
• WELLPI (p.650)
• WCOPTION (p.654)
• WPCURVE (p.651)

XYZ

Keyword index
776
PIPESIM User Guide

6
Open Link
Open Link is a set of API calls that can be made by any application to control PIPESIM or elements
of PIPESIM.
Two sets of controls exist:
1. Controlling the GUI.
2. Controlling the calculation engines directly.
Please refer to the Open Link documentation installed with the software.

Open Link
777
PIPESIM User Guide

7
Third party applications
PIPESIM has been designed with "Openness" in mind. Therefore key modules can be "driven"
from 3rd party applications, for example, Microsoft Excel, VB, C++, and so on.
Schlumberger have collected these open modules together into a single product, called Open Link.
As the development of Open Link components are an ongoing process the latest documentation is
available with the installed documentation.
Examples of using the Open Link technology, using Microsoft Excel are provided in the Case
Studies\Open Link directory. Documentation is also provided in the form of PDF files
(AdobeAcrobat reader is required for this; a copy of which can be found on the PIPESIM CD) from
the start menu Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Documentation\Open Link or from the directory
Program Files\Schlumberger\pipesim\programs Folder.

Third party applications

778
PIPESIM User Guide

Index
0-9 Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling ................................. 532
*** Bergman and Sutton
modeling undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 514
sand modeling .......................................................... binary interaction parameter ..................................... 132
scale prediction ........................................................ Biot number .............................................................. 491
solids appearance .................................................... BIP .................................................................... 145, 146
wax modeling ...........................................................
Black oil
CALIBRATE keyword ........................................... 726
A calibration ............................................................. 134
Abort Run ................................................................. 195 correlations ........................................................... 498
Alhanati .................................................................... 231 data sets ............................................................... 133
Annular Gas Pressure Design Method ..................... 233 enthalpy ................................................................ 519
Ansari ....................................................................... 365 fluid modeling ........................................................ 132
fluid modeling theory ............................................. 497
API14B critical flow correlation ................................. 440
mixing ................................................................... 521
Aqueous Components — cubic EoS ........................ 541
options .................................................................. 134
AQUEOUS keyword ................................................. 730 surface tension ..................................................... 518
Artificial Lift analysis thermal data .......................................................... 138
basic steps ............................................................ 212 TPRINT Table printing .......................................... 726
creating curves ..................................................... 213 black oil .................................................................... 125
performance curves .............................................. 204
BLACK OIL DATA keyword ...................................... 717
Asphaltene ............................................................... 544
BLACKOIL keyword ................................................. 717
ASSIGN keyword ..................................................... 753
Boundary conditions ........................................... 41, 116
Bracketing ................................................................ 215
B
Branch ........................................................................ 37
Babu and Odeh .......................................................... 55
BRANCH keyword .................................................... 764
Back Pressure equation
Brauner and Ullman correlation ................................ 548
4 point test .............................................................. 60
BACKPRES keyword ............................................ 662 Brill and Minami ........................................................ 365
data required ........................................................... 60 Brinkman correlation ................................................ 548
details ................................................................... 391 Bubble point
Batch mode .............................................................. 261 correction .............................................................. 403
Beggs and Brill ......................................................... 365 solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 500
Beggs and Robinson Bubble point
Dead oil viscosity .................................................. 508 calibration data ..................................................... 135
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511
BEGIN keyword ........................................................ 629 C
CALIBRATE keyword ............................................... 726

779
PIPESIM User Guide

Calibration COMPLETION keyword ........................................... 647

bubble point calibration data ................................. 135 Completion options ..................................................... 66
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 504 Compositional
CASE/ENDCASE keyword ....................................... 750 flashing ................................................................. 163
CASE keyword ......................................................... 603 fluid modeling ........................................................ 139
Casing importing composition ........................................... 147
standard sizes ....................................................... 557 petroleum fraction specification ............................ 738
Casing head pressure .............................................. 203 property models .................................................... 143
selecting components ........................................... 141
CEMULSION keyword .............................................. 730
specifying composition .......................................... 147
Character Input ......................................................... 598
template ................................................................ 139
Check model ............................................................ 194 viscosity models for compositional fluids .............. 543
Chew and Connally Compositional
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511 fluid: AQUEOUS keyword ..................................... 730
Choke fluid: LIBRARY keyword ....................................... 737
Achong critical flow correlation ............................. 440 fluid: MODEL keyword .......................................... 737
API 14–B subcritical flow correlation .................... 436 fluid specification .................................................. 733
Ashford and Pierce critical flow correlation ........... 440 COMPOSITIONAL DATA keyword .................. 730, 739
Ashford and Pierce critical pressure ratio ............. 439
compositional fluid .................................................... 125
Ashford and Pierce subcritical flow correlation ..... 436
COMPOSITION keyword ......................................... 733
Baxendall critical flow correlation .......................... 440
critical flow correlations ......................................... 440 Compressor
critical pressure ratio ............................................. 439 curve ............................................................. 184, 185
Gilbert critical flow correlation ............................... 440 entering details ....................................................... 89
Mechanistic critical flow correlation ...................... 440 reciprocating ......................................................... 185
Mechanistic subcritical flow correlation ................. 436 theory .................................................................... 445
Omana critical flow correlation .............................. 440 user curves ........................................................... 186
Pilehvari critical flow correlation ............................ 440 COMPRESSOR keyword ......................................... 677
Poetmann-Beck critical flow correlation ................ 440 condensate pipeline
Ros critical flow correlation ................................... 440 tutorial ................................................................... 265
Sachdeva critical flow correlation ......................... 440 Conduction shape factor .......................................... 491
subcritical flow correlations ................................... 436 CONETAB keyword .................................................. 661
theory .................................................................... 433
CONFIG keyword ..................................................... 714
user-defined critical flow correlation ..................... 441
Coning ...................................................................... 432
CHOKE keyword ...................................................... 671
Coning Relationship Tabulation ............................... 661
Clear Dictionary ........................................................ 257
CONTAMINANTS keyword ...................................... 728
Coating ..................................................................... 709
Convective heat transfer .......................................... 711
COAT keyword ......................................................... 709
Conversion factors ................................................... 576
Coiled tubing .............................................................. 85
Copy ......................................................................... 253
Comment Statements ............................................... 598
Correlation
COMPCRV keyword ......................................... 676, 702

780
PIPESIM User Guide

black oil ................................................................. 132 Design method ......................................................... 217

comparison ........................................................... 120 Design Parameters (Gas lift) .................................... 222
matching ............................................................... 197 Detailed tubing model ................................................. 77
options .................................................................. 717
de Waard .................................................................. 378
selecting a flow correlation ................................... 118
Distributed Productivity Index Method ...................... 431
Corrosion .................................................................. 175
Drainage radius ........................................................ 569
CORROSION keyword ............................................. 634
Dry gas data entry .................................................... 127
corrosion model)
Duns and Ros ........................................................... 365
de Waard's equation ............................................. 378
Dynamic skin ............................................................ 406
CPA .................................................................. 528, 532
CPFLUID keyword .................................................... 725
E
Critical unloading gas rate ........................................ 201
E300 Flash ............................................................... 528
CSMA ....................................................................... 532
Editing ...................................................................... 631
Cubic Equations of State .......................................... 537
Elbows ...................................................................... 570
Cunliffe's Method ...................................................... 381
Electrical Submersible Pumps — see ESP ...... 234, 448
CVFMD keyword .............................................. 678, 703
Elsharkawy and Alikhan
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 510
D
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511
Damaged zone ........................................................... 57 undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 514
Darcy Emulsion viscosities ................................................. 144
data required ........................................................... 61
END keyword ........................................................... 629
equation ................................................................ 392
Energy equation ....................................................... 473
Data files .......................................................... 403, 598
Engine
Data files .......................................................... 403, 598
options .................................................................. 171
Data matching preferences ........................................................... 177
procedure .............................................................. 197
Engine Keyword Tool ................................................. 92
tutorial ................................................................... 330
Equations of State
DBR flash ................................................................. 528
components of cubic ............................................. 537
Dead oil viscosity ...................................................... 508 components of non-cubic ...................................... 542
Deepest Injection Point ............................................ 214 Equations of State — Cubic ..................................... 528
De Ghetto Equations of State — non-cubic ............................... 532
correlations ........................................................... 498
Equipment .................................................................. 97
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 509
EQUIPMENT keyword .............................................. 680
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 512
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 501 Erosion ..................................................................... 175
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 513 EROSION keyword .................................................. 634
Delimiters ................................................................. 595 ESP
Design ...................................................................... 226 curve ..................................................................... 184
data entry .............................................................. 187
Design Control (Gas lift) ........................................... 217

781
PIPESIM User Guide

overview ........................................................ 234, 448 comparison/matching ............................................ 197

selection/design .................................................... 188 defining ................................................................. 119
system components: pumps ......................... 235, 449 horizontal multiphase ............................................ 360
user curves ........................................................... 186 matching ............................................................... 197
EXCEL ...................................................................... 260 single phase .......................................................... 373
EXECUTE keyword .................................................. 632 Flow correlations
Expander valid horizontal combinations ................................ 641
curve ..................................................................... 185 valid vertical combinations .................................... 637
equations .............................................................. 455 vertical multiphase ................................................ 365
EXPANDER keyword ............................................ 682 vertical options ...................................................... 636
parameters .............................................................. 92 Flowing Conditions ................................................... 165
Expert mode ..................................... 260, 262, 590, 772 Flowline ...................................................................... 93
Explicit Subcodes ..................................................... 746 Flowrate .................................................................... 118
External PVT tables Flowrate Operator details ......................................... 110
see Fluid Property Tables ..................................... 160 Fluid
black oil calibration ............................................... 134
F black oil options .................................................... 134
Facilities ..................................................................... 89 calibration ............................................................. 132
calibration to match lab data ................................. 134
FCV keyword ............................................................ 648
compositional fluid modeling ................................. 139
Fetkovich ............................................................ 59, 389
fluid models dialog ................................................ 180
FETKOVICH keyword .............................................. 651 modeling ............................................................... 132
File conversion ........................................................... 32 property data ......................................................... 719
Find ............................................................................ 29 property table files ................................................ 547
First law of thermodynamics ..................................... 473 specific heat capacity data .................................... 725
Fittings typical values of properties ................................... 566
equations .............................................................. 442 viscosity models for compositional ....................... 543
FITTING keyword ................................................. 683 fluid files with same template of components ........... 132
Flash FLUID keyword ......................................................... 714
flash/separation .................................................... 150 Fluid model calibration ............................................. 136
Flashing Fluid Property Tables ............................................... 160
compositional ........................................................ 163 FMPUMP keyword ................................................... 684
in-line .................................................................... 164 Forchheimer equation ........................................ 62, 390
Flow .......................................................................... 643 FORCHHEIMER keyword ........................................ 668
Flow control valves FRACTURE keyword ............................................... 668
mechanistic theory ................................................ 441
Framo
purpose and how to add ....................................... 193
FRAMO2009 keyword .......................................... 684
Flow control valves ................................... 193, 441, 648 multiphase booster 1999 ...................................... 106
FLOW CORRELATION DATA keyword ................... 633 multiphase booster 2009 ...................................... 103
Flow correlations Friction ...................................................................... 119

782
PIPESIM User Guide

Friction and Holdup factors Gas phase contaminants .................................. 138, 728
Moody and AGA Friction factors ........................... 373 Gas reservoirs .......................................................... 386
Moody Friction factor ............................................ 374 Gas viscosity ............................................................ 518
Friction pressure drop gas well performance analysis
Cullender and Smith ............................................. 376 tutorial ................................................................... 300
Hazen-Williams ..................................................... 377
Gas wells .................................................................. 428
Panhandle A ......................................................... 377
General Data ............................................................ 601
Panhandle B ......................................................... 377
Weymouth ............................................................. 377 General Purpose Subcodes ..................................... 748
Generic Pump .......................................................... 184
G GERG ....................................................................... 532
Gas compressibility .................................................. 515 Glasø
Gas condensate reservoirs ...................................... 386 correlations ........................................................... 498
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 509
Gas condensate systems ......................................... 127
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 502
Gas lift
Glossary of symbols ................................................. 571
Annular Gas Pressure Design method ................. 233
Deepest Injection Point operation ......................... 214 GLR Matching .......................................................... 151
design ................................................................... 217 Govier and Aziz ........................................................ 365
design parameters ................................................ 222 Graphical reports ...................................................... 252
design procedure .................................................. 217 Gravel pack ................................................................ 57
Design Summary screen ...................................... 227 Gray .......................................................................... 365
diagnostics ............................................................ 230
Diagnostics operation ........................................... 229
H
Diagnostics operation data ................................... 230
Hagedorn and Brown ............................................... 365
injection valve ....................................................... 689
instability ............................................................... 231 HCORR keyword ...................................................... 640
in the riser ............................................................. 112 HEADER keyword .................................................... 602
Lift Gas Response Curves .................................... 216 Heat Balance ............................................................ 706
minimum data set ................................................. 226 Heat configuration data ............................................ 714
multiple injection ports in wells ............................. 686 HEATER keyword .................................................... 685
overview ................................................................ 213
Heat Exchanger .......................................................... 96
properties ................................................................ 81
HEAT keyword ......................................................... 706
rate vs Casing head pressure ............................... 203
safety factors ........................................................ 223 Heat transfer
setting injection points ............................................ 82 between flowline and ground ................................ 491
theory .................................................................... 231 between well and rock .......................................... 495
valve list ................................................................ 192 coefficient .............................................................. 474
valves ...................................................................... 82 conductive coefficient calculations ........................ 487
convective coefficient calculations ........................ 489
Gas lift
IFC correlations .................................................... 477
bracketing ............................................................. 215
input or calculate U ................................................. 98
GASLIFT keyword .................................................... 686

783
PIPESIM User Guide

options .................................................................. 170 I

wellbore .................................................................. 79 Ice prediction ............................................................ 547
Heat transfer IFPCRV keyword ...................................................... 658
pipe coat thermal conductivity .............................. 711
IFPPSSE keyword .................................................... 652
HEAT TRANSFER DATA keyword .......................... 706
IFPTAB keyword ...................................................... 660
Holdup factor ............................................................ 119
Inflow Performance Curve ........................................ 658
Holdup factors .......................................................... 373
Inflow performance relationships (IPRs)
Horizontal completion Fetkovich's equation ............................................. 389
data entry ................................................................ 53 Vogel's equation ................................................... 388
determining length .................................................. 52
Inflow Performance Relationships (IPRs)
IPR model ............................................................... 53
Back Pressure equation ........................................ 391
IPRs ...................................................................... 417
Back pressure equation data .................................. 60
length optimization ................................................ 201
Bubble point correction ......................................... 403
optimal length ....................................................... 201
data file ................................................................. 403
overview .................................................................. 51
Fetkovich's equation data ....................................... 59
properties options ................................................... 56
Forchheimer equation ........................................... 390
Horizontal completion Forchheimer equation data ..................................... 62
Inflow Performance options .................................. 662 horizontal completions .......................................... 417
Horizontal flow Jones' equation ..................................................... 390
correlation abbreviations ....................................... 641 Jones equation data ............................................... 59
Horizontal flow multilayer reservoir ................................................. 72
valid correlations ................................................... 641 Multi-rate data ......................................................... 63
Horizontal flow oil/water relative permeability ............................... 431
correlation options ................................................ 640 Productivity Index (PI) ........................................... 387
Horizontal gas wells ................................................. 428 Pseudo steady state/Darcy ................................... 392
solution gas-drive reservoirs ................................. 428
Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations .................. 360
summary for vertical completions ......................... 386
HORWELL keyword ................................................. 662
Transient IPR ........................................................ 397
Hossain Transient IPR data .................................................. 64
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 510 vertical completion .................................................. 57
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511 Vogel's equation data ............................................. 58
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 514
Inflow Performance Relationships (IPRs)
Hot Keys ..................................................................... 22 Pseudo steady state/Darcy data ............................. 61
HVOGEL keyword .................................................... 668 Inflow Performance Tabulation ................................. 660
Hydrate Inflow Production Profiles ......................................... 421
inhibitors ............................................................... 545
Injection performance ................................................. 87
model details ......................................................... 546
Injection Point ............................................................. 99
overview ................................................................ 545
sub-cooling calculation ......................................... 171 Injection well ......................................................... 39, 87
Hydraulic fracture ..................................................... 668 INJFLUID keyword ................................................... 691

784
PIPESIM User Guide

INJGAS keyword ...................................................... 691 live oil viscosity ..................................................... 512

INJPORT keyword .................................................... 689 undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 513
INLET keyword ......................................................... 618 Kouzel
Inlet pressure ............................................................ 117 undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 513

In-line flashing .......................................................... 164 Kreith ........................................................................ 480

Input data ................................................................. 595

L
Input files .......................................................... 595, 600
Laplace equation ...................................................... 492
Inside Film Coefficient method ................................. 171
Lasater
Inside Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient .............. 477
correlations ........................................................... 498
Inside forced convection ................................... 458, 479
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 503
IPRCRV keyword ..................................................... 658
LAYER keyword ....................................................... 664
IPR keyword ............................................................. 651
LBC .......................................................................... 543
IPR — see Inflow Performance
Lee method .............................................................. 518
Relationships (IPRs) ................................................. 428
Leviton and Leighton correlation .............................. 552
Iteration Data ............................................................ 616
Library components — cubic EoS ............................ 537
J Library components — non-cubic EoS ..................... 542

JOB keyword ............................................................ 603 LIBRARY keyword .................................................... 737

Jones data ................................................................ 652 Lift Gas Response Curves ....................................... 216

Jones equation ........................................................... 59 Limits ........................................................................ 556

Jones Equation ......................................................... 390 Liquid by sphere ....................................................... 383

JONES keyword ....................................................... 652 Liquid-gas surface tension ....................................... 553

Joshi ........................................................................... 53 Liquid holdup ............................................................ 383

JUNCTION keyword ................................................. 770 Liquid loading

displaying point ..................................................... 201
K equations .............................................................. 384
implementation ....................................................... 88
Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt
inclination angle ...................................................... 88
correlations ........................................................... 498
Liquid properties ....................................................... 548
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 509
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511 Liquid viscosity
Oil Formation Volume Factor ................................ 506 and oil/water emulsions ........................................ 548
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 502 correlations ........................................................... 548
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 513 data ....................................................................... 720
KCOAT keyword ....................................................... 711 Live oil viscosity ........................................................ 511
Keyword abbreviations ............................................. 596 Load Dictionary ........................................................ 257
Keywords .................................................................. 761 Local Fluid Data ....................................................... 131
KFLUID keyword ...................................................... 714 looped gas gathering network
case study ............................................................. 320
Khan

785
PIPESIM User Guide

LVIS keyword ........................................................... 720 N

NAPLOT keyword ..................................................... 740
M NAPOINT keyword ................................................... 744
Measured data ......................................................... 197 Network
Mechanical skin ........................................................ 405 constraints .............................................................. 42
MFL File ................................................................... 125 estimates ................................................................ 42
Minimum data set (Gas lift) ...................................... 226 iterations ............................................................... 179
Mixing (Black oil) ...................................................... 521 separator ................................................................. 38
Model building ............................................................ 33 Network models .......................................................... 35
modeling ................................................................... 160 Network Option Control ............................................ 174
Modeling systems ..................................................... 126 Network Report tool .................................................. 258
Modeling wells ............................................................ 87 Network source .......................................................... 35
MODEL keyword ...................................................... 737 NIST recommendation for pure fluid / mixture .......... 532
MOODYCALC keyword ............................................ 645 Nodal Analysis
performing ............................................................. 199
MPBOOSTER keyword ............................................ 694
point ........................................................................ 86
Mukherjee and Brill ................................................... 365
Nodal Analysis
MULTICASE keyword ...................................... 745, 750
NAPLOT keyword ................................................. 740
Multiflash .......................................................... 528, 532 NAPOINT keyword ............................................... 744
multiflash models ...................................................... 153 NODE keyword ......................................................... 696
Multilayer reservoir ..................................................... 72 Non-cubic Equations of State ................................... 542
Multiphase ................................................................ 365 NOPRINT keyword ................................................... 629
Multiphase booster NOSLIP .................................................................... 365
efficiencies tables ................................................. 472
NSEPARATOR keyword .......................................... 771
Framo 1999 .......................................................... 106
Numeric data ............................................................ 597
Framo 2009 .......................................................... 103
generic .................................................................. 100
twin screw boosters .............................................. 101 O
Multiphase pump Oil/water emulsions .................................................. 548
MPUMP keyword .................................................. 695 Oil/water relative permeability .................................. 431
vendor performance curve format ......................... 108 Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF)
Multiple case ............................................................ 751 defined .................................................................. 505
Multiple completion well ............................................. 88 saturated systems ................................................. 505
undersaturated systems ....................................... 506
Multiple injection ports .............................................. 686
Oil reservoirs ............................................................ 386
multiple MFL files ..................................................... 153
Oil viscosity
Multiple Value Data Sets .......................................... 598
black oil ................................................................. 507
Multi-rate .................................................................... 63
undersaturated ...................................................... 512
Multi-stage separation .............................................. 150
oil well performance analysis

786
PIPESIM User Guide

tutorial ................................................................... 282 Phase Behavior package ......................................... 140

OLGAS ..................................................................... 365 Phase envelope ........................................................ 147
Open Link ................................................................. 777 PI
Operations ................................................................ 740 data required ........................................................... 58
OPTIMIZE keyword .................................................. 754 equations .............................................................. 387

optimzing PIPESIM network simulation Pipe coating ...................................................... 709, 710

performance tutorial ................................................... 43 Pipe dimensions ....................................................... 698
Options ..................................................................... 181 pipe inline heating
OPTIONS keyword ................................................... 604 tutorial ..........................................................................
Orkiszewski .............................................................. 365 PIPE keyword ........................................................... 698
Outlet pressure ......................................................... 117 Pipeline
Output options .......................................................... 172 burial ..................................................................... 716
burial method ........................................................ 170
P operations ............................................................... 89
pipeline and facilities model .................................... 89
Parallelized Network
selecting size .......................................................... 85
solver .................................................................... 179
standard sizes ....................................................... 562
Parameters ............................................................... 602 tools ........................................................................ 89
Paths used by tools .................................................. 169 PLOTFILEDATA keyword ........................................ 632
PCP PLOT keyword .......................................................... 626
data entry .............................................................. 191
Plotting options ......................................................... 626
standard curves .................................................... 190
Pressure ................................................................... 117
PCP curve ................................................................ 189
Pressure/Temperature profile ................................... 196
Pedersen .................................................................. 543
Pressure drop
Peng-Robinson ......................................................... 528
effect on productivity ............................................. 417
Perforation .................................................................. 57 for gas ................................................................... 377
PERMCRV keyword ................................................. 666 multiphase ............................................................ 421
Permeability .............................................................. 569 single phase .......................................................... 420
PERMTAB keyword .................................................. 667 Principle of conservation of energy .......................... 473
PETROFRAC keyword ............................................. 738 Print .......................................................................... 253
Petroleum fractions PRINT keyword ........................................................ 619
for Cubic Equations of State ................................. 542 Production well ........................................................... 38
setting up .............................................................. 141 Progressive cavity pump — see PCP ...................... 452
Petrosky and Farshad Project Data .............................................................. 169
correlations ........................................................... 498
Property calibration .................................................. 726
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 510
PROP keyword ......................................................... 719
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 511
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 503 Pseudo steady state
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 514 data for equation ................................................... 652
equation and data ................................................... 61

787
PIPESIM User Guide

IPR ........................................................................ 392 simulation data ...................................................... 752

productivity ............................................................ 425 tables .................................................................... 201
PS-PLOT keyword .................................................... 751 RESERVOIR keyword .............................................. 666
PsPlot utility .............................................................. 252 Restart Model ........................................................... 211
Pump Richardson correlation ............................................. 548
curve ..................................................................... 184 Riser Details ............................................................. 110
entering parameters .............................................. 115 Rod pump
user curves ........................................................... 186 module .................................................................. 238
PUMPCRV keyword ......................................... 676, 702 RODPUMP keyword ......................................... 678, 703
PUMP keyword ......................................................... 700 Roughness ............................................................... 567
PUSH keyword ......................................................... 631 Run Model ................................................................ 194
PVT File ............................................................ 125, 149 Running multiple models .......................................... 262
PVT File ............................................................ 125, 149
S
Q Safety factors (Gas lift) ............................................. 223
Quality lines .............................................................. 149 Salinity ...................................................................... 151
Salt Analysis ............................................................. 151
R
sand modeling .......................................................... 160
Ramey model ........................................................... 495
scale prediction ........................................................ 162
RATE keyword ................................................. 614, 728
Schlumberger DBR Method ..................................... 209
Reciprocating compressor
Sensitivity variables .................................................. 210
adding to database or model .................................. 91
Separation (flash) ..................................................... 150
entering details ....................................................... 91
Separator
Reciprocating compressor
overview .................................................................. 38
overview ................................................................ 448
properties .............................................................. 114
Red box (missing data) .............................................. 34
SEPARATOR keyword ............................................. 705
References ............................................................... 577
SETUP keyword ....................................................... 762
REFPROP ................................................................ 532
Shape factor ............................................................... 61
REINJECTOR keyword ............................................ 703
Simple profile model ................................................... 75
Relative permeability ................................................ 431
Single phase flow ..................................................... 643
Remedial coiled tubing ............................................... 85
Single phase flow correlations .................................. 373
Remote action editing ............................................... 631
Single phase gas critical pressure ratio .................... 439
Report ....................................................................... 258
Sink ............................................................................ 36
Reports ..................................................................... 252
SINK keyword ........................................................... 769
Report Tool ....................................................... 113, 257
Sizing tubing and pipelines ......................................... 85
Reservoir
Skin factor
creating look-up tables .......................................... 202
completion options .................................................. 66
layer properties ..................................................... 664
damaged zone ...................................................... 409

788
PIPESIM User Guide

deviation ............................................................... 408 black oil ................................................................. 518

equations .............................................................. 405 liquid gas ............................................................... 553
Frac pack .............................................................. 414 water-gas .............................................................. 519
gravel pack ........................................................... 409 Swap angle ............................................................... 378
in horizontal completion .......................................... 57 Symbols glossary ..................................................... 571
partial penetration ................................................. 408
System analysis ....................................................... 195
perforated well ...................................................... 411
SYSTEM DATA keyword .......................................... 670
Pseudo Steady State equation ............................... 62
Transient IPR data .................................................. 66 System Profile .......................................................... 602

Slug .......................................................................... 636

T
Slug calculation ........................................................ 635
TABLE keyword ........................................................ 752
Slug catcher ............................................................. 636
TCOAT keyword ....................................................... 710
SLUG keyword ......................................................... 635
Tees ......................................................................... 571
Soave-Redlich-Kwong .............................................. 528
Temperature profile .................................................. 196
solids appearance .................................................... 161
Terminate Run .......................................................... 195
solids modeling
sand modeling ...................................................... 160 Thermal conductivities .............................................. 567
scale prediction ..................................................... 162 Thermal conductivity ................................................ 714
solids appearance ................................................. 161 Thermal data (black oil) ............................................ 138
wax modeling ........................................................ 161 Third party applications ............................................ 778
Solution gas-oil ratio ................................................. 500 TIME ......................................................................... 755
Source ...................................................................... 116 Tolerance equations ................................................. 556
SOURCE keyword .................................................... 766 Toolbox ....................................................................... 24
SPHASE keyword .................................................... 643 TPRINT keyword .............................................. 726, 739
Standard curves ....................................................... 190 TPRINT keyword .............................................. 726, 739
Standing Transient IPR
correlations ........................................................... 498 data ......................................................................... 64
Oil Formation Volume Factor ................................ 505 equations .............................................................. 397
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 503 TRANSIENT keyword ............................................... 669
Statements ............................................................... 595 Tubing
Steady State Heat Transfer ...................................... 474 coiled tubing/velocity string ..................................... 85
Steady-State productivity ......................................... 422 detailed profile model .............................................. 77
Steam ....................................................................... 165 selecting size .......................................................... 85
Stock tank conditions ............................................... 165 standard sizes ....................................................... 557
summary table ........................................................ 80
Stock tank properties ................................................ 134
tool .......................................................................... 74
Suggested flow correlations ............................. 120, 371
Turner's equation ...................................................... 384
Suggested flow correlations ............................. 120, 371
tutorials ..................................................................... 264
Summary tubing table ................................................ 80
Twin screw boosters ................................................. 101
Surface tension

789
PIPESIM User Guide

Twin screw pumps .................................................... 108 Viscosity

Typical values ........................................................... 566 dead oil ................................................................. 508
emulsion ............................................................... 144
U models for compositional fluids ............................. 543
Undersaturated oil viscosity ..................................... 512 Vogel
equation ................................................................ 388
Units
equation data .......................................................... 58
description string ................................................... 597
VOGEL keyword ................................................... 651
selecting a set ....................................................... 169
UNITS keyword ..................................................... 603 Vogel IPR ................................................................. 392
User curves .............................................................. 186 Volume ratio ............................................................. 548
userdll.dat ................................................................. 123
W
USERDLL keyword .......................................... 633, 645
Water-gas surface tension ....................................... 519
USERDLL keyword .......................................... 633, 645
Water systems .......................................................... 126
User variable ............................................................ 211
Wax
U Value Multiplier ..................................................... 171
BP method and deposition limits .......................... 207
deposition ............................................................. 205
V
deposition models ................................................. 554
Valve overview ................................................................ 547
database ............................................................... 192 Shell method and deposition limits ....................... 206
FITTING keyword ................................................. 683
WAX keyword ........................................................... 755
typical values ........................................................ 569
wax modeling ........................................................... 161
valves ....................................................................... 648
WCOPTION keyword ............................................... 654
Vand correlations ..................................................... 548
Well
Vasquez and Beggs
completion data .................................................... 654
correlations ........................................................... 498
horizontal completion .............................................. 51
Oil Formation Volume Factor ................................ 506
optimization ........................................................... 212
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 504
performance curves .............................................. 203
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 513
Wellbore
VCORR keyword ...................................................... 636
heat transfer between well and rock ..................... 495
Vertical completion heat transfer in ........................................................ 79
data required ........................................................... 57
Well Curves ................................................................ 40
IPRs ...................................................................... 386
WELLHEAD keyword ............................................... 706
Vertical flow
Well Performance analysis ......................................... 50
correlation abbreviations ....................................... 638
valid correlations ................................................... 637 WELL PERFORMANCE MODELING keyword ........ 645
VCORR keyword .................................................. 636 WELLPI keyword ...................................................... 650
Vertical flow Well Productivity ....................................................... 650
multiphase flow correlations ................................. 365 Wizard ........................................................................ 28
View options ............................................................. 181 Woelflin correlation ................................................... 548

790
PIPESIM User Guide

WPCURVE keyword ................................................. 651

791